Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Gunnery FM 3-20.21

FM 3-20.21 MCWP 3-12.2

Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Gunnery

September 2009

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION. Distribution authorized to US Government agencies and their contractors only to protect technical or operational information that is for official government use. This determination was made on 5 January 2007. Other requests for this document must be referred to Director, Directorate of Training, Doctrine, Combat Development, and Experimentation (DTDCD-E), ATTN: ATZK-TDD-G, 204 1st Cavalry Regiment Road Ste 216, U.S. Army Armor Center, Fort Knox, KY 40121-5123. DESTRUCTION NOTICE. Destroy by any method that prevents disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.

Headquarters, Department of the Army

This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online (www.us.army.mil) and General Dennis J. Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library at (www.train.army.mil).

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1 Change 1

Headquarters Department of the Army Washington, DC, 31 May 2010

Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Gunnery 1. Change FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, 3 September 2009, as follows: Remove old pages: Insert new pages: 7-17 and 7-18 ...................................................... 7-17 and 7-18 A-15 and A-16 ..................................................... A-15 and A-16 A-19 and A-20 ..................................................... A-19 and A-20 A-37 and A-38 ..................................................... A-37 and A-38 A-45 and A-46 ..................................................... A-45 and A-46 A-49 and A-50 ..................................................... A-49 and A-50 A-57 and A-60 ..................................................... A-57 and A-60 A-63 and A-64 ..................................................... A-63 and A-64 A-93 and A-94 ..................................................... A-93 and A-94 A-97 and A-100 ................................................... A-97 and A-100 A-123 and A-124 ................................................. A-123 and A-124 B-65 and B-66 ..................................................... B-65 and B-66 2. A star (*) marks new or changed material. 3. File this transmission sheet in front of the publication. DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Distribution authorized to US Government agencies and their contractors only to protect technical or operational information that is for official government use. This determination was made on 5 January 2007. Other requests for this document must be referred to Director, Directorate of Training, Doctrine, Combat Development, and Experimentation (DTDCD-E), ATTN: ATZK-TDD-G, 204 1st Cavalry Regiment Road Ste 216, U.S. Army Armor Center, Fort Knox, KY 40121-5123. DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that prevents disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army: GEORGE W. CASEY, JR. General, United States Army Chief of Staff Official:

JOYCE E. MORROW Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 1013106 DISTRIBUTION: Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: To be distributed in accordance with initial distribution number (IDN) 110469, requirements for FM 3-20.21.

PIN: 085783-001

This page intentionally left blank.

*FM 3-20.21 Headquarters Department of the Army Washington, DC

Field Manual No. 3-20.21 Marine Corps Warfighting Publication No. 3-12.2

Headquarters Marine Corps Development Command Department of the Navy Headquarters United States Marine Corps Washington, DC 3 September 2009

Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Gunnery Contents Page

PREFACE ..........................................................................................................xxx Chapter 1

Introduction ....................................................................................................... 1-1 Section I – Purpose .......................................................................................... 1-1 Section II – Scope ............................................................................................. 1-2 Section III – General Changes ......................................................................... 1-2 Chapters ............................................................................................................. 1-3 Appendices ......................................................................................................... 1-7

Chapter 2

Platform Systems Characteristics .................................................................. 2-1 Section I – Abrams Systems ........................................................................... 2-1 M1A1 Model ....................................................................................................... 2-2 M1A1 AIM Model ................................................................................................ 2-2 M1A1 AIM SA Model .......................................................................................... 2-4 M1A2 SEP Model ............................................................................................... 2-5 M1A2 SEP V2 (Version 2) Model ....................................................................... 2-7

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION. Distribution authorized to US Government agencies and their contractors only to protect technical or operational information that is for official government use. This determination was made on 5 January 2007. Other requests for this document must be referred to Director, Directorate of Training, Doctrine, Combat Development, and Experimentation (DTDCD-E), ATTN: ATZK-TDD-G, 204 1st Cavalry Regiment Road Ste 216, U.S. Army Armor Center, Fort Knox, KY 40121-5123. DESTRUCTION NOTICE. Destroy by any method that prevents disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document. *This publication supersedes FM 3-20.8, Scout Gunnery, 15 August 2005; FM 3-20.12, Tank Gunnery (Abrams), 15 August 2005; FM 3-22.1 Bradley Gunnery, 28 November 2003; and FM 17-12-7, Tank Gunnery Devices and Usage Strategies, 1 May 2000. i

Contents

Section II – Bradley Fighting Vehicle Systems .............................................. 2-9 M2A2 and M3A2 Models................................................................................... 2-10 M2A2 ODS and M3A2 ODS Models ................................................................. 2-10 M2A3 and M3A3 Models................................................................................... 2-11 M7 Bradley Fire Support Team ......................................................................... 2-14 Section III – Guardian Armored Security Vehicle (M1117) .......................... 2-14 Section IV – Armed HMMWV Systems .......................................................... 2-16 M1025A2/M1026A1 Armed HMMWV Model .................................................... 2-16 M1114 Up-Armored Armed HMMWV Model .................................................... 2-17 M1151 Enhanced Up-Armored Armed HMMWV Model ................................... 2-17 Section V – M1064A3 Self-Propelled 120-mm Mortar Carrier ..................... 2-18 Chapter 3

Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities ......................................................... 3-1 Section I – Automatic Machine Guns .............................................................. 3-1 M231 5.56-mm Firing Port Weapon .................................................................... 3-1 M249 Squad Automatic Weapon ........................................................................ 3-2 M240 Machine Gun Series ................................................................................. 3-4 M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun ........................................................................ 3-6 MK19 MOD3 40-mm Grenade Machine Gun ..................................................... 3-7 Section II – M242 25-mm Automatic Gun ....................................................... 3-8 M242 25-mm Automatic Gun .............................................................................. 3-8 Enhanced 25-mm Gun ........................................................................................ 3-9 Section III – M256 120-mm Smoothbore Cannon ........................................... 3-9 Functional Components of the Gun Tube and Breech ..................................... 3-10 Components of the Recoil System ................................................................... 3-12 Section IV – M121 120-mm Mortar ................................................................. 3-12 Section V – Smoke Grenade Launchers ....................................................... 3-14 M250 Smoke Grenade Launcher ...................................................................... 3-14 M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher ...................................................................... 3-14 Section VI – TOW ............................................................................................ 3-16

Chapter 4

Ammunition ....................................................................................................... 4-1 Section I – Ammunition Terminology ............................................................. 4-2 Markings and Symbols........................................................................................ 4-2 Ammunition Lot Numbers ................................................................................... 4-4 Department of Defense Codes ........................................................................... 4-6 Color Coding ....................................................................................................... 4-8 Section II – Machine Gun Ammunition ......................................................... 4-10 Packaging ......................................................................................................... 4-10 M249 5.56-mm Machine Gun Ammunition ....................................................... 4-12 M240 7.62-mm Machine Gun Ammunition ....................................................... 4-15 M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun Ammunition .................................................. 4-17 Section III – 25-mm Bradley Fighting Vehicle Ammunition ........................ 4-20 Classification ..................................................................................................... 4-20 Identification ...................................................................................................... 4-20 Service Ammunition .......................................................................................... 4-21 Target Practice Ammunition.............................................................................. 4-29

ii

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Safety Information ............................................................................................ 4-31 Section IV – MK19 Mod 3, 40-mm Grenade Machine Gun .......................... 4-32 Service Ammunition.......................................................................................... 4-34 Training Ammunition......................................................................................... 4-35 Section V – 120-mm Abrams Tank Ammunition ......................................... 4-38 Classification .................................................................................................... 4-39 Identification ..................................................................................................... 4-39 Service Ammunition.......................................................................................... 4-42 Target Practice Ammunition ............................................................................. 4-51 Safety Information ............................................................................................ 4-53 Section VI – Mortar Ammunition ................................................................... 4-58 Classification .................................................................................................... 4-58 Authorized Cartridges ....................................................................................... 4-58 Service Ammunition.......................................................................................... 4-59 Target Practice Ammunition ............................................................................. 4-62 Fuzes ................................................................................................................ 4-63 Mortar Safety Information ................................................................................. 4-67 Section VII – Smoke Grenades...................................................................... 4-68 Section VIII – Missiles .................................................................................... 4-72 TOW Missile Ammunition ................................................................................. 4-72 Javelin Antitank Guided Missile........................................................................ 4-93 Safety Information ............................................................................................ 4-97 Section IX – Planning Considerations.......................................................... 4-98 Section X – Safety ........................................................................................ 4-103 Chapter 5

Detect ................................................................................................................. 5-1 Section I – Engagement Process .................................................................... 5-1 Section II – Detect............................................................................................. 5-2 Crew Search ....................................................................................................... 5-2 Sectors of Responsibility .................................................................................... 5-3 Target Detection ................................................................................................. 5-5 Target Location................................................................................................... 5-7 Search Techniques ............................................................................................ 5-9 Ground and Air Search Tips ............................................................................. 5-15

Chapter 6

Identify ............................................................................................................... 6-1 Section I – Classification ................................................................................. 6-1 Section II – Identification ................................................................................. 6-2 Ground Vehicle ................................................................................................... 6-2 Aircraft Vehicle Identification .............................................................................. 6-9 Section III – Discrimination ........................................................................... 6-13 Discrimination Definitions ................................................................................. 6-13 Joint Combat Identification Marking Systems .................................................. 6-13

Chapter 7

Decide ................................................................................................................ 7-1 Section I – Target Determination .................................................................... 7-1 Threat Levels ...................................................................................................... 7-2

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

iii

Contents

Target Prioritization ............................................................................................. 7-2 Weapon/Ammunition Selection ........................................................................... 7-3 Target Confirmation ............................................................................................ 7-4 Section II – Immediate Range Determination ................................................. 7-5 Immediate Determination .................................................................................... 7-5 Laser Range Finder ............................................................................................ 7-5 Section III – Deliberate Range Determination .............................................. 7-11 Mil Relationship Method.................................................................................... 7-11 Maps/Digital Maps Method ............................................................................... 7-17 Chapter 8

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew) ..................................................... 8-1 Section I – Battlecarry ...................................................................................... 8-2 Prepare for Contact ............................................................................................. 8-2 Section II – Fire Commands ............................................................................. 8-8 Fire Commands Categories .............................................................................. 8-17 Fire Command Terms ....................................................................................... 8-22 Subsequent Fire Commands ............................................................................ 8-26 Multiple Engagements ...................................................................................... 8-29 Section III – Engagement Techniques .......................................................... 8-32 Employing Vehicle Machine Guns .................................................................... 8-33 Engage Soft Targets ......................................................................................... 8-33 Section IV – Sample Fire Commands ........................................................... 8-43 Section V – Indirect Fire ................................................................................. 8-65 Call for Fire........................................................................................................ 8-65 Adjusting Fires .................................................................................................. 8-74

Chapter 9

Engage – Collective .......................................................................................... 9-1 Section I – Section, Platoon, and Company Fire Control ............................. 9-2 Principles of Fire Control..................................................................................... 9-2 Fire Control Measures ........................................................................................ 9-3 Section II – Direct Fire Planning and Execution .......................................... 9-13 Direct Fire Planning .......................................................................................... 9-13 Company/Platoon/Section Fire Commands...................................................... 9-14 Section III – Indirect Fire Planning and Execution ...................................... 9-18 Indirect Fire Planning ........................................................................................ 9-18 Indirect Fire Team ............................................................................................. 9-19 Fire Planning ..................................................................................................... 9-19 Fire Support Planning for Offensive Operations ............................................... 9-20 Fire Support Planning for Defensive Operations .............................................. 9-21 Target Attack ..................................................................................................... 9-26

Chapter 10

Assess.............................................................................................................. 10-1 Section I – Engagement Termination ............................................................ 10-2 Section II – Engagement Assessment .......................................................... 10-2 Direct Fire Engagement Assessment ............................................................... 10-2 Indirect Fire Engagement Assessment ............................................................. 10-3 Section III – Reports ....................................................................................... 10-4

iv

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Chapter 11

Training Devices ............................................................................................. 11-1 Section I – TADSS Overview ......................................................................... 11-1 Section II – Common TADSS ......................................................................... 11-3 Training Aids ..................................................................................................... 11-3 Devices ............................................................................................................. 11-8 Simulators and Simulations .............................................................................. 11-9 Section III – Abrams TADSS ........................................................................ 11-16 Training Aids ................................................................................................... 11-16 Devices ........................................................................................................... 11-19 Simulators and Simulations ............................................................................ 11-20 Section IV – Bradley TADSS ........................................................................ 11-23 Training Aids ................................................................................................... 11-23 Devices ........................................................................................................... 11-25 Simulators and Simulations ............................................................................ 11-26 Section V – Armed HMMWV TADSS ........................................................... 11-29 Training Aids ................................................................................................... 11-29 Simulators and Simulations ............................................................................ 11-31

Chapter 12

Gunnery Training Program ............................................................................ 12-1 Section I – Training Assessment .................................................................. 12-2 Essential Warfighting Skills .............................................................................. 12-2 Battle Focus ...................................................................................................... 12-2 Mission-Essential Task List .............................................................................. 12-3 Commander’s Assessment .............................................................................. 12-3 Section II – Training Strategy ........................................................................ 12-4 Gunnery Tables ................................................................................................ 12-4 Individual Gunnery Phase ................................................................................ 12-5 Crew Gunnery Phase ....................................................................................... 12-7 Collective Gunnery Phase ................................................................................ 12-8 Cross-Training Strategy ................................................................................... 12-9 Integrated Training Strategy ............................................................................. 12-9 Section III – Commander’s Guidance ......................................................... 12-17 Training Goals ................................................................................................ 12-17 Training Requirements ................................................................................... 12-17 Section IV – Training Plans ......................................................................... 12-18 Gunnery Training ............................................................................................ 12-18 Long-Range Training Plans............................................................................ 12-20 Short-Range Training Plans ........................................................................... 12-21 Near-Term Training Plans .............................................................................. 12-22

Chapter 13

Range Operations........................................................................................... 13-1 Section I – Planning Range Operations ....................................................... 13-1 Planning Gunnery Exercises ............................................................................ 13-1 Commander’s Intent ......................................................................................... 13-2 Developing Scenarios for Collective Gunnery Tables .................................... 13-15 Planning for Range Operations ...................................................................... 13-20 Section II – Conducting Range Operations ............................................... 13-24

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

v

Contents

Opening the Range and Occupying the Training Site .................................... 13-24 During the Exercise ......................................................................................... 13-25 Closing the Range .......................................................................................... 13-25 Administration and Emergency Directions ...................................................... 13-26 Section III – Digital Range Set Up................................................................ 13-27 Data Sets ........................................................................................................ 13-27 Range Overlay ................................................................................................ 13-27 Digital Base Station ......................................................................................... 13-28 Rehearsal ........................................................................................................ 13-28 Icon Management ........................................................................................... 13-28 Chapter 14

Individual and Crew Live-Fire Prerequisite Training ................................... 14-1 Section I – Gunnery Skills Test ..................................................................... 14-1 Requirements .................................................................................................... 14-1 Safety Precautions ............................................................................................ 14-2 Evaluation Procedures ...................................................................................... 14-2 Planning Considerations ................................................................................... 14-3 Conduct of the Gunnery Skills Test .................................................................. 14-5 Test Stations ..................................................................................................... 14-6 Section II – Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test ............................ 14-10 Requirements .................................................................................................. 14-10 Safety Precautions .......................................................................................... 14-10 Evaluation Procedures .................................................................................... 14-10 Planning Considerations ................................................................................. 14-12 Conduct of Gunnery Table I ............................................................................ 14-13 Test Stations ................................................................................................... 14-13

Chapter 15

Crew Evaluation .............................................................................................. 15-1 Section I – Vehicle Crew Evaluators ............................................................. 15-2 Evaluator Team Composition............................................................................ 15-2 Evaluator Roles and Prerequisites ................................................................... 15-3 Duties ................................................................................................................ 15-4 Vehicle Crew Evaluators Certification............................................................... 15-5 Section II – Engagement Task, Conditions, and Standards ....................... 15-6 Evaluation Terms and Concepts ....................................................................... 15-6 Section III – Firing Occasion and Timing Events....................................... 15-10 Target Exposure Time .................................................................................... 15-10 Vehicle Exposure Time ................................................................................... 15-11 Offensive, Short Halt, or Retrograde Engagements ....................................... 15-11 Defensive Engagements ................................................................................. 15-12 Exposure Break Times.................................................................................... 15-14 Section IV – Evaluating the Crew’s Duties ................................................. 15-19 Immediate Disqualification—Extremely Hazardous Conduct ......................... 15-19 Automatic Zero-Point Penalty—Critical Crew Tasks—Not Adhering to Task, Conditions, and Standards.............................................................................. 15-19 30-Point Penalty—Safety/Personnel Protection ............................................. 15-20 5-Point Penalty—Leader or Fundamental Crew Tasks .................................. 15-20

vi

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Section V – Common Crew Scoresheet ..................................................... 15-22 Section VI – Crew Qualification Standards................................................ 15-26 Individual Gunnery Phase .............................................................................. 15-26 Crew Gunnery Phase ..................................................................................... 15-26 Qualification Re-Fires ..................................................................................... 15-26 Section VII – “Call For” Engagements ....................................................... 15-27 Section VIII – After Action Reviews ............................................................ 15-27 Planning the AARs ......................................................................................... 15-27 Preparing for the AARs .................................................................................. 15-28 Conducting the AARs ..................................................................................... 15-28 Matrix Examples ............................................................................................. 15-29 Chapter 16

Stabilized Platform Gunnery ......................................................................... 16-1 Section I – Requirements .............................................................................. 16-1 Gunnery Tables ................................................................................................ 16-1 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 16-3 Engagement Tasks........................................................................................... 16-4 Minimum Proficiency Levels ............................................................................. 16-7 Digital Gunnery ................................................................................................. 16-9 Scenario Requirements .................................................................................... 16-9 Developing Scenarios for Crew Gunnery Tables ............................................. 16-9 Section II – Gunnery Instruction and Live-Fire Prerequisites.................. 16-10 Common Instruction ....................................................................................... 16-10 Gunnery Table I .............................................................................................. 16-12 Gunnery Table II, Crew Practice Course ....................................................... 16-13 Section III – Crew Gunnery .......................................................................... 16-15 Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun .......................................................... 16-15 Gunnery Table IV, Basic Main Gun ................................................................ 16-17 Gunnery Table III/IV, Basic Machine Gun and Main Gun (GT 34)................. 16-19 Gunnery Table V, Crew Practice .................................................................... 16-21 Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification ............................................................ 16-23 Crew Ratings .................................................................................................. 16-23 Section IV – Example Gunnery Table VI..................................................... 16-25

Chapter 17

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery ..................................................................... 17-1 Section I – Gunnery Training Program......................................................... 17-2 Section II – Requirements ............................................................................. 17-3 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 17-3 Minimum Proficiency Levels ............................................................................. 17-3 Digital Gunnery ................................................................................................. 17-5 Scenario Requirements .................................................................................... 17-5 Developing Scenarios for Crew Gunnery Tables ............................................. 17-6 Section III – Unstabilized Platform Gunnery ................................................ 17-9 Common Instruction ......................................................................................... 17-9 Gunnery Table I, Critical Crew Skills .............................................................. 17-11 Gunnery Table II, CPC ................................................................................... 17-13 Section IV – Crew Gunnery ......................................................................... 17-15

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

vii

Contents

Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun ........................................................... 17-15 Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun ........................................ 17-18 Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice .......................................................... 17-21 Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course ................................................ 17-24 Chapter 18

Collective Gunnery ......................................................................................... 18-1 Section I – Evaluation ..................................................................................... 18-1 Concept ............................................................................................................. 18-1 Collective Task Scoring Model ......................................................................... 18-2 Evaluation Team ............................................................................................... 18-6 General Requirements ...................................................................................... 18-6 Minimum Proficiency Levels ............................................................................. 18-9 Digital Requirements......................................................................................... 18-9 Call for Fire Requirements ................................................................................ 18-9 Prerequisites ................................................................................................... 18-10 Section II – Section Gunnery ....................................................................... 18-11 Table VII–Section Proficiency Exercise .......................................................... 18-11 Table VIII–Section Practice............................................................................. 18-12 Table IX–Section Qualification ........................................................................ 18-13 Section III – Platoon Gunnery ...................................................................... 18-15 Table X–Platoon Proficiency Exercise ............................................................ 18-15 Table XI–Platoon Practice .............................................................................. 18-16 Table XII–Platoon Qualification....................................................................... 18-17

Chapter 19

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise .............................................................. 19-1 Section I – Conduct of the Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise................. 19-1 Concept ............................................................................................................. 19-1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 19-2 Training Philosophy .......................................................................................... 19-2 Section II – Planning Guidelines ................................................................... 19-2 Weapon System Considerations ...................................................................... 19-3 Personnel Requirements ................................................................................ 19-11 Section III – Training ..................................................................................... 19-12 Progressive Training ....................................................................................... 19-12 Key Personnel Training ................................................................................... 19-13 Observer/Controller and Evaluator Preparation ............................................. 19-13 Section IV – Execution ................................................................................. 19-13 Phase One – Pre-Live-Fire ............................................................................. 19-13 Phase Two – Tactical Movement, Mission Execution .................................... 19-14 Phase Three – Reorganization and Reconstitution ........................................ 19-14 Section V – Evaluation ................................................................................. 19-15 Standards for Evaluation................................................................................. 19-15 Scoring ............................................................................................................ 19-17

Appendix A

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation......................................................................... A-1

Appendix B

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation ............................................ B-1

Appendix C

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation ................................................................ C-1

viii

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Appendix D

Rifle Squad Gunnery ........................................................................................ D-1

Appendix E

Engineer Squad Qualification Tables ............................................................. E-1

Appendix F

Safety ................................................................................................................. F-1

Appendix G

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation ..............................................................G-1

Appendix H

120-mm Mortar Gunnery .................................................................................. H-1 GLOSSARY .......................................................................................... Glossary-1 REFERENCES .................................................................................. References-1 INDEX .......................................................................................................... Index-1

Figures Figure 2-1. M1A1 .................................................................................................................... 2-2 Figure 2-2. Revised hull and turret network boxes................................................................. 2-2 Figure 2-3. Upgraded tank commander’s panel ..................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-4. Eyesafe laser range finder ................................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-5. Driver’s vision enhancement ................................................................................ 2-4 Figure 2-6. Driver’s vision enhancement (front display) ......................................................... 2-5 Figure 2-7. Driver’s vision enhancement (rear connections) ................................................. 2-5 Figure 2-8. M1A2 SEP............................................................................................................ 2-6 Figure 2-9. Commander’s independent thermal viewer ......................................................... 2-6 Figure 2-10. M2A2/M3A2 ..................................................................................................... 2-10 Figure 2-11. M2A3/M3A3 ..................................................................................................... 2-12 Figure 2-12. M7 Bradley Fire Support Vehicle ..................................................................... 2-14 Figure 2-13. Armored Security Vehicle M1117 .................................................................... 2-15 Figure 2-14. M1025A2/M1026A1 ......................................................................................... 2-17 Figure 2-15. M1114 Up-Armored Armed HMMWV .............................................................. 2-17 Figure 2-16. M1151 Enhanced Up-Armored HMMWV ........................................................ 2-18 Figure 2-17. M1064A3 self-propelled 120-mm mortar carrier .............................................. 2-19 Figure 3-1. M231 5.56-mm firing port weapon ....................................................................... 3-2 Figure 3-2. M249 squad automatic weapon 5.56mm ............................................................. 3-3 Figure 3-3. M240 series 7.62-mm machine gun .................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3-4. M240B machine gun ............................................................................................ 3-5 Figure 3-5. M2 HB caliber .50 machine gun ........................................................................... 3-6 Figure 3-6. MK19 40mm grenade launcher ........................................................................... 3-7 Figure 3-7. M242 25-mm automatic gun ................................................................................ 3-8 Figure 3-8. M256 120-mm smoothbore cannon ..................................................................... 3-9 Figure 3-9. Chamber area .................................................................................................... 3-10 Figure 3-10. Forcing cone area ............................................................................................ 3-10 Figure 3-11. Bore.................................................................................................................. 3-11 Figure 3-12. The 120-mm mortar ......................................................................................... 3-13

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

ix

Contents

Figure 3-13. Smoke grenade launcher ................................................................................ 3-14 Figure 3-14. M257 smoke grenade launchers ..................................................................... 3-15 Figure 3-15. Tube-Launched, Optically Tracked, Wire-Guided Missile ............................... 3-16 Figure 4-1. Ammunition packaging and common markings example .................................... 4-2 Figure 4-2. Standard small arms ammunition markings ........................................................ 4-3 Figure 4-3. Lot number example ............................................................................................ 4-4 Figure 4-4. Tenth position codes ........................................................................................... 4-5 Figure 4-5. National stock number example .......................................................................... 4-7 Figure 4-6. Country of origin codes ....................................................................................... 4-7 Figure 4-7. Department of Defense Identification Code example ......................................... 4-8 Figure 4-8. Department of Defense Ammunition Code example ........................................... 4-8 Figure 4-9. Small arms color coding and packaging markings ............................................ 4-10 Figure 4-10. Bandoleer with 10 round clips, 5.56mm .......................................................... 4-11 Figure 4-11. Storage marking .............................................................................................. 4-11 Figure 4-12.Transportation marking .................................................................................... 4-11 Figure 4-13. M27 clip-type open link .................................................................................... 4-12 Figure 4-14. 5.56mm crew serve common ammunition types ............................................. 4-14 Figure 4-15. 7.62mm ammunition with M13 disintegrating link ........................................... 4-15 Figure 4-16. 7.62mm crew serve common ammunition types ............................................. 4-16 Figure 4-17. M2/M9 closed loop link .................................................................................... 4-17 Figure 4-18a. Characteristics of the most common caliber .50 ammunition types .............. 4-18 Figure 4-18b. Characteristics of the most common caliber .50 ammunition types (continued) ........................................................................................................ 4-19 Figure 4-19. Kinetic energy formula ..................................................................................... 4-21 Figure 4-20. Comparison of service ammunition for 25-mm gun ........................................ 4-22 Figure 4-21. M791 armor-piercing discarding sabot with tracer .......................................... 4-23 Figure 4-22. M919 armor-piercing, fin-stabilized, discarding sabot, with tracer .................. 4-24 Figure 4-23. M792 high-explosive incendiary with tracer .................................................... 4-24 Figure 4-24. M758 high-explosive incendiary with tracer fuze ............................................ 4-25 Figure 4-25. M758 fuze hazard classification marker .......................................................... 4-25 Figure 4-26. M758 fuze in SAFE.......................................................................................... 4-26 Figure 4-27. M758 fuze setback function............................................................................. 4-26 Figure 4-28. M758 fuze initial arming function ..................................................................... 4-27 Figure 4-29. M758 fuze arming sequence complete ........................................................... 4-27 Figure 4-30. M758 fuze direct impact functioning ................................................................ 4-28 Figure 4-31. M758 fuze grazing impact functioning ............................................................. 4-28 Figure 4-32. M758 fuze self destruct functioning ................................................................. 4-29 Figure 4-33. Frontal and grazing projectile impact zones for the M792 .............................. 4-29 Figure 4-34. Comparison of training ammunition for 25-mm gun ........................................ 4-30 Figure 4-35. M910 TPDS-T.................................................................................................. 4-30 Figure 4-36. M793 TP-T ....................................................................................................... 4-31

x

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Figure 4-37. 25 mm sabot petal danger area ....................................................................... 4-31 Figure 4-38. Characteristics of 40-mm grenade................................................................... 4-33 Figure 4-39. M430A1 internal components .......................................................................... 4-34 Figure 4-40. M1001 HVCC projectile and flechettes ............................................................ 4-35 Figure 4-41. M385 TP internal components ......................................................................... 4-36 Figure 4-42. M918 internal components .............................................................................. 4-36 Figure 4-43. BA30 2:1 Link ................................................................................................... 4-37 Figure 4-44. MK 281 mod 0 target practice .......................................................................... 4-37 Figure 4-45. B472 dummy linked ......................................................................................... 4-38 Figure 4-46. 40mm ammunition color codes and markings ................................................. 4-38 Figure 4-47. Aft cap markings .............................................................................................. 4-40 Figure 4-48. Case base quick reference markings for service ammunition ......................... 4-40 Figure 4-49. Case base quick reference markings for training ammunition ........................ 4-41 Figure 4-50. Components of a 120mm main gun round ...................................................... 4-42 Figure 4-51. Tank service round technical data ................................................................... 4-43 Figure 4-52. Kinetic energy formula ..................................................................................... 4-44 Figure 4-53. M829A3 APFSDS-T (120mm) ......................................................................... 4-45 Figure 4-54. M829A1/M829A2 APFSDS-T (120mm) ........................................................... 4-46 Figure 4-55. M830 HEAT-MP-T (120mm) ............................................................................ 4-46 Figure 4-56. Chemical energy ammunition effects............................................................... 4-47 Figure 4-57. M830A1 HEAT-MP-T and M908 HE-OR-T ...................................................... 4-48 Figure 4-58. M1028 canister ................................................................................................ 4-49 Figure 4-59. M1028 canister lethal danger zone (not to scale)............................................ 4-50 Figure 4-60. 120 mm target practice round technical data .................................................. 4-51 Figure 4-61. M865 TPCSDS-T ............................................................................................. 4-52 Figure 4-62. M831A1 HEAT-TP-T ........................................................................................ 4-52 Figure 4-63. M1002 TPMP-T ................................................................................................ 4-53 Figure 4-64. Discarding Sabot danger area ......................................................................... 4-55 Figure 4-65. Man-Portable Chamber Gage, NSN 5220-01-477-5455 ................................. 4-56 Figure 4-66. 120-mm mortar round technical data ............................................................... 4-59 Figure 4-67. M933A1 HE, with fuze, PD: M783 (120 mm) ................................................... 4-60 Figure 4-68. M934 HE, with fuze, multi-optional: M734A1 (120 mm) .................................. 4-60 Figure 4-69. M929 WP, with fuze, multi-optional: M734A1 (120 mm) ................................. 4-61 Figure 4-70. M930 IL, with fuze, super-quick: M776 (120 mm) ........................................... 4-61 Figure 4-71. M983 IL, with fuze, super-quick: M776 (120 mm) ........................................... 4-62 Figure 4-72. M931 FRTR, with fuze, PD: M781 (120 mm) .................................................. 4-62 Figure 4-73. M776 MTSQ fuze ............................................................................................. 4-63 Figure 4-74. M776 MTSQ fuze ............................................................................................. 4-64 Figure 4-75. M935 PD fuze .................................................................................................. 4-64 Figure 4-76. Setting the M935 PD fuze ................................................................................ 4-65 Figure 4-77. M734 multioption fuze ...................................................................................... 4-65

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

xi

Contents

Figure 4-78. Setting the M734 multi-option fuze .................................................................. 4-66 Figure 4-79. M745 PD fuze .................................................................................................. 4-66 Figure 4-80. Salvo pattern for the M250 smoke grenade launcher system......................... 4-69 Figure 4-81. Salvo pattern for the M257 smoke grenade launcher system......................... 4-69 Figure 4-82. L8A1 and L8A3 smoke grenade ...................................................................... 4-70 Figure 4-83. M76 and M82 smoke grenades ....................................................................... 4-71 Figure 4-84. Smoke grenade composite hazard area ......................................................... 4-72 Figure 4-85. TOW missile sections, TOW-2A models with extended probe ....................... 4-73 Figure 4-86. TOW 2B missile sections, no extended probe ................................................ 4-73 Figure 4-87. TOW-BB sections ............................................................................................ 4-74 Figure 4-88. TOW launch container example (side, top and front views) ........................... 4-74 Figure 4-89. TOW warhead assembly with extended probe (TOW-2A) .............................. 4-75 Figure 4-90. TOW-2B warhead assembly ........................................................................... 4-76 Figure 4-91.TOW missile stencil markings .......................................................................... 4-77 Figure 4-92.TOW missile characteristics ............................................................................. 4-78 Figure 4-93. TOW-2A cut away diagram ............................................................................. 4-79 Figure 4-94. TOW missile striking ERA protected threat target........................................... 4-80 Figure 4-95. Initial detonation of precursor charge .............................................................. 4-81 Figure 4-96. Detonation of the primary warhead ................................................................. 4-81 Figure 4-97. TOW-2A, BGM-71E-4B ................................................................................... 4-82 Figure 4-98. TOW-2A characteristics and markings............................................................ 4-82 Figure 4-99. TOW-2A practice characteristics and markings .............................................. 4-83 Figure 4-100. TOW-2B Aero ................................................................................................ 4-83 Figure 4-101. TOW-2B cut away diagram ........................................................................... 4-84 Figure 4-102a. TOW-2B functioning sequence ................................................................... 4-85 Figure 4-102b. TOW-2B functioning sequence (continued) ................................................ 4-86 Figure 4-102c. TOW-2B functioning sequence (continued) ................................................ 4-86 Figure 4-103. TOW-2B characteristics and markings.......................................................... 4-87 Figure 4-104. TOW-2B Gen I characteristics and markings ................................................ 4-87 Figure 4-105. TOW-2B Aero characteristics and markings ................................................. 4-88 Figure 4-106.TOW-2B Aero RF characteristics and markings ............................................ 4-88 Figure 4-107.TOW-2B Aero Gen I characteristics and markings ........................................ 4-89 Figure 4-108. TOW-2B Aero Gen 2 characteristics and markings ...................................... 4-89 Figure 4-109. TOW-2B Aero Gen 2 RF characteristics and markings ................................ 4-90 Figure 4-110. TOW-BB basic sections ................................................................................ 4-91 Figure 4-111. TOW-BB characteristics and markings ......................................................... 4-91 Figure 4-112. TOW-BB RF characteristics and markings ................................................... 4-92 Figure 4-113. Backblast area danger zone.......................................................................... 4-93 Figure 4-114. Javelin missile ............................................................................................... 4-96 Figure 4-115. Javelin backblast safety zones ...................................................................... 4-97 Figure 4-116. Example of ammunition placards ................................................................ 4-100

xii

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Figure 4-117. HBCT common vehicle cargo capacity ........................................................ 4-102 Figure 4-118. Ammunition lot restriction flow chart ............................................................ 4-104 Figure 5-1. Engagement process (detect).............................................................................. 5-2 Figure 5-2. Dead space considerations for closed hatch operations ..................................... 5-4 Figure 5-3. Abram’s weapon dead space (flank) ................................................................... 5-4 Figure 5-4. Bradley weapon dead space (flank) .................................................................... 5-5 Figure 5-5. Rapid scans ......................................................................................................... 5-9 Figure 5-6. Slow (50-meter) scan ......................................................................................... 5-10 Figure 5-7. Ground-to-rooftop and horizontal slow-scan techniques ................................... 5-11 Figure 5-8. Detailed-search technique ................................................................................. 5-12 Figure 5-9. Horizontal search and scan ............................................................................... 5-13 Figure 5-10. Vertical search and scan ................................................................................. 5-14 Figure 5-11. Estimating 20 degrees ..................................................................................... 5-14 Figure 5-12. Sector overlapping ........................................................................................... 5-16 Figure 5-13. Sector divided .................................................................................................. 5-16 Figure 6-1. Engagement process (identify) ............................................................................ 6-2 Figure 6-2. Unsupported track (example one) ....................................................................... 6-3 Figure 6-3. Unsupported track (example two) ........................................................................ 6-3 Figure 6-4. Supported track .................................................................................................... 6-4 Figure 6-5. Boat shaped hull .................................................................................................. 6-4 Figure 6-6. Boxed shaped hull ............................................................................................... 6-5 Figure 6-7. Trim vane ............................................................................................................. 6-5 Figure 6-8. Hydrojets .............................................................................................................. 6-6 Figure 6-9. Bore evacuator ..................................................................................................... 6-7 Figure 6-10. Gun mantle......................................................................................................... 6-7 Figure 6-11. Fording kit .......................................................................................................... 6-8 Figure 6-12. Armored reactive tiles ........................................................................................ 6-8 Figure 6-13. Key recognition features (armored) ................................................................... 6-9 Figure 6-14. Engine mounting .............................................................................................. 6-10 Figure 6-15. Rotary wing external sensors .......................................................................... 6-10 Figure 6-16. Tail rotor ........................................................................................................... 6-11 Figure 6-17. Fenestron tail rotor ........................................................................................... 6-11 Figure 6-18. Rear horizontal stabilizer wings ....................................................................... 6-12 Figure 6-19. Key identification features (helicopter)............................................................. 6-12 Figure 6-20. Combat identification panel ............................................................................. 6-14 Figure 6-21. Abrams thermal identification panel placement ............................................... 6-14 Figure 6-22. Bradley thermal identification panel placement ............................................... 6-15 Figure 6-23. Thermal identification panel NSN listing .......................................................... 6-16 Figure 6-24. Phoenix Beacon ............................................................................................... 6-17 Figure 6-25. BRMS NSN listing ............................................................................................ 6-18 Figure 6-26. BRMS T-Back style .......................................................................................... 6-18

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

xiii

Contents

Figure 6-27. VS-17 panel ..................................................................................................... 6-18 Figure 6-28. Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below ............................................. 6-19 Figure 7-1. Engagement process (decide) ............................................................................ 7-2 Figure 7-2. LRAS3 NFOV reticle............................................................................................ 7-6 Figure 7-3. LRAS3 WFOV reticle indicators .......................................................................... 7-6 Figure 7-4. Bradley Stadia reticle on flank target................................................................... 7-7 Figure 7-5. Bradley Stadia reticle on frontal target ................................................................ 7-8 Figure 7-6. Abram’s Stadia reticle with full target .................................................................. 7-8 Figure 7-7. Abram’s Stadia reticle, defilade target................................................................. 7-9 Figure 7-8. Integrated Sight Unit choke (full target) ............................................................. 7-10 Figure 7-9. Integrated Sight Unit choke (defilade target)..................................................... 7-10 Figure 7-10. Constant mil-angle relationship ....................................................................... 7-12 Figure 7-11. Frontal BMP-2 dimensions .............................................................................. 7-14 Figure 7-12. Flank BMP-2 dimensions ................................................................................ 7-14 Figure 7-13. Frontal Mi-24 Hind-D dimensions .................................................................... 7-14 Figure 7-14. Flank Mi-24 Hind-D dimensions ...................................................................... 7-15 Figure 7-15. Frontal T-72 dimensions .................................................................................. 7-15 Figure 7-16. Flank T-72 dimensions .................................................................................... 7-16 Figure 7-17. Measuring width with binoculars ..................................................................... 7-16 Figure 8-1. Engagement process (engage) ........................................................................... 8-2 Figure 8-2. Battlecarry command........................................................................................... 8-4 Figure 8-3. Concept of battlesight .......................................................................................... 8-5 Figure 8-4. Battlesight range examples, APFSDS, and AP rounds....................................... 8-6 Figure 8-5. Battlesight range examples, chemical energy rounds ........................................ 8-7 Figure 8-6. Elevation levels Alpha, Bravo, and Charlie example......................................... 8-14 Figure 8-7. Fire command concept ...................................................................................... 8-18 Figure 8-8. Standard fire command, single target example................................................. 8-20 Figure 8-9. Reduced fire command, single target ............................................................... 8-21 Figure 8-10. Rounds fired .................................................................................................... 8-24 Figure 8-11. Reduced multiple target fire command example ............................................. 8-31 Figure 8-12. Manually applied lead for a slow moving target .............................................. 8-34 Figure 8-13. Manually applied lead for a fast moving target................................................ 8-34 Figure 8-14. Aiming point for machine gun point target, stationary ..................................... 8-35 Figure 8-15. Z pattern fired from the front ............................................................................ 8-36 Figure 8-16. Z pattern .......................................................................................................... 8-37 Figure 8-17. Aiming points for engaging aircraft with vehicle machine guns ...................... 8-38 Figure 8-18. Paratrooper engagement technique ................................................................ 8-39 Figure 8-19. Sight picture for lasing on troops using last return logic ................................. 8-41 Figure 8-20. M1A1 caliber .50 aiming points ....................................................................... 8-43 Figure 8-21. Direct fire adjustment using the re-engage method ........................................ 8-44 Figure 8-22. Single target engagement example................................................................. 8-45

xiv

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Figure 8-23. Multiple target fire command example ............................................................. 8-46 Figure 8-24. Single target fire command using BATTLE SGT button example ................... 8-47 Figure 8-25. Single target fire command example without LRF/ELRF................................. 8-48 Figure 8-26. Single target fire command using the stadia reticle with adjustment example............................................................................................................. 8-49 Figure 8-27. Multiple target fire command using the stadia reticle example ........................ 8-50 Figure 8-28. Multiple target fire command, GPS malfunction example................................ 8-51 Figure 8-29. Change of weapon system using GAS or auxiliary sight fire command example............................................................................................................. 8-52 Figure 8-30. Fire command to dismounted squad example ................................................. 8-53 Figure 8-31. Smoke grenade fire command example .......................................................... 8-54 Figure 8-32. Simultaneous engagement fire command example ........................................ 8-55 Figure 8-33. Change of weapon system fire command example......................................... 8-56 Figure 8-34. Simultaneous targets, caliber .50 and main gun example ............................... 8-57 Figure 8-35. VC main gun fire command example............................................................... 8-58 Figure 8-36. Canister engagement using “FIRE AND ADJUST” ......................................... 8-59 Figure 8-37. Multiple weapon system (Bradley) fire command example ............................. 8-60 Figure 8-38. Multiple weapon system (Bradley), fire and adjust, fire command example............................................................................................................. 8-61 Figure 8-39. Truck single target fire command example ...................................................... 8-62 Figure 8-40. Truck multiple target fire command example ................................................... 8-63 Figure 8-41. ASV change of weapon system fire command example ................................. 8-64 Figure 8-42. Standard sheaf ................................................................................................. 8-69 Figure 8-43. Converged sheaf.............................................................................................. 8-69 Figure 8-44. Open sheaf ...................................................................................................... 8-70 Figure 8-45. Special sheaf ................................................................................................... 8-70 Figure 8-46. Parallel sheaf ................................................................................................... 8-71 Figure 8-47a. Fire mission examples ................................................................................... 8-73 Figure 8-47b. Fire mission examples (continued) ................................................................ 8-74 Figure 8-48. Observer target factor calculation .................................................................... 8-75 Figure 8-49. Observer target factor ...................................................................................... 8-75 Figure 8-50. Range spotting for observer adjustments ........................................................ 8-76 Figure 8-51. Deviation spotting of 30 left.............................................................................. 8-77 Figure 8-52. Initial splash of adjustment fire ........................................................................ 8-79 Figure 8-53. First adjustment round, “DROP 400” ............................................................... 8-79 Figure 8-54. Second adjustment, “ADD 200” ....................................................................... 8-80 Figure 8-55. Final adjustment, “DROP 100, FIRE FOR EFFECT” ....................................... 8-80 Figure 8-56. Hasty bracketing, first round ............................................................................ 8-81 Figure 8-57. Hasty bracketing, second round ...................................................................... 8-82 Figure 9-1. Engagement process (engage) ........................................................................... 9-1 Figure 9-2. Examples of terrain-based quadrants .................................................................. 9-6 Figure 9-3. Example of friendly-based quadrants .................................................................. 9-6

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

xv

Contents

Figure 9-4. Examples of fire patterns ..................................................................................... 9-8 Figure 9-5. Examples of target array ..................................................................................... 9-9 Figure 9-6. Sample frontal fire command ............................................................................ 9-16 Figure 9-7. Sample cross-fire command.............................................................................. 9-17 Figure 9-8. Sample depth fire command ............................................................................. 9-18 Figure 9-9. Indirect fire team ................................................................................................ 9-19 Figure 9-10. Scheduled target (TRP type) ........................................................................... 9-24 Figure 9-11. Planned targets (linear type) ........................................................................... 9-24 Figure 9-12. Linear target symbol with FPF label ................................................................ 9-25 Figure 10-1. The engagement process (assess) ................................................................. 10-1 Figure 11-1. Sample ROC-V training screen ....................................................................... 11-4 Figure 11-2. Sample basic tracking board ........................................................................... 11-5 Figure 11-3. Sample advanced tracking board .................................................................... 11-6 Figure 11-4. Advanced with swithology ............................................................................... 11-6 Figure 11-5. Components of vehicular MILES 2000 ............................................................ 11-9 Figure 11-6. Call for Fire Trainer........................................................................................ 11-11 Figure 11-7. HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer ............................................................. 11-12 Figure 11-8. EST 2000 Engagement Skills Trainer ........................................................... 11-13 Figure 11-9. Close Combat Tactical Trainer ...................................................................... 11-16 Figure 11-10. 7.62mm, caliber .50 and 120-mm dummy rounds ...................................... 11-17 Figure 11-11. Caliber .50 inbore device ............................................................................. 11-20 Figure 11-12. Abrams Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer ......................................... 11-22 Figure 11-13. 7.62mm and 25mm dummy rounds ............................................................ 11-24 Figure 11-14. Precision Gunnery System .......................................................................... 11-26 Figure 11-15. Advanced Bradley Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer ........................ 11-27 Figure 11-16. Tabletop Full-Fidelity Trainer....................................................................... 11-28 Figure 11-17. Dummy rounds ............................................................................................ 11-30 Figure 11-18. VCCT-R (configuration 1) ............................................................................ 11-32 Figure 11-19. VCCT-R (configuration 2) ............................................................................ 11-32 Figure 11-20. VCCT-L ........................................................................................................ 11-33 Figure 11-21. Virtual Convoy Operations Trainer .............................................................. 11-34 Figure 12-1. Sample six month gunnery training plan ......................................................... 12-7 Figure 12-2. Abrams training strategy ............................................................................... 12-10 Figure 12-3. Mechanized infantry training strategy ........................................................... 12-11 Figure 12-4. Reconnaissance integrated training strategy ................................................ 12-12 Figure 12-5. Combat engineer integrated training strategy ............................................... 12-13 Figure 12-6. Fire support team training strategy................................................................ 12-14 Figure 12-7. Mortar integrated training strategy ................................................................ 12-15 Figure 12-8. Sustainment training strategy ........................................................................ 12-16 Figure 12-9. Sample six month gunnery training timeline (Abrams) ................................. 12-23 Figure 13-1. Urban cluster ................................................................................................... 13-6

xvi

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Figure 13-2a. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement .................................. 13-7 Figure 13-2b. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement (continued) ............... 13-8 Figure 13-2c. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement (continued) ............... 13-8 Figure 13-2d. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement (continued) ............... 13-9 Figure 13-3. Sample SDZ diagram for 25-mm M792 ammunition ..................................... 13-11 Figure 13-4. Sample SDZ diagram for 7.62-mm M80 (A131) ammunition ........................ 13-12 Figure 14-1. Test station diagram ........................................................................................ 14-4 Figure 14-2. Example of DA Form 7558-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Individual Roll-Up .............................................................................................. 14-7 Figure 14-3. Example of DA Form 7662-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Platoon Roll-Up .............................................................................................................. 14-8 Figure 14-4. DA Form 7665-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Company Roll-Up ......... 14-9 Figure 14-5. Example of DA Form 7664-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Scoresheet .................................................................................... 14-14 Figure 14-6. Example of DA Form 7660-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Platoon Roll-Up ............................................................................. 14-15 Figure 14-7. Example of DA Form 7661-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Company Roll-Up .......................................................................... 14-16 Figure 15-1. Vehicle crew evaluator team example ............................................................. 15-2 Figure 15-2. Sample threat matrix ........................................................................................ 15-8 Figure 15-3. Targets not fully presented example.............................................................. 15-11 Figure 15-4. Targets fully presented and locked example ................................................. 15-12 Figure 15-5. Defense timing procedure example, turret down or defilade position ........... 15-13 Figure 15-6. Defense timing procedure example, hull down or enfilade position .............. 15-13 Figure 15-7. Obscuration example, defense ...................................................................... 15-16 Figure 15-8. Obscuration example, offense ....................................................................... 15-17 Figure 15-9. Alibi process ................................................................................................... 15-18 Figure 15-10. Engagement example .................................................................................. 15-22 Figure 15-11. Example of DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet .......................... 15-23 Figure 15-12. Directions for completions of form ............................................................... 15-24 Figure 15-13. Example of DA Form 7663-R, Crew Gunnery Roll-Up Sheet ...................... 15-25 Figure 15-14. Abrams armored defense (example) ........................................................... 15-30 Figure 16-1. Abrams and Bradley capable gunnery table example ..................................... 16-6 Figure 16-2. Basic instruction example .............................................................................. 16-11 Figure 16-3. Target scenario development tool example ................................................... 16-25 Figure 16-4. Engagement 60 example ............................................................................... 16-26 Figure 16-5. Engagement 61 example ............................................................................... 16-27 Figure 16-6. Engagement 62 example ............................................................................... 16-28 Figure 16-7. Engagement 63 example ............................................................................... 16-29 Figure 16-8. Engagement 64 example ............................................................................... 16-30 Figure 16-9. Engagement 65 example ............................................................................... 16-31 Figure 16-10. Engagement 66 example ............................................................................. 16-32

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

xvii

Contents

Figure 16-11. Engagement 67 example ............................................................................ 16-33 Figure 16-12. Engagement 68 example ............................................................................ 16-34 Figure 16-13. Engagement 69 example ............................................................................ 16-35 Figure 17-1. HMMWV in the defilade position example ...................................................... 17-5 Figure 17-2. HMMWV in the enfilade position example ...................................................... 17-6 Figure 17-3. LMTV in the defilade position example ........................................................... 17-6 Figure 17-4. LMTV in the enfilade position example ........................................................... 17-6 Figure 17-5. Common instruction crew training prior to gunnery ...................................... 17-10 Figure 17-6. Example of unstabilized platform gunnery table matrix ................................ 17-12 Figure 17-7. Example of Guardian ASV gunnery table matrix ........................................... 17-13 Figure 17-8. Example of Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course ............................... 17-14 Figure 17-9. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course ...... 17-15 Figure 17-10. Example of Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun .................................... 17-17 Figure 17-11. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun ............ 17-18 Figure 17-12. Example of Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun (scout/recon only) ........................................................................................... 17-20 Figure 17-13. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun (scout/recon only) .................................................................... 17-21 Figure 17-14. Example of Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice .................................... 17-23 Figure 17-15. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice ........... 17-24 Figure 17-16. Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course ............................................ 17-26 Figure 17-17. Guardian ASV Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course .................... 17-27 Figure 18-1. Example of DA Form 7659-R, Gunnery Tables VII, VIII, IX Scoresheet (Section Qualification) ...................................................................................... 18-4 Figure 18-2. Example of Form DA 7658-R, Gunnery Table X, XI, XII Scoresheet (Platoon Qualification) ...................................................................................... 18-5 Figure 18-3. Abrams and Bradley Crew Gunnery Tables II-VI ............................................ 18-8 Figure 18-4. Section pure (armor) ..................................................................................... 18-14 Figure 18-5. Section mixed (1 Abrams/2 Bradley with 1 rifle squad) ................................ 18-14 Figure 18-6. Combined arms section (1 Abrams/2 unstabilized weapon platforms/1 BFIST) ............................................................................................................ 18-15 Figure 18-7. Platoon pure (infantry) ................................................................................... 18-18 Figure 18-7. Platoon pure (infantry) (continued) ................................................................ 18-19 Figure 18-8. Platoon mixed (2 Abrams/2 Bradleys with 2 rifle squads)............................. 18-19 Figure 18-9. Combined Arms Platoon (2 Abrams/2 unstabilized weapon platforms/1 BFIST) ............................................................................................................ 18-20 Figure 19-1. CALFEX training strategy .............................................................................. 19-15 Figure 19-2. Example of direct-fire scoring ........................................................................ 19-18 Figure A-1. Step 1 - insert MBD ............................................................................................. A-2 Figure A-2. Step 2 - tighten MBD finger tight ......................................................................... A-3 Figure A-3. Step 3 - place a mark on the cone ...................................................................... A-3 Figure A-4. Step 4 - remove the MBD.................................................................................... A-3 Figure A-5. Step 5 - reinstall the MBD ................................................................................... A-4

xviii

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Figure A-6. Step 6 - tighten the MBD finger tight ...................................................................A-4 Figure A-7. Proper alignment of the MBD ..............................................................................A-4 Figure A-8. MBD flipped 180 degrees to the 9 o’clock position .............................................A-5 Figure A-9. Target aiming point ..............................................................................................A-8 Figure A-10. Crew set up .................................................................................................... A-45 Figure A-11. Abrams combined solution board (see Table A-13 for dimensions for the solution board) ........................................................................................... A-52 Figure A-12. Sample AAC data sheet for Checks 4 and 5 .................................................. A-56 Figure A-13. Sample M1A2 SEP data worksheet for the M1A2 SEP special input check and M1A2 SEP ballistic solution check ................................................. A-67 Figure A-14a. M1A2 SEP ballistic solution chart for check 5 (4.0 version) ......................... A-69 Figure A-14b. M1A2 SEP ballistic solution chart for check 1 (4.2-4.3 version) (continued) ....................................................................................................... A-70 Figure A-15. Checking position of recoil piston sleeve ....................................................... A-72 Figure A-16. Feeler gauge .................................................................................................. A-73 Figure A-17. Depiction of faulty piston sleeve ..................................................................... A-73 Figure A-18. Piston seating gauge, 120 mm ....................................................................... A-74 Figure A-19a. Starting position for anti-rotation key tolerance check ................................. A-75 Figure A-19b. Checking distance between the anti-rotation key and the side of the keyway ............................................................................................................. A-75 Figure A-20. Checking the distance between the ramp and the breech ............................. A-76 Figure A-21a. Starting position for breech alignment block check ...................................... A-76 Figure A-21b. Position for breech alignment block check ................................................... A-77 Figure A-22a. Top view of main gun and elevation mechanism ......................................... A-78 Figure A-22b. Side view of rod end pin ............................................................................... A-78 Figure A-23. Lower elevation mechanism, yoke, and support bracket ............................... A-79 Figure A-24a. Rear elevation mechanism support strut ...................................................... A-79 Figure A-24b. Rear elevation mechanism support strut (continued) .................................. A-80 Figure A-25a. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment ..................................................... A-83 Figure A-25b. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment (continued) ................................. A-84 Figure A-25c. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment (continued) .................................. A-84 Figure A-25d. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment (continued) ................................. A-85 Figure A-26. Screening test target (ST-5) ........................................................................... A-86 Figure A-27. Flow chart for screening test procedures ....................................................... A-87 Figure A-28. Sample discrete CCF worksheet (DA Form 7556-R) ..................................... A-93 Figure A-29. Target ............................................................................................................. A-94 Figure A-30. Target–mark 1/2 way ...................................................................................... A-94 Figure A-31. Target–mark 1/3 way ...................................................................................... A-95 Figure A-32. Screening test target (ST-5) with dimension A ............................................... A-96 Figure A-33. Gunner’s quadrant (M1A1 shown) ................................................................. A-99 Figure A-34. Day refraction (exaggerated view) ............................................................... A-116 Figure A-35. Night refraction (exaggerated view) ............................................................. A-116

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

xix

Contents

Figure A-36. CITV stadia reticle ......................................................................................... A-119 Figure A-37. GAS stadia reticle ......................................................................................... A-119 Figure A-38a. GAS stadia reticle, displaying target ........................................................... A-120 Figure A-38b. GAS stadia reticle, displaying target (continued) ........................................ A-120 Figure A-39. Gunner’s primary sight (daylight reticle) ....................................................... A-121 Figure A-40. Abrams gunner’s auxiliary sight reticles (MPAT/HEAT) .............................. A-122 Figure A-41. Abrams gunner’s auxiliary sight reticles (MPAT/HEAT) lead pattern .......... A-122 Figure A-42. Abrams gunner’s auxiliary sight reticles (KE/STAFF) example ................... A-123 Figure A-43. Abrams gunner’s auxiliary sight reticles (KE/STAFF) ................................... A-123 Figure A-44. Commander’s weapon station sight reticle ................................................... A-124 Figure A-45. Constant mil-angle relationship..................................................................... A-125 Figure A-46. Frontal BMP-2 dimensions ............................................................................ A-127 Figure A-47. Flank BMP-2 dimensions .............................................................................. A-127 Figure A-48. Frontal Hind-D dimensions ........................................................................... A-127 Figure A-49. Flank Hind-D dimensions .............................................................................. A-128 Figure A-50. Frontal T-72 dimensions ............................................................................... A-128 Figure A-51. Flank T-72 dimensions .................................................................................. A-128 Figure A-52. Measuring width with binoculars ................................................................... A-129 Figure A-53. Ammunition stowage plan, 16 and 18 round racks ....................................... A-132 Figure A-54. Ammunition stowage plan, 17 round rack..................................................... A-133 Figure A-55. Gun tube serial number ................................................................................ A-135 Figure A-56. Breech ring serial number ............................................................................. A-136 Figure A-57. DA Form 2408-4 with firing and maintenance data ...................................... A-137 Figure A-58. DA Form 2408-4 condemning gun tube........................................................ A-138 Figure A-59. DA Form 2408-4 transfer to new form .......................................................... A-139 Figure A-60. DA Form 2408-4 boresight and zero data .................................................... A-140 Figure B-1. Dual-feed system ................................................................................................ B-2 Figure B-2. The M242 25-mm gun’s eight cycles of function ................................................ B-4 Figure B-3. Reticle for boresight telescope NSN 4933-00-867-6607 .................................... B-5 Figure B-4. Boresight telescope NSN 4933-00-867-6607 ..................................................... B-6 Figure B-5. The 1-1000 boresight telescope ......................................................................... B-7 Figure B-6. Adapter for the 1-1000 boresight telescope........................................................ B-7 Figure B-7. Reticle for 1-1000 telescope ............................................................................... B-8 Figure B-8. Older 25-mm adapter, PN 12524010, fits 25-mm barrel on all BFVs through A2 ODS ............................................................................................... B-10 Figure B-9. Newer 25-mm adapter, PN 12524144, fits 25-mm barrel on all BFVs ............. B-10 Figure B-10. Telescope reticle aimed at a corner of boresight panel .................................. B-11 Figure B-11. Telescope facing to the left ............................................................................. B-11 Figure B-12. Aiming point in the 2-mil circle ........................................................................ B-12 Figure B-13. Preparations before screening equipment ...................................................... B-13 Figure B-14. Example boresight test panel .......................................................................... B-13

xx

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Figure B-15. Example of a completed DA Form 7523-R..................................................... B-15 Figure B-16. Reticle alignment ............................................................................................ B-16 Figure B-17. Sight picture and scoring grid ......................................................................... B-17 Figure B-18. Azimuth for right aim-point coordinates .......................................................... B-17 Figure B-19. Elevation for right aim-point coordinates ........................................................ B-18 Figure B-20. Plotted aiming point ........................................................................................ B-18 Figure B-21. Reticle aimed at center of panel ..................................................................... B-19 Figure B-22. Kit right aiming point ....................................................................................... B-20 Figure B-23. Kit left aiming point ......................................................................................... B-21 Figure B-24. Aiming point .................................................................................................... B-21 Figure B-25. Distance and direction from center................................................................. B-22 Figure B-26. Adjusted aim point .......................................................................................... B-22 Figure B-27. Adapter-marking template .............................................................................. B-23 Figure B-28. Marked adapter .............................................................................................. B-23 Figure B-29. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the right, at mark "A" ......................... B-24 Figure B-30. Right aiming point as recorded on scoresheet ............................................... B-24 Figure B-31. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the left, at mark "A" ........................... B-25 Figure B-32. Left aiming point as recorded on scoresheet ................................................. B-26 Figure B-33. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the right, at mark "B" ......................... B-27 Figure B-34. Right aim point coordinates, Test 2 ................................................................ B-27 Figure B-35. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the left, at mark "B" ........................... B-28 Figure B-36. Left aiming point, Test 2 ................................................................................. B-28 Figure B-37. Distance between aim points, Test 1 ............................................................. B-29 Figure B-38. Distance between aim points, Test 2 ............................................................. B-30 Figure B-39. Mark "A" facing up, telescope to the right ...................................................... B-31 Figure B-40. Mark facing up, telescope to the left ............................................................... B-32 Figure B-41. Example completed SF 368 (telescopes) ...................................................... B-34 Figure B-42. Example completed SF 368 (adapters) .......................................................... B-35 Figure B-43. Close-in panel ................................................................................................. B-36 Figure B-44. Panel placement ............................................................................................. B-37 Figure B-45. Correct distance alignment for boresighting................................................... B-37 Figure B-46. 10-mil circle aligned with the 25-mm cross .................................................... B-39 Figure B-47. Boresight reticle aligned with the 25-mm cross .............................................. B-39 Figure B-48. Reticle centered between left, right, and lower limits ..................................... B-40 Figure B-49. Locknut, crank, and thumbscrews .................................................................. B-41 Figure B-50. Horizontal adjustment lock screw and horizontal adjustment screw .............. B-41 Figure B-51. ISU reticle aligned with "T" ............................................................................. B-43 Figure B-52. Alignment of TOW cross and 2-mil circle ....................................................... B-43 Figure B-53. Position of ISU reticle below the 25-mm cross ............................................... B-44 Figure B-54. Distance between aiming points..................................................................... B-45 Figure B-55. Auxiliary sight reticle positioned below the AUX cross................................... B-45

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

xxi

Contents

Figure B-56. Auxiliary sight reticle positioned above the AUX cross ................................... B-46 Figure B-57. Drift within 1-mil circle ..................................................................................... B-47 Figure B-58. Boresight retention met ................................................................................... B-48 Figure B-59. Position of TOW cross .................................................................................... B-51 Figure B-60. 25-mm sight reticle (M2/M3) ........................................................................... B-60 Figure B-61. 25-mm sight reticle (ODS) .............................................................................. B-60 Figure B-62. BFVA3 reticle selection ................................................................................... B-61 Figure B-63. Choking a hull-down vehicle ........................................................................... B-62 Figure B-64. Frontal and flank views of a BMP ................................................................... B-63 Figure B-65. Full frontal and full flank views of a BMP ........................................................ B-63 Figure B-66. Determine TOW maximum engagement range .............................................. B-64 Figure B-67. BFVA3 default reticle lead line and mil relation .............................................. B-65 Figure B-68. Determine ranges for a BMP at target 1 (1,400 meters) and target 2 (1,800 meters) .................................................................................................. B-66 Figure B-69. Determine TOW maximum engagement range for a BFVA3 default reticle ................................................................................................................ B-67 Figure B-70. Determine range using the auxiliary sight ....................................................... B-68 Figure B-71. TOW back-blast area ...................................................................................... B-70 Figure C-1. Machine gun to night vision sight matrix ............................................................. C-2 Figure C-2. AN/PEQ-2A ......................................................................................................... C-2 Figure C-3. AN/PAQ-4C ......................................................................................................... C-3 Figure C-4. M145 machine gun optic (MGO)......................................................................... C-3 Figure C-5. M14 MGO reticle ................................................................................................. C-4 Figure C-6. M145 MGO illuminated reticle ............................................................................ C-4 Figure C-7. AN/PVS-4 ............................................................................................................ C-5 Figure C-8. AN/PVS-4 reticle ................................................................................................. C-5 Figure C-9. AN/TVS-5A ......................................................................................................... C-6 Figure C-10. AN/TVS-5A earlier reticle .................................................................................. C-6 Figure C-11. AN/TVS-5A newer reticle .................................................................................. C-7 Figure C-12. AN/PAS-13 (V) 2 MWTS ................................................................................... C-7 Figure C-13. AN/PAS-13 (V) 3 HWTS ................................................................................... C-8 Figure C-14. TWS common display ....................................................................................... C-8 Figure C-15. MWTS M249 WFOV aim points........................................................................ C-9 Figure C-16. MWTS M249 NFOV aim points ........................................................................ C-9 Figure C-17. MWTS M240 WFOV aim points...................................................................... C-10 Figure C-18. MWTS M240 NFOV aim points ...................................................................... C-10 Figure C-19. HWTS M2 HB WFOV aim points .................................................................... C-11 Figure C-20. HWTS M2 HB NFOV aim points ..................................................................... C-11 Figure C-21. HWTS MK19 aim points ................................................................................. C-12 Figure C-22. Available sights for M249 SAW ...................................................................... C-13 Figure C-23. Available sights for M240B ............................................................................. C-13 Figure C-24. Available sights for M2 HB machine gun ........................................................ C-14

xxii

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Figure C-25. Available sights for MK19 machine gun ......................................................... C-14 Figure C-26. M249 SAW rear sight ..................................................................................... C-16 Figure C-27. M240B rear sight ............................................................................................ C-18 Figure C-28. M2 HB rear sight ............................................................................................ C-20 Figure C-29. Zero group size .............................................................................................. C-21 Figure C-30. MK19 rear sight .............................................................................................. C-22 Figure C-31. Target board for dry-zeroing .......................................................................... C-28 Figure C-32. Example of DA Form 7476-R, 10-Meter Boresight Offset Target .................. C-29 Figure C-33. Common reticle .............................................................................................. C-33 Figure C-34. FLIR WFOV reticle (1X) ................................................................................. C-34 Figure C-35. FLIR WFOV reticle (2X) ................................................................................. C-34 Figure C-36. FLIR NFOV reticle (1X) .................................................................................. C-34 Figure C-37. FLIR NFOV reticle (4X) .................................................................................. C-34 Figure C-38. Day TV WFOV reticle ..................................................................................... C-35 Figure C-39. Day TV NFOV reticle ...................................................................................... C-35 Figure C-40. LRAS3 boresight main menu tree .................................................................. C-36 Figure D-1. Javelin backblast safety zones ......................................................................... D-12 Figure D-2. Javelin missile .................................................................................................. D-13 Figure D-3. Sector sketch .................................................................................................... D-19 Figure G-1. Boresight panel dimensions ............................................................................... G-2 Figure G-2. Mandrel and borelight assembly ........................................................................ G-3 Figure G-3. Angle gauge ....................................................................................................... G-3 Figure G-4. Reticle control adapter lever .............................................................................. G-4 Figure G-5. Night sight azimuth/elevation adjustment .......................................................... G-5 Figure G-6. Daylight sight azimuth/elevation adjustment ...................................................... G-7 Figure G-7. Reticle control adapter ....................................................................................... G-9 Figure G-8. Daylight reticle .................................................................................................. G-10 Figure G-9. Caliber .50 mount and AZ/EL adjust ................................................................ G-11 Figure G-10. Daylight reticle ................................................................................................ G-12 Figure G-11. Night sight reticle............................................................................................ G-13 Figure G-12. Constant mil-angle relationship ...................................................................... G-14 Figure G-13. Frontal BMP-2 dimensions ............................................................................. G-16 Figure G-14. Flank BMP-2 dimensions ............................................................................... G-16 Figure G-15. Frontal Hind-D dimensions ............................................................................ G-16 Figure G-16. Flank Hind-D dimensions ............................................................................... G-17 Figure G-17. Frontal T-72 dimensions ................................................................................ G-17 Figure G-18. Flank T-72 dimensions ................................................................................... G-17 Figure G-19. Measuring width with binoculars .................................................................... G-18 Figure H-1. Mortar table levels .............................................................................................. H-3

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

xxiii

Contents

Tables Table 2-1. Fuel consumption chart ........................................................................................ 2-8 Table 2-2. Comparison of Abrams technical data by model .................................................. 2-9 Table 2-3. Comparison of BFV technical data by model ..................................................... 2-13 Table 2-4. Technical data of the M1117 - Guardian ASV .................................................... 2-16 Table 2-5. Comparison of armed HMMWV technical data by model .................................. 2-18 Table 2-6. Technical data of the M1064A3 self-propelled 120-mm mortar carrier ............. 2-19 Table 3-1. M231 characteristics ............................................................................................. 3-2 Table 3-2. M249 machine gun characteristics ....................................................................... 3-3 Table 3-3. M240 machine gun characteristics ....................................................................... 3-5 Table 3-4. M2 HB machine gun characteristics ..................................................................... 3-7 Table 3-5. MK19 machine gun characteristics ...................................................................... 3-8 Table 3-6. Technical data for the 120-mm mortar ............................................................... 3-13 Table 4-1. Month codes ......................................................................................................... 4-5 Table 4-2. Federal supply classification ................................................................................. 4-6 Table 4-3. Ammunition color coding, 20mm and larger ......................................................... 4-9 Table 4-4. 5.56 maximum effective ranges.......................................................................... 4-13 Table 4-5. 7.62mm maximum effective ranges.................................................................... 4-15 Table 4-6. Caliber .50 maximum effective range ................................................................. 4-17 Table 4-7. M1028 canister effects on various targets.......................................................... 4-50 Table 4-8.120mm German models for the M256 Cannon ................................................... 4-54 Table 4-9. Main gun ammunition codes............................................................................... 4-57 Table 4-10. TOW-2A model numbers .................................................................................. 4-80 Table 4-11. TOW-2B models ............................................................................................... 4-85 Table 4-12. Characteristics of the Javelin antitank guided missile ...................................... 4-95 Table 4-13. Common ammunition packing ........................................................................ 4-101 Table 6-1. Phoenix Beacon NSN listing ............................................................................... 6-17 Table 7-1. Ammunition/weapon selection .............................................................................. 7-3 Table 7-1. Ammunition/weapon selection (continued) ........................................................... 7-4 Table 7-2. Recognition method ............................................................................................ 7-11 Table 7-3. Effect of target conditions on range estimation .................................................. 7-11 Table 7-4. Mil relation for various targets ............................................................................ 7-13 Table 8-1. Range settings by weapon system ....................................................................... 8-5 Table 8-2. Battlesight range determination example ............................................................. 8-8 Table 8-3. Elements of a standard fire command .................................................................. 8-9 Table 8-4. Alert examples .................................................................................................... 8-10 Table 8-5. Weapon/ammunition element ............................................................................. 8-11 Table 8-6. Target descriptions ............................................................................................. 8-11 Table 8-7. Range element and sight selection .................................................................... 8-14 Table 8-8. Elements of the standard fire command ............................................................. 8-18

xxiv

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Table 8-9. Deviation computations ....................................................................................... 8-78 Table 9-1. Common fire control measures ............................................................................. 9-4 Table 9-2. Weapons safety posture levels ........................................................................... 9-11 Table 10-1. Situation report .................................................................................................. 10-5 Table 11-1. Gunnery-related TADSS and systems supported............................................. 11-2 Table 11-2. ROC-V usage table ........................................................................................... 11-3 Table 11-3. Tracking board usage table .............................................................................. 11-5 Table 11-4. Vehicle-to-target distance ................................................................................. 11-7 Table 11-5. Usage Table ...................................................................................................... 11-7 Table 11-6. Laser Target Interface Device usage table ....................................................... 11-7 Table 11-7. Thru-sight video usage table ............................................................................. 11-8 Table 11-8. Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System usage table ............................ 11-8 Table 11-9. COFT usage table ............................................................................................. 11-9 Table 11-10. Call for fire trainer usage table ...................................................................... 11-10 Table 11-11. HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer usage table ......................................... 11-11 Table 11-12. Engagement Skills Trainer 2000 usage table ............................................... 11-12 Table 11-13. Simulations Network usage table.................................................................. 11-14 Table 11-14. Close Combat Tactical Trainer usage table .................................................. 11-15 Table 11-15. Dummy rounds usage table .......................................................................... 11-16 Table 11-16. Requisition information.................................................................................. 11-18 Table 11-17. Caliber .50 inbore device usage table........................................................... 11-19 Table 11-18. Advanced Gunnery Training System usage table ........................................ 11-21 Table 11-19. Dummy rounds usage table .......................................................................... 11-23 Table 11-20. Requisition information.................................................................................. 11-24 Table 11-21. Precision Gunnery System usage table ........................................................ 11-25 Table 11-22. Bradley Advanced Training System usage table .......................................... 11-27 Table 11-23. Dummy rounds usage table .......................................................................... 11-29 Table 11-24. Requisition information.................................................................................. 11-31 Table 11-25. Virtual Convoy Combat Trainer ..................................................................... 11-32 Table 12-1. Gunnery tables .................................................................................................. 12-4 Table 12-2. Crew gunnery simulations prerequisites for live-fire ......................................... 12-6 Table 13-1. Formula for determining length of maneuver box ............................................. 13-9 Table 13-2. Dimensions for 25-mm M792 (HEI-T) ammunition ......................................... 13-11 Table 13-3. Dimensions for 7.62-mm M80 (A131) ammunition ......................................... 13-12 Table 13-4. Sample ballistic firing table for cartridge, APDS-T (muzzle velocity 1,345 mps) ................................................................................................................ 13-13 Table 13-5. Scaled ranges ................................................................................................. 13-14 Table 14-1. Gunnery skills test task list ................................................................................ 14-6 Table 14-2. Gunnery table I task list................................................................................... 14-11 Table 15-1. Vehicle target kill standards .............................................................................. 15-9 Table 16-1. Gunnery table structure..................................................................................... 16-2

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

xxv

Contents

Table 16-2. Gunnery table ammunition allocation ............................................................... 16-3 Table 16-3. Standard task numbering system ..................................................................... 16-4 Table 16-4. Minimum proficiency levels for stabilized platforms ......................................... 16-7 Table 16-5. Minimum proficiency levels application by engagement .................................. 16-8 Table 16-6. Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course ................................................... 16-13 Table 16-7. Example of Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course (GT II-CPC) ........... 16-14 Table 16-8. Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun .......................................................... 16-15 Table 16-9. Example of Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun (GT III) ........................... 16-16 Table 16-10. Gunnery Table IV, Basic Main Gun .............................................................. 16-17 Table 16-11. Example of Gunnery Table IV, Basic Main Gun (GT IV) ............................. 16-18 Table 16-12. Gunnery Tables II and IV, Basic Machine Gun and Main Gun (GT 34) ....... 16-19 Table 16-13. Example of Gunnery Tables III and IV, Basic Machine Gun and Main Gun (Table 34) ............................................................................................... 16-20 Table 16-14. Gunnery Table V, Crew Practice .................................................................. 16-21 Table 16-15. Example of Gunnery Table V, Crew Practice (GT V) ................................... 16-22 Table 16-16. Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification .......................................................... 16-23 Table 16-17. Crew Qualification rating criteria................................................................... 16-23 Table 16-18. Example of Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification (GT VI) .......................... 16-24 Table 17-1. Unstabilized platform gunnery tables ............................................................... 17-2 Table 17-2. Minimum proficiency levels, unstabilized platforms.......................................... 17-4 Table 17-3. Annual ammunition roll-up ................................................................................ 17-8 Table 17-4. Task numbering and MPL application matrix ................................................... 17-9 Table 17-5. Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course ................................................... 17-14 Table 17-6. Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun .......................................................... 17-16 Table 17-7. Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun ........................................ 17-19 Table 17-8. Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice .......................................................... 17-22 Table 17-9. Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course ............................................... 17-25 Table 17-10. Crew Qualification rating criteria................................................................... 17-25 Table 18-1. Tables VII, VIII, and IX minimum required targets per vehicle/squad ............ 18-10 Table 18-2. Tables X, XI, and XII minimum required targets per vehicle/squad ............... 18-10 Table 18-3. Table VII–Section Proficiency Exercise .......................................................... 18-11 Table 18-4. Table VII–Ammunition allocations per vehicle ................................................ 18-11 Table 18-5. Table VIII–Section Practice ............................................................................ 18-12 Table 18-6. Table VIII–Ammunition allocations per vehicle............................................... 18-12 Table 18-7. Table IX–Section Qualification ....................................................................... 18-13 Table 18-8. Table IX–Ammunition allocations per vehicle ................................................. 18-13 Table 18-9. Table X–Platoon Proficiency Exercise ........................................................... 18-15 Table 18-10. Table X–Ammunition allocations per vehicle................................................ 18-16 Table 18-11. Table XI–Platoon Practice ............................................................................ 18-16 Table 18-12. Table XI–Ammunition allocations per vehicle............................................... 18-17 Table 18-13. Table XII–Platoon Qualification .................................................................... 18-17

xxvi

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Table 18-14. Table XII–Ammunition allocations per vehicle .............................................. 18-18 Table 19-1. Ammunition allocation for armor/cavalry units (per vehicle) ............................. 19-9 Table 19-2. Ammunition allocation for mortar (per gun) ...................................................... 19-9 Table 19-3. Ammunition allocation for artillery units (per bn/btry)...................................... 19-10 Table 19-4. Ammunition allocation for infantry units (per gun) .......................................... 19-10 Table 19-5. Example of a direct-fire computation sheet..................................................... 19-19 Table 19-6. Example of Class V expenditure ..................................................................... 19-20 Table 19-6. Example of Class V expenditure (continued) .................................................. 19-21 Table 19-7. Example of a CALFEX summary sheet .......................................................... 19-22 Table A-1. Reticle adjustment guide ......................................................................................A-7 Table A-2. M1A1 computer correction factors..................................................................... A-10 Table A-3a. Example 1 ........................................................................................................ A-14 Table A-3b. Example 2 ........................................................................................................ A-14 Table A-3c. Example 3 ........................................................................................................ A-14 Table A-4. M1A1 sight correction factors ............................................................................ A-20 Table A-5. M1A2 SEP computer correction factors ............................................................ A-23 Table A-6. M1A2 SEP/V2 sight correction factors .............................................................. A-38 Table A-7. Nominal temperature values for M1A1 and M1A2 SEP/V2 fire control input .... A-40 Table A-8. Barometric pressure values for M1A1 and M1A2 SEP/V2 fire control input .... A-41 Table A-9. Abrams pre-fire checklist ................................................................................... A-43 Table A-10. Nitrogen gas temperature versus precharge pressure chart........................... A-46 Table A-11. Causes of fault indication in the GPS field of view .......................................... A-48 Table A-12. Causes of computer self-test failure ................................................................ A-49 Table A-13. Abrams combined solution board dimensions ................................................. A-51 Table A-14a. M1A1 (upgraded CEU chart) ballistic computer inputs for check 4 .............. A-55 Table A-14b. M1A1 ballistic computer inputs for check 4 ................................................... A-55 Table A-15a. M1A1 (upgraded CEU chart) ballistic computer inputs for check 5 .............. A-59 Table A-15b. M1A1 ballistic computer inputs for check 5 ................................................... A-60 Table A-16. Nitrogen gas temperature vs. pre-charge pressure chart ............................... A-62 Table A-17a. Temperature checks, old CEU ...................................................................... A-82 Table A-17b. Temperature checks, new CEU..................................................................... A-82 Table A-18a. Screening test actions checklist (M1A1) ....................................................... A-88 Table A-18b. Screening test actions checklist (M1A1) (continued) .................................... A-89 Table A-19a. Screening test actions checklist (M1A2 SEP) ............................................... A-90 Table A-19b. Screening test actions checklist (M1A2 SEP) (continued) ............................ A-91 Table A-20. Dimensions of screening targets under unusual conditions (120mm) ............ A-96 Table A-21. Mil relation for various targets ....................................................................... A-126 Table B-1. Inch-to-mil conversion chart .............................................................................. B-29 Table B-2. Distance (in inches) between crosses and lower left hand corner or closein boresight panel............................................................................................. B-48 Table B-3. Cross colors and line widths .............................................................................. B-49

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

xxvii

Contents

Table B-4. Length of lines on crosses ................................................................................. B-49 Table B-5. Example format for pre-fire checklist.................................................................. B-52 Table B-6. Example format for Bradley A3 gunner’s pre-fire checklist, part 1..................... B-53 Table B-7. Example format for Bradley A3 commander’s pre-fire checklist, part 2 ............. B-54 Table C-1. Pre-fire checklist................................................................................................. C-15 Table C-2. Windage and elevation (peep sight) correction chart for the M249 SAW.......... C-17 Table C-3. Elevation correction chart for the M240B ........................................................... C-19 Table C-4. Windage correction chart for the M240B ........................................................... C-19 Table C-5. Machine gun sight offset data ............................................................................ C-30 Table C-5. Machine gun sight offset data (continued) ......................................................... C-31 Table C-5. Machine gun sight offset data (continued) ......................................................... C-32 Table D-1. M16A2/M4 carbine rifle technical data ................................................................. D-2 Table D-2. M4/M16-series weapons ammunition .................................................................. D-3 Table D-3. M203 40-mm grenade launcher technical data ................................................... D-4 Table D-4. M203 40-mm grenade launcher ammunition ....................................................... D-5 Table D-5. M249 SAW 5.56-mm machine gun technical data............................................... D-6 Table D-6. M249 SAW 5.56-mm machine gun ammunition .................................................. D-7 Table D-7. M240B 7.62-mm machine gun ammunition ......................................................... D-7 Table D-8. M240B 7.62-mm machine gun technical data ..................................................... D-8 Table D-9. M136AT4 lightweight anti-armor weapon technical data ..................................... D-9 Table D-10. M136 AT4 lightweight anti-armor weapon actions and effects .......................... D-9 Table D-11. Javelin antitank guided missile technical data ................................................. D-11 Table F-1. Examples of potential hazards ............................................................................. F-2 Table F-2. Risk levels and impact on mission execution ....................................................... F-3 Table F-3. Risk assessment matrix ....................................................................................... F-3 Table F-4. M1A1/M1A2 SEP ammunition fire exit procedures .............................................. F-9 Table F-5. Tank rollover procedures.................................................................................... F-11 Table F-6. Bradley rollover procedures ............................................................................... F-13 Table G-1. ASV pre-fire checklist...........................................................................................G-8 Table G-2. Mil relation for various targets ............................................................................G-15 Table H-1. Mortar Table frequency ........................................................................................ H-2 Table H-2. Mortar Table 1 FDC examination ......................................................................... H-9 Table H-3. Mortar Table 1 gunner's examination ................................................................ H-10 Table H-4. Mortar Table 2 FDC examination ....................................................................... H-10 Table H-5. Mortar Table 2 gunner's examination ................................................................ H-11 Table H-6. Mortar Table 3 FDC training .............................................................................. H-11 Table H-7. Mortar Table 3 squad training ............................................................................ H-12 Table H-8. Mortar Table 4 FDC qualification ....................................................................... H-13 Table H-9. Mortar Table 4 squad qualification ..................................................................... H-14 Table H-10. Mortar Table 5 machine gun crew training/qualification .................................. H-15 Table H-11. Mortar Table 6 section training - dry/conventional mode................................. H-16

xxviii

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Contents

Table H-12. Mortar Table 7 section qualification - dry/conventional mode ......................... H-17 Table H-13. Mortar Table 8 section qualification - live/conventional mode ........................ H-18 Table H-14. Mortar Table 9 mortar section/platoon STX lanes - dry/live/digital mode ....... H-19 Table H-15. Mortar Table 10 section/platoon training - dry/digital mode ............................ H-20 Table H-16. Mortar Table 11 section/platoon qualification - dry/digital mode ..................... H-21 Table H-17. Mortar Table 12 section/platoon qualification - EXEVAL/LFX/digital mode .... H-22

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

xxix

Preface FM 3-20.21 describes how crews, sections, platoons, and companies organic to the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) and Armored Cavalry Regiment (ACR) train for combat weapon system proficiency. It provides principles and techniques for the individual, crew, section, platoon, and company to engage and destroy enemy targets efficiently in any given operational environment (OE). FM 3-20.21 is designed for commanders, Master Gunners, and trainers of maneuver and sustainment units within the HBCT and ACR. FM 3-20.21 outlines Abrams tank, Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV), and armored High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV) gunnery tables (GT) designed for crew through company to attain and sustain tactical gunnery proficiency. Some operations will, at times, require maneuver units to operate independently at the section and platoon level, which may consist of a variety of task organizations that include but are not limited to tank/Bradley/armed HMMWV-pure sections and platoons or tanks, Bradleys, and/or armed HMMWVs combined, or tanks in support of infantry. The tasks, conditions, and standards on the GTs are based on a thorough analysis of gunnery engagement factors and are based on actual hit or kill probabilities of threat versus U.S. platform weapons systems. Most of the tasks can be found in the related military occupational specialty (MOS) Soldier’s manuals and mission training plans. All HBCT and ACR units are encouraged to recommend ideas to upgrade the tasks, conditions, and standards in this manual. FM 3-20.21 applies to the Active Army, the Army National Guard/Army National Guard of the United States (ARNGUS), and the United States Army Reserve (USAR) unless otherwise stated. Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men. The proponent of this publication is HQ, TRADOC. Submit changes for improving this publication on DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) and forward it to Director, Directorate of Training, Doctrine, Combat Development, and Experimentation (DTDCD-E), ATTN: ATZK-TDD-G, 204 1st Cavalry Regiment Road Ste 216, U.S. Army Armor Center, Fort Knox, KY 40121-5123. Additional information is available at (502) 624-7323/2908 or DSN 464-7323/2908. Other points of contact for information presented in this manual are (by category): z Abrams tanks: „ TRADOC Capabilities Manager for HBCT, TCM-HBCT, DSN 464-7955 or Commercial (Comm) (502) 624-7955. „ DTDCD-E, ATZK-TDD-ORSA, DSN 464-3042 or Comm (502) 624-3042. z Abrams tank gun tubes (technical): TACOM-Rock Island, IL, AMSTA-LC-GAW, DSN 793-2189/2777 or Comm (309) 782-2189/2777. z Abrams tank gun tubes (safety engineering): TACOM-Rock Island, AMSTA-CS-CZR, DSN 793-2995 or Comm (309) 782-2995. z Ammunition-missile: Project Office, Close Combat Weapons Systems, Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898, Comm (256) 876-0728. z Ammunition-projectile: Project Manager, Maneuver Ammunition Systems, Picatinny, NJ, DSN 880-3405/4622 or Comm (973) 724-3405/4622. z BFVs: Stryker/Bradley Proponency Office, Fort Benning, GA, DSN 784-6491 or Comm (706) 544-6491. z Infantry doctrine: Commandant, United States Army Infantry School (USAIS), ATTN: ATSHATD, Fort Benning, GA 31905-5410.

xxx

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Preface

z z z

z

z

z

Reconnaissance gunnery doctrine: DTDCD-E, ATZK-TD, DSN 464-4453 or Comm (502) 624-4453. Simulations: Advanced Gunnery Training Systems (AGTS) family: Gunnery Branch, DTDCDE, COFT SME, Fort Knox, KY 40121, DSN 464-5806/3633 or Comm (502) 624-5806/3633. Simulations: Bradley Advanced Training System (BATS) and M2 Conduct-of-Fire Trainers (COFT): Stryker/Bradley Proponency Office, Fort Benning, GA, DSN 784-6491 or Comm (706) 544-6491. Simulations: Brigade Combat Team (BCT) COFT XXI, Abrams Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer (A-FIST) XXI, and M1A1 Tabletop Gunnery Trainer (TGT): National Guard Representative Office of the Special Assistant to the Commanding General (CG), Fort Knox, KY, DSN 464-3214 or Comm (502) 624-3214. Simulations: COFT XXI, BCT COFT XXI, Advanced Bradley Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer (AB-FIST), and M2 TFT: Senior Bradley Master Gunner ARNG, SACG-ARNG, USAIC, Fort Benning, GA 31905, DSN 835-5741 or Comm (706) 545-5741. Training Device: Caliber .50 Inbore Device (Abrams): Chief, Systems Branch (Armor Training Devices), DTDCD-E, Fort Knox, KY, DSN 464-5656 or Comm (502) 624-5656.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

xxxi

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 1

Introduction To defeat the enemy force in today’s operational environment (OE) while avoiding fratricide and collateral damage, crews within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) and Armored Cavalry Regiment (ACR) must have a thorough knowledge of the functional capabilities of their platform weapon systems, the techniques of combat identification (CID), and the effective use of all crew-served weapons. In addition, HBCT and ACR crews must develop and sustain tactical skills that will allow them to maneuver effectively and survive on the battlefield. This combination of crew gunnery and tactical skills is essential for total weapon system proficiency. Field Manual (FM) 3-20.21 provides a systematic way to train weapon system proficiency for armor, mechanized infantry, reconnaissance, engineers, fire support combat platform systems within the HBCT and ACR, as well as sustainment unit vehicles armed with crew-served weapons. It includes an assessment of combined gunnery skills in crew gunnery tables (GT) and application in collective tactical tables. FM 3-20.21 provides basic guidance on platform system employment and crew-, section-, and platoon-level tactics. Marine Corps Warfighting Publication (MCWP) 3-12.2 (M1A1 Tank Gunnery only). Marine Corps designation of this publication applies to M1A1 tank doctrine and tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) only. Its use is not intended for other USMC gunnery.

SECTION I – PURPOSE Contents Section I – Purpose ................................... 1-1 Section II – Scope ..................................... 1-2

Section III – General Changes .................. 1-2 Chapters ............................................. 1-3 Appendices ......................................... 1-7

1-1. The purpose of FM 3-20.21 is to produce qualified sections and platoons within the HBCT and ACR. With the paradigm shift from platform-centric to organization-centric, gunnery training and integration strategies for all platforms within the HBCT and ACR are included in this manual. The direct fire engagement process for all systems have been defined under the method detect, identify, decide, engage, and assess (DIDEA). CID encompasses the detect-identify-decide portions of DIDEA. The HBCT’s fires battalion and the fire support personnel organic to the maneuver units use FM 3-09.8 to conduct field artillery (FA) section indirect fire skill proficiency training and qualification. 1-2. The gunnery principles in this manual are designed to support HBCT and ACR units and the direct fire engagement process. They allow the commander to have the flexibility to develop his gunnery program tailored to the OE that coincides with the unit mission. Threat target arrays (target types and ranges) should be developed based on the threat template for the unit mission. Urban clusters and friendly and

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

1-1

Chapter 1

noncombatant targetry allow the commander to develop more realistic scenarios that exercise the direct fire engagement process using DIDEA. 1-3. FM 3-20.21 describes system features and ammunition characteristics, training aids/devices/simulations and simulators (TADSS), engagement techniques, preliminary gunnery training, gunnery skills tests (GST), GTs, and qualification standards for all direct fire crew weapons. When the procedures in this manual conflict with the procedures in the technical manual (TM), the TM should be followed. 1-4. FM 3-20.21 is intended to be a guide. Units may modify the gunnery program to meet local training constraints, except for qualification tables. Units must evaluate training to make sure it adheres to sound training policy and provides the unit commander with a viable assessment tool.

SECTION II – SCOPE 1-5. FM 3-20.21 outlines HBCT and ACR platform weapon system GTs designed to attain and sustain crew through platoon tactical gunnery proficiency. FM 3-20.21 describes how to— z Develop a unit gunnery training program. z Conduct the direct fire engagement process. z Distribute and control fires as the leader of a squad, section, or platoon. z Employ the Abrams tank, Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV), and armed High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV). z Integrate training devices into unit gunnery training. z Establish new training sites for combat training. z Boresight the weapon systems. z Conduct pre-fire checks. z Conduct a live-fire accuracy screening test (LFAST) and/or zeroing procedures. z Compensate for the loss of a crew member or a malfunction in the fire control system. 1-6. FM 3-20.21 also describes the— z Characteristics, capabilities, and employment of ammunition used on the platform weapon systems organic to the HBCT and ACR. z Tasks, conditions, standards, and administrative guides for GSTs on all HBCT and ACR combat platform systems. z Procedures for developing tactical scenarios to support collective gunnery. z GTs and tactical tables used to determine individual, crew, and platoon gunnery proficiency. Note. Critical procedural information contained in the operator’s manuals, which are listed in the references section, may be repeated in this manual for emphasis.

SECTION III – GENERAL CHANGES 1-7. This section provides a general overview of the chapters of the HBCT Gunnery Manual. FM 3-20.21 is a compilation of direct fire weapon systems information from a variety of FMs, technical bulletins (TB), training circulars (TC), and other documents in order to provide a single source for direct fire gunnery planning and execution for the HBCT. 1-8. The following manuals’ information has been incorporated herein to facilitate the gunnery planning of the HBCT commander and staff: z FM 3-20.8. z FM 3-20.12. z FM 3-22.1. z FM 17-12-7.

1-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Introduction

1-9. Below is a synopsis of the chapters and their content.

CHAPTERS CHAPTER 2, PLATFORM SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS 1-10. Chapter 2 describes the weapons platforms available within the HBCT. Chapter 2 does not include small arms individual or crew-served weapons. Its purpose is to provide a general overview of the platform’s capabilities, limitations, restrictions, and performance data that will help the staff plan their training. 1-11. Specific weapons of the platforms, including small arms crew-serve weapons are discussed in Chapter 3.

CHAPTER 3, PLATFORM WEAPON SYSTEMS CAPABILITIES 1-12. Chapter 3 describes the common crew-served weapons that may be mounted on vehicles or are part of a weapons platform. Chapter 3 details the common characteristics, capabilities, and limitations for the weapons and their employment.

CHAPTER 4, AMMUNITION 1-13. Chapter 4 includes all the ammunition fired from crew-served weapons, including 5.56mm for squad automatic weapon (SAW), 7.62 for the M240 series, caliber .50, 25mm, 40mm for MK19 Mod 3, 120mm Abrams, 120mm mortar, missiles, and smoke grenades for the launchers. 1-14. In the most recent manuals incorporated into the HBCT Gunnery Manual, ammunition was part of the characteristics and description chapter. The volume of information on the different ammunition in the HBCT was so large that it required a logical approach to presenting the information in order to meet the needs of commanders, staff, Master Gunners, planners, and crewmen. 1-15. The ammunition is listed in order by caliber, from smallest to largest, with special purpose munitions and missiles located near the end of the chapter. 1-16. Added/corrected North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) symbols based on Standardized Agreement (STANAG) 2316 and 2322. 1-17. Lot number definitions and descriptions have been added. Color coding system has been updated. Small arms common packaging with appropriate case/carton/can markings has been added. 1-18. Ammunition descriptions for 25mm and above have been enhanced to provide better information to staff and users of the munition types. 1-19. A new section titled planning considerations has been added to help the staff sections plan for tactical and gunnery training events. This includes marking transportation vehicles correctly, max load capabilities, standard pallet pack sizes and weights. 1-20. An overall general ammunition safety section deals primarily with safety-of-use messages (SOUM), ammunition information notices (AIN), and verification of suspended lot instructions for the range officer in charge (OIC), range safety officer (RSO), Master Gunner, and gunnery noncommissioned officer (NCO) use. This information is provided to augment the safety practices of the ammunition supply point as directed in DA Pamphlet 385-63.

CHAPTER 5, DETECT 1-21. Chapter 5 is based on the initial section of the DIDEA process, which is the framework for the direct fire engagement. Chapter 5 describes the detection process and provides crew search techniques, detection guidelines, and classification criteria of threat targets.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

1-3

Chapter 1

CHAPTER 6, IDENTIFY 1-22. Chapter 6 deals with the second section of the DIDEA process. Chapter 6 describes the methods to accurately identify potential threats and classify them correctly. Chapter 6 also details identification of friendly forces and marking systems that may be used on the battlefield to reduce the possibility of fratricide.

CHAPTER 7, DECIDE 1-23. Chapter 7 develops crew decision-making procedures as part of the DIDEA process. Chapter 7 describes the methods used by crews to determine the appropriate means of engagement, using direct or indirect fires.

CHAPTER 8, ENGAGE – DIRECT AND INDIRECT FIRES (CREW) 1-24. Chapter 8 provides the methods and procedures for engaging hostile forces from a crew platform, using direct and indirect commands. These procedures are detailed in five sections: z Section I – Battlecarry. Section I defines the battlecarry procedures and its intended purpose. Section I provides information on how to determine battlesight ranges based on ammunition type and most probable threat targets. z Section II – Fire Commands. Section II provides all the basic fire command elements and their use. Section II details the appropriate standard commands and the crew duties and responsibilities in relation to those commands. z Section III – Engagement Techniques. Section III discusses the various techniques for engaging targets with machine guns. Note. The primary references for engagement techniques for a vehicle’s main armament are located in the respective appendix. This is done to standardize the manual in common chapters and provided vehicle specific information as appropriate in a stand-alone appendix. z z

Section IV – Sample Fire Commands. Section IV provides examples of various fire commands that crews must be proficient at issuing. Section V – Indirect Fire. Section V provides the crew members the minimum call for fire (CFF) requirements, their definitions, purpose, and order. This goal of this section is to provide a baseline CFF format for crews to build from during their gunnery training.

1-25. Precision versus degraded gunnery. These are still "methods of engagement," however; they do not have the same impact on fire commands as standard and reduced fire commands. “Precision” fire commands have been defined more clearly and are strictly relative to the firing vehicle. 1-26. Standard and reduced fire commands are defined in detail. All seven elements are the standard. Use of less than seven elements is a “reduced” fire command. For example, if the fire control system of a firing platform provides range, a crew would "reduce" the range element from the fire command. If the commander can lay the firer's weapon for direction, he can "reduce" the direction element from the fire command. The "reduced" fire command does not apply to reducing the alert and weapon/ammunition elements of the fire command only, as in previous versions of various gunnery manuals. It applies to the capabilities and limitations of the firing platform’s fire control system. 1-27. For the Bradley community, this change directly affects your use of the reduced fire command. Full and reduced fire commands are not mandated based on the firing vehicle posture (offense or defense), rather, their use is based solely on the current operational functionality of the platform. This actually helps when describing precision vs. degraded fire commands when dealing with the M2A2 without the laser range finder (LRF) or kinematic lead.

1-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Introduction

1-28. Several changes within the fire commands section are a shift from previous versions of the respective gunnery manuals; Abrams, Bradley, and Scout. The goal of FM 3-20.21 is to standardize, where practical, common subject matter across all combat vehicle platforms. 1-29. These are only some of the highlights of this chapter. Crews must be thoroughly familiar and well versed in the conduct of fire for their platforms and must have an in depth understanding of the contents of this chapter to be the most effective on the range and in combat.

CHAPTER 9, ENGAGE – COLLECTIVE 1-30. Chapter 9 describes the methodology behind engaging targets as section- and platoon-size elements. Direct and indirect fire planning are discussed in detail. Direct fire engagement is the highlight of this chapter and includes a couple of minor changes to current collective engagement techniques. 1-31. A WEAPON CONTROL STATUS has been added as a part of the fire command. This will give the section or platoon leader the ability to control the fires of their element while still allowing the flexibility to engage targets as they present themselves based on the weapon control status given. 1-32. ORIENTATION is no longer an optional element to the fire command.

CHAPTER 10, ASSESS 1-33. Chapter 10 is the final chapter that deals with the DIDEA process. Chapter 10 provides the methods of accurately assessing the effects of fires (both direct and indirect) employed by the vehicle crewmen in the HBCT.

CHAPTER 11, TRAINING DEVICES 1-34. Chapter 11 is a companion to TC 25-8. It provides the staff an overview of the primary training devices that are available in the Army Training Support Center system, as well as some commercial offthe-shelf (COTS) products that enhance the gunnery training program for the unit.

CHAPTER 12, GUNNERY TRAINING PROGRAM 1-35. Chapter 12 describes the methodology and requirements for training vehicle crews to be successful at gunnery. Chapter 12 covers preparatory training for all weapons platforms and is outlined so that units lacking Master Gunners will have a sufficient basis of knowledge to train their vehicle crews effectively.

CHAPTER 13, RANGE OPERATIONS 1-36. Chapter 13 outlines the procedures for successfully planning, coordination, and execution of a gunnery density through all phases. Sample training plans are included to assist units without Master Gunner support.

CHAPTER 14, INDIVIDUAL AND CREW LIVE-FIRE PREREQUISITE TRAINING 1-37. Chapter 14 incorporates former prerequisite testing (Tank Crew Gunnery Skills Tests [TCGST], Bradley Gunnery Skills Test [BGST]) under a consolidated prerequisite testing format. This testing consists of two parts–GST and GT I (GT I - Crew Critical Skills Test). 1-38. GST consolidates and replaces previous editions of prerequisite gunnery testing for Abrams and Bradley crews in addition to adding truck crews. This testing focuses on the individual skills required of vehicle crewmen to safely and successfully perform selected critical gunnery tasks. All GST testing consists of six tasks for each weapons platform. Two of those six tasks are common to all weapons platforms and will be conducted by all vehicle crewmen, the other four tasks are vehicle specific. Soldiers will be tested on their assigned specific weapon platform. 1-39. GST is a requirement prior to conducting GT II, the Preliminary Crew Proficiency Course (PCPC).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

1-5

Chapter 1

1-40. GT I, Crew Critical Skills Test, is an additional prerequisite test that focuses on critical tasks that are performed by the vehicle crew. As with GST, GT I consists of weapons platform specific tasks and common tasks that will be conducted by all crewmen prior to advancement to GT II.

CHAPTER 15, CREW EVALUATION 1-41. Chapter 15 details the entire crew gunnery training model and its evaluation. Chapter 15 thoroughly describes the evaluation process, threat matrices for point calculation, sample scoresheets, and the evaluator roles and responsibilities. 1-42. As the evaluation is a hybrid model of Abrams, Bradley, and truck gunnery models of previous books, crews must master the evaluation process prior to any gunnery density. To augment their training, a Master Gunner toolbox has been established with the Vehicle Crew Evaluator Exportable Package (VCEEP) to facilitate certification of unit’s evaluators. Visit https://www.us.army.mil/suite/kc/9773910 on the Army Knowledge Online (AKO) website for tools and supporting products for the evaluation process, classes, automated score sheets, and more. Users must have a valid AKO account for access to be granted.

CHAPTER 16, STABILIZED PLATFORM GUNNERY 1-43. Chapter 16 outlines the new design of the gunnery training tables for Abrams, Bradley, and Guardian Armored Security Vehicle (ASV) crews. They contain all targetry requirements, minimum proficiency levels (MPL), ammunition requirements, and task, conditions, and standards for all engagements in during crew gunnery. 1-44. The Table numbering system for the crew tables has been adjusted, removing any tables that were provided using simulators. The updated table names are listed in the following paragraphs for clarity. 1-45. GT II, Crew Proficiency Course, is the updated title for Bradley Crew Proficiency Course (BCPC) and Tank Crew Proficiency Course (TCPC) from previous gunnery manuals. This remains a live fire prerequisite for all crews. 1-46. GT III, Basic Machine Gun, is strictly used for machine gun training, but is designed to be fired as a stand alone table with five engagements, or as a “Table 34” including five engagements from GT IV, Basic Main Gun Training. 1-47. GT IV, Basic Main Gun, may be fired as a stand alone table, or with GT III, Basic Machine Gun Training, as listed above. 1-48. GT V, Crew Practice, is the updated title for previous gunnery manual editions’ Table VII, and serves as the final practice live-fire event prior to crew qualification. 1-49. GT VI, Crew Qualification is the updated title for previous gunnery manual edition’s Table VIII, and serves as the crew qualification requirement for Abrams and Bradley crews. Further, it is the live-fire prerequisite for advancing to section gunnery.

CHAPTER 17, UNSTABILIZED PLATFORM GUNNERY 1-50. Chapter 17 outlines standardized truck gunnery for all vehicles with crew-served weapons within the HBCT. This crew gunnery training methodology includes scouts, military police (MP), unstabilized ASV variants, as well as sustainment unit vehicles. 1-51. The gunnery methodology listed in Chapter 17 uses the standardized scoring procedures as listed in Chapter 15. 1-52. Units are encouraged to use this training model for all vehicles, whether wheeled or tracked, that do not have a mounted maneuver gunnery model listed in a separate FM. For example, a unit’s supply sergeant that is assigned a Light Medium Tactical Vehicle (LMTV) with caliber .50 machine gun may fire these tables as mounted qualification prior to a collective convoy live-fire exercise (LFX).

1-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Introduction

CHAPTER 18, COLLECTIVE GUNNERY 1-53. Chapter 18 outlines the execution of section and platoon gunnery qualification. Section gunnery (Combat Tables VII, VIII and IX) is now a prerequisite to platoon gunnery qualification (Combat Tables X, XI and XII). 1-54. Commanders are given the freedom to assemble and qualify their sections and platoons as either vehicle type pure or combined arms mixed. Some examples of all combinations are included with this chapter. 1-55. Targetry requirements in this chapter have been specifically linked to the ammunition resourced plus any first round hit savings (a.k.a. “harvested”) ammunition available to the firing crews. Target requirements based on ammunition availability allows the unit commander to tailor his force in a mixed fashion that meets his desired end-state platoon composition. For example, if a commander wishes one of his platoons to include one tank, one Bradley, and two armed HMMWVs, the ammunition is resourced by vehicle, and determines the appropriate maximum number of targets for scenario development. 1-56. In-depth descriptions and sample scenarios are provided to assist units in their collective scenario development process.

CHAPTER 19, COMBINED ARMS LIVE-FIRE EXERCISE 1-57. Chapter 19 is dedicated to the capabilities of the commander and staff to develop, plan, coordinate, execute, and evaluate combined arms LFX from platoon (+) to task force level. It includes sample scenarios for both single training area and simultaneous multiple range complex, training area, and firing point use.

APPENDICES 1-58. The appendices are divided into packets for specific platforms. The purpose of these appendices is for each crew to have a copy for gunnery as well as deployment. The chapters listed above are predominantly used as a reference for planning purposes; the appendices to augment the crew’s technical manuals to conduct common tasks. z Appendix A, Abrams Live-Fire Preparation. z Appendix B, Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation. z Appendix C, Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation. z Appendix D, Rifle Squad Gunnery. z Appendix E, Engineer Squad Qualification Tables. z Appendix F, Safety. z Appendix G, Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation. z Appendix H, 120-mm Mortar Gunnery. 1-59. These appendices are specifically designed to reduce the printable requirements for the crew and squad.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

1-7

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 2

Platform Systems Characteristics All weapons platform systems within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) contribute to the combined arms effort. They provide the infantry, armor, reconnaissance, engineer, and fire support elements with firepower, armor protection, and battlefield agility. To employ weapons platform systems within the HBCT effectively, Soldiers must know the characteristics of their vehicle, fire control, weapon systems, and ammunition. Chapter 2 specifically discusses the characteristics of the weapon platforms found within the HBCT.

Contents Section I – Abrams Systems .................... 2-1 M1A1 Model ....................................... 2-2 M1A1 AIM Model ................................ 2-2 M1A1 AIM SA Model .......................... 2-4 M1A2 SEP Model ............................... 2-5 M1A2 SEP V2 (Version 2) Model ....... 2-7 Section II – Bradley Fighting Vehicle Systems ..................................................... 2-9 M2A2 and M3A2 Models .................. 2-10 M2A2 ODS and M3A2 ODS Models . 2-10 M2A3 and M3A3 Models .................. 2-11 M7 Bradley Fire Support Team ........ 2-14

Section III – Guardian Armored Security Vehicle (M1117) ........................ 2-14 Section IV – Armed HMMWV Systems ... 2-16 M1025A2/M1026A1 Armed HMMWV Model ................................................ 2-16 M1114 Up-Armored Armed HMMWV Model ................................................ 2-17 M1151 Enhanced Up-Armored Armed HMMWV Model ..................... 2-17 Section V – M1064A3 Self-Propelled 120-mm Mortar Carrier ............................ 2-18

SECTION I – ABRAMS SYSTEMS 2-1. The current fielded models of the Abrams main battle tank include the following: z M1A1 (Army National Guard of the United States [ARNGUS]). z

M1A1 HA (heavy armor).

z

M1A1 AIM (Abrams integrated management) program.

z

M1A1 AIM ED (embedded diagnostics).

z

M1A1 AIM SA (situational awareness).

z

M1A2 SEP (system enhancement package) series.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

2-1

Chapter 2

M1A1 MODEL 2-2. The M1A1/M1A1 HA has the following characteristic (see Figure 2-1): z The 120-mm smoothbore cannon. z Increased armor protection (HA). z A chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) overpressurization system. z Digital electronic control unit (DECU) HA Model.

Figure 2-1. M1A1

M1A1 AIM MODEL 2-3. The M1A1 AIM program was designed to upgrade and extend the life of the aging M1A1 fleet. The AIM program rebuilds the M1A1 to “zero hours” and adds various upgrades. M1A1 AIM upgrades include— z Revised hull and turret network boxes (RHNB&TNB) (see Figure 2-2).

Figure 2-2. Revised hull and turret network boxes

2-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Systems Characteristics

z z

DECU for controlling and monitoring engine performance. Upgraded tank commander’s panel (UTCP) (see Figure 2-3).

Figure 2-3. Upgraded tank commander’s panel z

Eyesafe laser range finder (ELRF) (see Figure 2-4).

Figure 2-4. Eyesafe laser range finder z

EDs are built-in diagnostics that ease fault isolation and minimize the amount of diagnostic test equipment required to troubleshoot a fault.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

2-3

Chapter 2

z z z z

Pulse jet-air system (PJS) that assists in maintaining the vehicle’s air induction system. Battlefield override system that allows crews to override the tank’s automotive protective systems and operate the tank in emergency situations. Drivers hatch interlock. Increased armor protection.

M1A1 AIM SA MODEL 2-4. The M1A1 AIM SA adds the following upgrades to the M1A1 AIM upgrades: z Blue force tracker (BFT) Force XXI command and control system that allows the M1A1 AIM SA crew to communicate digitally with a wider spectrum of Army vehicles. z The First Generation Forward Looking, Infrared (FLIR) (1st Gen FLIR) radiant thermal sighting system, which gives the vehicle commander (VC) and gunner the ability to detect, identify, and engage targets more accurately at a greater range. The 2d Gen FLIR has 3X, 6X, 13X, 25X, and 50X magnifications. The 25X and 50X are digital magnifications of the 13X picture. The 6X is a digital magnification of the 3X picture. z A position navigation (POSNAV) system, which gives the crew the ability to use “far-target locate” to calculate grids to targets for accurate digital calls for fire. z A driver’s vision enhancement (DVE). The DVE is an uncooled, FLIR night-vision device. It has a sensor module and a display module. The DVE is a real-time thermal-imaging system that improves the driver’s SA during limited visibility operations (see Figure 2-5 through Figure 2-7).

Figure 2-5. Driver’s vision enhancement

2-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Systems Characteristics

Figure 2-6. Driver’s vision enhancement (front display)

Figure 2-7. Driver’s vision enhancement (rear connections)

M1A2 SEP MODEL 2-5. The M1A2 SEP tank system is designed to accommodate new and upgraded components required for the continually expanding performance requirements and to facilitate ease of maintenance (see Figure 2-8). This is accomplished within the same space as the M1A1 tank. Improvements to the M1A2 SEP include the following: z The M1A2 VC can acquire targets more rapidly using the Commanders Independent Thermal Viewer (CITV) (see Figure 2-9). The CITV decreases target hand-off time by integrating the target designate function incorporated in the Commanders Control Handle Assembly (CCHA). This allows the VC to acquire targets independently from the gunner and then designate the gunner to those targets.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

2-5

Chapter 2

Figure 2-8. M1A2 SEP z

z

Increased the accepted range parameters for ballistic solution calculation from 200 to 3990 +/-10 meters on the M1A1 series, to 200 to 4,990 +/- 10 meters on the M1A2 SEP series that has enhanced engagement range. A special ballistic range default parameter of 150 meters has been created for canister rounds. If a range is input outside of the appropriate range band for canister, the computer defaults to 150 meters to calculate ballistic solution. Lased ranges of 200 to 1,100 meters will generate a ballistic solution for canister. For manually inputted ranges or battlesight-toggled ranges ballistic solutions are generated between 25 and 1,100 meters for canister. Ballistic solutions for the coax are calculated between ranges of 25 and 2,000 meters.

Figure 2-9. Commander’s independent thermal viewer

2-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Systems Characteristics

z z

z

z z

z z

The technological advancement of the POSNAV allows the fire control system to apply dynamic cant to ballistic solutions for increased accuracy while on the move. The built-in fault management system allows crews and maintenance teams to identify and isolate malfunctions, in many cases with no external diagnostic test equipment. In a fraction of a second, tripped circuit breakers are automatically reset by the fault management software. This nonintrusive test leaves the crew unaware that this is even happening. The 1st Gen FLIR radiant thermal sighting system gives the VC and gunner the ability to detect, identify, and engage targets more accurately at a greater range. The 1st Gen FLIR has 3X, 6X, 13X, 25X, and 50X magnifications. The 25X and 50X are digital magnifications of the 13X picture. The 6X is a digital magnification of the 3X picture. Improved navigational capabilities with the Global Positioning System (GPS) built into the tank provides a more accurate positional update than the initial navigation system of the M1A2. Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2). The FBCB2 is a digital battlefield command information system. The FBCB2 and integrated communications, command, and control (IC3) give crews SA and real-time command and control. A thermal management system (air cooling unit) cools the inside of the tank to protect the electronics and provide crew comfort. The DVE is an uncooled, FLIR night-vision device. It has a sensor module and a display module. The DVE is a real-time thermal-imaging system that improves the driver’s SA during limited visibility operations.

M1A2 SEP V2 (VERSION 2) MODEL 2-6. The M1A2 SEP V2 adds the following upgrades to the M1A2 SEP upgrades: z Improved 2d Gen FLIR (Block I upgrade). z Improved hull system and turret system electronics with faster, more capable processors. z Six additional batteries for providing 8 to 10 hours of (engine off) turret operations. z Far-target-locate capability to calculate grids to targets for accurate digital calls for fire. z A DVE, which is a thermal periscope that replaces the AN/VVS-2 (infrared) IR driver’s night sight. z Improved turret armor packages.

M1 ABRAMS FUEL CONSUMPTION 2-7. The M1 Abrams series is powered by a 1500 hp Honeywell AGT1500, gas turbine engine. It has a six speed (four forward, and two reverse) Allison X-1100-3B Hydro-Kinetic Automatic transmission, giving the M1 a top speed of 42 mph (68 kmph) (governed) on paved roads, and 30 mph (48 kmph) crosscountry. The M1 Abrams series can be fueled with diesel fuel, kerosene, any grade of motor gasoline, JP-4 jet fuel, or JP-8 jet fuel. 2-8. The gas turbine propulsion system has high performance characteristics and high fuel consumption (starting up the turbine alone consumes nearly 11 gallons). Because the M1 Abrams uses so much fuel, is always a concern. Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 are charts to help planners decide how much fuel and ammunition is needed for Abrams tanks based on tactical maneuver operations (operations requiring movement with limited time spent with engines idling).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

2-7

Chapter 2

Table 2-1. Fuel consumption chart Number of Tanks in Element

Hours of Operation (Moving)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

1

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

550

600

650

700

2

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1100

1200

1300

1400

3

600

750

900

1050

1200

1350

1500

1650

1800

1950

2100

Transfe r

620

775

930

1085

1240

1395

1550

1705

1860

2015

2170

4

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

2800

RED

816

1020

1224

1488

1632

1836

2040

2244

2448

2652

2856

5

1000

1250

1500

1750

2000

2250

2500

2750

3000

3250

3500

6

1200

1500

1800

2100

2400

2700

3000

3300

3600

3900

4200

BLACK

1216

1520

1824

2128

2432

2736

3040

3344

3648

3952

4256

7

1400

1750

2100

2450

2800

3150

3500

3850

4200

4550

4900

8

1600

2000

2400

2800

3200

3600

4000

4400

4800

5200

5600

Transfer: When the units begin reporting transferring fuel from the front fuel cells to the rear. Dark Gray: When the units begin reporting their fuel status as red (approximately ½ fuel remaining). Black: When the units begin reporting their fuel status as black (approximately ¼ fuel remaining). Light Gray: Light gray shaded areas indicate two Heavy Expanded Mobility Tactical Trucks (HEMTT) are required to refuel entire element (based on a nominal 2,200 gals per HEMTT to allow for hot weather fuel expansion. Dark gray shaded areas indicate three HEMTTs are required to refuel entire element.

2-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Systems Characteristics

Table 2-2. Comparison of Abrams technical data by model Characteristics

M1A1 M1A1 AIM M1A1 AIM ED M1A1 AIM SA M1A2 SEP M1A2 SEP V2

Speed, Land

41.5 mph, 67 kph

Slope Climb

60%

Side Slope

40%

Trench Crossing (Inches)

108

Vertical Wall Climb (Inches)

49

Personnel Capacity (Crew Members)

4

120mm Ammunition Ready

17

18

120mm Ammunition Bustle Stowage

34 or 36

36

120mm Ammunition Hull Stowage

6

Caliber .50 Ammunition Ready

100

Caliber .50 Ammunition Stowed

900

M240 7.62-mm Coax Ammunition Ready

2,800

M240 7.62-mm Loader’s Ammunition Stowed

200

M240 7.62-mm Ammo Stowed

8,400

M16/M4 5.56-mm Ammo Stowed

210

Reference: Operation under Usual Conditions:

TM 9-2350-264-10-1

TM 9-2350-388-10-1

Reference: Operation under Unusual Conditions:

TM 9-2350-264-10-2

TM 9-2350-388-10-2

LIN

T13168

T13305

NSN

2350-01-087-1095

2350-01-328-5964

Weight (Combat Loaded)

67.6 Tons

68.5 Tons

Fuel Available/Fuel Usable

504 Gallons/498 Gallons

504 Gallons/445.4 Gallons

42

SECTION II – BRADLEY FIGHTING VEHICLE SYSTEMS 2-9. The original Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) models are the M2 Infantry Fighting Vehicle (IFV) and the M3 Cavalry Fighting Vehicle (CFV), both of which were fielded in 1983. The following are the model numbers that represent upgrades or differences in system configurations and capabilities: z M2A2 and M3A2. z

M2A2 ODS (Operation Desert Storm) and M3A2 ODS.

z

M2A2 ODS-E (engineer vehicle).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

2-9

Chapter 2

z

M2A3 and M3A3.

z

M7 Bradley Fire Support Team (BFIST).

M2A2 AND M3A2 MODELS 2-10. The A2 model offers several improvements over its predecessors. These improvements included an increase of 100 hp in the power train, 30-mm armor protection, armored-tile protection capability, and spall liners (see Figure 2-10).

Figure 2-10. M2A2/M3A2

M2A2 ODS AND M3A2 ODS MODELS 2-11. Lessons learned during ODS inspired the development of new Bradley models, the M2A2 ODS and M3A2 ODS. The ODS upgrades include the following: z ELRF. The ELRF is part of the vehicle’s Integrated Sight Unit (ISU). Using the ELRF, the crew can determine target ranges from 200 to 9,995 meters, accurate within 10 meters. The ELRF induces the weapon systems to superelevate for the determined range. z

z z z z z z

2-10

Tactical Navigation System (TACNAV). The TACNAV system comprises the precision lightweight GPS receiver (PLGR) and the Digital Compass System (DCS). It reports the vehicle’s position in three dimensions–longitude and latitude, grid location, and elevation. The PLGR works with the DCS to provide the BFV hull and turret azimuths, location, directions, distance to way points, and steer-to data. This information shows up on both the commander’s and driver’s compass displays. Improved vehicle stowage. Bench seats. A tenth-man seat. Mounted water ration heater. Electric lift for engine-access door. Outside stowage for personal gear.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Systems Characteristics

z z

z

Three 25-mm ammunition boxes. Each box contains 50 rounds of linked ammunition (a “hot box”). DVE. The DVE is an uncooled, FLIR night-vision device. It has a sensor module and a display module. The DVE is a real-time thermal-imaging system that improves the driver’s SA during limited visibility operations. FBCB2. The FBCB2 is a digital battlefield command information system. The FBCB2 and IC3 give A2 ODS and A3 crews SA and real-time command and control.

M2A3 AND M3A3 MODELS 2-12. Innovations on the digitized M2A3 and M3A3 BFV improve the BFV’s ability to shoot, move, and communicate (see Figure 2-11 and Table 2-3 on page 2-13): z Target Acquisition. Each A3 model has a commander’s independent viewer (CIV) and the Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS). „ CIV. The CIV gives the A3 dual-sight capability. With the CIV, the commander can acquire targets independently from the gunner. While the gunner “kills” acquired targets, the commander can search for new ones. He then designates the new targets and “hands them over” to the gunner. If for any reason the gunner cannot fire, the commander can do so from his station by selecting IBAS on the remote binocular display (RBD). The CIV can traverse a full circle (360 degrees) in azimuth and can depress and elevate from -22 to +60 degrees. The CIV uses 2d Gen FLIR technology and day-TV video. The video image from the CIV appears on the RBD. This allows the viewer to watch the image with both eyes at the same time. The gunner and squad leader can also watch this video signal. „ IBAS. On the A3, the gunner’s primary sight is the Target-Acquisition System (TAS), which is part of the IBAS. Like the CIV, the TAS employs 2d Gen FLIR technology and day-TV video. Like the A2 ODS, the TAS also has direct-view optics (DVO) and the ELRF. The TAS provides limited sight travel without the disturbing turret motion experienced in the earlier BFVs. The TAS periscope’s head mirror assembly provides 5 degrees of travel left or right of center and 17 degrees of travel above and below center. This extends the gunner sight’s elevation range from -22 to +60 degrees. This “independent” travel accommodates the aided target tracker (ATT) that allows the gunner to track two different targets within the same field of view (FOV) simultaneously. Using the autopoint function allows the system to slew quickly to the closest tracked box nearest the center of the reticle. As with the CIV, both the commander and the squad leader can see the TAS video image. The TAS is capable of zooming 4x to 12x optically and 24x 48x digitally to help identify the threat (digital zoom).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

2-11

Chapter 2

Figure 2-11. M2A3/M3A3 z z

z

z

z z

z z

2-12

Turret Drive System (TDS). The TDS moves the weapon and stabilizes the A3 weapon systems. The TDS responds to fire control system and crew inputs from the handstation. SA. Improvements to the sights and the commander’s tactical display (CTD) give the A3 commander a level of SA never before possible. The squad leader’s display (SLD), controlled by video selection buttons on the monitor, also gives passengers SA of the battlefield. It gives more information about the battlefield location of each vehicle in the company, team, or task force. It also gives operational graphics, and it lets the leader send and receive orders and mission updates and respond to an expanding area of operations. Electrical Power Control. The A3 has segregated electrical power control. This means that many of its components can keep working when others fail. Connection to a data bus provides redundant communications. The A3 has a 400-ampere current-regulated generator. The generator supplies power to six 24-volt hull batteries and one 24-volt emergency-backup turret battery. Fire Control. The A3’s fire control system allows the crew to independently search, track, and conduct target hand-off. Like the other BFVs, it also allows the commander to override the gunner and abort a fired missile. IC3. The IC3 digital battle command information system provides SA. It also offers real-time command and control information to A3 crews and squads. Navigation. The A3’s subsystem POSNAV provides the A3 with accurate positioning and navigation data. It works by combining GPS data with data obtained from an inertial navigation unit (INU) and a vehicle motion sensor (VMS). Using the CTD’s digital map, the crew can navigate by loading and selecting routes and overlays. CBRN Protection. The A3’s large gas particulate filter system has additional crew stations and heaters to provide CBRN protection to the entire crew and squads. Diagnostics. The A3’s built-in-test (BIT) continually monitors the system’s turret status. On the CTD, the BIT shows warnings and cautions about potentially dangerous faults. It recommends degraded modes of operation when needed. Using pre-mission and preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) checklists simplifies system maintenance.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Systems Characteristics

Table 2-3. Comparison of BFV technical data by model Characteristics

M2A2

Speed, Land

41 mph, 66 kph

Slope Climb

60%

Side Slope

40%

M3A2

M2A2 ODS, M3A2 ODS ODS-E

M2A3

M3A3

M7

38 mph, 61 kph

Trench Crossing 8’4” Vertical Wall Climb

36”

Personnel Capacity

3 crew 7 passengers 3 crew 2 (M2) passengers 6 passengers (M2A2)

3 crew 7 passengers

3 crew 2 passengers

3 crew 7 passengers

3 crew 2 passengers

4 crew 1 passenger

Firing Ports

6 (M2), 2 (M2A2)

2

0

2

0

0

TOW Missile Variant

All

NA

TOW Missile Ready

2

NA

TOW Missile Stowed

5

25-mm Ammo Ready

300

25-mm Ammo Stowed

600

2

0

2

10

5

1,200

600

2

10

5

1,200

600

M240C 7.62-mm 800 Coax Ready

800, 400

3

10

NA

1,200

300

800, 400

3

800

M240C 7.62-mm 1,400 Coax Ammo Stowed

3,600

1,400

3,400

1,400

3,400

2,800

M240B 7.62-mm 2,200 Ammo Stowed

3,200

2,200

3,400

2,200

3,400

NA

M231 FPW 5.56-mm Ammo Stowed

4,200

0

2,200

0

2,520

0

NA

M16/M4 5.56mm Ammo Stowed

2,520

1,680

2,520

1,680

2,520

1,680

1,680

Notes. 1. Firing the TOW 2, TOW 2A, and TOW 2B missile from the basic TOW launcher is possible; however, the missile will have a reduced probability of hit. 2. TOW missile storage is reduced if squad is equipped with Javelin. M2 series IFV can replace up to 2 TOW with Javelin missiles. 3. The Bradley A3 command vehicle will have 400 7.62 rounds in the ready stowage.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

2-13

Chapter 2

M7 BRADLEY FIRE SUPPORT TEAM 2-13. Integrating fire support team (FIST) mission equipment lets the Bradley crew complete fire support missions while the 25-mm automatic cannon provides the BFIST crew self-defense and the ability to locate targets on the move. This model adds an inertial navigation system and a new targeting station control panel. A mission processor unit automates the fire request system. 2-14. The M7 BFIST replaces the aging M981 "hammerhead" Fire Support Team-Vehicle (FIST-V) in selected mechanized units (see Figure 2-12). The vehicle provides company FIST and battalion/brigade fire support officers with a vehicle platform where they can locate, plan, coordinate, execute and direct timely, accurate, indirect field artillery (FA) and mortar fires.

Figure 2-12. M7 Bradley Fire Support Vehicle 2-15. As the name implies, the M7 BFIST is a modified M2A2 ODS BFV that has been equipped with a specialized fire support mission equipment package (MEP). In addition to providing the critical FIST with the same mobility, survivability and battlefield signature as the A2 series Bradley, the M7 provides FIST with a 25-mm cannon for self-defense. Most important, the M7 design provides, for the first time, the ability to "target on the move."

SECTION III – GUARDIAN ARMORED SECURITY VEHICLE (M1117) 2-16. The Guardian Armored Security Vehicle (ASV) (M1117) is a four-wheel drive vehicle with exceptional maneuverability and versatility. It can negotiate barricades, climb up to a 60-percent grade, travel cross-country over challenging terrain, and traverse deep mud, snow, or water with equal ease. The ASV is lightweight and air-transportable by C-130 and larger aircraft. This section discusses the vehicle’s characteristics and gives a brief overview of its capabilities (see Figure 2-13). 2-17. The lightly armored, four-wheel drive ASV is equipped with a powerful 8.3 liter Cummins diesel engine and an Allison 6-speed automatic transmission. It provides power sufficient to climb 60-percent slopes and maintain highway speeds up to 63 miles per hour. A propeller shaft couples the transmission with the drive transfer unit. Output from the transfer unit drives the rear differential when in two-wheel drive mode and the front and rear differentials when in four-wheel drive mode. Operators can engage four

2-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Systems Characteristics

wheel drive “on the fly” by actuating a shift lever at the driver’s station. The four-wheel independent suspension allows smooth cross-country operation that easily negotiates 24-inch vertical obstacles and enhances the ease of power steering and power braking. This modern design provides the mobility, agility, and durability required for the wide range of missions encountered by military police (MP) Soldiers (see Table 2-4 for more technical data). 2-18. The ASV fords hard bottom waterways up to 5 feet deep without any preparation. The ASV also includes a central tire inflation system that enhances mobility by allowing tire pressure adjustment to accommodate four different terrain types–highways, secondary roads, off-road, and emergency conditions. In addition to the central tire inflation system, the ASV’s run-flat capability prevents vehicle immobilization due to tire failure. The central tire inflation system may also provide additional operational capabilities when tires are punctured by small arms fire or shrapnel and tire pressure is not reduced enough to allow run-flat capability. The ASV also includes a winch capable of conducting retrieval operations at 15,000 pounds with a snatch block and cable for self-recovery operations.

Figure 2-13. Armored Security Vehicle M1117 2-19. The ASV’s firepower consists of a one-person, turreted primary weapons station with a mounted 40millimeter automatic grenade launcher (MK19) and .50-caliber machine gun (M2/M48). The turret traverses 360 degrees and allows for elevation of 45 degrees. The day/night target acquisition and fire control system allows the gunner to engage targets at the maximum effective ranges of both weapon systems. The ammunition ready racks hold 96 rounds of 40-millimeter ammunition and 200 rounds of .50caliber ammunition. The vehicle also includes a M249 squad automatic weapon mount and multi-salvo smoke grenade system. The ASV team’s weapons includes the following: z M249 machine guns. z M16/M4 rifles. z M203 grenade launchers. z AT-4 antitank weapon. z M9 pistol.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

2-15

Chapter 2

Table 2-4. Technical data of the M1117 - Guardian ASV Feature

Data

Configuration Type

4X4

Operational Length

246 in

Operational Width

101 in

Operational Height

102 in

Minimum Ground Clearance

18 in

Maximum Speed

63 mph

Maximum Range

440 mi

Fording Depth

60 in

Gross Vehicle Weight

29,560 lbs

Vertical Wall

24 in

Maximum Climb Slope

60%

Maximum Side Slope

30%

SECTION IV – ARMED HMMWV SYSTEMS 2-20. The armed High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV) is the light-weight vehicle used by the HBCT scouts and various sustainment elements. It provides the crew with increased mobility, as well as firepower against threat light-armored vehicles and troops. To use the vehicle to its potential, the crew must know the characteristics, capabilities, and differences of the various armed HMMWV platforms. Table 2-5 on page 2-18 shows armed HMMWV technical data by model. Current fielded models include the following: z M1025A2 armed HMMWV. z M1026A1 armed HMMWV. z M1114 up-armored HMMWV. z M1151 up-armored HMMWV.

M1025A2/M1026A1 ARMED HMMWV MODEL 2-21. The M1025A2 and M1026A1 HMMWVs are armed-carrier configurations of the HMMWV family (see Figure 2-14). The vehicles are equipped with basic armor. The weapon mount, located on the roof of the vehicle, is adaptable to mount either the M240B 7.62-mm machine gun, M2 caliber .50 machine gun, or MK19 grenade launcher. The weapons platform can be traversed 360 degrees. The vehicles can climb 60-percent slopes and traverse a side slope of up to 40-percent when fully loaded. The vehicles can ford hard-bottom water crossings up to 30 inches without a deep water fording kit and up to 60 inches with the kit. The M1026 and M1026A1 are equipped with the self-recovery winch, which can also be used to recover like systems. The M1025A2 and M1026A1 models have the latest modifications applied to the vehicles.

2-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Systems Characteristics

Figure 2-14. M1025A2/M1026A1

M1114 UP-ARMORED ARMED HMMWV MODEL 2-22. The M1114 HMMWV is an up-armored configuration of the HMMWV family (see Figure 2-15). The vehicle is equipped with additional armor both on the sides and underneath to protect the crew from small arms ammunition and mines. All other vehicle characteristics and weapon systems are identical to the M1025A2 model. The additional weight of the armor and the change to the center of mass of the vehicle limits the M1114 HMMWV’s slope climbing to 40-percent and side slope traversing limit to 30-percent slopes.

Figure 2-15. M1114 Up-Armored Armed HMMWV

M1151 ENHANCED UP-ARMORED ARMED HMMWV MODEL 2-23. The M1151 HMMWV is an enhanced up-armored configuration of the HMMWV family (see Figure 2-16). The vehicle is equipped with a heavier chassis and an improved engine that enables the use of removable add-on armor protection.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

2-17

Chapter 2

Figure 2-16. M1151 Enhanced Up-Armored HMMWV Table 2-5. Comparison of armed HMMWV technical data by model Characteristics

M1025A2/M1026A1

M1114

M1151

Speed, Land

78 mph, 125 kph

Slope Climb

60%

40%

60%

Side Slope

40%

30%

40%

Water Fording Depth

60” with fording kit, 30“ without fording kit

Vertical Wall Climb

18”

Personnel Capacity

3 crew members, 1 passenger

Caliber .50 Ammunition Ready

100

Caliber .50 Ammunition Stowed

700

MK19 Ammunition Ready

48

MK19 Ammunition Stowed

240

55 mph, 88 kph

SECTION V – M1064A3 SELF-PROPELLED 120-mm MORTAR CARRIER 2-24. This carrier is designed to carry the 4.7-inch (120-mm) mortar M121. The mortar can be fired from a turntable in the carrier or removed and fired from a ground baseplate. The carrier has a crew of four, including the driver (see Figure 2-17). (See Table 2-6 for technical data pertaining to the M1064A3 mortar carrier.) The M1064A3’s capabilities and features are— z It travels easily over rough terrain. z It fords water up to 40 inches deep. z It can move at high speeds on improved roads and highways. z It is air transportable and can be dropped by parachute to troops in the field. z It has an enlarged three-piece firing hatch. This permits mortar to be fired through an arc of 90 degrees over the rear of the carrier. z It has a cupola with a caliber .50 machine gun. z It is propelled and steered on land and in water by tracks.

2-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Systems Characteristics

z z z

It has M17 periscopes around the driver’s and commander’s hatches for vision when buttoned up. It has an AN/VVS-2 driver’s night-vision periscope stowed near the driver. The periscope can be installed in the driver’s hatch to provide night vision under blackout conditions. It can be equipped to carry a CBRN (gas particulate filter) unit, a driver’s windshield kit, an engine coolant heater kit, and a personnel heater kit (for cold weather operation).

Figure 2-17. M1064A3 self-propelled 120-mm mortar carrier Table 2-6. Technical data of the M1064A3 self-propelled 120-mm mortar carrier Feature

Data

Speed Land

40 mph, 64 kph

Slope Climb

60%

Side Slope

30%

Trench Crossing

66”

Vertical Wall Climb

24”

Personnel Capacity

2 crew members 4 gun crew

Caliber .50 Ammunition Ready

100 rds

Caliber .50 Ammunition Stowed

1,900 rds

M121 Ammunition Horizontal

45 rds

M121 Ammunition Vertical

24 rds

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

2-19

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 3

Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities All weapons platform systems within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) contribute to the combined arms effort. They provide the infantry, armor, reconnaissance, engineer, and fire support elements with firepower, armor protection, and battlefield agility. To employ weapons platform systems within the HBCT effectively, Soldiers must know the capabilities of their vehicle, fire control, weapon systems, and ammunition. Chapter 3 details the crew-served weapons found on platforms within the HBCT.

Contents Section I – Automatic Machine Guns ...... 3-1 M231 5.56-mm Firing Port Weapon .... 3-1 M249 Squad Automatic Weapon ........ 3-2 M240 Machine Gun Series ................. 3-4 M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun ........ 3-6 MK19 MOD3 40-mm Grenade Machine Gun ...................................... 3-7 Section II – M242 25-mm Automatic Gun ............................................................. 3-8 M242 25-mm Automatic Gun .............. 3-8 Enhanced 25-mm Gun ........................ 3-9

Section III – M256 120-mm Smoothbore Cannon ....................................................... 3-9 Functional Components of the Gun Tube and Breech .............................. 3-10 Components of the Recoil System .... 3-12 Section IV – M121 120-mm Mortar .......... 3-12 Section V – Smoke Grenade Launchers 3-14 M250 Smoke Grenade Launcher ...... 3-14 M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher ...... 3-14 Section VI – TOW ..................................... 3-16

SECTION I – AUTOMATIC MACHINE GUNS

M231 5.56-MM FIRING PORT WEAPON 3-1. The reference technical manual (TM) is TM 9-1005-309-10; National Stock Number (NSN) 100501-081-4582; Line Item Number (LIN) S56419. The Colt M231 Firing Port Weapon (FPW) is an adapted version of the M16 assault rifle for firing from the ports on the M2/M3 Bradley (see Figure 3-1 and Table 3-1). The FPW was developed to provide a suitable weapon for use within a personnel carrier (PC) for buttoned-up operations. The infantry rifle squad uses the M231 5.56-mm FPW to engage enemy personnel, crew-served weapons and antitank guided missile (ATGM) teams, and to suppress suspected close-in enemy positions. The FPW has a maximum effective range of 300 meters (tracer burnout). The firing rate of the FPW is 1,100 to 1,200 rounds per minute. The basic Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) M2 has six firing-port mounts, two on each side and two in the ramp. The BFV M2A2, M2A2 ODS (Operation Desert Storm)\\HQDADFS\DATA\AGENCIES\APD\HOFF1\APDDATA\Application Data\Microsoft\Word\F2301GL.doc - ODS, and A3 have two firing port mounts in the ramp (none on the sides). 3-2. The ammunition for the FPW is the M196 tracer. The M231’s design includes a thicker barrel to better absorb the heat from firing M196 tracer rounds. Its rapid rate of fire allows squad members to use the tracer-on-target (TOT) method of adjusting fire to suppress the target. When training, the squad uses

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3-1

Chapter 3

the M200 blank round and the M22 blank firing device. (TM 9-1005-309-10 provides more operator information.) Note. M193, M855 ball, and M856 ammunition types are not compatible with the FPW. Crewmen must ensure these ammunition types are not used for safety reasons.

Figure 3-1. M231 5.56-mm firing port weapon Table 3-1. M231 characteristics Weight

7.34 lbs without a 30-round magazine

Weight with Ammo

8.34 lbs with a 30-round magazine

Overall Length

28.25 inches

Firing Rate (Full Automatic Only) Sustained (Short Bursts)

50 to 60 rounds per minute

Minimum Cyclic

1,225 rounds per minute

Max Effective Range

328 yards (300 meters)

3-3. These weapons are only capable of fully automatic fire. The upper receiver on the FPW has been modified to prevent any additional movement of the selector switch. This locks the weapon in automatic fire mode with a special side plate that extends down to the lower receiver. These weapons retain a 65% commonality with standard M16 rifles.

DANGER Firing Port Weapon Before using the FPW, make sure the exhaust fans work and the exhaust hose is in good working condition—they must be able to remove poisonous gasses from the troop compartment.

M249 SQUAD AUTOMATIC WEAPON 3-4. The references are TM 9-1005-201-10; FM 3-22.68; NSN 1005-01-127-7510; and LIN M09009. The M249 is a lightweight, gas-operated, air-cooled, belt or magazine fed, one-man portable fully

3-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities

automatic weapon capable of delivering a large volume of effective fire at ranges up to 800 meters (see Table 3-2). The M249 is loaded, fired, unloaded and cleared from the open bolt position (see Figure 3-2). It can accept belts of linked 5.56x45 mm North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) (.223 cal) ammunition through the top-mounted feed tray or M-16 type magazines through the side-mounted port. Using M-16 type magazines should only be used in emergencies if Soldiers run out of belted ammunition, because this often causes jams as the magazine spring cannot adequately keep up with the weapon’s high rate of fire. The M249 squad automatic weapon (SAW) features a built-in bipod and a tripod-mounted lug for supported fire, as well as a quick change barrel that helps prevent overheating during sustained fire. Barrels are engaged and disengaged by rotating the built-in handle, and a spare is normally carried in the “A-bag” by the gunner or his assistant. The forearm is designed to contain a small cleaning kit for field use, though it may not be stored there in practice.

Figure 3-2. M249 squad automatic weapon 5.56mm 3-5. In addition to its traditional use as an infantry weapon, the M249 is also sometimes used as a vehicle-mounted weapon, most often on High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicles (HMMWV). The M249 may be mounted on a HMMWV using the machine gun mount, M197. Reference for the machine gun mount is NSN 1005-01-413-4098; LIN M11071. Table 3-2. M249 machine gun characteristics Weight

16.41 lbs

Length

40.87 inches

Maximum Range

3,600 meters

Cyclic Rate of Fire

650 to 850 rpm (change barrel every min)

Rapid Rate of Fire

200 rpm (10 to 13 round bursts with 2 to 3 sec between bursts) (change barrel every 2 min)

Sustained Rate of Fire

100 rpm (6 to 9 round bursts with 4 to 5 sec between bursts) (no barrel changes)

Max Effective Range with a Bipod to an Area Target

800 meters

Max Effective Range with a Bipod to a Point Target

600 meters

Max Effective Range with a Tripod to an Area Target

1,000 meters

Max Effective Range with a Tripod to a Point Target

800 meters

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3-3

Chapter 3

M240 MACHINE GUN SERIES 3-6. The references are— z TM 9-1005-313-10 (M240 series). z FM 3-22.68 (M240B). z NSN 1005-01-025-8095; LIN L923521 (M240). z NSN 1005-01-412-3129; LIN M92841 (M240B). z NSN 1005-01-085-4758; LIN M92420 (M240C). 3-7. The M240 is a belt-fed, air-cooled, gas-operated, fully automatic machine gun that fires from the open-bolt position (see Figure 3-3). The M240 has been used by the U.S. armed forces since the late 1970s. It is used extensively by the infantry, ground vehicles, and aircraft. Despite not being the lightest medium machine gun in service, the M240 is highly regarded for its reliability, and its standardization among NATO members. All variants of the M240 series are fed from disintegrating metallic, split-link belts, and are capable of firing most types of 7.62mm NATO ammunition. They all share the same basic internal parts, which are also interchangeable, for the most part, with other members of the M240 family. The maximum effective range of the M240 is 900 meters which is the tracer burnout of the 7.62mm. The M240 machine gun has three rates of fire-cyclic, sustained, and rapid (see Table 3-3).

Figure 3-3. M240 series 7.62-mm machine gun 3-8. The Abrams crews use the M240 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun to engage enemy personnel, infantry crew-served weapons, ATGM teams, and unarmored vehicles. The coax machine gun mounts on the right side of the breech assembly, to the left of the gunner, and in front of the commander on the Abrams, and is integrated into the fire control system. The M240 7.62-mm machine gun is also used by the loader on the Abrams main battle tank. It has the same characteristics as the M240 coaxial machine gun; however, the loader’s M240 is not integrated into the fire control system and requires the loader to fire the weapon manually. 3-9. The M240B is the U.S. infantry version, equipped with a folding bipod, pintle mount, forestock, and accessory rails to mount optics and target illuminators (see Table 3-2 and Appendix. C). The M240B is equipped with an integrated optical rail feed cover and a hand guard with heat shield to provide thermal protection to the operator (see Figure 3-4). The pintle mount allows tripod and vehicle mounting. The M240B machine gun can be mounted on armed HMMWVs, as well many other armed platforms. Ammunition is fed into the weapon from a 100-round bandoleer containing a disintegrating metallic splitlink belt. A spare barrel is issued with each M240B. Barrels can be changed quickly as the weapon has a fixed head space; however, barrels from different weapons should not be interchanged. M240 barrels are set by the manufacturer for head space and timing and are matched by serial number to a specific weapon.

3-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities

Figure 3-4. M240B machine gun 3-10. The M240C is the right hand feed variant of the M240 currently used on the U.S. M2 and M3 BFVs. The M240C is identical to the M240 except for the ammunition feed cover and feed tray. All weapons in the M240 family can be converted to right hand feed using M240C feeder components. The BFV crews use the M240C 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun to engage enemy personnel, infantry crew-served weapons, ATGM teams, and unarmored vehicles. The coax machine gun mounts in the plenum chamber on the right side of the turret, in front of the commander’s position on the Bradley, and is integrated into the fire control system.

DANGER Seals on the Access Doors Before firing the coax, inspect the seals on the access doors. Check for serviceability and ensure access doors are closed to keep poisonous gas from leaking into the turret. (Bradley) Smoke-Box Before firing the coax, ensure that the smoke box is properly closed. Check for serviceability of the smoke-box to ensure poisonous gases are not leaking into the turret. (Abrams)

Table 3-3. M240 machine gun characteristics Weight

27.6 lbs

Length

49 inches

Maximum Range

3,725 meters

Cyclic Rate of Fire

650 to 950 rpm (firing at 950 rpm will cause damage to the weapon) (change barrel every min)

Rapid Rate of Fire

200 rpm (10 to 13 round bursts with 2 to 3 sec between bursts) (change barrel every 2 min)

Sustained Rate of Fire

100 rpm (6 to 9 round bursts with 4 to 5 sec between bursts) (change barrel every 10 min)

Maximum Effective Range to an Area Target

1,100 meters

Maximum Effective Range to a Point Target

900 meters

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3-5

Chapter 3

M2 HB CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN 3-11. The references are FM 3-22.65; TM 9-1005-213-10; NSN 1005-00-322-9715; and LIN L91975. The M2 heavy barrel (HB) machine gun is a belt-fed, recoil-operated, air-cooled, crew-served machine gun (see Figure 3-5). The gun is capable of single shot, as well as automatic fire, and operates on the short recoil principle. In this action, the bolt and barrel are initially locked together, and recoil upon firing. After a short distance, the bolt and barrel unlock, and the bolt continues to move rearwards relative to the barrel. This action opens the bolt, and pulls the belt of ammunition through the weapon, readying it to fire again, at a cyclic rate of 450 to 550 rounds per minute. 3-12. The M2 HB machine can be used to destroy varying targets including lightly armored vehicles, massed troops, and aerial targets (such as helicopters and slow-flying aircraft). The M2 HB has excellent long-range accuracy, external ballistics, performance, stopping power, and lethality. The M2 HB was intentionally designed to be fit into many configurations. The M2 HB can be adapted to feed from the left or right side of the weapon by exchanging the belt-holding pawls, the belt feed pawl, the front and rear cartridge stops, and reversing the bolt switch. The conversion can be completed in under a minute with no tools.

Figure 3-5. M2 HB caliber .50 machine gun 3-13. The M2 HB machine gun is the commander’s weapon on the Abrams tank (see Table 3-4). The M2 HB is used to engage dismounted infantry, crew-served weapons, ATGM teams, light-armor vehicles, and aircraft. The M2 HB is not integrated into the fire control system of the Abrams tank. 3-14. The M2 HB machine gun is also used as a vehicle-mounted weapon, most often on HMMWVs. The M2 HB may be mounted on a HMMWV using the machine gun mount, MK 93 MOD1; NSN 1005-01383-2757; LIN M12647. The M2 HB is used to engage dismounted infantry, crew-served weapons, ATGM teams, light-armor vehicles, and aircraft. 3-15. The M2 HB machine gun can be mounted on a M3 tripod mount, which is a lightweight, portable mount that permits a high degree of accuracy and control of fire for dismounted squads. The M3 tripod consists of a tripod, a pintle, and a traversing and elevating mechanism. The entire mount weighs 44 pounds. The references are TM 9-1005-245-13&P; NSN 1005-00-322-9716; and LIN M75577.

3-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities

Table 3-4. M2 HB machine gun characteristics Weapon

M2 HB

Weight

84 lbs

Length

65.13 inches

Maximum Range

6,764 meters

Cyclic Rate of Fire

450 to 550 rounds per minute

Rapid Rate of Fire

>40 rpm (5 to 7 rounds per burst at 5 to 10 sec intervals)

Sustained Rate of Fire

40 rounds per minute

Slow Rate of Fire

<40 rpm (5 to 7 rounds per burst at 10 to 15 sec intervals)

Single Shot

One round every 2 to 3 seconds, as dictated by target.

Maximum Effective Range to an Area Target

1,830 meters

Maximum Effective Range to a Point Target

1,500 meters

MK19 MOD3 40-MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN 3-16. The references are TM 9-1010-230-10, FM 3-22.27; NSN 1010-01-126-9063, and LIN M92362. The MK19 is a self-powered, air-cooled, belt-fed, blowback-operated weapon designed to deliver 40-mm grenades against enemy personnel and lightly armored vehicles (see Figure 3-6). The MK19 can be mounted on the HMMWV, M113 family of vehicles, 5-ton trucks, and selected M88A1 recovery vehicles. The MK19 is designed to not overheat even after prolonged firing. The MK19 uses an open bolt principle. The rounds are mechanically fed onto the bolt face with the pull of the charging handles. When the trigger is pressed, the bolt closes, and the firing pin is released. The recoil blows back the bolt, dropping the empty casing, and then feeds a new round onto the bolt face.

Figure 3-6. MK19 40mm grenade launcher 3-17. The MK19 can be mounted on a M3 tripod mount, a M4 pedestal, a M66 ring, a M113 PC commander’s cupola, and a MK93 MOD1 mount for a HMMWV (see Table 3-5). The MK93 MOD1 is

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3-7

Chapter 3

also used to mount the M2 HB. References for the MK93 Mount are TM 9-1010-230-23&P; LIN M12647; and NSN 1005-01-383-2757. Table 3-5. MK19 machine gun characteristics Weapon

MK19

Weight

76 lbs

Length

43.1 inches

Maximum Range

2,212 meters

Arming Range

18 to 30 meters

Minimum Safe Range

310 meters

Cyclic Rate of Fire

325 to 375 rounds per minute

Rapid Rate of Fire

60 rounds per minute

Sustained Rate of Fire

40 rounds per minute

Maximum Effective Range to an Area Target

2,212 meters

Maximum Effective Range to a Point Target

1,500 meters

SECTION II – M242 25-MM AUTOMATIC GUN

M242 25-MM AUTOMATIC GUN 3-18. The references are— z TM 9-1005-200-23&P (M242 Automatic Gun). z TM 9-2350-284-10-2 (M2A2, M3A2). z TM 9-2350-284-20-2-1 (M2A2, M3A2). z TM 9-2350-294-10-2 (M2A3, M3A3). z TM 9-2350-294-20-2-1 (M2A3, M3A3). 3-19. The Bradley’s main armament is the M242 25-mm chain gun. It is an externally powered, chaindriven, single-barrel weapon which may be fired in semi-automatic or automatic modes (see Figure 3-7). It is fed by a metallic link belt and has dual-feed capability. The term chain gun derives from the use of a roller chain that drives the bolt back and forth. It can destroy lightly armored vehicles and aerial targets such as helicopters and slow-flying aircraft. It can also suppress enemy positions such as troops in the open, dug-in positions, and built-up areas.

Figure 3-7. M242 25-mm automatic gun 3-20. Unlike most automatic firearms, the M242 does not depend on gas or recoil to actuate its firing system. Instead, it uses a 1.0 hp, 24VDC motor, positioned in the receiver to drive the chain and dual-feed system. This system uses sprockets and extractor grooves to feed, load, extract, and eject rounds. A system of clutches provides for an alternate sprocket to engage and thus allows the gunner to switch between armor piercing rounds and high-explosive rounds.

3-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities

DANGER Before firing the 25-mm gun, the gunner must check the gun cover for serviceability, zip it up, and ensure the turret ventilation system is operational to prevent poisonous gas from leaking into the turret. Firing rounds causes the gun powder to produce this gas.

ENHANCED 25-MM GUN 3-21. Work on an upgraded weapon began in 1990. In doing so, three major systems and seven minor systems were improved. The modifications began with introducing a chrome-lined barrel, an enhanced feeder, and an enhanced receiver. The weapon system also received minor upgrades such as quickdetachable link covers, a larger breach assembly, a high efficiency muzzle brake, longer recoil, an integral round counter, an extended life firing pin and spring, and a triple-spring drive clutch. It has a built-in test (BIT) for the feed-select solenoid and gun-drive motor. The feed-select solenoid and the gun-drive motor each contain a jumper wire that enables the on-vehicle BIT. It was first put to use on the M2A3/M3A3 Bradley, which is the third version of the M2 Infantry Fighting Vehicle (IFV).

SECTION III – M256 120-mm SMOOTHBORE CANNON 3-22. The references are— z TM 9-2350-264-10-1/2 (M1A1 Series). z TM 9-2350-388-10-1/2 (M1A2 Series). z TM 9-1000-202-14 (Evaluation of Cannon Tubes). 3-23. The Abrams main armament is the M256 120-mm smoothbore cannon (see Figure 3-8). It can fire a variety of munitions to destroy heavily armored vehicles, lightly armored vehicles, massed troops, and aerial targets (such as helicopters and slow-flying aircraft). The M256 cannon is capable of firing NATO standard 120-mm combustible cartridge ammunition.

Figure 3-8. M256 120-mm smoothbore cannon 3-24. General characteristics for the M256 cannon are— z Tube length is 17 ft 4 in. z Tube weight is 2,502 lbs. z Slinging point is 11ft 8in from the muzzle. z Bore evacuator is 28 lbs. z Bore diameter is 4.724 inches. z Breech ring is 1,506 lbs. z Breech block is 225 lbs.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3-9

Chapter 3

3-25. The M256 120-mm smoothbore cannon consists of the gun tube, breech, the recoil system, and the bore evacuator.

FUNCTIONAL COMPONENTS OF THE GUN TUBE AND BREECH 3-26. The interior of the cannon is divided into the following three areas: z Chamber Area. The chamber area contains the entire cartridge and begins at the breech face of the tube to a point 18-3/4 inches into the cannon (see Figure 3-9). At the rear of the chamber region, rear obturation occurs.

Figure 3-9. Chamber area z

Forcing Cone Area. The forcing cone area is the area starting at 18-3/4 inches and ending 22 inches into the cannon (see Figure 3-10). Forcing cone area is 3-1/4 inches long. The forcing cone area is the transition between the chamber and the bore that guides the projectile into the bore and compresses the obturator on the projectile, sealing in expanding propellant gasses behind the projectile, resulting in forward obturation.

Figure 3-10. Forcing cone area

3-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities

z

Bore. The bore is the remainder of the interior of the cannon, starting at 22 inches from the breech face to the muzzle end (see Figure 3-11).

Figure 3-11. Bore 3-27. Operation of the chamber and bore consists of— z Initial detonation cartridge case combustion. z Rear obturation is provided by the cartridge stub base obturator seal expanding against the rear portion of the chamber region. z Forward obturation by the projectile obturator seal. z Projectile forward movement. z Bore evacuator operation. z Shot exit. z Automatic breech opening. z Extraction and ejection begin. z Residual gases evacuated. Note. Failure of the automatic breech opening system can increase firing times and contribute to a flareback. Units must coordinate with unit maintenance shop to ensure proper clearance between the operating crank and cam components are properly maintained. 3-28. The exterior of the gun tube is divided into the following three areas: z Breech Recess Area. The threaded end of the cannon that is inserted into the breechring. This area contains the interrupted buttress threads. z External Machined Surfaces. This area contains the surfaces of the cannon that are machined for fitting of external components such as the Muzzle Reference Sensor (MRS) and the bore evacuator as well as the surfaces that interact with the recoil system. z Thermal Shrouds. These form fitting aluminum sleeves encase the exterior of the gun tube and aid in the even distribution of heat around the gun tube due to firing. The thermal shrouds assist in alleviating the effects of thermal bending.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3-11

Chapter 3

COMPONENTS OF THE RECOIL SYSTEM 3-29. The recoil system of the M1 series tanks serve the following four main purposes: z Absorb recoil energy. z Provide a fixed length of recoil through all angles of elevation. z Return the gun to battery through all angles of elevation. z Hold the gun in battery through all angles of elevation. 3-30. The recoil system is known as a Concentric Hydro-spring Constant Recoil System and consists of the following: z Piston. z Gun cradle. z Recoil spring. z Replenisher. 3-31. The bore evacuator aids in removing spent propellant gases from the gun tube. The M256 gun tube uses an eccentric pressure scavenging system. The bore evacuator is a chamber like device, located at about the center of the gun tube. It is eccentric from the gun tube, meaning that the bore evacuator and the gun tube do not share a common center. The center of the bore evacuator is offset higher than that of the gun tube to allow the gun tube to be depressed lower over the rear (back) deck of the tank. Inside of the bore evacuator are five bore evacuator holes equally spaced apart and drilled into the gun tube at a 30 degree angle towards the muzzle. When a projectile is fired down the gun tube and passes the bore evacuator, propellant gasses fill the area inside the bore evacuator to a maximum of 150 psi. As the projectile exits the gun tube, a vacuum is created. The pressure built up within the bore evacuator forces propellant gasses out the muzzle and away from the turret interior, clearing the gun tube of any remaining dangerous gas residue. Note. If you see any evidence of gas leakage, powder streaks, or gas erosion, service the bore evacuator in accordance with procedures found in the appropriate Operator's Manual.

SECTION IV – M121 120-mm MORTAR 3-32. The references are— z TM 9-1015-250-10. z FM 3-22.90. z FM 3-22.91. 3-33. This section contains the technical data and description of each component of the 120-mm mortar (Figure 3-12 and Table 3-6). The mortar is a smoothbore, muzzle-loaded, crew-served, high angle-of-fire weapon. It consists of a cannon assembly, bipod assembly, and baseplate. The 120-mm mortar is designed to be employed in all phases and types of land warfare and in all weather conditions.

3-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities

Figure 3-12. The 120-mm mortar Table 3-6. Technical data for the 120-mm mortar Feature

Data

Cannon Bipod

110.0 lbs M190 (Ground Mounted) M191 (Carrier Mounted)

Baseplate

70.0 lbs 68.0 lbs 136.0 lbs

M67 Sight Unit

2.9 lbs

Elevation

Ground Mounted Carrier Mounted For Each Turn of Elevation Crank

0710 to 1510 mils 0750 to 1510 mils 5 mils

Traverse

Right or Left from Center Using Traversing Wheel With Extension One Turn of Traversing Wheel

136 mils

Range

Maximum Minimum

7,200 meters 200 meters

Rate of Fire

Maximum (First Minute) Sustained (Indefinitely)

16 rds per min 4 rds per min

Bursting Radius

316 mils 5 mils

75 meters Mortar Capabilities Mounted on Turntable

Traversing Limits (with Traverse Extension)

Right of Center Left of Center

858 mils 808 mils

Total Traverse Capability from Extreme Left to Extreme Right

Without Traversing Extension With Traversing Extension

1,486 mils 1,666 mils

Elevation Limits (Level)

Track Maximum Track Minimum

1,510 mils 800 mils

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3-13

Chapter 3

SECTION V – SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHERS

M250 SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHER 3-34. The references are— z TM 9-1040-267-20&P (M250). z TM 9-2350-264-10-1/2 (M1A1 Series). z TM 9-2350-388-10-1/2 (M1A2 Series). 3-35. The majority of Abrams tanks have two, six-tube, electrically fired grenade launchers, one on each side of the turret (see Figure 3-13). Each can fire 2, 3 grenade salvos, or all 12 at once. On activation, the grenades create enough smoke to screen the vehicle in three seconds. To use the smoke grenade launcher system effectively, crews must know the grenade dispersal patterns: Salvo 1, Salvo 2, and Salvo 1&2. Refer to the appropriate TM or Chapter 4 of this manual for dispersion patterns for the M250 smoke grenade launcher.

Figure 3-13. Smoke grenade launcher

M257 SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHER 3-36. The references are— z TM 9-1040-267-20&P (M257). z TM 9-2350-264-10-1/2 (M1A1 Series). z TM 9-2350-388-10-1/2 (M1A2 Series). z TM 9-2350-252-10-2 (M2/M2A1, M3/M3A1). z TM 9-2350-284-10-2 (M2A2/M3A2). z TM 9-2350-294-10-2 (M2A3/M3A3). 3-37. Selected Abrams tanks have two, eight-tube, electrically fired grenade launchers, (one on each side of the turret. Each can fire two, four grenade salvos, or all sixteen at once. On activation, the grenades

3-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities

create enough smoke to screen the Abrams in three seconds. To use the smoke grenade launcher system effectively, tank crews must know the grenade dispersal patterns: Salvo 1, Salvo 2, and Salvo 1&2. See the appropriate TM or Chapter 4 for M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher dispersion patterns for Abrams, Bradley, and truck mounted systems. 3-38. The Bradley has two, four-tube, electrically fired grenade launchers, one on each side of the 25-mm gun (see Figure 3-14). Therefore, each can fire four grenades. On activation, the grenades create enough smoke to screen the vehicle in three seconds. Using one switch inside the vehicle, the commander or gunner fires the launchers. The launchers cannot fire independently. Both launchers (all eight grenades) fire at once.

Figure 3-14. M257 smoke grenade launchers 3-39. Armed HMMWVs have up to four, four-tube, electrically fired grenade launchers. On activation, the grenades create enough smoke to screen the vehicle in three seconds. Using one switch inside the vehicle, 16 grenades–fire at once. Some of the newer variants of the HMMWV, however, have the ability to fire each launcher independently.

DANGER The hatches should be closed when firing the smoke grenade launchers to prevent red phosphorus being blown in on the crew, as red phosphorus can cause serious burns. All personnel outside the vehicle must stay at least 200 meters from the vehicle during firing. Electrical system malfunctions or surges can cause smoke grenades to kill or injure Soldiers. Before loading any smoke grenades, make sure the grenade launcher switches are in the OFF position.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3-15

Chapter 3

SECTION VI – TOW 3-40. The references are— z TM 9-2350-252-10-2 (M2/M2A1, M3/M3A1). z TM 9-2350-284-10-2 (M2A2/M3A2). z TM 9-2350-294-10-2 (M2A3/M3A3). z FM 3-22.34. 3-41. The tube-launched, optically tracked, wire-guided missile (TOW) is a command-guided surface attack weapon that can destroy tanks, other armored vehicles, and helicopters (see Figure 3-15). It can also destroy fortified bunkers, gun emplacements, and other protected positions. The TOW system destroys armored vehicles at ranges from 65 to 3,750 meters, depending on the type of missile used. The TOW Aero has a maximum range of 4,750 meters, and is the newest of the TOW missile family. The BFV crew can reload the TOW launcher without exposure to hostile fire.

Figure 3-15. Tube-Launched, Optically Tracked, Wire-Guided Missile 3-42. When the firer pulls the trigger, the TOW subsystem starts a 1.5-second self-balancing routine that activates the gyro and stabilizes the missile. To avoid accidentally aborting the missile, the crew must remember this delay when firing the TOW. At launch, the electronic Command Guidance Electronics (CGE) (M2/3 A1/A2 variants) or Digital Command Guidance Electronics (DCGE) (M2/3A2 ODS) System and the Missile Control Subsystem (MCS) (all M2/3 variants) sends a signal that triggers the missile launch motor to ignite. This ignition propels the missile out of the launcher, where the flight motor then takes over. When the missile enters the firer’s line of sight, the Bradley sight system receives infrared energy from the missile. Components in the sight system then signal the guidance system to position the missile with respect to the sight system’s line of sight. This exchange continues until the missile impact(s) or aborts.

DANGER 1.5-Second Delay When firing the TOW, there is a 1.5-second delay between the initial launch and the gyro stabilization. This will cause the missile appear off target prior to the stabilization gyro activation.

3-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities

3-43. The last step in the firing sequence occurs when the TOW subsystem automatically cuts the guidance wire and aborts 23 seconds after launch. When this occurs, the missile is programmed to dive into the ground without detonating. The subsystem also cuts the wire when the— z Vehicle commander (VC) or gunner presses the TOW ABORT switch. z VC or gunner selects another missile on the TOW control box. z Missile reaches the wire’s maximum range. z VC or gunner resets the weapons control box. z VC or gunner deselects the TOW weapon system. z VC or gunner changes magnification. 3-44. When firing a TOW, the firer must lay the crosshairs on the center mass of the target, fire the missile, and keep the crosshairs on the target during the flight of the missile. This keeps the firer from losing control of the missile. 3-45. Before firing any TOW missile on the Bradley, the firer ensures that both of the Integrated Sight Unit (ISU) or Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS) ballistic doors are open. 3-46. In order to fire the TOW, the vehicle must be level or on a slope of less than 10 degrees. The wings and control surfaces extend as soon as the missile clears the launcher. To avoid damaging these surfaces, the end of the launcher needs at least 36 inches of clearance. 3-47. Between 500 and 900 meters down range, the missile could fly below the gunner’s line of sight to the target; therefore, the firer must allow at least 30 inches of clearance between the line of sight and any obstruction. This reduces the chance of the missile striking the ground on its way to the target. 3-48. In the defense and fighting from a two-tiered fighting position, TOWs must be fired from the hull down (enfilade) position in order to ensure its survivability while in flight to the target.

DANGER Firing over Wires When firing over electrical wires, there is a danger of the command-link wires touching a live high-voltage power line. This may cause injury or death, cause the firer to lose control of the missile, and/or damage launcher electronics.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3-17

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 4

Ammunition The success of U.S. forces depends on the effective use of the appropriate ammunition against battlefield targets. Chapter 4 discusses the characteristics and capabilities of the different ammunition available for vehicle-mounted crew-served weapons used within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT), including machine guns, 25-mm main gun, 40-mm grenade machine gun, 120-mm main gun, mortar, special purpose munitions and missiles. Chapter 4 also includes general ammunition information such as packaging, standard and North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) marking conventions, common pallet packaging, load capabilities of lift assets, placard marking requirements, ammunition planning considerations, and other safety considerations for ammunition types available within the HBCT.

Contents Section I – Ammunition Terminology ...... 4-2 Markings and Symbols........................ 4-2 Ammunition Lot Numbers ................... 4-4 Department of Defense Codes ........... 4-6 Color Coding ....................................... 4-8 Section II – Machine Gun Ammunition .. 4-10 Packaging ......................................... 4-10 M249 5.56-mm Machine Gun Ammunition ....................................... 4-12 M240 7.62-mm Machine Gun Ammunition ....................................... 4-15 M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun Ammunition ....................................... 4-17 Section III – 25-mm Bradley Fighting Vehicle Ammunition ................................ 4-20 Classification..................................... 4-20 Identification...................................... 4-20 Service Ammunition .......................... 4-21 Target Practice Ammunition ............. 4-29 Safety Information............................. 4-31 Section IV – MK19 Mod 3, 40-mm Grenade Machine Gun ............................ 4-32 Service Ammunition .......................... 4-34 Training Ammunition ......................... 4-35

3 September 2009

Section V – 120-mm Abrams Tank Ammunition .............................................. 4-38 Classification ..................................... 4-39 Identification ...................................... 4-39 Service Ammunition .......................... 4-42 Target Practice Ammunition .............. 4-51 Safety Information ............................. 4-53 Section VI – Mortar Ammunition ............ 4-58 Classification ..................................... 4-58 Authorized Cartridges ....................... 4-58 Service Ammunition .......................... 4-59 Target Practice Ammunition .............. 4-62 Fuzes ................................................ 4-63 Mortar Safety Information.................. 4-67 Section VII – Smoke Grenades ............... 4-68 Section VIII – Missiles ............................. 4-72 TOW Missile Ammunition .................. 4-72 Javelin Antitank Guided Missile......... 4-93 Safety Information ............................. 4-97 Section IX – Planning Considerations ... 4-98 Section X – Safety ................................. 4-103

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-1

Chapter 4

SECTION I – AMMUNITION TERMINOLOGY 4-1. Ammunition used for training and combat comes in a wide variety of calibers and projectile types, are packaged in multiple ways, and have a variety of uses. Ammunition handlers, forecasters, planners, and Master Gunners must have a solid working knowledge of the ammunition available for use within the HBCT in order to plan, coordinate, execute, resupply, provide, and manage the training and combat stocks allotted effectively and efficiently. 4-2. Ammunition is identified by markings and color-coding on the items themselves, the containers, and the packing boxes (see Figure 4-1). The markings and standard nomenclature of each item, together with the lot number, Federal Supply Classification (FSC) Code, National Stock Number (NSN), Department of Defense Identification Code (DODIC), and Department of Defense Ammunition Code (DODAC), are visual references that completely identify each item. This section gives a basic explanation of markings and color-coding, in accordance with (IAW) Standardized Agreement (STANAG) and Military Standard (MILSTD) FM 4-30.13, MIL-STD 1168A, MIL-STD 709C, STANAG 2316, and STANAG 2322B.

Figure 4-1. Ammunition packaging and common markings example

MARKINGS AND SYMBOLS 4-3. Markings stenciled or stamped on munitions or their containers include all information needed for complete identification. 4-4. Components in which all explosive, incendiary, or toxic materials have been simulated by substitution of inert material are identified by impressed INERT markings. Components in which all explosive, incendiary, or toxic materials have been omitted are identified by stamped EMPTY markings.

4-2

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

4-5. Packaging and containers for small arms ammunition are clearly marked with standard NATO Symbols identifying the contents of the package by type of ammunition, primary use, and packaging information. The most common NATO symbols are described IAW STANAG 2322B (see Figure 4-2).

Figure 4-2. Standard small arms ammunition markings

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-3

Chapter 4

AMMUNITION LOT NUMBERS 4-6. Each item of ammunition is assigned a complete round or item lot number when it is manufactured or when it is at the load, assemble, and packaging (LAP) plant. Figure 4-3 breaks down a typical ammunition lot number system. See MIL-STD 1168A for a description of the current system. 4-7. The lot numbers are used by manufacturers for quality control. The lot numbers identify the manufacturer, month and year of manufacture, and information specific to the design, development, or production of the ammunition: z Manufacturer’s Identification Code (MIC). The MIC, also called the manufacturer’s identification symbol, identifies the primary manufacturer of the round. It does not include subcontractors who have been tasked to supply subcomponents of the ammunition. For a complete listing of the MIC’s for all manufacturer’s symbols or codes, see MIL HDBK-1461A. z Year of Production. This is identified as a two-digit number representing the production year.

Figure 4-3. Lot number example z

4-4

Month of Production. This single letter identifies the month of production at the manufacturing facility. The letter “I” is not used in the coding system to reduce confusion with the number “1”. The letter codes used are shown in Table 4-1.

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Table 4-1. Month codes

z

z

Lot Interfix Number. The interfix number represents one of four indications–more than a 30 day break in production, a new contract for the ammunition has been issued, a change in design of the round has occurred, or the sequence number has been exhausted. Tenth Position. There may be a letter in the tenth position, located between the interfix and sequence number (see Figure 4-4). Each letter has a specific meaning. The tenth position is an indicator that the ammunition has special attributes. When no special attributes exist, the default “–,” or normal lot indicator, is applied.

Figure 4-4. Tenth position codes

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-5

Chapter 4

z

z

Sequence Number. The sequence number identifies the “production run” of rounds produced. Typically, there are lots or batches of 5,000 to 25,000 rounds produced for large caliber ammunition or 100,000 rounds (or more) for small and medium caliber rounds. The number of rounds produced in each batch is established by the manufacturer. Each sequence number identifies the batch of ammunition produced based on the previous conditions of the overall lot number. When the sequence number reaches 999, the interfix number will increase, resetting the sequence number to 001. Ammunition Lot Suffix. An alpha character added to the sequence portion of the ammunition lot number denotes a rework effecting a material change in the original lot or to identify reprocessed propellant lots. Ammunition lot suffixes are always in capital letters and are applied sequentially starting with “A” and continuing through “Z”.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE CODES FEDERAL SUPPLY CLASSES 4-8. Conventional ammunition falls within FSC Code 13. The FSC Code identifies the type of supply as ammunition, depicted by the first two digits of the four digit FSC Code; 13XX. Within this group, ammunition is further broken down by two more numbers that identify the general type or family in which the item falls. Table 4-2 lists the FSC Codes for all ammunition types typical to the HBCT. These numbers are used frequently when ordering, reporting, stocking, forecasting, issuing, and turning in ammunition at the brigade level and above. Table 4-2. Federal supply classification FSC Group 13

Ammunition and Explosive Type or Family

DODIC (see paragraph 4-10)

1305 1310 1315 1320 1330 1340 1345 1365 1370 1375

Ammunition less than 30mm Ammunition 30mm through 75mm Ammunition 75mm through 125mm Ammunition over 125mm Grenades Rockets and rocket ammunition Land mines Military chemical agents Pyrotechnics Demolition materials

A B C D G H, PB, PV, WF J and K K L M, ML, MN

NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER 4-9. Each complete round or item of conventional ammunition or associated explosive component is identified by its own NSN. The first four numbers of the NSN is the FSC Code. It is followed by the national item identification number (NIIN) that consists of a two-number code identifying the country of manufacture and seven number item identification. See Figure 4-5 for the NSN example and Figure 4-6 for the country of origin codes.

4-6

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-5. National stock number example

Figure 4-6. Country of origin codes

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE IDENTIFICATION CODE 4-10. DODIC is a single letter and three numbers or, in the case of small guided missiles (tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire-guided [TOW], Javelin, Stinger), civilian packages ammunition, and some demolitions, two letters and two numbers are used (such as PV18 for TOW-2B). It is attached at the end of all NSNs to denote interchangeability of the item. The battalion and subordinate units will use the DODIC for ammunition resourcing, ordering, forecasting, and shipments. See Figure 4-7 for a conventional NSN with DODIC added, demonstrating interchangeability between various model numbers and the designators of an ammunition item.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-7

Chapter 4

Figure 4-7. Department of Defense Identification Code example

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE AMMUNITION CODE 4-11. DODAC includes the FSC Code of the ammunition and the DODIC. The code is used on all using unit DA Form 581s, DA Form 3151-Rs, and most ammunition reports. The DODAC is used instead of the DODIC to reduce errors with ammunition transactions when ordering at brigade level and above. The FSC Code determines the leading (prefix) lettering code for the DODIC as shown in Figure 4-7. See Figure 4-8 for the identification of the DODAC.

Figure 4-8. Department of Defense Ammunition Code example

COLOR CODING 4-12. Ammunition is primarily painted to protect it from rust or corrosion. However, the color of the protective coating and markings also makes ammunition easy to identify by the user. Ammunition 20mm and larger is color-coded IAW MIL-STD 709C to facilitate user identification as shown in Table 4-3.

4-8

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Table 4-3. Ammunition color coding, 20mm and larger Basic Projectile Color Indicates Use

Black Olive Drab Light Green Light Blue

Armor defeating Antipersonnel/anti-materiel Smoke Target Practice (TP)

Colors Indicating Filler or Charge

White Letters Yellow Letters Red Letters or Red Band Yellow Band White Diamonds Black Band Blue Band Brown

Inert (no filler or explosive charge) High-explosive filler or charge Incendiary Small amount of high-explosive charge Antipersonnel flechettes Secondary armor defeating Inert (explosive filler replaced with flaked lead or concrete) Low-explosive charge

4-13. Small arms ammunition (less than 20mm) is not color-coded under MIL-STD 709C. Marking standards for small arms ammunition are outlined in— z TM 9-1305-201-20&P, small arms ammunition to 30mm inclusive. z TM 9-1300-200, ammunition, general. z STANAG 2316, NATO marking of ammunition (and its packaging) below 20mm. 4-14. These publications describe the color coding system for small arms projectiles. The bullet tips are painted a distinctive color as a ready means of identification for the user. 4-15. Frangible, “Blue Tip” plastic munitions, and short range munitions do not have a specific color code, although their packaging may be marked with the NATO Frangible symbol as shown in Figure 4-9. These types of training ammunition are specifically used for— z Training where maximum range for the ammunition must be reduced based on authorized surface danger zones (SDZ). z Use on lead free ranges, or indoor ranges where there is a danger of ricochets injuring the shooter. 4-16. Figure 4-9 describes the general color codes for all types of small arms ammunition up to and including caliber .50. Each caliber of small arms ammunition described in this chapter will have specific examples of ammunition tip color coding (see TM 9-1300-200 for more information).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-9

Chapter 4

Ammunition Color Coding

Ammunition Type

No Color

Ball

Black Tip

Armor Piercing

Silver Tip

Armor Piercing Incendiary

Silver with Orange Tip

Armor Piercing Incendiary with Tracer

Light Blue Tip

Incendiary

Light Blue Stripe with Dark Blue Tip

Incendiary

Orange Tip

Tracer

Maroon/Dark Red Tip

Tracer

Silver Cartridge Black Cartridge and Tip Perforated Cartridge Crimped or Capped End

High Pressure Test Dummy Dummy Blank

Package Marking

None None None

Figure 4-9. Small arms color coding and packaging markings

SECTION II – MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION 4-17. Crews must be able to effectively engage threat dismounted personnel, crew-served weapons, antitank guided missile (ATGM) teams, rocket propelled grenades (RPG) teams, trucks, lightly skinned armored vehicles, lightly constructed covered positions and aircraft utilizing the crew-served machine guns. 4-18. Crews must understand the capabilities and uses of ammunition to effectively engage threat targets with the appropriate ammunition. 4-19. This section discusses the different ammunition associated with the crew-served machine guns and their respective uses. The ammunition listed in this section is provided from smallest to largest caliber for the crew-served machine guns for clarity. 4-20. Machine gun ammunition is identified by type, caliber, model, and lot number as described in the previous section. Whenever possible, the appropriate symbol, marking, or color coding will be used in this section for clarity.

PACKAGING 4-21. Small arms ammunition is packaged in different cartons, containers, and cases depending on the specific DODIC. For example, the 5.56 ammunition for the M249 is packaged in either a 100 round drum or 100 round belt in a Bandoleer (see Figure 4-10). The 7.62 mm ammunition is packaged in 2 belts of 100

4-10

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

rounds each in one metal can. The majority of caliber .50 ammunition is packaged in a 100 round linked belt in a single metal can.

10 Figure 4-10. Bandoleer with 10 round clips, 5.56mm 4-22. All 5.56mm ammunition has a hazard classification of 1.4. This allows units to store small quantities of small arms ammunition in their unit arm room IAW local policies and storage instructions. Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-12 shows the markings that are required on vehicles transporting 5.56mm ammunition or when storing ammunition, respectively.

Figure 4-11. Storage marking

Figure 4-12.Transportation marking

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-11

Chapter 4

4-23. Crews should use caution when removing rounds from a belt of ammunition and later re-linking the rounds. The belt of ammunition may get jammed in the ammunition chute, or cause a stoppage with the weapon. 4-24. There are 11 types of machine gun ammunition available to use with the crew-served machine guns within the HBCT (see Figure 4-13 through Figure 4-18): z Blank. z Frangible. z Ball. z Armor piercing (AP). z Incendiary. z Tracer (T). z Armor Piercing-Incendiary (API). z Armor Piercing-Incendiary with Tracer (API-T). z Saboted Light Armor Penetrator (SLAP). z Saboted Light Armor Penetrator with Tracer (SLAP-T). z Dummy.

M249 5.56-MM MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION 4-25. The M249 squad automatic weapon fires a NATO standard 5.56 round, contained in either a drum or belt of ammunition. The M249 can fire 5.56 rounds from a 20/30round magazine in an emergency. 4-26. Ammunition for the M249 is issued in the M27 clip-type open link disintegrating, metallic, splitlinked belt (see Figure 4-13).

Figure 4-13. M27 clip-type open link

4-12

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

4-27. The maximum effective range (MER) of the ammunition is the greatest distance a crewman can accurately engage threat targets utilizing the weapon system. Table 4-4 describes the maximum effective range of standard 5.56mm ammunition when used with crew-served weapons and using different support systems or engagement techniques. Table 4-4. 5.56 maximum effective ranges Mount/Use

Point Target

Area Target

Tripod

800 meters

1,000 meters

Bipod

600 meters

800 meters

Suppression

1,000 meters

1,000 meters

4-28. Figure 4-14 shows the most common ammunition packaging compositions for the 5.56mm crewserved weapons. Figure 4-14 shows the most common nomenclature, DODIC, ammunition type, use, color-coding and packing markings.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-13

Chapter 4

Figure 4-14. 5.56mm crew serve common ammunition types

4-14

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

M240 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION 4-29. The preferred ammunition mix for the M240 is four M80 ball and one M62 tracer (commonly referred to as the 4:1 link). Other types of 7.62-mm ammunition are available; however, the four-and-one mix allows the commander and gunner to use the tracer-on-target (TOT) method of adjusting fire to achieve target kill or suppression. 4-30. Ammunition for the M240 is issued in the M13 clip-type open loop, split-linked, disintegrating link, metallic, belt. It is supplied as a complete round with open loop metal links. Using these metal links, belts of various lengths may be assembled (see Figure 4-15).

Figure 4-15. 7.62mm ammunition with M13 disintegrating link 4-31. The MER of the ammunition is the greatest distance a crewman can accurately engage threat targets utilizing the weapon system. The MER of the 7.62mm depends on the mount and the use of the weapon. Table 4-5 describes the maximum effective ranges of 7.62mm rounds for the M240 series of machine guns. Table 4-5. 7.62mm maximum effective ranges Mount/Use

Point Target

Area Target

Tripod

900 meters

1,800 meters

Bipod

600 meters

800 meters

Suppression

1800 meters

1,800 meters

Vehicle

900 meters

1,800 meters

Note. 7.62mm tracer rounds, DODIC - A131, are the only 7.62mm rounds authorized for overhead firing (firing over the head of exposed friendly forces) during training. 4-32. The M240 machine gun series uses several types of standard 7.62mm ammunition. Figure 4-16 shows the types and their characteristics. Soldiers may only use authorized ammunition manufactured to

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-15

Chapter 4

US and NATO specifications. Figure 4-16 illustrates the most common rounds by nomenclature, DODIC, type, primary use and color code.

Figure 4-16. 7.62mm crew serve common ammunition types

4-16

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

M2 HB CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION 4-33. The preferred combat ammunition mix for the M2 HB machine gun is four (API-M8) and one (APIT-M20), commonly referred to as 4:1 link. Other types of caliber .50 ammunition are available; however, the four-and-one mix allows the firer to use TOT method of adjusting fire to achieve target kill or suppression. 4-34. Ammunition for the caliber .50 machine gun is issued as a complete round with a cartridge case, primer, propellant, and bullet, in with either the M2 or M9 closed loop, disintegrating link (see Figure 4-17).

Figure 4-17. M2/M9 closed loop link 4-35. The M2 and M48 caliber .50 machine guns use several types of standard caliber .50 ammunition. Figure 4-18 shows the most common types and their characteristics. Soldiers may only use authorized ammunition manufactured to US and NATO specifications with the M2 and M48 machine guns. 4-36. The maximum effective range of the caliber 50 ammunition is the greatest distance a crewman can accurately engage threat targets using the weapon system. Table 4-6 describes the MER of the 50 caliber round with the M2 HB MG. Table 4-6. Caliber .50 maximum effective range

3 September 2009

Mount/Use

Point Target

Area Target

Tripod

1,500 meters

1,830 meters

Truck/Flex

1,500 meters

1,830 meters

Tank/CWS/RWS

1,800 meters

1,830 meters

Suppression

1,500 meters

1,830 meters

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-17

Chapter 4

4-37. The U.S. caliber 50 machine guns use various ammunition types in training and combat. Figure 418a and Figure 14-18b illustrate the most common rounds by nomenclature, DODIC, type, primary use and standard markings, for the caliber 50 machine guns.

Figure 4-18a. Characteristics of the most common caliber .50 ammunition types

4-18

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-18b. Characteristics of the most common caliber .50 ammunition types (continued)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-19

Chapter 4

WARNING USE AUTHORIZED AMMUNITION ONLY FOR CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN. USE OF UNAUTHORIZED AMMUNITION MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

Note. The ammunition containers have the lot numbers stenciled on the side of the box, not on the individual rounds. Therefore, it is important to record the box lot numbers when belted machine gun ammunition is removed from containers.

SECTION III – 25-MM BRADLEY FIGHTING VEHICLE AMMUNITION 4-38. The Bradley’s main armament is the M242 25-mm automatic gun. It can destroy lightly armored vehicles and aerial targets such as helicopters and slow-flying aircraft. It can also suppress enemy positions and troops in the open. The three service rounds used with the 25-mm gun are the M791, M919 and the M792. The two training rounds used with the 25-mm gun are the M910 and M793.

CLASSIFICATION 4-39. Conventional 25-mm main gun ammunition is classified according to type and use. z Kinetic energy (KE) ammunitions (such as M791) are the primary rounds used against light armored vehicles and slow moving aerial targets. z High-explosive (HE) ammunition. Chemical energy (CE) ammunition (such as M792 and M919) are the primary rounds used against unarmored vehicles and helicopters. They can also be used to suppress ATGM positions and enemy squads beyond coax range. z Training: „ Target practice (TP) ammunition is used for gunnery training. These rounds have ballistic characteristics similar to service ammunition, without the CE projectile, fuse or service penetrator. „ Dummy ammunition is used for practicing gunnery-related tasks; it has no propellant or explosive charge.

IDENTIFICATION 4-40. The various 25mm main gun ammunition can be identified by shape, the projectile color code, and markings on the projectile (see Table 4-3 for the standard marking convention).

COMPONENTS OF 25MM AMMUNITION 4-41. A complete round of 25mm main gun ammunition is usually composed of the following basic components; however, not all types of rounds will have every part listed: z Booster Pellet – part of the ignition sequence of the ammunition. The booster pellet is ignited by the primer, which in turn ignites the propellant in the cartridge case. z Cartridge Case – the steel casing that contains the propellant, booster pellet, flash tube and primer. z Flash Tube – part of the ignition sequence of the ammunition. The flash tube is ignited by the primer, which in turn ignites the propellant in the cartridge case. For 25mm ammunition the

4-20

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

z z z z z z z

z

z z

flash tube is only used in the M919 armor-piercing, fin stabilized, discarding sabot with tracer (APFSDS-T). Fuze – the part of the HE projectile that causes it to function upon impact with a target (not used in KE rounds). Obturator – a rubber, nylon or copper ring that seals propellant gases behind the projectile during firing. Ogive – the curved portion of the projectile assembly that provides the aerodynamic shape which lowers drag. Primer – the cap in the base of the cartridge case which when struck by the firing pin, starts the ignition sequence of the booster pellet or flashtube, which in turn ignites the propellant charge. Projectile Assembly – the part of the round that travels through the gun tube. Propellant – the composition that burns, producing gas pressure that forces the projectile assembly from the cartridge case down the gun barrel toward the target. Pusher Base – this is only a part of the 25mm M910 target practice discarding sabot with tracer (TPDS-T) round. It is the metal base of the projectile assembly that the propellant gasses push against to drive the projectile assembly down the gun barrel. It is discarded from the projectile assembly once it leaves the gun barrel. Rotating Band – an iron or nylon o-ring located on the projectile assembly which engages the lands and grooves of the gun and provides forward obturation by sealing propellant gases behind the projectile during firing. Subprojectile – typically for KE rounds the part of the projectile that travels to the target after it has discarded its sabots. Windscreen – a pointed, curved surface mainly used to form the streamlined nose of the round. Also known as the nose cap.

SERVICE AMMUNITION 4-42. The M791 and M919 Sabot rounds use KE (no explosives are needed) to penetrate the target using the mass of the projectile and the velocity of the projectile striking the target (see Figure 4-19).

Figure 4-19. Kinetic energy formula 4-43. The M792 HE round depends on CE and not striking velocity, therefore its ability to penetrate light armor is as effective at 3,000 meters as it is at 200 meters. 4-44. Figure 4-20 provides a quick reference for comparing the three types of 25mm service ammunition.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-21

Chapter 4

Nomenclature

M791 APDS-T

M919 APFSDS-T

M792 HEI-T

A974

A986

A975

“SAY-BOW”

“SAY-BOW”

“AAACH- EEE”

1,345 mps

1,385 mps

1,100 mps

1,000 meters

0.8 sec

0.8 sec

1.2 sec

1,500 meters

1.2 sec

1.2 sec

2.2 sec

2,000 meters

1.7 sec

1.6 sec

3.6 sec

2,500 meters

DODIC Announced in fire command as: Muzzle velocity +/- 20 meters

Hazard Classification

Time of flight in seconds at—

2.2 sec

2.1 sec

5.3 sec

Cartridge weight

458g

454g

501g

Projectile weight

134g

96g

185g

Tracer burn time

>1.7 sec

>1.8 sec

>3.5 sec

Bursting radius/aiming distance maximum range

NA

NA

5m/10 to 200 m

Maximum effective range (MER)

2,000m

2,500m

3,000m

Tracer burn range

2,000m

2,500m

2,000m

MER is the greatest distance a threat target can be accurately engaged utilizing the weapon system. Figure 4-20. Comparison of service ammunition for 25-mm gun

M791 APDS-T 4-45. The M791 Armor-Piercing Discarding Sabot with Tracer (APDS-T) round penetrates light-armor vehicles, self-propelled artillery, and aerial targets such as helicopters and slow-moving, fixed-wing aircraft (see Figure 4-21).

4-22

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

DANGER Before firing any discarding sabot ammunition, consider the safety of Soldiers on the ground. The discarding sabot can cause death or injury. The discarding sabot travels down the gun-target line within a 30degree angle on either side of the gun-target line, for 200 meters.

Figure 4-21. M791 armor-piercing discarding sabot with tracer 4-46. The APDS-T round is a fixed-type, percussion, primed round. It consists of a sabot-encapsulated projectile body crimped to a steel cartridge case. The projectile body consists of a solid tungsten alloy penetrator, pressed-on aluminum windscreen, pressed-in tracer pellets, molded discarding-type nylon sabot, staked aluminum base, and welded or pressed-on nylon nose cap. The projectile sabot and nose cap are black with white markings. 4-47. Gases produced by the burning propellant will send the projectile from the gun at 1,345 meters per second (plus or minus 20 meters per second) and ignite the tracer. Setback, centrifugal, and aerodynamic forces cause both the sabot and nose cap to discard as soon as the round leaves the barrel. The tungsten penetrator (core) is spin-stabilized and penetrates the target solely by KE. 4-48. The maximum effective range of the M791 APDS-T is 2,000 meters due to tracer burnout; however the APDS-T ammunition is accurate out to 2,200. As the range increases, the APDS-T round penetration decreases, especially when target vehicles have an added layer of armor.

M919 APFSDS-T 4-49. The APFSDS-T round penetrates light-armor vehicles, self-propelled artillery, and aerial targets, which includes helicopters and slow-moving, fixed-wing aircraft (see Figure 4-22).

DANGER Because of the depleted uranium (DU) penetrator, the M919 APFSDS-T round will only be used in combat or on ranges approved for DU use. If at any time it gets damaged, crews must follow handling and reporting procedures in DA Message RUEADWD3453, DTG-17051ZMAY2001 and also in the vehicular technical manuals (TM 9-2350-252-10-1 or TM 9-2350-284-10-1).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-23

Chapter 4

Figure 4-22. M919 armor-piercing, fin-stabilized, discarding sabot, with tracer 4-50. The APFSDS-T round is a fixed-type, percussion-primed round that consists of a sabot-encapsulated projectile crimped into a steel cartridge case. The projectile is made of slate gray, corrosion-protected, depleted uranium. It has a screw-on steel fin with pressed-in trace pellets; a three-piece, segmented aluminum sabot; and a snap-on plastic protective cap. The projectile sabot and protective nose cap are black, and the slip-band nylon obturator is white. The round has a green rubber sealant between the sabot segments, the sabot and penetrator, and the sabot and plastic cap. 4-51. This KE round is similar to the APDS-T (M791) round, but with a velocity of 1,385 meters per second (plus or minus 20m/s). It also has greater effective range, penetration capabilities, and tracer burn time.

M792 HIGH-EXPLOSIVE INCENDIARY WITH TRACER 4-52. The high-explosive incendiary with tracer (HEI-T) round can destroy unarmed vehicles and helicopters, and suppress enemy ATGM positions. The M792 is also used to engage enemy squads beyond coax range (900 meters) and out to a maximum effective range of 3,000 meters (see Figure 4-23).

Figure 4-23. M792 high-explosive incendiary with tracer 4-53. The HEI-T cartridge is a fixed-type, percussion-primed round. The one-piece projectile body is filled with high-explosive incendiary (HEI) and crimped to a steel cartridge case. The hollowed steel projectile has an M758 mechanical fuze, 32 grams of an HEI mix, and a pressed-in tracer. The projectile is yellow with a red band, black markings, and a gold tip. On some rounds, the projectile’s yellow color is slightly orange near the red band. 4-54. Gases produced by the burning propellant send the projectile out of the gun at 1,100 meters per second. On impact, the M758 fuze ignites and the HEI filler detonates (see Figure 4-24). This projects steel fragments from the body, rotating band assembly, and incendiary filler over a 5-meter radius.

4-24

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-24. M758 high-explosive incendiary with tracer fuze 4-55. The maximum effective range for HEI-T rounds is 3,000 meters. This is based on— z A mechanical fuze (the M758 fuze) that detonates the round at approximately 3,000 meters. z The fact that tracers burn out at 2,000 meters, but the gunner can observe the impact of the round beyond this range, up to 3,000 meters. z The 5-meter bursting radius and rate-of-fire that allow the firer to engage both point and area targets out to 3,000 meters, though accuracy decreases beyond 1,600 meters. 4-56. The Hazard Classification for the M758 fuze is 1.1, which is different from the round itself (see Figure 4-25). Support personnel must verify with the ammunition supply point or holding area for the correct markings based on their vehicle’s overall cargo.

Figure 4-25. M758 fuze hazard classification marker 4-57. The M792 HEI-T projectile has a specific functioning sequence; safe, setback, armed, and detonation. Figure 4-26 shows the M758 fuze and its components in the safe mode.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-25

Chapter 4

Figure 4-26. M758 fuze in SAFE 4-58. Once the M792 round is fired, the M758 round enters the setback function. This function prepares the fuze to arm. Figure 4-27 shows the setback function.

Figure 4-27. M758 fuze setback function 4-59. Once the setback function is complete, the fuze is capable of arming. This is designed to occur between 10 and 150 meters, but its typical arming distance is 50m from the end of the gun tube. Figure 4-28 and Figure 4-29 detail the steps of the arming function.

4-26

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-28. M758 fuze initial arming function

Figure 4-29. M758 fuze arming sequence complete 4-60. Once the M792 has been fired and the M758 fuze completes the arming function, the round can detonate in one of three ways–direct impact, grazing impact, or self-destruct (see Figure 4-30 through Figure 4-32). Figure 4-33 describes the two types of impact, direct (frontal) and grazing and the respective angle of attack for the projectile striking a threat target. z Direct Impact. Striking the target crushes the projectile’s probe cap. This pushes the probe rearward, which thrusts the firing pin into the detonator, which detonates the HEI mixture.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-27

Chapter 4

z

Figure 4-30. M758 fuze direct impact functioning Grazing Impact. Sometimes, due to spin decay (loss of forward velocity), the projectile strikes the target with insufficient force. Spin decay triggers the set-back spring to overcome centrifugal force, pushing the body assembly forward, and thrusting the detonator into the firing pin.

Figure 4-31. M758 fuze grazing impact functioning z

4-28

Self-Destruct. If the round does not hit a target, the projectile self-destructs at 3,000 meters. Depending on their severity; however, head winds and tail winds can reduce the distance where the round self-destructs.

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-32. M758 fuze self destruct functioning

Figure 4-33. Frontal and grazing projectile impact zones for the M792

TARGET PRACTICE AMMUNITION 4-61. For more realistic training, the training ammunition for the 25-mm gun replicates service ammunition. Figure 4-34 outlines the characteristics of the training ammunition for the 25-mm gun.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-29

Chapter 4

Nomenclature

M910 TPDS-T

M793 TP-T

DODIC

A940

A976

Announced in fire command as:

“SAY-BOW”

“AAACH-EEE”

Muzzle velocity +/- 20 meters

1,525 mps

1,100 mps

1,000 meters

0.8 sec

1.2 sec

1,500 meters

1.2 sec

2.2 sec

2,000 meters

1.8 sec

3.5 sec

2,500 meters

2.1 sec

5.2 sec

Cartridge weight

420g

501g

Projectile weight

95g

182g

Tracer burn time

>1.8 sec

>3.5 sec

Bursting radius/aiming distance maximum range

NA

NA

Maximum effective range

2,000m

1,600m

>2,000m

>2,000m

Hazard Classification

Time of flight in seconds at—

Tracer burn range

Figure 4-34. Comparison of training ammunition for 25-mm gun

M910 TARGET PRACTICE DISCARDING SABOT WITH TRACER 4-62. The TPDS-T round simulates the flight pattern of the M791 APDS-T round. The TPDS-T round allows units to practice sabot engagements on limited-distance ranges (see Figure 4-35). The maximum range of the TPDS-T round is 6,404 meters. 4-63. The TPDS-T cartridge is a fixed-type, percussion-primed round. It consists of a sabot projectile assembly crimped to a steel cartridge case. The projectile assembly includes a discardable aluminum pusher base. It also includes a sub-projectile encapsulated with a discarding nylon sabot and polyethylene protective cap. The sub-projectile has a steel core with an aluminum or steel windscreen and pressed-in tracer pellets. The projectile is blue with white markings. 4-64. The TPDS-T cartridge trajectory is ballistically matched to within 1 mil of the APDS-T to a range of 2,000 meters. The tracer burns out at 2,000 meters.

Figure 4-35. M910 TPDS-T

4-30

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

M793 TARGET PRACTICE WITH TRACER 4-65. The target practice with tracer (TP-T) cartridge is a fixed-type, percussion-primed training round that is ballistically similar to the HEI-T round out to 2,000 meters (see Figure 4-36). The projectile consists of a hollow steel body with blue with white markings. The TP-T round’s maximum effective range is 1,600 meters because accuracy is greatly reduced beyond that range.

Figure 4-36. M793 TP-T

SAFETY INFORMATION DANGER OF DISCARDING PROJECTILE COMPONENTS 4-66. Crew members must consider the safety of the soldiers on the ground prior to firing any ammunition with discarding sabot projectiles. The sabot leaves the barrel at a 30 degree angle on both sides of the gun-target line for 200 meters (see Figure 4-37).

Figure 4-37. 25 mm sabot petal danger area

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-31

Chapter 4

AMMUNITION HANDLING 4-67. There is a danger that an electric spark or radio frequency (RF) energy can cause the primer to ignite. z Always wear gloves (combat vehicle crewman type, MIL-G-44108) when handling ammunition. The human body absorbs RF energy that could be transferred to the primer electrode. z Never attempt to clean the primer on the aft face of the cartridge by touching the primer with any metal object or tool. z To clean ammunition, wipe it clean with a dry, clean, soft rag. Do not use abrasive material or cleaning solvent. If this amount of cleaning is not sufficient, do not use the cartridge; return it to the ammunition supply point/quality assurance specialist. z Personnel should ensure that the use of cellular phones and electronic devices within vicinity of ammunition is limited. It is possible for the devices to cause an electric spark which may cause the primer to ignite.

DUST STORMS 4-68. During dust storms, crews should consider installing a muzzle cover or tarpaulin to prevent sand and other debris from entering the muzzle of the M242 gun. This might prevent ammunition from being lodged inside the chamber due to debris and sand buildup.

MAINTENANCE 4-69. Vehicle crews should conduct periodic inspections of service ammunition using the appropriate operator’s manual. Maintenance includes only basic tasks, such as cloth wipe downs by crews, and touchup painting performed by ammunition supply point/quality assurance specialist (ASP/QASAS) personnel. 4-70. Ammunition condition codes are single letters that classify ammunition. Each code identifies the degree of serviceability, condition, and completeness (readiness for issue and use), as well as other actions. See FM 4-30.13 for specific information on the condition codes of main gun ammunition.

SECTION IV – MK19 MOD 3, 40-MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN 4-71. The MK19 Mod 3 40-mm Grenade Machine Gun (GMC) (MK19) is used to destroy lightly armored vehicles, defensive positions, and dismounted threats. It is also used to suppress enemy positions and troops in the open. The MK19 fires CE and anti-personnel rounds. This section will discuss the characteristics of both service (combat) and training 40mm rounds specifically designed for the MK19. 4-72. The MK19 fires the following cartridges: M430/M430A1 high-explosive, dual-purpose (HEDP) grenades, the M1001 high velocity canister cartridge (HVCC) grenade, the M385 and M918 training practice rounds, the MK 281 Mod 0 training round, and the M922/M922A1 dummy rounds. Figure 4-38 describes the characteristics of the various 40mm rounds available for the MK19 Mod 3.

4-32

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Nomenclature

M430/M430A1 HEDP

M1001 HVCC

M385 TP

M918 TP

MK 281 Mod 0 TP

M922/M922A1 Dummy

B472

DODIC

B542

BA11

B576

B584

BA12

Type

HEDP

HVCC

TP

TP

TP

Dummy

Fuze

M549 PIBD

None

None

M550 FEA

None

None

Primary Use

Lightly armored vehicles, personnel

Antipersonnel

Target practice

Target practice

Target practice

Weapon function and Crew training

Arming Distance

18m to 30m

NA

NA

18 to 30m

NA

NA

Filler

Composition B

107 each 2” steel flechettes

Solid inert projectile

Flash charge composition

Orange marking dye

Solid inert projectile

Casualty Radius

5m

5m

NA

NA

NA

NA

Burst Radius

15m

15m

NA

NA

NA

NA

Muzzle Velocity

241 m/s

242 m/s

244 m/s

242 m/s

242 m/s

NA

MER

1,500m

100m

1,500m

1,500m

1,500m

NA

Max Range

2,200m

100m

2,200m

2,200m

2,200m

NA

Projectile Color Code

Olive drab with black markings and gold tip

Olive drab with brown band with white diamonds and gold tip

Blue with black markings

Blue with black markings and brown band

Blue with black markings

Gold with black markings

Hazard Classification

None

Legend: FEA = fuze escapement assembly PD = point detonating HEDP = high-explosive dual-purpose HVCC = high velocity canister cartridge

MER = maximum effective range TP = target practice PIBD = point initiating, base detonating

Figure 4-38. Characteristics of 40-mm grenade

WARNING Use only prescribed ammunition. Mixing the MK19 and M203 types of ammunition could result in injury. 40mm rounds are not interchangeable between the two weapons.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-33

Chapter 4

SERVICE AMMUNITION M430/M430A1 HIGH-EXPLOSIVE DUAL PURPOSE 4-73. The impact-type round penetrates 2 inches of steel armor and inflicts personnel casualties in the target area. This round uses a point initiating base detonating (PIBD) fuze (M549) and filler composition B (marked by yellow letters). The arming distance is between 18 to 30 meters, with a kill radius of 5 meters and a wound radius of approximately 15 meters. 4-74. Maximum effective range is 1,500 meters and maximum range is 2,200 meters. The M430/M430A1 cartridge, linked with the M16A2 links, is the standard round for the MK19 Mod 3. The rounds are packed 48 rounds to each M548 ammunition container. The color code for the rounds is olive drab with a yellow ogive and yellow markings. Figure 4-39 shows the internal components of the M430A1.

Figure 4-39. M430A1 internal components

M1001 HIGH VELOCITY CANISTER CARTRIDGE 4-75. The M1001 HVCC is an antipersonnel and anti-materiel round for the MK19 Mod 3. This projectile inflicts personnel causalities in the target area with ground burst effects. The M1001 cartridge is linked with the M16A2 series of links. The rounds are packed 48 rounds to each ammunition container. The color code for the rounds is olive drab with a brown band around the body. 4-76. The HVCC round has a standard muzzle velocity similar to the HEDP at 242 meters per second. Projectile payload consists of approximately 107 two inch long steel flechettes, or darts, as seen in Figure 4-40.

4-34

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-40. M1001 HVCC projectile and flechettes 4-77. The functioning of the projectile and dispersion of the approximately 107 flechettes require sufficient momentum or velocity to remain lethal at the point of impact. The maximum effective range of 100 meters ensures the terminal velocity of the subprojectiles will be sufficient to penetrate the target.

TRAINING AMMUNITION M385 TARGET PRACTICE 4-78. The M385 round is a target practice round that contains no filler or explosive charge. It is used for gunnery training. The markings are a blue ogive with black lettering (see Figure 4-41). The M385 round launches an inert projectile using an M2 propellant charge. The rounds are linked using either the M16A1 or M16A2 link, depending on production model and lot number. The maximum effective range is 1,500 meters and maximum range is 2,200 meters. The rounds are packaged in a 50 round belt in a wooden box.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-35

Chapter 4

Figure 4-41. M385 TP internal components

M918 TARGET PRACTICE 4-79. The M918 round is a target practice round that contains a small flash-bang charge that identifies the impact to the firer and observer(s). Because of this, there may be some range restrictions concerning its use. Verify with the local range SOP prior to firing. The markings are a blue ogive with black lettering. 4-80. The M918 round launches a flash – bang projectile using an M2 propellant charge. The rounds are linked using either the M16A1 or M16A2 link, depending on production model and lot number. Maximum effective range is 1,500 meters and maximum range is 2,200 meters. The rounds are packaged in a 50 round belt in a wooden box. See Figure 4-42 for the internal components of the M918.

Figure 4-42. M918 internal components 4-81. During FY08, DODIC BA30 will become available to the force. This ammunition belt will consist of two each M918 rounds and one each M385 round connected using an M16A2 standard link as shown in Figure 4-43.

4-36

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-43. BA30 2:1 Link

MK 281 MOD 0 TARGET PRACTICE 4-82. The MK 281 Mod 0 is a target practice round used for gunnery proficiency. The MK281 Mod 0 contains marking dye instead of an explosive projectile. The dye is used to show point of impact during gunnery training. Maximum effective range is 1,500 meters and maximum range is 2,200 meters (see Figure 4-44). The markings are a blue ogive with black lettering. The rounds are linked using either the M16A1 or M16A2 link, depending on production model and lot number. The rounds are packaged in a 50 round belt in a wooden box.

Figure 4-44. MK 281 mod 0 target practice

M922/M922A1 DUMMY 4-83. The M922/M922A1 dummy round is totally inert and is used to check gun functioning and to train gun crews. The rounds themselves are only issued to the unit armorer and are not available from the ammunition supply point (ASP) or ammunition holding area (AHA).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-37

Chapter 4

4-84. The dummy cartridges are linked together using the M16A2 links (see Figure 4-45). Each MK19 Mod 3 grenade machine gun is authorized one 10 round belt (DODIC B472) for training purposes. This belt of dummy grenades are packed in a M2A1 metal shipping container.

Figure 4-45. B472 dummy linked 4-85. Figure 4-46 shows the various rounds used in the MK19 Mod 3 including their identifying color codes and markings.

Figure 4-46. 40mm ammunition color codes and markings

SECTION V – 120-MM ABRAMS TANK AMMUNITION 4-86. The Abrams tank main armament is the M256, 120mm smoothbore cannon. It is used to destroy armored vehicles, lightly armored vehicles, helicopters and defensive positions. It is also used to suppress enemy positions and troops in the open. The 120mm rounds are also used to conduct wall breaching and

4-38

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

obstacle reduction. The Abrams fires KE, CE, special purpose and training rounds. This section will discuss the characteristics of both service (combat) and training main gun rounds.

CLASSIFICATION 4-87. Conventional main gun ammunition is classified according to type and use. z Armor-defeating ammunition. KE ammunition (such as M829A3) is the primary round used against tank and tank-like targets. In a secondary role, it is used against helicopters and lightly armored vehicles. z Multipurpose ammunition: „ CE ammunition (such as M830A1 [MPAT]/M830 high-explosive antitank [HEAT]) are the primary round used against lightly armored targets and field fortifications. In a secondary role it can be used against personnel and tank-like targets. When in AIR mode, M830A1 is the primary round used against helicopters. „ High-explosive obstacle reducing with tracer (HE-OR-T). The M908 is a HE, obstaclereducing round used primarily against concrete and stone obstacles. In a secondary role, it can be used against light armor and side/rear of tanks. z Antipersonnel. The M1028 canister round is primarily used against massed troop formations. In a secondary role, it may be used against technical vehicles (light commercial trucks) and to breach non-reinforced walls and concertina wire. z Training: „ Target practice (TP) ammunition is used for gunnery training. These rounds provide characteristics similar to service ammunition, without the CE projectile or service penetrator. „ Dummy ammunition is used for practicing gunnery-related tasks; it has no propellant or explosive charge.

IDENTIFICATION 4-88. Main gun ammunition can be identified by shape, the projectile color code, and markings on the projectile. See Table 4-3 on page 4-9 for the standard marking convention. In addition to the standard colors and markings found on the projectile, the cartridge case base (aftcap) includes additional information about the ammunition such as nomenclature and quick reference markings. 4-89. Service rounds are black or olive drab with white or yellow lettering. The training rounds are light blue with white lettering.

CASE BASE QUICK REFERENCE MARKING 4-90. The case base (commonly referred to as the aft cap) has specific markings that help identify each 120mm main gun tank round. On each case base the user will see the Quick Identification Marking; lot number for the case base and seal assembly; cartridge nomenclature; cartridge lot number, and the primer (see Figure 4-47).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-39

Chapter 4

Figure 4-47. Aft cap markings 4-91. All current M829A2, M829A3, M830A1, M1028, and M908 tactical rounds have quick identification markings on the case base to help the loader quickly identify the types of rounds loaded in the ammunition racks (see Figure 4-48). Refurbished M830 rounds can be further identified by the painted black aft cap with white markings in addition to the “H” Quick ID marking on the case base, these are limited quantity rounds. The M829A1 and original M830 rounds do not have quick identification markings.

Figure 4-48. Case base quick reference markings for service ammunition 4-92. The quick identification marking system has also been applied to the training ammunition to help the loader and crews rapidly identify the type of round prior to loading. Not all training ammunition will have these markings as stocks on hand were not upgraded with the new marking system. In these cases, the loader should mark his aftcaps in a similar fashion with a grease pencil to aid in the identification process. Figure 4-49 is an example of the training ammunition marking system.

4-40

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-49. Case base quick reference markings for training ammunition

COMPONENTS OF A MAIN GUN ROUND 4-93. A complete round of main gun ammunition is usually composed of the following basic parts; however, not all types of rounds will have every part listed (see Figure 4-50): z Bourrelet — raised metal portions on the front and aft areas of the projectile which center it in the tube. The bourrelet may be made of metal or a composite material. z Cartridge Case — combustible casing that contains the propellant, case base and primer. When the round is fired, the combustible cartridge case is consumed and the gases expand the case base and seal assembly to provide rear obturation. z Case Base — the rear portion of the cartridge with the primer screwed into the case base. Upon firing, the case base and seal assembly provide rear obturation. During counter-recoil, the case base is ejected from the gun. z Fuze — the part of the projectile that causes it to function upon impact or at a specific time (not currently used in KE rounds). z Obturator — a rubber, nylon or copper ring that seals propellant gases behind the projectile during firing. z Ogive — the forward portion of the projectile designed to reduce air resistance and assist in providing aerodynamic stability. z Primer — the component that is screwed into the case base, upon firing it ignites the propellant charge. z Projectile — the part of the round that travels through the gun tube. z Propellant — upon firing, the primer ignites the propellant charge, producing gas pressure that expands the rear seal, and forces the projectile from the gun tube toward the target. z Subprojectile — generally refers to projectiles with discarding petals, the subprojectile (or payload as in the M1028 canister round) impacts with the target.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-41

Chapter 4

Figure 4-50. Components of a 120mm main gun round

SERVICE AMMUNITION 4-94. Armor-defeating projectiles use either KE or CE to penetrate and destroy armored targets. 4-95. Figure 4-51 lists the characteristics of the main gun service ammunition available for the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP.

4-42

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Nomenclature

M829A1 APFSDS-T

M829A2 APFSDS-T

M829A3 APFSDS-T

M830 HEAT-MP-T

M830A1 HEAT-MP-T

M908 HE-OR-T

M1028 Canister

DODIC

C380

C792

CA26

C787

C791

CA05

CA38

Muzzle Velocity

1,575m/s

1,675 m/s

1,555 m/s

1,140 m/s

1,410 m/s

1,410 m/s

1,410 m/s

Announced in Fire Command as:

“SABOT” or “SAY-BOW”

“SABOT” or “SAY-BOW”

“SABOT” or “SAY-BOW”

“HEAT”

“MPAT” or “MPAT AIR”

“OR” (OH-ARE)

“CANISTER” or “CAN”

Fuze *

None

None

None

PIBD

PIBD or Proximity (air mode)

PIBD

None

Fuze Performance

NA

NA

NA

Armed 11-30m 50% by ~20m

Air Armed 400-1000 m, (~700 m) Ground armed 1160 m, (~35m)

Armed 11-60m (~35m)

NA

Employment Primary

Primary armor defeating

Primary armor defeating

Primary armor defeating

Light armor, buildings, bunkers, personnel

Light armor, buildings, bunkers, personnel, helicopters (air mode)

Obstacle reduction

Massed personnel

Employment Secondary

Helicopters

Helicopters

Helicopters

Tank and tank-like

Tank and tank-like

Light armor and side/ rear of tanks

Anti-materiel and very light armored

Projectile Color Code

Black with white letters

Black with white letters

Black with white letters

Black with yellow letters

Black with yellow letters

Black with yellow letters and yellow steel nose

Olive drab with white letters

Weight

46.2 lb

44.9 lb

49.12 lb

53.4 lb

50.1 lb

50.1 lb

50.7 lb

Hazard Classification

Length

38.7 in

38.7 in

38.7 in

38.6 in

38.7 in

38.7 in

30.7 in

EFC

1.0

1.0

2.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

Storage Temperature Limits

-50°F to 145°F

-50°F to 145°F

-50°F to 145°F

-50°F to 145°F

-50°F to 145°F

-50°F to 145°F

-50°F to 145°F

Safe-to-Fire Temperature Limits

-25°F to 125°F

-25°F to 125°F

-25°F to 120°F

-50°F to 145°F

-25°F to 120°F

-25°F to 120°F

-50°F to 145°F

Performance Temperature Limits

-25°F to 125°F

-25°F to 125°F

-25°F to 120°F

-25°F to 125°F

-25°F to 120°F

-25°F to 120°F

-25°F to 145°F

* Fuze abbreviations: PIBD=point initiating base detonating, FFI=full frontal impact switch. EFC= Equivalent Full Charge

Figure 4-51. Tank service round technical data

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-43

Chapter 4

SAFE TEMPERATURE NOTE It is imperative that crewmembers pay attention to the difference between “storage temperature limits” and the “safe to fire limits.” The rounds can be stored from -50 F to 145 F. However, prior to firing, many round types must be allowed to return to the safe to fire temperature limits of -25 F to 125 F. IAW the tank operators manual, when ammunition is stored in an open field environment, it must be covered (such as with a tarpaulin) to reduce high temperatures within the ammunition containers.

ARMOR DEFEATING AMMUNITION M829 A1/A2/A3 APFSDS-T 4-96. Sabot rounds are the primary armor-defeating round for the 120-mm main gun and the most accurate of all tank ammunition. Sabot rounds use KE (weight and speed of the penetrator) to defeat the target (see Figure 4-52).

Figure 4-52. Kinetic energy formula 4-97. The effectiveness of sabot rounds depends on the density of the target surface; therefore, consider target armor thickness when selecting the appropriate armor-defeating round for a specific target. Use sabot ammunition when faced with penetrating the thickest part of the target. Also, when possible, maneuver your element to engage armored targets from the flank or rear where the armor is less dense. 4-98. Three types of 120-mm sabot rounds currently available for the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP tanks are M829A3 APFSDS-T, M829A2 APFSDS-T, and M829A1 APFSDS-T (see Figure 4-53 and Figure 4-54).

4-44

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-53. M829A3 APFSDS-T (120mm)

WARNINGS In combat emergency conditions, when the lives of the crew are in immediate jeopardy, the M829A3 may be fired at temperatures as high as 135F although, there is a low, but real risk of gun tube failure. If the M829A3s are fired at temperatures between 120F and 135F, crews must examine the gun tube for unusual wear or other abnormalities after firing 6 to 8 rounds, and must have direct support maintenance personnel inspect the gun tube if 9 to 18 rounds are fired. Do NOT fire the M829A3 over 135F.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-45

Chapter 4

Figure 4-54. M829A1/M829A2 APFSDS-T (120mm)

MULTIPURPOSE AMMUNITION M830 HEAT-MP-T 4-99. The HEAT round is used primarily against lightly armored targets and field fortifications (see Figure 4-55). In its secondary role it is used against personnel and armored vehicles. Each projectile consists of a steel body with a stand off spike. Inside the projectile is a cone copper liner and wave shaper which forms the explosives into a shaped charge for deeper penetration of the target. Finally, a crush switch in the nose and a switch on the shoulder of the projectile comprise the Full Frontal Impact Switch Assembly. When closed, any of these switches can activate the detonation sequencing.

Figure 4-55. M830 HEAT-MP-T (120mm)

4-46

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

4-100. Upon impact, one of the projectile switches is closed. The fuze then detonates the HE shaped charge, which collapses the cone assembly, creating a high-velocity focused shock wave and a jet of metal particles that penetrate the target (see Figure 4-56). This round depends on CE and not striking velocity, therefore its ability to penetrate armor is as effective at 4,000 meters as it is at 200 meters.

Figure 4-56. Chemical energy ammunition effects 4-101. In addition to the M830 HEAT-MP-T (see Figure 4-55 on previous page), there are two other HEAT rounds available, the M830A1 MPAT and M908 HE-OR-T (see Figure 4-57).

M830A1 HEAT-MP-T (MPAT) 4-102. The 120-mm M830A1 MPAT round is a fin-stabilized round that contains a HE warhead equipped with a selectable proximity switch and fuze that allows it to be fired in either AIR or GROUND mode. Its primary targets are light-armored ground targets, which are engaged with the fuze set to GROUND mode, allowing the round to function either when it strikes a target with a direct or glancing blow. It may also be used against bunkers, buildings, the flank and rear of enemy tanks, and enemy personnel. 4-103. With the switch set to AIR mode, this round can be used in a self-defense role against enemy helicopters. The round will function either when it strikes a target or approaches the vicinity of a target that is detected by the sensor; however, since the sensor is not active until 400 meters at the earliest, it will not function in AIR mode at shorter ranges, but will detonate when striking a target. 4-104. The MPAT round case base will be marked as MPAT or MPAT-1. The primary difference between the two rounds is a newer, stronger spring disk. The MPAT-1 spring disc is designed to prevent separation of the case base from the combustible cartridge case when handling the round.

M908 HE-OR-T 4-105. The M908 is a HE-OR-T (see Figure 4-57). It is a full-service, 120-mm round fired from the M256 cannon system. The M908 is an M830A1 round that has been reconfigured as follows: z A steel nose cap painted yellow replaces the proximity sensor. z Markings on the projectile or case base that identify the round as OR M908 or XM908. 4-106. The weight of the round and center of gravity are identical to the M830A1 MPAT round. The M908 will be used primarily to reduce obstacles into rubble small enough to be cleared by either unit organic equipment or external support, or to destroy concrete bridge pylons in order to create an obstacle that would greatly restrict or impede enemy movement.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-47

Chapter 4

Figure 4-57. M830A1 HEAT-MP-T and M908 HE-OR-T

WARNING The nose of the M830A1 contains the air/ground sensor. This sensor can be damaged if it is struck on hard surfaces inside the turret (turret roof, breech, etc.) with moderate force. Loaders must take precaution to avoid striking the nose during the loading process.

ANTIPERSONNEL AMMUNITION M1028 Canister 4-107. The purpose of the M1028 round is to provide a short-range antipersonnel capability for the Abrams tank. The projectile consists of a two-piece, forward and aft aluminum body that houses the payload and prevents the deployment of the payload until shot exit. The aft body (commonly called the pot) provides strength and stability for the forward body (see Figure 4-58). The forward body houses approximately 1097 3/8" tungsten balls and is scored (grooved) so that upon muzzle exit, the sides (4 petals) peel away and permit the payload to disperse down range. 4-108. This round is most effective at 200 to 500 meters against a standard 10 man infantry squad in a wedge formation. For enemy infantry squads less than 100 meters and greater than 500 meters crews should use coax to engage the targets. At ranges less than 100 meters, the projectiles have not had enough time to deploy adequately and the coax is more effective. At ranges beyond 500 meters, the lethality of the

4-48

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

canister is severely reduced due to loss of projectile density and velocity. The coax is much more effective and efficient at ranges greater than 500 meters. 4-109. Since this is designed as a short range round, the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP fire control systems have been modified with a default range of 150 meters as well as the required ballistic solutions. Units acquiring the M1028 may or may not have the required updates to the tank fire control system to accurately fire the canister round. The fire control computers for all 120-mm tanks are scheduled to be upgraded with M1028 ballistic solutions. If M1028 rounds are provided before tanks are upgraded, crews should index MPAT and manually enter a 1,200 meter ballistic solution. This provides an equivalent super elevation for the M1028 of about 340 meters. 4-110. For additional information on the M1028 canister round, refer to ST 3-20.12-7, M1028 120-mm Canister (available on the Reimer Digital Library, Command Publications, STs). 4-111. See Table 4-7 for information on the effects of the M1028 canister round against threat targets at specific ranges. See Figure 4-59 for the lethal danger zone of the M1028 canister round. Note. The M1028 creates a higher wear pattern around the bore evacuator holes compared to other 120-mm rounds. When tubes that have fired the M1028 are borescoped, maintenance teams should be instructed to pay particular attention to this area.

Figure 4-58. M1028 canister

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-49

Chapter 4

Table 4-7. M1028 canister effects on various targets Target Type

Ranges

Troops

200-500 meters

Cinderblock walls

<100 meters

Cinderblock walls

100-200 meters

Adobe wall

<75 meters

Double reinforced concrete walls

50-70 meters

3X concertina wire

50-60 meters

Small commercial vehicles

<200 meters

Rounds

Effects

1 Round per squad 2 Rounds per platoon 1 Round 1 Round 2 Round 1 Round 2 Rounds 3 Rounds

~40 % incapacitation

1 round 1 round

Rubble Some perforation Rubble wall Penetration Perforation Man size hole for entry, remaining rebar will need to be removed Single person passageway Vehicle damage and personnel incapacitation

Notes 1. Troops 5 meters apart in wedge formation. 2. When firing the canister round against hard targets, unprotected personnel must be at least 200 meters from the target area to avoid danger from debris.

Figure 4-59. M1028 canister lethal danger zone (not to scale)

4-50

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

TARGET PRACTICE AMMUNITION 4-112. Target practice ammunition is used during gunnery training in place of service ammunition. The fire control system on the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP tanks has the ballistics data for each training round. In the fire command, target practice rounds are announced as the round they represent. Their color code is light blue with white letters. 4-113. The training rounds available for the M256 cannon are the M865 Target Practice Cone Stabilized Discarding Sabot-Tracer (TPCSDS-T), M831A1, M831A1-TP-T, and M1002 target practice multipurposetracer (TPMP-T). Additionally, the M1028 canister round has been approved to be used on training ranges, (see Figure 4-51 on page 4-43). 4-114. Figure 4-60 contains the characteristics of the 120mm training main gun ammunition. Nomenclature

M865 TPCSDS-T

M831A1 HEAT-TP-T

M1002 TPMP-T

DODIC

C785

C784

CA31

Muzzle Velocity

1,700 m/s

1,140 m/s

1,375 m/s

Announced in Fire Command as:

“SABOT”

“HEAT”

“MPAT” or “MPAT-AIR”

Fuze

None

None

Simulated Air/Ground switch

Projectile Color Code

Light blue with white letters

Light blue with white letters

Light blue with white letters

Hazard Classification

Weight

37.8 lbs

51.4 lbs

46.0 lbs

Length

34.7”

38.6”

38.7”

Tracer Color

Yellow/Gold

Red

Red/Orange

EFC

1.0

1.0 o

o

1.0 o

o

Storage Temperature Limits

-50 F to 145 F

-50 F to 145 F

-50oF to 145oF

Safe-to-Fire Temperature Limits

-50oF to 145oF

-50oF to 145oF

-25oF to 145oF

Performance Temperature Limits

-25oF to 125oF

-25oF to 125oF

-45oF to 145oF

Figure 4-60. 120 mm target practice round technical data

M865 TPCSDS-T 4-115. The purpose of the M865 TPCSDS-T is to simulate the M829 family service sabot round for gunnery training (see Figure 4-61). This round has similar physical characteristics (weight, length, center of gravity, external appearance) as the original M829 round. The M829A1/A2/A3 service rounds are much longer and heavier than that of the M865.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-51

Chapter 4

Figure 4-61. M865 TPCSDS-T Note. In the M1A2 SEP with 4.0 software, the current or T-S1 M865 is labeled M865A3. This error will be corrected in future software upgrades.

M831A1 HEAT-TP-T 4-116. The purpose of the M831A1 M831A1-TP-T is to simulate the M830 service M831A1-TP-T for gunnery training. The M831A1 is cone stabilized and provides ballistic performance to meet its training requirement out to approximately 2,000 meters (see Figure 4-62). Note. All U.S. and German TP-T training rounds have arrows stamped on the spike. All TP-T training rounds that do not have arrows stamped on the spike should be treated as service HEAT rounds.

Figure 4-62. M831A1 HEAT-TP-T

4-52

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

M1002 TPMP-T 4-117. The purpose of the M1002 TPMP-T cartridge is to serve as a ground-mode-only training round for the 120-mm, high-explosive, antitank multipurpose tracer (HEAT-MP-T), M830A1 tactical cartridge. This round has essentially the same physical characteristics (weight, length, center-of-gravity, external appearance) as the M830A1. Additionally, the nose is a plastic ring which simulates the AIR/GROUND proximity switch found on the M830A. This design allows crew members to select the ground or air mode of operation by turning the plastic ring (see Figure 4-63).

Figure 4-63. M1002 TPMP-T

SAFETY INFORMATION

DANGER M831A1, M865, and M1002 rounds will not be stored in the hull ammunition compartment due to the vulnerability of the M14 propellant. Crews will load only enough training ammunition in the bustle compartments to achieve immediate training objectives. No training ammunition with M14 propellant should be stored in vehicles that are in a hostile environment.

INTEROPERABILITY OF 120MM AMMUNITION 4-118. As part of its design, the M1A1 and M1A2 series of vehicles are capable of firing NATO standard combustible cartridge case 120mm tank ammunition. Within the European Union, the Leopard 2A4 and Leopard 2A5 are used in 10 countries, capable of using the same ammunition. 4-119. TM 9-2350-264-10-2 and TM 9-2350- 388-10-2, Chapter 5, page 5-8 lists all ammunition that can be fired from the M256 cannon, both US Army and NATO 120mm cartridges. 4-120. All ammunition listed in the firing table (FT) 120-D-2 can be fired from the M256 cannon.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-53

Chapter 4

4-121. Ammunition must still be inspected prior to use, including verifying there are no restrictions or suspensions for the ammunition by type or lot number according to TB 9-1300-385. This includes German ammunition. 4-122. The current German 120mm model rounds that can be fired from the M256 Cannon are shown in Table 4-8. Table 4-8.120mm German models for the M256 Cannon Model Number

Type

Purpose

DM 12 HEAT-MP-T

High Explosive, Anti-Tank, Multi-Purpose with Tracer

DM 12A1 HEAT-MPT

High Explosive, Anti-Tank, Multi-Purpose with Tracer

DM 13 APFSDS-T

Armor Piercing, Fin Stabilized, Discarding Sabot with Tracer Armor Piercing, Fin Stabilized, Discarding Sabot with Tracer Armor Piercing, Fin Stabilized, Discarding Sabot with Tracer Armor Piercing, Fin Stabilized, Discarding Sabot with Tracer Armor Piercing, Fin Stabilized, Discarding Sabot with Tracer Target Practice with Tracer Target Practice, Fin Stabilized, Discarding Sabot with Tracer Target Practice, Cone Stabilized, Discarding Sabot with Tracer

Light Armored Vehicles, Secondary Armor Defeating Light Armored Vehicles, Secondary Armor Defeating Armor Defeating

DM 23 APFSDS-T DM 33 APFSDS-T DM 43 APFSDS-T DM 43A1 APFSDS-T DM 18 TP-T DM 28 TPFSDS-T DM 38 TPCSDS-T

Armor Defeating Armor Defeating Armor Defeating Armor Defeating Target Practice (HEAT) Target Practice (Sabot) Target Practice (Sabot)

Note. German Model rounds ending with a 2 are Service HEAT, ending with a 3 are Service Sabot, and ending with an 8 are Training Rounds. 18 are Training HEAT, 28 are Fin Stabilized Sabot, and 38 are Cone Stabilized Sabot.

DANGER OF DISCARDING PROJECTILE COMPONENTS 4-123. All rounds that have discarding sabots, such as service KE rounds, M865, MPAT, HE-OR-T, and canister rounds–will not be fired over friendly troops unless those troops are protected by adequate cover defined in DA Pamphlet 385-63. Troops may be struck by the discarded components. This information should be included in the daily safety briefing for firing tank crews while conducting gunnery. z Discarding Sabot Rounds. The danger area for rounds that have discarding sabots, such as service KE rounds, M865, MPAT, and HE-OR-T extends to 1,000 meters from the gun and 70 meters to either side of the gun-target line (see Figure 4-64).

4-54

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-64. Discarding Sabot danger area z

M1028 Canister Round. The danger area for the discarding components of the canister round is similar to those of any KE sabot round as shown in Figure 4-64.

4-124. Unit Master Gunners must refer to DA Pamphlet 385-63 for accurate surface danger zone dimensions for ammunition firing on any range.

AMMUNITION HANDLING 4-125. The 120-mm ammunition contains electric primers. There is a danger that an electric spark or RF energy can cause the primer to ignite. Care should be taken not to touch the primer, since energy is transferred if the center electrode of the primer is being touched. When handling or operating in the vicinity of unpackaged ammunition, observe the following precautions: z Always wear gloves (combat vehicle crewman type, MIL-G-44108) when handling main gun ammunition. The human body absorbs RF energy that could be transferred to the primer electrode. z Never attempt to clean the primer or the primer electrode on the aft face of the cartridge by touching the primer or electrode with any object or tool. z To clean ammunition, wipe it clean with a dry, clean, soft rag. Do not use abrasive material or cleaning solvent. If this amount of cleaning is not sufficient, do not use the cartridge; return it to the ASP/QASAS (ammunition surveillance). z Personnel should not carry any unauthorized wireless/electronic devices when performing uploading, downloading and prepare to fire operations when involving tank ammunition. It is possible for the devices to cause an electric spark which may cause the primer to ignite. z Maintain a safe separation distance (SSD) of at least 30 meters between any source capable of transmitting UHF/FM signals during operations involving all types of unpackaged tank ammunition outside of the turret. This distance will avoid risk of initiating the primer while ammunition is being handled Note. Crews must periodically inspect their ammunition stowage compartments to maintain a dry condition. Use desiccant bags to prevent excessive moisture within these compartments. Never store ammunition in a wet compartment.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-55

Chapter 4

DUST STORMS 4-126. During dust storms, crews must install the main gun muzzle cover to prevent sand and other debris from entering the M256 gun. Debris which enters the system could prevent main gun ammunition from properly chambering. Also, during live fire, obstructions within the gun tube may contribute to a major malfunction of the system, cause a rupture or damage the muzzle end of the gun tube.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICEABILITY 4-127. Tank crews must conduct periodic inspections of all ammunition using the appropriate tank operator’s manual. These periodic inspections include a complete list of items to be inspected prior to up/down loading of main gun ammunition or when removing an unfired round from the breech. Maintenance includes only basic tasks, such as cloth wipe downs by crews, and touch-up painting performed by ASP/QASAS personnel. 4-128. Table 5-2 of TM 9-2350-264-10-2, Chapter 5 and TM 9-2350-388-10-2, Chapter 5 contains a complete inspection list of items to be inspected prior to handling and firing. 4-129. If units suspect that any 120-mm tank ammunition has been damaged and might not chamber properly, request a man-portable chamber gage from the QASAS (see Figure 4-65). This gage can be used to determine if rounds will fit inside the gun chamber.

Figure 4-65. Man-Portable Chamber Gage, NSN 5220-01-477-5455 4-130. During routine maintenance, care should be given to properly classify the ammunition by the appropriate condition code. Ammunition condition codes are single letters that classify ammunition. Each code identifies the degree of serviceability, condition, and completeness (readiness for issue and use), as well as other actions. See FM 4-30.13 for specific information on the condition codes of main gun ammunition (see Table 4-9).

4-56

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Table 4-9. Main gun ammunition codes

TANK AMMUNITION STOWAGE PLAN 4-131. The ammunition stowage plan for all tanks within the HBCT is part of the unit standing operating procedures (SOP). The stowage plan should include the location of all ammunition authorized for the basic load, by type and number of rounds. During darkness, when lights inside the turret will reduce the crew’s night vision or give away the tank’s position, a standardized stowage plan will help the loader rapidly

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-57

Chapter 4

locate the ammunition announced in the initial fire command. The stowage plan also helps the crew keep track of the number of rounds (by type) that have been fired. 4-132. See Appendix A, page A-134 and page A-135 for further information regarding the layout of the ammunition stowage plan for 16/18 round racks and the 17 round racks.

SAFETY NOTICE CREW MEMBERS MUST ENSURE THAT ONLY THE KINETIC ENERGY OR CANISTER ROUNDS ARE STOWED IN THE UPPER AND OUTER TUBES IN THE AMMUNITION RACKS. STOWAGE OF CHEMICAL ENERGY ROUNDS IN THESE TUBES CAN RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH IF THE ROUNDS EXPLODE IN THE RACK.

SECTION VI – MORTAR AMMUNITION 4-133. Mortars are suppressive indirect fire weapons. They are employed to neutralize or destroy area or point targets, screen large areas with smoke, and provide illumination or coordinated highexplosive/illumination. The mortar platoon’s mission is to provide close and immediate indirect fire support for maneuver battalions and companies. 4-134. A complete round of mortar ammunition contains all of the components needed to get the round out of the tube and to burst at the desired place and time. All 120-mm mortar cartridges, except training cartridges, are packaged as a complete round and have three major components–a fuze, body, and tail fin with propulsion system assembly. This section discusses the proper care and handling, color codes, and field storage of ammunition.

CLASSIFICATION 4-135. Ammunition is classified according to use. HE is used against personnel (in the open or in bunkers), light vehicles, and light bunkers. White phosphorus (WP) is used for screening and spotting. Illumination is used for battlefield illumination and signaling. Full range training rounds are used for gunnery related training.

AUTHORIZED CARTRIDGES 4-136. There are four types of ammunition authorized for firing from the M121 mortar carrier–HE, smoke, ILLUM, and training. M929 smoke, M930 Illumination, M934 HE, and M933 HE cartridges are authorized to be fired from the M121 carrier-mounted 120-mm mortar in a combat environment. For training purposes, the M931 full range training round (FRTR) may be fired from the M121 carrier-mounted 120-mm mortar. 4-137. When firing the 900 series mortar ammunition, the bursting radius is 75 meters. A minimum range of 200 meters at charge 0 (charge may vary in firing table and whiz wheel) applies to all rounds and fuzes. 4-138. Figure 4-66 contains a list of the authorized mortar ammunition.

4-58

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Nomenclature

M933/M933A1 HE

M934/M934A1 HE

M929 Smoke (WP)

M930/M983 Illuminating

M931 FRTR

DODIC

C623/CA44

C379/CA04

C624/CA03

C625/CA07

CA09

Type

HE

HE

Smoke, WP

Illuminating

TP

Fuze

Point Detonating (PD) M745/M783

Multi-Option (MO) M734/M734A 1

PD/ Multioption M734A1

Mechanical Time Super Quick (MTSQ) M776

PD M781

Body Material

HF-1

HF-1

F&R carbon steel

Wrought carbon steel

HR-1 Steel

Filler

Comp B 6.59 lbs

Comp B 6.59 lbs

WP felt wedges 5.28 lbs

VL Candle/IR Candle

Center Vent Tube

Ignition Cartridge

M981

M981/M1020

M981/M1020

M981/M1020

M1020

Propellant Charge

M230

M230/M234

M230/M234

M230/M234

M233

Weight

31.2 lbs

31.2 lbs

31.2 lbs

31.2 lbs

31.2 lbs

Length

27.99 in

27.99 in

27.85 in

27.85 in

27.99 in

Projectile Color Code

Olive drab with yellow markings

Olive drab with yellow markings

Light green with yellow band and light red markings

White with black markings

Light blue with white markings

Range of effect

7,200 meters

7,200 meters

Weather depending

60 seconds

7,200 meters

Hazard Classification

Figure 4-66. 120-mm mortar round technical data

WARNING Only fire the authorized cartridges from the M121 mortar carrier. Firing the M57, M68, or M91 120-mm cartridges from the M121 carrier-mounted mortar may cause bodily injury and hearing loss. These cartridges are not authorized to be fired from the carrier.

SERVICE AMMUNITION 4-139. The M933A1 and the M934 HE mortar rounds are used against enemy personnel and light materiel targets. See Figure 4-67 and Figure 4-68 for the description of the rounds.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-59

Chapter 4

Figure 4-67. M933A1 HE, with fuze, PD: M783 (120 mm)

Figure 4-68. M934 HE, with fuze, multi-optional: M734A1 (120 mm) 4-140. The M929 WP round is used for screening and marking a target area. See Figure 4-69 for the description of the round.

4-60

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-69. M929 WP, with fuze, multi-optional: M734A1 (120 mm) 4-141. The M930 and the M983 Illumination rounds are used for battlefield illumination and signaling. See Figure 4-70 and Figure 4-71 for the description of the rounds.

Figure 4-70. M930 IL, with fuze, super-quick: M776 (120 mm)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-61

Chapter 4

Figure 4-71. M983 IL, with fuze, super-quick: M776 (120 mm)

TARGET PRACTICE AMMUNITION 4-142. The M931 FRTR cartridge consists of a PD (practice) fuze, a hollow projectile body with vent tube and base plug, a fin assembly, an obturating fuze ring, four propellant increments, and an ignition cartridge (see Figure 4-72. The cartridge is similar in appearance to the M933 and M934 HE cartridges. The cartridge is also ballistically similar to the HE cartridges and produces a similar signature (flash and/or smoke and audible sound) upon impact.

Figure 4-72. M931 FRTR, with fuze, PD: M781 (120 mm)

4-62

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

FUZES 4-143. The fuzes used with the 120-mm mortar founds are described in the following paragraphs. The settings allow the mortar round to detonate at a predetermined point, either at proximity to the target, near the surface, on impact or on a .05 second delay on impact.

M776 MTSQ FUZE z z z

Functions: Air burst or impact. Settings: Six to 52 seconds. Remarks: The fuze has a mechanical arming and timing device, expulsion charge, and safety wire or pin (see Figure 4-73).

Figure 4-73. M776 MTSQ fuze 4-144. The setting procedures for the M776 MTSQ fuze are— z Rotate the head of the fuze to the left (counterclockwise) until the inverted triangle or index line is aligned with the correct line and number of seconds of the time scale. z Use the fuze setter to rotate the head of the fuze. z See the firing table for the correct time setting. z Remove the fuze safety pin or wire before firing. z To reset the M776 MTSQ fuze, rotate the head of the fuze counterclockwise until the safe line (S or inverted triangle of the time scale) is aligned with the index line of the fuze body. Replace the safety wire (see Figure 4-74).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-63

Chapter 4

Figure 4-74. M776 MTSQ fuze

M935 PD FUZE z z z

Functions: Impact. Settings: Super quick (SQ) or 0.05-second delay action. Remarks: The fuze has a safety wire (see Figure 4-75).

Figure 4-75. M935 PD fuze 4-145. The setting procedures for the M935 PD fuze are— z Super quick setting: „ These fuzes are shipped preset to function super quickly on impact. „ Verify the setting before firing. The selector slot should be aligned with the SQ mark. z Delay setting: „ Turn the selector slot in a clockwise direction until the slot is aligned with the delay (DLY) mark. „ Use a coin or a flat-tip screwdriver to change the settings. z To reset the M935 fuze, align the selector slot with the SQ mark (see Figure 4-76).

4-64

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-76. Setting the M935 PD fuze

M734/M734A1 MULTIOPTION FUZE z z z

Functions: Proximity or impact. Settings: Proximity (PRX), near-surface burst (NSB), impact (IMP), or delay (DLY). Remarks: The fuze can be set by hand (see Figure 4-77).

Figure 4-77. M734 multioption fuze 4-146. The fuze settings for the M734 and M734A1 fuze are— z The fuze can be set by hand by rotating the fuze head clockwise until the correct marking (PRX, NSB, IMP, or DLY) is over the index line. „ PRX—Proximity. The fuze is set to PRX. Burst height is 3 to 13 feet (1 to 4 meters). „ NSB—Near-surface burst (nonjamming). Burst height is 0 to 3 feet (0 to 1 meter). „ IMP—Impact (super quick). „ DLY—Delay (0.050 seconds). z To reset the M734 Multi-option fuze rotate the fuze head counterclockwise until the PRX marking is over the index line (see Figure 4-78).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-65

Chapter 4

Figure 4-78. Setting the M734 multi-option fuze

M745 PD FUZE z z z z

Functions: Impact. Settings: None. Remarks: The fuze functions on impact with super quick action only. Rotation of the fuze head does not alter the function mode. No setting is required. The fuze functions on impact with super quick action only. Disregard the markings (PRX, NSB, IMP, and DLY) on the fuze head (see Figure 4-79).

Figure 4-79. M745 PD fuze

4-66

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

MORTAR SAFETY INFORMATION AMMUNITION CARE AND HANDLING 4-147. The key to proper ammunition functioning is protection. Rounds prepared but not fired should be returned to their containers, fuse end first. Safety is always a matter of concern for all personnel and requires special attention where ammunition is concerned. Supervision is critical—improper care and handling can cause serious accidents—as well as inaccurate fire. Some of the principles of proper ammunition handling are— z Never tumble, drag, throw, or drop individual cartridges or boxes of cartridges. z Do not allow smoking, open flames, or other fire hazards around ammunition storage areas. z Inspect each cartridge before it is loaded for firing. Dirty ammunition can damage the weapon or affect the accuracy of the round. z Keep the ammunition dry and cool. z Never make unauthorized alterations or mix components of one lot with another. z Each projectile must be inspected to ensure that there is no leakage of the contents and that the projectile is correctly assembled. 4-148. Personnel should ensure that the use of cellular phones and electronic devices within vicinity of ammunition is limited. It is possible for the devices to cause an electric spark which may cause the primer to ignite. 4-149. Store WP-loaded cartridges at temperatures below 111.4 degrees Fahrenheit (44.1 degrees centigrade) to prevent melting of the WP filler. If this is not possible, WP-loaded cartridges must be stored fuze-end up so that WP will resolidify with the void space in the nose end of the cartridge (after temperature returns below 111.4 degrees Fahrenheit [44.1 degrees centigrade]). Failure to observe this precaution could result in rounds with erratic flight.

SEGREGATION OF AMMUNITION LOTS 4-150. Different lots of propellant burn at different rates and give slightly different effects in the target area; therefore, the registration corrections derived from one lot do not always apply to another. Ammunition MUST be segregated by lot and weight zone. In the field storage area, on vehicles, or in a temporary storage area, ammunition lots should be roped off with communications wire or twine and conspicuously marked with a cardboard sign or other marker.

BURNING OF UNUSED PROPELLANT CHARGES 4-151. Mortar increments and propelling charges are highly flammable, consequently they must be handled with extreme care to prevent exposure to heat, flame, or any spark-producing source, such as the hot residue from burning increments or propelling charges that float downward after a cartridge leaves the cannon. Like other types of ammunition, increments and propelling charges must be kept cool and dry. Storing these items inside metal ammunition boxes until needed is an effective way to prevent premature combustion. 4-152. Unused charges must not be saved, but should be removed to a storage area until they can be burned or otherwise disposed of in accordance with local range or installation regulations or SOP. Burning increments create a large flash and lots of smoke. In a tactical environment, the platoon leader must ensure that burning increments do not compromise camouflage and concealment.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-67

Chapter 4

OVERHEAD CLEARANCE 4-153. If obstructions are found at any point in the full range of traverse or elevation, the mortar is not safe to fire. In a combat situation, however, it may be necessary to fire the mortar from that position. If this is the situation, traverse and/or elevate the mortar until it clears the obstruction and level the sight by using the elevation micrometer knob. Record the deflection and elevation where the mortar clears the obstruction and report this information to the fire direction center (FDC).

SECTION VII – SMOKE GRENADES 4-154. This section discusses the characteristics of vehicle employed smoke grenades. Smoke grenades are primarily utilized to provide concealment for combat vehicles and personnel on the ground. They can also be used to provide signaling for events and other follow on elements. 4-155. There are two types of vehicle employed smoke grenade launchers, the M250 and the M257. The M250 smoke grenade launcher contains six smoke grenades in each launcher that when fired can cover a 110-degree arc in front of the turret. The M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher contains eight smoke grenades in each launcher set that when fired can cover an arc of 104-degrees in front of the turret. 4-156. The M257 smoke grenade launchers are installed on several vehicles and are configured in different arrays. The dispersion pattern for this launcher is similar for all launcher arrays; however, additional salvos may not be available. The patterns shown in Figure 4-80 and Figure 4-81 display the most common configuration for the smoke grenade launchers. Additional launchers placed below or adjacent will cover the same dispersion area.

DANGER The hatches should be closed when firing the smoke grenade launchers to prevent red phosphorus being blown in on the crew, as red phosphorus can cause serious burns. All personnel outside the vehicle must stay at least 150 meters from the vehicle during firing.

4-68

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-80. Salvo pattern for the M250 smoke grenade launcher system

Figure 4-81. Salvo pattern for the M257 smoke grenade launcher system

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-69

Chapter 4

4-157. L8A1 and L8A3 red phosphorus screening smoke grenades are identified by the markings at the base of the casing (see Figure 4-82). The grenade is propelled from the discharger by pressure build-up in the metal base when electrical current at the electrical firing clip ignites the squib-type electric fuze and propellant charge. The propellant charge simultaneously ignites the delay composition within the delay holder. During flight, the delay composition burns through and ignites the black powder bursting charge. The bursting charge ignites the red phosphorus and butyl rubber composition and bursts the rubber body, dispensing the burning red phosphorus and butyl rubber pellets to produce a smoke cloud.

Figure 4-82. L8A1 and L8A3 smoke grenade 4-158. The M76 infrared (IR) screening smoke grenade is identified by the markings at the base of the casing (see Figure 4-83). This grenade contains brass powder fill, which is used for screening in a tactical environment. The grenade is propelled from the discharger when an electrical current at the firing contact activates the electrical match. The electrical match ignites the propellant, which both launches the grenade and ignites the pyrotechnic time-delay detonator. Launch acceleration causes the setback lock to displace aft, out of engagement with the safe and arm slider/bore rider. When the slider/bore rider clears the launch tube, it moves into the armed position, which aligns the transfer lead with the time-delay detonator and the booster lead. When the time-delay detonator ignites the transfer lead, booster lead, and central burster, the grenade bursts and creates an IR obscuring cloud.

4-70

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-83. M76 and M82 smoke grenades 4-159. The M82 smoke grenade is identified by the markings at the base of the casing (see Figure 4-84). The M82 smoke grenade contains titanium dioxide fill which provides visible smoke for use during training. The M82 is an electronically initiated, propellant-launched grenade that functions to disseminate a screening cloud 30 meters forward of the firing vehicle. The grenade’s plastic body houses the launch system, the safe and arming mechanism, the explosive booster and burster, and the smoke composition. The M82 is designed to simulate the L8A3 and M76 smoke grenade and can be used during gunnery or force-on-force training. 4-160. Each grenade has a specific functioning area once it is discharged from the launcher. Figure 4-84 illustrates the grenade functioning area based on the respective vehicle launcher array. Although each grenade is designed to function at 30m from the launcher, each pyrotechnic requires an additional eight meters to fully ignite and provide screening (IAW DA Pamphlet 385-63). The illustration below represents the hazard dimensions for all platforms launching the L8 series, M76, or M82 smoke grenades from their vehicle. It shows the worst case distances as crews may have multiple grenade types prepared:

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-71

Chapter 4

Figure 4-84. Smoke grenade composite hazard area

SECTION VIII – MISSILES 4-161. The following section will deal primarily with the missile category of weapons: the TOW family of missiles for the Bradley Fighting Vehicle and the Javelin missile.

TOW MISSILE AMMUNITION 4-162. The following sub-section contains general descriptions of the TOW missiles and their shipping containers. The data included covers weights, dimensions, identification markings, and differences among models. 4-163. The TOW missile comes in four configurations with numerous types. These types mainly consist of minor modification work orders (MWO) that are transparent to the operator and are continually added to the missiles in inventory. All configurations use the same basic airframe, aerodynamic control system, command-link wire, and missile electronics designs. Future TOW missile systems will only be guided by RF and will not be wire guided. 4-164. The TOW missile is a solid propellant, command-guided, surface-attack, guided missile system that can destroy tanks, other armored vehicles and helicopters. It can also destroy fortified bunkers, gun emplacements and other protected positions. 4-165. It is tube-launched, optically tracked, and wire command-link guided. The missile is similar to a conventional round of ammunition with respect to handling, storage, and loading characteristics. Although the missile consists of three major sections, it is issued and handled as a complete round of ammunition. The three major sections of the missile are warhead, center, and aft section. The center section contains the electronic and flight motor sections, respectively. Figure 4-85 through Figure 4-87 show the sections of the TOW-2A and TOW-2B missiles.

4-72

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-85. TOW missile sections, TOW-2A models with extended probe

Figure 4-86. TOW 2B missile sections, no extended probe

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-73

Chapter 4

Figure 4-87. TOW-BB sections

LAUNCH CONTAINERS 4-166. The launch container is a cylindrical housing constructed of rugged fiberglass, laminated with epoxy resin. An electrical connector with associated wiring harness (umbilical cord) is built into the launch container to provide electrical connections between the missile and the launcher. The container also houses desiccant in the front to keep the missile dry. A humidity indicator is attached to the aft seal to provide positive verification that the missile remains dry. The launch container provides protection for the missile during handling operations. It also acts as an extension of the launch tube when the missile is loaded in the launcher. Figure 4-88 shows the TOW missile launch container.

Figure 4-88. TOW launch container example (side, top and front views)

4-74

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

WARHEAD SECTION 4-167. The warhead section consists of the warhead assembly, an ogive assembly, and a safety and arming device. The ogive assembly forms the front of the warhead section. The warhead assembly forms the central portion of the warhead section itself. The safety and arming device is attached to the rear of the warhead assembly and fits into the center of the electronics section assembly. The warhead assembly is a shaped-charge device consisting of a welded outer case and mounting ring assembly, a liner cone, a compression pad, a phenolic bushing, a HE, and a booster charge (see Figure 4-89).

Figure 4-89. TOW warhead assembly with extended probe (TOW-2A) 4-168. The ogive serves two functions. One function is to serve as an aerodynamic cover for the forward end of the missile during flight. The other function is to detonate the fuze in the safety and arming device upon contact with the target. In Figure 4-90, an additional ogive is present at the end of the extended probe which houses a crush switch that detonates the fuze in the safety and arming device upon impact. As each model has a different warhead assembly, refer to TM 9-1410-470-34 for the most accurate technical information.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-75

Chapter 4

Figure 4-90. TOW-2B warhead assembly 4-169. The safety and arming device allows safe handling, transportation, storage, and operation of the HE warhead to the point in missile flight where the round is designated to arm. The warhead for each model of the missile is designed to defeat a specific target.

ELECTRONICS SECTION 4-170. The electronics section assembly (digital electronics unit [DEU]) contains all of the electronic circuitry used in the missile. The electronics section assembly receives missile steering signals from the attitude control gyro. The signals from the gyro are shaped and superimposed on the missile steering signals to produce missile stabilization. The electronics section also applies driving voltages to the four control-surface actuators. The most recent variants of the TOW missile have the DEU located in the aft section.

FLIGHT MOTOR SECTION 4-171. The flight motor propels the missile towards the target. The flight motor case consists of two parts and when conjoined, serves as part of the missile skin. The electronic section on early TOW-2A models that have an analog electronics unit (AEU) is magneformed to the groove around the outside of the forward portion of the flight motor case. The aft flight motor case is joined to the forward flight motor case by a screw joint and has the four missile wings attached which provide stability for the missile in flight.

CENTER SECTION 4-172. The center section assembly consists of the center section case, the attitude control gyro, the missile batteries, and the center section wiring harness. The aft end of the center section case is magneformed to the groove around the outside of the aft case of the missile flight motor. The two flight motor exhaust nozzles terminate at two ports in the center section.

4-76

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

AFT SECTION 4-173. The missile aft section assembly is composed of the launch motor, the aft section case, two wire dispensers, a xenon (IR) light source and modulator, and an actuator system. On TOW 2 missiles, a thermal beacon and shutter is also contained in the aft section (see Figure 4-91). The launch motor propels the missile out of the launch container to approximately 7 meters. The flight motor then ignites to continue the flight. The wire dispensers are mounted in the extreme end of the aft section assembly. Each wire dispenser is a small-diameter aluminum bobbin mounted parallel to the missile longitudinal axis. Each bobbin contains enough wire to ensure the range requirements of the missile are met. 4-174. The missile actuator system occupies most of the missile aft section assembly. The actuator system consists of the actuator subsystem and the control surface assembly. The control surface assembly consists of the four control surfaces, their extending springs, and the bulkhead to which they are mounted. The light source is mounted at the extreme aft end of the missile so that IR energy is emitted toward the launcher when the missile is in flight. This IR energy is detected by the IR sensor in the TOW optical sight to determine the missile’s position in space. For the TOW 2 system, the night sight tracker detects the thermal source to determine the missile position. The optical sight and night sight together provide dual tracking mode for the TOW 2 system.

MISSILE TECHNICAL DATA AND MARKINGS 4-175. The developments and improvements to the TOW missile family follow the developments and improvements of tank armor. The five missiles that followed the basic TOW each improved upon the previous missile. Areas of improvement included penetration, maximum range, usefulness during adverse firing conditions, resistance to jamming, and attack profiles. 4-176. With the increased number of TOW missile types and wide variations in their capabilities (especially armor penetration), TOW crews and range safeties must be able to quickly and accurately identify the specific type of missile they have. 4-177. The configuration of the missile can be readily identified by the various identification decals, tapes, and stencils on the missile case. General stencil markings for the TOW missiles are shown in Figure 4-91.

Figure 4-91.TOW missile stencil markings

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-77

Chapter 4

4-178. Figure 4-92 shows an overview of the TOW missile characteristics. 4-179. Tactile markings are used to help crews identify the specific TOW missile in its launch container using raised rib sections and notched edges on the seal retainer on specific missiles. Refer to each missile’s data card listed in each section for the respective tactile markings. 4-180. Each missile has its own set of unique features. General descriptions, color coding, markings, tactile markings, and performance information are provided in the following sections by missile type; TOW-2A, TOW-2B, and TOW-BB. Missile and Nomenclature TOW (BGM71A/A1)

ITOW (BGM71C)

TOW-2 (BGM71D)

TOW-2A (BGM-7E)

TOW-2B (BGM-71F)

TOW-2B Aero (BGM71F6)

TOW-BB (Bunker Buster) (BGM71H)

DODIC

PB91

PB92

PV01

PB82

PV18

WF37

WF82

Weight (out of tube)

40.7 lbs

41.9 lbs

47.2 lbs

49.9 lbs

49.8 lbs

50.5 lbs

49.6 lbs

Weight (in tube)

54.8 lbs

56.0 lbs

61.3 lbs

64.0 lbs

63.9 lbs

64.6 lbs

63.7 lbs

Length (out of tube)

45.8”

45.6”

46.2”

46.1”

46.2”

47.7”

46.0”

Tube diameter

8.6”

8.6”

8.6”

8.6”

8.6”

8.6”

8.6”

Maximum ranges

3,000m (BGM-71A) 3,750m (BGM-71A1)

3,750m

3,750m

3,750m

3,750m

4,500m

3,000m (bunkers) 3,750m (vehicles)

Two 5” explosively formed penetrators

6” fragmenting HE

Warhead size

5“ HE

5” HE

6” HE

6” HE

Two 5” explosively formed penetrators

Arming distances (minimum)

30m

30m

30m

30m

110m

110m

43m

Arming distances (best)

NA

NA

NA

NA

150m

150m

NA

Arming distances (maximum)

65m

65m

65m

65m

200m

200m

65m

Reliability

95.4 percent

Operating temperature

-25 F to +125 F

Hazard Classification

Figure 4-92.TOW missile characteristics

TOW-2A SERIES MISSILES 4-181. The TOW-2A series of missiles have a full-caliber, 6 inch warhead that includes an extended probe. It has two IR radiators to provide hardened system performance against battlefield obscurants and countermeasures when firing. The first IR radiator is the xenon beacon that receives signals from the flight

4-78

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

control unit. The second IR radiator is the thermal beacon and provides link compatibility with the electrooptical IR night sight, which is part of the TOW launcher system. 4-182. Figure 4-93 illustrates the cut-away drawing and shows the functional components of the TOW2A missile.

Figure 4-93. TOW-2A cut away diagram 4-183. There are two missiles types in the TOW-2A series that crews will see in training and combat; surface attack and practice. Of these types of missiles, there are several models that crews will encounter. Table 4-10 identifies these models, national stock numbers, nomenclatures, and DODICs, respectively.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-79

Chapter 4

Table 4-10. TOW-2A model numbers Model Number

NSN

Nomenclature

DODIC

Remarks

BGM-71E

1410-01-2299948 1410-01-3000254 1410-01-3135367 1410-01-3702288 1410-01-3798253 1410-01-3438924

Guided Missile, Surface Attack Guided Missile, Surface Attack Guided Missile, Surface Attack Guided Missile, Surface Attack Guided Missile, Surface Attack Guided Missile, Practice

PD62

TOW-2A

PE96

PD62 with coated launch motor

PV47

1410-01-3702292

Guided Missile, Practice

PV84

Coated launch motor and digital electronics unit (DEU) Splice-less harness and digital electronics unit (DEU) HERO case (green) and digital electronics unit (DEU) Practice warhead with digital electronics unit (DEU) and coated launch motor Splice-less harness and digital electronics unit (DEU)

BGM-71E-1B BGM-71E-3B BGM-71E-4B BGM-71E-6B BTM-71E-2B

BTM-71E-3B

PV83 PU08 PU09

4-184. The TOW-2A series of missiles have a precursor charge on its extendible probe. The precursor charge is designed to force a reactive armor package on an armored or light armored target to discharge prematurely to allow the main charge of the TOW warhead to function against the least amount of armor protection on the threat target (see Figure 4-94 through Figure 4-96).

Figure 4-94. TOW missile striking ERA protected threat target

4-80

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-95. Initial detonation of precursor charge

Figure 4-96. Detonation of the primary warhead

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-81

Chapter 4

TOW-2A (BGM-71E Series) 4-185. This missile’s primary purpose is to defeat armor targets using a series of CE warheads. This provides the missile with the capability to defeat an armor threat target, even if it is protected by an explosive reactive armor (ERA) package (see Figure 4-97).

Figure 4-97. TOW-2A, BGM-71E-4B 4-186. Figure 4-98 and Figure 4-99 are data cards as a reference to each model within the TOW-2A series of missiles.

Figure 4-98. TOW-2A characteristics and markings

4-82

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-99. TOW-2A practice characteristics and markings

TOW-2B 4-187. This missile series’ primary purpose is to defeat armor targets using a series of CE warheads. This provides the missile with the capability to defeat an armor threat target, even if it is protected by an ERA package (see Figure 4-100).

Figure 4-100. TOW-2B Aero

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-83

Chapter 4

4-188. The TOW-2B is a top-attack missile that utilizes a tandem warhead, explosively formed penetrators (EFP) that strike the target from above, the weakest part of the armor protective package. The TOW-2B flight guidance system and rocket propulsion system are similar to those of previous versions of the TOW missile. Figure 4-101 shows the basic internal components of the TOW-2B series of missiles.

Figure 4-101. TOW-2B cut away diagram

AERO PACKAGES 4-189. The TOW 2B Aero is an improvement on the TOW 2B missile. TOW 2B Aero was designed to be effective to a range of 4.5 km. The extended range of the TOW 2B Aero is accomplished with two minor modifications to the TOW 2B. First, more wire is added to accommodate the command guidance to the extended range. Second, an aerodynamic ogive or front end has been added to the TOW 2B target sensor to decrease drag and increases range. The new aerodynamic feature ensures stable controllable flight to 4.5 km while using the current propulsion system.

4-84

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

4-190. There are three models in the TOW-2B series that crews will see in training and combat. Table 4-11 identifies these models, national stock numbers, nomenclatures, and DODICs, respectively. Table 4-11. TOW-2B models Model Number

NSN

Nomenclature

DODIC

Remarks

BGM-71F

1410-01-3225333 1410-01-3702289 1410-01-4730281

Guided Missile, Surface Attack Guided Missile, Surface Attack Guided Missile, Surface Attack

PV18

TOW-2B with DEU

PV82

Splice-less harness and digital electronics unit (DEU) PV82 with Gen I mod and digital electronics unit (DEU)

BGM-71F-1 BGM-71F-1A

WF37

4-191. The missile is programmed to fly approximately 2.25 meters above the gunner’s line of sight (LOS), but the gunner aims center mass of the target. The missile detects the target by magnetic signature and optical (laser) profile. The missile’s sensors cannot distinguish between friendly and enemy, or between destroyed and operational threats. 4-192. To prevent premature detonation of the TOW-2B warheads, crews must make sure their line of sight is clear of friendly and destroyed vehicles 10 mils left and right of the gunner’s LOS. The TOW-2B has two 5-inch warheads that, when detonated, explosively form two high-density tantalum penetrators. 4-193. Figure 4-102a through Figure 4-102c depict the TOW-2B functioning sequence.

Figure 4-102a. TOW-2B functioning sequence

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-85

Chapter 4

Figure 4-102b. TOW-2B functioning sequence (continued)

Figure 4-102c. TOW-2B functioning sequence (continued) Note. Firing the TOW-2A and TOW-2B missiles from the basic TOW launcher is possible; however, the missile will have a reduced probability of hit (PH).

4-86

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

4-194. Figure 4-103 through Figure 4-109 shows the data cards as a reference to each model within the TOW-2B series of missiles.

Figure 4-103. TOW-2B characteristics and markings

Figure 4-104. TOW-2B Gen I characteristics and markings

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-87

Chapter 4

Figure 4-105. TOW-2B Aero characteristics and markings

Figure 4-106.TOW-2B Aero RF characteristics and markings

4-88

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-107.TOW-2B Aero Gen I characteristics and markings

Figure 4-108. TOW-2B Aero Gen 2 characteristics and markings

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-89

Chapter 4

Figure 4-109. TOW-2B Aero Gen 2 RF characteristics and markings

TOW BUNKER BUSTER (BGM-71H) 4-195. The TOW Bunker Buster (TOW BB) is an evolution of the TOW missile, designed to provide the crew with a more versatile weapon against a wide variety of targets. The TOW BB employs a fragmenting HE bulk warhead that can breach or destroy a multitude of target sets, particularly in complex urban terrain. The TOW BB’s warhead configuration enables it to breach 8-in thick (20.3 cm), double-reinforced concrete walls and provides overmatch against earth and timber bunkers. Whereas traditional shapedcharge warheads can penetrate entire buildings, the TOW BB disperses its pressure at the point of penetration. This enables greater precision in urban engagements and enhances lethality while minimizing collateral damage outside of the target area. The TOW BB employs the TOW 2A guidance package. The maximum effective range of the missile against bunkers is 3,000 meters due to their small profile and resulting low aim point. Maximum effective range against other hardened targets is 3,750 meters (see Figure 4-110).

4-90

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-110. TOW-BB basic sections 4-196. Figure 4-111 and Figure 4-112 show data cards as a reference to each model within the TOW-BB series of missiles.

Figure 4-111. TOW-BB characteristics and markings

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-91

Chapter 4

Figure 4-112. TOW-BB RF characteristics and markings

WARNINGS When attacking a target, there is an associated debris field from warhead fragments and destruction of the target. To avoid the possibility of death or injury, exposed troops should be no closer than 400 meters from the target. There is a remote possibility of a TOW BB missile detonating 43 meters from the launch platform. As a result, all TOW BB Missiles are labeled “Under Armor Only.”

BACKBLAST AREA 4-197. The TOW weapon system has a backblast area that extends 75 meters to the rear of the vehicle in a 90-degree cone (see Figure 4-113). This area comprises both a 50-meter danger zone and an additional 25meter caution zone. The Bradley must be positioned so that no personnel, unarmored vehicles, or obstructions (such as walls, embankments, or large trees) remain in the backblast area for its missile.

4-92

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-113. Backblast area danger zone

JAVELIN ANTITANK GUIDED MISSILE 4-198. The Javelin is a fire-and-forget, man-portable, medium, anti-armor, shoulder-fired weapon designed with a reusable M98A1 command launch unit (CLU). The CLU houses the day sight, night-vision sight (NVS), controls, and status indicators. The round consists of the missile, launch tube assembly (LTA), and battery coolant unit (BCU). The missile contains the guidance section, mid-body section, warhead section, propulsion section, and control actuator section. The LTA serves as the launch platform and missile carrying container.

BASIC SKILLS TRAINER 4-199. The Basic Skills Trainer (BST) is an indoor training device that consists of a Student Station (SS) and Instructor Station (IS). The Student Station consists of a Simulated Command Launch Unit (SCLU) and a Missile Simulation Round (MSR). The IS incorporates a desktop computer, monitor, keyboard, mouse, interconnect cable, and a surge suppressor. BST training exercises use real terrain models, actual visible and IR, and matching three-dimensional target models for natural target movements. The gunner sees a realistic, simulated, battlefield.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-93

Chapter 4

FIELD TACTICAL TRAINER 4-200. The Field Tactical Trainer (FTT) is an outdoor force-on-force trainer used in conjunction with a tactical CLU and simulated round (SR). The FTT includes an IS to monitor the student. The SR is equipped with Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System (MILES).

MISSILE SIMULATION ROUND 4-201. The MSR, issued with a simulated launch tube, is a field-handling round used to train gunners proper maintenance and handling of a Javelin round. Its replicated weight and balance are precise, so simulated training is accurate for feel. FTT contains no MSR instruments to monitor this aspect of training.

CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES 4-202. The missile has two gunner-selectable attack modes–top attack or direct attack. Each mode has its own flight path or profile for reaching the target.

Top-Attack Mode 4-203. Top attack is the default mode when the missile seeker is first activated. In top-attack mode, the missile approaches from above to impact and detonate on top of a target. This capacity allows the gunner to attack a target from the front, rear, or side with increased kill probability. Armored vehicles usually have less protective armor on top. The minimum engagement distance is 150 meters. 4-204. The exact profile of the missile flight path depends on the range to the target and is determined automatically by the missile’s on-board software. When firing at a 2,000-meters target, the missile reaches a height of around 160 meters above the battlefield. If a target is under a protective structure, firing in topattack mode will cause the missile to detonate on the structure instead of on the target. The gunner can select the direct-attack mode to counter targets hiding under protective cover.

Direct-Attack Mode 4-205. Direct-attack mode can be selected only after seeker cool-down, and before lock-on. The gunner pushes the ATTACK SELECT (ATTK SEL) switch on the right handgrip to change attack modes. In direct-attack mode, the missile flies along a more direct path to the target. The missile impacts and detonates on the target’s front, side, or rear. The minimum engagement distance is 65 meters. 4-206. The exact profile of the missile-flight path shown in a general configuration depends on the range to the target, and is determined automatically by the missile’s on-board software. With a 2,000-meter target, the missile reaches a height of about 60 meters above the battlefield. This path allows the missile to reach a target under a protective structure. See Table 4-12 for technical data for the Javelin.

4-94

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Table 4-12. Characteristics of the Javelin antitank guided missile Javelin Missile System

Surface attack guided missile and M98A1 command launch unit

Type of System

Fire and forget

Crew

One- to three-Soldier teams based on TO&E

Missile modes

Top attack (default), direct attack

Ranges

Top-attack mode minimum effective engagement

150 meters

Maximum effective engagement range (directattack and top-attack modes)

2,500 meters

Direct-attack mode minimum effective engagement range

65 meters

Flight Time

About 14 seconds at 2,000 meters

Backblast Area

Primary danger zone extends out 25 meters at a 60-degree (cone shaped) angle

Propulsion—Two Stage Motor

Launch motor ejects the missile from the LTA

Caution zone extends the cone-shaped area out to 100 meters Flight motor propels the missile to the target Firing from Inside Enclosures

Complete Round (Launch tube assembly with missile and BCU)

Battery Coolant Unit

Minimum room length

15 feet

Minimum room width

12 feet

Minimum room height

7 feet

Weight

35.14 lb (15.97 kg)

Length

47.60 in (120.90 cm)

Diameter with end caps

11.75 in (29.85 cm)

Inside diameter

5.52 in (14.02 cm)

Weight

2.91 lb (1.32 kg)

Length

8.16 in (20.73 cm)

Width

4.63 in (11.75 cm)

Type

Lithium, non-rechargeable

Life

4 min of BCU time

Coolant gas

Argon

References: FM 3-22.37, TM 9-1425-687-12/TM 9-1425-688-12.

4-207. The Javelin missile uses a dual-charged warhead (see Figure 4-114). The warhead has a precursor charge and main charge. z Precursor. The precursor charge is an HE antitank shaped charge. Its purpose is to cause reactive armor on the target to detonate before the main charge reaches the armor. Once the reactive armor is penetrated, the target’s main hull is exposed to the warhead’s main charge. If the target is not equipped with reactive armor, the precursor provides additional explosives to penetrate the main armor. z Main. The main charge is the second charge of a dual-charge warhead and is also an HE antitank shaped charge. The primary warhead charge is designed to penetrate the target’s main armor to achieve a target kill.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-95

Chapter 4

Figure 4-114. Javelin missile 4-208. Soldiers must adhere the following precautions when employing the Javelin: z Backblast Area. The backblast of the Javelin comes from the firing of the launch motor and the flight motor (see Figure 4-115). The Javelin has little recoil because the propellant gases escape to the rear of the weapon. This backblast can damage equipment or seriously injure personnel who are too close to the rear of the LTA at time of firing. The Javelin backblast area extends 100 meters to the rear and up to 25 meters to the sides of the launcher and forms a 60-degree danger area. It is divided into a primary danger zone and two caution areas. „ Primary Danger Area. The primary danger area is a 60-degree included sector, with the apex of the sector at the aft end of the missile launch motor. The primary danger area radius of curvature is 25 meters. Serious injury or fatality is possible for personnel in the primary danger area during firing. A portion of the primary danger area has been extended forward to the firing line. This portion is within the range of 1 to 5 meters left and right of launch tube centerline. „ Caution Area 1. Caution area 1 is an extension of the 25-meter primary danger zone arc forward to the firing line on each side of the launcher. Serious hearing impairment or damage from frequent exposure could occur to personnel in this area during firings. Personnel should always wear the approved hearing and eye protection when positioned in caution area 1. „ Caution Area 2. Caution area 2 is identified as a 35-meter radius, aft of the launcher and within the 60-degree sector. This area is affected by the activation of the FM pressure relief system. Caution area 2 is an extension to the rear of the primary danger area. Hearing impairment and eye damage could occur to personnel that are 10 meters beyond the primary danger area during firing. Personnel should always wear the approved hearing and eye protection when positioned in caution area 2. „ Caution Area 3. Caution area 3 is an extension to the danger zone within the 60 degree sector with a 100-meter radius. This area is affected by the activation of the flight motor pressure relief system. Personnel located in this area will wear eye protection.

4-96

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Figure 4-115. Javelin backblast safety zones DANGER KEEP ALL PERSONNEL CLEAR OF THE BACKBLAST AREA. FLYING DEBRIS PRODUCED BY FIRING A JAVELIN MISSILE COULD INJURE OR KILL ANYONE REMAINING IN THE BACKBLAST AREA.

SAFETY INFORMATION FIRING OVER OBSTRUCTIONS 4-209. When firing the TOW missiles over electrical wires, gunners must take care to avoid letting the command link wires touch a live high-voltage power line. Failure to observe this precaution can cause injury or death. Also, it may cause the gunner to lose control of the missile and damage the launcher electronics.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-97

Chapter 4

4-210. The Javelin missile can be fired over water without major concern, however it is not recommended for the TOW to be fired over water as the guide wires may fall into the water and cause a short in the electrical current.

AMMUNITION HANDLING 4-211. Do not fire a damaged encased missile such as one with large dents or cracks in the launch container. However, if the missile only has minor bending of the end rings, this is not serious, and you can fire the missile without danger. 4-212. Do not move or handle duds or defective missiles, except when you remove a misfire from the launcher and place it a safe distance (200 meters) from the vehicle. 4-213. When handling or operating in the vicinity of unpackaged ammunition, observe the following precautions: z Always wear gloves (combat vehicle crewman type, MIL-G-44108) when handling ammunition. The human body absorbs RF energy that could be transferred to the ammunition. z To clean ammunition, wipe it clean with a dry, clean, soft rag. Do not use abrasive material or cleaning solvent. If this amount of cleaning is not sufficient, do not use the cartridge; return it to the ASP/QASAS (ammunition surveillance). z Personnel should ensure that the use of cellular phones and electronic devices within vicinity of ammunition is limited. It is possible for the devices to cause an electric spark which may cause the primer to ignite.

FIRING IN WINDY CONDITIONS 4-214. Gusty, flanking, or quartering winds can move the TOW missile around during flight. As long as the crosshairs remain on the center mass of the target, the weapon system will compensate for wind effects. Gusty wind does not generally affect the flight of the Javelin missile.

MAINTENANCE 4-215. Vehicle crews should conduct periodic inspections of service ammunition using the appropriate operator’s manual. Maintenance includes only basic tasks, such as cloth wipe downs by crews, and touchup painting performed by ASP/QASAS personnel. 4-216. See FM 4-30.13 for specific information on the condition codes of ammunition.

SECTION IX – PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 4-217. This section deals primarily with the special considerations of ammunition transportation to and from a range, as well as transportation of ammunition to vehicles in a combat environment. 4-218. The unit Master Gunner must forecast the ammunition requirement for any upcoming ranges, and in turn must coordinate for specific lift assets with the unit S-4. Each unit within the HBCT has different procedures for requesting transportation of ammunition; however it is imperative to understand the rules of ammunition transportation, as well as the lift and transportation capabilities of available assets. 4-219. The fire symbol that applies to the most hazardous material present will be posted on or near all explosives locations. It will be visible from all approach roads. One symbol posted on or near the door end of an earth-covered magazine is normally enough. One or more symbols may be needed on other buildings. When all munitions within a storage area are covered by one fire symbol, it may be posted at the entry control point. Backing material for fire symbol decals should be the shape of the decal and should be noncombustible.

4-98

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

4-220. Fire symbols will be placed on entrances to arms rooms containing ammunition. Where explosives are stored in a locker or similar container, the container will also be marked with the appropriate fire symbol. 4-221. Transportation of ammunition and explosives by military vehicles is governed by DA Pamphlet 385-64. Reference Chapter 7 of the DA Pam for specific transportation requirements of any ammunition. Ammunition stored in building structures use the 24” placards and vehicles transporting the ammunition will use the 12” placard as appropriate. All vehicles that are transporting ammunition and explosives must also have specific hazardous placards emplaced in a conspicuous position. See Chapter 3 of the DA Pam for the specific placement of the placards on ammunition storage containers. z Fire Division 1, Hazard Class 1.1. Large quantity explosive charges that when ignited, cause a mass detonation of the adjoining ammunition. Items in this division are field artillery bags propelling charges, demolitions charges, and TNT. There will be few secondary explosions that will be much smaller than the initial detonation. z Fire Division 2, Hazard Class 1.2. Items configured for storage and transportation that do not mass detonate when a single item or package in a stack is ignited fall within this division. Explosions involving the items result in their burning and exploding progressively with no more than a few at a time reacting. These reactions will project fragments, firebrands, and unexploded items from the explosion site. Blast effects are limited to the immediate vicinity and are not the primary hazard. Typically, main gun ammunition (25mm, 120mm), as well as 40mm with explosive fillers (HEDP) are in this division. z Fire Division 3, Hazard Class 1.3. HD 1.3 includes items that burn vigorously and cannot usually be extinguished in emergency situations. Explosions normally will be confined to pressure ruptures of containers and will not produce propagating shock waves or damaging blast overpressure beyond the magazine distance. The spreading about of burning container materials, propellant, or other flaming debris may cause a severe hazard of spreading fire. z Fire Division 4, Hazard Class 1.4. Present a fire hazard with minimal blast, fragmentation, or toxic hazards. Small arms ammunition with no incendiary devices fall within this division. 4-222. Figure 4-116 describes the ammunition placards based on Fire Division and Hazard Class, IAW DoD 6055.9-STD. Included are the associated ordering (NSN) information based on location of the placard (building, 24” or vehicle, 12”, respectively). All placards are designed with orange backgrounds with black lettering.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-99

Chapter 4

Fire Placard

Hazard Placard

Division and Class

Remarks

Fire Division 1 Hazard Class 1.1 24” NSN 7690-01-082-0290 12” NSN 7690-01-081-9581

Mass Detonation. The ammunition during a fire in storage or transport will result in a mass detonation.

Fire Division 2 Hazard Class 1.2 24” NSN 7690-01-082-0289 12” NSN 7690-01-087-7340

Explosion with Fragments. The ammunition during a fire in storage or transport will result in an explosion with projectile fragments.

Fire Division 3 Hazard Class 1.3 24” NSN 7690-01-081-9583 12” NSN 7690-01-081-9582

Fire Division 4 Hazard Class 1.4 24” NSN 7690-01-082-6709 12” NSN 7690-01-081-9584

Mass Fire. The ammunition in storage or transport will cause a massive fire when ignited.

Moderate Fire. The ammunition in storage or transport will cause a moderate fire when ignited.

Figure 4-116. Example of ammunition placards 4-223. Blank ammunition cannot be transported or fired with live ammunition. Extreme injury or death may occur as a result of mixing the two types of ammunition. See AR 386-63 for further safety guidance regarding the use of blank and live ammunition. 4-224. All ammunition can be placed on pallets; all pallets are a standard size. However, care must be taken to ensure that when loading a vehicle with ammunition pallets, do not exceed the safe load capacity of the vehicle. 4-225. Table 4-13 provides the common packing of ammunition available to the HBCT. It also shows the weight requirement of the ammunition.

4-100

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Table 4-13. Common ammunition packing Ammunition

Packing Type

Rounds per Pack

Pack per Case

Case per Pallet

Pallet Weight

5.56 link

Metal Can

800

2

48

2790

7.62 mm link

Metal Can

200

4

48

3153

.50 cal

Metal Can

100

2

48

3790

40 mm grenade

Metal Can

32

1

53

2100

120 mm Tank

Honeycomb

1

NA

30

2481

25 mm

Metal Can

30

1

30

1515

120mm Mortar C623, C624, CA03, CA07

Container, Metal

2

1

24

2480

120mm (M) C379, CA04

Container, Metal

2

1

24

2455

120mm (M) C625

Container, Metal

2

1

15

1549

120mm (M) CA09

Container, Metal

2

1

21

1924

Grenade, Illumination

Metal Can

36

1

36

2071

Grenade, Smoke G826

Wood Box

4

1

96

2280

Grenade, Smoke G815

Metal Can

4

1

99

1974

Grenade, Smoke G978

Wood Box

384

1

96

1697

Tow missile

Box

1

NA

33

2100

Javelin missile

Container, Metal

1

NA

9

864

4-226. Figure 4-117 shows the carrying capacity of the available transportation vehicles found in an HBCT. Operators of the vehicles must be aware of the respective weight limitations of their vehicle.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-101

Chapter 4

Vehicle Truck Cargo, 1 ¼ T, 4x4 M998

Truck Cargo, 1 ¼ T, 4x4 M1097

Truck, Cargo, 10T 8x8, M977

Truck, Cargo, 10T 8x8, M985

Cargo Weight

Number of Pallets

2,500 lbs

1 pallet (not to exceed cargo weight)

4,400 lbs

1 pallet

22,000 lbs

8 pallets

21,729 lbs

8 pallets

33,000 lbs (without trailer) 66,000 lbs (with trailer)

10 pallets (without trailer) 20 pallets (with trailer)

5,000 lbs

2 pallets

10,000 lbs

4 pallets

Truck, Tractor, 16.5 T, 10x10, PLS, M1074

Truck, Cargo, 2 ½ T, 4x4, FMTV, M1078

Truck, Cargo, 5 T, 6x6, FMTV, M1084

See Table 4-13 to identify maximum pallet weight by ammunition type. Pallet quantities listed above represent the maximum number of standard pallets the vehicle can transport. Refer to specific vehicle operator’s manual for appropriate lift and load capacity.

Figure 4-117. HBCT common vehicle cargo capacity

4-102

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Ammunition

SECTION X – SAFETY 4-227. Periodically, the U.S. Army issues various warnings to units related to ammunition. These notices are often good for only one year, but might be renewed until a problem is fixed or the information is included in more permanent publications. These warnings can take several forms: z Ammunition Information Notices (AIN) and Notification of Ammunition Reclassification (NAR) deal with all types of ammunition. z Safety-of-Use Messages (SOUM), Ground Precautionary Messages (GPM), and Maintenance Advisory Messages (MAM) cover a wide range of topics, which may or may not cover ammunition-specific issues. z Additional information can be found on Army Knowledge Online (AKO). In AKO, select Knowledge Network, and then select Abrams Master Gunner Network. 4-228. If ammunition is stored in metal ammunition cans that are outside in hot, desert environments, the top row of ammunition can heat to 190°F, which easily exceeds the maximum safe firing temperatures of all tank ammunition. Care should be taken to provide cover to ammunition that is stored outside in the desert heat. Furthermore, if possible, crews should be cautious about immediately firing rounds that have been stored in the top row of unprotected cans.

IDENTIFICATION OF SUSPENDED OR RESTRICTED LOTS OF AMMUNITION Notes. It is the responsibility of the safety officer and ammunition noncommissioned officer (NCO) to ensure that ammunition is checked for restrictions and suspensions. It is the officer in charge’s (OIC) duty to abide by those, if any restrictions/suspensions are identified. For further information regarding suspended or restricted ammunition, Soldiers may also use the website http://www.jmc.army.mil/ib/ibq/SURV/gen/survinfo.htm. This page contains current information, ARMY NAR messages with links for each message; an introduction link to explain the TB and entries; and an automated look-up database that can be searched by DODIC, Lot Number or NSN. 4-229. See Figure 4-118 for a flow chart for procedures for identifying suspended or restricted lots of ammunitions. 4-230. When inspecting small arms ammunition (functional lots), the NSN and lot number can be found on the plywood box.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

4-103

Chapter 4

Figure 4-118. Ammunition lot restriction flow chart

4-104

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21

3 September 2009

Chapter 5

Detect On future battlefields crews must be able to engage multiple targets rapidly while operating within irregular battle lines. Depending on the tactical situation and the area of operations, enemy targets may be intermingled with friendly, coalition, and neutral vehicles and personnel. Survival will depend on the crew’s ability to detect, locate, identify and, if necessary, engage and destroy the enemy rapidly. Crews must be proficient in the techniques and procedures for detecting and identifying potential targets; making engagement decisions; executing and assessing engagements against hostile targets, and employing fire commands to orchestrate the engagement process. Chapter 5 discusses the steps in the engagement process and their relationship to each other and discusses the detailed steps of the detection process. Note. The figures in Chapter 5 depict only one platform. All scanning techniques refer to every platform unless otherwise stated.

Contents Section I – Engagement Process ............. 5-1 Section II – Detect ..................................... 5-2 Crew Search ....................................... 5-2 Sectors of Responsibility..................... 5-3 Target Detection ................................. 5-5

Target Location ................................... 5-7 Search Techniques ............................. 5-9 Ground and Air Search Tips.............. 5-15

SECTION I – ENGAGEMENT PROCESS 5-1. The engagement process is the process of detecting, identifying, engaging and assessing targets on the battlefield to ensure their rapid destruction. The detect, identify, decide, engage, and assess (DIDEA) process provides an iterative, standardized, and systematic approach to target engagement activities across the surface-to-surface, surface-to-air, air-to-surface, and air-to-air mission areas. DIDEA applies across the user spectrum, from the individual infantryman, to direct fire surface platforms, to aviation platforms, to indirect fire controllers. The individual actions of the DIDEA process are summarized below: z Detect. Detect is the acquisition and location of an object in the operational environment (OE). z Identify. Identify is a systematic process supporting the characterization of detected objects as friend, enemy, or neutral. z Decide. Decide is the determination of appropriate application of military options and weapons resources on identified objects. z Engage. Engage is the specific application of military options/weapons resources. z Assess. Assess did the applied weapons resources bring about the desired effect. 5-2. The engagement process is facilitated for direct fire weapons systems by employing fire commands to organize and execute the process (see Figure 5-1).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

5-1

Chapter 5

Figure 5-1. Engagement process (detect)

SECTION II – DETECT 5-3. Combat identification (CID) is the process of attaining an accurate characterization of detected objects in the OE sufficient to support an engagement decision (see JP 3-0). The CID process has the following three key purposes: z Identify and classify targets in the OE. z Allow for the timely processing of engagement decisions on targets classified as enemy. z The mitigation of fratricide and collateral damage to noncombatants. 5-4. The CID process is a series of progressive and interdependent steps (or actions)—target search, detection, location, and identification that lead to the decision process to engage or not engage. Effective CID for a crew requires a constant combined effort from each crew member.

CREW SEARCH 5-5. Crew search (observation) is the act of carefully watching designated areas. Sectors of observation are assigned by the vehicle commander (VC) or as outlined in the unit standing operating procedures (SOP) to each crew member for target acquisition. If the vehicle is in a hide position, the VC may chooses to position an observer (or two) forward of the vehicle to continue the crew search process while the platform remains hidden. As Future Combat Systems Spin-Out technology becomes available, platoons will have the option of employing Unattended Ground Sensors (UGS) and Class I Unmanned Aircraft Systems (UAS) to assist in target detection in their sector. 5-6. Terrain, visibility conditions, vehicle positioning, and fire distribution planning dictate the distance (depth and width) a crew, section, or platoon must cover. Each vehicle’s sector of fire and observation must overlap with the sectors of adjacent vehicles. Based on these factors, the VC and gunner must coordinate how they will cover the vehicle’s assigned sector, for both the offense and defense.

5-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Detect

SECTORS OF RESPONSIBILITY 5-7. Sectors of responsibility are areas assigned to each crew member for search and target acquisition. While on an Abrams or Bradley, standard sectors of observation depend on turret orientation for all crew members except the driver. On the armored High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV) however, all crew members have the same sectors of observation while mounted on the platform. Crew members must know their assigned sectors of observation to ensure 360-degree coverage of the battlefield. When operating within a section or platoon, each platform’s 360-degree coverage will create overlapping fields of observation. 5-8. For tanks, sectors are normally assigned as follows: z During opened hatch operations— „ The VC’s sector of responsibility is 360 degrees. However, when the loader observes from the hatch, the VC observes from the left front of the gun mantle, clockwise, to the left rear of the turret. „ The gunner’s sector is along the axis of the main gun, within the limits of the gunner’s sight in low magnification. „ The loader’s sector is from the right front of the gun mantle, counterclockwise, to the right rear of the turret. The loader should be designated as primary air guard when he is not inside the turret. „ The driver’s sector is forward, with the limits of his periscope. z During closed hatch operations— „ The VC must observe 360 degrees using his vision blocks. On tanks when the loader is able to scan to the rear, the VC must be able to view from the back of the loader’s sponson box. This should slightly overlap the loader’s viewing area. He also assumes duties as primary air guard on M1A1 tanks. „ The gunner’s sector remains the same. „ The loader (tanks) orients to the rear of the turret, using his periscope. „ The driver’s sector remains the same. 5-9. For Bradleys, sectors are normally assigned as follows: z During opened hatch operations— „ The VC’s sector of responsibility is 360 degrees. „ The gunner’s sector is from fender to fender within the limits of his sights in low magnification. „ The driver’s sector is forward and left, with the limits of his periscope. z During closed hatch operations— „ The VC must observe 360 degrees using his vision blocks. „ The gunner’s sector remains the same. „ The driver’s sector remains the same. 5-10. During closed hatch operations, the crew’s ability to acquire targets is reduced by at least 50 percent. The crew must make sure all vision blocks and sights are clear and free of obstruction. 5-11. Acquisition responsibilities for the M2A3/M3A3 and M1A2 SEP (System Enhancement Package) crew must be altered as follows: z VC and Gunner. Remains the same with changes in responsibility depending on the situation. (For example: The individual tank is allotted a sector of fire; the VC determines where most main gun engagements are likely to occur. Usually, the gunner covers this area with the Gunner’s Primary Sight (GPS). Depending on the width of the sector, the VC may scan the same sector with the gunner [opposite directions], or assign the commander’s independent thermal viewer (CITV)/commander’s independent viewer (CIV) its own sector. If the CITV/CIV is assigned its own sector, the CITV/CIV and GPS sectors must overlap. In some situations, the tank’s sector may require the VC and gunner to scan different sectors simultaneously; the VC

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

5-3

Chapter 5

z z

and gunner need to know the limits of both sectors and ensure that these sectors overlap. Depending on the size of the sector to be scanned, the crew may decide to scan the sector in different fields of view. The CITV/CIV would be set to scan in the wide field of view (WFOV), AUTO-SCAN. This allows the VC to monitor the CITV/CIV, improved commander’s weapon station (ICWS), and the TACTICAL DISPLAY, simultaneously; while the gunner employs detailed search techniques with the GPS in high magnification.) Loader (Tanks). Orients to the rear of the turret, using his periscope. Driver. Remains the same.

5-12. Due to the close range and the three-dimensional aspect for potential engagements urban operations require tight teamwork to ensure no dead space is left uncovered and that 360 security is maintained. When operating in a closed hatch posture in an urban environment it is particularly important that teams work to cover dead space imposed by the mechanical limits of various systems to elevate their weapons systems (see Figure 5-2 through Figure 5-4).

Figure 5-2. Dead space considerations for closed hatch operations

Figure 5-3. Abram’s weapon dead space (flank)

5-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Detect

Figure 5-4. Bradley weapon dead space (flank)

TARGET DETECTION 5-13. Target detection is the discovery of any object in the OE such as personnel, vehicles, equipment, or objects of potential military significance. Target detection occurs during target search as a direct result of observation. Crews must also be well trained in identifying the potential threats such as surface- or subsurface-laid mines, obstacles, booby traps, and unexploded ordnances (UXO) and improvised explosive devices (IED). This requires complete attention to detail, identifying threats beyond the obvious or known enemy systems.

TARGET SIGNATURES 5-14. Target signatures are indicators or clues that aid an observer in detecting potential targets. Most weapons and vehicles have identifiable signatures. These signatures may be the result of the design or the environment in which the equipment is operating; for example, firing a vehicle’s main weapon system will produce blast, flash, noise, smoke, and dust. The movement of vehicles through a built-up area causes more noise than the movement of the same vehicle in an open field. Different types of aircraft have different signatures; for example, the signature of a hovering helicopter is not the same as that of a fixedwing aircraft. Other factors that affect target signatures are visibility, temperature, and weather conditions. 5-15. Wheeled or tracked vehicle signatures are most likely to be detected in open areas and rolling terrain. Threat antitank positions visually cover primary avenues of approach where tanks and personnel carriers are likely to be used. Helicopters are most likely on the backside of wood lines, ridgelines, and significant folds in the terrain. Sight, hearing, and smell can all assist in detecting signatures that will lead to target location and identification. Examples of target signatures are— z Soldier— „ Foxholes. „ Broken vegetation. „ Footprints (weather conditions permitting). „ Trash. „ Small-arms weapons noise and flash. „ Sounds (voices, equipment noises). „ Dismounted movement (visual or audible).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

5-5

Chapter 5

z

z

z

z

z

Tracked Vehicle— „ Vehicle tracks on the ground (weather conditions permitting). „ Hot spots from road wheels, engine compartments, tracks, or weapon barrels (if using thermal sights). „ Engine noise. „ Exhaust plume and smoke. „ Dust clouds from movement. „ Disturbed areas of vegetation. „ Weapon’s firings report and smoke from weapon. „ A bright flash at night. „ Open hatch silhouettes. „ Reflections off of glass surfaces and optics. Antitank— „ Sharp crack of the antitank guided missile (ATGM) being fired. „ Missile launch “swish” sound. „ Fast traveling hot spot with a vapor trail (during thermal operations). „ Long, thin wires from fired ATGMs. „ Recently destroyed armored vehicles. Artillery— „ Loud, dull sound. „ Grayish-white smoke cloud. „ Bright orange flash and black smoke from airbursts. „ Rushing noise several seconds before round impacts. „ Self-propelled artillery has the same thermal infrared signatures as tracked vehicles. „ Towed artillery signatures vary according to the towing vehicle. Aircraft— „ Glare of the sun reflecting off aircraft canopies, wings, fuselages of fixed-wing aircraft, windows, and rotor blades of helicopters. „ Aircraft engine noise. „ Vapor trails from engine exhaust and fired missiles. „ Dust and movement of foliage from hovering helicopters. Obstacles and Mine— „ Loose or disturbed dirt in a regular pattern. „ A destroyed or disabled vehicle that appears to have struck a mine. „ Dead animal carcasses along side of roads. „ Piles of dirt or trash along side of improved roads.

DETECTION CHALLENGES 5-16. Some targets are more difficult to detect than others. Soldiers must be well trained to detect and locate targets. Some examples of these more difficult targets and challenges are— z Peripheral targets (targets on the edge of the field of view). z Targets that are camouflaged or in shadows. z Targets that can be heard but not seen. z Targets under less than ideal indirect fire illumination. If the illumination is in front of the target, the resulting shadow will be darker than the target. If the illumination is behind the target (and not in position to “wash out” the crew’s optics), the target should stand out distinctly from the background. Soldiers should always keep one eye closed during illumination search, and never look directly into the illumination source to retain their own night vision.

5-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Detect

z z z z z

Mirage effects caused by high temperatures and heat waves near the ground. Small single targets such as lone infantry ATGM or rocket-propelled grenade (RPG) positions. Small targets in complex detection environments (such as urban or jungle environments). Natural and manmade obstacles. Behavioral or physical deficiencies of the observer (fatigue and eye reaction to gun flashes).

THERMAL SIGHTS 5-17. The enemy uses darkness to move their forces, dig in, or continue the attack. During the day, the enemy uses every means possible to cover their intentions. Some camouflaged targets are difficult to acquire with the day optics, but can be detected with a thermal sight. The crew should use the thermal sight, when so equipped, to acquire targets during limited and good visibility. Thermal sights operate on the principle of sensing heat radiation or temperature differences in the field of view. This heat is translated as an electronic image. Use of thermal imaging systems provides U.S. forces with a definite advantage over the enemy to conduct night operations. Night operations are to our advantage if crews can maneuver and engage targets using a thermal sighting systems. During day operations, crews should use thermal sights to increase their ability to detect targets behind foliage or in shadows. Crews should also switch between day and thermal optics during the day to aid in target detection. 5-18. The following thermal signatures can be detected using the thermal sight: z Solar Heat. Objects absorb heat from the sun at different rates depending on the material. Darker objects and targets tend to retain heat more than lighter objects. The amount of heat absorbed by an object determines the duration the object can be seen using the thermal sight. Target signatures vary if heated only by solar heat. As the sun begins to set, the gunner must observe how the object forms changes. z Fuel Combustion. Vehicles have a plume of heat from the exhaust and another around the engine compartment due to fuel combustion. The location of the engine and the direction of the exhaust differ between vehicles. The strength of the signature produced from the engine or exhaust being used varies with the following: „ How recent the vehicle was used. „ The size of the vehicle’s exhaust plume. „ Where the muffler is located. „ The vehicle compositions ability to retain heat. z Friction. Moving parts of a vehicle cause friction. The areas that appear as images in the sight include tracks, road wheels, drive sprockets, and support rollers. Vehicles being driven through mud or snow do not create as sharp an image. Vehicle track shrouding materials can hide the signature of the road wheels and the track shoes. The longer a vehicle is operated, the more intense the image is of the heated area. A vehicle looks much different after a 12-km road march than it does in a defensive position. z Thermal Reflections. Glossy, smooth surfaces, such as windows in buildings or the windshield of a vehicle, can reflect radiated heat. z Body Heat. Humans are warm-blooded and their body temperature is always constant. When humans are around an area much cooler than their body, their silhouette appears very clear through thermal optics.

TARGET LOCATION 5-19. Target location is the determination of where a target is in your OE. Locating a target occurs as a result of observation and detection during crew search.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

5-7

Chapter 5

TARGET DIRECTION TECHNIQUE 5-20. Once a target is located, the target location must be communicated to the rest of the crew. Methods used to announce a located target depend on the individual’s specific position, unit SOP, and time available. The six most common target location methods for the tank and Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) crews are clock, sector, traverse, reference point, grid, and target designate (M2/M3A3 and M1A2 SEP crews only).

CLOCK 5-21. The clock method is commonly used to locate the targets for the crew. Twelve o’clock is based on the direction of vehicle movement while traveling or hull orientation (front of vehicle) when stationary (example: “TROOPS, NINE O’CLOCK”). On the BFV and the M1A2 SEP, the VC or gunner can use the turret position indicator to assist in accurately announcing target location.

SECTOR 5-22. The sector method is similar to the clock method; it is quick and easy to use. It is best used to indicate a direction from the direction of movement (moving) or hull orientation (stationary) using the terms center, left, right, and rear. Center sector is always to the front (example: “THREE TRUCKS, LEFT REAR”).

TRAVERSE (SHIFT) 5-23. The traverse method is also a relatively quick method, primarily used by another observer to locate the target for the gunner. The traverse method can be used when the VC’s power control handle is inoperable to guide the gunner on target (example: “TRAVERSE (Shift) LEFT…STEADY…ON”).

REFERENCE POINT 5-24. The reference point method is used mainly in conjunction with the vehicle optics. The VC uses his binoculars (or CIV/CITV/commander’s weapon station [CWS] sight reticle) to determine the mil value from a terrain feature, known position, or target reference point (TRP). He then announces the mil value to the gunner. The gunner uses the mil reticle relationship to traverse onto the target. The key to this location method is the VC’s and gunner’s knowledge of the mil-sight relationship. z The quick TRP method is used by all personnel to identify targets near a TRP (example: “TWO PCs, TRP ONE FOUR”). z The precise reference point method is used to locate targets accurately in relation to a known TRP (example: “ATGM, TRP ONE FOUR, RIGHT FIVE MILS”).

GRID 5-25. The grid method is the least desired technique because of the length of times it takes to guide the gunner on target. The VC receives the location of a target by map grid from either an observation post, Blue Force Tracker, Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2), or by the internal communications systems. The VC then uses his map to orient the turret to the target area for the gunner.

TARGET DESIGNATE 5-26. The M2/M3A3/M1A2 SEP commander uses the target designate capability to lay the gunner on a target. When a target is located with the CIV/CITV, the commander squeezes the palm switch and presses the TARGET DESIGNATE button to move the gunner’s line of sight to the target.

5-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Detect

SEARCH TECHNIQUES GROUND SEARCH TECHNIQUES 5-27. Crew members scan their sectors at all times to detect targets or possible target locations. They can quickly locate targets by using ground search techniques: rapid scan, slow (50-meter) scan, detailed search, and the off-center vision method. Crew members can use the thermal optics, infrared (IR) night-vision devices, machine gun optics, naked eye, and binoculars for ground searches during both good and limited visibility conditions.

Rapid Scan 5-28. The rapid-scan method is used to quickly detect obvious signs of enemy activity (see Figure 5-5). It is usually the first method used, whether moving or stationary. z The crew member starts scanning in the center of the sector and rapidly scans from the nearest to the farthest point. z He then orients left or right and conducts a rapid scan, near to far. This sweep must overlap the center of the previously scanned sector. z Once one side of center is completed, he scans the remaining side in the same manner. z If more than one crew member is scanning, the gunner should always scan from near to far while the other crew member scans from far to near. z The crew places weapon systems on the nearest target first.

Figure 5-5. Rapid scans

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

5-9

Chapter 5

Slow (50-Meter) Scan 5-29. If no targets are detected in the rapid scan, crew members conduct a more deliberate scan of the terrain by using vehicle optics (day or thermal mode) or hand-held vision enhancers (see Figure 5-6). The slow scan is best used by the VC or gunner when in a defensive position or from a short halt. z The gunner pauses at short intervals to give his eyes time to focus, searches a strip of the target area 50 meters deep from right to left. z The gunner then searches a strip farther out from left to right, overlapping the first area scanned. z If another crew member is also scanning, he uses the same technique starting from the opposite side. They continue this method until the entire assigned sector has been searched.

Figure 5-6. Slow (50-meter) scan z z

5-10

For scanning larger buildings in an urban environment, it is recommended that gunner’s employ horizontal slow scan and VCs ground-to-roof scanning techniques (see Figure 5-7). When a suspicious area or possible target signature is detected, he stops and searches the immediate area thoroughly, using the detailed search method.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Detect

Figure 5-7. Ground-to-rooftop and horizontal slow-scan techniques Notes. The M2/M3A3 Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS) and CIV, the Abrams 1st Generation forward looking, infrared (FLIR) and CITV and the Long-Range Advanced Scout Surveillance System (LRAS3) can be electronically zoomed for an intensive observation of potential targets. The thermal radiation reflects off glass and prevents crews from reliably seeing through windows using the thermal imaging system (TIS); therefore, crews should alternate the daylight and thermal sight while scanning.

Detailed Search 5-30. If no targets are detected using the rapid or slow scanning methods, crews should use the vehicle optics (day and night) to make a careful, deliberate search, either while stationary or moving (see Figure 5-8). This method is also used to search small areas or suspected avenues of approach in detail and— z The crew concentrates on one specific area or location and studies that area intensely. z The crews look for direct or indirect target signatures in a clockwise manner around the focal point area. When using more than one optic (such as IBAS, CITV and CIV), one crew member scans clockwise and the other scans counterclockwise. z Sample target signatures are— „ Dust created by vehicle movement. „ Tracks or tire marks. „ Reflections from glass or metal. „ Angular objects that do not conform to the surrounding area. „ Vegetation that appears out of place. „ Flash or smoke from a weapon or missile. „ Entrenchments or earthworks. z Magnify optics as needed to cover detailed search areas.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

5-11

Chapter 5

5-31. The M2/M3A3 commander and the M1A2 SEP commander can use the CIV/CITV for additional search capability. Gunners can use all of their sighting systems to perform target search techniques. The dismounted squad can use the squad leader’s display (SLD) in the M2/M3A3 for the acquisition process to aid the crew in the target detection and for situational awareness (prior to dismounted squad ground operations). 5-32. The LRAS3 is used on the scout HMMWV and some variants of the Mine Resistant Ambush Protected (MRAP). The gunner can use this sight in all visibility conditions to provide excellent target detection. The only shortfall is that the sight is not slaved to a weapon system, requiring the gunner to reacquire a target with the mounted weapon sight.

Figure 5-8. Detailed-search technique

OFF-CENTER VISION METHOD 5-33. Crew members use the off-center vision method at night without the use of optics. At each likely target area, they pause a few seconds to detect a target or any movement. If they detect an object, they use off-center vision to observe it. To prevent object fade-out, they move their eyes frequently in short, abrupt, irregular movements. Crew members can cup their hands around their eyes to increase night vision.

AIR SEARCH TECHNIQUES 5-34. While scanning their assigned sector for ground targets, crew members must also be aware of air targets. To aid in the detection of air targets, crews should use the horizontal search-and-scan technique or vertical search-and-scan technique. Crew members should periodically check the air space above their assigned sector using the rapid-scan technique. As each crew member completes a rapid scan across the sector and his field of view meets the horizon, he should switch to a detailed search and make a careful, deliberate search of tree lines, valleys, and possible air corridors silhouetted by distant background terrain.

5-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Detect

5-35. Attack helicopters try to engage at extremely long ranges; therefore, target identification is difficult. Crews must make every effort to correctly identify the target. To prevent fratricide, leaders must keep crews informed of friendly aircraft operating in their unit’s sector. 5-36. Based on mission, enemy, terrain (weather), troops and support available, time available, and civil considerations (METT-TC) (factors taken into account in situation awareness and in the mission analysis process), the unit commander may establish one or more air guards in sections, platoons, or convoys. Note. For tanks an air guard is a designated tank (or tanks) with multipurpose antitank (MPAT) battlecarried in air mode. If Stinger teams are attached to the unit, they should assume the role as primary air guard. 5-37. The air guard is primarily responsible for detecting and engaging aerial targets. An air guard crew searches for aerial targets in the same manner as other crews. Gunners search their assigned sector using the search and scan techniques; however— z Sector limits established for the gunner must cover likely helicopter locations and avenues of approach. z Gunners must make sure ground reference points are always within their field of view in order to maintain directional control and situational awareness.

Horizontal Search and Scan 5-38. Search up to 20 degrees above the horizon by moving the eyes in short movements across the sky, working your way up and across. Continue the scan pattern below the horizon to detect aircraft flying napof-the-earth (see Figure 5-9).

Figure 5-9. Horizontal search and scan

Vertical Search and Scan 5-39. Search the sky using the horizon as a starting point and prominent terrain features as points of reference. Move the eyes in short movements into the sky, then back down, continuing this movement

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

5-13

Chapter 5

across the terrain. Scan in the same pattern below the horizon to detect aircraft flying nap-of-the-earth (see Figure 5-10).

Figure 5-10. Vertical search and scan

Estimation of Upper Search Limits 5-40. When scanning the sky for aircraft, crew members may miss high-flying aircraft if they limit their search too near the horizon; yet, they are likely to miss low-flying aircraft if they expand the upper limits of their search too high above the horizon. The correct upper limit of search is 20 degrees. Estimate 20 degrees using the technique illustrated (see Figure 5-11). With the fingers fully spread, the tip of the thumb is the upper search limit.

Figure 5-11. Estimating 20 degrees Note. Enemy aircraft typically operate in pairs. If a pair of aircraft is acquired, a second set of aircraft should be expected. There may be one to four pairs of aircraft conducting an attack mission.

5-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Detect

5-41. For flat terrain the horizontal search and scan technique is preferred. An alternate method of conducting this scan is for the crew member to scan the horizon by moving their eyes from object to object. They can see more detail this way than with a continuous scan of the horizon. For hilly terrain the vertical search and scan technique is preferred.

GROUND AND AIR SEARCH TIPS 5-42. All of the optical devices available to a crew can be used to acquire targets. z Initial scanning can be done without optics. The members should scan different locations. z Target search is continuous. Any possible target(s) missed on the first or second scan may be seen on the third or fourth scan. z The crew members must look for targets and target locations using proper scanning methods within their assigned sectors. z Sector discipline is vital for both the crew member as well as the crew as a whole to ensure constant coverage of their assigned sectors. z While on the move, the crew should use the rapid scan method, constantly scanning their entire sector. z On optics with an adjustable reticle, the gunner should adjust the reticle brightness until the reticle is barely visible. The vehicle dome lights should be off or in the filtered position, and the panel light dimmer knob on the BFV should be adjusted to dim. z On the BFV, the commander’s sight extension (CSE) should be covered when not utilized. It enhances the gunner’s sight picture by reducing the amount of ambient light being reflected through the integrated sight unit (ISU) optics from the CSE. z Operations during chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) conditions limit the crew members’ abilities to acquire and locate targets. Whatever the platform, the crews fields of view are greatly narrowed while wearing protective masks. z The crew members must search in areas where targets are most likely to appear, such as avenues of approach, wood lines, and reverse-slope firing positions. This can be achieved by the VC determining where he would be if he were the threat. z The crew should not use zoom when using rapid scans to detect targets. z On the M2A3 when the sight is unstowed and turned on and the commander’s tactical display (CTD) is on the map screen, the dismounts can use the SLD to help the M2/M3A3 crew in the detection process by monitoring one of four videos (driver’s vision enhancement [DVE], IBAS, CTD, or CIV). Note. Ground and air search techniques are used in conjunction with sector search techniques.

SECTOR SEARCH TECHNIQUES 5-43. Below are the following techniques that are used when more than one crewman is available for searching.

Sector Overlapping 5-44. Crews must ensure the sectors they scan overlap those that have already been scanned or overlap those of other crew members that are also scanning (see Figure 5-12).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

5-15

Chapter 5

Figure 5-12. Sector overlapping

Sector Divided 5-45. The vehicle crews divide the sector between them. One crew member scans one half of the sector, and another scans the other half, ensuring the entire sector area is overlapped at the center of the sector (see Figure 5-13).

Figure 5-13. Sector divided

5-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Detect

Near-to-Far Sector Search 5-46. The commander searches far using CITV/CIV (M1A2, M2A3), binoculars, or night vision devices, and the gunner searches near using the primary sights or other optics to detect enemy target for the same sector.

ACQUISITION REPORTS 5-47. Targets acquired by a crew or dismount team member are immediately reported to the VC by an acquisition report. This target handover technique must take place before the determination step of the engagement decision. An acquisition report consists of three elements: z Alert (optional). z Target description. z Target location. 5-48. For example: “DRIVER REPORT, TWO MOVING PCs, ELEVEN O’CLOCK.”). 5-49. The description element of the report usually serves as the alert element (for example: “TWO MOVING PCs, ELEVEN O’CLOCK.”).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

5-17

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 6

Identify Target identification is one of the most important steps in the detect, identify, decide, engage, and assess (DIDEA) process. Identification is the process of attaining an accurate characteristic and discriminatory aspect of detected objects on the battlefield. With proper training, timely application of the “identify” step in the DIDEA process can occur (see Figure 6-1). Timely application is important for crew members so they can engage hostile forces on the battlefield before the enemy can engage them. Although the identification process encompasses classification, identification, and discrimination, depending on the situation and the tactical decision made, identification will be, as a minimum, discriminated as friend, enemy, or noncombatant. By knowing and understanding the identification process, crew members can engage the enemy in a timely manner and reduce casualties and fatalities due to fratricide. Unknown objects should never be engaged, rather the identification process should continue until positive identification has been achieved. For example, a crew detects an object in their sector and classifies it as a personnel carrier (PC), but cannot positively identify it by type, nor discriminate it as friend or foe. The potential target could not be classified as a noncombatant because the crew has positively determined it is a combat vehicle. The object would be characterized as an “unidentified PC” and the crew would not engage the object. It would remain unidentified until the crew could close on the target, let the target close on them, or employ other means to positively identify the object as friend or foe. If the object engages you during the identification process, the crew is still required to discriminate between friend, foe, or noncombatant in order to prevent potential fratricide.

Contents Section I – Classification .......................... 6-1 Section II – Identification .......................... 6-2 Ground Vehicle ................................... 6-2 Aircraft Vehicle Identification............... 6-9

Section III – Discrimination ..................... 6-13 Discrimination Definitions .................. 6-13 Joint Combat Identification Marking Systems ............................................ 6-13

SECTION I – CLASSIFICATION 6-1. Classification is the first step toward identification. It is the process of categorizing targets by types (such as truck, tank, and PC). Soldiers can quickly scan the target’s key recognition features and then categorize it accordingly. Key recognition features are features on a vehicle that clearly identify it as a certain nomenclature. When using key recognition features to determine nomenclature, crew members should identify as many key features as possible to accurately identify the vehicle. Using only one or two key recognition features greatly increases the chance of fratricide due to the increased number of vehicle variants worldwide.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

6-1

Chapter 6

Figure 6-1. Engagement process (identify)

SECTION II – IDENTIFICATION

GROUND VEHICLE 6-2. Once a target has been classified, it must be accurately identified by nomenclature. Identification is the positive determination of a target by nomenclature or series, such as T-80 or Scorpion series. Once the target has been classified, the crew observes key recognition features to positively identify the target. 6-3. A helpful method to aid in the identification of armored and wheeled vehicles is by recognizing key features of a vehicle and using the wheels, hull, armament, track (WHAT). 6-4. When identifying wheeled and armored vehicles using WHAT, some questions to consider are— z Wheels/track— „ How many wheels or road wheels are there and what is their spacing? „ What type of suspension does the track have? Is the track unsupported (see Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3) or supported (see Figure 6-4)? „ How many support rollers does it have? „ What is the size/width of the track?

6-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Identify

Figure 6-2. Unsupported track (example one)

Figure 6-3. Unsupported track (example two)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

6-3

Chapter 6

Figure 6-4. Supported track z

Hull: Is the hull boat shaped (see Figure 6-5) or boxed shaped (see Figure 6-6)?

„

Figure 6-5. Boat shaped hull

6-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Identify

Figure 6-6. Boxed shaped hull „

Does it contain a trim vane (see Figure 6-7)?

Figure 6-7. Trim vane

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

6-5

Chapter 6

„

Are there hydro-jets for amphibious uses (see Figure 6-8)?

Figure 6-8. Hydrojets „ „ „ „ „ „ „

z

6-6

Are external fuel cells present? What and how many track skirts does the vehicle have? Where and what shape is the exhaust? Where is the engine located? Where is the driver’s position? Are there troop doors or hatches? Are infantry firing ports visible?

Armament: „ What type/size of main armament does it appear to have? „ Are there secondary weapons? „ Where is the bore evacuator (see Figure 6-9)?

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Identify

Figure 6-9. Bore evacuator „ „ „ „

Is there a thermal shroud? Is there a presence of a muzzle break/flash suppressor? Is the main armament short or long? What shape is the mantle (see Figure 6-10), if any?

Figure 6-10. Gun mantle

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

6-7

Chapter 6

z

Turret: „ What shape and size is the turret? „ Where is the turret mounted on the hull? „ How many and what shape are the hatches (if visible)? „ Does the vehicle have a fording snorkel kit (see Figure 6-11)?

Figure 6-11. Fording kit „ „ „

Are grenade launchers present? Are there troop rails visible? Are there reactive tiles (see Figure 6-12)?

Figure 6-12. Armored reactive tiles 6-5. Once the key recognition features on the target have been identified, the crew, through training, should be able to identify the exact nomenclature and should move on to target discrimination. Crews identifying vehicles should consider which key features should be used primarily. Certain aspects of vehicles never change even with variants, such as roadwheel number spacing and position of the turret mounted on the hull. Using key features similar to reactive armor tiles, external fuel cells or track skirts should only be used to validate or reinforce positive identification.

6-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Identify

6-6. For example, the gunner classifies a target as a tank because of the low silhouette, large gun tube, and tracks. Using the WHAT method, he then looks at the target’s wheels. From this he determines that the suspension system has no support rollers and five road wheels. As he looks at the hull, he notes that it is box-like and has a distinct splash guard. As he moves to the armament, he identifies the incomparable bore evacuator at the end of the gun tube. Continuing on to the turret, it is smooth and rounded, and the troop rails, one straight and one bowed are clearly visible. From his observations, he identifies the target as a T-55 tank (see Figure 6-13).

Figure 6-13. Key recognition features (armored) 6-7. A crew member using the WHAT format and being familiar with key recognition features of vehicles, will significantly increase the speed at which the threat vehicle can be identified and engaged while reducing the probability of fratricide. Although using this format will aid crew members in identifying vehicles, they should be aware that it does not complete the identification process. Crew members may identify the vehicle as a T-72 however, with over 30 countries using it worldwide, it may be operated by a coalition or allied force. Discrimination of the vehicle will be discussed later in this chapter.

AIRCRAFT VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION 6-8. Similar to the WHAT format used in the identification of ground vehicles, the fuselage, armament, rotors, and tail (FART) format is used when identifying aerial vehicles. 6-9. While identifying helicopters consider the following: z Fuselage— „ What shape and size is the fuselage? „ Are there any weapon sights visible? „ Are there landing wheels or skids? „ Where is the exhaust located? „ What shape is the nose? „ Are troop doors present? „ Where are the engines mounted (see Figure 6-14)?

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

6-9

Chapter 6

Figure 6-14. Engine mounting Does the cockpit appear to be for one pilot or for a crew? Is a large amount of the cockpit glass or other material? „ Are there any windows visible? „ Does it have any stub wings? „ Are external fuel tanks visible? „ Are there any other dominant features? Armament— „ What type of main armament does it have? „ Are there any secondary armaments? „ Are the weapons attached to the wings or fuselage? „ Is the weapon sighting system(s) visible? Rotors— „ How many rotor blades are there? „ Is there any type of equipment or sensors above the rotors (see Figure 6-15)? „ „

z

z

Figure 6-15. Rotary wing external sensors

6-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Identify

z

Tail— „ How long is the tail wing? „ Is there a tail rotor? If so, which side is the tail rotor on? „ Is it a normal (see Figure 6-16) or fenestron (see Figure 6-17) tail rotor?

Figure 6-16. Tail rotor

Figure 6-17. Fenestron tail rotor „ „ „

3 September 2009

Does it have rear horizontal stabilizer wings (see Figure 6-18)? Is there an exhaust on the tail? Does it have a rear landing wheel or skid?

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

6-11

Chapter 6

Figure 6-18. Rear horizontal stabilizer wings 6-10. While observing the helicopter in Figure 6-19 and using the FART method, the gunner identifies five rotor blades and no distinct navigational or radar equipment above them. He then moves to its armament. There he notices an AT-6 Spiral and a medium caliber machine gun. As the gunner moves to the fuselage, he notices dual air intakes located just above the cockpit and the exhaust located on the side. The windows on the fuselage are distinct and square and the cockpit is bubble-like in shape and is for more than one person. When moving to the tail of the helicopter he notices that the tail rotor is located on the left side of the platform and that the rear portion of the landing gear is not a wheel but rather a skid. From the identification features, the gunner can now identify this platform as a MI-24 Hind-F.

Figure 6-19. Key identification features (helicopter)

6-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Identify

SECTION III – DISCRIMINATION

DISCRIMINATION DEFINITIONS 6-11. Discrimination is the determination whether a target is friend, foe, or noncombatant. The following list defines each: z

Friend. Any force, US or allied, that is jointly engaged in combat operations with an enemy in a theater of operation.

z

Foe (enemy combatant). Any individual who has engaged in antagonistic activities against a friendly force and oppose the views and goals of friendly or allied forces.

z

Noncombatants. Personnel, organizations, or agencies that are not directly engaged in combat operations. This includes individuals, such as medical personnel, chaplains, United Nations (UN) observers, or media representatives. Organizations similar to the Red Cross or Red Crescent can also be classified as noncombatants. In a theater of operation, most individuals will fall into this category.

6-12. Although Russian equipment has been sold in large numbers worldwide, Soldiers could find themselves facing British, French, and American-made equipment operating as a threat force. Further, it is likely in any future conflict U.S. forces will deploy as part of a coalition of allied nations which may use a wide variety of equipment. The discrimination process is also complicated by the increasing likelihood of having to discriminate between friend/foe and combatant/noncombatant in urban settings. In order to mitigate against fratricide and unnecessary collateral damage, Soldiers must use all of the situational awareness (SA) tools available and develop tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) for performing target discrimination.

JOINT COMBAT IDENTIFICATION MARKING SYSTEMS 6-13. Joint Coalition Identification Marking System (JCIMS) is a system used by U.S. and allied forces for quick discrimination of personnel and vehicles. JCIMS kits consist of thermal and infrared marking devices that enable forces equipped with thermal and night-vision devices to identify friendly forces based on the unique signatures of the JCIMS devices. 6-14. Currently there are three approved systems that make up JCIMS–Combat Identification Panels (CIP), Thermal Identification Panels (TIP), and Phoenix Beacons. The following techniques are provided to assist crews in target discrimination: z CIPs. CIPs are primarily for ground-to-ground identification. CIPs (battle boards) allow a Soldier looking through a thermal sight to identify a friendly vehicle up to 4,000 meters away. CIPs are bolted onto combat vehicles and provide a square or rectangle “cold” image on a “hot” background (see Figure 6-20).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

6-13

Chapter 6

Figure 6-20. Combat identification panel z

TIPs. TIPs are primarily for air-to-ground identification. These are foldable/rollable thermal panels that can be tied to the upper surfaces of ground vehicles to aid in recognition from the air (see Figure 6-21 and Figure 6-22). The TIPs can be utilized with thermals that operate only in the three to twelve micron (wavelength) range. TIPs can be ordered in either a two square foot or four square foot sizes, along with a variety of colors. See Figure 6-23 for the national stock numbers (NSN).

Figure 6-21. Abrams thermal identification panel placement

6-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Identify

Figure 6-22. Bradley thermal identification panel placement

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

6-15

Chapter 6

NSN

Model

Size

Color

Design

Use

Max range

2590-01-4474937

TIP-3

4x4

Olive Drab/Orange

Abrams Boresight

Sight System Dependent

2590-01-4474934

TIP-4

4x4

Tan/Orange

Abrams Boresight

Sight System Dependent

2590-01-4478997

TIP-5

4x4

Olive Drab

Vehicular

Sight System Dependent

2590-01-4484531

TIP-6

4x4

Tan

Vehicular

Sight System Dependent

2590-01-4526352

TIP-7

4x4

Olive Drab/Orange

Apache Boresight

Sight System Dependent

2590-01-4526353

TIP-8

4x4

Tan/Orange

Apache Boresight

Sight System Dependent

2590-01-5316337

TIP-9

4x4

Light Brown

Vehicular

Sight System Dependent

2590-01-5020006

TIP-12

2x2

Olive Drab

Personnel

1,000m

2590-01-5020016

TIP-13

2x2

Olive Drab/Orange

Personnel

1,000m

2590-01-5020020

TIP-14

2x2

Tan

Personnel

1,000m

2590-01-5020025

TIP-15

2x2

Tan/Orange

Personnel

1,000m

Figure 6-23. Thermal identification panel NSN listing z

6-16

Phoenix Beacons. A flashing near infrared beacon that is clearly visibly through night vision optics. The user encodes the beacon with unique Morse Code like flashes. The encoded flashes provide positive combat identification of the user. The Phoenix Light is a 2-ounce infrared beacon that operates for up to 100+ hours using a 9-volt battery. The infrared signal can be seen out to a range of 4 kilometers and is mounted on the highest point of the vehicle. A smaller version of the Phoenix Light is made for dismounted personnel. Phoenix lights are only viewable through night vision goggles, NOT through thermal sights or forward looking, infrared (FLIR). The light identifies the vehicle and the individual Soldier from both the ground and air (see Figure 6-24). Phoenix Beacons have the potential to be viewed by enemy elements with night vision goggles. Units should tailor use of the beacon based on mission, enemy, terrain (weather), troops and support available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC). See Table 6-1 for the NSN for the Phoenix Beacons.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Identify

Figure 6-24. Phoenix Beacon Table 6-1. Phoenix Beacon NSN listing Model

NSN

Use

Color

Range

IR-14

5855-01-438-4588

Tactical

Infrared

5 miles

IR-15 V

5855-01-396-8732

Trainer

Green

5 miles

IR-25

5855-01-451-9877

Tactical

Infrared

5 miles

MARKINGS 6-15. Units may also have other means of discriminating friendly vehicles from enemy. This may come from unit markings based off of the Army Combat Vehicle Marking Systems and unit standing operating procedures (SOP) and also from SA based equipment such as Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) or Blue Force Tracker. z Unit Markings. Unit markings are outlined by AR 746-2 and set based off of the unit SOP. They must distinctly identify a vehicle as friendly, and Soldiers must be well trained to identify those markings (see Figure 6-25). There are several items that units can use to mark vehicles. Examples are— „ Battlefield Reference Marking System (BRMS). The BRMS marking system panels come in many different patterns. Based off the unit SOP, vehicles can place the panels on their vehicle to differentiate different companies within a battalion. Not only could the BRMS panels be used for making vehicle systems, but they could also be used for boresighting vehicles or making target reference points (TRP). See Figure 6-25 for a list of NSNs and their respective design.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

6-17

Chapter 6

Model

NSN

Type A

6910-01-388-7699

Type B

6910-01-388-7660

Type C

6910-01-388-7624

Type D

6910-01-460-8098

Type E

6910-01-460-8103

Type F

6910-01-460-8107

Type G

6910-01-460-8111

Type I

NA

Design

Note. Only 4x4 panels are available in T-Back (see Figure 6-26). The 2x2 size is only available in Flatback.

Figure 6-25. BRMS NSN listing

Figure 6-26. BRMS T-Back style „

VS-17 panels (NSN 8345-00-174-6865) provide a bright recognition feature that allows crews to identify friendly vehicles through the daysight (see Figure 6-27).

Figure 6-27. VS-17 panel

6-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Identify

„

„

z

Chemical lights provide a means of marking vehicles at night. However, chemical lights are not visible through a thermal sight. An infrared (IR) variant is available for use with night vision devices. Unit symbols may also be used to mark friendly vehicles. An inverted V, for example, painted on the flanks, rear, and fronts of a vehicle, aid in identifying a target as friendly. This is typically limited to operations to enhance effectiveness.

SA. For digitally equipped units, the FBCB2 represent the best SA tool for assisting in the discrimination of targets (see Figure 6-28). Known friendly and neutral locations can be populated to the firing vehicle’s graphics as icons even if they are not FBCB2 equipped to mitigate fratricide and collateral damage. The other primary source of SA comes from operations order (OPORD)/fragmentary order (FRAGO) and combat reporting. Leaders are responsible for keeping their subordinates aware of changes in the friendly and enemy situation, to assist in the discrimination process.

Figure 6-28. Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

6-19

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 7

Decide Once the target has been identified, the decision is made to engage. The engagement decision process is a series of progressive and interdependent steps (or actions)– making rules of engagement decisions, determining threat levels, selecting weapon systems or ammunition, and making confirmation (see Figure 7-1). The vehicle commander (VC) is ultimately responsible for the actions of his crew; however, when the commander is unavailable the responsibility of target identification and engagement is relinquished to the gunner. On systems other than the tank or the Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) if the VC cannot see the target, or when speed is needed, the responsibility of target identification and engagement is relinquished to the gunner.

Contents Section I – Target Determination ............. 7-1 Threat Levels ...................................... 7-2 Target Prioritization............................. 7-2 Weapon/Ammunition Selection ........... 7-3 Target Confirmation ............................ 7-4 Section II – Immediate Range Determination ............................................ 7-5 Immediate Determination .................... 7-5 Laser Range Finder ............................ 7-5

Section III – Deliberate Range Determination .......................................... 7-11 Mil Relationship Method .................... 7-11 Maps/Digital Maps Method................ 7-17

SECTION I – TARGET DETERMINATION 7-1. There are three target threat levels to defeat multiple targets on the battlefield; the most dangerous targets must be engaged first. Commanders determine target threat levels based on threat analysis of the mission area. All soldiers must know the engagement priorities of their unit; however, the VC is responsible for determining the immediate target threat level based on the threat posture when time is available. When time is not available, however, the responsibility falls on the gunner.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

7-1

Chapter 7

Figure 7-1. Engagement process (decide)

THREAT LEVELS 7-2. The threat levels are most dangerous, dangerous, and least dangerous. z Most Dangerous. When the crew observes a target with armor-defeating capabilities that appears to be preparing to engage them, the target threat level is most dangerous. This type of target is the greatest threat and must be engaged immediately. z Dangerous. When the crew observes an armor-defeating target that is not preparing to engage them, the target threat level is dangerous. This type of target should be engaged after all most dangerous targets have been destroyed. z Least Dangerous. When the crew observes a target that does not have an armor-defeating weapon system, the target threat level is least dangerous. Although these types of targets do not have the means to destroy your vehicle, they may still have the capability to call in other equipment that can. This type of target is engaged after all most dangerous and dangerous targets have been destroyed, unless it has a high priority of engagement (command and control vehicles).

TARGET PRIORITIZATION 7-3. When multiple targets of the same threat level are encountered, the targets must be prioritized according to the threat they represent. The determining factors used to prioritize these targets are engage— z Close-range targets before engaging long-range targets. z Stationary targets before engaging moving targets. z Frontal targets before engaging flank or rear targets.

7-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Decide

7-4. Crews must be well versed in the threats armament and maximum effective range in order to classify targets accurately and engage in the most efficient manner. A dismount with a rocket-propelled grenade (RPG) or a technical truck with antitank guided missiles (AGTM) are extremely dangerous targets for all vehicle platforms within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT), including the Abrams.

WEAPON/AMMUNITION SELECTION Note. If the platform detecting a target is incapable of destroying it or rules of engagement preclude using the only available effective weapon, crews must report the target immediately so other military options/weapons systems can be brought to bear. 7-5. Weapon/ammunition selection is the logical selection of a weapon or ammunition that is appropriate for a given target (see Table 7-1). In selecting weapon and ammunition type to utilize against targets, the crew must determine the threat type and range. When selecting weapons a key consideration is choosing the weapon that will achieve target effect with minimal collateral damage in urban environments. Crews must also consider their proximity to other friendly forces. Table 7-1. Ammunition/weapon selection Weapon

Range (meters)

Target Type

M249 (5.56mm)

0 to 900

Troop

0 to 600

Unarmored

0 to 900

Troop

0 to 900

Light Armored¹

0 to 900

Unarmored

0 to 1,800

Troop

0 to 1,500

Unarmored

M240 (7.62mm)

M2 (.50 cal)

MK19 (40mm)

25mm

120mm

AT-4

3 September 2009

Arming Range(s)

0 to 1,500

Light Armored

0 to 800

Aerial

40 to 2,212

Troop

18 to 36 (HE)

40 to 1,500

Unarmored

18 to 30 (HEDP)

40 to 1,500

Light Armored

0 to 3,000

Troop

0 to 3,000

Unarmored

0 to 2,000

Light Armored²

0 to 1,200

Aerial (HE)

1,200 to 2,000

Aerial (AP)

150 to 500

Troop³

11 to 30 (HEAT)

200 to 5,000

Troop

15 to 60 (OR)

200 to 5,000

Unarmored

15 to 60 (MPAT)

200 to 5,000

Light Armored

200 to 5,000

Aerial (MPAT)

200 to 5,000

Armored (SABOT)

0 to 300

Unarmored

10 to 300

Light Armored

10 to 300

Armored

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

10 to 200 (HEI-T)

7-3

Chapter 7

Table 7-1. Ammunition/weapon selection (continued) Weapon Javelin TOW

Range (meters)

Target Type

Arming Range(s)

65 to 2,000

Light Armored

65

65 to 2,000

Armored

65 to 3,000

Light Armored

30 to 65 (TOW)

65 to 3,000

Armored

110 to 200 (TOW-2B)

2000 to 3,000

Aerial

43 to 65 (TOW-BB)

65 to 3,750

Light Armored (TOW-2)

65 to 3,750

Armored (TOW-2)

2000 to 3,750

Aerial (TOW-2)

110 to 4,500

Light Armored (TOW-2B Aero)

200 to 4,500

Armored (TOW-2B Aero)

2000 to 4,500

Aerial (TOW-2B Aero)

Notes. 1. Should only be used for light armored vehicles when using antipersonnel (AP), armor-piercing incendiary (API), or saboted light armor penetrator (SLAP) ammunition. 2. AP should be used while engaging light armored vehicles with 25-mm ammunition. 3. When engaging troops with M1028.

TARGET CONFIRMATION 7-6. Target confirmation is the rapid verification of the initial identification and discrimination of the target, and is usually done by the VC. Confirmation takes place after the fire command, but before the command of execution element and simultaneously as the gunner is completing his initial lay. Gunners also go through a confirmation step. As the gunner makes his final, precise lay, he ensures that the target is hostile before announcing “IDENTIFIED.” 7-7. If the gunner confirms that the target is hostile, he completes his final lay and engages the target on order. If the gunner determines that the target is friendly or neutral, he announces his confirmation to the VC (“FRIENDLY” or “NEUTRAL”). If he cannot determine the nature of the target, he announces “UNKNOWN.” The VC then confirms the target is in the gunner’s field of view and conducts the combat identification process again. If the commander cannot establish positive identification, he must either close on the target, let the target close on him, or use other methods to establish positive identification of the target, before beginning engagement execution.

WARNING To prevent fratricide a crew should never engage a potential target unless it is positively identified to be a threat target.

7-8. The VC must be informed of the tactical situation to assist in target confirmation. This can be achieved through battlefield situation awareness from subordinates and higher elements or by other technological elements such as Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) or Blue Force Tracker). The M2/M3A2 Operation Desert Storm (ODS) appliques and the M2/M3A3’s Squad Leader’s Display (SLD) provide battlefield awareness for the crew.

7-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Decide

SECTION II – IMMEDIATE RANGE DETERMINATION

IMMEDIATE DETERMINATION 7-9. Range determination significantly affects target engagement. Errors in range determination cause more first round misses than errors in deflection. Range errors that cause the first round to go over the target are particularly serious because observing and adjusting from that round is difficult. Range determination can be broken down into two broad categories: immediate range determination and deliberate range determination. 7-10. Immediate methods of range determination afford the combat crew the most reliable means of the range to a given target. The preferred method of immediate determination is the laser range finder (LRF) or Bradley eye safe laser range finder (BELRF) on those vehicles so equipped. The other methods of immediate range determination all rely on crew members employing the properties of the sighting systems of their vehicles, and are preferred to other methods of range determination/estimation. Below are the immediate range determination methods.

LASER RANGE FINDER 7-11. With the Abrams, the preferred method of range determination is the LRF/ELRF. The LRF can range to targets located 200 to 7,990 meters from its location. If the range to the target is between 200 meters and 3,990 +/- 10 meters (4,990 +/- 10 meters on the M1A2 System Enhancement Program [SEP]) the range is automatically induced into the fire control system to calculate a ballistic solution and the range will appear in the gunner’s primary sight (GPS) symbology. 7-12. In a Bradley, the LRF/BELRF can range to targets located from 200 to 9,990 meters in five meter increments to an accuracy of +/- 10 meters. If the range to the target is between 190 to 3,000 meters, the range is automatically induced into the fire control system for a ballistic solution. 7-13. The Long-Range Advanced Scout Surveillance System (LRAS3) is a long-range multi-sensor system for the scout High Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV) platform. It is normally vehicle mounted but is capable of operating dismounted on a tripod. The LRAS3 provides precise target location through incorporation of advanced second generation forward-looking infrared (FLIR), a global positioning interferometer, an ELRF and a television camera. The system is capable of spotting targets up to 15 km away and can calculate ranges to within +/- 5 meters. As with the Bradley’s reticle lead lines, the LRAS3 can use its narrow field of view (NFOV) reticle to determine ranges to targets using the milrelation formula (see Figure 7-2). Remember, the target’s dimensions must be known to estimate the range (see Table 7-4). By using the reticle in the wide field of view (WFOV), operators can use the reticle relationship method, to determine the range (see Figure 7-3). 7-14. Using an AN/GVS-5, the crew member can quickly and accurately determine the range for the gunner. The AN/GVS-5 is organic to the scout platoon. It is a light weight, hand held, binocular-like LRF capable of determining ranges between 200 and 9,990 meters (+/-10 meters).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

7-5

Chapter 7

Figure 7-2. LRAS3 NFOV reticle

Figure 7-3. LRAS3 WFOV reticle indicators 7-15. The following various conditions can cause effective use of the LRF to be lost: z Internal LRF failure. z Vehicle failure. z Environmental conditions (fog, falling snow, heavy rain). z Man-made or battlefield obscurants (smoke). z Multiple returns from a target smaller than the LRF beam width and obstructions to the front and/or rear of the target. 7-16. All gunners, VCs, and operators must be familiar with all of the range determination tools that their system offers them to cope with loss of effective use of the LRF.

ABRAM’S GUNNER’S AUXILIARY SIGHT 7-17. The gunner’s auxiliary sight (GAS) is an articulated telescope, coaxially mounted to the main gun. The M1A1 and M1A2 SEP include illuminated ballistic reticles for kinetic energy (KE)/STAFF and multipurpose tank (MPAT)/high-explosive antitank (HEAT) ammunition. The GAS offers 8X magnification with an 8-degree field of view. It is filtered to protect the gunner’s vision from laser reflections.

7-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Decide

BRADLEY AUXILIARY SIGHT 7-18. For the Bradley, the backup sight, known as the auxiliary (or aux) sight, is used when the Integrated Sight Unit (ISU)/Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS) is not operational or turret power has failed. The auxiliary sight has stadia lines for range determination and application of the correct superelevation based on range. There are stadia lines for armor-piercing discarding sabot with tracer (APDS-T) and high-explosive incendiary with tracer (HEI-T) ammunition. This system is used to determine the range and to engage the frontal or flank view of a BMP. z The auxiliary sight has two range scales. The high-explosive (HE) scale is on the left side of the reticle and is represented by broken lines that extend to 3,200 meters. The antipersonnel (AP) scale is on the right side represented by a solid line that extends to 3,400 meters (see Figure 74). The numbers 4 and 6 represent 400 meters and 600 meters, respectively. The HE range scale continues to 32 (not shown in figure). z The range to a flank target is determined by elevating the gun until both the front and rear of the target appears to be touching the AP stadia lines, as shown in Figure 7-4. The range to a flank HE target is choked in the same manner, using the HE lines. z To determine the range to a frontal target, the gunner uses the half stadia method of aligning the center vertical ranging lines with one side of the target and aligns the appropriate ammunition stadia line on either side of the target (see Figure 7-5). When using the coax, the gunner uses the HE stadia lines.

Figure 7-4. Bradley Stadia reticle on flank target

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

7-7

Chapter 7

Figure 7-5. Bradley Stadia reticle on frontal target

ABRAM’S GUNNER’S AUXILIARY SIGHT STADIA RETICLE 7-19. On the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP, the stadia reticle pattern is included on both GAS reticles. If the LRF is inoperative, the stadia reticle may be used to determine the range to a target. The pattern has a base line and a series of range lines for full-height targets, and a series of dots for ranging at a target in hull defilade. The GAS stadia reticle is designed to permit gunners to determine range to the target if other, more precise, ranging methods are not available. The full-size portion of the reticle is designed for a 2.30-meter-high target (see Figure 7-6), while the turret portion is for a 0.90-meter-high target (see Figure 7-7). With practice, gunners using the stadia reticle can consistently determine the range to within 100 meters.

Figure 7-6. Abram’s Stadia reticle with full target

7-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Decide

Figure 7-7. Abram’s Stadia reticle, defilade target

BRADLEY ISU STADIA RETICLE 7-20. For the Bradley, the ISU Horizontal Ranging Stadia (Choke Sight) is used. This range determination method should be used only when firing from a defensive position. z The reticle within the ISU has a choke sight used to estimate the range to BMP-type targets. The choke sight is used for a 1.8-meter-high target. Since the hull of a BMP is a standard hull that is used on various vehicles throughout the world, the ranging stadia can be used for accurately ranging to these different vehicles (see Figure 7-8). z To use the choke sight, the gunner moves the turret until the ranging stadia line appear to touch the vehicle in the following manner: „ Align the horizontal line to the bottom (track) of the target vehicle. „ Move the turret horizontally along the target until the top of the hull appears to touch the stadia line. The range is read from the stadia line at the point where the top of the hull touches. If this point is between the tick marks, estimation must be made, and the range is then indexed into the ISU. Then, the gunner or commander should relay the reticle on the target. z The choke sight can be used to range to targets in turret-down positions. A technique in ranging to a hull down target is to choke the target. The gunner aligns the bottom horizontal line to the bottom of the target and aligns the stadia line until the top of the target appears to touch the lines (see Figure 7-9). The gunner reads this range and divides that number in half. This technique is less accurate than ranging a fully exposed target.

Note. Choke only the hull, not the whole vehicle. Do not choke weapons or lights mounted on top of the turret.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

7-9

Chapter 7

Figure 7-8. Integrated Sight Unit choke (full target)

Figure 7-9. Integrated Sight Unit choke (defilade target)

RECOGNITION METHOD 7-21. With practice, range determination by recognition is quick and accurate; however, this method will not work with passive or thermal sights. The principle of the recognition method is simple. When the VC sees a target, he can determine the range according to what he recognizes. For example, if a target can be recognized as a tank with the unaided eye, it is within 1,500 meters; if a target can be recognized as a tank through magnifying optics (such as GAS and binoculars), it is within 5,000 meters (see Table 7-2). Table 7-3 gives range estimations for targets as seen with the unaided eye and through magnifying optics (binoculars).

7-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Decide

Table 7-2. Recognition method Range Determination

Recognition Method

Target

Unaided Eye

Magnification 8 Power

Tank crew, troops, machine gun, mortar, antitank gun, antitank missile launchers

500m

2,000m

Tank, personnel carrier, truck (by model)

1,000m

4,000m

Tank, howitzer, personnel carrier, truck

1,500m

5,000m

Armor vehicle, wheel vehicle

2,000m

6,000m

7-22. When using the recognition method, the size and clarity of the target in relation to its background must be considered. Some light and terrain conditions make a target seem closer; other conditions make it seem farther away. The conditions outlined in the following table may cause an error in estimating range by the recognition method. Table 7-3. Effect of target conditions on range estimation Target Conditions Seems Closer:

Seems Farther:

Bright, clear day Large targets At sea Sun in front of target Targets at higher elevations Bright colors white, red, yellow

Fog, rain, haze, twilight Camouflaged targets Sun behind target Small targets Targets at lower elevations Dark colors

Contrast Desert Looking across ravines, hollows, rivers, depressions

100-METER UNIT-OF-MEASURE METHOD 7-23. To use this method, the VC or gunner must be able to visualize a distance of 100 meters on the ground. For ranges up to 500 meters, he estimates the number of 100-meter increments between the two objects he wishes to measure. Beyond 500 meters, the VC or gunner must select a point halfway to the object(s), determine the number of 100-meter increments to the halfway point, and then double it to find the range to the object(s).

SECTION III – DELIBERATE RANGE DETERMINATION

MIL RELATIONSHIP METHOD 7-24. The mil relationship method may be used in deliberate range determination. When using the mil relation method the crew must use binoculars or a sight system with a calibrated mil-scale to measure the target. 7-25. The basis of the mil relation method is that one mil or equals a width (or height) of 1 meter at a range of 1,000 meters or in a unit of angular measurement, equal to 1/6,400 of a circle or about 17.79 (17.8) degrees. The relationship of the angle, the length of the sides of the angle (range), and the width (height) between the sides remains constant. Figure 7-10 shows the constant relationship as the angle increases from 1 to 2 mils and the range increases from 1,000 to 2,000 meters.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

7-11

Chapter 7

7-26. Standard Army measurements are completed and expressed in the metric system. Other units of measurement (yards, feet, or inches) may be substituted to express the target size or range; however, all information must be expressed in the same unit of measure.

Figure 7-10. Constant mil-angle relationship 7-27. To use this method, the crew member must know the width, height, and length of the target. He determines the known dimension with the binoculars’ mil scale or a non-ballistic sight reticle, substitutes the mil relation, and computes the range (see Table 7-4). When measuring the frontal width, he measures only the vehicle’s front slope (from left front corner to right front corner). When measuring flank width, he measures the entire vehicle (see Figure 7-11). Accuracy of this method depends on knowing the target dimensions and the commander’s ability to make precise measurements with binoculars or the sight reticle. 7-28. Using Table 7-4 and by achieving proper vehicle identification, a crew member can properly determine the standard mil size of the vehicle. This can then be utilized into the calculation of the mil relationship method of range determination. Figure 7-11 through Figure 7-16 show the frontal and flank view of a BMP-2 and where the information in the table applies.

7-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Decide

Table 7-4. Mil relation for various targets BMP-2 Target width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 6.75 meters

140 0

1500

1700

1900

2300

2700

3400

4500

6800

Front 3.0 meters

600

700

800

900

1000

1200

1500

2000

3000

Height 2.3 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 5.5 meters

1100

1200

1400

1600

1800

2200

2800

3700

5500

Front 2.35 meters

500

500

600

700

800

1000

1200

1600

2400

Height 2.3 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

Target width (mils)

22.5

20

17.5

15

12.5

10

7.5

5

2.5

Flank 17.01 meters

800

900

1000

1100

1400

1700

2300

3400

6804

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Front 4.81 meters

1000

1100

1200

1400

1600

1900

2400

3200

4800

Height 3.82 meters

800

800

1000

1100

1300

1500

1900

2500

3800

BRDM-2 Target width (mils)

Mi-28 HAVOK

Mi-24 HIND-D Target width (mils)

22.5

20

17.5

15

12.5

10

7.5

5

2.5

Flank 17.25 meters

800

900

1000

1200

1400

1700

2300

3500

6900

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Height 3.9 meters

800

900

1000

1100

1300

1600

2000

2600

3900

Front 6.9 meters

1400

1500

1700

2000

2300

2800

3500

4600

6900

T-72 Target width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 6.7 meters

1300

1500

1700

1900

2200

2700

3400

4500

6700

Front 3.4 meters

700

800

900

1000

1100

1400

1700

2300

3400

Height 2.3 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

T-80 Target width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 7.0 meters

1400

1600

1800

2000

2300

2800

3500

4700

7000

Front 3.6 meters

700

800

900

1000

1100

1400

1700

2300

3400

Height 2.2 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 6.9 meters

1400

1500

1700

2000

2300

2800

3500

4600

6900

Front 3.8 meters

800

900

1000

1100

1300

1500

1900

2500

3800

Height 2.2 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

T-90 Target width (mils)

Note. This table is a quick reference for determining the range of widely sold vehicles at various ranges. The ranges have been rounded-off to the nearest hundredth.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

7-13

Chapter 7

Figure 7-11. Frontal BMP-2 dimensions

Figure 7-12. Flank BMP-2 dimensions

Figure 7-13. Frontal Mi-24 Hind-D dimensions

7-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Decide

Figure 7-14. Flank Mi-24 Hind-D dimensions

Figure 7-15. Frontal T-72 dimensions

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

7-15

Chapter 7

Figure 7-16. Flank T-72 dimensions 7-29. Since the relationship of the target width in mils (  and meters (W) is constant at varying distances, accurate range determination is possible. The mil relation holds true whether the W factor is width, height, or length. Therefore, the range can be determined provided the target dimensions are known. Target height may be the most consistent measurement, because length and width are changing as targets move on the battlefield. 7-30. There are two WORM formulas beneficial to crew members that can be used to determine information about an object or target. The crew member determining range will be required to decide which formula will be used based on known information gathered. z The first formula should be used to determine range. This formula will need both the width and mil value of the vehicle (see Figure 7-17).

Figure 7-17. Measuring width with binoculars

7-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Decide

*Example: STEP 1: The BMP is 6.75 meters long (W). Using binoculars, the commander determines that the BMP measures 10 mils in length. STEP 2: The individual determining range substitutes known information into the formula.

or STEP 3: Since R is expressed in thousands of meters, multiply by 1,000; and round off to the nearest tenth. For example: 0.675=0.7 so 0.7 x 1,000 = 700 meters, the range to the BMP. z

The second formula is used to determine the width (width, length, height) of an object. This is important to determine the width of a bridge, for example, that has not been previously identified. The formula carries the same basic concept as the first formula for determining range. The operator will need to know the range to the target and the mil size.

Example: STEP 1: The gunner has determined that the range to a bridge is 1,200 meters. The VC, looking through his binos, determined the mil value to be 2.5 mils. STEP 2: The individual determining range substitutes known information into the formula.

or

MAPS/DIGITAL MAPS METHOD 7-31. The vehicle crew must have a map to navigate. They must constantly know where they are and where they are going. (The ANPSN 11 precision lightweight GPS receiver [PLGR] or any other navigational system will not eliminate the need for maps.) The vehicle crew can also use the map to determine range. Besides computing distances on a traditional map, special features on the FBCB2 allow the crew to plot points on the digital map and find the distance between them. A map also allows them to determine the best battlecarry range setting for the terrain and enemy situation and to adjust the battlecarry range when the situation changes. z Both in offense and defense, the vehicle crew must continually assess likely enemy locations, engagement areas, and engagement ranges. This information gives the vehicle crew the capability to rapidly determine range when contact is made. z Target reference points (TRP) are used as both direct and indirect fire control measures. These are entered in the sector sketch for the VC to control his fires and ensure that his reports of enemy sightings are accurate. Since the range to each TRP is known, this will assist in range determination.

KNOWN RANGE (RANGE/SKETCH CARDS) 7-32. The primary use of the range or sketch card is to assist the crew in engaging targets during limited visibility or when effective use of the LRF has been lost. The VC may also use the range or sketch card to assist in determining range since range data is recorded on the card. The range to a previous target engagement is also classified as a known range.

31 May 2010

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

7-17

Chapter 7

ADJACENT VEHICLE 7-33. Range information can be obtained from an adjacent vehicle that has an operable LRF. If the vehicle providing the range data is relatively close (lateral distance) to the receiving vehicle, then it will be at the same range from the target.

FLASH-TO-BANG 7-34. Sound travels through the air at a fairly constant speed, about 330 meters (approximately 1,100 feet) per second. This makes it easy to estimate range if you can see and hear the action. For example, when you see the flash or smoke of a weapon, or the dust it raises, immediately start counting at a rate of one count per second. When you hear the report of the weapon, stop and multiply the number you were counting when you heard the report by the constant 330. This will be the range to the weapon in meters. If you stop on the number 3, the range is about 990 meters. 7-35. Practice timing the speed of your count. The best way to do this is to practice with pyrotechnics fired at known distances. If this is not possible, have someone time you while you count; start over when the count reaches a number higher than 10. Counting numbers such as 12 and 13 will throw your timing off. With practice, you can estimate range more accurately with this method than by eye alone.

7-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Chapter 8

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew) Crews must be able to engage multiple targets rapidly while operating within irregular battle lines. Depending on the tactical situation and the area of operations, enemy targets may be intermingled with friendly, coalition, and neutral vehicles and personnel. Crews must be proficient in the techniques and procedures for detecting and identifying potential targets; making engagement decisions; executing and assessing engagements against hostile targets, and employing fire commands to orchestrate the engagement process. Chapter 8 discusses the elements of the fire command and how to use fire commands on Abrams, Bradley, and armed vehicles during the engagement process (see Figure 8-1). In Chapter 8, the use of the term “main gun” is used to describe the 120mm main gun of the Abrams series of vehicles and the 25mm gun of the Bradley series, respectively. The fourth step in the engagement process is execution. Once a target has been detected, identified, and the decision to engage has been made, the crew uses the weapons on their platform or at their disposal to eliminate the threat rapidly and decisively. The key processes in engagement execution are— z Selecting a method of engagement. „ Precision. „ Degraded. z Initiating the engagement with a fire command. z Employing proper gunnery techniques. In order for crews to take advantage of the various vehicles’ weapon systems to quickly lay, engage, and destroy threat targets, crews must be proficient in the methods and techniques of engagement execution. While some of these methods and techniques will be common between platforms, most are heavily influenced by the capabilities and limitations particular to each platform. The available weapon systems to a crew also include indirect fire systems, so crews should be proficient in calling for artillery and mortar fires. This section is divided into the following discussion elements: z Common elements of crew fire commands. z The engagement process specific to the Abrams vehicle platforms. z The engagement process specific to the Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) platforms. z The engagement process specific to the armed High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV). z Calling for indirect fires.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-1

Chapter 8

Contents Section I – Battlecarry ............................... 8-2 Prepare for Contact............................. 8-2 Section II – Fire Commands ..................... 8-8 Fire Commands Categories .............. 8-17 Fire Command Terms ....................... 8-22 Subsequent Fire Commands ............ 8-26 Multiple Engagements ...................... 8-29

Section III – Engagement Techniques ... 8-32 Employing Vehicle Machine Guns ..... 8-33 Engage Soft Targets ......................... 8-33 Section IV – Sample Fire Commands..... 8-43 Section V – Indirect Fire .......................... 8-65 Call for Fire........................................ 8-65 Adjusting Fires .................................. 8-74

Figure 8-1. Engagement process (engage)

SECTION I – BATTLECARRY 8-1. Each platform, whether firing precision or degraded gunnery methods, moves into a hostile environment prepared to engage threats immediately. Prior to movement, the vehicle commander (VC) will place the weapon systems on his vehicle in a “red” status, herein called “battlecarry”. This section discusses the battlecarry process and ways of determining an appropriate battlesight range.

PREPARE FOR CONTACT 8-2. Battlecarry is a posture in which a vehicle is prepared for an engagement at all times and ensures— z The main gun or primary weapon system is loaded with the designated ammunition type. z The fire control system is set to fire the selected ammunition type (Abrams and Bradley). z A predetermined battlesight range has been applied to the system (Abrams and Bradley).

8-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

8-3. The crew will place their vehicle in a battlecarry posture before moving into a tactical situation or upon command from an approving authority. All engagements begin from this posture (see Figure 8-2). The crew duties to place a vehicle into a battlecarry posture are— z VC. Announces “BATTLECARRY,” followed by the type of ammunition he wants battlecarried (for example, “BATTLECARRY HEAT”, or “BATTLECARRY HE”) and Battlesight Range. z Gunner. Sets up the fire control system for the ammunition called for— „ Ensures weapon select is placed in electrical safe. „ Abrams – TRIGGER SAFE. „ Bradley – Rounds are loaded into the feeder, ghost rounds is cycled, mechanical Safe on FIRE, and electrical Safe on SAFE. „ Truck – weapon on mechanical safe unless VC directs otherwise. „ Indexes the ammunition type and announces that it is indexed and battlesight range (for example, “HEAT INDEXED, RANGE 900”). „ Ensures the correct battlesight range is entered in the computer for the ammunition specified. „ Selects the proper auxiliary sight reticle and applies the proper sight correction factor, if applicable. „ Ensures the laser range finder (LRF)/eyesafe laser range finder (ELRF) is set in FIRST or LAST RETURN logic, based on the tactical situation. „ Announces “GUNNER READY” to inform the VC that all actions have been completed. z Driver. Ensures his station is ready for operation and he is ready to scan his sector and— „ Checks the driver’s instrument panel for caution/warning lights. „ Ensures night vision devices are prepared or installed as necessary and a power source with back-up is available. „ Announces “DRIVER READY,” to inform the VC he is ready for operations. z Loader (Abrams). Loads the ammunition announced by the VC and— „ Ensures the SAFE/ARMED lever is in the SAFE position and the white SAFE light is illuminated. „ Loads the main gun round. „ Checks ammunition ready rack for subsequent round availability. „ Ensures the recoil path of the main gun is clear. „ Ensures the ready ammunition door is closed. „ Announces “HEAT LOADED, MAIN GUN SAFE, LOADER READY,” to inform the VC that all actions have been completed.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-3

Chapter 8

Figure 8-2. Battlecarry command

BATTLESIGHT RANGE 8-4. Battlesight range is a range applied only to vehicles with a fire control system (see Figure 8-3). The purpose of the battlesight range is to provide a standard range to target for the ballistic computer for emergency situations that require firing without lasing. 8-5. Vehicles without a fire control system may use a traverse and elevation (T&E) mechanism to ensure rounds do not fire beyond the engagement area. Use of the T&E mechanisms as a range control measure should be limited to rural or desert environments only. Use of the T&E mechanism in urban environments may limit the ability of gunners to engage targets on upper floors or rooftops of buildings in the engagement area.

8-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-3. Concept of battlesight

DETERMINING BATTLESIGHT RANGE 8-6. The unit commander may choose (based on mission, enemy, terrain (weather), troops and support available, time available, and civil considerations [METT-TC]) from a variety of range and ammunition combinations for his unit’s battlesight range. The battlesight range is only used on vehicles with a fire control system. 8-7. If the primary threat (most likely target to be engaged) is armored vehicles, Sabot/armor piercing (AP) is the most appropriate ammunition; otherwise, high-explosive antitank (HEAT), multipurpose antitank (MPAT) or high explosive (HE) is usually preferred, respectively. In counterinsurgent operations, however, canister/HE may be the most appropriate ammunition to battlecarry. 8-8. The typical range settings by weapon system are shown in Table 8-1. Table 8-1. Range settings by weapon system Ammunition

Abrams

Bradley

Sabot/AP

1,200 meters

1,200 meters

HEAT/HE

900 meters

1,000 meters

MPAT

900 meters

Canister

300 meters

Coax(7.62 mm)

600 meters

Caliber .50

600 meters

ASV

600 meters

MK19

600 meters 600 meters

8-9. Factors for selecting another battlesight setting include weather, smoke, range, or other conditions that reduce visibility. The battlesight range should be based on the commander’s analysis of METT-TC. Although these are the standard battlesight ranges, commanders should adjust them accordingly and issue them in the operations order or warning order (see Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-5

Chapter 8

Ammunition Battlesight Range Nomenclature 800 1000 M829A1 APFSDS-T

1200 1400 1600 1800 800 1000

M829A2 APFSDS-T

1200 1400 1600 1800 800 1000

M829A3 APFSDS-T

1200 1400 1600 1800 800 1000

M791 APDS-T

1200 1400 1600 1800 800 1000

M919 APFSDS-T

1200 1400 1600 1800

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

Kill Zone 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 0 to 1150 meters 0 to 1250 meters 0 to 1350 meters 0 to 1450 meters 850 to 1650 meters 1050 to 1950 meters 0 to 1200 meters 0 to 1300 meters 0 to 1400 meters 0 to 1500 meters 800 to 1600 meters 1000 to 1900 meters 0 to 1200 meters 0 to 1300 meters 0 to 1400 meters 0 to 1500 meters 800 to 1600 meters 1000 to 1900 meters 0 to 900 meters 0 to 1100 meters 0 to 1400 meters 1100 to 1600 meters 1350 to 1750 meters 1600 to 1950 meters 0 to 900 meters 0 to 1100 meters 0 to 1400 meters 1050 to 1600 meters 1350 to 1750 meters 1550 to 1950 meters

Figure 8-4. Battlesight range examples, APFSDS, and AP rounds

8-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Ammunition Battlesight Range Nomenclature

200

800

1400

700

800

900

Kill Zone 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400

1200 to 1600 meters 1400 to 1600 meters 1600 to 2000 meters

800

0 to 1000 meters

1000

0 to 1100 meters

1200

0 to 1300 meters

1400

1200 to 1600 meters

1600

1400 to 1600 meters

1800

1600 to 2000 meters

800

0 to 900 meters

1000

0 to 1000 meters

1200

1000 to 1400 meters

1400

1200 to 1600 meters

1600

1400 to 1600 meters

1800

1600 to 2000 meters

800

0 to 950 meters

1000 M792 HEI-T

600

1000 to 1400 meters

1800

M908 HE-OR-T

500

0 to 1000 meters

1200

1600

M830A1 HEAT-MP-T

400

0 to 900 meters

1000 M830 HEAT-MP-T

300

850 to 1100 meters

1200

1100 to 1250 meters

1400

1350 to 1450 meters

1600

1550 to 1650 meters

1800

1750 to 1850 meters

Figure 8-5. Battlesight range examples, chemical energy rounds 8-10. Use the following method to determine battlesight range (see Table 8-2): z Step 1. Determine what the expected target is. z Step 2. Divide the expected known height of the target by two. z Step 3. Determine the ammunition to be fired. z Step 4. See firing table (FT) 120-D-2 or FT 25-A-2 and use the maximum ordinate of the ammunition to be fired. z Step 5. Locate the answer to step 2 in the maximum ordinate column. The battlesight range will be listed in column 1 or 11 (range). Note. If the exact number cannot be found in the maximum ordinate column, round down to ensure the projectile does not go over the target at the range to the maximum ordinate.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-7

Chapter 8

Table 8-2. Battlesight range determination example Battlesight Range Determination Example Step 1

Determine what the expected target is.

Step 2

Divide the expected known height of the target by two. This determines the distance from the aiming point (center of visible mass) to the top of the target. If the round flies above this number during its trajectory to the target, it could miss the target.

Step 3

Determine the ammunition to be fired.

Step 4

Use appropriate firing tables (FT) to find the maximum ordinate of the ammunition to be fired

FT 120-D-2 (Abrams)

Step 5

Locate the Answer to step 2 in the maximum ordinate (MAX ORD) column. This ensures the round at the given range will not go over the target when firing in an emergency.

900 meters

Battlesight Range = The battlesight range has the highest probability of hitting and killing a targets between the firing vehicle and 200 meters beyond the battlesight range.

BMP

2.3 Divided by 2 = 1.15m

M830 (Abrams)

900 meters

SECTION II – FIRE COMMANDS 8-11. All direct-fire engagements begin with a fire command. The fire command coordinates the crew’s effort, reduces confusion, and helps the crew engage targets faster. Initial fire commands alert the crew to initiate actions. Subsequent fire commands direct the fires of the selected weapon when the desired effect from the initial fire command has not been achieved. There are seven elements to a standard fire command. Fire commands will vary in form, but must include those elements necessary to alert the crew; select the weapon/ammunition; determine the target description, direction, and range/elevation; execution; and termination. 8-12. The VC issues a fire command to his crew for each target engagement. Standard terminology and logical sequence are used to achieve effectiveness and speed of engagement. Only those elements necessary to load, aim, and fire the crew’s weapons accurately and effectively are given, as well as the termination command for the engagement. 8-13. VC’s may use as little as three or as many as seven elements of the fire command, depending on the situation. Once a VC determines to eliminate the threat target with direct fire, the VC initiates the engagement with a fire command. Each type of vehicle uses all of the standard fire command elements and terms; however, on vehicles equipped with a fire control system, the operational components of that system may allow the commander to omit certain elements. The VC may have to include certain elements of the standard fire command in order to compensate for fire control system shortcomings or failure. Table 8-3 shows the sequence and terminology used in a fire command.

8-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Table 8-3. Elements of a standard fire command Element

Example

Remarks

Alert

“GUNNER”

Alerts the entire crew that someone in the crew will be firing an engagement using the primary weapon, main gun or coax. Vehicles with only one primary firer may omit this element. It must be used when an alternate firer is directed to engage (loader, rear bank).

Weapon or Ammunition

“SABOT”

Identifies the ammunition to fire, requiring the gunner to ensure the ammunition is properly indexed, and the loader (Abrams) what to load after the initial round is fired. Vehicles mounting single weapons (caliber .50 only) may omit this element.

Description

“PC”

A clear and concise target description for the firer to identify. VC’s must use modifiers when multiple targets are presented.

Direction

“TRAVERSE RIGHT – STEADY – ON”

This is required when the VC cannot lay the gun for direction (such as VC does not have the capability to move the turret to the target’s general direction).

Range or Elevation

“ONE-FOUR-HUNDRED”

This is required when the firing platform’s fire control system does not provide the accurate range to target.

Execution

“FIRE”

The VC is the ONLY crew member authorized to issue the command of execution. This cannot be delegated to the gunner.

Termination

“CEASE FIRE”

ANY member of the crew can terminate an engagement.

ALERT 8-14. The first element of the fire command is the ALERT. All fire commands begin with an alert to the crew. Although a contact report can be considered an alert, only the VC or Gunner can give the alert element. Table 8-4 describes the proper alerts given to the crew.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-9

Chapter 8

Table 8-4. Alert examples Alert

Description

“CONTACT”

Any member of the crew announces “Contact” when identifying a threat to their own vehicle, crew, or squad by one or more of the forms of contact that effect the rules of engagement (ROE); visual, physical (direct fire), or aircraft. Only the VC and gunner may announce “CONTACT” as part of the fire command, however. Note. On the Abrams, the alert element of the fire command also informs the loader to arm the main gun for a pending engagement. VC alerts the crew that the gunner will be firing. VC alerts the crew that the loader will be firing the M240 machine gun (Abrams). VC alerts the crew and squad that the squad will be engaging a target (when working with a dismounted squad). VC alerts the crew that the squad will be firing from the rear bank using the port firing weapons (Bradley). VC alerts the crew that he will be firing the caliber .50 machine gun. VC alerts the crew that he will be firing the M240 machine gun. VC alerts the crew that he will be firing the MK19 Mod 3. VC alerts the crew that he will be firing the M249 automatic weapon. VC alerts the crew that he will be engaging a target with the main gun (Abrams). The ammunition type identifies the subsequent ammunition to be loaded and indexed by the crew. On the Abrams, the gunner may also use this alert when the VC has issued the “Fire and Adjust” command of execution when he requires another round. On vehicles where the commander has the ability to override the gunner’s control handles, the VC may issue this alert when he assumes control of the turret and intends to fire himself. Although the sensings are technically a response term, they also act as an alert to the crew. A sensing given by the gunner or VC acts as the alert element when issuing a subsequent fire command or direct fire adjustment. Used rarely, if a target is hit but the desired effect is not achieved, the VC announces “TARGET – REENGAGE”. These two words together act as the alert to the crew that the firer will be firing another round or burst.

“GUNNER” “LOADER” “SQUAD” “REAR BANK” “CALIBER FIFTY” “TWO FORTY” “MARK NINETEEN” “TWO FOUR NINE” “SABOT”

“FROM MY POSITION”

“DOUBTFUL”, “LOST”, “OVER”, “SHORT”

“TARGET – REENGAGE”

Note. Although there are eight forms of contact, generally, the forms of contact that will initiate an escalation of force for the crew are visual contact where friendly forces may or may not have been identified by the threat, physical contact (direct fire or vehicle borne improvised explosive device [VBIED]) with an enemy force, or indirect contact (improvised explosive device [IED]) with an enemy force. The current rules of engagement (ROE) will provide additional guidance or restrictions depending upon the area of operations and unit mission.

8-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

WEAPON/AMMUNITION 8-15. The second element of the fire command is the WEAPON/AMMUNITION. This identifies to the crew which weapon or ammunition type will be fired at the threat during the engagement. Use the terms in Table 8-5 to identify the weapon or ammunition to be fired during an engagement. Table 8-5. Weapon/ammunition element Weapon/Ammunition

Announced As

Armor Piercing rounds (25mm or above)

“SABOT” (pronounced “SAY-BO”)

HEAT or HE rounds

“HEAT” (Abrams) “HE” (Bradley)

120-mm HEAT-MP-T and TPMT-T in ground mode

“MPAT” (pronounced “EM-PAT”)

120-mm HEAT-MP-T and TPMT-T in air mode

“MPAT-AIR”

120-mm HE-OR-T

“OR” (pronounced “OH-ARE”)

120-mm Canister

“CANISTER” or “CAN”

M2 Machine Gun

“CALIBER-FIFTY”

M240/M240C Coaxial Machine Gun

“COAX”

M240 Machine Gun

“TWO-FORTY”

M249 Machine Gun

“TWO-FOUR-NINE”

MK19 Mod 3

“MARK-NINE-TEEN”

TOW

“MISSILE”

Javelin

“MISSILE”

Stinger

“MISSILE”

DESCRIPTION (TARGET DESCRIPTION) 8-16. The third element of the fire command is DESCRIPTION. More appropriately, it is the target description. It is a given in the fire command to identify which target the firer is to engage or in which order (for multiple threats). Most targets can be described by one of the following terms in Table 8-6. Table 8-6. Target descriptions Target

Announced As

Tank or Tank-Like Target Unarmored Vehicle Personnel Carrier (PC) Helicopter Fixed-Wing Aircraft Personnel Sniper RPG Team Machine Gun Emplacement Antitank Gun, Antitank Missile, or Towed Artillery Bunker Other Targets

“TANK” “TRUCK” “PC” “CHOPPER” “PLANE” “TROOPS” “SNIPER” “RPG TEAM” or “RPG” “MACHINE GUN” “ANTITANK” “BUNKER” Use the briefest term possible to clearly describe the target to the firer.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-11

Chapter 8

8-17. Combining terms (“ANTITANK TRUCK”) can identify combination targets, such as truck-mounted antitank guided missile systems. 8-18. If multiple targets present themselves, the VC must identify which one to engage first. For example, “GUNNER – HEAT – STATIONARY AND MOVING TRUCKS – STATIONARY FIRST.” 8-19. For crews with only one weapon system and one possible firer (armed truck, HMMWV, Guardian), the target description can take the place of the ALERT in the fire command when using a reduced fire command.

DIRECTION 8-20. The fourth element of the fire command is given to guide the gunner when the commander cannot lay the weapon for direction from his position (commander’s override, control hand station, or commander’s handle). This element is mandatory for truck crews, on Abrams crews when directing the loader to fire his machine gun, for Bradley crews when directing the rear bank to engage a target, or when handing off a target from VC to gunner using a commander’s independent sight (commander’s independent thermal viewer [CITV]/commander’s independent viewer [CIV]). 8-21. There are six methods of directing the gunner onto the target: z Clock Method. The VC announces the direction as it relates to the target’s location using the hands of a clock. Twelve o’clock is always the orientation of the hull/body of the vehicle. For example, “GUNNER – TROOPS – THREE O’CLOCK.” z Sector or Quadrant Method. The VC announces the quadrant the target is located in respective to his vehicle. For example, “GUNNER –TROOPS – LEFT FRONT.” z Traverse Method. The VC tells the gunner “TRAVERSE LEFT (RIGHT).” The gunner traverses the turret in the direction announced. As the gun tube nears the target, the VC announces “STEADY,” and the gunner slows his traverse in the same direction. When the VC thinks the target is in the gunner’s field of view, he announces “ON.” When the gunner sees the target(s), he announces “IDENTIFIED.” The gunner should use the lowest magnification when using this method to identify potential targets. For example, “TRAVERSE LEFT –TRAVERSE LEFT – STEADY – ON.” The crew may use “SHIFT” rather than “TRAVERSE” for clarity. z Reference Point Method. The reference point must be one that the gunner can see and recognize easily, typically used in a deliberate defense. For example, the VC’s command might be “REFERENCE POINT – BRIDGE – TRAVERSE RIGHT.” The gunner identifies the reference point and traverses right, looking for the target. The TC may have to further define the target description and location. Once the gunner identifies the target, he announces “IDENTIFIED.” Another example of this method is, “TROOPS – TRP 2.” z Designate Method. On vehicles equipped with a commander’s independent thermal viewer, the VC designates the target, announces “DESIGNATE” and pushes the designate button on his control handle, the gunner centers his control handles and look through his primary sight until he identifies the target by announcing “IDENTIFIED.” z Marking Targets with Tracers. This is the least preferred method of directing the gunner onto a target. It can be helpful, however, to suppress the target area with small arms fire while the gunner lays on, identifies, and prepares to engage, depending on the situation. Using a weapon loaded with tracer rounds, to include a ammo mix of 4 ball rounds to 1 tracer round, or 4:1 mix, the VC announces “WATCH MY TRACERS,” and fires at the target area (for example, “GUNNER – HEAT – PC – WATCH MY TRACERS – CALIBER FIFTY.” Notes. For safety purposes on the M1A2 and M2/M3A3 the VC must announce “DESIGNATE” when designating from target to target. VC on the Abrams cannot use the clock method when directing the gunner onto target as there is no internal gun tube orientation indicator in the gunner’s station.

8-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

RANGE OR ELEVATION 8-22. The fifth element of the fire command tells the crew and gunner what range to set on the weapon sight or in the fire control system and/or at what elevation the target is located at. If the vehicle’s LRF is operational, then this element of the fire command is normally omitted. If no LRF is available or is not operational, this element is required. When operating in an urban environment or restricted terrain, using elevation commands will increase the gunner’s ability to rapidly identify targets to engage. 8-23. When the vehicle is equipped with a CITV or CIV, the VC can determine the range to a target independently from the gunner using the CITV or CIV stadia reticle. When the VC designates a target he has choked to the gunner, the choked range is automatically induced into the fire control system to calculate a ballistic solution M1A2, M2A3, and Bradley Fire Support Team (BFIST) vehicles. 8-24. When an accurate range to target cannot be determined using an electronic device (CITV/CIV [M1A2 and M2A3] or LRF), determine range using either the known-range method or the estimated-range method depicted below, as deemed necessary (see range determination information). When the VC wants the gunner to determine the range to the target using the stadia reticle, he will announce “CHOKE” as the range element. z Known-Range Method. By knowing the range to probable target areas prior to engagements, the crew can reduce engagement time and improve accuracy by indexing the known vehicle-totarget range into the computer control panel (CCP) or gunner’s computer display panel (GCDP) on the Abrams series, and the range knob to input the range into the fire control system for Bradley crews. The known range from a previous target engagement or established target reference points (TRP) may also be used. z Estimated-Range Method. To engage targets when an accurate range cannot be determined electronically or is unknown, the VC or gunner must estimate the range to the target. Range data is announced in the fire command in even hundreds or thousands, otherwise digit by digit (see Table 8-7). Examples, if the VC announces— „ “CHOKED – ONE SIX HUNDRED,” the gunner uses the gunner’s primary sight (GPS) and the range designated from the VC (M1A2 SEP only). In this example, the VC determined the range using the CITV stadia reticle. „ “ONE EIGHT HUNDRED,” the gunner shifts to the auxiliary sight and uses the appropriate reticle and range line (Abrams and Bradley crews). For trucks, this estimated range allows the gunner to focus his target acquisition in a certain area from his position. „ “INDEX ONE EIGHT HUNDRED,” the gunner uses the GPS and enters the range into the Future Combat System using the CCP/GCDP/Integrated Sight Unit (ISU)/Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS). „ “GUNNER – SABOT – TANK – CHOKE,” the gunner shifts to the gunner’s auxiliary sight (GAS), selects the appropriate reticle, and uses the choke sight to estimate the range, then repeats the range to the VC. z

Elevation Method. When operating in an urban or restricted environment, targets will present themselves in buildings or higher on terrain features. Their location will require VCs to provide elevation information to the firer. Examples of the elevation method are— „ Floor. VCs state the floor of a building the target is located on. It can be followed by additional information such as the window location of the threat. For example, “GUNNER – COAX – SNIPER – RIGHT FRONT – THIRD FLOOR – SECOND WINDOW FROM LEFT.” „ High low. The VC may use the terms “HIGH” or “LOW” for an elevation description in urban, rural, and restricted terrains. „ Terrain level. When fighting in restricted terrain with rugged, steep hills or mountains, VCs should identify where on the terrain feature the target is located. Figure 8-6 shows these sections that are divided.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-13

Chapter 8

Table 8-7. Range element and sight selection Range

GPS/TIS/ISU/IBAS Announced As

Auxiliary Sight Announced As

840 meters

“INDEX EIGHT HUNDRED”

“EIGHT HUNDRED”

2,000 meters

“INDEX TWO THOUSAND”

“TWO THOUSAND”

1,200 meters

“INDEX ONE TWO HUNDRED”

“ONE TWO HUNDRED”

860 meters

“INDEX NINE HUNDRED”

“NINE HUNDRED”

3,040 meters

“INDEX THREE THOUSAND”

“THREE THOUSAND”

8-25. For example, the VC can announce “TROOPS – RIGHT FRONT – THREE HUNDRED – CHARLIE,” identifying a troop target to the right front at the crest of the hill.

Figure 8-6. Elevation levels Alpha, Bravo, and Charlie example

EXECUTION 8-26. All fire commands must be executed in order for the firer to commence the engagement. The list below describes the authorized commands of execution. The VC is the only crewman authorized to announce a command of execution. The list below describes the authorized commands of execution when issuing a fire command: z “FIRE.” This is the standard command of execution for all weapon systems. z “(FROM MY POSITION), ON THE WAY.” Normally, the gunner will engage all main gun and coax targets; however, if he is unable to identify the desired target or if there is no gunner present, the VC will engage the target using the trigger on his power control handle. If the gunner can identify the target while the VC is engaging from his position, the gunner announces “IDENTIFIED.” The VC can return control of the gun to the gunner or complete the engagement from his position. To maintain overall control and ensure continuous target acquisition, the VC should return control to the gunner immediately after the gunner identifies the target. To return control to the gunner, the VC announces “FIRE.” When the VC engages from his position, he must announce “ON THE WAY” prior to squeezing the trigger just as any other firer would. His announcement of “FROM MY POSITION” alerts the crew that he will be firing the engagement. His announcement of “ON THE WAY” is the command of execution in this instance only.

8-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

z

z

z

“FIRE AND ADJUST.” If the commander cannot assist the gunner (or loader) in adjustment, he announces “FIRE AND ADJUST.” This tells the gunner (or loader) that he will not receive a subsequent fire command and must conduct the engagement on his own. Once this command is given, the firer can continue to engage the target until it is destroyed. If additional threats present themselves, the firer must alert the crew by announcing the weapon he plans to fire and a target description. „ When the gunner identifies additional targets to engage or requires subsequent rounds to destroy the initial target, he announces his sensing and/or new target description. If the same ammunition type is to be used, he announces “ON THE WAY” (after the loader arms the main gun and announces “UP” for Abrams crews). If the target requires a change of ammunition, the gunner announces “SABOT,” “HEAT” or “COAX,” respectively. For example, the VC would initiate the fire command by announcing “GUNNER – HEAT – PC.” The gunner would identify the target by announcing “IDENTIFIED,” (the loader would arm the main gun and announce “UP” for Abrams crews). Then, the VC announces “FIRE AND ADJUST.” The gunner would verify his range, aim center mass, track the target, announce “ON THE WAY,” and squeeze the trigger. The gunner would state the sensing of the round, “TARGET.” Then, if the gunner identifies another confirmed threat target, for instance “Troops,” he announces “COAX – TROOPS,” and prepares to engage. If the VC does not cease fire the engagement, the gunner announces “ON THE WAY” prior to engaging. „ In the event the VC has directed “FIRE AND ADJUST,” to the gunner, particularly on a canister engagement, the gunner may switch between weapon systems by announcing a sensing of his round fired the intended ammunition or weapon, and a new target description. For example, during a canister engagement, the gunner fires the canister round and must engage remaining troop targets with coax. His response to the first round fired would be “TARGET – (WEAPON OR AMMUNITION) – TROOPS – ON THE WAY.” If the VC disagrees with the firer’s actions or decides to regain control of the turret, he must announce “CEASE FIRE” to the crew. „ The gunner may continue to reengage or initiate engagement of new targets presented in this manner until the VC takes control of the turret. The VC resumes control of the turret by announcing “CEASE FIRE.” „ When the gunner is completed engaging and no other targets have presented themselves, he announces “GUNNER COMPLETE.” This allows the crew to know he has finished his engagement, but is now actively seeking additional targets. If additional confirmed threat targets are identified by the gunner, he will alert the crew by stating which ammunition type he wants loaded and the target description (as stated earlier). „ If the commander continues to designate the gunner or loader to each target, then continues to scan his sector, he issues the command “FIRE AND ADJUST.” „ In the event a crew member announces “CEASE FIRE,” control of the turret immediately returns to the VC. “FIRE, FIRE (ammunition type or weapon).” If the commander wants the next main gun round for the loader to load (or indexed) to be a different type than is currently chambered, he uses the command of execution FIRE, FIRE (ammunition type). In a multiple engagement, this ensures that the proper ammunition for the threat is used. Example: “GUNNER – SABOT – TANK – PC – TANK – FIRST – FIRE, FIRE HEAT.” “FIRE, FIRE (ammunition type or weapon) AND ADJUST.” This is a combination of “FIRE, FIRE (AMMUNITION)” and “FIRE AND ADJUST.” It can be used by a VC following the guidelines established above. Its purpose is to provide the VC the ability to direct the gunner on multiple targets using multiple ammunition or weapons, and also to allow the gunner to make his own direct fire adjustments as necessary.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-15

Chapter 8

8-27. The term “AT MY COMMAND” is used to synchronize fires from a single or multiple vehicles. It is not the command of execution, but is a preparatory command used just prior to the any command of execution listed above. Notes. “ON THE WAY” is the last verbal response announced by a firer. The firer will squeeze the trigger on the “Y” of “WAY.” When firing machine guns or the platform’s main gun, each time the trigger is squeezed, butterfly is depressed, or an electrical trigger is depressed, the firer must announce “ON THE WAY.” During a continuous engagement of the same target without interruption, announcement of “ON THE WAY” is only required once. If there is a clear break in firing for adjustment, corrections, or additional commands from the VC, “ON THE WAY” must be announced again. Abrams Note. When firing the caliber .50, the VC must announce to the crew “CALIBER FIFTY” (or “TWO FORTY” if mounted in the commander’s weapon station [CWS]) to alert them as part of the fire command. He is only required to announce this once per target that he engages. The purpose is to notify the crew that he will be firing the weapon mounted in his weapon station. As this is the only required element of his fire command for his weapon station, he does not need to announce it on each firing burst of the machine gun. The VC is not required to announce “ON THE WAY.” Once he has completed firing, he will announce “VC COMPLETE.” At the completion of the overall engagement, “CEASE FIRE” must still be announced. Vehicles Equipped with a Commander’s Independent Sight. If the VC issues a fire command and wishes to continue to scan using his independent sight, he must use “FIRE AND ADJUST.”

TERMINATION 8-28. Every engagement must be terminated; the seventh element informs the all crew members to stop firing and prepare for a subsequent fire command when engaging multiple targets or additional instructions as they develop the situation. The VC announces “CEASE FIRE” to switch weapon systems during an engagement (for those vehicles equipped with multiple weapon systems) unless he issues the Fire and Adjust command, then fire and adjust rules apply to the firer (gunner/loader). 8-29. When a Bradley crew has fired its TOW-2B missile and the warhead has detonated, the VC will announce “CEASE TRACKING” to terminate the engagement. 8-30. For multiple weapon systems engagements on the Abrams vehicle, when the gunner completes his part of a multiple weapon systems engagement, he announces “GUNNER COMPLETE.” The gunner then moves the GUN SELECT switch to the TRIGGER SAFE position, the MAGNIFICATION switch to the 3X position, and continues to scan his sector. 8-31. To terminate the loader’s engagement, the VC announces “CEASE FIRE” or “LOADER – CEASE FIRE” during multiple weapon systems engagements. If the loader completes his part of a multiple weapon systems engagement, he announces “LOADER COMPLETE” and moves the M240 machine gun MECHANICAL SAFE switch to the SAFE position. 8-32. When the VC finishes an engagement with the commander’s weapon, he announces “VC COMPLETE.” The VC has overall responsibility of the turret and is still responsible for terminating the engagement. When the VC fires his weapon from his position, he is still required to announce “CEASE FIRE” to terminate the overall crew engagement.

8-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

METHODS OF ENGAGEMENT 8-33. There are two methods of engagement, precision and degraded. Both methods use fire commands to control the direct fire engagement and will contain all the elements of the standard fire command either verbally, by the standing operating procedures (SOP) (the primary firer, for example), or by automatic input from the vehicle’s fire control system.

Precision 8-34. Precision gunnery is the most accurate method of direct-fire engagement for all weapon platforms. When the firing vehicle is fully mission capable and the fire control system relative to the vehicle is functioning correctly, the precision method of engagement is used. This method uses the entire fire control system organic to the vehicle to engage threat targets. Crews will use elements of the standard fire command to initiate engagements.

Degraded 8-35. Vehicles are considered degraded when their fire control system or weapon system is not fully functioning. This method of engagement will require the VC to issue elements of the fire command that normally are optional, respective to his vehicle, in order to overcome the failure. The VC may decide to fire using degraded methods before the engagement starts or when a malfunction of the fire control system or an environmental condition during a precision fire command exist. In these cases, the element of the fire command that corrects or compensates for the fire control system degradation is added to the fire command.

FIRE COMMANDS CATEGORIES 8-36. There are two categories of fire commands–initial and subsequent. The first fire command category, the initial fire command, initiates hostilities toward a threat target or series of targets. The second category of fire commands, subsequent fire commands, is used to reengage a target to achieve the desired target affect. 8-37. There are two types of fire commands based strictly on the capabilities of the firing platform– standard and reduced.

STANDARD 8-38. The baseline for all fire commands and includes all seven basic elements of the fire command. All platforms within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) can use the standard fire command at any time to initiate an engagement. All VCs must be proficient at using the standard fire command prior to using reduced fire commands.

REDUCED 8-39. A commander may elect to omit one or more elements from the standard fire command based on tactical situation. Some vehicles within the HBCT require certain fire command elements based on the capabilities or limitations of the firing platform. A degradation of a fire control system may also require the VC to use additional elements in order to overcome the system failure. Table 8-8 shows the minimum required elements based on the firing vehicle’s capabilities or limitations during the firing occasion.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-17

Chapter 8

Table 8-8. Elements of the standard fire command Element

Condition

Remarks

Alert

Optional

Ammunition or Weapon

Optional

Description Direction

Mandatory Optional

Can be omitted when the default firer (gunner) is clear to the crew. If the VC wishes another crew member to fire a weapon subsystem, the alert element cannot be omitted (such as loader, rear bank, squad). Vehicles mounting single weapons (such as caliber. 50 only) may omit this element. If the VC wishes to fire the ammunition that is currently battlecarried, this element may be omitted. Under no circumstance can this element be omitted. If the VC has the ability to lay the firing weapon for direction himself, this element may be omitted. (Commander’s control handle or hand station.)

Range or Elevation

Optional

If the firing crew has an operational LRF incorporated into the firing weapon system this element may be omitted.

Execution

Mandatory

The VC is the only crew member authorized to issue the command of execution. This cannot be delegated to the gunner.

Termination

Mandatory

All fire commands must be terminated.

8-40. The initial fire command is given when a target or targets are first detected by a crew and no other engagement is ongoing (see Figure 8-7). The initial fire command initiates all hostilities against threat targets and can be delivered in two ways–standard or reduced. All fire commands must contain the elements that a fire control system DOES NOT provide to the crew.

Figure 8-7. Fire command concept

Note. If a firer is not identified during the alert (reduced fire command), the gunner is the default firer on platforms with multiple crew members capable of firing (REAR BANK, LOADER).

8-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

8-41. Reduced fire commands contain only those elements that are not provided by the fire control system. Reduced initial fire commands typically do not contain an ALERT or AMMUNITION or WEAPON description. This type of initial fire command can be given any time the crew clearly understands who is firing, which weapon is to be fired, and what ammunition type will be fired. For example, armed HMMWV crews with only one weapon system can always use reduced fire commands–there is only one possible firer (the gunner) and only one weapon to fire. 8-42. The VC, at his discretion, may choose to omit certain parts of the fire command (in accordance with [IAW] unit SOP). The reduced fire command must not confuse the crew and must include sufficient information to allow the crew to react properly to the situation. A reduced fire command must contain (as a minimum) the target description, command of execution and termination(for example, “TRUCK, FIRE, CEASE FIRE”). (If time permits, a full fire command should always be used.) 8-43. The following are examples of situations in which reduced fire commands may be used: z When a crew member acquires a target that is an immediate threat, he gives an acquisition or contact report (CONTACT – DIRECT FRONT”). The VC or gunner lays the gun and the gunner announces “IDENTIFIED – (RANGE);” the VC confirms the target as hostile, announces the target description “TANK,” “PC,” etc,” waits for the loader to announce “UP,” (Abrams) and announces “FIRE.” z During continuing contact, after a fire command has been issued, the VC elects to omit the alert and ammunition elements of the fire command. In a target-rich environment, the fire command may be extremely short. The VC may announce the target description, “PC.” The VC lays the gun for direction as needed, and the gunner announces “IDENTIFIED – (RANGE).” The loader’s response of “UP” must be given to assure the gunner and VC that he has armed the main gun and is clear of the path of recoil (Abrams). After the VC confirms the target as hostile and evaluates the range to target, he announces “FIRE.” Other than the omission of the alert and ammunition elements, the fire command remains standard (see Figure 8-8 and Figure 8-9).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-19

Chapter 8

Figure 8-8. Standard fire command, single target example

8-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-9. Reduced fire command, single target

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-21

Chapter 8

FIRE COMMAND TERMS 8-44. In addition to the primary seven elements discussed above, a fire command will include terms used to respond to, add to, repeat, or correct a fire command. These terms are classified into several types: z Crew Response. These terms are confirmations of the VC’s fire command. They are stated in order to ensure clarity of the initial or subsequent fire command. z Crew Action. These terms require the crew to perform a given function in order to direct fires onto the target. They are stated upon completion of the implied task as directed by the fire command. z Sensing. All rounds or bursts fired from a weapon system require the crew to sense, or identify the strike of the round in relation to the target. They provide an indicator to the VC when he can issue another initial fire command for additional targets on the battlefield. In the event that the rounds do not have the desired effect on the target, sensings are uses as the alert element for subsequent fire commands. z Engagement Technique. The VC can direct a specific engagement technique to the gunner to facilitate the target’s destruction or effective suppression. z Modifier. A description modifier is used to enhance the target description to clearly identify a specific target to engage when operating in a target rich environment. z Clarification. Clarification term is a request by a crew member to either repeat or correct an element of the fire command. z Driver Action. These terms are used to move the firing vehicle into a position that best supports the engagement. Driver actions are also used to seek alternate positions, return to defilade position, or move through battlefield obscurants during an engagement.

CREW RESPONSE TERMS 8-45. Additional response terms that must be used in fire commands are— z IDENTIFIED (RANGE). The gunner uses this term to inform the VC that he has located the target(s) stated in the fire command. If the gunner gave an acquisition or contact report for the target, he does not have to say “IDENTIFIED,” but must announce the range to target he determined. “IDENTIFIED, RANGE” stated by itself indicates to the VC that the gunner has confirmed the target as stated in the description and that the gunner has the proper range induced into the fire control system. If the gunner cannot confirm the target as hostile, the gunner will announce “IDENTIFIED,” followed by “FRIENDLY,” “NEUTRAL,” or “UNKNOWN.” When firing a subsequent round at the same target (not returning to a previously engaged target), the gunner does not have to announce “IDENTIFIED,” only the (RANGE) induced (see page 8-26 subsequent fire commands for more information). z CANNOT IDENTIFY. This term informs the VC that the gunner cannot find the target. The VC must redirect the gunner onto the target, re-lay the weapon, or engage the target. For platforms equipped with a commander’s override, commander’s hand station, the VC may override the gunner’s power control handles and lay the gun for direction as necessary. For vehicles equipped with a CITV or CIV, the VC may designate the target and hand off the target to the gunner once identified. z CANNOT ENGAGE. This term informs the VC that the gunner can identify the target but is unable to conduct the engagement. z ON THE WAY. This term informs all crew members that a weapon is being fired, alerting them to sense the round. The firer must announce this prior to firing. The gunner will state the range to target that he is firing prior to announcing “ON THE WAY,” when equipped with a range finder. This aids the VC’s situational awareness (SA) during engagements and provides an additional verification of the accurate range to target prior to firing.

8-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

z

z

GUNNER/LOADER COMPLETE. This term informs the VC that individual crewmen are finished with their portion of a multiple weapon system engagement (or when the VC is using his CITV/CIV to scan for targets) and that their systems are free to engage other targets. VC COMPLETE. This term informs the crew that the VC has completed firing his weapon system and is prepared to resume control of the turret.

CREW ACTION TERMS 8-46. The following terms are used to inform the VC of actions taken as implied tasks from a fire command: z (AMMUNITION TYPE) INDEXED. The gunner must use this response to indicate that he has indexed the proper ammunition change directed in the fire command or battlecarry posture. z (AMMUNITION TYPE) LOADED. The loader on the Abrams must use this response to indicate that he has loaded the proper ammunition change directed in the fire command or battlecarry posture. When using this term, the main gun is not armed. z UP. This term is used by the loader to signify that the main gun is loaded with the ammunition required in the fire command, the main gun is armed, and the recoil path of the main gun is clear. The ammunition type must be announced before UP when the commander directs an ammunition change in the fire command or directs a battlecarry posture. z (AMMUNITION TYPE) UP. This term is used by the loader to signify that the main gun is loaded with the ammunition specified in a subsequent fire command, the main gun is armed, and the path of recoil of the main gun is clear for firing. z DESIGNATE (M1A2 SEP/M2A3 ONLY). This term informs the gunner that the VC will hand a target off to him. This term can be used before or during a fire command.

SENSING TERMS 8-47. For every round fired, the firer must announce a sensing to inform the VC of the outcome of the engagement. Sensings are the verbal responses to a round or series of rounds (machine gun burst) of where the round(s) strike or pass the target in relation to the target aiming point. If the first round or burst fails to destroy the target, sensings will enable the crew to adjust fire for subsequent rounds. 8-48. The ability of the firer or VC to sense rounds will depend on local obscuration created from firing, target area obscuration from smoke or dust created from the impact of rounds, and time of flight of the round. z Obscuration. The flash, muzzle blast, heat shimmer, debris, and movement of the firing vehicle (platform rock) may prevent the crew from sensing their fires. z Flight Time. When firing main gun ammunition, flight time is so short that the projectile may reach the target before the vehicle has settled and local obscuration has cleared. 8-49. All crew members should attempt to sense every round fired. When firing service ammunition, a bright flash or explosion will be visible if the target is hit. When firing the MPAT round in AIR mode, a black cloud of smoke is produced when the round functions on the target (Abrams). If the point at which the tracer strikes short, passes, or hits the target cannot be verified by the crew, the firer announces “LOST.” When the gunner senses the strike of the round in relation to the target, he announces one of the following sensings listed in Figure 8-10.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-23

Chapter 8

Figure 8-10. Rounds fired

8-24

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

ENGAGEMENT TECHNIQUE TERMS 8-50. The following engagement technique terms are used to provide instruction to the firer of an engagement and direct him to engage a target or series of targets in a specific manner: z “SUPPRESS,” is used to direct the firer to continue to engage in order to suppress the target. This is typically given after the desired target effect has been achieved, but dismounts remain in the target area, either dispersing or dismounting from vehicle targets. z “Z-PATTERN,” is used to direct the firer to use the standard Z pattern to engage threat dismounts. z “RELASE,” directs the firer to relase to a target due to an actual or perceived inaccurate range to target. z “LEAD,” directs the firer to add lead to his sight picture respective to the target’s direction of travel. z “REENGAGE,” can be used to alert the firer to continue engaging the same target with the same weapon system. This is also a direct fire adjustment technique that is discussed later.

MODIFIER TERMS 8-51. When there are multiple targets, the commander must better identify the targets and accurately describe the target to engage first. Some of these descriptions could be— z “NEAR,” “FAR.” z “LEFT,” “RIGHT,” “CENTER.” z “STATIONARY,” “MOVING,” “DEFILADE.” z “LEFT TO RIGHT”, “RIGHT TO LEFT,” directs the gunner to engage the targets identified in a certain order that may be different from most dangerous to least dangerous. This is most commonly used when firing collectively with a section or platoon element. Typically, this term is used with a section or platoon fire command to adhere to that higher element’s instruction or the standard operating procedures for the platoon. z “NEAR TO FAR”, “FAR TO NEAR,” directs the gunner to engage the targets identified in a certain order that may be different from most dangerous to least dangerous. This is most commonly used when firing collectively with a section or platoon element. Typically, this term is used with a section or platoon fire command to adhere to that higher element’s instruction or the standard operating procedures for the platoon. z “SHIFT,” tells the firer to move to the next target or location to be announced by the commander. z “LIFT,” tells the firer to prepare to move fires in a direction to be announced by the commander. Typically, this command is given when friendly forces are moving toward the target area and is used as a control measure to protect friendly forces. z “LOW POWER (MAG),” tells the gunner to switch to the lowest magnification in order to identify or engage targets at extremely close ranges. z “HIGH POWER (MAG),” tells the gunner to switch to a higher magnification prior to receiving the command of execution to facilitate positive target identification and classification.

CLARIFICATION TERMS 8-52. Repeating terms. When a crew member fails to hear or understand a part of the fire command, he announces the element in question. For example, if the gunner says “AMMO,” the VC repeats only the element in question from the fire command. 8-53. To correct an error in the initial fire command, the commander commands “CORRECTION” and corrects only the element in error. For example, “GUNNER, HEAT, TRUCK, ONE SIX HUNDRED, CORRECTION, ONE EIGHT HUNDRED, FIRE.”

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-25

Chapter 8

8-54. If an error has been made in the initial fire command and the execution command has been given, the commander must cease fire and issue a complete, new fire command. 8-55. To correct an error in a subsequent fire command, the commander announces “CORRECTION” and repeats the entire subsequent fire command.

DRIVER ACTION TERMS 8-56. Other commands to the driver, used to facilitate vehicle movement before, during, and after an engagement, include, but are not limited to— z “DRIVER—MOVE UP.” z “DRIVER—BACK.” z “DRIVER—STOP.” z “DRIVER—SEEK ENFILADE.” z “DRIVER—SEEK DEFILADE.” z “DRIVER—MOVE OUT.”

SUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS 8-57. The second category of fire commands is the subsequent fire command. Subsequent fire commands are specifically given to the crew in the event the initial round (main gun) or burst (machine gun) misses the target or target area. The subsequent fire command is also used in the event the VC determines the target effect from a hit requires additional servicing to reduce the threat (mobility kill, not catastrophic or firepower achieved on threat target). The subsequent fire command contains corrections, techniques, or modifications to the firer’s sight picture or point of aim to fire additional rounds at the target in order to achieve a target hit. The command of execution and termination elements is always mandatory. 8-58. Many factors can cause a target miss. These factors depend on the direct-fire technique used and the ammunition fired. The following factors could contribute to target misses: z Incorrect boresight or zero. z Battle damage to own vehicle or weapon. z Failure of the crew to perform correct before-operation checks or armament accuracy checks (AAC) of the fire control system (Abrams) or built-in test (BIT) (Bradley). z Incorrect Target Acquisition System (TAS) alignment (M2A3). z Error in crew drill during the engagement, such as an incorrect lay of the sight (reticle) on the target aiming point (poor sight picture). z Loss of boresight or zero. z Round-to-round dispersion (predominantly with large caliber ammunition). z Incorrect range. z Excessive cant of the firing platform (trunnion tilt). z Refraction (optical path bending). 8-59. A subsequent fire command may contain up to five elements: alert, deflection correction, range or elevation correction, execution, and termination. The alert, execution, and termination elements are always given. A deflection or range/elevation correction should be given when a crew does not have the ability to electronically determine accurate range to target or compute automatic lead. If a full-up fire control system with automatic lead and super-elevation is available, the reengage method should be used. A sensing of “LOST,” “OVER,” “SHORT,” or “DOUBTFUL” acts as the alert of the subsequent fire command. This will cue the crew that a subsequent fire command is being issued. (On Abrams vehicles, it also serves as the alert element to the loader to arm the main gun, if appropriate.) z Alert. The sensing for the round fired alerts the gunner that a subsequent fire command is being issued. z Deflection correction (only if necessary). A deflection correction is based on the VC’s or gunner’s sensing of where the round strikes in relation to the target. A deflection error in excess

8-26

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

z

of one target form indicates a fire control malfunction (if so equipped), optical path bending, or an error in the gunner’s lay. Deflection corrections will not be less than one-half target form and should not be more than one target form. On vehicles equipped with a LRF, automatic superelevation, and automatic lead, deflection errors in excess of one form indicate an improper sight picture, reticle aim, or incorrect range to target. The gunner should again aim center of visible mass, track the target, re-lase, and evaluate his range. Once complete, the VC will provide the command of execution. Range correction (only if necessary). A range correction is based on the VC’s or gunner’s sensing of where the round strikes in relation to the target. Range corrections will not be less than one-half target form or more than one target form. For range corrections in excess of one target form, reengage. On vehicles equipped with a LRF, automatic super-elevation, and automatic lead, deflection errors in excess of one form indicate an improper sight picture, reticle aim, or incorrect range to target. The gunner should again aim center of visible mass, track the target, re-lase, and evaluate his range. Once complete, the VC will provide the command of execution.

Notes. Though not recommended, the VC may make larger corrections in both deflection and elevation when using the GAS. See below for direct fire adjustment techniques. Abrams Note. When adjusting by “target form” using the GPS or thermal imaging sight (TIS) reticle, do not release the palm switches or re-lase to the target—this will cause the ballistic solution to change. z z

Execution. The VC announces “FIRE,” or another command of execution as listed on page 814. Termination. The VC completes the subsequent fire command by announcing “CEASE FIRE.”

DIRECT-FIRE ADJUSTMENT METHODS 8-60. Closely following the before-operation checks, prep-to-fire checks, and direct-fire techniques already discussed will increase the chances of achieving a first-round target destructive hit. In some situations, however, direct-fire adjustment will be necessary. When a gunner or VC fires a round and misses the target, the crew must take actions to obtain a rapid target hit with a subsequent round. The crew must use a subsequent fire command to adjust fires onto a target. 8-61. There are two direct-fire adjustment methods–reengage and standard adjustment methods.

Reengage 8-62. Vehicles without a fire control system, an operational LRF, or a stabilization system failure will not use the reengage method. If the firing vehicle’s fire control system is fully operational, the reengage method is the preferred method for subsequent rounds after a first-round or first-burst miss. Reengage is a rapid technique in which a new ballistic solution is entered in the fire control system. Example— z Gunner. “OVER.” z Loader. “UP.” z VC. “OVER—REENGAGE.” z Gunner. Dumps the lead solution in the fire control system by quickly releasing and re-grasping the palm grips, then re-lays, re-lases to the target, and announces “(RANGE).” The VC then issues the command of execution. Since the firer has already identified the target he will be engaging, he does not have to announce “IDENTIFIED” again. He must announce the new induced range prior to the command of execution.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-27

Chapter 8

Notes. If the gunner has been given the “FIRE AND ADJUST” command, he announces his sensing and any appropriate change to ammunition. The gunner dumps the lead solution in the fire control system by quickly releasing and re-grasping the palm grips, then re-lases to the target, waits for an “UP,” and announces, “ON THE WAY.” If the crew has a sensing of “TARGET,” but the target has not been completely destroyed (for example, it cannot move but can still fire), the gunner or VC will re-lay using the same sight picture, announce “TARGET (await “UP” from the loader) – REENGAGE.” The firer will announce “(RANGE)”, and once he is given the command of execution will fire the subsequent round.

Standard Adjustment 8-63. The standard adjustment method is the primary means for weapon systems without a fire control system, or those vehicles whose fire control systems are damaged, to direct main and machine gun fires on to target accurately and effectively. 8-64. When firing and unable to hit the target using the reengage method (or when using degraded methods of engagement using the GPS), the VC or crew member (if given the “FIRE AND ADJUST” command) may choose to use the standard adjustment method. The standard adjustment for both elevation and deflection will not be less than a one-half target form or more than one target form. When the crew observes a round missing the target in both range and deflection, the deflection correction is given before the range correction, similar to the order of the elements of a fire command. If the crew observes over, short, lost, or doubtful, the VC or crew member will announce his sensing and the intended correction in one of the following ways: Note. The VC has the option of increasing the gunner’s adjustment beyond one target form based on the situation. z z z z

Deflection correction. “DOUBTFUL LEFT (RIGHT) – RIGHT (LEFT) ONE-HALF FORM.” Range correction. “SHORT (OVER) – ADD (DROP) HALF FORM.” Combination of deflection and range correction. “DOUBTFUL – LEFT (RIGHT)”, OVER (SHORT) – RIGHT (LEFT) HALF FORM – DROP (ADD) HALF FORM.” Lost. “LOST – DROP HALF FORM.” Typically, if the round is lost, the round traveled over the target to beyond the line of sight of the crew. In this instance, dropping one half or one form is the preferred adjustment.

8-65. After making his sight correction, the gunner announces “(DEFLECTION/RANGE CORRECTION),” awaits the command of execution, announces “ON THE WAY,” and fires. This informs the VC that the gunner understands the intended correction and has applied it prior to firing. In the event the gunner has incorrectly applied the correction, it provides the VC time to cease fire the engagement rather than knowingly fire a round or burst ineffectively.

For Abrams and Bradley Crews 8-66. If, after firing two rounds (Abrams) or eight rounds (Bradley), respectively, with the GPS using degraded methods of engagement, the gunner or the VC has not sensed some target effect, the decision should be made to use the auxiliary sight to complete the engagement. As soon as the tactical situation permits, the crew should perform a boresight check, and re-boresight if necessary. During combat, the VC may have to make larger corrections than the standard corrections listed above in order to get target effect as rapidly as possible.

8-28

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Note. Though not recommended, the VC may make larger corrections in both deflection and elevation than the standard direct fire adjustments listed above.

CREW DUTIES IN RESPONSE TO A FIRE COMMAND 8-67. Each crew member has specific duties to perform in response to each element of a fire command. The VC and gunner will apply the rules of lay for every round fired. The rules of lay are (EAR)— z End lay in elevation. z Always aim at the center of visible mass. z Remember the sight picture at trigger squeeze. 8-68. The VC, gunner, (or loader) will squeeze the trigger as soon as he announces “(RANGE), ON THE WAY” (on the “Y” of “WAY”). Vehicles not equipped with a laser rangefinder or means to electronically determine the range will not include “range” as a prefix to “ON THE WAY.”

NOTES FOR ABRAMS, BRADLEY, AND LRAS3 EQUIPPED VEHICLES 8-69. With the enhancements of digital capabilities for information gathering and reporting, and the CITV/CIV for increased observation, the M1A2 SEP and M2A3 can cover a larger sector of fire than previous vehicle variants. This larger sector could have multiple avenues of approach. The gunner could be required to engage multiple targets on his own, while the VC continues to scan and designate with the CITV or CIV, which places increased responsibilities on the gunner to make his own decisions when given the command, “FIRE AND ADJUST.” Also, this requires the VC and gunner to maintain a constant communication flow. 8-70. Normally with Abrams and newer Bradley variants, the LRF is kept in the ARM LAST RTN logic position. When the target is extremely small or at an extended range (the entire target appears within the aiming circle), ARM 1ST RTN logic is the preferred position, as the laser beam may project beyond the target and cause multiple returns. Before firing, the gunner checks through the GAS to ensure the path of the main gun is clear. Prior to firing, the gunner on these vehicle types will announce the range to target determined and displayed in his field of view followed by “ON THE WAY.” 8-71. Setting the AMMUNITION SELECT switch (M1A1), push button (M1A2 SEP), or selecting the appropriate ammunition on the weapons control box (WCB) (Bradley), to a different ammunition with the palm switches pressed updates the ballistic solution for the new ammunition. For the BFV, the crew must re-lase the target before an updated ballistic solution is induced into the system. 8-72. For Abrams crews, when changing ammunition during a degraded engagement, the gunner indexes the correct ammunition type, but does not release his palm switches, the VC does not have to press the BATTLE SGT (battlesight) button again, and the range in the fire control system remains the same. However, if the gunner releases the palm switches during the engagement, he must re-grasp the palm switches and track the target smoothly. The VC presses the BATTLE SGT button and uses the ADD/DROP toggle switch (or the four-way switch on the M1A2 SEP) to update the complete ballistic solution (±10 meters) for the new ammunition, and announces “BATTLESIGHT.” 8-73. For Abrams crews, to make sure the main gun can be loaded safely across all types of terrain, the GUN/TURRET DRIVE switch in the loader’s position should remain in the elevation uncouple (EL UNCPL) position. This returns the main gun to a position standard for loading when the SAFE/ARM lever is moved to the SAFE position by the loader.

MULTIPLE ENGAGEMENTS 8-74. In combat, vehicle crews may engage targets using multiple engagement techniques. These engagements require speed and accuracy to suppress or destroy all targets. The types of target engagements are single target engagements, multiple target engagements, and multiple weapon system engagements (Abrams and Bradley crews). For single target engagements, crews respond with standard crew duties.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-29

Chapter 8

Multiple target engagements and multiple weapon system engagements require additional fire command elements and responses from the crew.

MULTIPLE MAIN GUN OR COAX MACHINE GUN ENGAGEMENTS 8-75. A multiple main gun or coax machine gun engagement is more than one target engaged with the same weapon. These engagements, especially multiple vehicle engagements, require rapid and accurate fire, target destruction, and quick shifts to new targets. The VC determines which target presents the greatest threat (most dangerous) and issues a fire command to engage that target first. The VC determines the next most dangerous target, directs fires to the second target and continues this process until all targets are destroyed. On vehicles with automatic lead provided by the fire control system, when moving from one target to another, the gunner must make sure he releases the palm switches momentarily (dumps lead solution), then squeezes the palm switches again. This eliminates the floating reticle and makes laying on the next target much faster. The gunner must now re-lase to the new target to establish an accurate ballistic solution. Note. On the M2A3, no kinematic lead is automatically induced when firing the coax machine gun or when firing the tube-launched, optically tracked, wire-guided (TOW) missile system. 8-76. The VC must decide whether or not a target has been destroyed. Indications that a target has been sufficiently damaged include secondary explosions or crew members abandoning the vehicle. Multiple engagements require the VC to shift fires quickly from one target to the next as the classification of most dangerous changes from moment to moment. 8-77. Multiple coax machine gun engagements are performed in the same manner. The most dangerous target is engaged first; fires are then shifted to the next most dangerous or dangerous target (see Figure 8-11).

8-30

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-11. Reduced multiple target fire command example

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-31

Chapter 8

MULTIPLE WEAPON SYSTEMS ENGAGEMENT (ABRAMS, BRADLEY, AND ASV) 8-78. There are two types of multiple weapon system engagements–sequential and simultaneous.

Sequential 8-79. Sequential engagements are engagements which may require the use of two weapon systems against multiple targets in a sequential manner. All platforms with multiple weapon systems have the ability to execute these engagements. The second is one that requires the simultaneous use of multiple weapons against multiple targets. 8-80. Sequential engagements use an initial fire command when initiating direct fires at each target, but may involve a change of weapon system between the first and second target.

Simultaneous (Abrams only) 8-81. Simultaneous engagements are specific to Abrams platforms. It is an engagement where multiple weapon systems are engaging one or more targets whether independently or simultaneously. A sample fire command and the VC’s and gunner’s responses to a multiple weapon systems engagement follows. The VC announces “GUNNER – SABOT – TANK.” The gunner announces “IDENTIFIED (RANGE)” and takes up the correct sight picture. The VC evaluates the range, and then announces “FIRE AND ADJUST – CALIBER FIFTY.” The gunner announces “ON THE WAY” and engages his target. He then announces his sensing and intended correction and continues to engage the target. If a target destructive hit is sensed, the gunner announces “TARGET – GUNNER COMPLETE.” When the VC finishes his engagements, he announces “VC COMPLETE.” The VC resumes control of the engagement at this time and announces “GUNNER – CEASE FIRE – LOADER 240, TROOPS 9 O’CLOCK, THREE HUNDRED.” The loader announces “IDENTIFIED, THREE HUNDRED” and takes up the correct sight picture. The VC then announces “FIRE AND ADJUST.” The loader announces “ON THE WAY” and engages his target. The loader must sense his own rounds and make his own corrections using the tracer on target (ToT) technique. If a target destructive hit is sensed, the loader announces “TARGET – LOADER COMPLETE.” The VC resumes control of the engagement at this time and announces “LOADER – CEASE FIRE.” 8-82. During some multiple weapon systems engagements, the VC may need to stop firing his caliber .50 engagement temporarily, to assist the gunner. The two most common situations are— z When the gunner cannot identify the target, the VC will lay the main gun on target. z When the gunner cannot sense the effect of the round, the VC will help sense rounds. Notes. In the case of multiple machine gun engagements, the VC will use the “FIRE AND ADJUST” command for the loader. The VC should only direct the loader to engage targets that are to the left of the main gun or CITV (M1A2 SEP). (M1A2, M2/M3A3) The fire and adjust command of execution used when the VC is going to use the CITV/CIV to search for more targets does not take the responsibility for cease firing the weapon system in use from the VC.

SECTION III – ENGAGEMENT TECHNIQUES 8-83. For the wide variety of platforms in the HBCT, there are an equally wide variety of techniques to employ those platforms weapon systems against threat targets. This section will discuss general engagement techniques for machine gun and main gun targets. See your platform’s respective appendix for detailed information on techniques used during engagements using platform specific ammunition.

8-32

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

8-84. There are a number of firing techniques that are common across all platforms. In order to best describe the techniques, aim points will be defined as appropriate though your platform’s reticle, iron sight, or sight picture may vary.

EMPLOYING VEHICLE MACHINE GUNS 8-85. Vehicle crews must be able to effectively engage infantry, crew-served weapons, antitank guided missiles (ATGM) teams, rocket-propelled grenades (RPG) teams, trucks, light armored vehicles, lightlyconstructed covered positions, and aircraft. This section discusses how vehicle machine guns are used and their role in direct-fire engagements. 8-86. Machine guns are extremely effective weapons, but they also serve the vehicle crews in different ways. The crew is limited only by their ingenuity in using these weapons. The following is a list of primary uses for platform mounted machine guns:

ENGAGE SOFT TARGETS 8-87. Crews will primarily engage soft targets with machine guns. Soft targets are those that can be penetrated or destroyed using 7.62mm or caliber .50 ammunition. These types of targets include unprotected troops, snipers, RPG teams, trucks (unarmored), cars, aircraft, bunkers, or non-reinforced buildings. These are the primary targets for machine guns out to their maximum effective range.

ENGAGE POINT TARGET 8-88. A point target requires a gunner to aim at a single point or location and fire controlled, accurately aimed bursts to destroy a singular target. Although an RPG team is presented by as many as three targets, it is still classified as a point target. In order to engage these targets: z Unstabilized Machine Guns Versus Stationary Point Targets. Gunners firing unstabilized or pintle mounted machine guns should estimate the range to target, aim to the center of visible mass near the base of the target, and fire an initial burst. Adjust the ToT in order to move the strike of the round into the target area. Once complete, fire a killing burst of 20 to 30 rounds to destroy the target. If dismounts abandon the soft target you are engaging, continue to engage the dismounted threat as point targets or as area targets. z Unstabilized Machine Guns Versus Moving Point Targets. Gunners firing from unstabilized or pintle mounted machine guns should estimate the range and speed of the target. Gunners must lead the vehicle (target) based on the apparent rate the target is moving. Always lead targets in the direction of their travel and include the super-elevation required for the determined range. Once tracking the target’s movement and range, fire an initial burst into the target area. The strike of the rounds and visible tracers should intersect the path the threat target is traveling. Adjust as necessary based on the strike of the rounds around the target area. Unless absolutely necessary, do not make aggressive adjustments, keep your elbows locked to your sides, and continue to engage smoothly with short bursts. Once the gunner achieves rounds in the target area, he should immediately begin firing a killing burst, placing as many rounds into the target and target area as possible (see Figure 8-12 and Figure 8-13). z Stabilized Machine Guns. Gunners must lay to the base of the target, lase, get an accurate range, adjust the sight picture to the center of visible mass, and engage upon receiving the command of execution. The initial burst should be 10 to 20 rounds and should be effective enough to destroy the point target. If dismounted threats appear leaving the target or target area, the gunner may engage those threats using point techniques or switch to area techniques as necessary (see Figure 8-14).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-33

Chapter 8

Figure 8-12. Manually applied lead for a slow moving target

Figure 8-13. Manually applied lead for a fast moving target

8-34

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-14. Aiming point for machine gun point target, stationary

ENGAGE AREA TARGET 8-89. Engaging area targets requires the gunner to begin the engagement at the base of the target, fire an initial burst into the target area, adjust fire into the target area, fire a killing burst, and sweep through the area with a follow-on suppressive burst of 10 to 15 rounds. The initial burst is the same as firing at a point target. The suppressive burst for area targets includes the use of the “Z” pattern to destroy any remaining threat targets that have not gone to ground. The “Z” pattern is fired from front (near) to back (far), crossing back and forth across the target area as shown in Figure 8-15.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-35

Chapter 8

Figure 8-15. Z pattern fired from the front 8-90. When engaging area targets on the offense, slight movements of the turret/pintle mount can provide an effective “Z” pattern without much effort. In the offense, continue to move when engaging targets. Movement of the turret/gunner skate ring and vehicle carries the burst through the target when a narrow frontal area target is presented (see Figure 8-16). Round dispersion will cover target width.

8-36

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-16. Z pattern

ENGAGE AIRCRAFT TARGET 8-91. Engaging moving aircraft through your area of responsibility requires crews to be familiar with the engagement techniques associated with fast fixed wing and slow rotary-wing aircraft engagements. Figure 8-17 defines the procedures for crews engaging these types of aircraft while the threat is approaching their position and while the aircraft is traveling across their front (left to right, or right to left).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-37

Chapter 8

Figure 8-17. Aiming points for engaging aircraft with vehicle machine guns

8-38

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

ENGAGE AIRBORNE TARGETS 8-92. The rapid rate of fall of paratroopers makes them hard to engage. To engage the paratrooper, gunners— z Fire a burst with a lead of two body lengths beneath the feet of the dropping paratrooper (see Figure 8-18). z If a troop-carrying helicopter is sighted, the helicopter should be engaged first. Notes. The Geneva Convention of 1949 and the Rules of War prohibit engaging crewmen parachuting from disabled aircraft. The MK19 should not be used against paratroopers because of time of flight of rounds.

Figure 8-18. Paratrooper engagement technique

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-39

Chapter 8

SUPPRESSIVE FIRE ENGAGEMENTS 8-93. Vehicle suppressive fire is direct fire placed on known or likely enemy locations to degrade one or more of the enemy’s basic combat functions–moving, shooting, observing, or communicating. This takes the threat’s current place in his own detect, identify, decide, engage, and assess (DIDEA) process and makes him begin again, providing friendly forces time to develop a situation and destroy the threat. Whenever possible, use machine guns for suppressive-fire engagements to conserve main gun ammunition (120mm or 25mm). Suppressive fire is most effective when fired at a sustained rate of 20- to 30-round bursts (4 to 6 tracers) every 10 seconds for the M240, and 10- to 15-round bursts (2 to 3 tracers) every 10 seconds for the caliber .50. No specific pattern or engagement technique is prescribed; however, each burst should strike within 10 meters of the suspected target area. In dense terrain or areas of high enemy troop activity, overwatching vehicles can cover maneuvering vehicles with suppressive machine gun fire. Note (Abrams). To conserve the limited caliber .50 ammunition, use the loader’s machine gun along with the coax on targets within 900 meters. Use the caliber .50 machine gun to suppress targets from 900 to 1,800 meters.

Reconnaissance by Fire 8-94. Reconnaissance by fire is used when other means of enemy detection have been unsuccessful or are not available. It is best employed with another vehicle within the same section. One vehicle can fire on a suspected enemy position or suspicious area to cause the enemy to react and compromise his position at the time of our choosing, not his. The second vehicle can then engage and destroy the enemy from a different location. 8-95. To conserve main gun ammunition, use vehicle-mounted machine guns in reconnaissance by fire to cause a hidden enemy to react. Fire a single burst (20 to 30 rounds with the M240 or 10 to 15 rounds with the caliber .50) while constantly observing for enemy movement, return fire, or the flash of rounds striking metal.

Ranging 8-96. (M1A1 only) When the GAS and LRF are inoperative, the caliber .50 machine gun may be used as a ranging gun out to 1,800 meters. The M240 (either coax or mounted in the CWS) may be used as a ranging gun out to 900 meters. Limited use of this technique is recommended, because it reveals your position.

Designating Targets 8-97. Section and platoon leaders can use machine gun fire effectively to designate targets for other vehicles, artillery forward observers (FO), or aerial fire support. Limited use of this technique is recommended, because it reveals your position.

Firing Through Cover 8-98. Vehicle-mounted machine guns can be used effectively to penetrate most cover used by infantry, such as small trees, hasty barricades, or lightly constructed buildings.

Incendiary Effects 8-99. Machine gun tracers or incendiary ammunition, particularly armor-piercing incendiary-tracer (API-T), can be used to set fire to any readily combustible material such as dry grass, grain, dried brush, or wood. Fire will deny a particular area to enemy use, and smoke from a burning field can be used to screen movement.

8-40

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Coaxially Mounted Machine Gun – Coax (Abrams and Bradley) 8-100. The coax machine gun can effectively engage area or point targets out to 900 meters, its maximum effective range (tracer burnout). When using the coax, the VC or gunner should set the LRF LOGIC switch based on the operational environment. To provide the most accurate range to troop type target, gunners should lase the base of the target, then raise aim center of visible mass prior to firing (see Figure 8-19).

Figure 8-19. Sight picture for lasing on troops using last return logic Note. Due to the rapid decrease in range to the target during offensive coax engagements, it may be necessary to re-lase to the target during the engagement. The gunner must not forget to dump lead after re-lasing. Armed trucks firing in the offense will want to fire at the base of targets initially. As the vehicle progresses toward the target area, the rounds will close with and strike within the target area.

MACHINE GUN ENGAGEMENT TECHNIQUE FOR THE GAS/AUXILIARY SIGHT 8-101. For Abrams, if the GPS or TIS is inoperative, use the HEAT reticle in the GAS. Due to the ballistic mismatch of HEAT ammunition and the 7.62-mm coax round, the range must be doubled. (If the target is at 800 meters, use the 1,600-meter range line.) Also, if lead is to be applied, use 7-1/2 mils initially, and correct as necessary. 8-102. For Bradleys, if the IBAS/ISU is inoperative, use the AP side of the reticle in the AUX sight. Gunners should fire a sensing burst into the target area and then adjust the reticle lay before firing a suppressive burst.

LOADER’S MACHINE GUN 8-103. The loader’s M240 machine gun is used to engage area and point targets designated by the VC. When using the M240 machine gun, the loader should— z Lay the weapon for deflection. z Fire bursts of 20 to 30 rounds (4 to 6 tracers) to engage all targets except aircraft. Engage aircraft using a continuous burst. z Use tracer impact to adjust rounds on target. These adjustments are given as “UP/DOWN/RIGHT/LEFT.”

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-41

Chapter 8

8-104. When the loader is directed to engage targets with the M240, both the VC and loader must remember— z The loader’s main duty is to load the main gun. z The loader’s machine gun does not have any sights; therefore, it should be used only for area or aerial targets. z The VC’s weapon and loader’s machine gun can be fired simultaneously; however, caution must be used to prevent injury to the loader or VC. z To avoid damaging the CITV, thermal shrouds, the bore evacuator, or the muzzle reference system (MRS) collimator, the loader’s machine gun should be fired at targets to the left of the main gun only. 8-105. The loader’s stand should be adjusted so the chest-hold technique can be used to steady the M240 while firing. The loader grasps the handles of the loader’s M240 mount, holds them closely against his chest for steadiness and control, and fires the weapon.

WARNING When engaging targets, the VC and loader should not cross each other’s fire. This could injure crew members and damage equipment.

VEHICLE COMMANDER’S WEAPON 8-106. The M2 HB caliber .50 machine gun is mounted in the CWS on the M1A1 Abrams vehicle. The M2 HB flex caliber .50 machine gun is mounted in the Improved Commander’s Weapon Station (ICWS) on the M1A2 SEP vehicle. (The M240 7.62-mm machine gun can be mounted in the CWS and the ICWS when necessary). The M2 machine gun can engage area and point targets out to 1,800 meters–its maximum effective range. If the M240 7.62-mm machine gun is mounted, it should only be used out to 900 meters (tracer burnout). When using the commander’s weapon— z Lay the weapon for deflection and estimate the range. If the situation permits, the VC should have the gunner lase to the target and announce range; then, the VC should place the appropriate range line on target (M1A1 only). z Fire bursts of 10 to 15 rounds (2 to 3 tracers) for the M2 or 20 to 30 rounds (4 to 6 tracers) for the M240 to adjust on target. z Use the short-halt technique to engage targets while on the move unless the vehicle is equipped with a Commander’s Remotely Operated Weapon Station (CROWS) variant that provides stabilization. 8-107. On identification of an appropriate caliber .50 target, the VC announces “CALIBER FIFTY” and, on the M1A1, lays the appropriate range line on the target center of mass. On hearing the VC announce “CALIBER FIFTY,” the loader positions himself in the loader’s hatch (if not in closed-hatch posture), assumes the VC’s responsibilities for primary target acquisition (ground and air), and assists in adjusting the VC’s machine gun fire. If the gunner is engaging targets with the main gun, the loader must remain inside the turret. In all other situations, the loader should be out of the hatch, helping to sense rounds and acquire targets (see Figure 8-20). 8-108. If the gunner or loader can see the caliber .50 tracers, he assists the VC in adjusting fire–these adjustments are given as “UP/ DOWN/RIGHT/LEFT.” On completion of the caliber .50 engagement, the VC announces “VC COMPLETE.”

8-42

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-20. M1A1 caliber .50 aiming points

SECTION IV – SAMPLE FIRE COMMANDS 8-109. The following examples are generic in nature, but show common fire commands that Abrams, Bradley, and truck crews will face (see Figure 8-21 through Figure 8-41). The fire command examples are provided in the following order to reduce confusion: z Common fire commands among all platforms are— „ Use of “REENGAGE.” „ Single target. „ Multiple targets. „ Degraded single target. „ Degraded multiple targets. „ Degraded change of weapon system. „ Fire commands to squads. „ Smoke grenade fire commands. z Abrams series— „ Canister rounds and the use of “FIRE AND ADJUST.” „ Simultaneous engagements firing all machine guns. „ Change of weapon system. „ Caliber .50 and main gun using “FIRE AND ADJUST.” z M1A2 variant specific–designating targets. z Bradley series— „ Precision, VC determines range. „ Precision, gunner determines range. „ Change of weapon system. „ Missile fire command. „ Missile to 25mm, change of weapon system. „ Rear bank fire command. z M2A3 variant specific–designating targets. z Armed truck (including change of weapon system for the Armored Security Vehicle [ASV])— „ Single target engagement. „ Multiple target engagement. „ Change of weapon system (ASV).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-43

Chapter 8

Figure 8-21. Direct fire adjustment using the re-engage method

8-44

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-22. Single target engagement example

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-45

Chapter 8

Figure 8-23. Multiple target fire command example

8-46

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-24. Single target fire command using BATTLE SGT button example

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-47

Chapter 8

Figure 8-25. Single target fire command example without LRF/ELRF

8-48

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-26. Single target fire command using the stadia reticle with adjustment example

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-49

Chapter 8

Figure 8-27. Multiple target fire command using the stadia reticle example

8-50

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-28. Multiple target fire command, GPS malfunction example

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-51

Chapter 8

Figure 8-29. Change of weapon system using GAS or auxiliary sight fire command example

8-52

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-30. Fire command to dismounted squad example

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-53

Chapter 8

Figure 8-31. Smoke grenade fire command example

8-54

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-32. Simultaneous engagement fire command example

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-55

Chapter 8

Figure 8-33. Change of weapon system fire command example

8-56

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-34. Simultaneous targets, caliber .50 and main gun example

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-57

Chapter 8

Figure 8-35. VC main gun fire command example

8-58

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-36. Canister engagement using “FIRE AND ADJUST”

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-59

Chapter 8

Figure 8-37. Multiple weapon system (Bradley) fire command example

8-60

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-38. Multiple weapon system (Bradley), fire and adjust, fire command example

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-61

Chapter 8

Figure 8-39. Truck single target fire command example

8-62

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-40. Truck multiple target fire command example

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-63

Chapter 8

Figure 8-41. ASV change of weapon system fire command example

8-64

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

SECTION V – INDIRECT FIRE 8-110. When the decision to engage is made and the method of engagement selected is to employ indirect fire, the engagement is initiated by the fire support team, or by other Soldiers in position to observe and direct the fires. The observer initiates an indirect fire engagement with a call for fire. VCs must be fluent at calling for indirect fires at their disposal in order to rapidly engage threat targets using all munition deliver systems at their disposal. This section provides the crew the fundamentals of the call for fire process, control measures, commands, and the standard call for fire format.

CALL FOR FIRE 8-111. A call for fire is a concise message prepared by the observer. It contains all of the information needed by the fire direction center (FDC) to determine the method of target attack. It is a request for fire, not an order. 8-112. A call for fire must be sent quickly but clearly enough that it can be understood, recorded, and read back, without error, by the FDC recorder. The observer should tell the radio operator he has seen a target so the radio operator can start the call for fire while the target location is being determined. Information is sent as it is determined, rather than waiting until a complete call for fire has been prepared. 8-113. Regardless of the method of target location used, the normal call for fire is sent in three transmissions consisting of six elements with a break and read back after each transmission. The transmissions and elements are organized in the following sequence: z Observer identification and warning order. z Target location. z Target description, method of engagement, and method of fire and control.

OBSERVER IDENTIFICATION 8-114. This element tells the FDC who is calling for fire.

WARNING ORDER 8-115. The warning order clears the net for the fire mission. The warning order consists of the type of mission, the size of the element to fire for effect (FFE), and the method of target location.

Type of Mission 8-116. There are four types of fire missions. They are— z Adjust Fire. When the observer believes that an adjustment must be made (because of questionable target location or lack of registration corrections), he announces ADJUST FIRE. z Fire for Effect. The observer should always strive for first-round FFE. The accuracy required to FFE depends on the accuracy of target location and the ammunition being used. When the observer is certain that the target location is accurate and that the first volley should have the desired effect on the target so that little or no adjustment is required, he announces FIRE FOR EFFECT. z Suppress. To quickly bring fire on a target that is not active, the observer announces SUPPRESS (followed by the target identification). Suppression missions are normally fired on preplanned targets, and a duration is associated with the call for fire. z Immediate Suppression and Immediate Smoke. When engaging a planned target or target of opportunity that has taken friendly maneuver or elements under fire, the observer announces IMMEDIATE SUPPRESSION or IMMEDIATE SMOKE (followed by the target location).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-65

Chapter 8

Size of Element to Fire for Effect 8-117. The observer may request the size of the unit to FFE, for example, BATTALION. Usually he does this by announcing the last letter in the battalion FDC's call sign. For example, T6H24 is announced H. If the observer does not specify a size of element to FFE, the FDC will make the decision based on the attack guidance received and the Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual (JMEM) solution.

Method of Target Location 8-118. There are five methods to identify target locations. They are— z Grid. The word grid is not announced; such as ADJUST FIRE, OVER. z Laser Grid. The observer announces LASER GRID, for example FIRE FOR EFFECT, LASER GRID, OVER. z Polar Plot. The observer announces POLAR, for example, ADJUST FIRE POLAR, OVER. z Laser Polar. The observer announces LASER POLAR, for example, ADJUST FIRE, LASER POLAR, OVER. z Shift from a Known Point. The observer announces SHIFT, followed by the designation of the known point or by the target number, for example, ADJUST FIRE, SHIFT KNOWN POINT 1, OVER.

Target Location 8-119. The target locations are— z Grid. In a grid mission, six-place grids normally are sent. Eight-place grids should be sent for registration points or other points for which greater accuracy is required. The OT direction normally will be sent after the entire initial call for fire, since it is not needed by the FDC to locate the target. z Laser Grid. A laser grid mission is the same as a grid mission with the following exceptions: „ Target grid is sent to a greater level of accuracy (8 or 10 digit grid depending on observation post location accuracy). „ In an adjust fire mission, corrections are sent in the form of a grid to the burst location. z Polar Plot. In a polar plot mission, the word polar in the warning order alerts the FDC that the target will be located with respect to the observer's position. The observer's location must be known to the FDC. The observer then sends the direction and distance. A vertical shift tells the FDC how far, in meters, the target is located above or below the observer's location. Vertical shift may also be described by a vertical angle in mils, relative to the observer's location. z Laser Polar. Laser data are sent to the nearest 1 mil for direction and vertical angle and the nearest 10 meters for distance. z Shift. In a shift from a known point mission, the target will be located in relation to a preexisting known point or recorded target. The point or target from which the shift is made is sent in the warning order. (Both the observer and the FDC must know the location of the point or recorded target.) The observer then sends the OT direction. Normally, it is sent in mils. However, the FDC can accept degrees or cardinal directions, whichever is specified by the observer. The corrections are sent next: „ The lateral shift in meters (how far left or right the target is) from the known point. „ The range shift (how much farther [ADD] or close [DROP] the target is in relation to the known point, to the nearest 100 meters). „ The vertical shift (how much the altitude of the target is above [UP] or below [DOWN] the altitude of the known point, expressed to the nearest 5 meters). Vertical shift is usually only significant if it is greater than or equal to 35 meters.

8-66

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Target Description 8-120. The observer must describe the target in enough detail that the FDC can determine the amount and type of ammunition to use. The FDC selects different ammunition for different types of targets. The observer should be brief but accurate. The description should contain the following: z What the target is (such as troops, equipment, supply depot, trucks). z What the target is doing (such as digging in, in an assembly area). z The number of elements in the target (such as squad, platoon, three trucks, six tanks). z The degree of protection (such as in the open, in foxholes, in bunkers with overhead protection). 8-121. The target size and shape if these are significant. If the target is rectangular, the length and width (in meters) and the attitude (azimuth of the long axis, 0000-3199 mils) to the nearest 100 mils should be given, for example, “ATTITUDE 2800, LENGTH 400, WIDTH 300”. If the target is circular, the radius should be given, for example, RADIUS 200. Linear targets may be described by length, width, and attitude.

METHOD OF ENGAGEMENT 8-122. The observer may indicate how he wants to attack the target. This element consists of the type of adjustment, “DANGER CLOSE”, “MARK”, trajectory, ammunition, and distribution.

Type of Adjustment 8-123. Two types of adjustment may be employed–area and precision. Area fire is standard without request. z Area. Area fire is used to attack an area target. Since many area targets are mobile, the adjustment should be as quick as possible, consistent with accuracy, to keep the target from escaping. A well-defined point at or near the center of the area to be attacked should be selected and used as an aiming point. This point is called the adjusting point during adjust fire missions. To achieve surprise, fire may be adjusted on an auxiliary point, and after adjustment is completed, the FFE shifted to the target. Normally, adjustment on an area target is conducted with one adjusting weapon. z Precision. Precision fire is conducted with one weapon on a point target. It is used to either obtain registration corrections or to destroy a target. When the mission is a registration, it is initiated by the FDC with a message to observer (MTO). If the target is to be destroyed, the observer announces “DESTRUCTION.” Danger Close 8-124. DANGER CLOSE is included in the method of engagement when the target is (rounds will detonate) within 600 meters of any friendly troops for mortars and artillery, 750 meters for 5-inch naval guns. See FM 3-09.32, for a listing of risk-estimate distances for surface-to-surface and air-delivered munitions Mark 8-125. MARK is included in the method of engagement to indicate that the observer is going to call for rounds for either of the following reasons: z To orient himself in his zone of observation. z To indicate targets to ground troops, aircraft, or other observers. z Trajectory. z Low Angle. Standard without request. z High Angle. If high angle is desired, it is requested immediately after type of engagement. If the firing unit determines that high angle must be used to attack a target, the FDC must inform the observer in the MTO that high angle will be used. Mortars fire only high angle.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-67

Chapter 8

Ammunition 8-126. The observer may request any type of ammunition during the adjustment or the FFE phase of his mission. Shell HE with fuze quick is normally used in adjustment. If that is what the observer desires, he need not request it in his call for fire. If the observer does not request a shell-fuze in effect, the fire direction officer (FDO) determines the shell-fuze combination. Unit SOP may designate a standard shellfuze combination. Note. Ammunition standards may vary from unit to unit. The observer must learn these standards upon assignment to a unit. 8-127. If the observer does desire other than standard shell/fuze combinations the shell/fuze "in adjust" is announced first, then the shell/fuze "in effect". For FFE missions, it is not necessary to announce "in effect" after the shell/fuze request. z Followed By. This is part of a term used to indicate a change in the rate of fire, in the type of ammunition, or in another order for FFE, for example white phosphorous (WP) FOLLOWED BY HE. z Projectile. Examples of requests for other than HE projectile are ILLUMINATION, dual purpose improved conventional munitions (DPICM), and SMOKE. z Fuze. Most missions are fired with fuze quick during the adjustment phase. If fuze quick is desired or if a projectile that has only one fuze is requested, fuze is not indicated. Illuminating, improvised conventional munitions (ICM) and smoke projectiles are fuzed with time fuzes; therefore, when the observer requests ILLUMINATION, ICM, or SMOKE, he does not announce TIME. z Volume of Fire. The volume of fire desired in FFE is stated in rounds per weapon system. Distribution 8-128. The observer may control the pattern of bursts in the target area. This pattern of bursts is called a sheaf. Unless otherwise requested, a standard sheaf is a circular target with a 100 meter radius. The ballistic computer system for the weapon system used determines individual weapon aiming points to distribute the bursts for best coverage of this type of target (see Figure 8-42).

8-68

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Figure 8-42. Standard sheaf 8-129. A converged sheaf places all rounds on a specific point and is used for small, hard targets (see Figure 8-43).

Figure 8-43. Converged sheaf

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-69

Chapter 8

8-130. An open sheaf separates the bursts by the maximum effective burst width of the shell fired (see Figure 8-44).

Figure 8-44. Open sheaf 8-131. Special sheafs (linear, rectangular, circular, or irregular) of any length and width may be requested. If target length, or length and width are given, attitude also must be given. If target length is greater than or equal to five times the target width, the ballistic computer system assumes a linear target. The mortar ballistic computer always assumes the target is linear and fires a parallel sheaf unless a special sheaf is requested (see Figure 8-45).

Figure 8-45. Special sheaf

8-70

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

8-132. The parallel sheaf distributes the bursts of all pieces similar to the distribution of weapons on the gun line due to firing the same data with each piece (see Figure 8-46).

Figure 8-46. Parallel sheaf

METHOD OF FIRE AND CONTROL 8-133. The method of fire and control element indicates the desired manner of attacking the target, whether the observer wants to control the time or delivery of fire, and whether he can observe the target. The observer announces methods of fire and control as discussed below.

Method of Fire 8-134. In area fire, the adjustment normally is conducted with one howitzer or with the center gun of a mortar platoon or section. If the observer determines that more than one gun is necessary for adjustment, he can request 2 GUNS IN ADJUST or PLATOON/BATTERY RIGHT (LEFT). (Adjusting at extreme distances may be easier with two guns firing.) The normal interval fired by a platoon or battery right (left) is 5 seconds. If the observer wants some other interval, he may so specify.

Method of Control 8-135. The methods of control are— z Fire When Ready. This method is standard without request. z At My Command. If the observer wishes to control the time of delivery of fire, he includes AT MY COMMAND in the method of control. When the pieces are ready to fire, the FDC announces PLATOON (or BATTERY or BATTALION) IS READY, OVER. (Call signs are used.) The observer announces FIRE when he is ready for the pieces to fire. This only applies to adjusting rounds and the first volley of a FFE. AT MY COMMAND remains in effect throughout the mission until the observer announces CANCEL AT MY COMMAND, OVER. At my command can be further specified. BY ROUND AT MY COMMAND controls every round in adjustment and every volley in the FFE phase.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-71

Chapter 8

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

8-72

Cannot Observe. CANNOT OBSERVE indicates the observer cannot see the target (because of vegetation, terrain, weather, or smoke); however, he has reason to believe a target exists at the given location and that it is important enough to justify firing on it without adjustment. Time on Target (TOT). The observer may tell the FDC when he wants the rounds to impact by requesting TIME ON TARGET, 0859, OVER. The observer must ensure his time and the FDC's time are synchronized prior to the mission. Time to Target (TTT). The observer may tell the FDC when he wants the rounds to impact by requesting TIME TO TARGET (so many) MINUTES AND SECONDS, OVER, STANDBY, HACK, OVER. Time to target is the time in minutes and seconds after the "hack" statement is delivered when rounds are expected to hit the target. Continuous Illumination. In this method of control, illumination projectiles are fired at specified time intervals to provide uninterrupted lighting on the target or specified area. The observer may specify the time interval (in seconds). If the observer does not provide a time interval, the FDC determines the interval by the burning time of the illumination ammunition in use. If any other interval is required, it is indicated in seconds. Coordinated Illumination. The observer may order the interval between illumination and HE projectiles, in seconds, to achieve a time of impact of the HE coincident with optimum illumination; or he may use normal AT MY COMMAND procedures. The command ILLUMINATION MARK is used to tell the FDC when the illumination round is providing optimal visibility on the target. Cease Loading. The command CEASE LOADING is used during the firing of two or more rounds to indicate the suspension of loading rounds into the gun(s). The gun sections may fire any rounds that have already been loaded. Check Firing. CHECK FIRING is used to cause an immediate halt in firing. Use this command only when necessary to “immediately” stop firing (such as for safety reasons) as it may result in cannons being out of action until any rammed/loaded rounds can be fired or cleared from the tubes. Continuous Fire. In field artillery (FA), mortars and naval gunfire (NGF), continuous fire means loading and firing as rapidly as possible, consistent with accuracy, within the prescribed rate of fire for the equipment. Firing will continue until suspended by the command CEASE LOADING or CHECK FIRING. Repeat. REPEAT can be given during adjustment or FFE missions. During Adjustment REPEAT means firing another round(s) with the last data and adjust for any change in ammunition if necessary. REPEAT is not sent in the initial call for fire. During FFE, REPEAT means fire the same number of rounds using the same method of FFE as last fired. Changes in the number of guns, the previous corrections, the interval, or the ammunition may be requested. Request Splash. SPLASH can be sent at the observer's request. The FDC announces SPLASH to the observer 5 seconds prior to round impact. SPLASH must be sent to aerial observers and during high-angle fire missions. Do Not Load. DO NOT LOAD allows the section to prepare ammunition and lay on the target without loading a projectile. When the command CANCEL DO NOT LOAD is given the section automatically loads and fires the weapon (except for an at my command mission). Duration. DURATION is usually used for suppression missions. DURATION will tell the FDC the total time a target needs to be engaged.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

SAMPLE MISSIONS 8-136. See Figure 8-47a and Figure 8-47b for sample calls for fire for various type missions.

EXAMPLES FIRE MISSION Initial Fire Request Observer Z57 THIS IS Z71, ADJUST FIRE, OVER.

FD THIS IS Z57, ADJUST FIRE OUT.

GRID NK180513, OVER. GRID NK180513, OUT. INFANTRY PLATOON IN THE OPEN, ICM IN EFFECT, INFANTRY PLATOON IN THE OPEN, ICM IN EFFECT, OUT.

Message to Observer Z, 2 ROUNDS, TARGET AF1027, Z, 2 ROUNDS, TARGET AF1027, BREAK, DIRECTION 1680, OVER. DIRECTION 1680, OUT. Note. Direction is sent before or with the first subsequent correction. FIRE MISSION (SHIFT) Initial Fire Request Observer H66 THIS IS H44, ADJUST FIRE SHIFT AA7733, OVER.

FDC

THIS IS H66, ADJUST FIRE SHIFT AA7733, OUT. DIRECTION, 5210, LEFT 380, ADD 400, DOWN 35, OVER. DIRECTION, 5210, LEFT 380, ADD 400, DOWN 35, OUT. COMBAT OP IN OPEN, ICM IN EFFECT, OVER COMBAT OP IN OPEN, ICM IN EFFECT, OUT. Message to Observer H, 1 ROUND, TARGET AA7742, OVER. H, 1 ROUND, TARGET AA7742, OUT.

Figure 8-47a. Fire mission examples

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-73

Chapter 8

EXAMPLES (Continued) FIRE MISSION (POLAR) Initial Fire Request Observer Z56 THIS IS Z31, FIRE FOR EFFECT, POLAR, OVER.

FDC

THIS IS Z56, FIRE FOR EFFECT, POLAR, OUT. DIRECTION 4520, DISTANCE 2300, DOWN 35, OVER. DIRECTION 4520, DISTANCE 2300, DOWN 35, OUT. INFANTRY COMPANY IN OPEN, ICM, OVER. INFANTRY COMPANY IN OPEN, ICM, OUT. Message to Observer Y, VT, 3 ROUNDS, TARGET AF2036, OVER. Y, VT, 3 ROUNDS, TARGET AF2036, OUT. FIRE MISSION (SUPPRESSION) Observer H18 THIS IS H24, SUPPRESS AB3104, OVER.

FDC THIS IS H18, SUPPRESS AB3104, OUT.

FIRE MISSION (IMMEDIATE SUPPRESSION) Observer H18 THIS IS H24, IMMEDIATE SUPPRESSION, GRID 211432, OVER.

FDC THIS IS H18, IMMEDIATE SUPPRESSION, GRID 211432, OUT.

Note. A two gun section using two rounds of HE or VT normally fires immediate suppression missions. However, the -type of ammunition, units to fire, and volume may vary based on unit SOP.

Figure 8-47b. Fire mission examples (continued)

ADJUSTING FIRES 8-137. An observer's prime concern is the placement of timely and accurate fires on targets. If an observer can locate the target accurately, he will request FIRE FOR EFFECT in his call for fire. Failure to locate the target accurately may result from poor visibility, deceptive terrain, poor maps, or the observer's difficulty in pinpointing the target. If the observer cannot locate the target accurately enough to warrant FFE, he may conduct an adjustment. Even with an accurate target location, if current firing data corrections are not available, the FDO (FA), or mortar platoon leader may direct that an adjustment be conducted. Normally, one gun is used in adjustment. Special situations in which more than one gun is used are so noted throughout this discussion.

8-74

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

8-138. When it is necessary for the observer to adjust fire, he must select an adjusting point. In area missions, he must select a well-defined point near the center of the target area on which to adjust the fire. The point selected is called an adjusting point. The location of this point is the target location element of the call for fire in an area fire mission 8-139. Prior to commencing area fire adjustments, the first thing to be determined is the observer-target (OT) direction followed by determining the OT factor. To determine the OT factor when the OT range is greater than 1,000 meters, the range from the observer to the target (OT distance) is expressed to the nearest thousand and then expressed in thousands (see Figure 8-48).

EXAMPLE OT range = 4,200 meters OT distance (expressed to nearest thousand) = 4,000 OT factor (expressed in thousands) = 4 Figure 8-48. Observer target factor calculation 8-140. For an OT range less than 1,000 meters, the distance is expressed to the nearest 100 meters and expressed in thousands (see Figure 8-49).

EXAMPLE OT range = 800 meters OT factor = 0.8 Figure 8-49. Observer target factor

SPOTTINGS 8-141. A spotting is the observer's determination of the location of the burst (or the mean point of impact [MPI] of a group of bursts) with respect to the adjusting point as observed along the OT line. Spottings are made for the following: z Deviation (the number of mils right or left of the OT line). z Distance (whether the burst occurred beyond or short of the target). z When fuze time is fired, the height of burst (HOB) (the number of mils the burst is above the target). 8-142. Spottings must be made by the observer the instant the bursts occur except when the spottings are delayed deliberately to take advantage of drifting smoke or dust. The observer is usually required to announce his spottings during his early training; experienced observers make spottings mentally. The observer should consider the most difficult spottings first. The sequence of spottings is HOB (air or graze), range (over or short), and deviation (left or right). For the purpose of this manual we will only discuss deviation and range spottings for an in-depth discussion on adjustment of fire (see FM 6-30).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-75

Chapter 8

Range Spotting 8-143. Definite range spottiness is required to make a proper range adjustment. Any range spotting other than DOUBTFUL, LOST, or UNOBSERVED is definite. Normally, a round which impacts on or near the OT line results in a definite range spotting. Figure 8-50 shows the approximate areas for various range spottiness. An observer may make a definite range spotting when the burst is not on or near the OT line by using his knowledge of the terrain, drifting smoke, shadows, and wind. However, even experienced observers must use caution and good judgment when making such spottiness. Possible range spottiness are as follows: z OVER. A round that impacts beyond the adjusting point. z SHORT. A round that impacts between the observer and the adjusting point. z TARGET. A round that impacts on the target. This spotting is used only in precision fire (registration or destruction missions). z RANGE CORRECT. A round that impacts at the correct range. z DOUBTFUL. A round that can be observed but cannot be spotted as OVER, SHORT, TARGET, or RANGE CORRECT. z LOST. A round whose location cannot be determined by sight or sound. z UNOBSERVED. A round not observed but known to have impacted (usually heard). z UNOBSERVED OVER or SHORT. A round not observed but known to have impacted over or short.

Figure 8-50. Range spotting for observer adjustments

8-76

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Deviation Spotting 8-144. A deviation spotting is the angular measurement from the adjusting point to the burst as seen from the observer's position. During a fire mission, the observer measures the deviation, in mils, with his binoculars (or another angle-measuring instrument). Deviation spottings are measured to the nearest 5 mils for area fires and 1 mil for precision fires (see Figure 8-51). Possible deviation spottings are as follows: z LINE. A round that impacts on line (LN) with the adjusting point as seen by the observer (on the OT line). z LEFT. A round that impacts left (L) of the adjusting point in relation to the OT line. z RIGHT. A round that impacts right (R) of the point in relation to the OT line.

Figure 8-51. Deviation spotting of 30 left

TYPES OF CORRECTIONS 8-145. After a spotting has been made, the observer must send corrections to the FDC to move the burst onto the adjusting point. The corrections are sent, in meters, in reverse of the order used in making spottings; that is, deviation, range, and HOB.

Deviation Corrections 8-146. The distance in meters that the burst is to be moved (right or left) is determined by multiplying the observer's deviation spotting in mils by the OT distance in thousands of meters (the OT factor). Table 8-9 depicts some deviation corrections. Deviation corrections are expressed to the nearest 10 meters. A deviation correction less than 30 meters is a minor deviation correction. It should not be sent to the FDC except as refinement data or in conduct of a destruction mission.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-77

Chapter 8

Table 8-9. Deviation computations OT Range

OT Factor

Spotting Example

Deviation Correction

4,000 meters 2,500 meters 3,400 meters 1,500 meters 700 meters

4 2 3 2 0.7

45R 100L 55L 20R 45L

“LEFT 180” “RIGHT 200” “RIGHT 160” “LEFT 40” “RIGHT 30”

Range Correction 8-147. When making a range correction, the observer attempts to "add" or "drop" the adjusting round, along the OT line, from the previous burst to the target. If his spotting was SHORT, he will add; if his spotting was OVER, he will drop. The observer must be aggressive in the adjustment phase of an adjust fire mission. He must use every opportunity to shorten that phase. He should make every effort to correct the initial round onto the target and enter FFE as soon as possible. Successive bracketing procedures should be used only when time is not critical. When conducting an adjustment onto a target, the observer may choose to establish a range bracket.

ADJUSTMENT TECHNIQUES 8-148. There are four techniques that can be used to conduct area adjustment fires. Successive bracketing is best when observers are inexperienced or when precise adjustment is required, such as precision registrations and destruction missions. It mathematically ensures that FFE rounds will be within 50 meters of the target. Hasty bracketing is best when responsive fires are required and the observer is experienced in the adjustment of fire. One-round adjustment provides the most responsive fires but generally requires either an experienced observer or an observer equipped with a LRF. Creeping fire is used in danger close missions. Upon completion of each mission, refinement data and surveillance are required. From this surveillance the FDC can determine the effectiveness of the fires.

Successive Bracketing 8-149. After the first definite range spotting is determined, the observer should send a range correction to the FDC to establish a range bracket of known distance (one round over and one round short). Once the bracket has been established, the observer successively splits the bracket until he is assured the rounds will be within 50 meters of the adjusting point when he fires for effect. Normally, range changes of 100, 200, 400, or 800 meters are used to make splitting the bracket easier. The observer enters FFE when he is sure of rounds impacting within 50 meters of the adjusting point (see Figure 8-52 through Figure 8-57).

8-78

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

EXAMPLE The first round impacts over the adjusting point. The observer should send a drop correction enough to place the next round short of the adjusting point.

Figure 8-52. Initial splash of adjustment fire

EXAMPLE The observer sends “DROP 400 (-400)” after observing his first round. The next round impacted short of the adjusting point.

Figure 8-53. First adjustment round, “DROP 400”

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-79

Chapter 8

EXAMPLE The observer has now established a range bracket. He has had one round over and one short of the adjusting point, separated by 400 meters. Using the successive bracketing technique, the observer sends “ADD 200 (+200).”

Figure 8-54. Second adjustment, “ADD 200”

EXAMPLE The third round impacts over the adjusting point. The observer has a 200-meter bracket because round 2 impacted short of the adjusting point and the distance between the two rounds was 200 meters. Splitting the bracket, the observer sends “DROP 100 (-100), FIRE FOR EFFECT.”

Figure 8-55. Final adjustment, “DROP 100, FIRE FOR EFFECT”

8-80

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Hasty Bracketing 8-150. Experience has shown that effectiveness on the target decreases as the number of rounds used in adjustment increases. An alternative to successive bracketing is the hasty bracketing technique. Successive bracketing mathematically ensures the observer that the FFE rounds will impact within 50 meters of the adjusting point, however, it is a slow and unresponsive technique. Therefore, if the nature of the target dictates that effective fires are required in less time than the successive bracketing technique would take, the hasty bracketing technique should be used. The success of hasty bracketing adjustment depends on a thorough terrain analysis that gives the observer an accurate initial target location. The observer gets a bracket on his first correction much as in the successive bracketing technique. He uses this initial bracket as a yardstick. to determine his subsequent correction. He then sends the FDC the correction to move the rounds to the target and FIRE FOR EFFECT. EXAMPLE The first round impacts approximately 35 mils right and 100 meters short of the adjusting point. The observer spots it as SHORT, 35 RIGHT. With an OT factor of 4, the observer sends LEFT 140, ADD 200.

Figure 8-56. Hasty bracketing, first round

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

8-81

Chapter 8

EXAMPLE The next round impacts approximately 10 mils left and 50 meters over the adjusting point. The observer spots it as OVER, 10 LEFT. He looks at the round and the adjusting point and decides that he needs to go right 40 meters (10 x OT factor of 4) and drop 50. He will then be on his adjusting point. Therefore, he sends RIGHT 40, DROP 50, FIRE FOR EFFECT.

Figure 8-57. Hasty bracketing, second round

One-Round Adjustment 8-151. Unlike the preceding two adjustment techniques, this method does not require the establishment of a bracket. The observer spots the location of the first round, calculates and transmits to the FDC the corrections necessary to move the burst of the round to the adjusting point, and fires for effect. This technique requires either an experienced observer or one with accurate distance-measuring equipment such as a LRF. All missions conducted by using a ground/vehicular laser locator designator (G/VLLD) should be FFE or one-round adjustments.

Creeping Fire (Danger Close) 8-152. The creeping method of adjustment is used during danger close missions. The observer should make range changes by creeping the rounds to the target, using corrections of 100 meters or less, rather than making large range corrections.

8-82

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Chapter 9

Engage – Collective Chapter 9 provides standardized methods for directing and controlling fires applicable to the individual vehicle, the section, and the entire platoon. Chapter 9 covers the procedures used from the time targets are acquired, through the placement of fires on those targets, to the reporting of the effects of those fires to the company/troop commander. Also included are considerations for fire distribution and control during offensive and defensive operations. Although the discussion focuses on actions at the platoon and section level, these actions are always integrated into, and become part of, the company or troop plan.

Contents Section I – Section, Platoon, and Company Fire Control............................... 9-2 Principles of Fire Control .................... 9-2 Fire Control Measures ........................ 9-3 Section II – Direct Fire Planning and Execution ................................................. 9-13 Direct Fire Planning .......................... 9-13 Company/Platoon/Section Fire Commands ....................................... 9-14

Section III – Indirect Fire Planning and Execution ................................................. 9-18 Indirect Fire Planning ........................ 9-18 Indirect Fire Team ............................. 9-19 Fire Planning ..................................... 9-19 Fire Support Planning for Offensive Operations ........................................ 9-20 Fire Support Planning for Defensive Operations ........................................ 9-21 Target Attack..................................... 9-26

Figure 9-1. Engagement process (engage)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-1

Chapter 9

SECTION I – SECTION, PLATOON, AND COMPANY FIRE CONTROL

PRINCIPLES OF FIRE CONTROL 9-1. Effective fire control requires a unit to rapidly acquire the enemy and mass the effects of fires to achieve decisive results in the close fight. When planning and executing direct fires, the commander and subordinate leaders must know how to apply several fundamental principles. The purpose of these principles of direct fire is not to restrict the actions of subordinates. Applied correctly, these principles help the company team accomplish its primary goal in any direct fire engagement–to both acquire first and shoot first giving subordinates the freedom to act quickly upon acquisition of the enemy. This discussion focuses on the following principles: z Mass the effects of fire. z Destroy the greatest threat first. z Avoid target overkill. z Employ the best weapon for the target. z Minimize friendly exposure. z Prevent fratricide. z Plan for limited visibility conditions. z Develop contingencies for diminished capabilities.

MASS THE EFFECTS OF FIRE 9-2. The company team must mass its fires to achieve decisive results. Massing entails focusing fires at critical points and distributing the effects. Random application of fires is unlikely to have a decisive effect. For example, concentrating the company team’s fires at a single target may ensure its destruction or suppression; however, that fire control technique will probably not achieve a decisive effect on the enemy formation or position.

ASSESS AND DESTROY THE MOST DANGEROUS THREAT FIRST 9-3. The order in which the company team engages enemy forces is in direct relation to the danger they present. The threat posed by the enemy depends on his weapons, range, and positioning. Presented with multiple targets, a unit will, in almost all situations, initially concentrate fires to destroy the greatest threat, and then distribute fires over the remainder of the enemy force.

AVOID TARGET OVERKILL 9-4. Use only the amount of fire required to achieve necessary effects. Target overkill wastes ammunition and ties up weapons that are better employed acquiring and engaging other targets. The idea of having every weapon engage a different target, however, must be tempered by the requirement to destroy the greatest threats first.

EMPLOY THE BEST WEAPON FOR THE TARGET 9-5. Using the appropriate weapon for the target increases the probability of rapid enemy destruction or suppression and saves ammunition. The company team has many weapons with which to engage the enemy. Target type, range, exposure, weapons and ammunition availability, and desired target effects are key factors in determining the weapon and ammunition that should be employed. Additionally, leaders should consider individual crew capabilities when deciding on the employment of weapons. The commander task organizes and arrays his forces based on the terrain, enemy, and desired effects of fires (an example is when the commander expects an enemy infantry assault in restricted terrain, he would employ his infantry squads, taking advantage of their ability to best engage numerous, fast-moving targets).

9-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

MINIMIZE FRIENDLY EXPOSURE 9-6. Units increase their survivability by exposing themselves to the enemy only to the extent necessary to engage them effectively. Natural or man-made defilade provides the best cover from kinetic energy (KE) direct fire munitions. Crews and squads minimize their exposure by constantly seeking effective available cover, attempting to engage the enemy from the flank, remaining dispersed, firing from multiple positions, and limiting engagement times.

PREVENT FRATRICIDE 9-7. All personnel must be proactive in reducing the risk of fratricide and noncombatant casualties. There are numerous tools to assist in this effort. They are identification training for combat vehicles and aircraft, the unit’s weapons safety posture, the weapons control status (WCS), recognition markings, and a common operational picture (COP). Knowledge and employment of applicable rules of engagement (ROE) are the primary means of preventing noncombatant casualties.

PLAN FOR EXTREME LIMITED VISIBILITY CONDITIONS 9-8. At night, limited visibility fire control equipment enables the company team to engage enemy forces at nearly the same ranges that are applicable during the day. Obscurants such as dense fog, heavy smoke, and blowing sand, however, can reduce the capabilities of thermal and infrared (IR) equipment. The unit should, therefore, develop contingency plans for such extreme limited visibility conditions. Although decreased acquisition capabilities have minimal effect on area fire, point target engagements will likely occur at decreased ranges. Typically, firing positions, whether offensive or defensive, must be adjusted closer to the area or point where the commander intends to focus fires. Another alternative is the use of visual or IR illumination when there is insufficient ambient light for passive light intensification devices.

DEVELOP CONTINGENCIES FOR DIMINISHED CAPABILITIES 9-9. Leaders initially develop plans based on their unit’s maximum capabilities; they make alternate plans for implementation in the event of casualties or weapon damage or failure. While leaders cannot anticipate or plan for every situation, they should develop plans for what they view as the most probable occurrences. Building redundancy into these plans, such as having two systems observe the same sector, is an invaluable asset when the situation (and the number of available systems) permits. Designating alternate sectors of fire provides a means of shifting fires if adjacent elements are knocked out of action. Examples of contingencies for diminished capabilities include— z Designating certain vehicles to engage certain targets due to ammunition shortages or weapon malfunctions. z Designating certain vehicles within the combined arms platoon to engage certain targets due to inherent weapon range/firepower limitations. z Designating certain vehicles to engage certain targets due to vehicle fire control system malfunctions.

FIRE CONTROL MEASURES 9-10. Fire control measures are the means by which the commander or subordinate leaders control fires. Application of these concepts, procedures, and techniques assist the unit in acquiring the enemy, focusing fires on him, distributing the effects of the fires, and preventing fratricide. At the same time, no single measure is sufficient to effectively control fires. At the company team level, fire control measures will be effective only if the entire unit has a common understanding of what they mean and how to employ them. The following discussion focuses on the various fire control measures employed by the company team. Table 9-1 lists the control measures; it is organized by whether they are terrain-based or threat-based.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-3

Chapter 9

Table 9-1. Common fire control measures Terrain-Based Fire Control Measures

Threat-Based Fire Control Measures

Target reference point Engagement area Sector of fire Direction of fire Terrain-based quadrant Friendly-based quadrant Maximum engagement line Restrictive fire line Final protective line

Rules of engagement Weapons ready posture Weapons safety posture Weapons control status Engagement priorities Engagement criteria Engagement techniques Fire patterns Target array

TERRAIN-BASED FIRE CONTROL MEASURES 9-11. The company team commander uses terrain-based fire control measures to focus and control fires on a particular point, line, or area rather than on a specific enemy element. The following paragraphs describe the tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) associated with this type of control measure.

Target Reference Point 9-12. A target reference point (TRP) is a recognizable point on the ground that leaders use to orient friendly forces and focus and control direct fires. In addition, when TRPs are designated as indirect fire targets, they can be used in calling for and adjusting indirect fires. Leaders designate TRPs at probable enemy locations and along likely avenues of approach. These can be natural or man-made points. A TRP can be an established site, such as a hill or a building, or an impromptu feature designated as a TRP on the spot, like a burning enemy vehicle or smoke generated by an artillery round. Friendly units can also construct markers to serve as TRPs. Ideally, TRPs should be visible in three observation modes (unaided, passive-IR, and thermal) so they can be seen by all forces. Example of TRPs include the following features and objects: z Prominent hill mass. z Distinctive building. z Observable enemy position. z Destroyed vehicle. z Ground-burst illumination. z Smoke round.

Engagement Area 9-13. This fire control measure is an area along an enemy avenue of approach where the commander intends to mass the fires of available weapons to destroy an enemy force. The size and shape of the engagement area (EA) is determined by the degree of relatively unobstructed intervisibility available to the unit’s weapon systems in their firing positions and by the maximum range of those weapons. Typically, commanders delineate responsibility within the EA by assigning each platoon a sector of fire or direction of fire; these fire control measures are covered in the following paragraphs.

Sector of Fire 9-14. A sector of fire is a defined area that must be covered by direct fire. Leaders assign sectors of fire to subordinate elements, crew-served weapons, and individual Soldiers to ensure coverage of an area of responsibility. Leaders may also limit the sector of fire of an element or weapon to prevent accidental engagement of an adjacent unit. In assigning sectors of fire, commanders and subordinate leaders consider the number and types of weapons available. In addition, they must consider acquisition system type and

9-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

field of view in determining the width of a sector of fire (for example, while unaided vision has a wide field of view, its ability to detect and identify targets at certain ranges and in limited visibility conditions is restricted). Conversely, most fire control acquisition systems have greater detection and identification ranges than the unaided eye, but their field of view is narrow. Means of designating sectors of fire include— z TRPs. z Clock direction. z Terrain-based quadrants. z Friendly-based quadrants.

Direction of Fire 9-15. A direction of fire is an orientation or point used to assign responsibility for a particular area on the battlefield that must be covered by direct fire. Leaders designate directions of fire for the purpose of acquisition or engagement by subordinate elements, crew-served weapons, or individual Soldiers. Direction of fire is most commonly employed when assigning sectors of fire would be difficult or impossible because of limited time or insufficient reference points. Means of designating a direction of fire include— z Closest TRP. z Clock direction. z Cardinal direction. z Tracer on target. z IR laser pointer.

Quadrants 9-16. Quadrants are subdivisions of an area created by superimposing an imaginary pair of perpendicular axes over the terrain to create four separate areas or sectors. Quadrants can be based on the terrain, friendly forces, or enemy formation. 9-17. The method of quadrant numbering is established in the unit standing operating procedures (SOP); however, care must be taken to avoid confusion when quadrants based on terrain, friendly forces, and the enemy formations are used simultaneously. Terrain-Based Quadrant 9-18. A terrain-based quadrant entails use of a TRP, either existing or constructed, to designate the center point of the axes that divide the area into four quadrants. This technique can be employed in both offensive and defensive operations. In the offense, the commander designates the center of the quadrant using an existing feature or by creating a reference point (for example, using a ground burst illumination round, a smoke marking round, or a fire ignited by incendiary or tracer rounds). The axes delineating the quadrants run parallel and perpendicular to the direction of movement. In the defense, the commander designates the center of the quadrant using an existing or constructed TRP. 9-19. In the examples shown in Figure 9-2, quadrants are marked using the letter “Q” and a number (Q1 to Q4); quadrant numbers are in the same relative positions as on military map sheets (from Q1, as the upper left-hand quadrant, clockwise to Q4, as the lower left-hand quadrant).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-5

Chapter 9

Figure 9-2. Examples of terrain-based quadrants Friendly-Based Quadrant 9-20. The friendly-based quadrant technique entails superimposing quadrants over the unit’s formation. The center point is based on the center of the formation, and the axes run parallel and perpendicular to the general direction of travel. For rapid orientation, the friendly-quadrant technique may be better than the clock-direction method; this is because different elements of a large formation are rarely oriented in the same direction and because the relative dispersion of friendly forces causes parallax to the target. Figure 9-3 illustrates use of friendly-based quadrants.

Figure 9-3. Example of friendly-based quadrants

9-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

Maximum Engagement Line 9-21. A maximum engagement line (MEL) is the linear depiction of the farthest limit of effective fire for a weapon or unit. This line is determined by the weapon’s or unit’s maximum effective range and by the effects of terrain. For example, slope, vegetation, structures, and other features provide cover and concealment that may prevent the weapon from engaging out to the maximum effective range. An MEL serves several purposes. The commander may use it to prevent crews from engaging beyond the maximum effective range, to define criteria for the establishment of triggers, and to delineate the maximum extent of battle space on the sector sketch.

Restrictive Fire Line 9-22. A restrictive fire line (RFL) is a linear fire control measure beyond which engagement is prohibited without coordination. In the offense, the commander may designate an RFL to prevent a base of fire element from firing into the area where an assaulting element is maneuvering. This technique is particularly important when armored vehicles support the maneuver of infantry squads. In the defense, the commander may establish an RFL to prevent the unit from engaging a friendly rifle squad positioned in restricted terrain on the flank of an avenue of approach.

Final Protective Line 9-23. The final protective line (FPL) is a line of fire established where an enemy assault is to be checked by the interlocking fires of all available weapons. The unit reinforces this line with protective obstacles and with final protective fires (FPF) whenever possible. Initiation of the FPF is the signal for elements, crews, and individual Soldiers to shift fires to their assigned portion of the FPL. They spare no ammunition in repelling the enemy assault, a particular concern for machine guns and other automatic weapons.

THREAT-BASED FIRE CONTROL MEASURES 9-24. The company team commander uses threat-based fire control measures to focus and control fires by directing the unit to engage a specific enemy element rather than to fire on a point or area. The following paragraphs describe the TTPs associated with this type of control measure.

Fire Patterns 9-25. Fire patterns are a threat-based measure designed to distribute the fires of a unit simultaneously among multiple, similar targets. They are most often used by platoons to distribute fires across an enemy formation. Leaders designate and adjust fire patterns based on terrain and the anticipated enemy formation. The basic fire patterns, illustrated in Figure 9-4, are the following: z Frontal. z Cross. z Depth. Frontal 9-26. Leaders may initiate frontal fire when targets are arrayed in front of the unit in a lateral configuration. Weapon systems engage targets to their respective fronts (for example, the left flank weapon engages the left-most target; the right flank weapon engages the right-most target). As targets are destroyed, weapons shift fires toward the center of the enemy formation and from near to far. Cross 9-27. Leaders initiate cross fire when targets are arrayed laterally across the unit’s front in a manner that permits diagonal fires at the enemy’s flank or when obstructions prevent unit weapons from firing frontally. Right flank weapons engage the left-most targets; left flank weapons engage the right-most targets. Firing diagonally across an EA provides more flank shots, thus increasing the chance of kills. It

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-7

Chapter 9

also reduces the possibility that friendly elements will be detected if the enemy continues to move forward. As enemy targets are destroyed, weapons shift fires toward the center of the enemy formation. Depth 9-28. Leaders initiate depth fire when targets are dispersed in depth, perpendicular to the unit. Center weapons engage the closest targets; flank weapons engage deeper targets. As the unit destroys targets, weapons shift fires toward the center of the enemy formation.

Figure 9-4. Examples of fire patterns

Target Array 9-29. Target array permits the commander to distribute fires when the enemy force is concentrated and terrain-based controls are inadequate. This threat-based distribution measure is created by superimposing a quadrant pattern over an enemy formation. The pattern is centered on the enemy formation, with the axes running parallel and perpendicular to the enemy’s direction of travel. The target array fire control measure is effective against an enemy with a well-structured organization and standardized doctrine; however, it may prove less effective against an enemy that presents few organized formations or does not follow strict prescribed tactics. Quadrants are described using their relative locations. The examples in Figure 9-5 illustrate the target array technique.

9-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

Figure 9-5. Examples of target array

Engagement Priorities 9-30. Engagement priorities, which entail the sequential ordering of targets to be engaged, can serve one or more of the following critical fire control functions: z Prioritize high-priority targets (HPT). In concert with his concept of the operation, the commander determines which target types provide the greatest payoff; he can then set these as a unit engagement priority. (Example: The commander may decide that destroying enemy engineer assets is the best way to prevent the enemy from breaching an obstacle.) z Employ the best weapons for the target. Establishing engagement priorities for specific friendly systems increases the effectiveness with which the unit employs its weapons. (Example: The engagement priority for the company team’s tanks could be enemy tanks first, then enemy personnel carriers (PC); this would decrease the chance that the team’s lighter systems will have to engage enemy armored vehicles.) z Distribute the unit’s fires. Establishing different priorities for similar friendly systems helps to prevent overkill and achieve effective distribution of fires. (Example: The commander may designate the enemy’s tanks as the initial priority for one Bradley Fighting Vehicle [BFV] platoon while making the enemy’s PCs the priority for another platoon. This would decrease the chance of multiple tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire-guided [TOW] being launched against two enemy tanks while the dangers posed by the PCs are ignored.)

Weapons Ready Posture 9-31. The weapons ready posture is a means by which leaders use their estimate of the situation to specify the ammunition and range for the most probable anticipated engagement. The ammunition selection is dependent on the target type, but the leader may adjust it based on engagement priorities, desired effects, and effective range. Range selection is dependent on the anticipated engagement range; it is affected by terrain intervisibility, weather, and light conditions. Within the company team, weapons ready posture affects the types and quantities of ammunition loaded in ready boxes, stowed in ready racks, and carried by rifle squads. 9-32. The following considerations apply: z For tanks, weapons ready posture is defined as the battlecarry. z For BFVs, weapons ready posture covers the selected ammunition and the indexed range.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-9

Chapter 9

z

For infantry squads, weapons ready posture is the selected ammunition and indexed range for individual and crew-served weapons. (Example: An M203 grenadier whose most likely engagement is to cover dead space at 200 meters from his position might load high-explosive dual-purpose [HEDP] ammunition and set 200 meters on his quadrant sight. To prepare for an engagement in a wooded area where engagement ranges are extremely short, an anti-armor specialist might dismount with an AT4 instead of a Javelin.)

Engagement Criteria 9-33. Engagement criteria is a specific set of conditions that dictates initiation of fires. Engagement criteria, specifies the circumstances in which subordinate elements are to engage. The circumstances can be based on a friendly or enemy event. (Example: The engagement criteria for a friendly platoon to initiate engagement could be three or more enemy combat vehicles passing or crossing a given point or trigger line. This trigger line can be any natural or man-made linear feature, such as a road, ridgeline, or stream. It may also be a line perpendicular to the unit’s orientation, delineated by one or more references points.)

Rules of Engagement 9-34. ROEs specify the circumstances and limitations under which forces may engage; they include definitions of combatant and noncombatant elements and prescribe the treatment of noncombatants. Factors influencing ROE are national command policy, the mission and commander’s intent, the operational environment, and the law of war. ROE always recognize a Soldier’s right of self-defense; at the same time, they clearly define circumstances in which he may fire.

Weapons Safety Posture 9-35. Weapons safety posture is an ammunition handling instruction that allows the commander to precisely control the safety of his unit’s weapons. Leader’s supervision of the weapons safety posture, as well as Soldier’s adherence to it, minimizes the risk of negligent discharge and fratricide. Table 9-2 outlines procedures and considerations for the company team in using the four weapons safety postures, listed in ascending order of restrictiveness: z Red direct (ammunition loaded). z Red tight (ammunition locked). z Amber and clear (ammunition prepared). z Green and clear (weapons cleared). 9-36. In setting and adjusting the weapons safety posture, the commander must weigh the desire to prevent negligent discharges against the requirement for immediate action based on the enemy threat. If the threat of direct contact is high, for example, the commander may establish the weapons safety posture as ammunition loaded. If the requirement for action is less immediate, he may lower the posture to ammunition locked or ammunition prepared. Additionally, the commander may designate different weapons safety postures for different elements of the unit. For example, in the attack position, tanks and BFVs may switch to ammunition loaded while rifle squads riding in BFVs remain at ammunition locked.

9-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

Table 9-2. Weapons safety posture levels Element Safety Posture

Tank Weapons and Ammunition

BFV Weapons and Ammunition

Crew-Served and Squad Weapons and Ammunition

Red Direct

Main gun ammunition loaded. Machine gun ammunition on feed tray, bolt locked to rear. Smoke grenades in launchers. Weapons on electrical safe.

25-mm rounds cycled to the bolt. Coax rounds on feed tray, bolt locked to rear. TOW missiles in launchers. Smoke grenades in launchers. Weapons on electrical safe.

Rifle rounds chambered. Machine gun and SAW ammunition on feed tray, bolt locked to rear. Grenade launcher loaded. Weapons on manual safe.

Red Hold

Main gun ammunition is loaded. Machine gun ammunition on feed tray, bolt forward. Smoke grenades in launchers. Weapons on electrical and mechanical safe.

25-mm rounds loaded in feeder but not cycled to the bolt. Coax rounds on feed tray, bolt locked to rear. TOW missiles in launchers. Smoke grenades in launchers. Weapons on electrical safe.

Magazines locked into rifles. Machine gun and SAW ammunition on feed tray, bolt locked forward. Grenade launcher unloaded.

Amber and Clear

Main gun ready rack filled. Machine gun ammunition boxes filled. Smoke grenades in launchers. Weapons on electrical and mechanical safe.

25-mm ready boxes filled. First round at the forwarder. Coax ammunition boxes filled. TOW missiles in launchers. Smoke grenades in launchers. Weapons on electrical safe.

Magazines, ammunition boxes, launcher grenades, hand grenades prepared but stowed in pouches/vests.

Green and Clear

Main gun ready rack filled. Machine guns cleared with bolts locked to the rear. Weapons on electrical and mechanical safe.

25-mm feeder removed, feeder and chamber cleared. Coax bolt group removed and chamber clear.

Magazines, ammunition boxes and launcher grenades removed, weapons cleared.

Engagement Techniques 9-37. Engagement techniques are effects-oriented fire distribution measures. The following engagement techniques, the most common in company team operations, are covered in this discussion: z Point fire. z Area fire. z Simultaneous fire. z Alternating fire.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-11

Chapter 9

z z z z

Observed fire. Sequential fire. Time of suppression. Reconnaissance by fire.

Point Fire 9-38. Point fire entails concentrating the effects of a unit’s fire against a specific, identified target such as a vehicle, machine gun bunker, or antitank guided missile (ATGM) position. When leaders direct point fire, all of the unit’s weapons engage the target, firing until it is destroyed or the required time of suppression has expired. Employing converging fires from dispersed positions makes point fire more effective because the target is engaged from multiple directions. The unit may initiate an engagement using point fire against the most dangerous threat, and then revert to area fire against other, less threatening point targets. Area Fire 9-39. Area fire involves distributing the effects of a unit’s fire over an area in which enemy positions are numerous or are not obvious. If the area is large, leaders assign sectors of fire to subordinate elements using a terrain-based distribution method such as the quadrant technique. Typically, the primary purpose of the area fire is suppression; however, sustaining effective suppression requires judicious control of the rate of fire. Simultaneous Fire 9-40. Units employ simultaneous fire, to rapidly mass the effects of their fires or to gain fire superiority (for example, a unit may initiate a support by fire operation with simultaneous fire, and then revert to alternating or sequential fire to maintain suppression). Simultaneous fire is also employed to negate the low probability of hit and kill of certain antiarmor weapons (for example, a rifle squad may employ simultaneous fire with its AT4s to ensure rapid destruction of a BMP). Alternating Fire 9-41. In alternating fire, pairs of elements continuously engage the same point or area target one at a time (for example, a company team may alternate fires of two platoons; a tank platoon may alternate the fires of its sections; or an infantry platoon may alternate the fires of a pair of machine guns). Alternating fire permits the unit to maintain suppression for a longer duration than does volley fire; it also forces the enemy to acquire and engage alternating points of fire. Observed Fire 9-42. Observed fire is normally used when the company team is in protected defensive positions with engagement ranges in excess of 2,500 meters. It can be employed between elements of the company team, such as the tank platoon lasing and observing while the BFV platoon fires, or between sections of a platoon. The commander or platoon leader directs one element or section to engage. The remaining elements or section observes fires and prepares to engage on order in case the engaging element consistently misses its targets, experiences a malfunction, or runs low on ammunition. Observed fire allows for mutual observation and assistance while protecting the location of the observing elements. Sequential Fire 9-43. Sequential fire entails the subordinate elements of a unit engaging the same point or area target one after another in an arranged sequence (for example, a mechanized infantry platoon may sequence the fires of its four BFVs to gain maximum time of suppression). Sequential fire can also help to prevent the waste of ammunition, as when an infantry rifle platoon waits to see the effects of the first Javelin before firing another. Additionally, sequential fire permits elements that have already fired to pass on information they have learned from the engagement. An example would be an infantryman who missed a BMP with AT4 fires passing range and lead information to the next Soldier preparing to engage the BMP with an AT4.

9-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

Time of Suppression 9-44. Time of suppression is the period, specified by the commander, during which an enemy position or force is required to be suppressed. Suppression time is typically dependent on the time it will take a supported element to maneuver. Normally, a unit suppresses an enemy position using the sustained rate of fire of its automatic weapons. In planning for sustained suppression, leaders must consider several factors: the estimated time of suppression, the size of the area being suppressed, the type of enemy force to be suppressed, range to the target, rates of fire, and available ammunition quantities. The following example lists steps that a unit might take in calculating time of suppression capabilities: z The BFVs in a mechanized infantry platoon are given the task of suppressing an area to support the assault of another element. z One BFV, firing 25-mm high-explosive incendiary with tracer (HEI-T) ammunition at a sustained rate of 60 rounds per minute, expends 180 rounds (capacity of the large ready box, minus sufficient rounds for easy reloading) in 3 minutes. z Given an adjusted basic load of 720 rounds of high-explosive (HE), a single BFV can sustain fire for four periods of 3 minutes, requiring three reloads of 180 rounds into the large ready box. z A BFV crew, using a loader in the troop compartment, can reload the large ready box with 180 rounds in about 3 minutes if the ammunition is already prepared for loading. z Using an individual BFV’s sustained rate of fire of 60 rounds per minute and alternating the fire of sections to permit reloading (one section fires for 3 minutes while the other reloads), the platoon can sustain 120 rounds per minute for 24 minutes. Reconnaissance by Fire 9-45. Reconnaissance by fire is the process of engaging possible enemy locations to elicit a tactical response, such as return fire or movement. This response permits the commander and subordinate leaders to make accurate target acquisition and then mass fires against the enemy element. Typically, the commander directs a subordinate element to conduct the reconnaissance by fire (for example, he may direct an overwatching platoon to conduct the reconnaissance by fire against a probable enemy position before initiating movement by a bounding element).

SECTION II – DIRECT FIRE PLANNING AND EXECUTION

DIRECT FIRE PLANNING 9-46. Leaders plan direct fires to be able to distribute and control their fire. Determining where and how the company team can mass fires is an essential step in this process. See FM 3-90.1 for a detailed discussion of the process of the company team. 9-47. Based on where and how they want to focus and distribute fires, leaders can establish the weapons ready postures for their elements, as well as engagement criteria for initiating fires. During mission preparation, leaders plan and conduct rehearsals of direct and indirect fires (and of the fire control process) based on the estimate of the situation.

DIRECT FIRE STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURES 9-48. A well-rehearsed direct fire SOP ensures quick, predictable actions by all members of the company team. The commander bases the various elements of the SOP on the capabilities of his force and on anticipated conditions and situations. SOP elements should include means for— z Focusing fires. z Distributing their effects. z Orienting forces. z Preventing fratricide.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-13

Chapter 9

COMPANY/PLATOON/SECTION FIRE COMMANDS 9-49. Fire commands are oral orders issued by commanders and leaders to focus and distribute fires as required and to achieve decisive effects against the enemy. They allow leaders to rapidly and concisely articulate their firing instructions using a standard format. Unit fire commands include these elements, which are discussed in detail in the following paragraphs: z Alert. z Weapon or ammunition (optional). z Target description. z Orientation. z Range (optional). z Control. z Execution. z WCS.

ALERT 9-50. The alert specifies the elements that are directed to fire. It does not require the leader initiating the command to identify himself. Examples of the alert element (call signs and code words based on unit SOP) include the following: z “GUIDONS” (all subordinate elements). z “RED” (1st Platoon only). z “ALPHA” (Alpha Section only).

WEAPON OR AMMUNITION (OPTIONAL) 9-51. This element identifies the weapon and/or ammunition to be employed by the alerted elements. Leaders may designate the type and number of rounds to limit expenditure of ammunition. Examples of this element include the following: z “TOW.” z “TWO ROUNDS SABOT.”

TARGET DESCRIPTION 9-52. Target description designates which enemy elements are to be engaged. Leaders may use the description to focus fires or achieve distribution. Examples of target description include the following: z “THREE PCs.” z “THREE TANKS AND TEN PCs.” z “TROOPS IN TRENCH.”

ORIENTATION 9-53. This element identifies the location of the target. There are numerous ways to designate the location of target, including— z Closest TRP (example: “TRP 13”). z Clock direction (example: “ONE O’CLOCK”). z Terrain quadrant (example: “QUADRANT ONE”). z Friendly quadrant (example: “LEFT FRONT”). z Target array (example: “FRONT HALF”). z Tracer on target (example: “ON MY TRACER”). z Laser pointer (example: “ON MY POINTER”).

9-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

RANGE (OPTIONAL) 9-54. The range element identifies the distance to the target. Announcing range is not necessary for systems that are range finder equipped or that employ command-guided or self-guided munitions. For systems that require manual range settings, leaders have a variety of means for determining range, including— z Predetermined ranges to TRPs or phase lines (PL). z An M1A1/M1A2 tank crew announcing the range for a M2/M3 A2-equipped platoon. z Hand-held range finders. z Range stadia. z Mil reticle.

CONTROL 9-55. The commander may use this element to direct desired target effects, distribution methods, or engagement techniques. Subordinate leaders may include the control element to supplement the commander’s instructions and achieve effective distribution. Examples of information specified in the control element include— z Target array (example: “FRONT HALF”). z Fire pattern (example: “FRONTAL”, “DEPTH”, “CROSS”). z Terrain quadrant (example: “QUADRANT ONE”). z Engagement priorities (example: “TANKS ENGAGE TANKS; BFVs ENGAGE PCs”). z Engagement technique (example: “VOLLEY”, “AREA”).

WEAPONS CONTROL STATUS 9-56. The final element is the WCS. The three levels of WCS outline the conditions, based on target identification criteria, under which friendly elements may engage. The commander sets and adjusts the WCS based on friendly and enemy disposition and the clarity of the situation. In general, the higher the probability of fratricide, the more restrictive the WCS. The three levels, in descending order of restrictiveness, are— z WEAPONS HOLD. Engage only if engaged or ordered to engage. z WEAPONS TIGHT. Engage only targets that are positively identified as enemy. z WEAPONS FREE. Engage any targets that are not positively identified as friendly. z CEASE FIRE. All firing will immediately stop. 9-57. As an example, the commander may establish the WCS as WEAPONS HOLD when friendly forces are conducting a passage of lines. By maintaining situational understanding (SU) of his own elements and adjacent friendly forces; however, he may be able to lower the WCS. In such a case, the commander may be able to set a WEAPONS FREE status when he knows there are no friendly elements in the vicinity of the engagement. This permits his elements to engage targets at extended ranges even though it is difficult to distinguish targets accurately at ranges beyond 2,000 meters under battlefield conditions. A further consideration is that the WCS is extremely important for forces using combat identification systems; establishing the WCS as WEAPONS FREE permits leaders to engage an unknown target when they fail to get a friendly response.

EXECUTION 9-58. The execution element specifies when fires will be initiated. The commander may wish to engage immediately, delay initiation, or delegate authority to engage. Examples of this element include— z “FIRE.” z “AT MY COMMAND...FIRE” z “AT PHASE LINE _____________.”

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-15

Chapter 9

PLATOON MOVEMENT COMMAND (DEFENSIVE ENGAGEMENTS) 9-59. The platoon movement command is used while engaging from a defensive battle position. It allows the platoon leader to coordinate the movement of the platoon from the defilade to an enfilade position and back to the defilade at the end of the engagement. It ensures that the platoon’s firepower is maximized in the EA and assists in promoting shock effect. The most commonly used example of this element includes— z “TOP HAT, TOP HAT” (Tells the platoon to move from their defilade position to the enfilade). z “LOW SKY, LOW SKY” (Tells the platoon to move from their enfilade position back down to the defilade).

Sample Fire Commands

Figure 9-6. Sample frontal fire command

9-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

Figure 9-7. Sample cross-fire command

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-17

Chapter 9

Figure 9-8. Sample depth fire command

SECTION III – INDIRECT FIRE PLANNING AND EXECUTION

INDIRECT FIRE PLANNING 9-60. Mortars are organic to the combined arms battalion or reconnaissance squadron. They are organized as platoons in all combined arms battalions. They are organized as sections in cavalry troops. Regardless of the organization to which they belong, mortars have the battlefield role of providing the maneuver commander with immediate indirect fires. This section provides an overview for planning organic indirect fires. See FM 3-90.1 and FM 3-22.91 for a detailed discussion.

9-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

9-61. For mortar fire to be effective, it must be dense enough to hit the target at the right time with the right projectile and fuze. Some type of observation is desirable for every target to ensure that fire is placed on the target. 9-62. Mortars are area fire weapons; however, units can employ them to neutralize or destroy area or point targets, screen large areas with smoke for sustained periods, or provide illumination.

INDIRECT FIRE TEAM 9-63. Indirect fire procedures are a team effort (Figure 9-9). They include locating the target, designating the correct asset to fire the mission, determining firing data, applying data to the mortar, and preparing the ammunition. Fire support teams (FIST) are located in artillery units and, depending on the mission, are attached to maneuver units. The team consists of a forward observer (FO), a fire direction center (FDC), and mortar squads. 9-64. The FO, as part of the FIST, is normally provided by a direct support (DS) artillery battalion. One four-man FO team supports each mechanized infantry/armor company. 9-65. The FDC has two computer personnel in each section who control the mortar firing. They convert the data from the FO in a CFF into firing data that can be applied to the mortar and ammunition.

Figure 9-9. Indirect fire team

FIRE PLANNING 9-66. The ability of mortar platoons to engage targets with accurate and sustained fires depends on the precision and detail of fire plans. Fire planning is concurrent and continuous at all levels of command. The principles of fire planning used by field artillery (FA) also apply to mortars.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-19

Chapter 9

FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING FOR OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS 9-67. Fires planned to support an attack consist of a preparation, if ordered, and subsequent fires. The preparation may be delivered before the advance of the assault elements from their line of departure (LD) and may continue for a short time thereafter. Fires planned for the preparation are normally limited to known targets and suspected areas. The delivery of fires on scheduled targets should be consistent with the threat imposed, time available for coordination, and availability of ammunition. 9-68. Fires planned in support of the attack are shifted to conform to the movements of the supported unit. They are planned in the form of targets, groups of targets, and series of targets. They may be fired on a time schedule or on-call and may include targets from the LD to the objective, on the objective, and beyond the objective. 9-69. Supporting fires have several specific objectives. They assist the advance of the supported unit by neutralizing enemy forces, weapons, and observation short of the objective. They assist the supported unit in gaining fire superiority on the objective so that the assaulting force can close to assault distance, and they protect the supported unit during reorganization. On-call targets are planned on likely assembly areas and routes for enemy counterattacks. Supporting fires prevent the enemy from reinforcing, supplying, or disengaging his forces. 9-70. The following are some general offensive fire support (FS) planning considerations: z Synchronize targeting meetings with the air tasking order (ATO) cycle, and use them to refine high-payoff target lists (HPTL) and confirm decide, detect, deliver, and assess (D3A) methodology. z Post the most current maneuver graphics, fire support coordination measures (FSCM), FS unit locations, ranges of FS systems and targets. z Check the target overlay periodically to ensure that the current enemy situation is reflected in targeting. z Ensure that fire plans address the commander’s FS guidance and allocation of resources. Fire support elements (FSE) must allow enough time both to update FS computers for rehearsals and convert them back for actual operations. z Check communications systems with all elements. z Determine the times that all FS systems must be ready based on the scheme of maneuver. z Determine how and when to shift the priority of fires. Also, determine what will be the “trigger” for shifting the priorities of fire. z Consider developing an interdiction plan to disrupt enemy preparation of the objective. z Plan fires short of the LD/line of contact (LD/LC). Plan defensive fires (for example, FPFs) for unit assembly areas and trains. z Plan fires en route to the LD/LC. z Plan fires to support a hasty defense if attack fails. z Plan fires to limit enemy efforts at counterreconnaissance. z Plan fires from the LD/LC to the objective. z Provide priority of fires to lead elements. z Consider using fires to suppress enemy direct fire weapons. z Consider using smoke to limit enemy observation of friendly maneuver elements. z Consider using smoke to screen friendly obstacle breaching operations. z Consider planning fires on exposed flanks to disrupt counterattacks. z Consider task organization of observers to ensure that all critical targets are observed.

9-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

z

z

z

z

Consider preparatory fires. Ensure that they are tied to maneuver events (that is, are not just timed). Advantages must outweigh the loss of surprise. Fires must be accurate to be effective; consider how successful reconnaissance efforts have been—and whether there will there be a need to adjust preparation fires before executing the assault. Ensure that ammunition is available to accomplish the commander’s guidance. Consider whether the enemy will be able to recover from the effects of the preparation prior to the assault. Determine when and how to shift fires (particularly priority targets en route). Use: time (at a predetermined time, fires will shift), location (fires shift when maneuver reaches a certain location, such as a PL), on call (the maneuver commander directs when the fires shift), or event (a predetermined event signals shifting of fires). Ensure that the method to be used is understood by all FS assets, from observer to delivery means. Plan fires on the objective— „ Consider fires to delay enemy reinforcements and resupply by ground or air. „ Consider fires to suppress enemy direct fire weapons. „ Consider obscurants to screen friendly forces or obscure hostile ground observation when consolidating on the objective. „ Designate a signal for lifting or shifting fires. Ensure that the signal is understood by maneuver elements. „ Plan fires in support of a hasty defense upon successful attack of the enemy objective. Plan fires beyond the objective— „ To divert, delay, disrupt, or limit enemy reinforcements. „ To block avenues of approach for counterattacking forces. Consider using FA-delivered scatterable mine (SCATMINE) to assist in this effort. „ To disrupt or delay enemy retreat. „ Ensure that subordinate elements maintain communications and report unit location and status hourly.

FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING FOR DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS 9-71. Fires in support of defensive operations include long-range fires, close defensive fires (CDF), FPFs, and fires within the battle area.

Long-Range Fires 9-72. Long-range fires are designed to engage the enemy as early as possible to inflict casualties, delay his advance, harass him, interdict him, and disrupt his organization. Long-range weapons engage the enemy as soon as he comes within range. As a result, the volume of fire increases as the enemy continues to advance and comes within range of additional weapons. A counterpreparation designed to disrupt the enemy’s attack preparations before the attack can be fired as part of long-range fires.

Close Defensive Fires 9-73. CDFs are supporting fires employed to destroy the enemy attack formations before the assault.

Final Protective Fires 9-74. FPFs are planned to prohibit or break up the enemy assault on the forward defense area. They consist of prearranged fires of supporting weapons to include machine gun FPLs and mortar and artillery FPF. Only those weapons whose FPFs are in front of the threatened units will fire their assigned fires; all other available weapons will use observed fire to supplement or reinforce the FPF in the threatened area. Direct fire weapons will engage targets in front of the threatened area to reinforce FPF or to engage other targets.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-21

Chapter 9

9-75. The artillery and mortar FPF are integrated with the FPL of machine guns. Each artillery battery normally fires one FPF. The mortar platoon of the battalion may fire one or two FPF; however, the platoon’s fires are more effective in one FPF than in two. 9-76. The following are some general defensive FS planning considerations: z Synchronize targeting meetings with the ATO cycle, and use them to refine HPTL and confirm D3A methodology. z Post the most current maneuver graphics, FSCMs, FS unit locations, and ranges of FS systems and targets. z Check the target overlay periodically to ensure that the current enemy situation is reflected in targeting. z Ensure that fire plans built at brigade and subordinate levels are based on the commander’s FS guidance and allocation of resources. Fire plans (to include special munitions, such as SCATMINE) must be entered into the FS computer in time to conduct technical rehearsals and prepare for firing. z Check communications systems with all elements. z Identify requirements for positioning observers forward of friendly maneuver forces. Ensure that extraction guidelines are established and understood. Develop backup plans in case these FOs are forced to withdraw prior to execution of key essential fire support tasks (EFST). z Determine what time is needed for all FS systems to be ready based on the scheme of maneuver, and ensure that these times are met. z Determine how and when to shift the priority of fires. Determine what will be the “trigger” to shift the priority of fires. 9-77. In addition, in planning FS for defensive operations, plan FS early and throughout the entire defensive sector— z Plan fires in support of the security area. z Plan counterreconnaissance fires. Consider augmenting forward elements with observers and the use of laser-guided munitions, if available. z Plan fires to support delaying actions, to disrupt or limit the momentum of the enemy’s attack, to reduce the enemy’s combat power, and to force the enemy commander to deploy his forces early. When applicable, fires may also support efforts to divert an enemy’s attack. z Locate and destroy HPTs that must be eliminated to prevent enemy success and to support friendly shaping and decisive operations. z Consider using fires to separate enemy formations. z Position observers on templated avenues of approach. z Plan fires on key choke points. z Employ combat observation and lasing team (COLT) and Knight teams in overwatch positions to provide early warning, range-finding, and target designation. z Plan SCATMINE and smoke to separate lead elements from follow-on forces— „ Ensure that FS assets are identified and directed to support the counterfire battle. „ Plan counter-preparation fires. „ Coordinate common sensor boundaries to help in delineating radar responsibilities. z Plan fires in the main battle area (MBA)— „ Plan fires throughout the MBA. „ Mass fires to limit, disrupt, delay, divert, and damage the enemy. „ Plan fires to assist maneuver during retrograde operations. „ Position secondary observers to back up those observers responsible for observing key areas or executing critical FS triggers. „ Plan fires on key obstacles and assign redundant observers to execute the fire plan. „ Know the engineer obstacle plan and types of obstacles.

9-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

Consider the terrain when targeting obstacles. Fires placed incorrectly force the enemy to take an alternate course of action. „ Consider the use of smoke to support the obstacle plan. Plan fires in support of EAs— „ Use FS to canalize the enemy. „ Plan groups for simultaneous engagement within EAs. „ Plan series to preclude enemy movement out of EAs. „ Mass fires in EAs. „ Plan coordinated attack in EAs with air assets. „ Consider the use of illumination in the EA. Plan defensive fires— „ Integrate FS into the direct fire defensive plan. „ Suppress enemy indirect and direct fire weapons. „ Assign priority targets and FPFs to battle positions, strong points, or perimeter defenses. „ Plan for use of smoke during periods of limited visibility to degrade enemy night vision capabilities. „ Plan for contingencies to reallocate FS to strengthen vulnerabilities. Plan to support hasty attack— „ Use quick fire planning techniques. „ Place coordinated fire line (CFL) close to forward defensive positions to facilitate rapid engagements. „

z

z

z

TERMINOLOGY 9-78. Some of the common terms used in fire planning are defined as follows: z Target. A target is troops, weapons, equipment, vehicles, buildings, or terrain that warrants engagement by fire and that may be numbered for future reference (see Figure 9-10). A solid cross designates a target on overlays, with the center of the cross representing the center of the target. The target number consists of two letters and four numbers allocated by higher headquarters. This numbering system identifies the headquarters that planned the target, distinguishes one target from another, and prevents duplication. z Targets of opportunity. Targets of opportunity are targets for which fires have not been planned. z Planned targets. Planned targets are scheduled or on call. „ Scheduled targets are fired at a specific time before or after H-hour, or upon completion of a predetermined movement or task. „ On-call targets are fired only upon request. They include targets for which firing data is kept current, and targets for which firing data is not prepared in advance (for example, a road junction (a prominent terrain feature) that the FO may use as a reference point).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-23

Chapter 9

Figure 9-10. Scheduled target (TRP type)

Figure 9-11. Planned targets (linear type) z

9-24

FPF. FPF is an immediately available, prearranged barrier of fire designed to impede enemy movement across defensive lines or areas (Figure 9-12). The FPF is represented on a map or firing chart by a linear plot. The designation of the unit that will fire the FPF is placed above the plot representing the FPF.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

Figure 9-12. Linear target symbol with FPF label

TARGET CONSIDERATIONS 9-79. Planned targets include areas of known, suspected, and likely enemy locations and prominent terrain features. These areas are determined through intelligence sources, knowledge of the situation, and map and terrain study. They are planned without regard to boundaries or weapon abilities. Duplication of effort will be resolved by the next higher headquarters.

FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATION MEASURES 9-80. The FIST and FS planners use FSCM to ensure that fires impacting in their zone will not jeopardize troop safety, interfere with other FS means, or disrupt adjacent unit operations.

Boundaries 9-81. Boundaries determined by maneuver commanders establish the operational zone for a maneuver unit and the area in which the commander fires and maneuvers freely. A unit may fire and maneuver against clearly identified enemy targets near or over its boundary, as along as such action does not interfere with adjacent units.

Coordination Measures 9-82. Coordination measures designate portions of the battlefield where actions may or may not be taken. The fire support coordinator (FSCOORD) or FIST chief recommends coordination measures; the commander establishes them. Coordination measures facilitate operations by establishing rules and guidelines for selected areas for a given time. There are two categories: permissive and restrictive. z Permissive Measures. Permissive measures are drawn in black on overlays and maps. They are titled and indicate the establishing headquarters and the effective date, time group (DTG). Permissive measures allow fires into an area such as a free-fire area or across a line; an example of such is a fire support coordination line (FSCL) that need not be further coordinated as long as they remain within the zone of the established headquarters.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-25

Chapter 9

A coordinated fire line is a line beyond which conventional surface FS means–mortars, FA, and naval gunfire (NGF)–may fire any time within the zone of the establishing headquarters without further coordination. „ An FSCL is a line beyond which all targets may be attacked by any weapon system without endangering troops or requiring further coordination with the establishing headquarters. The effects of any weapon system may not fall short of this line. „ A free-fire area is a designated area into which any weapon system may fire without further coordination with the establishing headquarters. Restrictive Measures. Restrictive measures are drawn in red. They are titled and indicate the establishing headquarters and the effective DTG. Restrictive measures mean that fires into an area or across a line must be coordinated with the establishing headquarters on a case-by-case basis. Examples of restrictive measures include a restrictive fire area (RFA), a no-fire area, a RFL, and an airspace coordination area (ACA). „ A RFA is an area in which specific restrictions are imposed and into which fires that exceed those restrictions will not be delivered without coordination with the establishing headquarters. „ A no-fire area is an area in which no fires or effects of fires are allowed. There are two exceptions: − When the establishing headquarters approves fires temporarily within a no-fire area on a mission basis. − When an enemy force within the no-fire area engages a friendly force and the commander engages the enemy to defend his force. „ A RFL is a line established between converging friendly forces (one or both may be moving) that prohibits fires or effects from fires across the line without coordination with the affected force. An ACA is a block of airspace in the target area in which friendly aircraft are reasonably safe from friendly surface fires. It may be a formal measure, but it is usually informal. „

z

z

TARGET ATTACK 9-83. The FIST chief, when planning fires or deciding to engage a target, ensures that the fire conforms to the scheme of maneuver of the supported unit. He must also be informed of the present enemy situation. In determining the method of attack, the FDC chief considers target description, registration data, size of attack area, and the maximum rate of fire.

METHOD OF ATTACK 9-84. The method of attacking a target depends largely on its description, which includes the type, size, density, cover, mobility, and importance. Those factors are weighed against the guidelines established by the commander. The FDC then decides the type of projectile, fuze, fuze setting, and ammunition to be used. z Fortified targets must be destroyed by point-type fire using projectiles and fuzes appropriate for penetration. Mortar fire does not usually destroy armor, but it can harass and disrupt armor operations. z A target consisting of both men and materiel is normally attacked by area fire using air or impact bursts to neutralize the area. Flammable targets are engaged with HE projectiles to inflict fragmentation damage, and then with white phosphorous (WP) projectiles to ignite the material.

9-26

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engage – Collective

9-85. The method of attacking a target is governed by the results desired: suppression, neutralization, or destruction. z Suppressive Fires. Suppressive fires limit the ability of enemy troops in the target area to be an effective force. HE/PROX (proximity) creates apprehension or surprise and causes tanks to button up. Smoke is used to blind or confuse, but the effect lasts only as long as fires are continued. z Neutralization. Neutralization knocks the target out of the battle temporarily. Ten percent or more casualties usually neutralize most units. The unit becomes effective again when casualties are replaced and equipment repaired. z Destructive Fires. Destructive fires put the target out of action permanently. A unit with 30 percent or more casualties is usually rendered permanently ineffective, depending on the type and discipline of the force. Direct hits are required on hard materiel targets.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

9-27

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 10

Assess After the crew has engaged a hostile target with either direct or indirect fires, the crew collectively must assess the effects of their fires. The accurate assessment of the effects of fires will determine further courses of action to eliminate the target in the event the fires were unsuccessful, or shift their fires to additional targets on the battlefield. Accuracy in the assessment phase of the detect, identify, decide, engage, and assess (DIDEA) process and systematic reporting of their fires effects to a higher headquarters provides the maneuver commander critical information necessary to make key decisions for the unit (see Figure 10-1). The vehicle commander (VC) will have to understand kill standards (what amount of lethal force is required to destroy a threat) and the classification of effects; mobility, firepower, catastrophic, or a combination. He will also need to understand what the classifications of indirect fire assessments are, and interpret those assessments into accurate reports. This chapter details the engagement assessment process, methods to terminate direct and indirect fires, and report the end results of those fires.

Contents Section I – Engagement Termination .... 10-2 Section II – Engagement Assessment ... 10-2 Direct Fire Engagement Assessment 10-2 Indirect Fire Engagement Assessment ...................................... 10-3

Section III – Reports ................................ 10-4

Figure 10-1. The engagement process (assess)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

10-1

Chapter 10

SECTION I – ENGAGEMENT TERMINATION 10-1. The VC (or fire support officer [FSO] for indirect fire engagements) must determine when to cease fire against a target, when to shift fire to another target when multiple targets are present, and when to tactically move from one fighting position to another. Target effect may not always be clear to the crew, depending on battlefield effects (fog of war), local and threat target obscurants, weather, and optics capabilities. This requires leaders to make tactical decisions based on key indicators of munitions effects against threat targets.

SECTION II – ENGAGEMENT ASSESSMENT 10-2. When friendly forces have either directly or indirectly engaged the enemy, they must perform an assessment of enemy battle damage and threat forces’ casualties. Leaders must understand the effects of their fires and interpret their observations of those effects on enemy forces to their higher headquarters. By providing this information, crews help build a consolidated picture for the maneuver commander who will determine if the enemy is destroyed, neutralized, suppressed, or dispersed. The maneuver commander may also decide to continue the engagement or bypass the enemy.

DIRECT FIRE ENGAGEMENT ASSESSMENT KILL STANDARDS 10-3. Kill standards are classified as mobility, firepower, mobility and firepower, and catastrophic. z A mobility kill degrades a vehicle’s ability to move under its own power but still maintains the ability to use its weapon systems. z A firepower kill prevents a vehicle’s ability to use its weapon systems. z A combined mobility and firepower kill will make the vehicle noncombat effective. z A catastrophic kill is a total loss of weapons systems, vehicle mobility, and all onboard equipment.

ARMORED VEHICLES Kill Standard 10-4. Based on the ammunition and time required to achieve destruction, the standard is achieving a catastrophic kill. The minimum standard is to at least achieve a mobility or firepower kill. This renders the vehicle and its systems ineffective against friendly forces.

Kill Indicators 10-5. During an engagement, the gunner or commander may cease or shift fire to a different target for many reasons. Most of these reasons are based off of the observed actions of the threat vehicle. When assessing target effects and determining if they should lift of shift fires to another target, crew should look for some of the following signs: z The vehicle stops moving. If a vehicle stops moving, VCs may wish to reengage in the event the vehicle maintains the ability to engage his vehicle with direct fires in a degraded capacity. z The vehicle stops firing. z The vehicle is smoking from what appears to be internal damage. z The vehicle explodes with immense smoke and flames or secondary explosions occur. z The crew abandons the vehicle.

10-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Assess

Note. When a 25-mm round (armor-piercing [AP] or high-explosive [HE]) or tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire-guided (TOW) missile hits an armored vehicle, an observable explosion with flash occurs. This is the effect of the round impacting on the target, not necessarily an indication of damage to the target.

UNARMORED VEHICLES Kill Standard 10-6. Threat unarmored vehicles are multiwheeled, which allows them to continue operating with one or more tires punctured. The standard against an unarmored vehicle is the same as an armored target; to achieve a catastrophic kill. At a minimum, the crew should cause a mobility kill or cause the driver and crew to abandon the vehicle before lifting or shifting fires to another target.

Kill Indicators 10-7. One or more of the following indicators may cause the gunner or commander to cease fire or shift to a different target: z The vehicle stops moving. If a vehicle stops moving, VCs may wish to reengage in the event the vehicle maintains the ability to engage his vehicle with direct fires in a degraded capacity. z The vehicle stops firing. z The vehicle explodes. z The crew abandons the vehicle.

DISMOUNTED TROOPS AND ANTI-ARMOR SYSTEMS Kill Standard 10-8. Destruction of dismounted troop point and area targets is difficult to measure. The goal is to neutralize the dismounted troops and anti-armor firepower capability of the target through destruction, damage, or suppression.

Kill Indicators 10-9. When engaging point or area dismounted troop or anti-armor targets, the following indicators may lead the commander to cease or shift fire: z The dismounted troop threat stops maneuvering. z The dismounted troop threat’s anti-armor fire ceases or becomes noticeably ineffective. z Dismounted troop casualties are observed. Note. When suppressing an area target, the duration of required suppression is based on the mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC) requirements of the situation. Suppression should be maintained as long as the unit gains a tactical advantage by doing so or until another element can close with the target and destroy it.

INDIRECT FIRE ENGAGEMENT ASSESSMENT 10-10. Indirect fire assessment is based on the mission type and method of attack. For illumination and smoke missions, assessment is based on whether the mission met the commander’s intent. For attack missions, the assessment of success is based on the desired result of the engagement–suppression, neutralization, or destruction.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

10-3

Chapter 10

SUPPRESSION 10-11. The primary objective of suppressive fires is to get the enemy to keep their heads down, which reduces shoot, move, or observation capability of their surroundings. Suppressive fire can be aimed at direct target such as an enemy vehicle or at an area target such as a tree line where suspected enemy troops are hiding. When suppressing an area target, the duration of the required suppression is based on the METT-TC requirements of the situation. Suppression should be maintained as long as possible for the unit to gain a tactical advantage or until another element can close with the target and destroy it. The other elements should only close on the enemy once coordination has been conducted and fires have been lifted or shifted. 10-12. The purpose of suppression fire has three purposes— z To kill or destroy threat targets as quickly as possible. z To stop the threat’s engagement process. z To allow the maneuver force to close in on the threat position to provide more accurate fires. 10-13. The threat engagement process is similar to our process. In a continuous cycle, the threat elements perform the following actions: z Detect you. z Identify you as a threat. z Decide to engage you with the type of armament or firepower they currently have or deliver to you (indirect). z Engage you. z Assess the effectiveness of their fires. 10-14. If the enemy’s engagement cycle is interrupted, the target is suppressed. Once the threat target is suppressed, they must return to the beginning of their engagement process. This will allow the vehicle more time to reposition and provide more effective fires on the threat target. Suppressive fires may continue depending on how rapidly the threat returns to the engage element of the engagement process or until the threat has been neutralized or destroyed.

NEUTRALIZATION 10-15. A target is neutralized when it is temporarily taken out of the battle. Neutralizing a unit allows the maneuver commander to decide whether to continue to engage with indirect fires, maneuver to the target and engage with direct fires or bypass a target and proceed with other missions.

DESTRUCTION 10-16. Destructive fires render the vehicles or enemy units capabilities to shoot, move, communicate, and observe ineffective. A unit with thirty percent or more casualties is usually considered destroyed, depending on the type and discipline of the opposing force. Hard material targets require direct hits and should be assessed by the same kill standards as for direct fire engagements by the FSO. Although the kill indicators remain the same for direct and indirect fires, caution should still be taken when maneuvering closer to the engaged threat. These threats, although appearing to be destroyed, may still have the capability to engage with other means, such as infantry with antitank weapons that had survived the indirect fires.

SECTION III – REPORTS 10-17. When crews have finished an engagement and when time permits, they should provide their higher headquarters an accurate report outlining their engagement, current situation and enemy battle damage assessment (BDA). This can be done through two reports–BLUE-2 (situation report [SITREP]) or a BDA report. Information in the report may be based on your unit standing operating procedures (SOP) but should provide the following at a minimum: z Friendly action taken/situation. z Estimated location of destroyed enemy vehicle(s).

10-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Assess

z z z z

Number of vehicles engaged or destroyed. Time of situation. Vehicular position/posture. Tactical intentions.

10-18. Reports should be brief but accurate and detailed enough so the maneuver commander can assess his overall unit’s tactical situation. Although your vehicle may not be digitally equipped, when sending enemy positions to your command, they should be as accurate as possible. This would allow the maneuver commander or higher headquarters the ability to plot information on the Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2), if digitally equipped, or to determine possible threat areas if the enemy vehicles were not catastrophically killed. If vehicles were only suppressed or the VC is not sure the vehicles were destroyed, it should be noted in the report. 10-19. When sending the report, crew members should make the report as brief as possible. Jamming the communication line for lengthy periods of time may cause your unit to miss critical reports such as a spot report (SPOTREP) or contact report from another vehicle. 10-20. Example: Your vehicle, A-13, has just engaged and destroyed two tanks and one set of troops vicinity of TRP 3. You are currently set in battle position 2B. Table 10-1 shows an example report. Table 10-1. Situation report Description

Radio Transmission

Friendly Action Taken

“Engaged and destroyed 2 tanks and 1 set of troops”

Location of Enemy Vehicles

“Vicinity TRP 3”

Time of Situation

“1635”

Vehicular Position/Posture

“I am set BP-2B”

Tactical Intentions

“Continuing to defend, out”

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

10-5

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 11

Training Devices Chapter 11 identifies training aids, devices, simulators, and simulations (TADSS) that enhance a unit’s ability to train, sustain, and evaluate gunnery and tactical training. Chapter 11 is not intended to be a user’s guide but rather gives an overview of the systems and how they relate to a gunnery training program. Because of the high cost of ammunition and high operational tempo of training areas, the use of TADSS at home station is becoming increasingly more important. Note. TADSS undergo continuing development based on evolving doctrine and technological improvements; therefore, the information in Chapter 11 may not represent the most current training devices available for training.

Contents Section I – TADSS Overview .................. 11-1 Section II – Common TADSS .................. 11-3 Training Aids ..................................... 11-3 Devices ............................................. 11-8 Simulators and Simulations .............. 11-9 Section III – Abrams TADSS ................. 11-16 Training Aids ................................... 11-16 Devices ........................................... 11-19 Simulators and Simulations ............ 11-20

Section IV – Bradley TADSS ................. 11-23 Training Aids ................................... 11-23 Devices ........................................... 11-25 Simulators and Simulations ............. 11-26 Section V – Armed HMMWV TADSS ..... 11-29 Training Aids ................................... 11-29 Simulators and Simulations ............. 11-31

SECTION I – TADSS OVERVIEW 11-1. Trainers must identify the specific resources that increase a unit’s ability to train, sustain, and evaluate gunnery and tactical training. Table 11-1 offers a quick reference of the TADSS that relate to specific systems. See Chapter 12 for a more detailed discussion of the integration of virtual training TADSS into the gunnery training program. 11-2. TADSS are defined as— z Training Aids. Training aids are tools that provide assistance in conducting training. z Devices (Appended Equipment). Appended equipment includes three-dimensional training products that mount on the actual platform and can be activated either mechanically or electrically.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-1

Chapter 11

z

z

Simulators. Simulators are stand-alone trainers that replicate the functions of equipment or systems. They use electronic or mechanical means to reproduce conditions necessary for an individual or crew to practice operational tasks in accordance with (IAW) training objectives. Simulations. Simulations replicate a combat environment for training from the individual to the collective level using computers. Simulators, as used in this manual, refer either to networked simulators or to appended devices that provide a combat system the ability to train as a simulator. Table 11-1. Gunnery-related TADSS and systems supported

TADDS

System Supported Training Aids

Tracking Boards

Common

Laser Target Interface Device (LTID)

Common

Scale Models

Common

Dummy Rounds

Common

Recognition of Combat Vehicle (ROC-V)

Common

Devices (Appended Equipment) Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement Systems (MILES)

Common

Thru-Sight Video (TSV) Systems

Abrams/BFV Common

AIMTEST Caliber .50 Inbore Device

Abrams-Specific

Precision Gunnery System (PGS)

BFV-Specific Simulators and Simulations

Family of Conduct-of-Fire Trainers (COFT)

M1A1 Abrams and BFV ODS and Below

Bradley Advanced Training System (BATS)

BFVA3

Family of Advanced Gunnery Training Systems

Abrams-Specific

M1A1 Tabletop Gunnery Trainer (TGT)

Abrams-Specific

Abrams Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer (AFIST) XXI

Abrams-Specific (NG only)

Advanced Bradley Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer (AB-FIST)

BFV-Specific

M2 ODS Tabletop Full-Fidelity Trainer (TFT)

BFV ODS-Specific

Engagement Skills Trainer (EST) 2000

Individual and Crew Weapons through MK19

Family of Simulations Networks (SIMNET)

BFV/Abrams Common

Combined Arms Tactical Trainer (CATT) (Family of Systems)

Common

Close-Combat Tactical Trainer (CCTT) (CATT Subsystem)

BFV/Abrams Common

Close-Combat Tactical Trainer Reconfigurable Vehicle Simulator (CCTT-RVS) (CATT Subsystem)

HMMWV/HEMTT-Specific

Virtual Warrior

Individual and Crew Weapons

Virtual Combat Convoy Trainer (VCCT)

HMMWV-Specific

Virtual Convoy Operations Trainer (VCOT)

HMMWV-Specific (Levels 1 and 2) and Common (Level 3)

11-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

SECTION II – COMMON TADSS 11-3. This section describes TADSS that are common to most or all platform systems within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT). Devices that are designed for platforms with a fire control system will not apply to armed High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicles (HMMWV).

TRAINING AIDS DUMMY ROUNDS 11-4. Various dummy rounds are available to conduct training with the M256 120-mm tank cannon, the M242 25-mm automatic gun, MK19 machine gun, M2 HB machine gun, M240 machine guns, and the tube-launched, optically tracked, wire-guided (TOW) system. See the platform-specific TADSS sections of this chapter for details of various dummy round types. 11-5. Recognition of Combat Vehicle (ROC-V) is a Windows-based day optic and thermal sight vehicle identification training program developed in support of 2d Gen forward looking, infrared (FLIR) programs. This computer-based, multimedia training program can be tailored to serve as an individual tutorial, collective trainer, and standardized testing tool at individual, institutional and unit levels (see Table 11-2). Table 11-2. ROC-V usage table Individual

Crew

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

P

T

Collective

I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

GT

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

Capabilities and Limitations Capabilities 11-6. ROC-V capabilities include— z Training Vehicle Identification. Training is organized by vehicle types and confusion sets. ROC-V can train Soldiers on three different methods of visual recognition through 360 degrees of vehicle aspect. „ Visual–unaided optics. „ First generation thermal. „ Second generation thermal. z Testing Vehicle Identification. Testing is progressive throughout the training modules. Instructors can also use a pre-generated test within the system or generate their own tests. „ Gunnery skills test (GST). Instructors have the capability of generating tailored exams for their GSTs. „ Common task test (CTT). A pre-generated CTT vehicle identification test is provided with the software, or instructors can generate their own tests.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-3

Chapter 11

Limitations 11-7. ROC-V limitations include— z Limited Vehicle Backdrops. There are a limited number of pictures of each vehicle, allowing the Soldier to memorize terrain characteristics instead of vehicle recognition cues. z Limited Resolution of Pictures. Various targets, especially at longer ranges, lack the resolution for positive identification through 360 degrees of rotation.

ROC-V Training Integration 11-8. ROC-V helps Soldiers learn to identify the thermal signatures of combat vehicles through the use of an interactive curriculum that teaches the unique patterns and shapes of vehicle “hotspots,” and overall vehicle shapes and characteristics. ROC-V also provides Soldiers with practical experience in the use of their thermal sensor image controls. Through the use of virtual sight controls, Soldiers learn to adjust their thermal image to find targets and bring out their thermal identification (ID) cues (see Figure 11-1). 11-9. ROC-V should be integrated to the individual gunnery training program to train vehicle identification and for testing purposes on GST.

Figure 11-1. Sample ROC-V training screen Tracking Boards 11-10. Tracking boards are training aids that provide a crew with manipulation training for their fire control system. The boards require the gunner and vehicle commander (VC) to traverse and elevate their sight reticles to “track” within a pair of lines as if they were tracking a vehicle moving cross-country. An advanced tracking board that incorporates physically manipulating elements of the fire control system can be manufactured to make training more challenging to crews. Table 11-3 gives the specifications for designing tracking boards based on the distance from vehicle to tracking board.

11-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

Table 11-3. Tracking board usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

P

X

X

X

E

E

E

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

E

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

Tracking Board Training Integration 11-11. Power and manual control tracking board exercises should be included in individual gunnery training to build fundamental manipulation skills in the VC and gunner. Tracking board exercises are practiced with the primary sight, the auxiliary sight, as well as Commander’s Independent Thermal View (CITV)/Commander’s Independent Viewer (CIV) and the TOW reticles, both day and night (see Figure 11-2 through Figure 11-4 and Table 11-4 and Table 11-5).

Figure 11-2. Sample basic tracking board

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-5

Chapter 11

Figure 11-3. Sample advanced tracking board

Figure 11-4. Advanced with swithology

11-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

Table 11-4. Vehicle-to-target distance Vehicle-to-Tracking Line Distance (Meters)

Length of Target Line (Meters)

Width Between Parallel Lines (Millimeters)

5

1.67

14.7

10

3.33

29.4

15

5.00

44.1

20

6.67

58.8

25

8.33

73.5

30

10.00

88.2

35

11.67

102.9

40

13.33

117.6

45

15.00

132.3

50

16.67

147.0

Table 11-5. Usage Table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

P

T

X

X

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

11-12. Armored vehicle scaled models can be used to train crews in target acquisition, range determination, and vehicle identification. These models are three-dimensional and are made of a hard plastic. Scaled models enhance individual gunnery training such as range determination, gun lay, and combat vehicle identification. Scaled models are available in 1:10, 1:30, l:35, and 1:60 scale at the local training support center (TSC).

LASER TARGET INTERFACE DEVICE 11-13. The Laser Target Interface Device (LTID) aids in gunnery training with Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System (MILES)/Precision Gunnery System (PGS) (see Table 11-6). LTID allows MILES/PGS hits on a target to activate the target’s hit sensor, knocking down the target. The LTID receives a coded MILES/PGS message and converts it into electrical pulses. These pulses activate the shock generator mechanism that activates a hit sensor, simulating a projectile striking the target. LTID can be used on full-scale, half-scale, or one-tenth-scale (on M31A1 lifters). Table 11-6. Laser Target Interface Device usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

P

X

X

X

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

T

X

X

X

X

T

X

X

T

X

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-7

Chapter 11

11-14. The system components are— z Detection assembly. z Electronic assembly. z Shock generator mechanism.

Laser Target Interface Device Training Integration 11-15. Targets with LTIDs enhance training on device-based gunnery Tables II, VII, and X, and, allowing for visible target effects when using MILES or PGS. See TM 9-1265-376-10 for more information.

DEVICES THRU-SIGHT VIDEO SYSTEMS (ABRAMS AND BRADLEY) 11-16. Thru-sight video (TSV) systems are vehicle-appended systems that provide a video and audio recording of gunnery or tactical engagement exercises of vehicles with a fire control system. The TSV is designed to support all proficiency levels during dry or live-firing engagements (see Table 11-7). Table 11-7. Thru-sight video usage table Individual INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

Crew GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

X

X

X

X

Collective

GT II

GT III

GT IV

T

T

T

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

T

E

X

X

X

X

X

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

11-17. TSV records the gunners sight picture in real time; makes a recording of crew intercom and radio transmissions for critique of the live fire; records and displays fire control system information (time tags, vehicle identification, and trigger pull time) during simulated engagements and during subcaliber engagements in order to enhance the gunnery after action review (AAR).

FAMILY OF MULTIPLE INTEGRATED LASER ENGAGEMENT SYSTEMS 11-18. MILES is an integrated family of low-power, eye-safe, laser-based devices (see Table 11-8 and Figure 11-5). It simulates the casualty-producing effects of direct fire weapons using laser beams. When fired, an invisible laser beam is sent out from a transmitter. The laser beam transmits coded messages (based on the weapon and ammunition selected) to the detector belt sensors on other MILES-equipped vehicles. Various types of MILES have been fielded including— z MILES. z MILES II. z MILES 2000. Table 11-8. Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

P

X

X

X

T

X

X

X

X

T

X

X

T

X

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

11-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

Figure 11-5. Components of vehicular MILES 2000

Capabilities and Limitations 11-19. MILES enables the crew to use the vehicle in combat training exercises (force-on-force). It also provides the commander an economical way to train and evaluate his crew’s proficiency in teamwork and crew coordination during gunnery training exercises. Burst on target (BOT) and tracer on target (TOT) cannot be trained using MILES because the crew cannot see hit signatures or tracers.

MILES Training integration 11-20. MILES is integrated into the device-based gunnery programs for the various systems in the HBCT. It is an alternate training device for the Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) (when PGS is unavailable) and the tank (when the inbore subcaliber device is unavailable or impractical to use). It can be incorporated into device-based gunnery tables to include Tables I, II, VII, VIII, X, and XI.

SIMULATORS AND SIMULATIONS FAMILY OF CONDUCT-OF-FIRE TRAINERS 11-21. The Conduct-of-Fire Trainer (COFT) family is one of the primary simulators for training crew gunnery skills without using ranges, ammunition, or vehicles (see Table 11-9). The various configurations of the COFT simulate the controls and optics of the VC’s and the gunner’s positions. It simulates the use of the fire control systems against stationary and moving threats, single and multiple target arrays, during day, night, and reduced visibility conditions in various different environments. The COFT allows training without regard to time of day or climatic conditions. The current COFT configurations are the COFT, Abrams Mobile Conduct-of-Fire Trainer (MCOFT) XXI, Bradley COFT XXI and the Mobile Brigade Combat Team (BCT) BCT MCOFT XXI. Table 11-9. COFT usage table Individual INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

Crew

Collective

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

X

X

T

E

E

E

E

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

P

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-9

Chapter 11

Capabilities and Limitations 11-22. The COFT, currently employed by the active component, simulates the BFV Operation Desert Storm (ODS) and below and employs the same instructional subsystem and simulated environment as the Bradley Advanced Training System (BATS) (see page 11-27). 11-23. The BCT COFT XXI and COFT XXI are used by the reserve component and are mobile configurations of the COFT system. BCT COFT XXI is assigned to combined arms battalions in Army National Guard (ARNG) HBCTs. COFT XXI is specific to the Armored Reconnaissance Squadron (ARS) of the HBCT and includes only an M3A2 ODS and below simulator. Unique characteristics of the BCT COFT XXI and COFT XXI are— z No fixed power supply is required–powered by an integral generator. z Databases for Europe (summer and winter), desert, urban (Zussman urban site, and geo-specific Baghdad). z Crew records are interchangeable between the COFT XXI, Advanced Bradley Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer (AB-FIST), and Tabletop Full-Fidelity Trainer (TFT).

COFT Training Integration 11-24. COFT represents the primary virtual training system for equipped units for individual gunnery virtual training and gunnery skills sustainment training. It is also a useful tool for retraining crews that require it in the crew gunnery phase. COFT training builds the foundation of VC/gunner coordination and trains the crew on engagement techniques for precision and degraded modes of gunnery in offensive and defensive postures in a variety of environments. It trains in all elements of the engagement process. Some configurations of the COFT are capable of being networked to serve as collective virtual training simulations. Completion of COFT matrix training is a prerequisite to live-fire training.

CALL FOR FIRE TRAINER 11-25. The Call for Fire Trainer (CFFT) is an individual and collective training system that provides a simulated battlefield for training forward observer tasks at the institutional and unit level to accurately call for indirect fire (see Table 11-10 and Figure 11-6). It replaces the target set forward observer (TSFO) GUARDFIST II, and Field Artillery Training System (FATS). Table 11-10. Call for fire trainer usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

P

X

T

E

E

E

E

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

11-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

Figure 11-6. Call for Fire Trainer

Capabilities 11-26. The capabilities are— z Trains all Soldiers how to call for and adjust fire without the use of live ammunition. z Trains leaders how to conduct fire support planning, coordination, and execution of all supporting fires. z Multiple terrain databases (National Training Center [NTC], Fort Sill, Baghdad). z Deployable/transportable and will provide advanced distributed learning simulated military equipment, virtual environments, and Computer Generated Forces (CGF). z Operates in a stand-alone mode to train from 1 to 30 students.

HMMWV EGRESS ASSISTANCE TRAINER 11-27. The HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer is a training device designed to meet the Army specific training needs of Soldiers, institutions and the operational environment (see Table 11-11 and Figure 11-7). Hands-on training in a replicated tactical vehicle affords commanders the capability to immerse Soldiers in a replicated operational environment (without risking the safety of Soldiers, damaging expensive equipment, or potentially polluting/destroying the environment). Table 11-11. HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

P

X

T

E

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

E

E

E

E

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-11

Chapter 11

Figure 11-7. HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer

Capabilities and Limitations 11-28. The capabilities and limitations are— z Realistic training on vehicle rollover response. z Training for Soldiers to achieve self-control and overcome the natural fear and panic following the catastrophic event which led to the vehicle rollover event. z The device is designed to increase the situational awareness of vehicle rollover by permitting the instructor to observe driver performance and reactions to emergency conditions without requiring the use of an actual vehicle for initial driving and sustainment training.

ENGAGEMENT SKILLS TRAINER 2000/LASER MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING SYSTEM 11-29. The Engagement Skills Trainer (EST) 2000 simulates weapon training events that lead to live-fire individual/crew weapon qualification and training events currently not resourced under Standards and Training Commission (STRAC) (see Table 11-12 and Figure 11-8). The system saves ammunition resources. The EST is used primarily as a unit/institutional, indoor, multipurpose, multilane, small-arms, crew served, and individual antitank training simulator. Table 11-12. Engagement Skills Trainer 2000 usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

P

X

X

E

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

11-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

Figure 11-8. EST 2000 Engagement Skills Trainer

Capabilities and Limitations 11-30. The EST 2000 is capable of providing three modes of training— z Marksmanship training mode (initial and sustainment training). z Collective gunnery training mode (5 to 10 firers). z Judgmental training mode (shoot/don’t shoot training). 11-31. The EST 2000 System comes in packages that are designed to support 5, 10, or 15 lane training areas.

EST 2000 Training Integration 11-32. The EST 2000 can be incorporated into various phases of the gunnery program for virtual training. z Marksmanship Training Mode. „ Virtual pre-live-fire training for individual and crew-served weapons in rifle squads. „ Virtual pre-live-fire training for armed HMWWVs gunners and VCs. „ Virtual pre-live-fire training for tank loaders on Abrams tanks (and VCs on M1A2 System Enhancement Program [SEP] tanks). z Collective Gunnery Training Mode. „ Squad fire distribution training. „ Virtual pre-live-fire training for armed HMWWV gunners and VCs. „ Virtual pre-live-fire training for tank loaders on Abrams tanks (and VCs on M1A2 SEP tanks). z Judgmental Training Mode. Engagement decision training.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-13

Chapter 11

11-33. The Simulations Network (SIMNET) is a system of combat vehicle simulators linked to each other over a local area network (LAN) (see Table 11-13). They simulate the M1-series tank and the M2-/M3series BFV. The upgraded versions of the SIMNET (SIMNET XXI) features improved realism of the crew stations, fire control system, and optics over the legacy version. The configurations can vary from tank or infantry platoon to a battalion task force. SIMNET is primarily a maneuver training simulator system; however, it can be used to train fire distribution for collective gunnery. Table 11-13. Simulations Network usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

P

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

T

E

X

T

E

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

FAMILY OF SIMULATIONS NETWORKS Capabilities and Limitations 11-34. A company commander may train one platoon at a time using a subset of a company- or battalionsize configuration. When used as a company- or battalion-level trainer, a tactical operation center and combat trains command post are available to act as the administration, logistics and operations centers that would normally be present during combat operations. Computer-generated imagery is used to create the illusion of riding in tanks and BFVs, fighting force-on-force battles. 11-35. The system and its computers are simple to use. With few exceptions, four hours of practice will support situational training exercise (STX) training on mounted tasks. As in any training, the leader must plan and prepare his objectives in advance and make sure the entire chain of command knows the training objectives. 11-36. The SIMNET has only limited capability of integrating any squad/dismounted scout team training to the platform maneuver training. SIMNET has limited ability to integrate reconnaissance HMWWV training with tank and BFV training.

SIMNET Training Integration 11-37. SIMNET is one of the primary virtual trainers that can be used to train entire crews in maneuver for collective gunnery. It can be effectively used to prepare leaders in the fundamentals of fire planning and distribution for heavy-platform systems prior to conducting the collective gunnery phase.

COMBINED ARMS TACTICAL TRAINER 11-38. The Combined Arms Tactical Trainer (CATT) is a family of combined arms simulation systems designed to support the Army’s simulation-based combined arms training strategy. The initial CATT system is the Close Combat Tactical Trainer (CCTT), which provides the underlying baseline (architecture, terrain databases, AAR, semi-automated forces [SAF], and models/algorithms) for future CATT expansions, pre-planned product improvements, and system enhancements. The CATT systems are primarily maneuver trainers, not gunnery trainers; however, they can be successfully integrated into a gunnery training program. Current versions of the CATT include— z CCTT. The CCTT primarily simulates heavy vehicle maneuver units (see Table 11-14 and Figure 11-9). The CCTT is a system of computer-driven combat-vehicle simulators connected by LAN. Simulators include the M1 Abrams tank, the BFV, the HMMWV, and the Fire Support Team Vehicle (FIST-V). The simulators work interactively to control other vehicle models and

11-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

z z

z

functions similar to the vehicles and functions they simulate. The trainer trains mounted crews through battalion task force Soldiers in selected collective tasks. An important feature of the trainer is the CGF capability that can simulate both friendly and opposing forces with only limited human intervention from crews up through regiment. Aviation Combined Arms Tactical Trainer (AVCATT). The AVCATT is an aviation simulation system networkable with the CCTT. Virtual Warrior. The virtual warrior is a rifle squad centric collective virtual training system designed to train dismounted soldiers, leaders, and units (platoon through battalion). It enables more frequent, repetitive, standards-based training to build and sustain readiness at home station. The virtual warrior combines immersive Soldier and leader simulators with personal computer-based reconfigurable vehicle simulators, dismounted Soldier multifunctional workstations, and high-fidelity convoy trainers to support training of leaders and Soldiers from squad/crew to company with extensions to individual Soldier and battalion echelons. The virtual warrior will enable training on the full-spectrum of operations required in urban and complex terrain environments. CCTT Reconfigurable Vehicle Simulator (CCTT-RVS). CCTT-RVS introduces multiple configurations of wheeled vehicles and their various crew-served and small-arms capabilities into the CCTT simulated environment. The CCTT-RVS complements the standard combined arms CCTT family with the representation of a variety of wheeled vehicles, including multiple variants of the HMMWV and Heavy Expanded Mobility Tactical Truck (HEMTT), all equipped with small arms simulators. The CCTT-RVS allows the training of up to five crew members, including the driver, commander, gunner, and riflemen. The system also features— „ A 360-degree field of view. „ Full inventory of ballistically matched weapons with the option of tetherless performance. „ Organic radios and Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) interfaces. „ Compatibility with all CCTT terrain databases. „ Single instructor station for scenario generation, exercise control, and AAR.

CATT Training Integration 11-39. The CATT simulations are among the primary virtual trainers that can be used to train entire crews in maneuver for collective gunnery. They can be effectively used to prepare leaders in the fundamentals of fire planning and distribution for platform systems prior to conducting the collective gunnery phase. Table 11-14. Close Combat Tactical Trainer usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

P

X

X

X

X

X

X

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

X

X

T

E

X

T

E

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-15

Chapter 11

Figure 11-9. Close Combat Tactical Trainer

SECTION III – ABRAMS TADSS 11-40. This section describes TADSS that are specific to the M1-series Abrams.

TRAINING AIDS DUMMY ROUNDS 11-41. Various dummy rounds are available to conduct training with the M256 120-mm tank cannon, the M2 HB machine gun, and M240 machine guns (see Table 11-15 and Figure 11-10). Table 11-15. Dummy rounds usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

P

T

T

X

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

11-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

Figure 11-10. 7.62mm, caliber .50 and 120-mm dummy rounds

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-17

Chapter 11

120-mm Sabot, HEAT, Canister, and MPAT Dummy Rounds 11-42. The 120-mm dummy rounds are inert cartridges and are not Class V items. They can be obtained from the installation TSC. The 120-mm dummy rounds have the same weight and shape of their representative service rounds, but the projectile and cartridge case are made of a solid black plastic to distinguish them as dummy rounds (see Figure 11-10).

M2 Dummy Round (Caliber .50) 11-43. The M2 dummy round is a caliber .50 cartridge, minus the gun powder and primer. It is used for non-fire training with the M2 HB machine gun. It is made of brass with a metal tip. The cartridge case has three holes drilled into it to further identify it as a dummy round. The links can become damaged or rusty and should be changed as often as possible. 11-44. The M2 dummy round is a Class V item and can be requisitioned with DA Form 581, Request for Issue and Turn-In of Ammunition. (Table 11-16 contains information required for requisitioning the M2 dummy round.)

M172 Dummy Round (7.62 mm) 11-45. The M172 dummy round is a 7.62-mm cartridge, minus the gun powder and primer. It is used for non-fire training with the M240 machine gun. It is made of brass with a metal tip. It is recommended for use over the plastic-tipped version. (The plastic tips can become bent and get jammed, either in the weapon or the feed chute.) 11-46. The M172 dummy round is a Class V item that can be requisitioned using DA Form 581. (Table 11-16 contains information required for requisitioning this round.) Table 11-16. Requisition information Nomenclature

DODIC/TASC Item Number

Cartridge, 7.62-mm Dummy M172

A159

Cartridge, 7.62-mm Dummy M172 (Carton Packed)

A162

Cartridge, Caliber .50 Dummy M2

A560

Cartridge, 120-mm Dummy M865 TPCSDS-T

DVC-T-17-107

Cartridge, 120-mm Dummy M831A TP-T

DVC-T-17-108

Cartridge, 120-mm Dummy M1002 TP-T

DVC-T-17-111

Cartridge, 120-mm Dummy M1028 Canister

DVC-T-17-113

Cartridge, 120-mm Dummy M 829A2 APFSDS-T

DVC-T-17-112

DUMMY ROUND TRAINING INTEGRATION 11-47. Dummy rounds can be used to train several of the tasks that are part of the GST and Gunnery Table I (GT I) (Chapter 14, Individual and Crew Live-Fire Prerequisite Testing, contains the GST and GT I). z Load and clear the main gun on the Abrams tank. z Identify 120-mm main gun ammunition using the stub-base marking (Canister only) and projectile end. z Load, fire, apply immediate action, unload, and clear the tank machine guns.

11-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

CAUTION Because the M172 dummy round is made of brass and can be damaged during training, the rounds should be inspected periodically and replaced as needed. Continued use of damaged rounds or links can damage the feed chute or the weapon. The links should be changed as often as possible.

DEVICES 11-48. The caliber .50 inbore device is an internally mounted, subcaliber gunnery training device that can be used to enhance a unit’s gunnery training.

CALIBER .50 INBORE DEVICE Capabilities and Limitations 11-49. The caliber .50 inbore device is a subcaliber device that provides realistic ballistic engagement of targets at a fraction of the cost of full-caliber main gun ammunition (see Table 11-17 and Figure 11-11). Any caliber .50 ammunition can be used with this device; however, the M962 Sabot light armor penetratortracer (SLAP-T) round is the closest ballistically matched round that will simulate the 120-mm M830 highexplosive antitank (HEAT) round out to 2,000 meters. The device has the advantage over MILES that it employs the full fire control system, training the gunner in proper engagement techniques. It allows complete involvement of tank crew in the engagement process and provides the ability to observe direct fires and provide sensings for other firing vehicles. However, the caliber .50 inbore device only partially trains the loader. The caliber .50 inbore device also enables leaders to control and distribute fires. 11-50. The caliber .50 inbore device suffers the limitation of requiring a live-fire range facility to be used. Additionally, due to the extended surface danger zone of the M962 SLAP-T round, conventional caliber .50 capable ranges may not support firing this system. Table 11-17. Caliber .50 inbore device usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

X

X

X

X

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

T

X

X

X

X

E

T

X

E

T

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-19

Chapter 11

Figure 11-11. Caliber .50 inbore device

WARNING When using M962 SLAP-T ammunition with the caliber .50 inbore device, Master Gunners (during scenario development) must ensure the range they are using supports the extended surface danger zone of that ammunition.

Caliber .50 Inbore Device Training Integration 11-51. Training with the caliber .50 inbore device can enhance gunnery training on certain tank tables where main gun ammunition is limited. This system can be used most effectively on Tank Tables II, VIII, and XI. It can also be used for retraining crews on Tank Table V. 11-52. When training for collective gunnery, the caliber .50 inbore device should never be used with platform systems that employ PGS or MILES, to avoid damaging LTID systems on the targetry.

SIMULATORS AND SIMULATIONS FAMILY OF ADVANCED GUNNERY TRAINING SYSTEMS 11-53. The Advanced Gunnery Training System (AGTS) is a family of tank gunnery training simulators for VC/gunner teams (see Table 11-18). Its primary purpose is to train/sustain basic gunnery skills and increase combat gunnery skills. The AGTS places the VC and gunner in a realistically simulated crew station and presents them with a full range of computer-controlled engagement situations. The AGTS produces full-color, computer-generated action scenes in which crew members interact with various target situations. Programmed exercises vary in target type and number, range, vehicle and target motion, visibility, and other complex conditions.

11-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

Table 11-18. Advanced Gunnery Training System usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

P

X

X

T

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

X

E

E

E

X

E

E

X

E

E

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

11-54. The variants of the AGTS family replicate the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP tanks and come in fixed-site, mobile, and relocatable configurations. These configurations are— z AGTS. M1A2 SEP-variant of the simulator. z Mobile Advanced Gunnery Training System (MAGTS). Mobile configuration of the AGTS. z Relocatable Advanced Gunnery Training System (RAGTS). Relocatable-variant of the AGTS. z Computerized Advanced Gunnery Training System (C-AGTS). M1A1-variant of the simulator. z Mobile Configuration of Computerized Advanced Gunnery Training System (MC-AGTS). Mobile configuration of the C-AGTS.

Capabilities and Limitations System Capabilities 11-55. The AGTS provides initial, refresher, and sustainment training for VC/gunner teams to facilitate the crawl/walk/run training methodology. The system uses computer-generated visual scenes, targetry, and special effects to simulate the engagement of targets. The majority of the fire control system is replicated in both physical and functional aspects. The system trains both fully operational and degraded-mode gunnery techniques under a wide variety of conditions. The crew training program consists of crew gunnery, collective gunnery, sustainment, and special-purpose exercises that are designed to train fully operational precision gunnery and battlesight gunnery techniques. 11-56. For collective gunnery training, the AGTS systems are capable of being networked for section and platoon training. A platoon after-action review (PAAR) shelter is provided for exercise management and conducting AARs. Limitations 11-57. Although the AGTS places the VC and gunner in a realistically simulated crew station and presents them with a full range of computer-controlled engagement situations, some functions of the VC and gunner stations are physically simulated and some are not. The AGTS also provides no training for the loader or driver.

AGTS Training Integration 11-58. AGTS represents the primary virtual training system for equipped units for individual gunnery virtual training and gunnery skills sustainment training. It is also a useful tool for retraining crews that require it in the crew gunnery phase. AGTS training builds the foundation of VC/gunner coordination and trains the crew on engagement techniques for precision and degraded modes of gunnery in offensive and defensive postures in a variety of environments. It trains in all elements of the engagement process. The crew training program consists of basic gunnery, gate-to-live-fire, combat gunnery, advanced combat gunnery, sustainment gunnery, and special-purpose gunnery exercises designed to train the full range of gunnery engagement techniques. For advanced gunnery virtual training, the AGTS is capable of being networked for section and platoon gunnery training simulations.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-21

Chapter 11

ABRAMS FULL-CREW INTERACTIVE SIMULATOR TRAINER XXI 11-59. The Abrams Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer (A-FIST) XXI is an appended, fully deployable, full-crew training system capable of training precision, degraded, and battlesight gunnery, driving, crew communications and coordination, and mission tactics for the M1A1 tank (see Figure 11-12). With A-FIST XXI, M1A1 tank crews can conduct tank gunnery training using the actual controls and input devices of the tank. A-FIST XXI crew records are interchangeable with BCT COFT XXI by use of a floppy disc.

Figure 11-12. Abrams Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer

A-FIST XXI Capabilities and Limitations System Capabilities 11-60. The A-FIST XXI is capable of simulating the use of both primary and alternate fire controls and sighting systems against stationary and moving threats, single and multiple target arrays, during day, night, and reduced visibility conditions in various different environments. The A-FIST XXI provides gunnery training using the majority of the fire control system of the actual vehicle combined with computergenerated graphics. The computational system of the A-FIST XXI determines the point of aim for the weapon system in use and computes trajectory of the round in use and point of impact to simulate the visual effects of tracer, BOT. It also simulates hostile fire signature and obscuration. The system supports day/night unlimited visibility conditions, as well as degraded mode and manual mode engagements. A-FIST XXI provides terrain databases for European, desert, and urban (Zussman urban site and geospecific Baghdad) environments. Limitations 11-61. The A-FIST XXI can be operated in any facility in a 30’ x 30’ area. If that area is not available and the muzzle reference system (MRS) update is to be performed outside of the building, 30’ x 21’ is the required area. Power required to operate the system is 115 Vac, 60 Hz, on a 30-amp circuit with an L5-30R receptacle within 50 feet of the instructor/operator station (IOS). It can also be powered by a single-phase

11-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

generator 115 Vac, 60 Hz, 30-amp within 70 feet of the IOS. There are no other operating limitations, except those environmental considerations that affect the facility.

A-FIST XXI Training Integration 11-62. A-FIST XXI training should be incorporated into the virtual gunnery training program of the unit. It is designed to train or sustain gunnery proficiency of crews by successfully completing exercises that require the performance of gunnery tasks under conditions similar to those encountered in combat. The crew training program consists of individual gunnery, crew gunnery, gate-to-live-fire, combat gunnery, advanced combat gunnery, sustainment gunnery, special-purpose gunnery exercises, and practice exercises designed to train the full range of gunnery engagement techniques.

SECTION IV – BRADLEY TADSS 11-63. This section describes TADSS that are specific to the M2-/M3-series and M7 BFVs.

TRAINING AIDS DUMMY ROUNDS 11-64. Various dummy rounds are available to conduct training with the M242 25-mm automatic gun, M240 machine gun, and the TOW system (see Table 11-19 and Figure 11-14). Table 11-19. Dummy rounds usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

P

T

T

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

M794 Dummy Round (25-mm) 11-65. The M794 dummy round is a non-fire training round used to conduct training on various 25-mm tasks. The M794 dummy round is a cast metal round that is non-corrosive and weighs about the same as the M792 and M793 rounds. Previous dummy rounds were made from fired casings and had plastic or wooden tips. Because the casing of a fired round is slightly expanded, such rounds could get stuck in the breech of the 25-mm gun. The use of such rounds should be discontinued and the cast metal rounds requisitioned. The links can become damaged or rusty and should be changed as often as possible. 11-66. The M794 dummy round is a Class V item and can be requisitioned with DA Form 581. Table 11-20 contains information required for requisitioning the M794 dummy round.)

M172 Dummy Round (7.62-mm) 11-67. The M172 is a 7.62-mm cartridge minus the gun powder and primer. It is used for non-fire training with the M240 machine gun (see Figure 11-13). It is made of brass with a metal tip. It is recommended for use over the plastic-tipped version. (The plastic tips can become bent and get jammed either in the weapon or the feed chute.) 11-68. The M172 round is a Class V item that can be requisitioned using DA Form 581. (Table 11-20 contains information required for requisitioning this round.)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-23

Chapter 11

Table 11-20. Requisition information Nomenclature

DODIC

Cartridge, 7.62-mm Dummy M172

1305-A159

Cartridge, 7.62-mm Dummy M172 (Carton Packed)

1305-A162

Cartridge, 25-mm Dummy M794 (Carton Packed)

1305-A966

Cartridge, 25-mm Dummy M794 (Linked)

1303-A967

Missile Simulation Round (MSR)

Figure 11-13. 7.62mm and 25mm dummy rounds

CAUTION Because the M172 dummy round is made of brass and can be damaged during training, the rounds should be inspected periodically and replaced as needed. Continued use of damaged rounds or links can damage the feed chute or the weapon. The links should be changed as often as possible.

Missile Simulation Round 11-69. The missile simulation round (MSR) is used to train crews in all non-fire TOW-related tasks. It is a dummy TOW round casing. It comes in a crate the same as an actual round. The MSR simulates the actual weight of a real TOW missile. Although the MSR does not have a diaphragm or humidity indicator, it does have a front cover and a forward handling ring. It is a nonexpendable major-end item that can be requisitioned through the supply system. 11-70. If the guide lugs or the electrical connector on the MSR are damaged, the round should not be used. Continued use of a damaged round will cause damage to the launcher.

11-24

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

DUMMY ROUND TRAINING INTEGRATION 11-71. Dummy rounds can be used to train several of the tasks that are part of the GST (Appendix B, Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation, contains the Bradley crew GST). z Load and unload the high-explosive (HE) and antipersonnel (AP) ready boxes, load the 25-mm feeder, apply immediate action on the 25mm, and unload and clear the 25-mm gun. z Load, fire, apply immediate action, unload, and clear the M240-series machine guns. z TOW training–upload the BFV, upload the TOW launcher, apply immediate action on the TOW subsystem, remove a misfire TOW, unload and stow a TOW to its storage configuration.

DEVICES PRECISION GUNNERY SYSTEM 11-72. The PGS is an eye-safe laser simulation device that provides normal- and degraded-mode gunnery on unit vehicles. The system allows crews to develop and sustain gunnery skills while training using their own vehicles. All weapons and ammunition are duplicated in simulation by replicating tracer and missile signatures in the commander and gunner’s sights. This allows crews to apply lead, BOT, and TOT procedures during engagements. The PGS is fully compatible on MILES-equipped ranges, vehicles, and targets on the MILES battlefield (see Table 11-21 and Figure 11-14). Table 11-21. Precision Gunnery System usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

P

X

X

X

T

X

X

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

X

X

T

X

X

T

X

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-25

Chapter 11

Figure 11-14. Precision Gunnery System

Capabilities and Limitations 11-73. The system can send and receive hit, kill, and miss signals from other PGS- or MILES-equipped vehicles. A mounting reconfiguration allows the TOW to be fired in simulation while the 25-mm and coax are fired live. The PGS provides vehicle crew evaluator (VCE) the ability to review engagements during the AAR process. It displays ballistic information for each round fired. This information identifies placement of each simulated round in relation to the target, in mils, both in azimuth and elevation. (TM 9-6920-711-12&P and TM 9-6920-710-12&P provide additional information.) 11-74. The M2/M3A3 PGS is a vehicle-mounted training device that assists the BFV crew in gaining and improving proficiency in gunnery skills without the expenditure of live ammunition. Gunnery and tactical training can be conducted wherever an eye-safe laser is permitted. The BFVA3 PGS provides the crew with the visual and sound effects that simulate real-world firing conditions. The BFVA3 PGS provides full fire control interface by interfacing system controls into the vehicle’s Training Device Interface Panel (TDIP).

PGS Training Integration 11-75. PGS is the preferred device for the BFV for use on device-based gunnery training in crew and collective gunnery. It can be incorporated into device-based gunnery tables to include Tables I, II, VII, VIII, X, and XI.

SIMULATORS AND SIMULATIONS 11-76. The BATS is the virtual gunnery trainer for the BFVA3. The purpose of the BATS is to train and sustain a crew’s ability to perform fundamental gunnery techniques in simulated gunnery and combat scenarios.

11-26

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

BRADLEY ADVANCED TRAINING SYSTEM BATS Capabilities and Limitations 11-77. BATS provides sustainment and cross-training programs to train crews in a simulated gunnery or combat mode (see Table 11-22). The BATS provides battle-focused training in the gunnery mode through the use of panel targets (IAW TC 25-8), range markers, ammunition allocation, and evaluation standards. The BATS provides realistic training in the combat mode by presenting realistic target models. Target destruction is accomplished by realistic probability of hit (PH)/probability of kill (PK), based on range and type. Engagement parameters are input to support a specific unit’s threat template and mission-essential task list (METL). Table 11-22. Bradley Advanced Training System usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

P

X

X

T

E

E

E

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

E

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

BATS Training Integration 11-78. BATS is the primary virtual trainer for crews of the BFVA3 for individual gunnery training and gunnery skills sustainment training. It is also a useful tool for retraining crews that require it in the crew gunnery phase. BATS training builds the foundation of VC/gunner coordination and trains the crew on engagement techniques for precision and degraded modes of gunnery in offensive and defensive postures in a variety of environments. It trains in all elements of the engagement process.

ADVANCED BRADLEY FULL-CREW INTERACTIVE SIMULATOR TRAINER 11-79. The AB-FIST is an appended Bradley gunnery training device for use on a powerless, stationary, sheltered, BFV ODS and below. With the AB-FIST, BFV crews can conduct Bradley gunnery training using the actual switches and controls of the BFV. The AB-FIST is a fully deployable, full-crew, highfidelity training system capable of training and sustaining precision and battlesight gunnery. The AB-FIST incorporates the entire BFV crew that enhances crew coordination (see Figure 11-15).

Figure 11-15. Advanced Bradley Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-27

Chapter 11

AB-FIST Capabilities and Limitations System Capabilities 11-80. The AB-FIST trains target acquisition, identification, driving, and engagement skills for the BFV crew, section, and platoon. It has the capability of simulating use of both primary and alternate fire controls and sighting systems against mobile and stationary threats, single and multiple target arrays, in a realistic battlefield environment during day, night, and reduced visibility conditions in a European, desert or urban environments. It is a network-capable system that can be linked together or with the systems–COFT XXI, TFT, A-FIST XXI, and Virtual Convoy Combat Trainer (VCCT), to conduct combined arms training and mission rehearsal. The AB-FIST provides realistic training in the combat mode by presenting realistic target models (vehicles IAW ROC-V 9.1). All ammunition characteristics are correct IAW the applicable firing table (FT). The databases provided by the AB-FIST are European (summer and winter), desert, urban (Zussman urban site and geo-specific Baghdad). The AB-FIST’s crew records are transferable to the TFT, and COFT XXI by either 3.5” floppy disk or writable compact disc. Limitations 11-81. The AB-FIST can be operated in any facility in a 35’ x 20’ area with 16 feet of overhead clearance. Power required to operate the system is 115 Vac, 60 Hz, on a 30-amp circuit with a L5-30R receptacle within 50’ of the IOS. It can also be powered by a single-phase generator 115 Vac, 60 Hz, 30amp within 70 feet of the IOS. There are no other operating limitations except those environmental considerations that affect the facility.

AB-FIST Training Integration 11-82. AB-FIST training should be incorporated into the virtual gunnery training program of the unit. It is designed to train or sustain gunnery proficiency of crews by successfully completing exercises that require the performance of gunnery tasks under conditions similar to those encountered in combat.

M2 ODS TABLETOP FULL-FIDELITY TRAINER 11-83. The M2A2 ODS TFT is a fully deployable training system capable of training and sustaining precision and battlesight gunnery (see Figure 11-16). The size of this system makes it ideal for deployment to remote sites by units equipped with M2A2 ODS BFVs. The TFT simulates the vehicle’s primary fire control and sighting equipment, which are used against aerial and mobile/stationary ground targets in a realistic battlefield environment. The trainer evaluates commander/gunner performances and provides feedback to the crew as the training progresses.

Figure 11-16. Tabletop Full-Fidelity Trainer

11-28

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

Capabilities and Limitations 11-84. The TFT consists of tabletop components, including a commander’s station, weapons’ station, gunner’s station, and instructor’s station. Its key features are— z Deploys inside five two-man carry containers. z Easily transports in a HMMWV, van, or pickup truck. z Uses standard 110V or 220V power. z Can operate in a small tent powered by a standard Army field generator. z Crew records are transferable to the AB-FIST and COFT XXI by 3.5” floppy disc or writeable compact disc. z Realistic vehicle models (IAW ROC-V 9.1). z All ammunition flight characteristics are correct IAW the applicable FT. 11-85. The TFT has no means to conduct engagements using the manual hand wheels. Engagements that would be conducted in the manual mode are defaulted to commander’s engagements.

TFT Training Integration 11-86. The TFT is not the primary BFV virtual gunnery trainer; however, it provides sustainment and cross-training programs to train crews in a simulated gunnery or combat mode. Because it is easily transportable and deployable, it can be used to sustain critical gunnery skills while deployed.

SECTION V – ARMED HMMWV TADSS 11-87. This section describes TADSS that are specific to the M1025-/1026-series, M1114 and M1151 armed HMMWVs. These TADSS are also applicable to a wide range of sustainment support units and elements to supplement their gunnery training program.

TRAINING AIDS DUMMY ROUNDS 11-88. Various dummy rounds are available to conduct training with the MK19 machine gun, M2 HB machine gun, and M240 machine gun (see Table 11-23 and Figure 11-17). Table 11-23. Dummy rounds usage table Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

P

T

T

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-29

Chapter 11

Figure 11-17. Dummy rounds

VM922/M922A1 Dummy Round (40mm) 11-89. The M922/M922A1dummy round is a 40-mm inert cartridge, minus the gun powder and primer. It is used for non-fire training with the MK19 machine gun. It is made of brass with a brass projectile (inert). The links can become damaged or rusty and should be changed as often as possible. 11-90. The M922/M922A1 dummy round is a Class V item and can be requisitioned with DA Form 581. (Table 11-24 contains information required for requisitioning the M2 dummy round.)

M2 Dummy Round (Caliber .50) 11-91. The M2 dummy round is a caliber .50 cartridge, minus the gun powder and primer. It is used for non-fire training with the M2 HB machine gun. It is made of brass with a metal tip. The links can become damaged or rusty and should be changed as often as possible. 11-92. The M2 dummy round is a Class V item and can be requisitioned with DA Form 581. (Table 1124 contains information required for requisitioning the M2 dummy round.)

11-30

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

M172 Dummy Round (7.62mm) 11-93. The M172 dummy round is a 7.62-mm cartridge, minus the gun powder and primer. It is used for non-fire training with the M240 machine gun. It is made of brass with a metal tip. It is recommended for use over the plastic-tipped version. (The plastic tips can become bent and get jammed either in the weapon or the feed chute.) 11-94. The M172 dummy round is a Class V item that can be requisitioned using DA Form 581. (Table 11-24 contains information required for requisitioning this round.) Table 11-24. Requisition information Nomenclature

DODIC

Cartridge, 7.62-mm Dummy M172

A159

Cartridge, 7.62-mm Dummy M172 (Carton Packed)

A162

Cartridge, Caliber .50 Dummy M2

A560

Cartridge, 40-mm Dummy M922/M922A1

B472

DUMMY ROUND TRAINING INTEGRATION 11-95. Dummy rounds can be used to train several of the tasks that are part of the GST (Appendix C, Armed HMMWV Live-Fire Preparation, contains the armed HMMWV crew GST). z Load, fire, apply immediate action, unload, and clear the M2 machine gun. z Load, fire, apply immediate action, unload, and clear the MK19 grenade machine gun. z Load, fire, apply immediate action, unload, and clear the M240-series machine guns.

CAUTION Because the M172 dummy round is made of brass and can be damaged during training, the rounds should be inspected periodically and replaced as needed. Continued use of damaged rounds or links can damage the feed chute or the weapon. The links should be changed as often as possible.

SIMULATORS AND SIMULATIONS VIRTUAL CONVOY COMBAT TRAINER 11-96. The VCCT is a virtual training system used to train drivers and gunners of military vehicles how to identify a potential ambush, identify improvised explosive devices (IED), avoid an ambush, return fire, maneuver and react appropriately in the operating environment (OE). Recent combat operations have demonstrated the need for convoy combat training. For the active component, the VCCT is an interim fix until the CCTT-RVS is available in sufficient quantities to meet training requirements. The Army has purchased two variants of the VCCT (the VCCT-L [Lockheed] and the VCCT-R [Raydon]) with slightly different characteristics and capabilities (see Table 11-25 and Figure 11-18, Figure 11-19, and Figure 11-20).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-31

Chapter 11

Table 11-25. Virtual Convoy Combat Trainer Individual

Crew

Collective

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

GST

GT I

GATE TO LIVE FIRE

GT II

GT III

GT IV

P

X

X

X

X

X

X

GT V

GT VI

GT VII

GT VIII

GT IX

GT X

GT XI

GT XII

X

X

T

E

X

T

E

X

T - Suitable for training for this event

E - Enhances training for this event

P - Suitable for individual training for this event

X - Not suitable for training for this event

Figure 11-18. VCCT-R (configuration 1)

Figure 11-19. VCCT-R (configuration 2)

11-32

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

Figure 11-20. VCCT-L

VCCT Capabilities and Limitations VCCT-L Characteristics and Capabilities 11-97. The VCCT-L comes in either a fixed site or mobile configuration. The mobile configuration has one vehicle simulator per trailer. The fixed sight configuration is designed around four vehicle simulators. 11-98. The VCCT variant L has the following characteristics and capabilities: z Trains soldiers in basic and advanced convoy skills using variable terrain and roads in a variety of weather, visibility, and vehicle-operational conditions. z Incorporates small arms and crew-served weapons. z Provides mission-preview/mission-rehearsal capability. z Trains general and specific driving and engagement skills. z Provides a collective, immersive virtual environment with precision weapons engagement system. z Leverages CCTT vehicular software, databases, and AAR. z Reacts to contact, call for fire, and close air support. VCCT-R Characteristics and Capabilities 11-99. The VCCT variant R is contained in two 53-foot trailers. The top layout represents the CrewStation Trailer (CST) that houses three crew trainers. The bottom layout represents the AAR trailer that houses one crew trainer and the two IOS/AAR stations, plus a group viewing area. 11-100. The VCCT-R has the following characteristics and capabilities: z Realistic Vehicle Simulation. „ Wheeled vehicle dynamics. „ Collision detection. „ Engine and transmission simulation. „ Vehicle sound effects. z Realistic Weapons Simulation. „ Rifle M-4. „ Caliber .50 machine gun.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-33

Chapter 11

„ „

Weapon sound effects (fire, impact). Accurate ballistics calculations (Army Materiel Systems Analysis Activity [AMSAA] tables).

VCCT Training Integration 11-101. The VCCT, while primarily a collective convoy engagement training tool, can be integrated into the virtual training for all phases of gunnery for armed HMWWVs and sustainment units. The system provides training for collective tasks and fire distribution and control.

VIRTUAL CONVOY OPERATIONS TRAINER 11-102. The Virtual Convoy Operations Trainer (VCOT) provides training for combat convoys under realistic conditions. VCOT ensures that Soldiers are trained to anticipate ambushes and other enemy actions from all possible directions by allowing the crew to observe, maneuver, and fire their weapons through a full 360-degree circumference (see Figure 11-21).

Figure 11-21. Virtual Convoy Operations Trainer

Capabilities and Limitations 11-103. The VCOT system has the flexibility to allow users to choose a vehicle mix for their convoy, the weapon system employed on each vehicle, the routes along which the convoy will travel, and the type and strength of enemy activity along the convoy route. The VCOT may be operated either as a collective training system where all crew stations operate together or as a gunnery trainer where crew stations operate independently. 11-104. The VCOT is comprised of five VCOT crew stations networked with an IOS/AAR station. The IOS/AAR station allows for management of a running exercise and review of a completed training mission.

11-34

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Training Devices

11-105. Three types of virtual crew stations are used: z Level 1, Crew Station. Comprised of an actual HMMWV vehicle, appended with training equipment to provide high-fidelity training for a HMMWV gunner and driver. z Level 2, Crew Station. A higher fidelity device providing positions for the HMMWV gunner, driver, and commander. z Level 3, Crew Station. Consists of tabletop-mounted equipment, and providing positions for the gunner and driver for any of three simulated vehicles–Abrams tank, BFV, and HMMWV. 11-106. The VCOT is supplied with up to four different terrain databases: z Zussman, a small geo-specific urban area used for initial gunnery training. z Baghdad, which provides a large urban training environment. z A generic desert area. z A generic European area.

VCOT Training Integration 11-107. The VCOT can be used for training individual and collective gunnery skills for armed HMWWVs. It can also be used for collective virtual training of heavy and light vehicles integrated into combined arms platoons and sections.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

11-35

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 12

Gunnery Training Program Chapter 12 provides guidelines for the development of a gunnery training program that is designed to produce qualified crews, sections and platoons by training critical skills that facilitate crew- through platoon-level teamwork. Further, it covers the strategy and training plans derived from the gunnery training program development process. Gunnery training programs should be developed to follow a logical progression of training, conducted in three phases–individual, crew, and collective gunnery. z Individual. The individual gunnery phase trains individual crewman on crewlevel skills, using classroom and home-station training in conjunction with the Gunnery Skills Test (GST). z Crew. The crew gunnery phase develops crew skills on Tables I, II, III, IV, and V and culminates in crew qualification on Table VI. z Collective. The collective gunnery phase develops section and platoon coordination and fire control and distribution on Tables VII, VIII, X and XI. Culminating in section and platoon qualifications on Tables IX and XII. There are also guidelines for executing a company-level combined arms live-fire exercise (CALFEX) with organic indirect fire and sustainment unit support. The success or lack of success of any training program will be the direct result of the amount of time, effort, and emphasis placed into the development of the program. Keep in mind that this chapter gives commanders and trainers a guide by which to base a training program, but it does not limit the ability to create innovative variations built upon this framework.

Contents Section I – Training Assessment ........... 12-2 Essential Warfighting Skills .............. 12-2 Battle Focus ..................................... 12-2 Mission-Essential Task List .............. 12-3 Commander’s Assessment ............... 12-3 Section II – Training Strategy................. 12-4 Gunnery Tables ................................ 12-4 Individual Gunnery Phase ................ 12-5 Crew Gunnery Phase ....................... 12-7 Collective Gunnery Phase ................ 12-8 Cross-Training Strategy.................... 12-9 Integrated Training Strategy ............. 12-9

3 September 2009

Section III – Commander’s Guidance .. 12-17 Training Goals ................................ 12-17 Training Requirements ................... 12-17 Section IV – Training Plans .................. 12-18 Gunnery Training ............................ 12-18 Long-Range Training Plans ............ 12-20 Short-Range Training Plans............ 12-21 Near-Term Training Plans .............. 12-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

12-1

Chapter 12

SECTION I – TRAINING ASSESSMENT

ESSENTIAL WARFIGHTING SKILLS 12-1. Crews must achieve proficiency in certain skills critical to maintaining their warfighting capabilities. The first nine listed below apply to all platform systems. The rest apply to specific training requirements based on variations in the vehicles’ capabilities and systems: z All platform systems: „ Engaging stationary and moving targets from a stationary and moving combat vehicle. „ Engaging targets in a chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) environment. „ Engaging targets at night. „ Engaging targets from a short halt. „ Detecting, identifying, classifying, and discriminating targets as friendly, neutral, or threat. „ Acquiring and engaging targets in an urban, woodland, or desert environment. „ Calling for indirect fire. „ Calling for medical evacuation (MEDEVAC). „ Calling for support. „ Engaging targets under digital conditions (applies to digitally equipped platforms only). „ Engage targets using the appropriate technique for the target type (see Chapter 8). „ Engaging multiple and successive targets. z Abrams and Bradley: „ Engaging multiple targets using the auxiliary sight. „ Engaging targets using manual controls. „ Engaging multiple targets with multiple weapon systems from multiple stations. „ Engaging multiple and successive targets requiring different ammunition types. „ Engaging targets using hunter-killer techniques. „ Conducting a fire mission task (applies to Bradley Fire Support Team [BFIST] and reconnaissance only). 12-2. Sections and platoons must achieve proficiency in the following skills: z Executing collective tasks as a section or platoon. z Engaging multiple targets utilizing fire control and distribution. z Engaging targets while maneuvering as a section or platoon. z Using digital capabilities during a tactical scenario. z Maintaining situational awareness (SA) and ensuring personnel protection.

BATTLE FOCUS 12-3. Battle focus is a concept for deriving peace-time training requirements from war-time missions. Battle focus guides the planning, execution, and assessment of each unit’s training program. This is to ensure that its members train as they fight. The battle-focus process is the same for active component (AC) and reserve component (RC) units (both modified table of organization and equipment [MTOE] and table of distribution and allowances [TDA]). FM 7-0 explains how to plan, resource, and execute training events. This manual provides the gunnery principles and standards to evaluate crew, section and platoon training.

12-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Gunnery Training Program

MISSION-ESSENTIAL TASK LIST 12-4. A unit’s training program must support the mission-essential task list (METL); therefore, time, resources, and command emphasis must all focus on training tasks that support the METL. Platoon sergeants and squad leaders should use the appropriate critical task list to identify the individual tasks that support the collective tasks. To develop the METL, the commander must know and understand the war plans and external directives handed down from the higher headquarters. z War Plans. The most critical parts of METL development are the unit’s war-time operations and contingency plans. The missions and related information in these plans provide the keys to determining essential training tasks. From each war plan, the commander selects each mission that his unit is expected to execute in combat. z External Directives. Additional training tasks relevant to the unit’s war-time mission derive from external directives. Such directives could include— „ Mobilization plans. „ Installation war-time transition and development plans. „ Force-integration plans. z Task List. Once the commander lists all possible tasks, the commander identifies those that are most critical to success on the battlefield. This refined list becomes the METL.

COMMANDER’S ASSESSMENT 12-5. Gunnery training must be well-designed and continuous for units to achieve, improve, and sustain gunnery proficiency. Each commander must continually assess their unit’s previous performance, current level of training and state of weapon and weapon platform maintenance to determine its level of proficiency in gunnery. Then, they must train their unit to produce skilled crewmen, crews, and platoons. The Master Gunner should advise the commander and assess, plan, develop, implement, instruct, evaluate, and reassess all phases of gunnery training. The commander’s ongoing assessment is crucial to gunnery program development and where the team effort should be demonstrated most. 12-6. The following factors must be considered during the assessment: z Level of maintenance within the unit. z Evaluate previous training. The commander assesses training with input from the executive officer (XO), S-3, subordinate leaders, and Master Gunners (see FM 7-0). He can use individual and crew training to determine the unit’s proficiency. „ Individual. Common task test results show basic individual training proficiency. The GST evaluates specific platform-related individual proficiency. Individual weapons training and qualification scores indicate proficiency levels with the various weapons organic to the squads and platoon. „ Crew. Crew training proficiency can be measured by reviewing simulations’ unit summaries along with performance analyses. Crew gunnery results and evaluation sheets from the last gunnery period provide additional field-oriented data, which also help the commander to determine training requirements. „ Collective. Collective training proficiency can be measured by reviewing past collective gunnery, Combat Training Center (CTC), and field training exercises (FTX) results. Tactical simulations (Close Combat Tactical Trainer [CCTT], Simulation Network [SIMNET]) data may be used to support this assessment. z Crew turbulence. z Training days available. z Training dollars available. z Resources available. z The unit’s specific METL. z Past strengths and weaknesses within the unit.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

12-3

Chapter 12

z z z

Availability of experienced and proficient crewmen, capable of peer training. Who will be the primary trainer for the gunnery program? Evaluation. The commander uses specific standards to measure the demonstrated abilities of individuals and crews. Accurate evaluations are necessary to identify where to place training emphasis. Leaders must make on-the-spot corrections and demand aggressive action to correct training deficiencies. Crew-level simulations results are also good indicators of crew proficiency. „ Informal. Unit leaders evaluate performance informally during training. „ Formal. The commander schedules a dedicated evaluator on either the long-range or shortrange training plan. „ Internal. The evaluated unit plans, resources, and conducts their own evaluations. „ External. Higher headquarters or another unit plans, resources, and conducts a unit evaluation.

SECTION II – TRAINING STRATEGY

GUNNERY TABLES 12-7. Table 12-1 lists the gunnery tables (GT) that support the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) gunnery training strategy by platform system and the gunnery phase in which they are conducted. Table 12-1. Gunnery tables Gunnery Phase

CREW

COLLECTIVE

12-4

Tank/Bradley Tables

Armed Vehicle Tables

Rifle Squad Tables

GT I, Crew Critical Skills Table

GT I, Crew Critical Skills Table

GT I, Buddy-Team Fire and Movement Exercise

GT II, Crew Proficiency Course (CPC)

GT II, Crew Proficiency Course (CPC)

GT II, Fire Team Maneuver Exercise

GT III, Basic Machine Gun

GT III, Basic Machine Gun

GT III, Squad Battle Drill Exercises

GT IV, Basic Main Gun

GT IV, Basic Extended Range Machine Gun

GT IV, Squad Situational Training Exercises (STX)

GT V, Basic Crew Practice

GT V, Basic Crew Practice

GT V, Squad Practice

GT VI, Basic Crew Qualification

GT VI, Basic Crew Qualification

GT VI, Squad Qualification

GT VII, Section Proficiency Exercise

GT VII, Section Proficiency Exercise

GT VIII, Section Practice

GT VIII, Section Practice

GT IX, Section Qualification

GT IX, Section Qualification

GT X, Platoon Proficiency Exercise

GT X, Convoy/Platoon Proficiency Exercise

CT XI, Platoon Practice

GT XI, Convoy/Platoon Practice

GT XII, Platoon Qualification

GT XII, Convoy/Platoon Qualification

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

Note. Collective gunnery for the Rifle Squad is conducted in conjunction with their BFV crew on GT VII through GT XII.

3 September 2009

Gunnery Training Program

INDIVIDUAL GUNNERY PHASE 12-8. The individual gunnery phase develops individual and crew skills needed to operate the vehicle and turret weapon systems. Individual gunnery training focuses on the technical aspects of gun theory, turret operations, gunnery techniques, virtual and crew simulations training, and device-based training. The trainers use classroom instruction, hands-on training and crew gunnery simulators to provide each crew member with knowledge of the capabilities, limitations, and characteristics of the vehicle, as well as training.

VIRTUAL TRAINING 12-9. Crew members will conduct virtual gunnery training during the individual gunnery phase using crew gunnery simulators to train the vehicle commander (VC) and gunner on individual and crew-coordination skills. Training can also include other driver/loader tasks, such as announcing of vehicle and tubelaunched, optically tracked, wire-guided (TOW) launcher status (up and down).

Crew Simulation Training 12-10. Crew simulation training focuses on the VC and gunner. There are three training categories of crews: z New. Either the VC, gunner, or both are new to their position. z Turbulent. Both the VC and gunner have previously held the position they are in, but have not worked together as a crew. z Sustainment. The VC and gunner have previously qualified together as a crew.

New and Turbulent Crews 12-11. New and turbulent crews should be evaluated to determine their initial proficiency based on gunnery parameters. Is the crew proficient engaging— z Stationary targets from a stationary vehicle? z Moving targets from a stationary vehicle? z Stationary targets from a moving vehicle? z Moving targets from a moving vehicle? z Multiple targets? 12-12. Once a crew’s initial proficiency level is established, they should be placed in the simulator’s instructional subsystem accordingly. These crews will execute training sessions throughout the individual gunnery phase to prepare them for live-fire in the crew gunnery phase. The crew will execute the prerequisite to live-fire exercise for their respective simulator system prior to the crew phase.

Sustainment Crews 12-13. After the crew has qualified Table VI on their weapon platform during a previous gunnery density, they will be categorized as a sustainment crew. Sustainment crews already have a location in the instructional subsystem from the last gunnery. These crews should continue from that location during the individual gunnery phase, improving on their weaknesses and sustaining their strengths. These crews will continue to utilize the simulator system a minimum of four hours per month (Abrams/Bradley) as directed in AR 350-1, DA PAM 350-38, and local training regulations. The crew will execute the prerequisite-gateto-live-fire exercise for their simulator system again prior to the crew phase.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

12-5

Chapter 12

Gate to Live-Fire 12-14. Each simulator has a different instructional subsystem with a prescribed exercise that will be passed as a prerequisite to firing live ammunition. These exercises are recommended minimum requirements driven by the Combined Arms Training Strategies (CATS) for each proponent. The purpose of these exercises is to ensure the crew possesses the skills and experience necessary to safely execute livefire gunnery. It is required that crews conduct four hours of simulation training per month to achieve this. The prerequisite exercises are listed in Table 12-2 for each simulator system. Table 12-2. Crew gunnery simulations prerequisites for live-fire System

Gate-to-Live-Fire Exercise

EST 2000

*Commander determined*

C-AGTS/AGTS

Gate-to-Live-Fire

AFIST XXI

Gate-to-Live-Fire

BFV COFT

MPL

BATS

MPL

AB-FIST/COFT XXI

204

DEVICE-BASED TRAINING 12-15. Crew members will conduct constructive gunnery training during the individual phase using training devices that allow crews to practice and refine their collective skills on their vehicles. Crews learn fundamentals of turret manipulation, gun lay, and tracking for all platform systems. At this point, individual crew duties and actions are integrated, and crews perform as a team. The crews’ abilities are evaluated during the crew proficiency course for their platform weapon system. 12-16. Figure 12-1 is a flowchart that outlines the progressive training requirements conducted during the individual gunnery phase.

12-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Gunnery Training Program

Figure 12-1. Sample six month gunnery training plan

CREW GUNNERY PHASE 12-17. The crew gunnery phase trains crew skills developed in individual gunnery and evaluates the crew’s proficiency during crew qualification. Crew gunnery training focuses on crew coordination and the direct fire engagement process. The crew gunnery phase is conducted primarily using the live training method however, qualification tables must be conducted live using full-caliber ammunition for all weapon systems platforms. The commander may choose to use device-based training to conduct practice tables; Device-based gunnery includes Table II Crew Proficiency Course (CPC). This table is conducted in local training areas or ranges using Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System (MILES) or Precision Gunnery System (PGS). PGS is the primary device for Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) gunnery training. Thru-Sight Video (TSV) enhances this training with its ability to provide recorded feedback on target acquisition, sight picture and engagement technique. See Chapter 11 for complete characteristics. The commander may choose to use the live training method for the CPC firing subcaliber ammunition providing crews conduct a dry run first to demonstrate mastery of the basic skills and safety principles. This includes firing of subcaliber devices. Once Table II CPC has been completed and qualified dry, the commander may refire Table II CPC with full caliber ammunition if the range and ammunition resourcing permits. 12-18. Additional virtual and/or device-based training may be necessary for crews during this phase to facilitate successful completion. Additional resourcing for retraining may not be available for all units. When this occurs, subcaliber devices and simulations may be used for all tables except the qualification table.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

12-7

Chapter 12

12-19. Abrams crews are encouraged to conduct individual (authorized tables only) gunnery utilizing the caliber .50 inbore device. This will require the crew to exercise all components of the fire control system.

VIRTUAL TRAINING 12-20. Crews may continue to conduct virtual gunnery training during the crew gunnery phase using crew gunnery simulators to train the VC and gunner on crew-coordination skills. Crew weaknesses identified during the conduct of crew GTs may be addressed using crew simulators if time and resources permit.

DEVICE-BASED TRAINING 12-21. Crews may conduct device-based gunnery training on practice tables during the crew phase using training devices. It is recommended that crews use the live training method for all crew GTs and reserve the device-based method for skills that require additional training. Device based training is not authorized for any qualification table.

LIVE TRAINING 12-22. Crews will conduct crew qualification using the live training method with full-caliber ammunition on a full-scale range. Practice tables are fully resourced and are fired using the live training method as well.

COLLECTIVE GUNNERY PHASE 12-23. The collective gunnery phase trains squad, section, and platoon leaders and company commanders to fight their maneuver element and enhances the crew’s gunnery skills by applying them during tactical scenarios as part of a section or platoon. Collective gunnery training focuses on accomplishing collective tasks in support of a maneuver element’s mission. 12-24. The collective gunnery phase is conducted using the device-based training method for proficiency exercises and practice tables. The live training method is required for all qualification tables. Qualification tables must be conducted live using full-caliber ammunition for all weapon systems platforms. Additional virtual and/or device-based training may be necessary for sections and platoons during this phase to facilitate successful completion. 12-25. Collective phase gunnery includes Table VII through Table XII for all platform systems. Company-level CALFEXs may be executed if time and resources permit.

VIRTUAL TRAINING 12-26. Maneuver elements should conduct virtual gunnery training before and during the collective gunnery phase using tactical training simulators to train the leaders on controlling their element’s maneuver and fires. Simulators allow training for both pure and combined arms maneuver. The trainers have all crew member stations; however, squad leaders may only participate in a limited role.

DEVICE-BASED TRAINING 12-27. Maneuver elements may conduct device based gunnery training on practice tables during the collective phase using training devices. It is recommended that maneuver elements conduct the proficiency exercise prior to practice and qualification when executing the training as a mixed or combined arms element.

LIVE TRAINING 12-28. Maneuver elements will conduct qualification using the live training method with full-caliber ammunition on a full-scale range. Abrams elements are allocated subcaliber ammunition for practice tables and may fire these tables live. A CALFEX is resourced for company-level training and should incorporate indirect fire support, air/ground integration, sustainment unit support elements. 12-29. If commanders elect to fire combined arms platoons, each section must qualify GT IX prior to conducting a GT X, XI or XII.

12-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Gunnery Training Program

CROSS-TRAINING STRATEGY 12-30. The commander, platoon leaders, first sergeant, and platoon sergeants manage training to ensure every Soldier is trained on individual and collective tasks for both crew and squad skills, regardless of duty position. The unit-training program must focus on developing tough, combat-ready platoons with a balanced, simultaneous, integrated squad and crew plan. 12-31. During individual and crew gunnery training, cross training occurs often to counter inevitable peacetime personnel changes or combat personnel losses. Cross training incorporates both the crew and squad, sustaining basic crew skills and providing additional training for the squad in case they must perform as a vehicle crewman. Cross training improves coordination between the crew and the squad. For BFVs, alternate crews are required to train regularly in crew gunnery simulation, conduct crew device gunnery, and take the GST. Additionally, the platoon leader’s backup crew is resourced to fire crew gunnery.

INTEGRATED TRAINING STRATEGY 12-32. Units must ensure collective training integrates all Soldiers in the platoon. The platoon sergeant, squad leaders, and VCs, in coordination with the platoon leader, are the principle trainers for the collective skills of integrated vehicle teams, squads, sections, and platoon. Primary references include this manual and appropriate collective tasks. 12-33. Figure 12-2 through Figure 12-8 are flow charts that demonstrate gunnery training progression. The grey dotted lines on each flow chart depict the approximate transition point to the next gunnery phase: z Individual to crew gunnery. z Crew to collective gunnery. 12-34. Although the flow chart sequences events, units may be required to conduct some events out of sequence or simultaneously based on time and resource availability (for example, maneuver/range training area). 12-35. Prerequisite training events must be conducted prior to the requisite event (for example, Table II prior to Table VI); these are denoted in the training strategy flow charts with an asterisk beside the event. 12-36. It is important that the brigade commander and combined-arms battalion commanders, as well as Master Gunners, within the HBCT understand each of the following training strategies so they may better integrate the sections and platoons into their collective gunnery training. z Abrams training strategy. z Mechanized infantry training strategy. z Reconnaissance integrated training strategy. z Combat engineer integrated training strategy. z Fire support team training strategy. z Mortar integrated training strategy. z Sustainment unit training strategy.

ABRAMS TRAINING STRATEGY 12-37. Figure 12-2 outlines a logical progression of events that a tank platoon can adapt to their training strategy. Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards and discussed in after action reviews (AAR). Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training requirements.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

12-9

Chapter 12

Figure 12-2. Abrams training strategy

BRADLEY AND RIFLE SQUAD INTEGRATED TRAINING STRATEGY 12-38. Figure 12-3 outlines a logical progression of events that a mechanized infantry platoon can adapt to their training strategy. Rifle squads and Bradley crews are dual-tracked to focus on their specific training needs. Both tracks must be integrated to develop a mechanized infantry platoon that fights as one unit. Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards and discussed in AARs. Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training requirements.

12-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Gunnery Training Program

Figure 12-3. Mechanized infantry training strategy

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

12-11

Chapter 12

RECONNAISSANCE INTEGRATED TRAINING STRATEGY 12-39. Figure 12-4 outlines a logical progression of events that a reconnaissance platoon can adapt to their training strategy. Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards discussed in AARs. Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training requirements.

Figure 12-4. Reconnaissance integrated training strategy

12-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Gunnery Training Program

COMBAT ENGINEER INTEGRATED TRAINING STRATEGY 12-40. Figure 12-5 outlines a logical progression of events that an engineer platoon can adapt to their training strategy. Engineer squads and the Bradley crews are dual-tracked to focus on their specific training needs. Both tracks must be integrated to develop an engineer platoon that fights as one unit. Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards and discussed in AARs. Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training requirements.

Figure 12-5. Combat engineer integrated training strategy

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

12-13

Chapter 12

FIRE SUPPORT TEAM TRAINING STRATEGY 12-41. Figure 12-6 outlines a logical progression of events that a fire support team can adapt to their training strategy. Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards and discussed in AARs. Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training requirements. Currently, there is no BFIST crew gunnery simulator; however, BFIST crews may adapt training to accommodate some of the M7 capabilities. As an example, the unit might place a handheld terminal unit (HTU) in the turret and a line control unit (LCU) in the crew shelter for practicing fire missions.

Figure 12-6. Fire support team training strategy

12-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Gunnery Training Program

MORTAR INTEGRATED TRAINING STRATEGY 12-42. Figure 12-7 outlines a logical progression of events that a mortar platoon can adapt to their training strategy. Mortar squads and the fire direction center (FDC) are dual-tracked to focus on their specific training needs. Both tracks must be integrated to develop a mortar platoon that fights as one unit. Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards and discussed in AARs. Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training requirements. 12-43. Mortar gunnery training is covered in two manuals. FM 3-22.90 covers gunnery training for gun crews and FM 3-22.91 covers gunnery training for the FDCs. Commanders should refer to these manuals for more specific details on mortar gunnery. This will facilitate more effective incorporation of indirect fire support during the collective phase of gunnery.

Figure 12-7. Mortar integrated training strategy

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

12-15

Chapter 12

SUSTAINMENT UNIT SUPPORT TRAINING STRATEGY 12-44. It is important that the brigade commander, reconnaissance squadron commander, and combined arms battalion commanders, as well as Master Gunners, within the HBCT understand the sustainment training strategy so they may better integrate sustainment elements into their collective gunnery training. Figure 12-8 outlines a logical progression of events that a sustainment platoon can adapt to their training strategy. Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards and discussed in AARs. Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training requirements.

Figure 12-8. Sustainment training strategy

12-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Gunnery Training Program

SECTION III – COMMANDER’S GUIDANCE

TRAINING GOALS 12-45. Training goals will vary based on the assigned mission and commander’s intent. The goal is to create a training environment that is as realistic and demanding as possible with the resources available. The following goals should be set to ensure successful training: z Set and enforce tough, but achievable standards. Tough standards will generate effective training; loose standards will produce weak vehicle crews. The crews cannot be fooled; they know when they have done well. Insist on repetition to achieve mastery. z Start early. All aspects of a training program must be thoroughly coordinated. Forecast resources and maintenance assistance long before they are needed. z Be thorough. Avoid wasting resources and training opportunities. Give subordinates the guidance and assets needed to train their crews, squads, sections, and platoons. z Be flexible. Continually update the training program to the changing needs of the unit. If assessment and planning stop, the training program stagnates. z Train continually. Train at every opportunity, not just during an intensified period, to get ready for qualification tables. Specialized high intensity training programs should be used only to bring a unit up to a desired proficiency level; then train continually to maintain that level. 12-46. Contingency plans and alternate methods of training should be identified in case the primary plan cannot be executed. Training time is valuable and should not be lost due to unforeseen factors.

TRAINING REQUIREMENTS 12-47. Training must conform to Army doctrine. The training requirements listed below must be trained and completed to standard to ensure the ultimate success of the gunnery training plan. z Schedule crew/squad skills training monthly, concurrently with preventative maintenance checks and services (PMCS), prepare-to-fire checks, armament accuracy checks (AAC) (Abrams only), and tactical training. z All Soldiers assigned to a vehicle and platoon alternate crew members (infantry only) must pass all GST tasks in the 3 months (6 months for RCs) before live fire. z Schedule gun tube recoil exercise and borescope semi-annually (Abrams). z Crews must meet or exceed the prerequisites to live-fire as established by AR 350-1 STRAC, local regulations and the unit commander. (See Gate to Live-Fire under Section II, Training Strategy for minimum requirements by system). z Digitally equipped units will conduct 50% of all engagements digitally during the crew GT. z Crews must pass all Table I tasks before conducting Table II CPC. z Crews must qualify on Table II before conducting crew GTs. z Crews must qualify on Table VI before conducting the collective GTs. z Squads must qualify on Rifle Squad Table VI (Engineer Qualification Table VIII for engineer units) before conducting the collective GTs. z Armor and infantry sections must qualify on Table IX prior to conducting Table XII when firing a GT XII. z Armor and infantry platoons must qualify on Table XII annually.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

12-17

Chapter 12

z z z z

Reconnaissance platoons must qualify either as sections on Table IX or as a platoon on Table XII annually. Bradley commanders and gunners must have completed the TOW gunnery program to standard before they can fire a live TOW missile. GST evaluators must pass all GST tasks within one month before they evaluate a particular GST station themselves. All vehicle crew evaluators (VCE) must certify or recertify in accordance with (IAW) the VCE certification program in the 3 months (6 months for RC) before live-fire.

Note. Commanders will have the flexibility to conduct their advance phase of gunnery as either pure or combined arms sections and/or platoons. The first time a platoon leader conducts collective gunnery, it should be with a pure platoon to demonstrate basic proficiency. 12-48. The commander develops his training strategy after assessing the strengths and weaknesses of his unit. His strategy must focus on his METL, sustain his unit’s strengths, and correct its weaknesses. He will find that some tasks apply to all Soldiers, some apply only to the vehicle crews, and others apply only to the Soldiers in squads. This requires an integrated training strategy. Gunnery progresses logically to support crew training, leading the section or platoon up to a collective, tactical, live-fire evaluation during section or platoon qualification.

SECTION IV – TRAINING PLANS 12-49. Once the commander and his staff have developed his METL and thoroughly assessed training proficiency, he begins the detailed process of developing a training plan.

GUNNERY TRAINING MASTER GUNNER 12-50. The mission of the Master Gunner is to train the unit for gunnery and act as subject matter expert for all weapon system platforms in the HBCT. The Master Gunner advises commanders at all echelons and assists with the planning, development, execution, and evaluation of all gunnery-related training (individual, crew, and collective). 12-51. The Master Gunner duties include— z Assist the integration of newly assigned Soldiers. „ Sets up or conducts initial skills training for new VCs or gunners. „ Assists in training new crew members. „ Trains and certifies vehicle crew evaluators. z Assists all elements in the unit concerning gunnery training. z Forecasts and manages ammunition. z Manages gunnery records, GST records, and crew rosters. z Sets up and oversees GST training and evaluates the results. z Coordinates and controls training device use. z If senior instructor/operator (SIO) qualified, he certifies and recertifies other instructors/operators (IO) to conduct crew gunnery simulations training. z Plans and manages crew gunnery simulations training. z Trains crews on device gunnery (installation, boresighting and troubleshooting procedures, point of aim, and maintenance).

12-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Gunnery Training Program

z z z z

Executes gunnery training (see Chapter 13, Range Operations). Supervises live-fire ranges to make sure all standards are followed. In a tactical environment, advises the commander of the tactical capabilities and limitations of all platform weapon systems against threat systems (in coordination with the S-2). Advises the commander on battle roster changes and crew turbulence impacts.

12-52. The Master Gunner’s formal training includes extensive training in vehicle maintenance; range planning, preparation, and execution; and all phases of gunnery training. Though this chapter previously discussed the main responsibilities of the Master Gunner, their scope changes depending on the level of assignment. z Brigade Master Gunner. The Master Gunner assigned to brigade level must— „ Work closely with Master Gunners assigned to lower echelons to make sure standards are uniform throughout training programs. „ Develop the written certification test for VCEs. „ Provide any new information on ways to improve crew training. „ Coordinate with range-control personnel at the installation or major training area. „ Help develop and upgrade range facilities. z Battalion Master Gunner. When assigned to battalion level, the Master Gunner must— „ Continue to train Master Gunners assigned to the battalion. „ Help the battalion commander and command sergeant major select candidates for Master Gunner School. „ Develop new training techniques to improve crew training. „ Coordinate with brigade for gunnery training assets. „ Certify VCEs. „ Certify GST evaluators IAW this manual. „ Certify range safety personnel. „ Manage ammunition resourcing. „ Monitor company gunnery training plans. „ Develop battalion level gunnery training plans. z Company Master Gunner. When assigned to company level, the Master Gunner must— „ Develop and execute the company-level gunnery training plan. „ Help service the turret and weapon system as required. „ Work with unit maintenance to correct turret problems. „ Complete DA Form 2408-4, Weapon Record Data. „ Coordinate with the battalion S-3 and battalion Master Gunner to secure company gunnery training assets. „ Train VCEs. z Platoon Master Gunner. When assigned to platoon level, the Master Gunner must— „ Make sure the platoon weapon system and turret are maintained. „ Update the company’s Master Gunner on the platoon’s crew training. „ Help the company’s Master Gunner with unit gunnery training.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

12-19

Chapter 12

MANAGING BATTLE ROSTER CHANGES 12-53. The greatest problem a commander must contend with in regards to gunnery when developing a training plan is battle roster changes. The commander must plan short- or long-term solutions for reducing it and controlling its effects. He must do this before he develops and executes his training plan. z Short-Term Solutions. „ Change personnel as a crew rather than a single crewman. For example, if a staff sergeant Bradley commander is promoted to platoon sergeant, then his entire crew moves with him. This causes only one crew change rather than two. „ Train an alternate for each position. z Long-Term Solutions. „ Continually cross-train personnel for replacements. Experienced Soldiers are easier to train than new Soldiers. „ Form complete crews from new personnel who come into the unit.

LONG-RANGE TRAINING PLANS 12-54. Long-range planning synchronizes supporting units and agencies by allocating dedicated training time for organizations and units to train on METL tasks. Long-range planning goes out to one year for AC and three to five years for RC at the company level. 12-55. Each commander identifies training needs from his METL task-proficiency assessment. He sets goals and forecasts or allocates resources to reach them. When considering his long-range plan, the commander must answer several questions: z What is the current platoon proficiency level (crew and squad)? The answer to this question depends on— „ Battle roster changes. „ Performance during previous gunnery maneuver exercises and squad, section, and platoon situational training exercises (STX) and live-fire exercises (LFX). z What are the performance goals for the platoons (proficiency level crews and squads must reach to accomplish METL tasks)? Some goals include— „ Set a percentage of qualified marksmen, sharpshooters, and experts for AT4, Javelin, M16, M203, M240B, M249, or other weapon systems that the unit uses. „ Set a percentage of qualified, superior, and distinguished ratings for vehicle crews. „ Obtain an overall rating of trained (“T”) on the appropriate collective GT. z What resources must we have, and where is the command emphasis? „ Correct tasks that fall short of the standard. „ Sustain proficiency in tasks that meet the standard. z What schools and training are needed to certify and train trainers? „ Master gunner’s course. „ Vehicle crew evaluator’s certification. „ GST evaluator certification. „ Instructor/operator courses within the unit. „ Certification course for MILES or PGS device training.

12-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Gunnery Training Program

SHORT-RANGE TRAINING PLANS 12-56. Short-range planning defines in greater detail the broad guidance on training events and other activities outlined in the commander’s training guidance and depicted on the long-range calendar. Shortrange planning looks out from three to six months for AC and 12 to 20 months for RC. Resources identified during long-range planning are allocated and prioritized during short-range planning. Command training guidance is published to provide trainers detailed information on the training objective. 12-57. Gunnery resource considerations are ammunition, fuel and maintenance, range and maneuver area, and training device availability. z Ammunition. Master gunners must carefully manage ammunition allocations. The battalion Master Gunner forecasts ammunition needs well before the training event. For many reasons, the ammunition authorization could fall short of the forecasted training requirement. Device gunnery will not train proper boresight, zero, or gun-operation procedures and should be considered when planning non-qualification tables. Once the Master Gunner knows the yearly ammunition authorization, he allocates ammunition based on the commander’s guidance and priority. z Fuel and Maintenance. An intensive vehicle technical inspection program should be instituted prior to gunnery to ensure all vehicles are fully mission capable (FMC) with the goal of each crew qualifying on their own vehicle. z Range and Maneuver Area. Include target and range-support personnel. z Short-Range Gunnery. Considerations include— „ Vehicle services. „ Other mandatory training, or events prescribed by higher headquarters. „ No training events (holidays, leaves, installation support). „ Crew and squad training priorities and expected outcomes. „ Leader, individual, and collective tasks associated with the training event. „ Steps required in preparing trainers and evaluators. „ Integration of crew and squad training on the training calendar. z Training Device Availability. „ Crew training. The crew practices with MILES, PGS, and/or caliber .50 inbore device. MILES, however, is unsuitable for moving target engagements on vehicles with no kinematic lead because it does not require the gunner to apply lead to engage a target. MILES is also unsuitable for training burst on target (BOT), tracer on target (TOT), and manual range index adjustment. Consequently, the commander must develop a strategy to train with resources available. These strategies can include— − Crew rehearsals and chair drills. − Conduct qualification refires and additional training. − Resource additional ammunition to new crews. − Increase device-based training. − Increase use of crew gunnery simulators. „ Squad training. − Conduct weapons qualification. − Dry fire or use MILES on STX lanes. − Conduct a squad and platoon LFX. − Conduct LFX re-fires and additional training.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

12-21

Chapter 12

„

Section and platoon training. The section and platoon practices with MILES, PGS (primary device for BFV gunnery training), and/or caliber .50 inbore device. MILES, however, is unsuitable for moving target engagements on vehicles with no kinematic lead because it does not require the gunner to apply lead to engage a target. MILES is also unsuitable for training BOT, TOT, and manual range index adjustment. Commanders may dry fire or use 7.62mm in a subcaliber role. − Rehearse the platoon. − Qualify the platoon.

NEAR-TERM TRAINING PLANS 12-58. Near-term planning consists of scheduling and executing training specified in the short-range training plan, providing specific guidance for training, and producing detailed training schedules. Nearterm planning covers a period of six to eight weeks prior to execution of training for AC and four months prior to execution of training for RC. 12-59. Training meetings should be held at battalion, company, and platoon levels so all key personnel understand detailed information. z Battalion meetings focus on training management. „ Conduct final coordination of ranges, training areas, and ammunition. „ Coordinate between units for maintenance, medical, logistical, and personnel requirements. „ Lock in and publish unit-training schedules. z Company and platoon meetings cover the specifics of executing the training event. These elements should be included in the gunnery operation order (OPORD). „ Discuss when the training will be conducted, to include movement times, to the training area. „ Discuss personnel involved in the training event, and identify who is responsible for conducting the training. „ Discuss in detail the range setup, execution, and key individual responsibilities. „ Discuss training location, uniforms, and special equipment required to conduct training. „ Discuss specific personnel performance measures to be evaluated. 12-60. Commanders should require briefbacks to ensure subordinate leaders understand all aspects of the training event. 12-61. The formal training plan culminates with the training schedule. Commanders, key leaders, and all trainers must continue to plan and coordinate training informally with a series of pre-execution checks. Additionally, trainers, Soldiers, and support personnel must thoroughly prepare for training. z Pre-execution checks systematically prepare Soldiers, trainers, and resources to ensure that training starts properly. These checks are developed, and responsibility for them assigned, during short-range planning. To develop an intensive pre-execution checklist, trainers should integrate range and training area checks and considerations from Chapter 13. z Commanders prepare trainers to conduct performance-oriented training by providing time, guidance, resources, and references. Each trainer rehearses his preparations and reviews the tasks and subtasks that he must conduct. This gives him confidence in his ability to perform the task himself, and to teach Soldiers the correct skills. 12-62. Table 12-3 outlines a sample six month gunnery training plan for an Abrams equipped unit. All required training prior to the crew gunnery phase is included. Units may have to modify their training plan based on time and resource constraints, provided all required training and testing is conducted.

12-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Gunnery Training Program

Figure 12-9. Sample six month gunnery training timeline (Abrams)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

12-23

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 13

Range Operations Chapter 13 outlines the procedures, duties, resources, and responsibilities for establishing and operating both permanent and temporary gunnery and tactical training facilities.

Contents Section I – Planning Range Operations 13-1 Planning Gunnery Exercises ............. 13-1 Commander’s Intent ......................... 13-2 Developing Scenarios for Collective Gunnery Tables .............................. 13-15 Planning for Range Operations....... 13-20 Section II – Conducting Range Operations ............................................. 13-24 Opening the Range and Occupying the Training Site.............................. 13-24 During the Exercise ........................ 13-25

Closing the Range........................... 13-25 Administration and Emergency Directions ........................................ 13-26 Section III – Digital Range Set Up ........ 13-27 Data Sets ........................................ 13-27 Range Overlay ................................ 13-27 Digital Base Station ......................... 13-28 Rehearsal........................................ 13-28 Icon Management ........................... 13-28

SECTION I – PLANNING RANGE OPERATIONS 13-1. This section outlines procedures, duties, and responsibilities for planning and establishing gunnery ranges and tactical courses, to include developing scenarios for gunnery ranges to support a complete gunnery exercise. A combat training program is conducted on training areas and conducted dry and live on range firing complexes. It provides an opportunity to acquire targets in a realistic environment and to use the weapon systems to engage targets. Tactical training should be integrated with gunnery training.

PLANNING GUNNERY EXERCISES 13-2. When planning a gunnery exercise the following general procedures are followed: z Determine the commander’s intent for the end state of the exercise. z Make tentative plans for crew and collective gunnery. z Evaluate range and ammunition resources to support the plans. z Forecast resources necessary to execute the training event(s). z Develop scenarios for crew and collective gunnery tables (GT). z Proof all scenarios prior to execution. z Coordinate with supporting elements. z Plan range operations and personnel. z Execute the exercise. z Evaluate the exercise through after action reviews (AAR).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-1

Chapter 13

COMMANDER’S INTENT 13-3. Planning a gunnery training exercise begins with the commander’s intent for the desired end state of the exercise. The commander will issue guidance to his staff on the training mission(s) that the unit is to perform. The staff first plans for the collective gunnery phase to meet the commander’s intent. The staff tailors a crew gunnery training program that supports the collective training plan. The S-3 and Master Gunner develop the crew tables using their inherent flexibility to tailor the tasks to the mission in order to meet the commander’s intent. z To develop the crew GTs— „ The S-3 and Master Gunner identify how crew tables and tasks are going to be designed to train to the mission that will be used in the collective GTs. „ The Master Gunner determines which ranges will support firing these tables and tasks and develops scenarios for each table. z To develop the collective GTs— „ The commander and his S-3 determine which core mission(s) to conduct based on the unit’s mission-essential task list (METL) and specific command guidance. „ The S-3 identifies the primary collective tasks to evaluate based on the core missions. „ The S-3 identifies which collective tasks will be firing tasks. „ The S-3 and Master Gunner develop scenarios that require the sections and platoons to conduct designated core missions and their respective primary collective tasks. Live-fire gunnery presentations are incorporated into the firing tasks.

SITE SELECTION 13-4. Before selecting a site, identify the training area or range(s) that will support the training event. Make a thorough map and ground reconnaissance of areas available for firing. The range must be large enough to accommodate all weapon systems, types of ammunition, and types of exercises to be fired. Some considerations for site selection are— z Sufficient maneuver area and enough targets to provide several routes and target arrays. z Targets in realistic arrays and, where possible, not marked by berms. z Enfilade and defilade firing positions. z Sand table layouts of the entire range area to aid rehearsals. z Terrain that accommodates integration of squad and vehicle fire and maneuver.

RANGE OR TACTICAL COURSE RECONNAISSANCE 13-5. The S-3 and Master Gunner conduct a reconnaissance of the ranges they will use to support their gunnery training plan. Additionally, the officer in charge (OIC) and noncommissioned officer in charge (NCOIC) for each range should personally conduct a reconnaissance and coordinate with range control headquarters before the unit occupies the range or training area. The reconnaissance should provide answers to the following questions: z What route to the range or training area will be used? z How many vehicles can run the combat course simultaneously? z Are enfilade and defilade positions available? z What control facilities are available? What is their condition? z Is the tower equipped with FM communication equipment? z Are range safety markers visible for live fire? How will they be illuminated at night? z How is access to the impact area controlled for live fire? What are guard requirements? z Does the range support firing of all types of ammunition and pyrotechnics required for the exercise?

13-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

z

z z z z

z z z z z z z z

Who furnishes targets, target supplies, or vehicle visual modification sets (3)? Where are targets stored? Are the targets the correct type, size, shape, and color? What is the condition of target mechanisms? Who provides the target operators and target details? Is there a boresight panel at the recommended range? Can boresighting and zeroing be conducted simultaneously? What is the condition of moving targets? Who furnishes the caliber .50 inbore devices or Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System (MILES) equipment for the tactical course? Are all caliber .50 inbore devices or MILES equipment accounted for and operational? Has the range or training area been cleared of unexploded ordnance? Who will furnish fire-fighting equipment, range flags, and range regulations? Does the range or training area provide adequate space for maneuvering vehicles and the weapons to be used? Does the range provide firing positions for indirect-fire illumination? Does the range allow reduced vehicle-to-target ranges for limited visibility? Who will supply optics for scoring and control? What is the digital infrastructure provided on the range (Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2), audio/visual (A/V), and instrumentation required)? Where are the following administrative areas: „ Ammunition pad? „ Clearing pit and misfire pit? „ Barriers/guard posts? „ Mess area? „ Latrine? „ Helipad? „ Aid station? „ Troop break and billet areas? „ Maintenance area? „ Briefing and debriefing tent (AAR facility)? „ Track vehicle parking area? „ Very important person (VIP) parking area? „ Wheel vehicle parking area? „ Concurrent training area?

RANGE OR TRAINING AREA LAYOUT 13-6. Generally, vehicle ranges support both crew and collective live-fire scenarios. Some ranges consist of stationary and moving vehicle positions; however, when there is a moving vehicle position, the maneuver box area is laid out to make sure the firing vehicle is within the firing limits of the range. When possible, course runs will not be limited to roads or range trails, but will be designed to maneuver crosscountry. z Coordinate with the range facility manager to gather information about the facility. Determine if the surface danger zone (SDZ) diagram is current; construct one, if necessary refer to DA Pam 385-63 and Technical Bulletin (TB) Med 524. As a minimum, you will need to obtain the following information about your facility: „ A scaled range diagram (preferably in 100-meter increments) that identifies target pits (by type and number), battle positions, and firing points or map of the training area. „ A fire/no-fire matrix (if available), which is the authorized list of targets allowed to be fired within the SDZ diagram from each firing point/battle position. This is typically located in the range standing operating procedure (SOP).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-3

Chapter 13

z

Conduct a reconnaissance of the facility to— „ Identify any restrictions for the facility. „ Determine the best lanes that allow the most targets to be engaged. „ Determine if the facility supports dual-lane scenario or only single-lane firing. „ Determine the layout of course roads to identify a course speed. „ Determine if the facility supports firing multiple weapons platforms simultaneously. „ Plan to maximize throughput.

13-7. Answer the following questions before developing the scenario: z How many lanes will be firing? z What weapon platform types will be firing? z What is the maximum distance of the firing box for offensive engagements? z What is the course speed? z What is the order of tasks for each scenario? z Is cross-firing allowed on the range? Note. The order of tasks is usually most influenced by the location of specific target types on the range, typically moving targets or targets in urban clusters. Plan these engagements first when developing a scenario.

DEVELOPING THE SCENARIO 13-8. Once planning is complete, develop the scenario, including the following: z Identify the first firing position and the first task to be fired. z For offensive tasks with delay target(s), estimate where the firing vehicle should be (based on course speed) to determine which target(s) to select. Identify alternate targets for each engagement. z If you are firing a dual-lane scenario, consider where the firing vehicles are in relation to each other when one finishes an engagement. Neither firing vehicle should be placed in the danger zone of the other while firing. z If you are firing tanks and Bradleys on the same range, take into consideration whether the vehicles will be firing at the same targetry and the ranges at which they will be engaging those targets. Firing positions and offensive firing points may have to be adjusted to compensate. z When listing target information, include the following: „ Target pit number and/or target number. „ Target type. „ Vehicle-to-target range. „ For tanks, ensure loader’s targets are always to the left of the main gun-target line and the vehicle commander’s (VC) machine gun engagements are always to the right of the main gun-target line. „ Exposure time (target lift and delay time, if applicable). „ Hostile fire signature (no less than 5 seconds after exposure). „ Type of ammunition to be fired at the target. „ Number of hits required to kill the target. Note. If running both Abrams and Bradleys simultaneously, target hit sensors will have to be adjusted accordingly if targets are to be engaged by both weapon platforms. „ „

13-4

Target speed (if moving). Target direction (if moving).

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

„ „

Evasive moving target (plan maneuver). Alternate target number (if applicable).

Targetry 13-9. All targets are constructed in accordance with (IAW) TC 25-8. All stationary targets should be mounted on pop-up mechanisms to facilitate target acquisition and scoring. Moving targets should be presented at speeds between 24 and 32 kph (15 to 20 mph). Moving, evasive targets should be presented at speeds between 8 and 32 kph (5 to 20 mph). Currently, an evasive target can be programmed to move at varying speeds, conduct short halts, or change direction. They must be visible from the firing position for the entire exposure time, and must run for a minimum of 15 seconds in each step to allow for acquisition, tracking, and engaging. Evasive targets should have the ability to change speed and direction, and alter their appearance or thermal signature as the vehicles’ directions change. All target types must have thermal target signatures for both day and night engagements IAW TC 25-8. z Armor. Armor targets will be presented as stationary or moving, frontal or flank threat armor silhouettes. z Light Armored Vehicle. Light-armored vehicle targets will be presented as stationary or moving, frontal or flank threat personnel carrier (PC) or fighting vehicle silhouettes. z Unarmored Vehicle. Unarmored vehicle targets will be presented as stationary or moving, frontal or flank threat armed truck silhouettes. z Point Troop. Point troop targets are no more than three E-type silhouettes placed in line, in depth, or in a wedge formation, no more than 5 meters apart or 10 meters in depth (if more than one silhouette is used). These targets may be placed on a single vehicle target lifter at ranges beyond 900 meters to allow crews to engage the target with high-explosive (HE) rounds. z Area Troop. Realistic arrays include no more than 7 and no fewer than 4 E-type silhouettes placed in a linear or wedge formation. They are spread up to 5 meters apart, but the whole target array fits in an area up to 30 meters wide by 20 meters deep. z Aerial. Aerial targets will be presented as stationary or moving, frontal or flank threat attack helicopter silhouettes.

Friendly and Neutral Presentations 13-10. Realistic friendly and neutral presentations may be incorporated in all phases of gunnery to train crews and squads in combat identification and fratricide avoidance. Presentations must appear realistic in visual, thermal, and infrared (IR) optics. Friendly/neutral presentations will be marked as follows: z Friendly Vehicle. Friendly vehicle presentations will be displayed with CIP panels properly located on the silhouette. Phoenix beacons should be used at night to provide IR optics with friendly identification signature. Unit SOPs can also be used to develop specific identification markings. z Friendly Troop. Units should use established SOPs to depict friendly troop thermal signature combat identification for night engagements. Phoenix beacons should be used at night to provide IR optics with friendly identification signature. z Neutral. Neutral presentations must be clearly identifiable as civilian vehicles and personnel. Personnel presentations may consist of any number silhouettes dispersed in a small group.

Lateral Dispersion of Targets 13-11. Target dispersion must be used for all GTs. The intent is to ensure gunners and VCs are not able to acquire both targets in a two-target engagement or no more than two targets in a three-target engagement while in narrow field of view (NFOV). The minimum target dispersion on an engagement should be 1.5 times the NFOV of the platform. However, all targets presented during degraded mode engagements must be dispersed no more than 40 mils within the field of view of the vehicle’s auxiliary sight. Given the

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-5

Chapter 13

difference in the platform optics, the Abrams and the Bradley will have different minimum lateral target dispersions. The distance between targets can be worked out using the WORM formula. z Abrams. For the Abrams tanks, the thermal wide field of view (WFOV) is 15 degrees, 1.5 times the WFOV in mils is 400 mils. z Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) Integrated Sight Unit (ISU). For the BFV with ISU, the thermal WFOV is 6.6 degrees, 1.5 times the WFOV in mils is 176 mils. z BFV Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS). For the BFV with IBAS, the forwarding looking, infrared (FLIR) WFOV is 13.3 degrees, 1.5 times the WFOV in mils is 355 mils. Note. In tasks where three targets are used, the third (delayed) target may be presented anywhere, as long as it is at the proper range.

Urban Clusters 13-12. Commanders may opt to conduct their gunnery utilizing urban clusters to replicate urban operations on the range (see Figure 13-1). Urban clusters should consist of single and multiple story structures in and around the targetry replicating buildings similar to those the unit expects to encounter in their operational environment (OE). These structures should be constructed in groups of no less than three buildings per cluster. Urban clusters must be available during all phases of gunnery for single and/or multiple lane ranges to support the unit mission. The example below illustrates urban clusters on a multiple lane range complex.

Figure 13-1. Urban cluster

Maneuver Boxes 13-13. The maneuver box is the maximum distance the vehicle could travel and still have the target(s) exposed, to include vehicle acceleration and target lift time. Maneuver boxes must be clearly defined so as to be able to accurately determine if the targets can be safely fired at for their entire presentation time and to accurately plot surface danger diagrams as necessary. Figure 13-2a outlines various firing box lengths

13-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

based on vehicle speed, number of targets within the presentation and target exposure times. Additionally, an 8 second target lift/firing vehicle acceleration time has been built into the table to accommodate these events, therefore the starting point for offensive engagements is the point at which the firing vehicle begins movement, the target lifter can begin raising the target into a locked position with actual engagement occurring at a predetermined point within the maneuver box. In-depth proofing of the range prior to execution will determine at what point targets are in a locked position and able to be engaged. Due to variable target lift times as determined by target type (vehicle vs. troop silhouette) and range to range variances, this engagement point within the maneuver box will not be constant. The firing vehicle must adhere to start and stop points. At no time, will the vehicle extend or surpass the exposure and engagement times. Figure 13-2a through Figure 13-2d displays the step-by-step process involved in an offensive engagement.

Figure 13-2a. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-7

Chapter 13

Figure 13-2b. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement (continued)

Figure 13-2c. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement (continued)

13-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

Figure 13-2d. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement (continued) 13-14. To determine the size of a maneuver box, the average vehicle speed for the course and the target exposure time must be known. Table 13-1 shows how to determine the length of a maneuver box. If the first number after the decimal is 5 or more, the length is rounded up to the next whole number. Table 13-1 shows how to determine the length of a delayed target maneuver box. Table 13-1. Formula for determining length of maneuver box

FIRING VEHICLE SPEED

Target Array Type

12 MPH

SINGLE TARGET 310 meters

DOUBLE TARGET 310 meters

3 TGTS - 15 Sec delay 391 meters

3 TGTS - 20 Sec delay 418 meters

3 TGTS - 25 Sec delay 445 meters

13 MPH

337 meters

337 meters

424 meters

453 meters

482 meters

14 MPH

363 meters

363 meters

457 meters

488 meters

520 meters

15 MPH

389 meters

389 meters

490 meters

523 meters

557 meters

16 MPH

415 meters

415 meters

522 meters

558 meters

594 meters

17 MPH

441 meters

441 meters

555 meters

593 meters

631 meters

18 MPH

467 meters

467 meters

588 meters

628 meters

668 meters

19 MPH

493 meters

493 meters

620 meters

663 meters

705 meters

20 MPH

519 meters

519 meters

653 meters

698 meters

742 meters

Maneuver Box Length Notes. 1. Maneuver box length is determined by converting miles per hour (mph) to meters per seconds (mps) by multiplying using a constant value of 0.4471416. 2. Multiply the determined mps by the target exposure time + 8 seconds for target lifter time. 3. Round to the nearest whole number to obtain maneuver box length in meters.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-9

Chapter 13

Surface Danger Zone Diagrams 13-15. When establishing ranges, units must submit SDZ diagrams to the installation range control facility for approval before firing. Restrictions and precautions for SDZ diagrams are found in DA Pam 385-63 and TB Med 524. SDZ diagrams show range boundaries and safety features in overlay form, including safety limit markers for each firing position (see Figure 13-3, Figure 13-4, Table 13-2, and Table 13-3). Firing tables (FT) provide values for range, maximum ordinates, and superelevation for each ammunition type. Note. If you must construct an SDZ diagram, refer to DA Pam 385-63. General Surface Danger Zone Considerations 13-16. When engaging ground targets, the unit may reduce Distance X (maximum range) to 15 degrees elevation, provided they maintain the gun’s firing elevation at less than or equal to 15 degrees. If they cannot control the weapon at or under 15 degrees, such as could happen when firing while moving over rough terrain with inoperative stabilization, they will use the maximum range (Distance X). At 15 degrees elevation, range equals the greatest distance the projectile can travel when fired at elevations at or under 15 degrees. The unit derives this value by evaluating ricochet and ballistic FT data.

WARNING Laser range finders (LRF) will be used only on established lasersafe ranges. Do not fire the LRF at reflective surfaces at any range.

Non-Eye-Safe Laser Surface Danger Zone 13-17. When non-eye-safe lasers are used, the nominal ocular hazard distance (NOHD) (an additional buffer area) must be added to the SDZ diagram. The NOHD will vary for each type of laser device and type of terrain. (See DA Pam 385-63, Table 19-1, for the appropriate NOHD.) For the LRF, the NOHD is 7 kilometers. Every object the laser beam strikes will reflect energy. In most cases, this energy is diffused and is not hazardous. To prevent eye injury from a reflected laser beam, avoid shiny surfaces. Remove mirrors, panes of glass or plastic, chrome-plated metal, or other flat mirror-like objects having a vertical or near-vertical surface from the target area. If it is impractical to remove some surfaces, cover them with lusterless paint. Cloth, cardboard, wood, and lusterless metal targets are acceptable for laser ranging. Tank Main Gun Surface Danger Zone Considerations 13-18. Total range distance includes horizontal range corresponding to 10-degree quadrant elevation, and an allowance for the maneuver area and Area B, when required. This total range distance will be decreased only on a waiver basis. The main gun will not be fired at quadrant elevations greater than +5 degrees (+89 mils). This provides a safety factor of 5 degrees within the SDZ diagram. Firing limits for establishing ranges can be obtained from the local range control officer.

13-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

Figure 13-3. Sample SDZ diagram for 25-mm M792 ammunition Table 13-2. Dimensions for 25-mm M792 (HEI-T) ammunition Area A

Area B

Area W2

Angle Y

Angle Z

Distance X1

Ricochet Range

15 Deg Elevation Range

300m

400m

1,373m

28 deg

5 deg

6,381m

5,265m

5,244m

300m

400m

1,290m

27 deg

5 deg

6,381m

5,071m

5,244m

300m

400m

908m

19 deg

5 deg

6,381m

4,792m

5,244m

300m

400m

1,047m

19 deg

5 deg

6,381m

4823m

5,244m

Notes. 1. Firer may reduce Distance X (maximum range) to Ricochet Range when engaging ground targets at ranges up to 3,000 meters from the stationary firing positions. When firing from a moving vehicle over level terrain at ground targets up to 3,000 meters, he can use the 15 degree Elevation Range, except for armor Impact Medium, in which case he uses the Ricochet Range distance, whichever is greater. When firing on the move over rough terrain the firer uses Distance X. 2. When firing at aerial targets with the gun elevation greater than 15 degrees, the firer need not use the Ricochet Area defined by Area W and Angle Y.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-11

Chapter 13

Figure 13-4. Sample SDZ diagram for 7.62-mm M80 (A131) ammunition Table 13-3. Dimensions for 7.62-mm M80 (A131) ammunition Impact Media

Area A

Area B

Angle P

Angle Q

Area W

Left and Right of GTL

Distance X

Distance Y

Earth

N/A

N/A

43.81 deg

38.90 deg

1,461m

5 deg

4,100m

4,073m

Water

N/A

N/A

43.81 deg

38.90 deg

1,461m

5 deg

4,100m

4,073m

Steel

N/A

N/A

20.17 deg

75.54 deg

861m

5 deg

4,100m

4,073m

Concrete

N/A

N/A

20.17 deg

75.54 deg

861m

5 deg

4,100m

4,073m

Notes. 1. Firer may reduce Distance X (maximum range) to Ricochet Range when engaging ground targets at ranges up to 3,000 meters from the stationary firing positions. When firing from a moving vehicle over rough terrain the firer uses Distance X. 2. When firing at aerial targets with the gun elevation greater than 15 degrees, the firer need not use the Ricochet Area defined by Area W and Angle Y.

Ballistic Firing Tables 13-19. The Master Gunners and range control personnel use the ballistic data in ammunition FTs to develop or modify surface danger area diagrams (see Table 13-4). With the Master Gunner’s knowledge of the fire control system, they jointly develop realistic GTs. The following terms explain the data in all gunnery FTs; however, the relative locations of the data columns might differ among the tables for the various rounds of ammunition and types of weapons: z Angle of Fall. The angle, measured in mils, between the line of sight and the line of elevation. z Ballistic. The science that deals with the motion, behavior, and effects of a projectile. z (D=change) DH/DR. The change in height (in meters) of a projectile for a 100-meter change in linear range on the ground, at a given range.

13-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

z z z z z z z z

z z

z

z z z

(D=change) DR/DSE. The number of meters a 1-mil elevation change will move the round in linear range, on the ground, at a given range and super elevation. Drift. The number of mils the projectile moves to the right of the gun-target line due to the spin caused by the rifling in the gun. Line of Departure. A prolongation of a line running through the axis of the gun bore as the projectile leaves the muzzle. Line of Elevation. A prolongation of a line running through the axis of the gun bore. Line of Sight. A straight line between the gun sight and the target. Maximum Ordinate. The maximum height the projectile travels above the line of sight at a given range. Range. The distance from the vehicle to the target. Range to Maximum Ordinate. Out to this range (the range at which the round reaches maximum ordinate) the projectile ascends; beyond this range, it descends. This range (to the maximum ordinate) always occurs shortly past half of the target range. Remaining Velocity. The speed of the projectile in meters per second and at a selected range. Super Elevation. The angle, measured, in mils, between the line of sight and a line tangent to the trajectory at the point of impact. The additional elevation induced into the fire control system raises the ballistic flight of a given projectile. This ensures that the projectile hits the target at a given range. Ten kph Crosswind Deflection. Generally, thanks to crosswind deflection, a round is most unstable when it exits the muzzle. This effect of wind deflection assumes a crosswind speed of 10 kph. The firer applies the correction into the wind. If the wind speed is more or less than 10 kph, the firer estimates the point of aim. Time of Flight. The time a projectile takes to reach a target at a selected range. Trajectory. The path of the projectile from the muzzle of the weapon to the first point of impact. Vertical Gun Jump. The angle measured in mils between the line of departure of the projectile and the line of elevation.

Table 13-4. Sample ballistic firing table for cartridge, APDS-T (muzzle velocity 1,345 mps) Range

Superelevation

DR/DSE

DH/DR

Drift

Time of Flight

1,600m

5.12 mils

263 m/mils

0.6m per 100m

0.1 mils

1.33 sec

1,700m

5.49 mils

257 m/mils

0.6m per 100m

0.1 mils

1.42 sec

1,800m

5.88 mils

252 m/mils

0.7m per 100m

0.1 mils

1.52 sec

1,900m

6.72 mils

247 m/mils

0.7m per 100m

0.1 mils

1.61 sec

10kph Crosswind Deflection

Maximum Ordinate

Range to Max Ordinate

Angle of Fall

Remaining Velocity

Range

0.2 mils

2.2m

830m

6 mils

1,075 m/sec

1,600m

0.3 mils

2.2m

884m

6 mils

1,058 m/sec

1,700m

0.3 mils

2.2m

938m

7 mils

1,041 m/sec

1,800m

0.3 mils

2.2m

993m

8 mils

1,025 m/sec

1,900m

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-13

Chapter 13

Scaled Ranges 13-20. Certain gunnery training can be accomplished on scaled down ranges when access to full scale ranges is limited. Table 13-5 defines various scaled ranges to targets. For realism, if a scaled range is used, targetry should be scaled down as well. Scaled sizes for targetry can be found in TC 25-8. Table 13-5. Scaled ranges SCALE OF RANGES Combat Range (meters)

800

1/2 Scale (meters)

400

1/5 Scale (meters)

470

1/10 Scale (meters)

80

1/20 Scale (meters)

132

1/30 Scale (meters)

87

1/35 Scale (meters)

1/60 Scale (meters)

75

44 49

900

450

592

90

148

98

84

1,000

500

660

100

165

110

94

55

1,100

550

724

110

181

120

103

60

1,200

600

792

120

198

131

113

66

1,300

650

856

130

214

142

122

71

1,400

700

924

140

231

154

132

77

1,500

750

990

150

247

164

141

82

1,600

800

1,060

160

264

176

150

88

1,700

850

1,120

170

280

186

160

93

1,800

900

1,192

180

297

198

169

99

1,900

950

1,256

190

313

208

179

104

2,000

1,000

1,320

200

330

220

188

110

2,100

1,050

1,388

210

346

230

198

115

2,200

1,100

1,450

220

363

242

207

121

2,300

1,150

1,520

230

379

250

216

126

2,400

1,200

1,588

240

396

264

226

132

2,500

1,250

1,650

250

412

274

235

137

2,600

1,300

1,720

260

429

286

245

143

2,700

1,350

1,780

270

445

296

254

148

2,800

1,400

1,850

280

462

308

264

154

2,900

1,450

1,915

290

478

318

273

159

3,000

1,500

1,980

300

495

330

282

165

PROOFING THE SCENARIO 13-21. After the scenario is approved on paper, it must be proofed on the facility using the vehicle(s) for which the scenario was approved. It is imperative that this be conducted before the unit arrives, to prevent lost training time. 13-22. All conditions must be the same as if actually firing, using the same type weapon platform(s) that will be firing. If firing a dual-lane scenario, proof both lanes at the same time. Each target should be checked for validity by making sure it can be viewed through the firing vehicle optics throughout the entire presentation time. The range to the targets and the target presentation times should be verified. For offensive engagements the proofing vehicle should maneuver through the entire maneuver box to ensure that targets are not masked for any part of their presentation time. On computer-controlled ranges, Master Gunners should proof scenarios and adjust target lift times as necessary to ensure that multiple targets are programmed to lift simultaneously. Adjustments may also be necessary for delayed targets to ensure they are presented with the proper lift time and have the appropriate target exposure time.

13-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

13-23. For Abrams units, proofing should be accomplished by making sure targets can be viewed through the gunner’s auxiliary sight (GAS) throughout the entire exposure time. Using only the gunner’s primary sight (GPS) to proof can lead to dead space within the gun-target line.

DEVELOPING SCENARIOS FOR COLLECTIVE GUNNERY TABLES 13-24. Combined Arms Training Strategies (CATS), along with scenario development and the evaluation criteria and requirements in Chapter 12, establish an Army standard for training and evaluation. At the same time, they allow unit commanders to tailor tactical tasks based on their particular missions and training emphasis. These tables should be designed to be combined arms events, to employ multi-echelon training, and to be interactive to the extent that tactical decisions affect targetry presentations. This section provides information for developing tactical scenarios to support collective gunnery training. 13-25. Collective proficiency exercises and practice tables are a building block for section and platoon qualification. Sections and platoons should collectively participate in device-based training at least once before conducting live-fire training at that level. When they do qualify, sections and platoons follow the guidelines and standards in the applicable CATS and this chapter. z The commander and his S-3 determine which CATS core mission(s) to conduct based on the unit’s METL and specific command guidance. z The S-3 identifies the primary collective tasks to evaluate based on the core missions. z The S-3 identifies which collective tasks will be firing tasks. z Section and platoon gunnery will be conducted in two phases, one during the day and one at night. z The S-3 and Master Gunner develop scenarios that require the sections and platoons to conduct designated core missions and their respective primary collective tasks. Live-fire gunnery presentations are incorporated into the firing tasks. This chapter identifies the type and the minimum number of live-fire targets for each platform system during qualification. However, units may add targets if resources allow. z The S-3, S-2, and Master Gunner select vehicle and troop arrays that represent threat forces in the OE or the required training emphasis. They also specify threat target types and engagement distances, or range bands as well as most-to-least-dangerous targets, based on the threat analysis and training emphasis. The end product is a threat template for section and platoon gunnery exercises. z The S-3 develops an operation order (OPORD) that supports the missions. z The Master Gunner prepares evaluation packets for each section or platoon. Each packet contains training and evaluation outlines (T&EO), as well as tactical and gunnery scoresheets. The Master Gunner arranges the contents in collective-task sequence and prepares an allinclusive list of what is in an evaluation packet. z The Master Gunner coordinates all necessary resources and personnel to support the gunnery exercises. z For FBCB2-equipped platform systems, tactical scenarios will integrate digital training. 13-26. The collective tables must begin with an OPORD issued to the platoon by the platoon leader. Graphics used to control movement to the range and section sectors of fire and axis of advance (range limitations) will be developed as a hard copy and transmitted, if equipped, via digital communications. Section and platoon leaders must develop their own additional direct fire control and distribution measures and graphics using the platoon SOP. Situation reports (SITREP) and fragmentary orders (FRAGO) used to control the section will be issued based on these graphics.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-15

Chapter 13

LIVE-FIRE CONSIDERATIONS 13-27. Firing tasks are conducted on the range complex that offers the best available target and maneuver area that replicates the selected mission. z Targets in and around building facades replicate an urban environment. z Long-range targets on flat terrain replicate a desert environment. z Practice and qualification may be conducted on the same range; however, target presentation will not be in the same sequence. z All targets within a presentation are presented simultaneously. This requires the firing element to properly control and distribute fires. z For each squad that will fire, no more than two dismount squads are presented simultaneously. z Indirect-fire support should be incorporated in the scenario, whether it is simulated or live fire (conduct live fire if possible). If mortars are used for illumination, this can count as fire support. Indirect-fire targets are additional target presentations based on the threat template and should support mortar gunnery standards. Indirect-fire targets should be placed beyond effective directfire range or beyond direct-fire restricted fire lines so they are not engaged with direct fires. z Air-ground coordination should be incorporated in the scenario, whether it is simulated or live. Aviation targets are additional target presentations based on the threat template and should support aviation gunnery standards.

COMBINED ARMS INTEGRATION 13-28. Collective gunnery training can be enhanced by integrating combined arms training to the gunnery exercises. Each participating unit, with its specific weapon systems, must be included in the planning process. The following is a discussion of the key considerations for the different types of units that may be included in collective gunnery training.

Scouts 13-29. Scout platoons and sections may be integrated into tactical scenarios to exercise security and reconnaissance missions. This may be accomplished independently or in conjunction with a section, platoon, or company team exercise. If scouts are to be deployed forward of uploaded weapon systems, their safety must be paramount.

Mortars 13-30. When supporting a live-fire exercise (LFX), mortar firing points must be planned to avoid firing over the heads of troops. To increase the training benefit for mortar crews, the exercise should be planned to cause mortars to displace and provide continuous support. (Many of the safety considerations discussed for field artillery [FA] are applicable to mortars.) 13-31. As required by each installation, a certified safety officer must be on the mortar point. The mortar platoon/section leader and fire support officer (FSO) must know the location of the maneuver units so they can make sure the SDZ is enforced with respect to the gun-target line. If the mortars are fired from direct lay, it is relatively easy to verify friendly unit positions.

Field Artillery 13-32. FA units may support collective gunnery as an externally evaluated exercise or as internally evaluated sustainment training. The internally evaluated sustainment training requires greater coordination between the maneuver and FA headquarters in the planning stage, so that required FA tasks are included in the exercise. Collective gunnery training offers the FA commander collective gunnery training offers the fires battalion commander the opportunity to train the brigade’s indirect fire team (the fires battalion and the fire support personnel organic to the brigade headquarters and its subordinate maneuver battalions). This enables the fires battalion commander to better advise the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT)

13-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

commander on the status of the brigade’s fire support system. The brigade and maneuver battalion/squadron commanders have an opportunity to observe and evaluate his subordinate battalion fire support elements their organic fires cell and fire support teams (FIST). If necessary, the firing points that support the training range must be identified, and the sequence of events may have to allow for FA registration fires. 13-33. The impact area must be large enough (within the limits of local range constraints) to accommodate the adjustment of indirect fires. Units will not normally be allowed to maneuver into permanent artillery impact areas because of the possibility of duds. Temporary impact areas may be established, if necessary. With the concurrence of range control, certified ammunition may be fired into a temporary impact area that is to be maneuvered through later. Participants should be alert to the possibility of duds and take appropriate action if one is encountered. After the exercise is completed, the user clears the area, with the assistance of the explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) detachment. 13-34. Units may maneuver in proximity to indirect fires under certain conditions. Troops and vehicles involved in training may operate under the gun-target line in certain areas during firing. Armored vehicles may maneuver under air bursts if variable time (VT) or time fuses are used on certified ammunition, and if the firing data meet certain conditions explained in DA Pam 385-63, paragraph 11-5e. In this case, all down range vehicles must remain buttoned up. 13-35. Waivers may be pursued to facilitate the maneuver of helicopters near and under the gun-target line and around the flanks of the SDZ; the key to imaginative training is detailed planning. 13-36. Personnel may occupy approved bunkers within 200 meters of impacting artillery in areas surrounding the impact area; however, this situation must be planned to fit into the tactical scenario. 13-37. As many variables become known, the supporting artillery unit can compute a relatively accurate buffer zone (safety diagram) for planning purposes. When constructing laser range danger fans for precision-guided munitions employment, safety computations are especially critical (from the standpoint of eye-safe laser designator use). This data will have to be approved by the local range control office before the scenario is finalized. 13-38. The use of illumination and smoke and the employment of precision-guided munitions should be incorporated into the fire support plan. The FIST chief must perform a detailed analysis of the terrain to support the commander’s scheme of maneuver, especially when employing precision-guided munitions. The FIST chief should accompany the company team commander on his leader’s reconnaissance of the maneuver area. Note. Fire support planning and coordination are accomplished IAW FM 6-20. FM 6-30 provides a detailed explanation of precision-guided munitions and laser designating devices.

Engineers 13-39. The extent and nature of engineer tasks are based, in part, on the type of scenario and range facility. The task force and engineer unit are involved in the planning, execution, and selection of the maneuver area prior to the occupation of the range facility. z Mobility. In an offensive scenario, obstacle-breaching tasks may require the employment of organic or supporting engineer equipment and offensive munitions. Threat doctrine for obstacle employment should be reflected in the scenario and target array. The obstacle should be realistic, but not so much that it overwhelms the unit. It must key certain responses, resulting in certain actions to reduce or bypass the obstacle. Safety constraints for any munitions planned in the operation (Bangalore torpedoes, line charges, mine-clearing line charges [MICLIC], M908) must be briefed to all participants (for example, if the MICLIC is to be used to breach a minefield, all personnel within 1,000 meters must be buttoned up in a combat vehicle.) The engineers move with the maneuver element as appropriate to the scenario.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-17

Chapter 13

z

z

Countermobility. Minefields, demolitions, and other obstacles should be planned in support of a defensive exercise. On some facilities, the actual emplacement of obstacles may be restricted for various reasons. If the obstacle is to be simulated, it must be emplaced (as much as the situation will allow) on an adjacent training area. Obstacles that are planned, resourced, and emplaced should be granted obstacle effect by increasing target engagement times and decreasing the array according to the type of obstacle. If demolition is authorized on the range, the required safety precautions must be strictly enforced. Survivability. Defilade and improved positions may already exist on some range facilities. If not, survivability may be exercised in the preparation of a defensive position, based on the priority of work established by the commander.

Army Aviation 13-40. When aviation assets are to be integrated, the range control office requires enough lead time to coordinate airspace management issues with the installation airspace management office. The Combined Arms Battalion headquarters will assume operational control, approve their maneuver, and monitor coordination between the aviation and ground maneuver elements. To fully exploit the mobility and standoff range advantage of aviation assets, increased range depth must be considered. 13-41. The use of aviation requires additional SDZ applications, as outlined in DA Pam 385-63, Chapter 13. They may fire from the flanks of ground maneuver units, or between them, but not from their rear (no overhead fire). When antitank guided missiles (ATGM) or aerial rockets are to be fired, the backblast area must be considered. If helicopters are to maneuver down range from the ground element, their safety must be considered. 13-42. If Hellfire is being used in the indirect mode, special consideration must be given to the locations of the firing aircraft and the designator. The SDZ for the Hellfire includes a seeker angle 20 degrees to either side of the gun-target line. The designator may not be located anywhere within the seeker angle, and preferably would be masked from the launch point by terrain or foliage.

Close Air Support 13-43. Employment of United States Air Force (USAF) assets requires a certified forward air controller (FAC) to assume the responsibility for integrating tactical aircraft into the scenario. Considerations for employment include identification of friendly troops and the target area, and control of surface fires. SDZs are discussed in Air Force Instruction (AFI) Regulation 13-212. 13-44. When employed, the sorties should be allocated to the combined arms battalion and controlled by the unit’s FAC. Within the constraints of local range regulations, an airspace coordination area should be established to allow surface fires while close air support (CAS) is employed. An alternative method is to apply CAS against targets not in the maneuver unit’s line of sight. Examples of this would be a secondechelon battalion in a defensive scenario, the main defensive belt or a reserve unit in an offensive scenario, or insurgent indirect fire positions in support of a convoy ambush. If ingress is parallel to the gun-target line and the aircraft break away to the opposite side, airspace coordination is vastly simplified. Overflight by participating aircraft before the exercise meets USAF regulatory guidance without disrupting the scenario. 13-45. If Joint Air Attack Team (JAAT) operations are planned, the FSO, FAC, and air battle captain (ABC) exercise the necessary command and control measures. Aviation systems are more increasingly falling under the sphere of control of the maneuver element leader. This is a valid training objective for Army aviation units, CAS pilots, and battalion fire support elements. Note. Most installations have an Air Force representative that assists in the planning of CAS.

13-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

Ground Surveillance Radar 13-46. Radar requires some form of movement to track. Moving targets may be used to provide such a radar signature. In an offensive scenario, ground surveillance radar (GSR) may be used to vector friendly elements. Target acquisition and tracking reports that GSR would normally provide for long-range or flank surveillance might be as effectively portrayed by inputs from the incident list. If GSR is employed, the protection of the system and personnel should be considered in positioning, setup, breakdown, and maneuver to avoid detracting from the firing unit’s operation. GSR should be employed to supplement the unit’s limited-visibility operation, and can also be used to monitor range boundaries.

Military Intelligence 13-47. Military intelligence can come from any agency that procures, analyzes, and uses information of tactical and strategic military value from the ground forces (infantry, vehicle platforms, artillery, sustainment units), air forces (Unmanned Aircraft System [UAS], CAS), and sea forces (battleships). This process of intelligence incorporates four phases—collection, analysis, processing, and dissemination about the enemy, terrain, and weather in an area of operations or area of interest in offensive and defensive scenarios.

Sustainment Units 13-48. The extent to which sustainment units are portrayed is again determined from training objectives. Ammunition and fuel should be dispensed in the tactical assembly area prior to the exercise. The company combat trains should displace, as appropriate, in company-level training scenarios. If desired, some of the ammunition allocated may be pre-stocked in a secondary battle position for a defensive scenario or maintained with a logistics package to perform emergency resupply on the objective during consolidation. Ammunition redistribution should be an integral part of the tactical scenario. 13-49. Sustainment unit assets may be used to support convoy escort training scenarios. Units may designate targets for sustainment weapon systems to engage, if desired. Maneuver company-level sustainment unit platforms such as the M113A3 are allocated limited ammunition for the caliber .50 and MK19 machine guns. 13-50. Broken-down vehicles or designated battle-damaged vehicles may be used to exercise maintenance and recovery crews in any phase of the exercise. Enemy prisoners of war (EPW) processing or casualty treatment should be exercised throughout the operation. Sustainment Unit vehicles may be required to engage targets during recovery operations. 13-51. A decontamination exercise may also be integrated into the scenario during the reconsolidation/reorganization phase. Simulated agents will provide realism in portraying a chemical environment. The simulation used must conform to local regulations. The decontamination exercise will require decontaminating apparatus, other decontaminators, spare chemical suits for exchange, and mask filters.

SCENARIO ENHANCEMENT 13-52. Evaluators can use pyrotechnics and simulators (weapons effect) for effect and to cue the sections and platoons to certain events. z Unit SOPs should be given to the evaluators for implementation into the evaluation. z The company commander may follow the platoon during platoon tables to exercise command and control training. Simulating radio traffic enhances the effects of the tactical scenario. Company commanders receive all platoon reports, both FM and digital (if so equipped), and issue instructions and FRAGOs based on the established scenario. z Target presentations occur based on the section or platoon’s tactical employment. The element should react to, rather than anticipate, target presentations.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-19

Chapter 13

ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR LARGER LIVE-FIRE EXERCISES 13-53. Larger gunnery training exercises such as Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise (CALFEX), Combined Arms Urban Gunnery Exercise (CAUGEX), or fire coordination exercise (FCX) require additional planning and coordination from the staff. These exercises also require careful risk management due to the high number of firing elements to synchronize. Depending on the facilities available, these exercises may require the simultaneous operation of more than one range facility. They are personnel and resource intensive and can require support from outside of the firing battalion. The following are some things that can be done to enhance the scenarios: z The battalion commander may follow the company during the CALFEX to exercise command and control training. Simulating radio traffic enhances the effects of the tactical scenario. Battalion commanders receive all company reports, both FM and digital (if so equipped), and issue instructions and FRAGOs based on the established scenario. z Evaluators can use pyrotechnics and simulators (weapons effect) for effect and to cue the company/troop to certain events. z Unit SOPs should be given to the evaluators for implementation into the evaluation. z Target presentations occur based on the company/troop’s tactical employment. The element should react to, rather than anticipate, target presentations. z The company team may be the lead element or may be following other units and attack through them. The attack may be hasty or deliberate. z A security force may be employed forward of the company team. The company team may defend in sector or in a battle position or strongpoint.

PLANNING FOR RANGE OPERATIONS REQUIRED PERSONNEL 13-54. The commander is responsible for safety during all phases of training; however, he designates key personnel to run a range or training area. In order to run any range or training area, the minimum personnel required are an OIC, a range safety officer (RSO), and medical support appropriate to the level of the training exercise as governed by local regulations. z OIC. The OIC is responsible for everything that occurs at the training site. The duties of the OIC include— „ Ensures the overall safe conduct of training and proper use of the installation training complex. „ Receives a range safety briefing from installation range control organization on use of the training complex. „ Ensures the RSO is physically present at the training site. „ Determines when it is safe to fire IAW applicable regulations and installation range requirements. „ Ensures receipt of final clearance from range control to fire. „ Ensures proper supervision of personnel performing misfire, hang-fire, and cook-off procedures. „ Ensures required communications are established and maintained. „ Ensures safe laser operations. „ Ensures adequate medical support is available. „ Ensures ammunition and explosives are properly handled, transported, stored, and accounted for within the training complex from the time of receipt to the time of expenditure or turn in. „ Ensures a written log is maintained of pertinent safety and control data concerning the operation of firing ranges, weapons training facilities, and maneuver areas, authorized operating times, impact area entries and exits, and cease fire authorizations. „ Ensures plans for firing exercises and maneuvers are coordinated with range control.

13-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

Ensures control of target areas to prohibit entry by unauthorized personnel. Ensures all ammunition malfunctions and accidents are reported to range control in accordance with AR 75-1 and DA Pam 385-40. „ Ensures coordination and approval has been gained from the range control agency for all civilian personnel that will be entering the training site. „ Briefs the RSO on the duties to be performed in support of the training event. Clearly establishes the requirement for the RSO to brief the OIC on the safety of the facility and unit, and the readiness to commence live-fire operations prior to the start of firing. „ Implements risk management in all phases of the training events. RSO. The duties of the RSO include— „ Ensures all personnel have passed the gunnery skills test (GST) in the timeframe required for the system. „ Conducts a safety briefing before any day or night firing. „ Enforces all safety regulations. „ Ensures all ammunition is handled correctly. „ Enforces smoking restrictions. „ Ensures all misfires are handled as stated in DA Pam 385-63 and the appropriate operator’s manual. „ Ensures accidents are investigated and reported promptly IAW all regulations. „ Ensures weapons on live-fire ranges are pointed toward the impact area at all times. „ Ensures personnel are clear of the danger area (except as authorized in DA Pam 385-63). „ Checks all ammunition for restricted or suspended lots, using TB 9-1300-385. „ Ensures barriers and guards are in place before the exercise is started. „ Checks medics to make sure they have all required medical equipment and Class VIII supplies and a properly marked vehicle or ambulance for transporting casualties. Medical aidman. The medical aidman— „ Meets the local requirements to qualify as the medical support for the particular type of range/training area. „ Has an aid bag. „ Is familiar with local medical evacuation (MEDEVAC) reports and procedures. „ Has an ambulance or vehicle available that has been properly marked as a medical vehicle and is dispatched with proper fuel and oil levels. „ Knows how to get to the aid station or hospital (primary and alternate route) and has rehearsed the route. „ Is a licensed driver (not a primary driver of his vehicle). „ Understands his duties relevant to local range SOP. „ „

z

z

RECOMMENDED PERSONNEL 13-55. The commander typically should assign other personnel to assist in running the training event. Below are recommended additional personnel: Note. Some of these may be required by local regulation. z

An NCOIC who will— Supervise details and assist the OIC and RSO. „ Coordinate placement of vehicles upon arrival. „

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-21

Chapter 13

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

An ammunition NCO who will make sure— „ All ammunition is delivered and properly stored at the training site. „ The correct type and amount of ammunition is present at each training site. „ Each vehicle receives the proper number of rounds, by type. „ The training site is properly policed of brass and packaging materials. „ All ammunition is checked to make sure no restricted or suspended lots are used in training, using TB 9-1300-385. A target NCO who will make sure that— „ Targets are the type and color specified by the OIC and placed in the correct array. „ Moving targets are operable and trained operators are available. „ The target detail is available when needed. „ There are enough spare targets, target mechanisms, and batteries on hand to support the range or training area. Vehicle crew evaluators (VCE) who will— „ Act as instructors during practice exercises. „ Act as evaluators during qualification. „ Confer with the OIC and Master Gunner on any scoring discrepancies. „ Ensure compliance with all safety procedures. „ Conduct AARs. A fire-fighting detail— „ Know who they are. „ Know the location of equipment. „ Know how to use the equipment. Radiotelephone operators who— „ Can operate the radios. „ Can use the communications security (COMSEC) equipment properly. „ Can maintain a communications log. A briefing NCO who— „ Knows how to conduct range operations. „ Knows who is firing. „ Knows the results of the crews/platoons already fired. „ Knows the location of other key personnel. Concurrent training NCO who— „ Ensures proper set up and running of site. „ Maintains control of personnel on site. „ Gathers site information for the OIC.

Note. For moving vehicle ranges, personnel requirements are larger; usually more evaluators are needed.

MASTER GUNNER’S DUTIES 13-56. The Master Gunner is the commander’s gunnery technical advisor; he helps the commander and the staff plan, develop, and conduct gunnery training. The Master Gunner— z Organizes range firing exercises. z Sets up range firing exercises. „ Coordinates target arrays. „ Coordinates exposure times for targets. „ Coordinates maneuver box verification. „ Coordinates setup of all ranges to ensure they meet the standards in this manual.

13-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

z z z z z z z

Prepares a surface danger area diagram and range overlay, if required. Prepares scaled ranges, if required. Ensures proper conduct of range firing exercises. Supervises the crews to ensure proper boresighting. Confirms zero/live-fire accurate screening test (LFAST) procedures. Conducts remedial training on site, as needed. Ensures that a standard VCE program is implemented.

RANGE CONTROL BRIEFING 13-57. The range control officer is responsible for the coordination and safe conduct of range activity for all units using range facilities. Normally, unit leaders will be required to receive a range briefing from the range control officer before occupying a range. Schedule to receive this briefing at least one day prior to range operations to prevent any delay in training. Range control should also provide a set of local range regulations and policies.

RANGE EQUIPMENT 13-58. The OIC and NCOIC should make sure the following equipment is on hand: z For gunnery and tactical exercises: „ OPORD for the exercise. „ Range regulations. „ All other required regulations, SOPs, maps, and overlays. „ Waivers, if necessary. „ RSO and OIC certification cards. „ TMs and operators manuals for all equipment on the range. „ FM radio sets and antennas. „ Evaluator communications (jump radios). „ Targets and target operating and control mechanisms. „ Target repair equipment. „ Flashlights for scorers. „ Batteries for lights and radios. „ Clipboards. „ Water. „ Stop signs. „ Engineer tape. „ Fire extinguishers for ammunition pads. „ No smoking signs. „ Ammunition markers. „ Absorbent materials available for spills. „ Flag sets. „ Recovery means. „ Briefing tent. „ Scoresheets. „ Stopwatches/eight-face punch clock. „ Binoculars/spotting scope. „ Night-vision devices. „ Field telephones, as required. „ Fire-fighting equipment. „ Vehicles for target and scoring detail, fire-fighting detail, backup aid vehicle, and safety officers (moving range). „ Generators to power light sets.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-23

Chapter 13

Equipment for concurrent training. Boresight equipment. „ Weather station (or phone numbers to meteorological data source). „ Other table of organization and equipment (TO&E) and expendable supplies. For gunnery exercises: „ Range flag. „ Range lights, chemical lights, or lanterns. „ Compass for marking rounds out of impact area. „ Gunner’s quadrant. „ „

z

z

For tactical exercises: PGS or MILES equipment. „ Opposing force (OPFOR) equipment (VISMODS, personal gear if available). „ OPFOR personnel. „ Eyesafe laser filter (ELF). „ Target signature devices. „ Blank adapters. „

RANGE COMMUNICATIONS 13-59. The installation range officer controls all ranges by wire and radio to obtain clearance to fire, report, coordinate, and call cease fires. The OIC controls all training activities, including firing, by the best means available. In all cases, the OIC plans for a backup communication system.

SECTION II – CONDUCTING RANGE OPERATIONS 13-60. A unit range SOP will save both time and energy for the firing unit. The SOP should include guidelines for occupying the range and describe actions to be taken for specific tasks, such as— z Coordinating with maintenance contact teams. z Replacing targets. z Repairing target mechanisms. z Fighting range fires. z Breaking down ammunition. z Moving vehicles to the ammunition point and to the ready line. z Firing orders. z Policing the range. z Departing the range.

OPENING THE RANGE AND OCCUPYING THE TRAINING SITE 13-61. The range is opened and occupied according to local range SOP and the unit SOP. The following personnel are responsible for the sequence of events used to open the range and occupy the training site: z The OIC will— „ Receive a range briefing from range control personnel a minimum of one day prior to range operations. „ Move to the range or training site before the company arrives. „ Report occupation and request hot/wet firing status of the range facility. „ Check communications and make sure backup communications are available for live fire.

13-24

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

Make sure range equipment is present and operational. Ensure barrier sweeps are conducted, if necessary. The NCOIC will— „ Set up the concurrent training area. „ Supervise ammunition, targets, and administrative details. „ Supervise placing vehicles in the correct order for firing or going through the tables. The RSO will— „ Brief all personnel on range safety. „ Make sure range guards are posted and briefed on live-fire ranges. „ Make sure no live ammunition is present on a nonfiring range. „ Inspect ammunition storage and handling. „ Make sure all safety markers are present and visible on the range. „ „

z

z

DURING THE EXERCISE 13-62. The following personnel are responsible for certain events during the conduct of the exercise: z The OIC, with assistance from the unit Master Gunner or other experienced NCO, will— „ Control the firing of LFX. „ Maintain proper spacing between units going through the course. „ Maintain all required communications. „ Ensure the gunnery standards are met. z The NCOIC will— „ Supervise all details. „ Control the movement of personnel from firing positions to concurrent training and other administrative areas. z The RSO will— „ Ensure misfires are handled IAW safety regulations. „ Ensure the ELF is being used for tactical tables. „ Watch for any safety violation. „ Clear each vehicle’s weapon systems once the exercise is complete. „ Have no additional duties assigned. z The briefing NCO will— „ Know the location of other key personnel. „ Be aware of how the range is being conducted. „ Stay aware of the results of firing. „ Know how many personnel are on the range.

CLOSING THE RANGE 13-63. The following personnel are responsible for certain events while closing the range: z The OIC will— „ Notify range control that firing has ceased. „ Ensure the range or training area is cleared IAW local regulations and SOPs. z The NCOIC will— „ Supervise ammunition and target details. „ Ensure the policing and cleaning of range facilities is complete. „ Ensure that petroleum, oil, and lubricants (POL) spills are cleaned up either by the using unit, or a supporting engineer unit, and reported to post authorities, depending on the size of the spill.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-25

Chapter 13

z

z

The RSO will— „ Ensure all weapons are cleared. „ Ensure all misfires are removed from the range. The ammunition NCOIC will— „ Ensure no ammunition is removed from the range by anyone other than authorized personnel. „ Prepare residue certificates required by the ammunition supply point.

ADMINISTRATION AND EMERGENCY DIRECTIONS 13-64. Administration requirements in DA Pam 385-63, local range regulations, and unit SOPs can be used to plan personnel and equipment requirements. All current references should be placed in a notebook and kept at the training site at all times. Range control frequency, phone number, and certain emergency directions must be included. Emergency directions should include the MEDEVAC radio frequency and call sign; hospital phone numbers; and the frequency, call sign, and directions to the nearest aid station or dispensary.

VEHICLE FLAGS 13-65. Vehicle flags should no longer be used to display weapons safety posture on the range. Weapons safety posture is the responsibility of the VC.

MASTER GUNNER’S RANGE BOX 13-66. The following list of items should be carried in the Master Gunner range box. This list should be amended depending on the situation, whether combat or training. z Gunner’s quadrant. z FTs (120mm, 40mm, 25mm, caliber .50, 7.62mm and 5.56mm as applicable). z Compass. z Range maps. z Portable boresight panel. z Publications. „ Local range regulation/SOP. „ DA Pam 385-63. „ DA Pam 350-38. „ FM 3-20.21. „ TC 25-8. „ TMs for vehicle, weapons, communications, and other devices. „ DA Forms 2408-4, Weapon Record Data (current and blanks). „ DA Forms 1594, Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officer’s Log. z Crew training records. „ Results from last GST. „ Crew gunnery simulator unit backup. z Range book with scenarios, scripts, battle rosters, prior results, and any other pertinent information. z VCE support equipment. „ Spare tapes (audio and video). „ Timing boards/stopwatches. „ Pocket calculators. „ Pens, pencils and grease pencils.

13-26

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Range Operations

DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet, and DA Form 7663-R, Crew Gunnery RollUp Sheet. „ Notebooks. Target maintenance equipment. „ Staple gun and staples. „ Hammer and nails. „ Tape (100 mph). Engineer tape. Additional Master Gunner tools (Abrams specific). „ Weather station (with air temperature and barometric pressure). „ Firing probes (two or three for 120-mm tank firing pins). „ Firing circuit tester. „ Spline keys. „ Wrenches (9/16” and 3/4”). „ Jeweler’s screwdriver. „ Multimeter. „ Jump cables/plugs. „ Remote firing device (tank). „ Spotting scope (for tank LFAST). „ Portable armament accuracy checks (AAC) panel. „ Cartridge extractors (7.62 mm and caliber .50). Additional Master Gunner tools (Bradley specific). „ Lacing pliers. „ 5-mm and 6-mm hex sockets and wrench. „ Needle nose pliers. „ Multimeter. „ Cartridge extractor (7.62mm). „ Jump cables/plugs. „ Weather station (with air temperature and barometric pressure) (A3 units). „

z

z z

z

SECTION III – DIGITAL RANGE SET UP 13-67. Digitally enhanced gunnery ranges support the incorporation of digital communication equipment during firing exercises. All digitally equipped units will conduct a minimum of 50 percent of all engagements during the crew gunnery phase as digital engagements.

DATA SETS 13-68. Each digital scenario requires a data set, which consists of a digital script and one or more overlays, to handle digital gunnery requirements. Users can store these data sets in the mission data loader (MDL). This lets users retrieve and distribute the data sets to any FBCB2-equipped vehicles when the lower tactical Internet (LTI) is unavailable, or to restore data to the net control station (NCS), if needed.

RANGE OVERLAY 13-69. Units should develop standard overlays, both FBCB2 and hardcopy, for each range. At the least, each overlay includes the following graphic control measures: z Objectives. These are included for orientation. z Battle Positions. In limited visibility, this control measure shows tower and safety personnel the positions of the firing vehicles. z Boundaries. These usually consist only of outer range safety markers.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

13-27

Chapter 13

z z z

Target Reference Points (TRP). These help orient VCs on the battlefield. They usually include inner and outer range safety markers or easily identified points on the battlefield. Phase Lines. These help control movement. Routes. These help orient the vehicle and aid in sustainment operations.

DIGITAL BASE STATION 13-70. For reliable range communications, the NCS serves as the digital base station. In case this station fails, units should establish a backup digital base station. The NCS, however, is the only radio that is set to frequency hopping/master (FH/M). At least one evaluator should have FBCB2 to monitor and evaluate the firing vehicles’ digital traffic.

REHEARSAL 13-71. The unit should rehearse range setup before executing GTs. This allows for target synchronization, establishment of safety procedures, fratricide avoidance, and testing of communications.

ICON MANAGEMENT 13-72. The unit’s tactical SOP (TACSOP) provides guidelines for managing icons. After the unit completes the table, the FBCB2 operator or VCE, acting as the platoon leader, executive officer (XO), or S-2, removes the red icons from the system.

13-28

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Chapter 14

Individual and Crew Live-Fire Prerequisite Training Chapter 14 discusses the Gunnery Skills Test (GST) and Gunnery Table (GT) I – Crew Critical Skill Table. The GST evaluates the individual crew member’s ability to execute selected gunnery-related skills. GT I evaluates the entire vehicle crew’s ability to execute selected tasks. These tests are a prerequisite to firing live ammunition and must be completed within three months of live-fire gunnery. The tasks listed in Chapter 14 provide the unit commander with a means to certify the weapon platform crewman’s basic gunnery proficiency prior to live-fire exercises (LFX). The GST and GT I can also be used as a guide for identifying individual and crew gunnery strengths and weaknesses. GST and GT I results should be used by the commander and Master Gunner when structuring the unit’s annual gunnery training program. Following are the tasks to be trained and tested for GST and GT I. The conditions and standards for these tasks will be found in Special Text (ST) 3.20.21-1 (currently being developed) and will be available for download from the Reimer Digital Library (RDL).

Contents Section I – Gunnery Skills Test .............. 14-1 Requirements ................................... 14-1 Safety Precautions ............................ 14-2 Evaluation Procedures ...................... 14-2 Planning Considerations ................... 14-3 Conduct of the Gunnery Skills Test .. 14-5 Test Stations ..................................... 14-6

Section II – Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test.................................. 14-10 Requirements .................................. 14-10 Safety Precautions .......................... 14-10 Evaluation Procedures .................... 14-10 Planning Considerations ................. 14-12 Conduct of Gunnery Table I ............ 14-13 Test Stations ................................... 14-13

SECTION I – GUNNERY SKILLS TEST

REQUIREMENTS 14-1. All personnel assigned to a vehicle crew (regardless of military occupational specialty [MOS]) who will be participating in gunnery will be administered the GST. Crew members are required to pass the GST within three months of live-fire gunnery. A fire support officer (FSO) assigned as a loader on a company commander’s tank is also required to pass the GST. (The FSO will load the company commander’s tank during all tank tables.) To pass the GST, a crewman must receive a GO on all stations. Because Soldiers will be cross-trained in all positions, all crew members will be tested on Common Tasks 1 and 2 and all GST tasks specific to their weapon platform. Testing is as follows: z ALL crews: Stations 1 and 2 (common tasks). z Abrams equipped crews: Stations 3A through 6A. z Bradley equipped crews: Stations 3B through 6B. z Truck equipped crews: Stations 3T through 6T.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

14-1

Chapter 14

Note. Tank Table II can be fired with the caliber .50 inbore device only after completion of the GST and dry or blank firing of Table II prior to using the subcaliber device. Completion of the GST is always a prerequisite to crew gunnery. 14-2. If a crew member fails a task, he must be retrained and retested on that station until he receives a GO. Appropriate manuals and other references listed for each station must be used to prepare, administer, and evaluate the GST. Note. Evaluators must have passed the GST within one month and must be validated by the unit’s Master Gunner or GST noncommissioned officer in charge (NCOIC) prior to testing.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 14-3. The unit will conduct a safety briefing for each station in accordance with (IAW) the unit standing operating procedures (SOP) and installation or division requirements.

EVALUATION PROCEDURES ADMINISTRATIVE PROCESS 14-4. Before the crewmen arrive, the evaluator sets up the equipment and materials needed at each test station. When the crewmen arrive, the evaluator should have a crew roster, by vehicle bumper number and position, at his station. He logs the crewmen in on the roster at each station and provides each crewman with all materials and necessary equipment as outlined on this page and in the test administrative guide (ST 3.20.21-1, available for download on RDL) for that station. The evaluator reads the instructions for each station to the crewmen, exactly as written in the guide. The evaluator must use the criterion scoring checklist provided for each task to evaluate each crewman’s performance and complete DA Form 7558-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Individual Roll-Up (on page 14-7) as the crewman completes each station. As each crewman finishes or the time limit is up, whichever occurs first, the evaluator checks the crewman’s performance as either GO or NO-GO, informs him of his performance on that task, and directs him either to the next station or to further training. Note. The company Master Gunner or GST NCOIC is responsible for filling out and maintaining platoon and company roll-ups and for ensuring that the roll-ups are collected and passed to higher headquarters.

EVALUATION CRITERIA 14-5. See the attached criterion scoring checklist for each task.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED 14-6. The personnel, equipment, and material listed below are required for all stations: z Primary evaluator (staff sergeant [SSG] or above; normally the Master Gunner) in charge of administering the test (he may also occupy a test station). z Station evaluator, sergeant (SGT) or above (one per test station). z Classroom or training area. z Stopwatch (one per evaluator). z Criterion scoring checklist (one per crewman). z Desk and chair or clipboard (one per crewman if required).

14-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Individual and Crew Live Fire Prerequisite Training

z z

Pencils (one per crewman if required). Field Manual (FM) 3-20.21 (one per station).

Note. Additional items, if required, are listed in the test administrative guide for each particular station.

ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES FOR CREWMAN RECEIVING A NO-GO 14-7. If a crewman does not meet the standard indicated on the criterion scoring checklist, he receives a NO-GO. He must then be critiqued on that task by the evaluator, to include an explanation of his mistakes and what he must do to correct them. Crewmen will be retested IAW the gunnery order or GST order.

PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 14-8. The NCOIC tasked to conduct the GST should consider the following elements during his planning.

IDENTIFY THE TYPE OF GST 14-9. The NCOIC must determine whether the GST will be a diagnostic or a record test, using the following considerations: z A diagnostic GST identifies the unit’s strengths and weaknesses, provides information for the gunnery program, and assesses newly assigned personnel. Although DA Pam 350-38 only requires record testing of GST twice yearly, diagnostic evaluations should be scheduled quarterly. z A record GST allows commanders to certify proficiency of crew members to meet tank table prerequisites.

DETERMINE THE TEST SITE 14-10. Establish a test site that will support the testing of all stations. Refer to the station conditions for each station to determine what is needed for that station.

CONSTRUCT A TEST STATION DIAGRAM (FLOW CHART) 14-11. Before the test is rehearsed, a test station diagram or flow chart should be designed (see Figure 14-1). This diagram will facilitate management and control of the test. It will also aid in briefing Soldiers and evaluators. The diagram should include— z Test stations. z Control station. z Direction of rotation. z Movement schedule. z Aid station/warm-up tent, if available.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

14-3

Chapter 14

Figure 14-1. Test station diagram

DETERMINE RESOURCES 14-12. The NCOIC must determine the resources necessary to support the GST. He must consider the support of the test site, as well as the support required to conduct the test to standard. The NCOIC can determine equipment requirements, such as dummy rounds, machine guns and vehicles by referring to the individual stations in this chapter. To support the test site, the NCOIC must determine the amount of support needed to conduct the test; examples include the following: z Vehicles with drivers. z Transportation to and from the test site. z Tents for warm-up briefings. z Tables for scoring. z Chairs. z Medical support, if needed. z Class I support, if needed. 14-13. Once the NCOIC has determined the resources needed, he must coordinate the use of personnel and equipment. This coordination will usually be made through the company first sergeant (1SG) or battalion S-3 and S-4.

SELECT EVALUATORS 14-14. Evaluators should be selected as far in advance as possible. This gives the NCOIC time to select the most qualified personnel available and to coordinate with other units, if necessary. Early selection, in turn, allows the evaluators time to prepare. If the NCOIC must draw on resources from outside his unit, he should request assistance from his 1SG to make this coordination. After the evaluators have been selected, the NCOIC will brief them on their duties and responsibilities, the test schedule and location (using a flow chart or test station diagram), and the station they will be testing.

14-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Individual and Crew Live Fire Prerequisite Training

TEST EVALUATORS 14-15. Evaluators must be technically proficient in performing all tasks to standard. The GST is typically conducted over multiple training days. Due to personnel requirements and availability issues, each evaluator will be tested and certified on all GST stations.

CONDUCT A REHEARSAL 14-16. Because of the size and scope of this test, it must be rehearsed before it is administered. This rehearsal will be conducted at the test site with all evaluators present. The NCOIC should check each station to make sure that the evaluator is aware of his duties and responsibilities, that the stations are set up correctly with all required equipment, that support and test materials are on hand, and that each station is conducted IAW the test administrative guides.

CONDUCT OF THE GUNNERY SKILLS TEST 14-17. Prior to testing, the NCOIC must make sure the stations are set up and all equipment and support requirements are available. He must also make sure the crew members are briefed on safety and location of the stations and are assigned to the test stations.

CONDUCT THE AFTER ACTION REVIEW FOR THE GST 14-18. The battalion/brigade Master Gunner or operations Sergeant Major (SGM) should conduct an after action review (AAR) to help the NCOIC understand his actions and interactions during the conduct of the GST. The AAR should be conducted prior to the debrief to the unit commander and should consist of a discussion of the strengths and weaknesses of the training event. This will allow the NCOIC to better prepare the debrief to the commander as well as prepare him for the next GST.

PREPARE THE DEBRIEF 14-19. Once the test is complete, the NCOIC will prepare a debrief for the commander to inform him of the GST results. This information is also retained for training records. The NCOIC collects the crew members’ scorecards as soon as they complete testing, before anyone leaves the test site. The evaluators can provide additional information about a crew member’s test performance. After all data is collected, the NCOIC prepares summary of the results, interpreting information from test results to determine the strengths and weaknesses of the unit. This report will, at a minimum, contain the following data: z A roster, by duty position, of each crew member tested. z The scores of each crew member tested. z The percentage of crew members passing the GST. z Percentage of GOs per station. z Percentage of NO-GOs per station. z Recommendations for corrective action.

COLLECT AND MAINTAIN GST INFORMATION 14-20. Because the GST is a live fire prerequisite, the GST roll-up information must be maintained by the unit Master Gunner or S-3 representative for 12 months and must accompany the unit throughout the entire gunnery density.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

14-5

Chapter 14

TEST STATIONS 14-21. Each station consists of a test administrative guide and criterion scoring checklist (see Table 14-1). Figure 14-2 shows an example of DA Form 7558-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Individual Roll-Up. Figure 14-3 shows an example of DA Form 7662-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Platoon Roll-Up. Figure 14-4 shows an example of DA Form 7665-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Individual Roll-Up. Table 14-1. Gunnery skills test task list Task No.

Title

COMMON TASKS Task 1

Theater Threat Vehicle and Threat Vehicle Identification (common)

Task 2

Ammunition Identification (common)

ABRAMS TASKS Task 3A

Clear, Disassemble, Assemble, Perform a Function Check, Load, and Perform Immediate Action on the M240 7.62-mm Machine Gun

Task 4A

Clear, Disassemble, Assemble, Set Headspace and Timing, Perform a Function Check, Load, and Perform Immediate Action on the M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun

Task 5A

Perform a Muzzle Reference System (MRS) Update

Task 6A

Reload the 120-mm Main Gun

BRADLEY TASKS Task 3B

Clear, Disassemble, Assemble, Perform a Function Check, Load, and Perform Immediate Action on the M240C 7.62-mm Machine Gun

Task 4B

Load and Unload AP and HE Ready Box

Task 5B

Load, Apply Immediate Action, and Unload Feeder on the M242 25-mm Gun

GUARDIAN TASKS Task 3G

Clear, Disassemble, Assemble, Perform a Function Check, Load, and Perform Immediate Action on the MK19 40-mm Machine Gun

Task 4G

Clear, Disassemble, Assemble, Set Headspace and Timing, Perform a Function Check, Load, and Perform Immediate Action on the M48 Caliber .50 Machine Gun

Task 5G

Perform Misfire Procedures on Turret Mounted Weapons

Task 6G

Load and Unload Turret Mounted Weapons

TRUCK TASKS Task 3T

Clear, Disassemble, Assemble, Perform a Function Check, Load, and Perform Immediate Action on the M240B 7.62-mm Machine Gun

Task 4T

Clear, Disassemble, Assemble, Set Headspace and Timing, Perform a Function Check, Load, and Perform Immediate Action on the M2HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun

Task 5T

Clear, Disassemble, Assemble, Perform a Function Check, Load, and Perform Immediate Action on the MK19 40-mm Machine Gun

Task 6T

Clear, Disassemble, Assemble, Perform a Function Check, Load, and Perform Immediate Action on the M249 5.56-mm Machine Gun

14-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Individual and Crew Live Fire Prerequisite Training

Figure 14-2. Example of DA Form 7558-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Individual Roll-Up

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

14-7

Chapter 14

Figure 14-3. Example of DA Form 7662-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Platoon Roll-Up

14-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Individual and Crew Live Fire Prerequisite Training

Figure 14-4. DA Form 7665-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Company Roll-Up

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

14-9

Chapter 14

SECTION II – GUNNERY TABLE I – CREW CRITICAL SKILLS TEST 14-22. This section discusses GT I, the crew critical skill test. GT I evaluates the crew’s ability to execute selected safety and gunnery related skills. The tasks listed in this section provide unit commanders with a means to certify the crew’s proficiency prior to LFXs. Gunnery Test I can also be used to identify the crew’s strengths and weaknesses in performing common and vehicle-specific crew tasks. The unit commander can use Gunnery Test I prior to any field exercise as a way to certify a crew’s proficiency on safety-related and crew-specific tasks. The primary trainers for this table are the Platoon Sergeant and company Master Gunners. This ensures standardization of tests and evaluation for their commander.

REQUIREMENTS 14-23. All personnel assigned to a vehicle crew (regardless of MOS) will be administered GT I. Crews are required to pass the GT I within three months of live-fire gunnery. To pass GT I, a crew must receive a GO on all stations. Because crew members are cross-trained in all positions, each crew member will be proficient in the responsibilities for each station. All crews, regardless of vehicle type, must pass the common tasks. In addition to the common tasks, crews must pass all tasks that apply to their vehicle type as listed in Table 14-2. For example, a Bradley crew will have to pass tasks 1, 2, 3, 4, 5B, 6B, 7B-1, 7B-2, 7B-3, and 8B. 14-24. Commanders should require all crew members to conduct these tasks from all positions. This allows crewmen to change positions when required during the gunnery density. For example, an Abrams loader may serve as a driver on another vehicle. This training strategy will help the commander in overcoming such circumstances as crew shortages or unforeseen absences (such as emergency leave, quarters) of the rostered crew members. 14-25. If a crew fails a task, all crew members must be retrained and retested on that station until they receive a GO. Appropriate manuals and other references listed for each station must be used to prepare, administer, and evaluate GT I. Note.

Evaluators must have passed the GT I within six months prior to testing.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 14-26. The unit will conduct a safety briefing for each station IAW the unit SOP, equipment TMs, or Safety of Use Messages.

EVALUATION PROCEDURES ADMINISTRATIVE PROCESS 14-27. Before the crewmen arrive, the evaluator sets up the equipment and materials needed at each test station. When the crew arrives, the evaluator logs the crewmen in on a crew roster at each station and provides each crewman with all materials and equipment displayed, as outlined in this discussion and in the test administrative guide (see ST 3.20.21-1, available for download from RDL) for that station. The evaluator reads the instructions to the crewmen exactly as written in the guide for each station. The evaluator must use the criterion scoring checklist provided for each task to evaluate each crewman’s performance. He then completes DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet. As each crew finishes or the time limit is up, whichever occurs first, the evaluator checks the crew’s performance as either GO or NO-GO, informs them of their performance on that task, and directs them either to the next station or to further training.

14-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Individual and Crew Live Fire Prerequisite Training

Note. The company Master Gunner or NCOIC is responsible for maintaining score sheets and roll-ups and for ensuring that these records are collected and passed to higher headquarters, where they are maintained for 12 months. These records, in addition to all GST score sheet rollups, will accompany the unit for the entire duration of the gunnery density. They must be readily available to the range officer in charge (OIC) and range safety officer (RSO) when firing.

Table 14-2. Gunnery table I task list Task No. Title COMMON TASKS Task 1

Crew Fire Evacuation Drills

Task 2

Crew Rollover Drills

Task 3

Send/Receive Radio Reports

Task 4

Send/Receive Digital Reports

ABRAMS TASKS Task 5A

Evacuate an Injured Crewman (Tank)

Task 6A

Boresight an Abrams

Task 7A

Misfire Procedures on the 120-mm Main Gun

Task 8A

Remove/Install the Breechblock on the M256A1 120-mm Cannon

BRADLEY TASKS Task 5B

Evacuate an Injured Crewman (Bradley)

Task 6B

Boresight a Bradley

Task 7B-1 Misfire Procedures on the 25-mm Main Gun Task 7B-2 Misfire Procedures on the TOW Task 7B-3 Remove a Misfired TOW Task 8B

Remove/Install the M242 25-mm Main Gun

GUARDIAN TASKS Task 5G

Evacuate an Injured Crewman (Guardian)

Task 6G

Boresight a Guardian

Task 7G

Mount turret mounted weapons

TRUCK TASKS Task 5T

Evacuate an Injured Crewman (Truck)

EVALUATION CRITERIA 14-28. See the criterion scoring checklist for each task.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED 14-29. The personnel, equipment, and material listed below are required for all stations: z Primary evaluator (SSG or above; normally the Platoon Sergeant) in charge of administering the test. z Classroom, training area, or maintenance bay. z Stopwatch (one per evaluator). z DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet. z FM 3-20.21 (one per station). z Appropriate TMs for the vehicle on which the crew is being tested.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

14-11

Chapter 14

Note. Additional items, if required, are listed in the test administrative guide for each specific station.

ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES FOR CREWS RECEIVING A NO-GO 14-30. If a crew does not meet the standard indicated on the criterion scoring checklist, they receive a NO-GO. They must then be critiqued on that task by the evaluator, including an explanation of their mistakes and what they must do to correct them. The crew will be retrained IAW the pertinent TM or FM and retested IAW with the local SOP.

PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 14-31. GT I is performed at the platoon level and is supervised at the company level. Due to training time constraints, the table can take 30 to 90 days to complete. The company Master Gunner and Platoon Sergeants are responsible for the conduct of GT I. They should consider the following elements during his planning.

IDENTIFY THE TYPE OF TESTING 14-32. The Master Gunner and Platoon Sergeant must determine whether GT I will be administered as a diagnostic test or a record test, using the following considerations: z A diagnostic GT I identifies the unit’s strengths and weaknesses, provides information for the gunnery program, and assesses newly assigned personnel. Although DA Pam 350-38 only requires record testing of GT I twice yearly, diagnostic evaluations should be scheduled quarterly. z A record GT I allows commanders to certify proficiency of crews to meet live-fire prerequisites.

DETERMINE THE TEST SITE 14-33. Establish a test site that will support the testing of all stations (for example, the boresighting test requires a clear view of a target at 1,200 meters). Refer to the station conditions for each station to determine what is needed for each station.

CONSTRUCT A TEST STATION 14-34. Before the test is rehearsed, a test station diagram or flow chart should be designed. This diagram will facilitate management and control of the test. It will also aid in briefing Soldiers and evaluators. The diagram should include— z Test stations. z Control station. z Direction of rotation. z Movement schedule. z Aid station/warm-up tent, if available.

DETERMINE RESOURCES 14-35. The NCOIC must determine the resources necessary to support the GT I. He must consider the support of the test site, as well as the training aids required to conduct the test to standard. The NCOIC can identify training aids, such as dummy rounds, machine guns, vehicles, and muzzle boresight devices—by referring to the individual stations in this chapter. To support the test site, the NCOIC must determine the amount of support needed to conduct the test; examples include the following: z Vehicles with drivers. z Transportation to and from the test site.

14-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Individual and Crew Live Fire Prerequisite Training

z z z z z z

Tents for warm-up briefings. Stopwatches. Tables for scoring. Chairs. Medical support, if needed. Class I support, if needed.

14-36. Once the NCOIC has determined the resources needed, he must coordinate the use of personnel and equipment. This coordination will usually be made through the company 1SG or battalion S-3 and S-4.

SELECT AND TEST EVALUATORS 14-37. VCs serve as evaluators for their crews, with the Platoon Sergeants as the primary training/testing supervisor. The company Master Gunner and Platoon Sergeants will brief their VCs their duties and responsibilities as evaluators, as well as on the test schedule and location. Each evaluator will be tested on all test stations prior to evaluating GT I.

CONDUCT OF GUNNERY TABLE I 14-38. Prior to testing, the NCOIC must make sure the vehicles are set up and all equipment and training aids are available. He must also make sure the crews are briefed on safety. During testing, the Master Gunner or Platoon Sergeant will spot-check each station to make sure that task standards are being maintained and that the evaluators are maintaining a roster of evaluated personnel and are annotating DA Form 7664 R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Scoresheet.

CONDUCT THE AAR FOR GUNNERY TABLE I 14-39. An AAR should be conducted by the battalion/brigade Master Gunner or Operations SGM to help the NCOIC understand his actions and interactions during the conduct of the GT I. The AAR should be conducted prior to the debrief, to the unit commander and should consist of a discussion of the strengths and weaknesses of the training event. This will allow the NCOIC to better prepare the debrief to the commander as well as will prepare him for the next iteration of GT I.

PREPARE THE DEBRIEF 14-40. Once the test is complete, the NCOIC will prepare a brief for the commander to inform him of the GT I results. This information is also retained for training records. The NCOIC collects each crew’s scorecards as soon as they complete testing, before anyone leaves the test site. The evaluators can provide additional information about a crew’s test performance. After all data is collected, the NCOIC prepares a summary of the results. Information from test results must be interpreted to determine the strengths and weaknesses of the unit. This report will, at a minimum, contain the following data: z A roster, by duty position, of each crew tested. z The scores of each crew tested. z The percentage of crews passing GT I. z Percentage of GOs per station. z Percentage of NO-GOs per station. z Recommendations for corrective action.

TEST STATIONS 14-41. Each station consists of a test administrative guide and criterion scoring checklist (see Table 14-2). Examples of DA Form 7664-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Scoresheet; DA Form 7660-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Platoon Roll-Up; and DA Form 7661-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Company Roll-Up are shown in Figure 14-5 through Figure 14-7.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

14-13

Chapter 14

Figure 14-5. Example of DA Form 7664-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Scoresheet

14-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Individual and Crew Live Fire Prerequisite Training

Figure 14-6. Example of DA Form 7660-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Platoon Roll-Up

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

14-15

Chapter 14

Figure 14-7. Example of DA Form 7661-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Company Roll-Up

14-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Chapter 15

Crew Evaluation Direct fire crew gunnery evaluation follows a common methodology for all platform systems within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT). Chapter 15 describes the methodology for evaluating crew gunnery as well as the crew prerequisites for specified training events. This information will support the gunnery tables presented in Chapter 16 (stabilized gunnery) and Chapter 17 (unstabilized gunnery). For the unit to have a successful gunnery density with marked improvement in crew performance and proficiency the unit must have a sound set of scenarios developed and proofed by the unit Master Gunner or Senior Gunner (gunnery specialist in Sustainment Units that do not have assigned Master Gunners), adequate resources including make up time on the range(s), and exceptional, professional evaluations. This chapter discusses the vehicle crew evaluators (VCE) roles and responsibilities and the process of evaluating the gunnery tables.

Contents Section I – Vehicle Crew Evaluators ...... 15-2 Evaluator Team Composition............ 15-2 Evaluator Roles and Prerequisites .... 15-3 Duties ............................................... 15-4 Vehicle Crew Evaluators Certification15-5 Section II – Engagement Task, Conditions, and Standards..................... 15-6 Evaluation Terms and Concepts ....... 15-6 Section III – Firing Occasion and Timing Events .................................................... 15-10 Target Exposure Time .................... 15-10 Vehicle Exposure Time ................... 15-11 Offensive, Short Halt, or Retrograde Engagements.................................. 15-11 Defensive Engagements ................. 15-12 Exposure Break Times ................... 15-14 Section IV – Evaluating the Crew’s Duties15-19 Immediate Disqualification—Extremely Hazardous Conduct ........................ 15-19 Automatic Zero-Point Penalty—Critical Crew Tasks—Not Adhering to Task, Conditions, and Standards.............. 15-19

3 September 2009

30-Point Penalty— Safety/Personnel Protection ........... 15-20 5-Point Penalty—Leader Or Fundamental Crew Tasks............... 15-20 Section V – Common Crew Scoresheet............................................. 15-22 Section VI – Crew Qualification Standards .............................................. 15-26 Individual Gunnery Phase .............. 15-26 Crew Gunnery Phase ..................... 15-26 Qualification Re-Fires ..................... 15-26 Section VII – “Call For” Engagements ........................................ 15-27 Section VIII – After Action Reviews ..... 15-27 Planning The AARs ........................ 15-27 Preparing For The AARs ................ 15-28 Conducting The AARs .................... 15-28 Matrix Examples ............................. 15-29

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-1

Chapter 15

SECTION I – VEHICLE CREW EVALUATORS 15-1. The key to a successful gunnery density that builds on crew’s previous performance, increases competence and confidence of the crews, and establishes a high proficiency standard is the VCE. The VCE, if selected correctly, is a large contributor to the overall success of the unit during the gunnery events. 15-2. Commanders will select highly competent crewmen who meet the prerequisites (see paragraph 15-8) to perform the duties as VCEs. They should consider the crewman’s past performance, competence, experience, and leader recommendations in order to identify the best personnel for evaluator positions, particularly for qualification tables. It is essential that the evaluators have exceptional attention to detail, gunnery experience, and professionalism in order to provide the firing crews excellent feedback, tips, methods, and engagement techniques that will drastically increase the crews’ lethality through the course of the gunnery density.

EVALUATOR TEAM COMPOSITION 15-3. Depending on the size of the gunnery density and the range complex, the number of evaluators may vary. Having the correct number and type of evaluators will maximize the unit’s throughput of firing vehicles on the range, reduce range down time, and provide for the highest quality evaluations. 15-4. There are four key members of an evaluation team; the primary evaluator, the timing controller, the thermal optic/audio/visual controller, and the radio telephone operator (RTO). 15-5. Depending on the range complex, additional members in the same roles should be employed to facilitate crew throughput and a smooth transition between firing crews. For example, when firing on a Multipurpose Range Complex (MPRC) using two core firing lanes, a possible team composition is shown in Figure 15-1.

Figure 15-1. Vehicle crew evaluator team example

15-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

15-6. The same quantity of personnel is required for day and night as shown in Figure 15-1. For planning purposes, double the number of personnel tasked. This provides the evaluators off time to conduct other missions, especially as typical night fire phases continue until mandatory shut down times. Note. Evaluators external to the firing unit’s battalion must be used for evaluating qualification tables. These evaluators must provide an in-brief to the firing unit prior to firing, typically during the morning safety briefing the day of firing. Qualification table evaluations must be accomplished by a non-biased, external source.

EVALUATOR ROLES AND PREREQUISITES 15-7. When selecting an evaluator for gunnery training, the following prerequisites must be adhered to in order to provide the crews the best available assessment of their gunnery performance. As the VCE teams are comprised of different positions, duties, and responsibilities, the prerequisites are developed by team position.

PRIMARY EVALUATOR/EVALUATOR 15-8. This evaluator will complete the scoresheets with the crew information, firing data by engagement, occasion information, and after action review (AAR) comments accordingly. The evaluator is responsible for leading the AAR for firing crews at the end of the day and night phase. The evaluator— z Is a staff sergeant or above. z Weapon system qualified within the last twelve month (active component [AC] and reserve component [RC]). The most experienced member of the evaluation team. z Certified within three months of evaluating any live-fire exercise (six months for RC) on all evaluator positions on the team. Certification includes successful completion of the Vehicle Crew Evaluator Exportable Package (VCEEP), trained and tested by the unit Master Gunner or Gunnery NCO/Senior Gunner. z Should be an experienced vehicle commander (VC) of the same platform as the firing crew. Although the scoring and evaluation process is standard within the HBCT, it is extremely difficult for an evaluator to conduct the AAR with the firing crew if the evaluator has limited or no experience as a VC on the evaluated crew’s platform. For example, an Abrams commander should not conduct the AAR for a Bradley crew. In this case, it establishes a communication barrier that is counterproductive to the AAR process. z Qualified maneuver units VCs that have experience in motorized gunnery are authorized to act as primary evaluators to sustainment unit crews.

TIMING CONTROLLER 15-9. This evaluator’s primary responsibility (as detailed later in this chapter) is to accurately keep time of firing occasional information. This timing information and its accuracy are critical in identifying the crew’s qualification status of the engagements. The timing controller— z Is a sergeant or above. z Must have previous gunnery experience as a gunner or VC. Certified within three months of evaluating any live-fire exercise (six months for RC) on conduct of fire, crew response, engagement techniques, timing procedures, and safety aspects of the firing vehicles. Certification includes successful completion of the VCEEP, trained and tested by the unit Master Gunner or gunnery NCO/Senior Gunner. z Can be of any MOS provided all other requirements are met. The standard evaluation process allows for unit flexibility when assigning evaluators to this position.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-3

Chapter 15

THERMAL OPTIC/AUDIO/VISUAL CONTROLLER 15-10. This evaluator’s primary responsibility (as detailed later in this chapter) is to orchestrate and facilitate the video and audio recordings to support the evaluation, re-timing of engagements (if necessary), and the after action review tape. The evaluator— z Is a specialist or above. z Should have gunnery experience. Must be certified by the unit Master Gunner or gunnery NCO/Senior Gunner on use of the equipment, adjustment of thermal and day optics, target locations, engagement scenarios, and recording techniques. This evaluator DOES NOT have to certify through the VCEEP, but it is highly encouraged. z Must have a working knowledge of fire commands and can clearly identify the intended target the crew is actively engaging in a timely manner. He must be able to accomplish this through audio cues and fire commands from the firing net and/or the jump radio frequency. His proficiency at this task is critical in providing the firing crews a video representation of their engagement that clearly shows strike of the round(s) in and around the target area.

RADIO TELEPHONE OPERATOR 15-11. The tower RTO’s primary responsibility (as detailed later in this chapter) is to control movement of firing and non-firing vehicles on the range in a safe manner, and control the script or firing instructions to the crews. The RTO— z Is a sergeant or above. z Must have previous gunnery experience. Should have previous tower experience, but can be trained during the individual and crew tables. If experience is limited, he should not be used on the qualification tables. z No certification is required. He must be briefed on the conduct of the range. He must also be provided with a copy of the tactical script (radio traffic) that will be read to the firing crews over the firing frequency to initiate their engagement. z Although only one RTO is required for the day and night phase, units should consider separating the RTO details between the Admin net and the Firing net, each with their own respective RTO. This additional RTO is extremely helpful in pushing crews to the firing line while his counterpart can focus on the safe conduct of the firing line. Note. During the gunnery density, units should rotate evaluators through all team positions and take Soldiers that do not meet all the prerequisites for Qualification Tables and incorporate them into the individual and non-qualification crew tables. This enhances their skills and is a great learning experience for the junior leaders.

DUTIES 15-12. The VCE assesses basic vehicle crew duties for crew gunnery through the use of jump radios (intercom capable platforms) or by “hot bedding” in a firing vehicle. He enforces safety requirements, instructs and evaluates crews during non-qualification exercises, and evaluates crews during qualification exercises. Finally, he conducts a debriefing to the crew in an AAR at the completion of each firing phase (day/night). 15-13. During the evaluation, the VCE is responsible for— z Assessment of the crew’s performance during the engagements fired on the range. z Recording of firing occasion information on the appropriate scoresheet. z Assessment of the crew’s duties, including fire commands, crew responses, drills, crew actions, safety precepts, and conduct on the range.

15-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

z

z

Recording of violations, corrections, or instructional guidance for use in the AAR. All comments must be based on doctrine or current tactics, techniques, and procedures relevant to the firing platform or engagement task. The VCE is responsible for referencing all crew duty penalties from this chapter. All penalties must be addressed during the AAR process. Reporting the final results of the firing phase, day and night, by engagement to the unit Master Gunner or gunnery NCO/Senior Gunner. Compiling the unit’s results is a unit responsibility.

15-14. The VCE does not control or influence the alibi process (discussed later in this chapter).

VEHICLE CREW EVALUATORS CERTIFICATION 15-15. In order to complete accurate and efficient evaluations of each gunnery table, VCEs must be thoroughly trained and certified on their duties and responsibilities. This includes proficiency on all aspects of direct fire engagement and indirect fires request and use. The unit Master Gunner or Gunnery NCO/Senior Gunner is responsible for the training, testing, evaluation, certification, recertification, and sustainment of the VCEs prior to gunnery execution. 15-16. Certification is initial training for VCEs. VCEs must certify within 3 months of evaluating any live-fire exercise (6 months for RC). For digitally equipped units, VCEs must be FBCB2 qualified. Certification consists of— z Complete the 40-hour VCEEP for the appropriate platform. Although the gunnery evaluation process is standardized, the VCEEP packages are oriented specifically to the weapon platform to reduce confusion and enhance the Soldier’s learning. The VCEEP can be obtained from https://www.us.army.mil/suite/kc/9773303. Users must have a valid AKO account and password to gain access. This package contains all the required certification materials, to include detailed information in a courseware format covering all pertinent chapters in the HBCT Gunnery Manual, including the use of this chapter. z The student must receive a GO on the scoresheets with audio command and pass a written examination with at least 20 questions with a minimum score of 70 percent.

RECERTIFICATION 15-17. Recertification is refresher training for VCEs. Recertification consists of the VCEEP written examination. The recertification also includes information on any doctrinal changes that directly affect the evaluation process that have occurred within the previous 18 months. VCEs must recertify annually by passing the written exam with a minimum score of 70 percent.

SUSTAINMENT 15-18. Sustainment training ensures the VCE reinforces what he learned during the VCEEP course. It strengthens his knowledge base by practical exercise and training opportunities at the unit level. It ensures that the commander can find consistent, effective crew evaluators year-round, and increases the experience level of the certified VCEs. The following is a list of sustainment training opportunities for the certified VCEs within the unit: z Assign as VCEs for another unit’s gunnery density. z Perform VCE functions while conducting instructor/operator functions (I/O) in the unit’s simulator (such as Advanced Gunnery Training Systems [AGTS], Bradley Advanced Training System [BATS]). z Evaluate crews while completing chair drills. z Act as assistant instructors during VCEEP courses for own and external units.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-5

Chapter 15

TRAINER RESPONSIBILITIES 15-19. Master Gunners are gunnery subject matter experts (SME). They develop and conduct VCE training using the VCE exportable training package as the baseline. The Master Gunner should always include the following information specific to the training range being used during the VCE classes: z Brigade Master Gunners are responsible for monitoring the VCE training program. z Battalion and company Master Gunners are responsible for executing the VCE training program. z Unit Master Gunners are responsible for VCE support and keeping the unit’s certified VCEs informed of changes to gunnery doctrine as appropriate.

SECTION II – ENGAGEMENT TASK, CONDITIONS, AND STANDARDS 15-20. Each table has its own established guidelines and requirements. These standard requirements are the minimum proficiency levels (MPL) that must be maintained on every firing table. They are based upon the platform’s capabilities, unit mission, and potential threats. The MPLs are directly related to the engagements, as the commander determines the range to target, vehicle posture (offense, defense, or short halt), target type based on ammunition resourcing and engagement type, and level of degradation to the firing platform’s fire control system or crew. 15-21. Specific information on the MPLs can be found in each platform’s chapter for crew and collective gunnery, respectively. 15-22. The designer of the scenario (or series of engagements that make up the gunnery table), must follow the prescribed rules of the MPLs. Each of these MPLs when applied has a direct impact on the evaluator’s use of this manual to accurately derive a score for the engagement. The MPLs applied to the engagement type (VC engagement, main gun pure, machine gun pure, change of weapon system, etc.) provide the evaluator the task and conditions. 15-23. The following list of items are the minimum required information for the VCE to evaluate firing crews correctly: z Target type(s). z Range to each target. z Firing vehicle type. z Firing vehicle posture. 15-24. The Master Gunner must provide the crew scoresheets with the engagement information pre-filled out to reduce the possibility of errors. He must also provide a tentative firing order to the VCE team to best prepare their evaluations. 15-25. The evaluator uses the posture, target type, and range to target for each target presented during an engagement and applies them to the scoring matrix. This application of information establishes the standards for the individual target. The collective standards from all presented targets (up to three), establishes the standards for the engagement. 15-26. The application of the task, conditions, standards, and firing occasion times will determine the total score of the firing task or engagement. This will be discussed later in this chapter.

EVALUATION TERMS AND CONCEPTS 15-27. The standard scoring model developed for the HBCT manual will be the common scoring system for all direct-fire platform mounted gunnery evaluation across the Army. This system of evaluation represents a paradigm shift from performance based gunnery to a hybrid threat threshold/performance model, called “threat based” methodology. The threat targets replicated for gunnery training are the T-90 main battle tank, the BMP-3 Infantry Fighting Vehicle (IFV), an antitank guided missile (ATGM) capable technical truck, dismounted infantry and rocket propelled grenade (RPG) teams with RPG-29 capability.

15-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

THREAT BASED METHODOLOGY 15-28. The standard gunnery model is designed specifically to reflect the potential threat’s capability to harm the firing vehicle. This is done by establishing a “70 point line,” using established threat capabilities, world wide.

FIRING PLATFORM 15-29. Each firing platform must have the capability to destroy the presented targets. The Master Gunner is responsible to ensure the engagements of the scenario are appropriate to the firing vehicle. The standard evaluation model is specifically designed for Abrams (all variants), Bradley (all variants), and armed truck crews (any vehicle with a crew served small or medium caliber weapon system).

THREAT TYPE 15-30. Each threat target type is assigned a matrix based on the firing platform (Abrams, Bradley, or Armed Truck). Each vehicle platform has its own set of matrices as the resilience against threat weapons is different from platform to platform.

Matrix Category 15-31. Within the vehicle set of matrices, each vehicle has a separate scoring matrix based on the firing vehicle’s posture, referred to as the matrix category. The three types of matrices categories are offense, defense, and short halt. Short halt may be a vehicle that is on the offense then comes to a halt to engage, or a static traffic control point (TCP) where the firing vehicle is exposed to the enemy threats. Threat Matrices 15-32. These are the performance tables for the standard gunnery model. They are required to determine the overall crew performance. A matrix is provided for each firing platform, regarding each threat type, and firing vehicle matrix category (see Figure 15-2). Determine the Score 15-33. When determining the score for a target type, the evaluator must select the proper matrix (called an exposure matrix) to determine the target score. This is completed by identifying the appropriate sheet (matrix) for the firing vehicle, posture or matrix category, and target type. Once identified, the evaluator must cross index the threat’s range to target and the time determined to engage and destroy the threat. The matrices and their use will be described in greater detail later, but understanding the principles of the matrices up front will provide better understanding of the standard scoring methodology as you progress through this chapter. Exposure Matrix 15-34. The exposure matrices, described above, determine the crew’s allowable exposure time to a given threat target. This methodology depends on various threat weapon systems’ capabilities. When using an exposure matrix, the VCE looks at the left-hand column for the exposure time that was recorded for that target. He follows that row to the right until it intersects with the range to that target (located on the top row). The number in the corresponding box is the raw score for that target. For targets that fall between the 100-meter increments, the VCE rounds the range up to the nearest 100 meters (for example, he rounds up 1,530 meters to 1,600 meters, providing the benefit of doubt to the firing crew). The matrices include— z Armored targets. These matrixes are based on the time a T-90 125-mm main gun takes to hit an Abrams tank or Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV). There are three matrixes based on offensive, defensive, and short halt conditions. z Light-armored targets. These matrixes are based on the time a BMP-3 or ATGM takes to hit an Abrams/Bradley/armed truck. There are three matrixes based on offensive, defensive, and short halt conditions.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-7

Chapter 15

z

Unarmored/troop targets. These matrixes are based on the time a truck-mounted ATGM or dismounted ATGM team takes to hit an Abrams/Bradley/armed truck. There are three matrixes based on offensive, defensive, and short halt conditions.

15-35. Each firing vehicle type has a corresponding set of matrices. Care must be taken by the VCE to ensure that the proper matrix under the proper conditions is used to score each target. 15-36. To illustrate how the general process works; the VCE is evaluating an Abrams firing from a defensive fighting position at a T-90 threat target at 900 meters. The VCE selects the appropriate exposure matrix, Abrams Armored Defense, for the engagement. To identify the threat target kill standard, the VCE moves across the top row indicating range to target and finds 900 meters. He moves down that column and identifies the 70 point line. He moves left over to the total exposure time column and identifies the max time to kill at 13 seconds. So, an Abrams platform fighting from a defensive position, firing at a threat armor vehicle at 900 meters, has 13 seconds to destroy the target, indicated by the 70 Point Line. Keep in mind that the “Defense” on the matrix does not indicate the threat posture, but the friendly vehicle posture.

Figure 15-2. Sample threat matrix 70 Point Line 15-37. This line on the matrices represents a known time when a highly trained opposing force has fired at the friendly vehicle such that the probability of hit and the potential damage from that strike results in a mobility, firepower, or catastrophic kill is above 50%. The other 50% generates negligible damage.

15-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

Above the 70 Point Line 15-38. If a firing vehicle destroys the threat vehicle before the 70 point line (faster), points received for that specific target, (at that specific range, from a known platform at a known own-vehicle posture) results in additional points based on crew performance. Note. If the crew scores below the 70 point line for any of the target(s) presented during an engagement, the crew cannot qualify the engagement, regardless of the score. 15-39. Engagement task standards require the vehicle crew to hit a given target with an appropriate number of rounds, utilizing the proper engagement techniques for the weapon system selected, without exposing their own vehicle beyond the given target’s threat time (time it takes for the threat to acquire, engage, and get a round/burst on the crew’s vehicle). Crews must kill all targets in an engagement in accordance with (IAW) the appropriate engagement task standards in order to pass the engagement. Crews must also adhere to the critical crew tasks and safety/personnel protection standards described in this section. Engagement task standards include the target kill standards.

TARGET KILL STANDARDS 15-40. A firing crew must destroy all targets presented during an engagement in order to pass or qualify that engagement. Table 15-1 shows all platforms’ target kill standards based on the weapon system employed. If a crew fails to achieve a kill on any target during an engagement IAW Table 15-3, that crew will ultimately fail the engagement. Table 15-1. Vehicle target kill standards Target 120mm Point

Target Type All

120mm Area

Troop Vehicles ATGM Team

25mm Point

25mm Area

Aerial Target Bunker/Fortified buildings Troop Armored Target

TOW Family of Missiles

Armored Target Bunker

Caliber .50 MK 19 40mm Point Mk 19 40mm Area

7.62mm

RPG Team Unarmored Vehicle RPG Team Unarmored Troop RPG Team Unarmored Vehicle Troop

3 September 2009

Standards Hit target with at least one round. Hit two troop targets with main gun (canister) and achieve a kill on 50 percent of area targets overall between main gun round and machine gun suppression. Hit with at least three rounds at any distance. Hit with at least one round (HE) at a distance greater than 900 meters. Hit with at least five rounds at any distance Hit with at least five rounds (HE) at ranges to 1,200 meters. Suppress 75 percent of target area with HE at ranges greater than 900 meters. Hit with one missile of basic TOW – TOW 2B from 65 to 3,750 meters. Hit with one missile of extended range with TOW (Arrow) from 65 to 4750 meters. Hit with one missile of TOW BB from ranges of 1201 to 3,750 meters. Hit one target with one round. Hit target with at least three rounds. Hit one round within 5 meters of the target. Hit one round within 5 meters of the target. Hit one round within 5 meters of the target and suppress the area. Hit one target with one round at ranges less than 900 meters. Hit with at least three rounds at ranges less than 900 meters. Hit one troop target with one round at ranges less than 900 meters.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-9

Chapter 15

SECTION III – FIRING OCCASION AND TIMING EVENTS 15-41. During the evaluation process of a firing crew, in order to determine a firing crew’s score for an individual target and subsequently, the overall engagement, certain timing events must be recorded. These timing events begin and end at specific times, and in certain instances can have a “break time” where the running engagement time is theoretically paused, and all engagements end. This section details the different measurements of time that are required for the timing controller to accurately measure, record, and report. 15-42. It is imperative that the timing controller be fluent in all the terms, definitions, and actions listed in this section. The most common errors when evaluating crews happen during the timing procedures and can cripple a crew’s ability to qualify an engagement, and perhaps, the entire table due to a lack of attention to detail. 15-43. The timing events and firing occasions listed here will be listed in a sequential form, however, certain timing considerations may take place at multiple instances during the course of an engagement. The VCEEP course that accompanies this manual provides excellent training material to reinforce the elements in this (and other) sections. The following firing occasions and timing events are detailed in this section: z Target exposure time. z Vehicle exposure time. z Offensive, short halt, or retrograde engagements. z Defensive engagement. z Exposure break time.

TARGET EXPOSURE TIME 15-44. Each engagement is made up of a target array. This target array can consist of one to three targets. For unstabilized gunnery tables, no more than two targets will be presented during an engagement unless a friendly/neutral panel is presented. During unstabilized gunnery tables, no targets will be presented on a delay.

TARGET DELAYS 15-45. For engagements with three targets in the presentation, the third target will be presented to the firing crew not earlier than 15 seconds after both initial targets in the presentation are “locked” in place. Commanders may select the third target delay time between 15 and 25 seconds based on their training objectives. This 15 to 25 second gap between presentations is the “target delay.” It represents within the scenario additional forces that are moving into the firing vehicle’s sector, or replicates targetry that required friendly movement to detect. 15-46. All presented targets will be fully exposed for 50 seconds in the defense and offense. Delayed targets will be presented for 50 continuous seconds, beginning when they are fully locked after their delay. For example, on a presentation of three targets, the third target is presented after a 20 second delay at the discretion of the commander. The initial two targets (if not destroyed by the firing vehicle) will be exposed to the firing crew for 50 seconds. At that point, the targets will go down. At the 20 second point, the third target presents itself and remains locked and exposed to the firing crew for 50 seconds.

MOVING TARGETS 15-47. Moving target exposure times are no different than listed above. The scenario may detail that the moving target be evasive in nature, but the total exposure time of 50 seconds remains the same. 15-48. On computer-controlled ranges, Master Gunners must proof target scenarios and adjust, if necessary, target lift times to ensure multiple targets are programmed to lift at the same time. Adjustment may also be needed for delayed targets to ensure they are presented at the proper time and duration.

15-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

VEHICLE EXPOSURE TIME 15-49. The VCE must record vehicle exposure times for each task fired. Vehicle exposure time measures how long the firing vehicle is exposed to any threat target(s) that are currently presented and locked in position. Timing procedures apply for single- and multiple-target engagements. The VCE determines timing as described below and without variations.

OFFENSIVE, SHORT HALT, OR RETROGRADE ENGAGEMENTS TIME START 15-50. Time starts when the initial target(s) for the engagement is fully exposed (target lock) or when the crew fires the first round, whichever occurs first (see Figure 15-3 and Figure 15-4). If two targets are presented initially, time does not start until both targets are fully exposed and locked in position or when the crew fires the first round, whichever occurs first.

Figure 15-3. Targets not fully presented example

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-11

Chapter 15

Figure 15-4. Targets fully presented and locked example

Notes. Offensive engagements require the vehicle to be moving at a tactical pace prior to the command to lift targetry. Short halt engagements require the vehicle to— Be moving on the offense at a tactical pace prior to the command to lift targetry. Once the VC recognizes the threat, commands are given to the driver to halt and initiate fire commands as necessary. Be occupying a TCP from a stationary position without the ballistic protection of a battle position. Fire commands may be initiated immediately upon identification of the targets. Retrograde engagements are offensive engagements that occur over the firing vehicle’s rear deck. The vehicle does not have to halt prior to firing.

TIME STOPS 15-51. Time stops for each target in an engagement when the target is killed or when target exposure time expires.

DEFENSIVE ENGAGEMENTS 15-52. In a defensive engagement, the firing vehicle is positioned in a turret-down position. On command, the driver may bring the vehicle forward to clear the main weapon from the berm or battle position, moves into the hull-down position to engage target(s), then returns to the turret-down position. This is typically for Abrams, Bradley, and ASV crews, however when firing armed trucks, the VC may wish to observe fires from the gunner and need to move forward into the “hull down” position. An example of the turret and hull down positions for Abrams, Bradley, and armed trucks are shown in Figure 15-5 and Figure 15-6.

15-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

Figure 15-5. Defense timing procedure example, turret down or defilade position

Figure 15-6. Defense timing procedure example, hull down or enfilade position

TIME STARTS 15-53. Target exposure starts when the initial target(s) for the engagement is fully exposed (target lock) or when the crew fires the first round, whichever occurs first (see Figure 15-3 and Figure 15-4). If two targets are presented initially, time does not start until both targets are fully exposed and locked in position and locked in position or when the crew fires the first round, whichever occurs first.

DEFILADE TIME STOPS/STARTS 15-54. Defilade time ends when the VC announces “DRIVER-MOVE OUT,” or when a weapon is fired. Defilade time starts again when the VC announces “DRIVER-MOVE BACK,” or in the case of firing a machine gun from the defilade, when the firer stops firing the machine gun completely. Again, the purpose of this is to have a recording of the timing event from the jump radio/intercom system on the evaluation recording in the event retiming is required.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-13

Chapter 15

TIME RESUMES 15-55. Time resumes when the crew fires another round or when the VC directs the driver to move forward, whichever occurs first. Note. There is no limit to the amount of defilade time a crew can acquire as long as target exposure time is not exceeded.

TIME STOPS 15-56. Time stops when all targets have been destroyed or the target exposure time expires.

EXPOSURE BREAK TIMES 15-57. Exposure break times are designed to credit the crew when due to certain circumstances, the crew cannot safely engage the targetry, or the target presented cannot be observed for direct fire engagement through no fault of the crew. In all cases, in order to receive exposure break times, the crew must be fully prepared to engage, if not for the situation.

DUST DOWN/WIND DOWN 15-58. A dust down occurs when a round falls short of the target and debris (not the round itself) knocks the target down. This can happen to any firing platform during the conduct of an engagement. 15-59. A wind down occurs when a large caliber round passes (not striking) a target panel and blows the target down. 15-60. If either a skip round or near miss knocks down the target, the VCE or control officer will announce “DUST DOWN” or “WIND DOWN,” as appropriate over the firing frequency. If the target is the only target remaining in a multiple-target engagement, all time (engagement and exposure) will stop until the target is represented (it may need to recycle on the tower instrumentation requiring additional time). If the target has to be re-presented due to dust down, wind down, or target malfunction, the crew will be alerted and told the exposure time remaining for that target. When the target is re-presented, time will start when the target is fully exposed or a weapon system fires, whichever occurs first. If more than one target remains after a dust down or wind down, engagement time will not be stopped unless all other targets are knocked down before the dust-down target reappears. 15-61. The ultimate intent of this type of break time is to ensure the benefit of the doubt goes to the crew in a fair and impartial manner.

TARGET OBSCURATION (40MM AND 120MM ONLY) 15-62. Obscuration time is the time that a target is not viewable to a crew due to obscuration at the vehicle and/or obscuration in the target area. 15-63. During offensive engagements, obscuration time is subtracted from each target engaged subsequent to the occurrence of the obscuration. For Abrams crews, the firing weapon must be prepared to fire, including the loader announcing “UP,” for the obscuration break time to begin. During defensive engagements, obscuration time is accumulated to calculate target re-present time (if necessary); this time is cumulative to each target in the engagement. No more than 10 seconds of obscuration time will be given in the offense. This does not apply to short halt engagements. Short-halt obscuration criteria is the same as defensive criteria. Maximum obscuration time during defensive engagements is at the discretion of the battalion commander. 15-64. Since each target in an engagement has an independent time, a separate stopwatch may be used to determine obscuration time between rounds. Accurate timing of obscuration ensures crews receive actual target engagement/hit time.

15-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

15-65. Down-range target obscuration is at the discretion of the VCE based on the weather conditions. Calculating obscuration time requires attention to detail. Evaluators must remember the perspective of the evaluators and target conditions from the tower are quite different from the perspective of the firing crew, especially during night engagements. z Obscuration during offensive engagements (see Figure 15-7)— „ The crew should move quickly through obscuration and continue the engagement without stopping time. „ The VCs must maneuver their vehicle to minimize the effect of obscuration (short halt, increase speed, driver back up as necessary.) „ Break time starts after the VC or gunner gives the first announcement of “TARGET OBSCURED,” and the loader announces “UP,” (Abrams). (In the event of a coax engagement following the main gun, obscuration time begins on the announcement of “CEASE FIRE” and the first announcement of “TARGET OBSCURED” after the main gun has fired.) Conditions must be established within the vehicle to enable the crew to engage targets before obscuration break time can begin. „ All offensive, short-halt engagement obscuration is at the discretion of the VCE based on range layout, target presentation, and weather conditions. z In defensive engagements (see Figure 15-8)— „ Obscuration time starts on the first announcement of “TARGET OBSCURED” after the loader announces “UP.” (In the event of a coax engagement following the main gun, obscuration time begins on the announcement of “CEASE FIRE” and the first announcement of “TARGET OBSCURED.”) Conditions must be established within the vehicle to enable the crew to engage targets before obscuration break time can begin. „ Obscuration time will be calculated for each target to determine the re-presentation time a crew is entitled to if obscuration precludes the crew from destroying all targets. z In either offensive, short-halt, or defensive engagements— „ The VCE should record obscuration time if he determines that the obscuration prevents the firing of subsequent main gun or coax rounds. „ Break time stops when the VC begins another fire command, a round is fired, the gunner announces “IDENTIFIED,” or the VCE is sure the firing vehicle is clear of the obscuration. „ Obscuration time cannot be given for delayed targets that were not presented during the obscuration. „ Targets can be re-presented for a time period equal to the sum of all the previous obscuration times in that particular task, but not to exceed the target exposure time stated in the task conditions (50 seconds plus any presentation delay for that target). The VCE must ensure that the specific target being re-presented was presented and locked during the obscuration (see note below). „ The time that it took the crew to engage the re-presented target will be added to the last target engagement time as the new engagement time for that target. Note. The crew cannot be given obscuration time for a target that was no longer presented. Special consideration must be given if obscuration occurs or is occurring as time elapses on an engagement. The re-present time must begin at the final target exposure time for that target. Example: If a target is exposed for 50 seconds and the crew does not have an opportunity to engage due to 15 seconds of obscuration, then start the re-presentation time at 35 seconds; otherwise, the crew will be given credit twice for the obscuration time. 15-66. The intent of scoring and timing is to force crews to train as they would fight. Crews should be trained and rewarded for hitting targets rapidly, but not penalized when artificial maneuver constraints prevent them from continuing to engage the target. VCEs are responsible for determining whether local

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-15

Chapter 15

obscuration prevents the crew from continuing to engage their targets. VCEs are to maintain fairness and equity when calculating break times across all firing crews. 15-67. Actions listed above are also recorded on the evaluation recording. In the event the evaluator needs to review the tape/digital recording for time, the requirements for break times are announced over the jump radio/intercom, and therefore should be present on the audio. Evaluators must also record the events accurately on the standard scoresheet (see Section V).

Figure 15-7. Obscuration example, defense

15-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

Figure 15-8. Obscuration example, offense

MECHANICAL MALFUNCTIONS 15-68. When a vehicle crew is preparing for gunnery, they should ensure that their vehicle is Fully Mission Capable. PMCS and all prep to fire checks must be completed prior to each gunnery phase (day and night). Crews will not receive break times for mechanical malfunctions. A mechanical malfunction may be grounds for an alibi but only after the crew has adhered to the alibi process. Failure to identify a fault prior to a gunnery phase is not grounds for an alibi. See paragraph 15-73 for information on alibis and the alibi process. 15-69. The following malfunctions are not break times but may be grounds for an alibi: z Breech up (Abrams). A Breech up is not grounds for breaking time, but may be grounds for an alibi if the fault was not induced by crew error. On the occurrence of a breech up, the crew will clear the malfunction IAW TM 9-264-2350-10-2 or TM 9-388-2350-10-2. The Master Gunner will pull the crew from the range, and maintenance must verify, troubleshoot, and repair the fault. If a crew experiences a breech up, they must announce “BREECH UP” to alert the tower that a malfunction has occurred. (Abrams) z Aftcap (Abrams). An aftcap hanging up in the aftcap deflector is not grounds for breaking time, but may be grounds for an alibi if the fault was not induced by crew error. If a crew experiences an aftcap, they must announce “AFTCAP” to alert the tower that a malfunction has occurred. (Abrams) z Stoppage. A machine gun stoppage is not grounds for break time. Crews must apply immediate action and fight through the malfunction. Alibis will be given if it is determined that crew error did not induce the malfunction. If a crew experiences a stoppage, they must announce “STOPPAGE” to alert the tower that a malfunction has occurred.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-17

Chapter 15

15-70. Crew error is defined as— z Failure to follow instructions. z Failure to follow procedures as outlined in applicable operator TM/FM. 15-71. The mechanical malfunction will still be recorded in the REMARKS block for that engagement fired.

MISFIRES (ABRAMS ONLY) 15-72. When a misfire occurs, the VCE will start break time on the second announcement of “MISFIRE” (unless there is a target that can be engaged with another weapon system) and stop break time when a round is fired or the VCE is sure the firing vehicle is clear of the malfunction. If a misfire occurs during a three-man crew engagement, break time will begin on the VC’s first announcement of “MISFIRE,” and stop when a round is fired or the VCE is sure the firing vehicle is clear of the malfunction.

ALIBI PROCESS 15-73. The alibi process is the procedures that must be followed when a crew has a mechanical malfunction and cannot continue with their gunnery run. The following conditions apply to all alibis: z A crew is allowed one alibi for one engagement only. If a VC decides to continue on with the gunnery run and the mechanical malfunction continues, the crew will only be allowed to alibi and re-shoot the last engagement before the vehicle was pulled, provided the alibi is granted. z Alibis will only be granted for malfunctions that were of no fault of the crew and were not identifiable by the crew by performing PMCS and prep to fire checks. See Figure 15-9 for the alibi process. z Weapons malfunctions short of a broken part or component are not grounds for an alibi. Parts or components that are “out of adjustment” are not grounds for an alibi.

Figure 15-9. Alibi process

15-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

SECTION IV – EVALUATING THE CREW’S DUTIES 15-74. Crew-duty penalties are implemented to ensure crews practice proper engagement techniques and procedures. There are four categories of crew-duty penalties— z Applied to each engagement: „ Immediate disqualification. Extremely hazardous conduct. „ Automatic zero point. Disregard for announced task, conditions, and standards. „ 30-point penalty. Failure to adhere to basic safety/personnel protection precepts. z Applied, as a total, to each phase (day/night). „ 5-point penalty. Failure to perform fundamental leader/crew tasks. 15-75. If a suspected crew-duty penalty is not listed here, the evaluator will not deduct points, but rather annotate the issue on the firing crew’s scoresheet and use it as an AAR discussion point.

IMMEDIATE DISQUALIFICATION—EXTREMELY HAZARDOUS CONDUCT 15-76. Any crew found in violation of the following policies will receive an immediate disqualification for the table they are firing: z Crews firing outside the range fan. z Crew members not in proper uniform (as specified by the commander [see note below]). z Firing into the berm. z Negligent discharge. z Loader holding a round in his lap. (Abrams). z Ammunition doors remaining open while firing. (Abrams). z Guards, shields, stub base catcher box, and aftcap deflector not properly installed and serviceable. (Abrams). Note. Proper uniform, unless modified by the HBCT commander, is complete Nomex (if available); coveralls with gloves; or ACUs with shirt sleeves down, collar up and buttoned, approved fire resistant boots, gloves.

AUTOMATIC ZERO-POINT PENALTY—CRITICAL CREW TASKS— NOT ADHERING TO TASK, CONDITIONS, AND STANDARDS 15-77. Any crew found in violation of the following policies will receive 0 points for the engagement they are firing: z Not adhering to the action, conditions and standards of the given engagement. z Not buttoned up or masked during a chemical, biological, radiological, or nuclear (CBRN) engagement. z Using components of the fire control system (if equipped) that are announced as degraded in the engagement conditions. z VC not firing his engagement. z Engaging friendly or noncombatant presentations. z Not over-pressurized during a CBRN engagement (Abrams). z Firing the main gun at troops (due to range constraints), except for canister and 25mm engagements as directed by the tower.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-19

Chapter 15

z z

Knocking down a target with ammunition incapable of killing it (for example, 25 mm HE knocks down a frontal BMP, or knocking down a tank target with 7.62 mm.). When in the defense and using the GAS sight, the gunner identifies the target before the command “DRIVER MOVE OUT” is given (Abrams).

30-POINT PENALTY—SAFETY/PERSONNEL PROTECTION 15-78. Failure to adhere to basic safety/personnel protection precepts: z Firing or attempting to fire the main gun or machine gun before announcing “FIRE” (or “UP for Abrams”). z Announcing “ON THE WAY” before “FIRE” (or “UP” for Abrams). z Firing or attempting to fire before announcing “ON THE WAY.” z Announcing “FIRE” before the loader announces “UP” (Abrams). z The loader leaving the main gun armed or arming the main gun between engagements without receiving a fire command. (Abrams). z Firing the TOW missile from a turret-down position (BFV). z VC fails to announce “DESIGNATE” when designating a target using the CITV/CIV.

5-POINT PENALTY—LEADER OR FUNDAMENTAL CREW TASKS 15-79. Failure to perform leader or fundamental crew tasks: z Incorrect conduct of fire (initial or subsequent fire command incomplete based on the fire control system capabilities or limitations, as directed by the tower). „ VC failing to announce elements of the fire command not provided by the fire control system as detailed in the task, conditions, and standards for the engagement. „ Failure to announce “CEASE FIRE” when changing weapon systems, except during “FIRE AND ADJUST” engagements. „ Failure to announce “CEASE FIRE” to terminate an engagement. „ Failure to announce “CEASE FIRE” for the main gun prior to giving the initial fire command for the loader’s M240. „ VC fails to use the “FIRE AND ADJUST” execution element for a loader’s machine gun engagement when he is engaging a target simultaneously (Abrams). z Improper ammunition and weapon. This crew penalty would apply if the crew inadvertently fires the wrong ammunition/weapon (such as coax at a PC), then corrects and kills with the proper ammunition. Note. For Abrams crews, this does not apply to battlecarried rounds from the previous engagement. Proper ammunition change must occur during the engagements relevant to the target. z z

15-20

Failure to identify friendly and noncombatant presentations. Digital battle damage assessment (BDA). Not using the digital communications to transmit BDA at the end of the phase.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

z

z

Incorrect response terms. Crew member fails to use proper response terms in support of the leader/fundamental crew task standards. „ VC or Gunner fail to give sensing of each maingun round fired (Abrams) or burst fired of 25mm (Bradley). „ Gunner fails to confirm target(s) by announcing “IDENTIFIED”. „ Gunner fails to repeat range to target after announcing “IDENTIFIED”. „ Incorrect response to a fire command or subsequent/follow-on fire command (safety crew cuts cannot be evaluated as an incorrect response). „ Gunner fails to announce the ammunition that is indexed during a change of ammunition (“SABOT or AP/HEAT or HE INDEXED”). „ Loader fails to announce the ammunition that is loaded during a change of ammunition (“SABOT/HEAT LOADED”). (Abrams Only) „ Loader announces “UP” when it is obvious to the VCE that the round is not loaded (Abrams only). „ Gunner fails to announce the choked range (Abrams and Bradley). „ Loader arms main gun when gunner is directed to engage with machine gun (Abrams only). Incorrect engagement techniques. Commander or gunner fails to use proper engagement techniques (Bradley crews only). „ Fails to fire a 10- to 15-round initial burst; then fire additional 10- to 15-round burst(s) at point targets until target is destroyed (machine gun targets). „ Fails to fire a sensing round, two if the ammunition has changed, then fire a 3- to 5-round burst (25-mm point targets for Operation Desert Storm [ODS] and below, A3 Bradleys do not require a sensing round). „ Fails to fire a 15- to 20-round burst (25-mm) while adjusting on the target (aerial target). „ Fails to fire a 3- to 5-round burst (M2/M3A3) without a sensing round, except when using the auxiliary sight or when the ELRF is not operational.

15-80. All safety penalty points are deducted from the engagement that they occur on. This includes “automatic zero”, “immediate disqualification”, and “30 point” penalties. “Five” point penalty points are deducted from the end of the gunnery table they occurred on.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-21

Chapter 15

Engagement Example A BFV in the defense during a day engagement engages two stationary flanked BMPs at 1,200 meters.

Description The VC announces “DRIVER MOVE OUT” at 8 seconds. The crew then opens fire on the first BMP at 12 seconds, closes at 16 seconds for a “TARGET”, and the VC announces “DRIVER BACK UP” at 17 seconds. The VC announces “DRIVER MOVE OUT” at 26 seconds. The crew then opens fire on the second BMP at 30 seconds, closes at 34 seconds for a “TARGET.”

Scoring The close time for the first BMP was 16 seconds. The close time on the second BMP was 34 seconds. These times are recorded on the Crew Gunnery Scoresheet in Block 14c. Total defilade time for the first BMP was 8 seconds (the initial time the BFV was in the defilade position). Total defilade time on the second BMP was 17 seconds (8 seconds for the initial time the BFV was in the defilade position, plus 9 seconds for when the BFV backed back down into the defilade from 17 seconds to 26 seconds). These times are recorded on the Crew Gunnery Scoresheet in Block 14e. Engagement time for the first BMP 8 seconds (16 seconds close time minus 8 seconds total defilade time). Engagement time for the seconds BMP was 17 seconds (34 seconds close time minus 17 seconds total defilade time). These times are recorded on the Crew Gunnery Scoresheet in Block 14g. Final engagement time for the first BMP results in 8 seconds. Because it is the target with the lowest engagement time, the time is transferred into the final engagement time with no change. Final engagement time for the second BMP results in 9 seconds. Since there are two targets the time used to engage the first target is subtracted from the second target (17 seconds minus 8 seconds). These times are recorded on the Crew Gunnery Scoresheet in Block 14h. Using the appropriate matrices, determine the points earned for each target. The resulting points for the first BMP target is 100 points and for the second BMP target is 100 points. These times are recorded on the Crew Gunnery Scoresheet in Block 14i. The individual target points are then added together and divided by the total number of targets presented (100 + 100 = 200, then 200 / 2 = 100). The resulting score for this engagement would be a 100 point, qualified engagement. Rationale Due to the scoring being based on the amount of time it takes a threat target to complete the DIDEA process against the firing platform’s vehicle, one must assume, tactically, that during the initial presentation of a multiple target engagement, each target has independent sectors of responsibility. Using this assumption, only one target has started the DIDEA process against your vehicle. The second target does not start this process until you fire against the first target. This is why to determine the final engagement time, it is necessary to subtract the smallest engagement time from the largest of the targets, not on a delay. The delay target represents a threat being called in and therefore already knows your approximate location.

Figure 15-10. Engagement example

SECTION V – COMMON CREW SCORESHEET 15-81. Evaluators use DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet (see Figure 15-11 and Figure 15-12 for a sample of a completed scoresheet) to record the results of gunnery engagements. The instructions for completing the scoresheet are on page 2 of DA Form 7657-R (see Figure 15-12). Evaluators use DA Form 7663-R, Crew Gunnery Roll-Up Sheet (see Figure 15-13 for a sample of a completed rollup sheet) to record the results of the gunnery table. Blank forms designed for reproduction are located at the back of this manual. If needed, they can be downloaded from the U.S. Army Publishing Directorate (see References).

15-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

Figure 15-11. Example of DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-23

Chapter 15

Figure 15-12. Directions for completions of form

15-24

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

Figure 15-13. Example of DA Form 7663-R, Crew Gunnery Roll-Up Sheet

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-25

Chapter 15

SECTION VI – CREW QUALIFICATION STANDARDS

INDIVIDUAL GUNNERY PHASE COMBAT TABLE II–CREW PROFICIENCY COURSE 15-82. Crews must qualify Table II–Crew Proficiency Course (CPC), dry or device-based (Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System [MILES]/Precision Gunnery System [PGS]), prior to subcaliber (with the caliber .50 inbore device) or full caliber firing as a prerequisite to conducting full-caliber live-fire gunnery training. 15-83. Crews must obtain a minimum of 700 points overall on Table II and receive at least 70 points on 7 of 10 tasks to be qualified (this is a prerequisite to crew gunnery live fire). This is a “dual qualification criteria” table. Crews must qualify on this table prior to conducting any live fire training on their vehicle, and is the last Live-Fire Prerequisite. 15-84. Table II will be conducted on a full or scaled range using device-based methodology on the actual platform system. Table II can not be considered qualified if conducted in crew gunnery simulations. 15-85. Although Table II is not resourced for full caliber live firing, if ammunition is available, the commander may choose to fire this table utilizing full caliber ammunition provided Table II is fired dry or device based first.

CREW GUNNERY PHASE TABLE VI–CREW QUALIFICATION 15-86. Crews must obtain a minimum of 700 points overall on Table VI and receive at least 70 points on 7 of 10 tasks to be qualified. This is a “dual qualification criteria” table. Crews must qualify at least one engagement at night to be considered qualified. 15-87. Crews will only receive a rating on Table VI, Crew Qualification, based on their overall performance for that table. Crew ratings will be based on the following criteria: z Distinguished. The crew obtains a score of 900 to 1,000 points on Table VI with 70 or more points on 9 of the 10 tasks. z Superior. The crew obtains a minimum score of 800 points on Table VI with 70 or more points on 8 of the 10 tasks. z Qualified. The crew obtains a minimum score of 700 points on Table VI with 70 or more points on 7 out of 10 tasks. z Unqualified. The crew obtains a combined score of 699 or fewer points on Table VI, or 69 or fewer points on 4 or more of the 10 tasks.

QUALIFICATION RE-FIRES 15-88. If a crew fails to qualify, it re-fires for qualification. The highest rating that a crew can earn when re-firing is “QUALIFIED.” z A crew re-fires only the engagements with a score of 69 or fewer points. z A crew re-fires only the number of engagements required to obtain a qualified rating (700 points and 7 qualified engagements).

15-26

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

SECTION VII – “CALL FOR” ENGAGEMENTS 15-89. All crews must perform one of the “Call For” engagements during the day phase and another during the night phase. These engagements are graded on a “Go/No Go” basis. 15-90. The three variations that the commander may select from are: z Call for fire. z Request medical evacuation (MEDEVAC) (using standard nine-line). z Call for support. 15-91. For the “call for fire” task, the crew must give a grid coordinate within 150 meters of the target while it is exposed to receive points for the engagement (see FM 3-09.8). Failure to give a grid within 150 meters of the target will result in a “No-Go” for the event.

SECTION VIII – AFTER ACTION REVIEWS 15-92. The VCE will conduct a formal AAR (see TC 25-20) after all crew gunnery events. In AARs, he combines the feedback received from all participants. AARs identify where a crew meets, or fails to meet, Army standards. AARs provide commanders, leaders, and training managers with a focus for future training events.

PLANNING THE AARS 15-93. Successful AARs require planning and resource management. Commanders and training managers— z Select evaluators. One of the most challenging tasks during the planning phase is selecting and scheduling qualified evaluators. Whom they select depends on the type of evaluators they need– crew, section, or platoon evaluators or internal or external evaluators. „ Crew evaluators. Evaluators required for crew gunnery events must hold VCE qualifications. Normally, individual and crew gunnery Tables I through V are internally evaluated, and Table VI is externally evaluated. „ Section/platoon observer controllers. Collective gunnery tables are evaluated by officers and senior NCOs who are qualified on the platform(s) they are evaluating. The observer controllers normally are from within the HBCT. Observer controllers must be certified and meet all requirements established by the brigade commander. z Develop evaluation records. The scoresheets, along with the computer printout, give the VCE a record of each engagement for use during the AAR. z Select the AAR site. When organizing the training site, the commander and training managers should plan the location of the AAR site simultaneously. They should locate it close enough to the training site to avoid long delays between training and reviewing the training results; however, they should place it far enough from the training area to avoid the distractions of other elements conducting training, such as the signatures of vehicles moving or firing. The AAR site should accommodate all participants comfortably and shelter them from the elements. z Select training aids. Training aids give evaluators and participants a means to reenact the training event. They can also encourage discussion. At a minimum, evaluators should use a range diagram of the area. Training aids to use during AARs include— „ Charts or drawings. This should show the scenario, routes, and targets with any operational graphics supporting the AAR. Using charts or drawings lets all participants review actions while they follow the prescribed scenario. „ Sand tables/terrain boards. This shows the topographical features of the area. Sand tables should reflect the scale of the area accurately. They should show the scenario, routes, and targets, along with any operational control measures that apply to the training. This allows

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-27

Chapter 15

„

„

„

the evaluator to guide the discussions while focusing on the particular place the action occurred. Tape recorders. Tape recorders can play back the fire commands and the radio-net traffic. (Recorders allow the crew to hear their commands and review their responses.) Thru-sight videos (TSV). TSVs allow playback of real-time video of live-fire gunnery engagements and fire commands. It offers a look at engagement techniques and identifies errors that can be corrected before the next training event. Precision gunnery system AAR computer. This is used to review gunnery data during device-based exercises. It allows the evaluator and crew members to see the placement of each round in relation to the target and its corresponding data.

PREPARING FOR THE AARS 15-94. Before conducting an evaluation and an AAR, the evaluator prepares himself and the AAR site: z Review the scenario. Before evaluating a crew or platoon, the evaluator must know the scenario and mission, collective tasks, and terrain of the training area. Once the evaluator knows the scenario and mission, he must ensure he knows the doctrine that applies. z Observe training. The evaluator must place himself in the best position to observe the task being conducted. The evaluator must record his observations. z Collect information. After the event, the evaluator must collect information from other observers. During gunnery events, the evaluator collects information such as target kill times from the tower observers and VCEs. z Develop a discussion outline. The evaluator must develop an outline he wants to follow during the AAR. He should identify the key areas he wants the participants to discuss, to include both strong and weak points. To accomplish his goal for the AAR, he should list key questions to ask to give him the results he wants. The evaluator must determine what methods or techniques he will suggest to improve efficiency. If required, he should ask Master Gunners or other experienced personnel to relay helpful tips to the crew or platoon. z Rehearse. Before participants arrive at the AAR site, the evaluator organizes his training aids, evaluation sheets, and seating arrangements. The evaluator should ensure the training aids are functioning and viewable by all participants. At a minimum, evaluators should rehearse the key points to be made.

CONDUCTING THE AARS 15-95. Crew members usually know how they performed before the AAR, though they may not know why they performed the way they did. The function of the evaluator conducting the AAR is to encourage members to discuss what they did and guide them into discovering why. The members then determine how they can do it differently next time. The evaluator aids in these discussions and provides expertise when needed. When conducting AARs, the evaluator should use the following guidelines: z Make sure all participants are present. The evaluator should not begin the AAR until all participants are present. Anyone missing may have witnessed an event and may have something to contribute to the discussion. z Restate the training objectives. The evaluator begins the AAR by restating the training objectives of the training event and its major tasks for the crew (crew gunnery). He begins by stating its title, “You just completed the day phase of Table VI.” He then highlights the major task involved, “This phase tested your ability to conduct four engagements. The first was a defensive engagement using the auxiliary sight, the second was an offensive engagement, the third was a defensive commander engagement in a CBRN environment, and the fourth was a retrograde while returning up range.”

15-28

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Crew Evaluation

z

z

z

z z

Generate discussion. The evaluator begins the discussion by asking questions about the first event. For crew gunnery, “Who saw the target first?” After discussing one event, the evaluator asks questions about the next. He and the evaluated crew/unit discuss events in chronological order. Orient on training objectives. As discussions move away from the objectives, the evaluator must bring the discussions back on track. The evaluator keeps discussions on topic to make the best use of valuable AAR time. Seek maximum participation. Evaluators must make sure all participants are heard and not let one person monopolize discussions. If a member has not participated, the evaluator asks him a direct question such as, “What were you doing during this time?” Summarize to emphasize key learning points. As weaknesses are discovered and discussed, the evaluator summarizes the result and the solution. Overview the event. The evaluator closes the AAR by reviewing strengths and weaknesses relative to Army standards. For example, “(Crew), we found that during the fourth engagement, you failed to engage the AP target. This gave him the time to place a killing burst on your vehicle. After the discussion we just finished, you now know how to avoid this mistake in the future....”

MATRIX EXAMPLES 15-96. Figure 15-14 is an example of a vehicle scoring matrix. Due to an ever-evolving threat, future updates are to be published in a stand-alone special text (ST). Units must ensure that prior to conducting gunnery the most recent matrices are obtained and used to score crews. 15-97. Download the most recent ST prior to firing gunnery from https://www.us.army.mil/suite/kc/9773303. Users must have a valid AKO account and password to gain access.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

15-29

Chapter 15

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Figure 15-14. Abrams armored defense (example)

15-30

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Chapter 16

Stabilized Platform Gunnery Chapter 16 covers crew gunnery for stabilized platforms within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT). Stabilized platforms are defined as any vehicle with a crew-served weapon system or systems that have a fire control system that includes powered traverse and/or superelevation, a laser range finder (LRF), and thermal optic capability. The platform must be capable of rudimentary stabilization of the firing weapon system while moving. Vehicle platforms that fall within the stabilized category in the HBCT are the Abrams Main Battle Tank, Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV), Guardian Armored Security Vehicle (ASV), and vehicles equipped with a remote weapon station. Gunnery Tables (GT) II (Crew Proficiency Course [CPC]) through GT VI (Crew Qualification) are discussed in this chapter. All GTs described in this chapter are evaluated using the standard crew evaluation procedures as outlined in Chapter 15, Crew Evaluation. Contents Section I – Requirements ....................... 16-1 Gunnery Tables ................................ 16-1 Prerequisites ..................................... 16-3 Engagement Tasks ........................... 16-4 Minimum Proficiency Levels ............. 16-7 Digital Gunnery ................................. 16-9 Scenario Requirements .................... 16-9 Developing Scenarios for Crew Gunnery Tables ................................ 16-9 Section II – Gunnery Instruction and Live-Fire Prerequisites .......................... 16-10 Common Instruction ........................ 16-10 Gunnery Table I .............................. 16-12 Gunnery Table II, Crew Practice Course ............................................ 16-13

Section III – Crew Gunnery ................... 16-15 Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun ................................................. 16-15 Gunnery Table IV, Basic Main Gun . 16-17 Gunnery Table III/IV, Basic Machine Gun and Main Gun (GT 34) ............ 16-19 Gunnery Table V, Crew Practice ..... 16-21 Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification .................................... 16-23 Crew Ratings .................................. 16-23 Section IV – Example Gunnery Table VI16-25

SECTION I – REQUIREMENTS

GUNNERY TABLES 16-1. The GTs overall are structured in two sections–crew and collective gunnery. These tables are designed to develop stabilized platform crews into cohesive, efficient, and effective combat systems operating as a single platform, or in sections or platoons of various compositions. Table 16-1 shows the GT structure including the title and purpose of each.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-1

Chapter 16

Table 16-1. Gunnery table structure

16-2. Chapter 16 focuses specifically on the requirements for conducting crew level gunnery. GTs II, III, IV, V, and VI are described in detail, including tasks, engagements, ammunition requirements, and the application of the commander’s option to each table. 16-3. It is critical to the success of the unit that the commander, Master Gunner, Senior Gunner, and planning staff are well versed on the contents of this chapter in order to establish and execute their gunnery density that meets the desired end state of the commander.

16-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

Table 16-2. Gunnery table ammunition allocation

PREREQUISITES 16-4. All crew members must complete the following prerequisite training events prior to conducting fullcaliber live-fire gunnery training: z Vehicle commanders (VC) and gunners must complete required exercises in the conduct of fire trainers as outlined in Chapter 12, Gunnery Training Program. If simulation systems are not available, the unit commander should develop snake board and/or chair drill requirements that emphasize switchology, target hand off, crew coordination, and conduct of fire exercises.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-3

Chapter 16

z

z z

All vehicle crew members, and alternate crew members must pass all required gunnery skills test (GST) tasks within 3 months (4 months for reserve components [RC]) prior to executing any live-fire table or exercise (see Chapter 14, Individual and Crew Live-Fire Prerequisite Testing). All vehicle crew members and alternate crew members must pass required GT I, Crew Critical Skills, within 3 months (4 months for RCs) prior to live fire, as outlined in Chapter 14. A crew must qualify GT II, CPC within the 3 months (4 months for RCs) before firing fullcaliber live rounds. Vehicles that have a subcaliber live-fire training device must complete GT II dry or blank prior to using the subcaliber device.

ENGAGEMENT TASKS 16-5. Each GT consists of a series of 5 or 10 tasks. These engagement tasks types are standardized to facilitate a common training structure, provide a clear training regimen that builds on previously trained tasks, and a progressive model that utilizes the crawl, walk, run methodology. 16-6. There are six standardized engagement tasks for stabilized direct fire weapon platforms; VC, machine gun pure, main gun pure, change of weapon system, degraded, and simultaneous/multiple target engagements. Each of these engagement tasks is assigned one or two task numbers. The numbering for the tasks are shown in Table 16-3. Table 16-3. Standard task numbering system

Note. Use of the word “main gun” denotes the largest caliber weapon on a multiple weapon system platform, typically 25mm, 40mm, and 120mm. The term “machine gun,” is used for all 7.62mm weapons on a platform, and caliber .50 on the ASV only. Caliber .50 engagements for the Abrams crews are located in task 0 or task 9, depending on the table. 16-7. Each table contains a minimum of five and a maximum of ten of the above listed tasks. Each specific engagement is identified by the table number, followed by the task number. For example, GT V, task 8 is identified as engagement 58. For GT III and IV that only have five engagements each, no task number is replicated twice to reduce confusion when firing the two GTs combined.

16-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

16-8. The GTs are organized into a logical numbering system with the conditions for each engagement. This sequence supports a “crawl”, “walk”, “run” training methodology. This logic will apply to GT II–GT VI. 16-9. The targetry is aligned in a manner that allows a commander to fire both Abrams and Bradleys on the same range using the same targets. This is intended to speed up the gunnery process, reduce range constraints, and promote cohesion within the combined arms team and it also provides the Combined Arms Battalion the ability to cross attach as desired prior to the start of the gunnery density. 16-10. Defensive engagements should begin with the vehicle starting in a turret-down position and moving to a hull-down position to engage the target. On a range where this cannot be accomplished or where turret-down positions do not exist, units should train using simulated battle positions. 16-11. Short-halt tasks will be conducted either with the firing vehicle moving and then halting on the course road, or from an exposed stationary position, such as a stationary traffic control point (TCP) set on the course road. 16-12. Offensive tasks will be conducted with the firing vehicle on the move at a speed that will facilitate engaging the target safely within the designated maneuver box. See Chapter 13, Range Operations for planning factors for offensive firing boxes. 16-13. A frontal stationary target may be substituted for a moving target if range limitations do not support the target array. The appropriate matrix will be referenced when assessing vehicle exposure times, see Chapter 15, Crew Evaluation for evaluation procedures. 16-14. There is no distinction between day or night engagements. Based upon the commander’s intent and how the vehicles are outfitted (such as Tank Urban Survivability Kit [TUSK] with loaders thermal sight), units determine which engagements are fired during the day or night. 16-15. Following the minimum proficiency levels (MPL) provides a minimum number of engagements either day or night. This allows units with strict firing times the flexibility to shift engagements when necessary. 16-16. The ammunition requirement numbers given for each table represent the number of rounds that are allotted for each GT according to DA PAM 350-38, STRAC.(full caliber ammunition is not resourced for Army units on GT II, however, the commander may choose to fire this table utilizing full caliber ammunition if it is available and the table has been previously fired either dry or device-based) Rounds made available from first round hit savings (commonly called “harvested rounds”) are designed to be used for retraining, or pushed to the collective tables as the commander sees fit. 16-17. Figure 16-1 shows the GTs with ammunition and targetry for an Abrams and Bradley capable range. The targets have been notionally selected for clarity (the commander selects the type of target based on the weapon system capabilities).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-5

Chapter 16

Figure 16-1. Abrams and Bradley capable gunnery table example 16-18. As shown in Figure 16-1, all targetry is selected based upon the ammunition type authorized and resourced for the engagement. Stationary targets are identified as “STA,” and moving targets are identified with “MOV.” 16-19. VC engagements (task 0) are resourced specifically for the ammunition listed. Alteration to the ammunition type is not authorized except when multiple platforms are firing the same scenario. In those instances, ammunition identified inside the parenthesis “(CE)” or “(Coax)” identifies the Bradley ammunition and weapon system authorized. 16-20. Degraded (Loader Option) listed in task 8, and Multiple Target engagements listed in task 9 will identify either the M240, caliber .50, or coaxial machine gun as the primary weapon for the engagement. For Bradley crews, only the coaxial machine gun will be employed where those items are listed. 16-21. This table set may be used for any vehicle employing a crew-served weapon (small arms and 40mm) that are fired from a stabilized platform. This includes any remote weapon station installed on a vehicle as the primary weapon system, such as Mine Resistant Ambush Protected (MRAP) variants or some Stryker variants. These are included in the event a unit within the HBCT is equipped with these possible platforms for training prior to deployment or contingency operations.

16-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

MINIMUM PROFICIENCY LEVELS 16-22. MPLs are the required attributes for every GT. The commander, staff, and Master Gunner develop the GT scenarios using the MPLs to make sure the all primary skill sets are trained and tested during the GTs. The MPLs outline— z The requirements of the GTs that the scenarios must contain. z Provide a common set of requirements for all direct fire weapon crews to train to during the gunnery density. z The “rules” that must be adhered to when developing the gunnery scenarios. z The critical skills that must be trained and evaluated. z How the GTs can augment the commander’s flexibility. 16-23. Table 16-4 shows the MPLs for crew and collective gunnery, although listed for crew gunnery only. Table 16-4. Minimum proficiency levels for stabilized platforms

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-7

Chapter 16

16-24. In addition to the MPLs listed above, units have radio communication tasks for each table. The method of evaluation is up to the commander and has no direct impact on the crew’s gunnery qualification rating or score. One of the following tasks will be evaluated on each GT, day and night: z Call for fire engagement day and night. z Call for medical evacuation (MEDAVAC) day and night. z Call for support day and night. Note. The above “call for” requirements can be mixed so long as one is completed during the day and one is completed during the night. These tasks are completed during the course of the gunnery densities individual and crew phases, which provide crews opportunities to be trained and tested on all three tasks at least three times each. Commanders are encouraged to include them in the collective gunnery phase. 16-25. When considering the MPLs and the tasks together to define the scenario for the unit, see Table 16-5 that outlines the possibilities and feasibility of each MPL by task or engagement type. Table 16-5. Minimum proficiency levels application by engagement

16-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

Notes. “Main gun” is used to describe a 25mm, 40mm, or 120mm engagement, respective to the firing vehicle. “Caution” indicates engagements that may be fired using the listed MPL, however, units should consider the impacts of the selection. For example, if a crew is firing a degraded engagement using an auxiliary sight, you MAY fire the task at night, BUT you must have a method of illumination. Tasks of this nature should not be fired on qualification tables. “NO GO” indicates MPLs that may not be applied to the task under any circumstance. Any engagement can be fired day or night. Any engagement can be fired in a chemical environment. Units equipped with TUSK components may fire Engagement 0 or Engagement 9 at night, but should limit this to Tables II, III, IV or V only.

DIGITAL GUNNERY 16-26. Crews on digitally equipped vehicles must fire 50% of all engagements using digital communications. This will enhance digitally equipped units and provide the users with techniques and procedures for engaging threat targets while maintaining situational and environmental awareness, including reporting functions to a higher headquarters using their digital systems. Digital gunnery is conducted on all GTs. The minimum requirements for crew gunnery are listed below. Commanders may add to these requirements. z Digital set up and overlays sent to the combat vehicle as a prefire requirement. z Digital overlays populated with icons for friendly/neutral targetry. z Digital message prompts prior to engagement (five total for each GT). z Digital battle damage assessment and repair (BDAR) roll-up sent by the crew at the end of each phase (day and night).

SCENARIO REQUIREMENTS 16-27. Crew GTs will be conducted on the platform system while on a training area (GT II), range (GT III and IV) or range complex (GTs V and VI), not in crew gunnery simulation where crews cannot exercise all aspects of manipulating the vehicle. GTs II, III, and IV can be completed on range complexes where and when available. 16-28. The vehicle crew evaluator (VCE) will evaluate crew gunnery in accordance with (IAW) the conditions and standards outlined in Chapter 15 and conduct an after action review (AAR) after each run (day and night phase) to enhance the training value. Although the evaluation procedures are standardized, and all platform crew members will be capable of performing VCE duties on other platforms, the debriefing AAR NCO must be the same military occupational specialty (MOS) as the firing crew. See Chapter 15 for VCE requirements, duties, and descriptions. 16-29. Practice and qualification tables may be conducted on the same range provided they do not contain the same scenarios.

DEVELOPING SCENARIOS FOR CREW GUNNERY TABLES 16-30. Each installation may have specific requirements for scenario development; be sure to check the local standing operating procedures (SOP) before beginning the planning process. When planning the scenarios for a qualification range, it is recommended that two scenarios per lane be developed. 16-31. The following planning guide is designed to help units develop scenarios for gunnery ranges and training areas.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-9

Chapter 16

SCENARIO DEVELOPMENT 16-32. Include the following when planning the range scenario: z Identify which tables and tasks are going to be fired (Tables II through VI). z All tasks on Tables II through VI are numbered 0 through 9 with each task given specific engagement type. Within each task, the primary weapon system and authorized ammunition type is identified. z The Master Gunner will select each target from the authorized targets list based on the commander’s intent, mission-essential task list (METL), and potential theater of operations. z For each selected target the Master Gunner will establish the range to target, incorporating the MPLs as required. The Master Gunner will use range references such as the range SOP and target pit/battle position cross reference to determine the suitability of the target location. z Using the MPLs, develop the scenarios to meet the table’s requirements. See Table 16-4, MPL Application by Engagement on page 16-8 as a guide to ensure common mistakes that will result in lost range time are avoided. z The targets identified on each GT as Target 1, 2, or 3 are specifically designed to be presented exactly in the order listed. Any deviation from that structure could result in a specific skill set training opportunity being lost, or may prove to be tactically unsound. The crew does not have to engage the targets in the order they are presented. z Every task listed is a swing task; they can be fired day or night with some considerations for degraded (auxiliary sight) engagements, loader, and VC engagements, respective to the platforms fire control system capabilities. z Any task may be selected as a chemical (chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear [CBRN]) engagement. z Weapon systems identified for the engagement must be used to engage and destroy the targets. Failure to use the listed weapon system will result in an automatic zero for the engagement. For example, a VC who is to fire caliber .50 at a target may not fire a main gun round to destroy the target for any reason. The tasks are specifically designed to train certain critical skill sets. Using alternate, although fully capable, weapon systems to destroy targetry does not accurately evaluate the crew’s ability to master their platform. Notes. If the commander has the resources and he chooses to, he may opt to fire the degraded engagement using artillery/mortar illumination. However, firing the degraded engagement at night will not be performed on any qualification table. Units equipped with TUSK components may fire Engagement 0 or Engagement 9 at night, but should limit this to Tables II, III, IV or V only.

SECTION II – GUNNERY INSTRUCTION AND LIVE-FIRE PREREQUISITES

COMMON INSTRUCTION 16-33. Before crew members progress to device-based gunnery training with vehicle systems (GT II), they should receive basic classroom instruction, hands-on crew training, and individual training. Examples of common classroom subjects, hands-on crew training, and individual training are listed in platform non specific terms, are listed below. Platform-specific hands-on training is covered in the respective section for that platform system. Commanders must ensure that time for this training is factored into the long range and short range training plan.

16-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

CLASSROOM SUBJECTS 16-34. Individual crew members should receive classroom instruction on a variety of subjects that will increase their proficiency with their vehicle, weapon systems, and fire control system. This training will facilitate cohesion as a crew and ultimately increase their lethality on the battlefield. 16-35. The references listed for each example subject area listed in Figure 16-2 provide the instructor with the information necessary to develop lesson plans for each subject.

CLASSROOM SUBJECTS 1. Basic capabilities of the platform weapons systems (Chapter 3). 2. Range/sketch card (applicable FMs). 3. Gun theory and weapons system functions (applicable TMs). 4. Fire control training—boresighting, armament accuracy checks (AAC), and zero/ live-fire accurate screening test (LFAST)/screening procedures (appropriate appendix). 5. Direct-fire engagement process (Chapters 5 through 10). 6. Training devices (Chapter 11). 7. Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) training, if digitally equipped (unit SOP).

HANDS-ON CREW TRAINING 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Individual and Crew training and testing (Chapter 14). Range determination training (Chapter 7). Driver’s training (AR 600-55). Thermal training (recognition of combat vehicles [ROC-V]). Preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) training (appropriate TMs). Simulations (Chapter 11, Chapter 12, appropriate IUH).

INDIVIDUAL TRAINING 1.

Individual weapons training (appropriate FMs).

Figure 16-2. Basic instruction example

HANDS-ON CREW TRAINING 16-36. Crews will conduct hands-on training, both individually and collectively, to prepare for the GST and GT I (Crew Critical Skills). This training will focus primarily on skills necessary to maintain the vehicle, react to hazardous conditions, and utilize their platform weapon system to engage and destroy targets safely and in a timely manner. 16-37. Crew members are trained and evaluated on various skills based on their duty position: z The crew is trained and evaluated on— „ Installing and removing training devices. „ Operating as a crew in a gunnery range environment. „ Weapon and ammunition characteristics, capabilities, and effects. „ Detecting, identifying, deciding, engaging, and assessing targets (DIDEA) process. z The VC is trained and evaluated on— „ Controlling the vehicle, crew, and weapon systems. „ Laying the weapon systems on targets while issuing fire commands. „ Acquiring and designating targets. „ Initiating fire commands.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-11

Chapter 16

Conducting target-handoff procedures. „ Performing engagement techniques from the VC’s position. The turret crew members are trained and evaluated on— „ Manipulating the turret. „ Operating the turret weapons system controls. „ Disassembling and assembling the turret weapons. „ Uploading, downloading, and clearing the turret weapons. „ Performing immediate action on the turret weapons. „ Boresighting or zeroing the weapon systems, including optics alignment. „ Reacting to fire commands. „ Performing engagement techniques. „ Engaging targets with training devices and in simulators. „ Misfire procedures. „ Operations under unusual conditions. „

z

z

The driver is trained and evaluated on— „ Performing offensive and defensive driving techniques. „ Assisting in target acquisition. „ Battle position selection, actions on contact, and reaction drills. „ Identify and use of lines of intervisibility (IV lines) and reverse slope defense.

16-38. Crew gunnery training devices and simulators must— z Replicate/simulate the characteristics of the ammunition. z Allow crews to practice proper gunnery techniques identified in Chapter 5 through Chapter 10 and the respective platform’s appendix. z Use all applicable functions of the fire control system for the conditions of the engagement. z Simulate realistic effects on the target to facilitate proper engagement assessment.

INDIVIDUAL TRAINING 16-39. All Soldiers will conduct individual training to prepare them for live-fire gunnery and integration as a maneuver unit in collective gunnery. Individual training must include cross-training to other positions within the crew. 16-40. Cross training enables the crews to best prepare for combat to overcome loss of personnel through attrition, MEDEVAC, and conflicting taskings. It also develops the future gunner or VC for professional development.

GUNNERY TABLE I 16-41. GT I, Crew Critical Skills consist of those skill that are critical to the safety of the crew and essential to the operation of the combat platform assigned. GT I is designed to test the crew’s ability as a whole to accomplish these vital tasks in a timely manner. GT I should be conducted in garrison, prior to the gunnery density. GT I is a live fire prerequisite that must be completed prior to GT II. Testing and administrative guides are located in Chapter 14.

16-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

GUNNERY TABLE II, CREW PRACTICE COURSE 16-42. GT II, Crew Practice Course (CPC) is a single vehicle CPC (see Table 16-6 and Table 16-7. CPC is designed to evaluate the crew’s ability to engage stationary and moving targets placed in a tactical array from a stationary and moving vehicle. CPC tasks are to be conducted either dry or device based prior to using the .50 cal inbore device (Abrams) or full caliber ammunition. Table 16-6. Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-13

Chapter 16

Table 16-7. Example of Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course (GT II-CPC)

16-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

SECTION III – CREW GUNNERY

GUNNERY TABLE III, BASIC MACHINE GUN 16-43. Table III, Basic Machine Gun is a single-vehicle machine gun pure table (see Table 16-8 and Table 16-9). GT III is designed to evaluate the crew’s ability to engage stationary and moving targets placed in a tactical array from a stationary and moving vehicle using the vehicle mounted machine guns. Table III is designed to give the commander the option to fire with GT IV to make a full 10 engagement. Although it’s not required, the tables are specifically designed to be combined. GT III should only be fired separately from GT IV if range availability and gunline permit. Table 16-8. Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-15

Chapter 16

Table 16-9. Example of Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun (GT III)

16-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

GUNNERY TABLE IV, BASIC MAIN GUN 16-44. Table IV is a single-vehicle main gun pure qualification table (see Table 16-10 and Table 16-11). GT VI is designed to evaluate the crew’s ability to engage stationary and moving targets placed in a tactical array from a stationary and moving vehicle using the main gun. This table can be fired as a stand alone table or in conjunction with GT III. Range availability and gunnery timeline will be more conducive to firing these tables as a Table III/IV. Table 16-10. Gunnery Table IV, Basic Main Gun

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-17

Chapter 16

Table 16-11. Example of Gunnery Table IV, Basic Main Gun (GT IV)

16-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

GUNNERY TABLE III/IV, BASIC MACHINE GUN AND MAIN GUN (GT 34) This is a “combination table,” and NOT an additional table for firing. This combination table is called GT III/IV (or Table 34). Resourcing for this example table is provided by GT III and GT IV. 16-45. Tables III and IV are designed to be fired together at the commander’s discretion. This promotes the commander’s flexibility based on range availability and resources available. It is provided here to show how the two tables are designed to be linked together, and provides and example of the specific targetry and ammunition requirements in order to facilitate scenario development. 16-46. GT III/IV is designed to evaluate the crew’s ability to engage stationary and moving targets placed in a tactical array from a stationary and moving vehicle using the all available weapon systems (see Table 16-12 and Table 16-13). Table 16-12. Gunnery Tables II and IV, Basic Machine Gun and Main Gun (GT 34)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-19

Chapter 16

Table 16-13. Example of Gunnery Tables III and IV, Basic Machine Gun and Main Gun (Table 34)

16-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

GUNNERY TABLE V, CREW PRACTICE 16-47. GT V, Crew Practice is a single vehicle practice table (see Table 16-14 and Table 16-15). Table V is designed to train the crew to engage moving and stationary targets using all vehicle weapon systems. It requires the crew to call on the knowledge gained throughout all previous tables. GT V will prepare the crew for GT VI, Crew Qualification by presenting them with tasks that require the crew to use all the aspects of their fire control system against a variety of target arrays. Table 16-14. Gunnery Table V, Crew Practice

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-21

Chapter 16

Table 16-15. Example of Gunnery Table V, Crew Practice (GT V)

16-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

GUNNERY TABLE VI, CREW QUALIFICATION 16-48. GT VI, Gunnery Crew Qualification is a single vehicle qualification table (see Table 16-16). GT VI is designed to evaluate the crew on engaging moving and stationary targets using all vehicle weapon systems while in the offensive or defensive postures. GT VI must be fire using full caliber ammunition. Table 16-16. Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification

CREW RATINGS 16-49. Crews are evaluated on their level of competence on their platform using the standard evaluation procedures as described in Chapter 15. The end state for each crew after completing GT VI is a crew that is confident and competent to a standard that best prepares them for combat. 16-50. The crew rating is an overall snapshot of the performance on the crew qualification table that provides commanders an overview of the crew’s performance and competence employing their platform. It also is an indicator of unit readiness and training deficiencies for future training events. 16-51. The qualification table crew ratings are based on a dual-qualification criteria system. This system requires crews to qualify a minimum number of engagements and have a minimum number of overall points to be considered qualified. Failure to meet the “QUALIFIED” standard requires crews to re-fire engagements, or in severe cases, be replaced as appropriate. 16-52. Crews will receive an overall qualification rating for GT VI, Basic Crew Qualification, based on the dual-qualification criteria as outlined in Table 16-17 and Table 16-18. Table 16-17. Crew Qualification rating criteria

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-23

Chapter 16

Table 16-18. Example of Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification (GT VI)

16-24

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

SECTION IV – EXAMPLE GUNNERY TABLE VI 16-53. To assist the unit with gunnery scenario development, a scenario selection special text has been created for both this chapter as well as Chapter 17, Unstabilized Platform Gunnery. The following sets of 10 figures are an example of GT VI under development. Each step of the scenario build process is shown in task order, and includes an explanation or justification for all commander selected items. 16-54. Figure 16-3 is an example of a target scenario worksheet downloadable from https://www.us.army.mil/suite/kc/9773910. Master Gunners or scenario developers may use this chart to develop their engagements. It provides all the MPL information that may be selected, ammunition capabilities based upon target selection, target type possibilities, target posture information, and range to target data. This downloadable sample packet is not a requirement, but will assist with scenario development and organization.

Figure 16-3. Target scenario development tool example 16-55. Task 0, VC engagements have some limitations based on the optical capabilities of the platform. As spin-off technologies are made available, platform capabilities increase and therefore, the MPL application to the engagements may be affected. 16-56. Once the Master Gunner identifies the requirements and intent of the commander, he can develop the scenario for the GTs. The following figures show each engagement in task order for an entire GT VI, with an example of the step sequence that the engagements will be fired.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-25

Chapter 16

16-57. These sheets help identify which MPLs to apply, the available targetry, type of ammunition for each target, range to target, and any notes for the engagement. For these examples, the scenario is being built so an Abrams and Bradley may shoot the same scenario. Figure 16-4 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 60 (Table VI, Task 0, VC).

Figure 16-4. Engagement 60 example 16-58. This engagement is specific for the VC. The gunner may not fire this engagement. The resourced ammunition is kinetic energy (KE), and the target is required to be moving, a BMP flank was selected as the target. A KE 25mm and 120mm projectile can kill this target as shown in the ammunition capabilities columns. Figure 16-5 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 61 (Table VI, Task 1, Machine Gun Pure).

16-26

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

Figure 16-5. Engagement 61 example 16-59. This engagement was selected for night, offense, in a chemical environment. One CBRN engagement must be fired day and night. This engagement will meet the night requirement. 16-60. The Master Gunner will determine the range to target as appropriate for the range he will be firing on. All targets are 7.62mm capable and will work for both Abrams and Bradley platforms. Figure 16-6 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 62 (Table VI, Task 2, Machine Gun Pure).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-27

Chapter 16

Figure 16-6. Engagement 62 example 16-61. This is the second machine gun pure engagement of the table. As we selected the first machine gun pure engagement to be fired at night, this target will be fired during the day to provide balance to the table, although this is not required. 16-62. Targets selected allowed some variety and required the gunner to use different engagement techniques from target to target. The engagement was selected as an offensive task. Figure 16-7 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 63 (Table VI, Task 3, Main Gun Pure).

16-28

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

Figure 16-7. Engagement 63 example 16-63. This engagement has a single moving target. The long-range main gun MPL was selected for this engagement, requiring the Abrams target placement >2000m, and the Bradley target placement >1400m. 16-64. As the development of this engagement is the “long range mover,” it was selected to be fired from a defensive position. 16-65. Due to the difference in range from Abrams to Bradley, one method to utilize the same mover for both platforms is to have the Abrams crews engage from BP 1 on a course road, and the Bradley crews fire from BP 2 or BP 3, provided the range to target meets the MPL selected. This change in firing location is due to the maximum effective range of the 25mm training ammunition, as well as the number of rounds resourced per 25mm target (8 each). Figure 16-8 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 64 (Table VI, Task 4, Main Gun Pure).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-29

Chapter 16

Figure 16-8. Engagement 64 example 16-66. This three-target engagement is one of only two on GT VI. It was selected to be fired during the day using a TCP position. This is where the vehicle is positioned in a defensive posture in the open on a course road with no battle position. 16-67. The short-range main gun MPL is applied to the first target presented in the scenario. The moving target is placed at a KE capable range for both Abrams and Bradley crews. Figure 16-9 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 65 (Table VI, Task 5, Change of Weapon System).

16-30

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

Figure 16-9. Engagement 65 example 16-68. This engagement was selected for night from the defense. It includes the utilization of the short range machine gun MPL applied to Target 1. 16-69. Target range was based on the firing ammunition type for both targets individually. For target 2, 1200m was selected to challenge the crew’s ability to acquire both targets, one close range, one medium range. Figure 16-10 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 66 (Table VI, Task 6, Change of Weapon System).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-31

Chapter 16

Figure 16-10. Engagement 66 example 16-70. This is the second engagement for a change of weapon system. As the first was placed during the night, this engagement was selected for day, offense, in a chemical environment. This satisfies the CBRN MPL requirement for day. 16-71. Although target 1 is a stationary target, a stationary flank technical truck was selected. As long as the ammunition is capable of killing the target with the rounds authorized, it is a viable target solution for the scenario. Figure 16-11 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 67 (Table VI, Task 7, Degraded).

16-32

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

Figure 16-11. Engagement 67 example 16-72. This engagement is specifically a degraded engagement. The scenario developer must pick one of the three types of authorized degradation for this engagement. 16-73. The scenario developer must use caution when selecting the level of degradation for the engagement based on whether it will be fired day or night. In this example, the engagement will be fired during the day using Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS)/Integrated Sight Unit (ISU)/Gunnery’s Primary Sight (GPS)/Thermal Imaging System (TIS) manual controls. 16-74. Range to target should be selected using keeping in mind the standard battlecarry range, optics capability, choke sight (stadia reticle to target silhouette presentation) and reticle range gradient lines to ensure a realistic engagement. 16-75. If manual controls are used, it is not recommended to have the targets more than 50 mils apart to ensure the crew is capable of traversing from one target to the other in a reasonable amount of time. 16-76. Figure 16-12 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 68 (Table VI, Task 8, Degraded).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-33

Chapter 16

Figure 16-12. Engagement 68 example 16-77. This engagement is specifically a degraded engagement. The scenario developer must pick one of the three types of authorized degradation for this engagement. 16-78. The scenario developer must use caution when selecting the level of degradation for the engagement based on whether it will be fired day or night. In this example, the engagement will be fired during the day using the auxiliary sight and power controls. Using the auxiliary sight requires the engagement to be fired during the day. If mortar or field artillery illumination rounds are available, this degradation may be fired at night, but only on non-qualification tables (
16-34

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Stabilized Platform Gunnery

Figure 16-13. Engagement 69 example 16-81. When firing only Bradley crews on this engagement, any MPL can be selected, and can be fired day or night. If Abrams and Bradley crews will both fire this scenario, considerations for the simultaneous engagement must be made: z If TUSK is installed on the Abrams, and thermal optics are available for the loader and VC may be fired at night on non-qualification tables (< GT VI). z Target 1 and Target 2 are locked for the loader and VC. This provides the crew to engage the targets in a tactically sound manner where they fire from the defilade position. This engagement technique does not expose the vehicle to hostile fire while they engage from the defilade. z Target 3 requires the scenario developer to select either 15, 20 or 25 seconds for the delay. This target may not be presented at the same time as the first two targets. Crews may wait to engage all three targets at once from the enfilade position if they choose.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

16-35

Chapter 16

z

It is not recommended for the loader or VC to engage rocket-propelled grenade (RPG), sniper, or troop targets with their weapon systems on the qualification table. Truck frontal and flank targets are the preferred targetry due to the weapon’s unstabilized capability, and lack of front sight post (loader). The truck type targets provide the most visible area for the rounds to strike in relation to a troop set or E-type silhouette series.

16-82. Once the engagements are drafted out, they must be put into a firing sequence or step order for execution on the range. This can be done in a variety of ways, but general rules are— z Start with a defensive, long-range engagement to maximize the range complex’s capabilities. z Two defensive engagements may be fired in a row, if necessary. z Do not fire all defensive engagements first, followed by offensive engagements. This will cause command and control problems for the tower. z Base the number of day and night engagements based on the available daylight and firing hours. The engagements and table structure provides for a mixture from 7 day/3 night to 3 day/7 night. This facilitates the needs of the units that may fire in austere, extreme northern gunnery ranges. z If a day run is not complete, but the crew has fired 1 offense, 1 defense, and 1 short halt/TCP engagement during the day, the remaining engagements may be shifted to night.

16-36

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Chapter 17

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery Chapter 17 covers crew gunnery for unstabilized direct-fire platforms within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT), including scout High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV), military police (MP) Armored Security Vehicle (ASV), and sustainment unit Convoy Protection Platforms (CPP). Unstabilized platforms are those vehicles that have mounted crew serve weapons without a fire control system that provides a level of stabilization that facilitate an accurate shoot-on-the-move capability. Commanders can use the training model detailed within this chapter for training crews assigned to other vehicles that have an unstabilized crew-served machine guns such as the supply sergeant’s Light Medium Tactical Vehicle (LMTV), personnel carriers (PC), and command and control vehicles. Gunnery training phases and critical gunnery skills for armed vehicle crews are identified in this chapter. Guidelines are provided in Chapter 13 for the development of a gunnery training program that is designed to produce qualified crews by training critical skills that facilitates teamwork at the crew level and during crew, section, platoon, convoy and base defense operations. Further, it covers the strategy and training plans derived from the gunnery training program development process. Individual and crew gunnery training for unstabilized armed vehicles within the HBCT are addressed in detail. Gunnery Tables (GT) II through VI are contained in this chapter and evaluated using the methodology in Sections I and IV of Chapter 8 and Section II of Chapter 12.

Contents Section I – Gunnery Training Program .. 17-2 Section II – Requirements ...................... 17-3 Prerequisites ..................................... 17-3 Minimum Proficiency Levels ............. 17-3 Digital Gunnery ................................. 17-5 Scenario Requirements .................... 17-5 Developing Scenarios for Crew Gunnery Tables ................................ 17-6 Section III – Unstabilized Platform Gunnery ................................................... 17-9 Common Instruction .......................... 17-9 Gunnery Table I, Critical Crew Skills17-11 Gunnery Table II, CPC ................... 17-13

3 September 2009

Section IV – Crew Gunnery................... 17-15 Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun ................................................. 17-15 Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun................................... 17-18 Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice ........................................... 17-21 Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course ........................ 17-24

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-1

Chapter 17

SECTION I – GUNNERY TRAINING PROGRAM 17-1. Gunnery training programs should be developed to follow a logical progression of training, conducted in three phases—individual, crew, and collective gunnery. These phases are described below and detailed in Table 17-1. z Individual. The individual gunnery phase trains individual crewmen and crew level skills utilizing classroom and home-station training. During this home station training, it incorporates tracking boards, gun laying exercises, and culminates with emergency operations in the Crew Critical Skills (GT I). z Crew. The crew gunnery phase develops crew skills from the individual gunnery phase and begins with a live-fire prerequisite, GT II, Crew Proficiency Course (CPC). After its successful completion, crews begin training using live ammunition from their respective vehicle while in defensive or offensive postures. The crew gunnery phase culminates with the Crew Qualification Course, GT VI. z Collective. The collective gunnery phase develops coordination and fire distribution and control during section, platoon, convoy and base defense operations. There are also guidelines for supporting a company-level Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise (CALFEX). Table 17-1. Unstabilized platform gunnery tables

17-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

SECTION II – REQUIREMENTS

PREREQUISITES 17-2. Crew members must complete the following prerequisite training events prior to conducting fullcaliber live-fire gunnery training: Note. All occupants of the vehicles to include the driver, vehicle commander (VC), gunner, and assigned vehicle occupants are considered crew members. z

Gunners and VCs must be qualified on the crew-served weapon for their assigned vehicle in the ground role (ground mount) within 6 months prior to firing. The VC will be required to fire the crew-served weapon on all GTs. The gunner and VC should complete training in a simulation or simulator as required by the unit’s gunnery training program.

z

Crew members must pass all associated Gunnery Skills Test (GST) tasks within 1 month (3 months for reserve components [RC]) prior to live fire.

z

Crews must complete GT I, Crew Critical Skills (CCS), within 3 months prior to live fire (6 months for RCs).

z

A crew must qualify on GT II, CPC within 3 months (6 months for RCs) prior to live fire. GT II is designed to be firing with blank ammunition (not including 40mm, MK19).

MINIMUM PROFICIENCY LEVELS 17-3. The minimum proficiency levels (MPL) are the commander’s tool to tailor training to fit his training objectives based on his core mission-essential task list (CMETL) and directed mission-essential task list (DMETL). They also provide common requirements for all GTs and provide a standardized basis for training models and evaluation standards. Commanders must follow Table 17-2 when designing their respective gunnery. Sustainment unit commanders should consider the role of their crews when determining engagement range to target. Table 17-2 is the minimum requirements, but commanders may choose to increase these requirements to meet their training objectives.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-3

Chapter 17

Table 17-2. Minimum proficiency levels, unstabilized platforms

Notes. GT IV is only resourced for scout armed HMMWV Crews within the HBCT. This table is designed for extended range machine gun engagements. All ranges to target will be > 800 meters. Commanders firing non-scout crews should restrict range to target to 600 meters or less for all targetry except where indicated in the MPLs. This provides a more realistic gunnery based on the unit’s mission and role within the HBCT. All firing crews must complete a radio communication task, day and night, based on the commander’s guidance. These tasks can be call for fire, request medical evacuation (MEDEVAC), or call for air/ground support. If the unit does not have optics that support night gunnery, the night tasks will be fired during the day.

17-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

DIGITAL GUNNERY 17-4. Crews on digitally equipped vehicles should fire specified engagements using digital communications. This will enhance digitally equipped units and provide the users with techniques and procedures for engaging threat targets while using their digital platform. Digital gunnery is conducted on all tables. The minimum requirements for digital crew gunnery are listed below and commanders may add to these requirements. z Digital set up and overlays sent to the vehicle as pre-fire requirement. z Digital overlays populated with icons for friendly/neutral targetry. z Digital message prompts prior to engagement (50% of engagements). z Digital battle damage assessment and repair (BDAR) roll-up sent by the crew at the end of each phase (50% of engagements).

SCENARIO REQUIREMENTS 17-5. Crew GTs will be conducted on the platform system, not in crew gunnery simulation where crews cannot exercise all aspects of manipulating the vehicle and its weapon system(s). 17-6. A frontal stationary target may be substituted for a moving target if range limitations do not support the target array. The appropriate matrix will be referenced when assessing vehicle exposure times. 17-7. The Vehicle Crew Evaluator (VCE) will evaluate crew gunnery in accordance with (IAW) the conditions and standards outlined in Chapter 15 and conduct an after action review (AAR) after each run to enhance the training value. 17-8. Practice and qualification tables may be conducted on the same range, provided they do not contain the same scenarios. Units may not teach the test. 17-9. Defensive engagements should begin with the vehicle starting in a defilade (turret-down) position and moving to an enfilade (hull-down) position to engage the target(s), as seen in Figure 17-1 through Figure 17-4. It may not be necessary for the crew to move forward to an enfilade position in order to fire the weapon. However, the VC and driver lose the opportunity to sense rounds to better adjust fires. It is not a requirement to move forward provided the crew can safely engage the targets from the defilade position. Evaluators must clearly understand the rules for scoring crews when firing from a defilade position (see Chapter 15).

Figure 17-1. HMMWV in the defilade position example

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-5

Chapter 17

Figure 17-2. HMMWV in the enfilade position example

Figure 17-3. LMTV in the defilade position example

Figure 17-4. LMTV in the enfilade position example 17-10. Short-halt tasks will be conducted either with the firing vehicle moving and then halting on the course road, or from an exposed stationary position as at a static checkpoint. 17-11. Offensive tasks will be conducted with the firing vehicle on the move at a speed that will facilitate engaging the target safely within the designated maneuver box. 17-12. Evaluators use DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet (see Chapter 15), to record the results of gunnery engagements. The instructions for completing the scoresheets are in Chapter 15. Blank forms designed for reproduction are located at the back of this manual. If needed, units can download the form from the US Army Publishing Directorate (see References).

DEVELOPING SCENARIOS FOR CREW GUNNERY TABLES 17-13. Each installation may have specific requirements for scenario development. Check the local standing operating procedures (SOP) before beginning the planning process. When planning the scenarios for a qualification range, it is recommended that two scenarios per lane be developed.

17-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

17-14. The following planning guide is designed to help units develop scenarios for gunnery ranges and training areas. This planning guide consists of the planning, development, and proofing processes.

PLANNING THE SCENARIO 17-15. Include the following when planning the range scenario: z Identify which tables and tasks are going to be fired (Tables II through VI). „ All tasks on Tables II through VI are numbered 0 through 9 with each task given specific engagement type. Within each engagement, the primary weapon system is identified. The Master Gunner or Senior Gunner will select each target from the authorized targets list based on the commander’s intent, mission-essential task list (METL), and potential theater of operations. „ For each selected target the Master Gunner or Senior Gunner will establish the range to target for each selected target. The Master Gunner or Senior Gunner will use range references such as the range SOP and target pit/battle position cross reference. „ Using the minimum proficiency levels, develop the scenarios to meet the table’s requirements.

Note. Due to the complexity and limitations of the fire control system on the ASV all MK19 engagements should be fired at 800 meters or less during the day and at 300 meters or less at night. 17-16. An example of the task numbering is listed below in conjunction with the MPL capabilities. „ Table III, Engagement Number 5 would be Engagement 35, Multiple Targets, two Stationary Targets. Table IV, Engagement 1 would be Engagement 41, VC task (see Table 17-3 and Table 17-4).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-7

Chapter 17

Table 17-3. Annual ammunition roll-up

17-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

Table 17-4. Task numbering and MPL application matrix

Notes. During the VC engagements (tasks 0 and 1), when building the scenario the long and short range tasks can be done, but they are primarily designed for the gunner. Consider applying these MPLs to gunner engagements. As the multiple mover engagement (task 9) is extremely difficult, scenario developers should not use the short halt or long range MPLs on the qualification table (GT VI).

SECTION III – UNSTABILIZED PLATFORM GUNNERY

COMMON INSTRUCTION 17-17. Before crew members progress to device-based gunnery training with vehicle systems (Table II), they should receive basic classroom instruction, hands-on crew training, and individual training. Examples of common classroom subjects, hands-on crew training, and individual training are listed and discussed in Figure 17-5.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-9

Chapter 17

CLASSROOM SUBJECTS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Basic capabilities of the platform weapons systems (Chapters 2, 3, and 4). Range/sketch card (applicable FMs). Gun theory and weapons system functions (applicable TMs). Fire control training. Zero procedures (Appendix C). Direct-fire engagement process (Chapter 8) Training devices (Chapter 11). FBCB2 training, if digitally equipped (unit SOP).

HANDS-ON CREW TRAINING 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Gunnery skills tests (Chapter 14). Range determination training (Appropriate Appendix). Driver’s training (AR 600-55). Thermal training (ROC-V). PMCS training (appropriate TMs). Simulations (Appropriate Instructor Utilization Handbook).

INDIVIDUAL TRAINING 1. Individual weapons training (appropriate FMs). 2. Movement and maneuver training. 3. FIST training (FMs 3-09.8 and 3-22.91).

Figure 17-5. Common instruction crew training prior to gunnery

CLASSROOM SUBJECTS 17-18. Individual crew members will receive classroom instruction on a variety of subjects that will increase their proficiency with their vehicle platform and weapon system. This training will facilitate cohesion as a crew. 17-19. The references listed for each example subject area listed in Figure 17-5 provide the instructor with the information necessary to develop lessons for each subject. They also provide a reference source for crew members during individual gunnery.

HANDS-ON CREW TRAINING 17-20. Crews will conduct hands-on training both individually and collectively to prepare for Tables I and II. This training will focus primarily on skills necessary to maintain the vehicle, utilize their platform weapon system to engage and destroy targets, and emergency procedures such as roll over drills, and crew evacuation. 17-21. Crew members are trained and evaluated on various skills based on their duty position. z The crew is trained and evaluated on— „ Installing and removing training devices. „ Operating as a crew in a gunnery range environment. „ Detecting, identifying, deciding, engaging, and assessing targets. „ Simulation training utilizing the Engagement Skills Trainer (EST), Close Combat Tactical Trainer (CCTT), and convoy simulators, for example. z The VC is trained and evaluated on— „ Controlling the vehicle, crew, and weapon systems. „ Guiding the gunner on targets while issuing fire commands. „ Acquiring targets. „ Initiating, executing, and concluding fire commands.

17-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

z

The turret crew members are trained and evaluated on— Manipulating the turret or skate, pintle, and traverse/elevation mechanism. „ Operating the turret weapons system. „ Disassembling and assembling the turret weapons. „ Uploading, downloading, and clearing the turret weapons. „ Performing immediate action on the turret weapons. „ Reacting to fire commands. „ Performing engagement techniques. „ Boresighting training devices. „ Engaging targets with training devices. The driver is trained and evaluated on— „ Performing offensive and defensive driving techniques. „ Assisting in target acquisition. Crew gunnery training devices and simulators must— „ Emulate/simulate the characteristics of the ammunition. „ Allow crews to practice proper gunnery techniques identified in this manual. „ Simulate realistic effects on target to facilitate proper engagement assessment. „

z

z

17-22. The references listed for each training subject listed in Figure 17-5 provide the instructor with the information necessary to develop lessons for each subject (the GSTs and GT I, CCS are already in evaluation format in Chapter 14). They also provide a reference source for crew members during individual gunnery.

INDIVIDUAL TRAINING 17-23. All Soldiers will conduct individual training to prepare them for live-fire gunnery and integration as a maneuver unit in collective gunnery. The scope of the individual training is based on the crew-served weapon assignment, vehicle assignment, and crew management. All firing gunners and VCs from a crew must qualify on their crew-served weapon in a ground role prior to moving on to crew gunnery.

GUNNERY TABLE I, CRITICAL CREW SKILLS 17-24. During introductory manipulation training, crew members learn how the cupola responds to their use of the cupola controls. Manipulation combines eye-hand coordination and reinforcement training. The two types of manipulation include gun lay and tracking. 17-25. The GTs are designed to build a crew’s ability to destroy targets through in different postures, threat target postures, and complexity. This is done using the crawl, walk, run methodology, and ensures the crews are confident and capable with their weapon system 17-26. Figure 17-6 and Figure 17-7 are an overview chart with sample target selections of the entire GTs. Theses matrices shows the types of targetry for each main task, and how the tables progress toward training harder than the test, as well as the progression of complexity.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-11

Chapter 17

Figure 17-6. Example of unstabilized platform gunnery table matrix

17-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

Figure 17-7. Example of Guardian ASV gunnery table matrix

GUNNERY TABLE II, CPC 17-27. The purpose of the CPC is to prepare the crew for live fire (see Table 17-5, Figure 17-8, and Figure 17-9 [ASV]). This table cannot be fired live. If blank ammunition is not available, crews may fire the engagements dry. Evaluators must consider the crew’s ability to lay on target accurately and engage threat targets in a timely manner to determine the engagement time. Evaluation of this table is based upon the standard evaluation model as listed in Chapter 15. 17-28. Ammunition resourced for this table is blank. No blank rounds are available for the MK19, 40mm grenade launcher. Small arms quantities are listed per vehicle respective to the type of machine gun assigned. 17-29. If thermal or night optics are not available, all 10 tasks will be fired during the day phase. All targetry for an engagement will be presented simultaneously with no delay between targets.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-13

Chapter 17

Table 17-5. Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course Engage and destroy stationary and moving targets from a stationary and moving armed vehicle during both day and night operations.

TASK:

Given the following: z A fully operational armed vehicle. z MILES. z Full-size or scaled targets with LTIDS. z Blank ammunition. Note. Vehicle posture and target presentation must adhere to the minimum proficiency levels for armed GTs as listed on page 17-4. CONDITIONS:

STANDARDS:

The crew must obtain a minimum of 700 of the 1,000 total points and score at least 70 points on 7 of 10 engagements. VC tactical task (2x) is evaluated based on the commander’s guidance. A “Go” must be received to continue to the next GT.

Figure 17-8. Example of Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course

17-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

Figure 17-9. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course

SECTION IV – CREW GUNNERY

GUNNERY TABLE III, BASIC MACHINE GUN 17-30. The purpose of the Basic Machine Gun is to develop the VC and Gunner’s skills engaging targets from a defensive or offensive posture. This table is designed for firing using a crawl, walk, run methodology. It utilizes the common scoring methodology found in Chapter 15.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-15

Chapter 17

17-31. Evaluators are positioned in the tower to record contact reports and firing information, while another evaluator is positioned on the firing vehicle. Evaluation of this table is based upon the standard evaluation model as listed in Chapter 16. Evaluators on the vehicle must have passed the GST and should be capable of acting as a safety NCO. Although the evaluator is not the Range Safety Officer (RSO), one of his key responsibilities is to provide a second set of eyes when clearing the weapon system, especially when the VC and gunner switch positions during the table. 17-32. Ammunition resourced for this table is live. Small arms quantities are listed per vehicle respective to the type of machine gun assigned. If thermal or night optics are not available, all 10 tasks will be fired during the day phase. All targetry for an engagement will be presented simultaneously with no delay between targets (see Table 17-6, Figure 17-10, and Figure 17-11 [ASV]). Table 17-6. Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun Engage and destroy stationary single and multiple targets from a stationary armed vehicle during both day and night operations. Given the following: CONDITIONS: z A fully operational armed vehicle. z Three fourths scale targets (if available). z Allocated ammunition. z All engagements are fired from a defensive posture. Note. Vehicle posture and target presentation must adhere to the minimum proficiency levels for armed GTs as listed on page 17-4. The crew must obtain a minimum of 700 of the 1,000 total points and score STANDARDS: at least 70 points on 7 of 10 engagements. VC tactical tasks are assessed based on the commander’s guidance. A “Go” on that task (3x) must be achieved to continue to the next GT.

TASK:

17-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

Figure 17-10. Example of Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-17

Chapter 17

Figure 17-11. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun

GUNNERY TABLE IV, EXTENDED RANGE MACHINE GUN 17-33. The purpose of the Extended Range Machine Gun Table is to prepare the scout or reconnaissance crew for engagements at ranges beyond 800 meters, firing from both offensive and defensive postures. This table is not resourced for vehicles other than the scout/recon and military police (MP) elements. 17-34. Ammunition resourced for this table is live. Small arms quantities are listed per vehicle respective to the type of machine gun assigned.

17-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

17-35. If thermal or night optics are not available, all 10 tasks will be fired during the day phase. 17-36. Evaluators are positioned in the tower to record contact reports and firing information, while another evaluator is positioned on the firing vehicle. Evaluation of this table is based upon the standard evaluation model as listed in Chapter 16. Evaluators on the vehicle must have passed the GST and should be capable of acting as a safety NCO. Although the evaluator is not the RSO, one of his key responsibilities is to provide a second set of eyes when clearing the weapon system, especially when the VC and gunner switch positions during the table. 17-37. All targetry for an engagement will be presented simultaneously with no delay between targets (see Table 17-7, Figure 17-12, and Figure 17-13 [ASV]). Table 17-7. Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun TASK: CONDITIONS:

Engage and destroy stationary single targets from a stationary and moving armed vehicle during both day and night operations at extended ranges. Given the following: z A fully operational armed vehicle. z Full-scale targets (3/4 scale targets are optional). z Allocated ammunition.

Note. Vehicle posture and target presentation must adhere to the minimum proficiency levels for armed GTs listed on page 17-4. STANDARDS:

3 September 2009

The crew must obtain a minimum of 700 of the 1,000 total points and score at least 70 points on 7 of 10 engagements. VC tactical tasks are assessed based upon the commander’s guidance. A “Go” must be received on the tactical task (4x) to proceed to the next GT.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-19

Chapter 17

Figure 17-12. Example of Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun (scout/recon only)

17-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

Figure 17-13. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun (scout/recon only)

GUNNERY TABLE V, BASIC CREW PRACTICE 17-38. The purpose of the Basic Crew Practice Course is to prepare the crew for the Crew Qualification Table (see Table 17-8, Figure 17-14, and Figure 17-15 [ASV]). It is designed to provide an offensive and defensive mix that adequately trains the crews for qualification. 17-39. Ammunition resourced for this table is live. Small arms quantities are listed per vehicle respective to the type of machine gun assigned. 17-40. If thermal or night optics are not available, all 10 tasks will be fired during the day phase.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-21

Chapter 17

17-41. Evaluators are positioned in the tower to record contact reports and firing information, while another evaluator is positioned on the firing vehicle. Evaluation of this table is based upon the standard evaluation model as listed in Chapter 16. Evaluators on the vehicle must have passed the GST and should be capable of acting as a safety NCO. Although the evaluator is not the RSO, one of his key responsibilities is to provide a second set of eyes when clearing the weapon system, especially when the VC and gunner switch positions during the table. 17-42. All targetry for an engagement will be presented simultaneously with no delay between targets. Table 17-8. Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice TASK: CONDITIONS:

Engage and destroy stationary and moving targets from a stationary and moving armed vehicle during both day and night operations. Given the following: z A fully operational armed vehicle. z

Full-scale targets (3/4 scale targets optional).

z

Allocated ammunition.

Note. Vehicle posture and target presentation must adhere to the minimum proficiency levels for armed GTs listed on page 17-4. STANDARDS:

17-22

The crew must obtain a minimum of 700 of the 1,000 total points and score at least 70 points on 7 of 10 engagements. VC tactical tasks are assessed based upon the commander’s guidance. A “Go” must be received on the tactical task (5x) to proceed to the next GT.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

Figure 17-14. Example of Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-23

Chapter 17

Figure 17-15. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice

GUNNERY TABLE VI, CREW QUALIFICATION COURSE 17-43. The purpose of the Crew Qualification Course is to qualify crews on critical gunnery tasks and prepare the crew for collective gunnery (see Table 17-9, Figure 17-16, and Figure 17-17 [ASV]). This table cannot be fired dry. 17-44. Ammunition resourced for this table is live. Small arms quantities are listed per vehicle respective to the type of machine gun assigned. 17-45. If thermal or night optics are not available, all 10 tasks will be fired during the day phase.

17-24

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

17-46. Evaluators are positioned in the tower to record contact reports and firing information, while another evaluator is positioned on the firing vehicle. Evaluation of this table is based upon the standard evaluation model as listed in Chapter 16. Evaluators on the vehicle must have passed the GST and should be capable of acting as a safety NCO. Although the evaluator is not the RSO, one of his key responsibilities is to provide a second set of eyes when clearing the weapon system, especially when the VC and gunner switch positions during the table. 17-47. All targetry for an engagement will be presented simultaneously with no delay between targets. Table 17-9. Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course TASK: CONDITIONS:

Engage and destroy stationary and moving targets from a stationary and moving armed vehicle during both day and night operations. Given the following: z A fully operational armed vehicle. z Full-scale targets. z Allocated ammunition.

Notes. Table VI must be conducted on a full-scale range using full-scale targets, and firing full-caliber ammunition. Crews may not dry-run Table VI prior to live fire. STANDARDS:

The crew must obtain a minimum of 700 of the 1,000 total points and score at least 70 points on 7 of 10 engagements. VC tactical tasks are assessed based upon the commander’s guidance. A “Go” must be received on the tactical task (6x) to proceed to collective gunnery.

CREW RATINGS 17-48. Crews will receive an overall qualification rating for Table VI based on the common scoring model dual qualification criteria (qualified tasks and total crew points) (see Table 17-10). Table 17-10. Crew Qualification rating criteria DISTINGUISHED

Crew scored at least 70 points on at least 9 of 10 engagements and more than 900 points overall.

SUPERIOR

Crew scored at least 70 points on at least 8 of 10 engagements and more than 800 points overall.

QUALIFIED

Crew scored at least 70 points on at least 7 of 10 engagements and more than 700 points overall.

UNQUALIFIED

Crew failed to qualify at least 7 engagements or scored less than 700 points.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-25

Chapter 17

Figure 17-16. Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course

17-26

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

Figure 17-17. Guardian ASV Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

17-27

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 18

Collective Gunnery Collective Gunnery Tables (GT) are designed to test the unit’s and leader’s ability to take knowledge learned from and crew GTs and apply it to tactical combat scenarios at the section, platoon, and company team levels, to include combined arms sections and platoons. Chapter 18 discusses GTs VII through XII for the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT), Section and platoon GTs can be conducted as either pure elements (such as the tank platoon) or as a combined arms section and platoon. Integration of sustainment unit support, aviation, and indirect-fire support in these tables is imperative to presenting realistic, challenging tactical scenarios. The culmination of this training is the company-level Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise (CALFEX) (see Chapter 19).

Contents Section I – Evaluation ............................. 18-1 Concept ............................................ 18-1 Collective Task Scoring Model.......... 18-2 Evaluation Team ............................... 18-6 General Requirements ...................... 18-6 Minimum Proficiency Levels ............. 18-9 Digital Requirements ........................ 18-9 Call for Fire Requirements ................ 18-9 Prerequisites ................................... 18-10 Section II – Section Gunnery................ 18-11 Table VII–Section Proficiency Exercise .......................................... 18-11 Table VIII–Section Practice ............ 18-12 Table IX–Section Qualification ........ 18-13

Section III – Platoon Gunnery .............. 18-15 Table X–Platoon Proficiency Exercise .......................................... 18-15 Table XI–Platoon Practice .............. 18-16 Table XII–Platoon Qualification ...... 18-17

SECTION I – EVALUATION

CONCEPT 18-1. Collective gunnery training measures a maneuver element’s proficiency in executing collective tasks. Leaders are trained and evaluated on the following skills: z Platoon leaders: „ Distribution and control of fires for squads and either pure or combined arms vehicle sections and platoons. „ Conducting platoon-level collective tasks, both pure and combined arms, in accordance with (IAW) the applicable Combined Arms Training Strategies (CATS). „ Controlling the maneuver of squads and vehicle sections and platoons.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

18-1

Chapter 18

z

Squad/section leaders: „ Distribution and control of fires for fire teams and vehicles within their sections. „ Conducting squad/section-level collective tasks IAW the applicable CATS. „ Controlling the maneuver of vehicles and fire teams within their sections.

COLLECTIVE TASK SCORING MODEL 18-2. The collective task scoring model will be used to evaluate section and platoon gunnery and effectively measure a maneuver element’s ability to accomplish its mission by executing tasks to standard. The collective scoring model allows the commander to determine if his unit has or has not demonstrated overall proficiency to perform task steps or performance measures to support the stated mission. Under this method, collective task standards will be evaluated utilizing the training and evaluation outlines (T&EO) for that task. Gunnery will also be evaluated on tasks containing engagements by the percentage of presented targets that are destroyed. The evaluator will use this data to determine the task assessment as either trained (T), needs practice (P), or untrained (U). The senior evaluator will use the task assessments to determine an overall assessment of the section’s/platoon’s performance on the table as either trained (T), needs practice (P), or untrained (U).

TACTICAL TASK SCORE 18-3. The standards for each collective task are in the T&EOs. These are used to evaluate the section or platoon’s performance of that task. 18-4. The maneuver element must meet a minimum proficiency level (MPL) of passing all task standards, critical, and leader subtasks in the T&EO.

GUNNERY SCORE 18-5. Gunnery is tied to the T&EO standards for the collective task containing engagements. These tasks will be identified as firing tasks. The maneuver element must meet an MPL of 50 percent target destruction during a firing task. Commanders may opt to increase the gunnery standard to a higher percentage.

COLLECTIVE TASK ASSESSMENT 18-6. The following criteria will provide a guideline the evaluator may use to determine his assessment: z Trained (T). „ Evaluated as trained (T) under the T&EO. „ Destroyed all targets presented (T). z

Needs Practice (P). „ Evaluated as needs practice (P) under the T&EO. „ Met collective task gunnery MPL.

z

Untrained (U). „ Failed to meet the task standards or one or more critical or leader performance measures within the T&EO for the collective task. „ Failed to meet the gunnery MPL.

TABLE ASSESSMENT 18-7. The table assessment is based on the determination of the commander/senior evaluator: z Trained (T). The maneuver element is assessed as trained (T) on all collective tasks and has met all requirements. z Needs Practice (P). The commander identifies one or more significant deficiencies in overall proficiency and/or the unit has been assessed as untrained (U) on one or more tasks. z Untrained (U). The commander determines the unit has not demonstrated overall proficiency in his tasks or has failed to perform the stated mission.

18-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Collective Gunnery

18-8. Evaluators use DA Form 7659-R, Gunnery Tables VII, VIII, IX Scoresheet (Section Qualification), or DA Form 7658-R, Gunnery Tables X, XI, XII Scoresheet (Platoon Qualification), to record the gunnery and tactical scores along with task and table assessments (see Figure 18-1 and Figure 18-2) assessments. Blank forms designed for reproduction are located in the back of this manual. If needed, they can be downloaded from the U.S. Army Publishing Directorate (see References).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

18-3

Chapter 18

Figure 18-1. Example of DA Form 7659-R, Gunnery Tables VII, VIII, IX Scoresheet (Section Qualification)

18-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Collective Gunnery

Figure 18-2. Example of Form DA 7658-R, Gunnery Table X, XI, XII Scoresheet (Platoon Qualification)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

18-5

Chapter 18

EVALUATION TEAM 18-9. Evaluators enhance the training experience by providing valuable and credible observations. Each evaluator should hold the same or higher rank than the evaluated element’s leader. Ideally, the evaluator should have experience in the evaluated leader’s position. The commander should task sufficient evaluators and exercise support personnel to observe and evaluate the section and platoon’s performance. Those personnel help enforce range safety with the range safety officer and perform their own assigned tasks.

SENIOR TRAINER 18-10. The battalion commander or his representative (battalion executive officer [XO] or S-3) with the assistance of the battalion/squadron Master Gunner develops, designs, and executes the training exercise. He collects all evaluation packets. He factors in his own observations and assesses the element’s overall training. He approves alibis and oversees the after action review (AAR).

SECTION/PLATOON EVALUATOR 18-11. Each section/platoon has one senior evaluator. At a minimum, he should have leadership experience in at least the level he is evaluating (section or platoon leader time). He observes overall section/platoon tasks, actions, and fire control and distribution. He gives the senior trainer his evaluations, observations, and an initial assessment. He also conducts the AAR.

ASSISTANT EVALUATOR 18-12. Each section/platoon containing rifle squad elements has at least one assistant evaluator. The assistant evaluator should have leadership experience in at least the level he is evaluating (squad or platoon leader time). He observes overall squad leader tasks, rifle squad and fire team actions, and fire control and distribution. He also helps ensure live-fire safety. He assesses the squads using the T&EOs. He provides input during the AAR.

GUNNERY EVALUATOR 18-13. Each section/platoon has one gunnery evaluator, who should be a Master Gunner or a qualified vehicle crew evaluator (VCE) that understands crew gunnery evaluation and target operations. The gunnery evaluator monitors his designated section/platoon and confirms target kills with the range tower. Another gunnery evaluator can work with the computer operator to enhance range operations. Squad target kills may be assessed by the assistant evaluator or the gunnery evaluator in the tower (if down range data is available).

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 18-14. Collective proficiency exercises and practice tables are a building block for section and platoon qualification. Proficiency tables are resourced for device-based gunnery. Sections and platoons should participate collectively in device-based training at least once before conducting live-fire training at that level. Practice tables are resourced for subcaliber (Abrams) training. Bradleys will fire full caliber 25mm ammunition. When they do qualify, sections and platoons follow the guidelines and standards in the applicable collective tasks and this chapter. z Section and platoon gunnery will be conducted in two phases, one during the day and one at night. z The S-3 and Master Gunner develop scenarios that require the sections and platoons to conduct designated core missions and their respective primary collective tasks. The engineer company Master Gunner will provide subject matter expertise (SME) to develop scenarios for engineer platoons. Live-fire gunnery presentations are incorporated into the FTs. This chapter identifies the minimum number of live-fire targets for each platform system during qualification; however, units may add targets if ammunition resources allow. z The S-3, S-2, and Master Gunner select vehicle and troop arrays that represent threat forces in the operational environment (OE) or the required training emphasis, based on the unit’s missionessential task list (METL). They also specify threat target types and engagement distances or

18-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Collective Gunnery

z z

z z z z z

z z

range bands as well as most-to-least-dangerous targets, based on the threat analysis and training emphasis. The end product is a threat template for section and platoon gunnery exercises. The S-3 develops an operation order (OPORD) that supports the missions. The Master Gunner prepares evaluation packets for each section or platoon. Each packet contains T&EOs and table assessment sheets. He arranges the contents in collective-task sequence. The Master Gunner coordinates all necessary resources and personnel to support the gunnery exercises. The sections and platoons use all organic equipment and weapon systems. Proficiency, practice, and qualification tables may be conducted on the same range; however, target presentation will not be in the same sequence. The computer addresses, individually, all troop targets for scoring. Troop targets will not be linked together to create multiple kills. All units equipped with the Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV), regardless of type (BFV, Bradley Fire Support team [BFIST], Engineer Bradley Fighting Vehicle [EBFV]) will use the Bradley ammunition and targetry allocations. Mounted Crew Served Weapons refers to all wheeled and tracked vehicles within the HBCT that mount either a caliber .50 machine gun, 7.62-mm machine gun or a MK19. For each rifle squad that will fire, no more than two area troop targets are presented simultaneously.

18-15. The commander may choose, prior to qualification, to organize his sections and platoons as either mixed or pure elements. Figure 18-3 details all of the possible HBCT section and platoon collective gunnery combinations.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

18-7

Chapter 18

Figure 18-3. Abrams and Bradley Crew Gunnery Tables II-VI

18-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Collective Gunnery

MINIMUM PROFICIENCY LEVELS 18-16. These engagements will be conducted on all proficiency exercises and collective tables. Commanders may choose to conduct one friendly or one neutral presentation, day and night. 18-17. These engagements will be conducted on all platforms: z One defensive engagement, day and night. z One offensive engagement, day and night. z One short-halt engagement, day and night. z One chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) engagement, day and night. z One sabot point target (one must be moving), day and night, 2,000 meters or greater (Abrams). z One main gun point target (other than canister), day and night, 800 meters or less. z One short-range coax target, day and night, 300 meters or less. z One 25-mm point target (BFV Operation Desert Storm [ODS] and below), day and night, 1,600 meters or greater (Bradley). z One call for fire engagement, day or night. 18-18. These engagements will be conducted on the armed High Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV): z Caliber .50/MK19: „ One point target, day and night, 900 meters or greater. „ One point target, day and night, 400 meters or less. z MK19. One area target, day or night, 1,200 meters or greater.

DIGITAL REQUIREMENTS 18-19. The standards listed below are the minimum requirement for digitally equipped units conducting Tables VII through XII. Commanders may add to the requirements. z Digital setup and overlays sent to all vehicles in the unit from the platoon/section leader as prefire requirement. z Commanders may choose to populate overlays with friendly/neutral presentations. z All vehicles in the unit must send and receive one digital message within the table. z The platoon/section leader must send and receive one digital message to the platoon leader/commander. Note. Digitally equipped units should assign a vehicle to populate friendly icons for Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) on engagements with friendly presentations to reinforce combat identification and situational awareness (SA) training.

CALL FOR FIRE REQUIREMENTS 18-20. Vehicle commanders (VC) must meet the following requirements, as a minimum, in support of the live-fire requirement to incorporate indirect fires: z The leader must develop a fire-support plan for his element. z The leader must initiate one call for fire mission, both day and night firing phases, on section and platoon GTs. z The grid or impact must be within 150 meters of the target area. z The leader must report battle damage assessment (BDA) to higher (digitally, if equipped).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

18-9

Chapter 18

MINIMUM REQUIRED TARGETS 18-21. Table 18-1 and Table 18-2 shows the minimum required targets for Tables VII through XII. Table 18-1. Tables VII, VIII, and IX minimum required targets per vehicle/squad Platform System

Abrams

Bradley

Unstabilized weapon platform (HMMWV, ASV)

Target

Minimum Target

Main gun

5

Machine gun

11 (one additional target will be made available for a canister engagement)

AP point

9

HE point

5

Coax point

5

TOW

1 (per table)

Squad targets

37 (individual silhouettes)

Point

6

Table 18-2. Tables X, XI, and XII minimum required targets per vehicle/squad Platform System

Abrams

Bradley

Unstabilized Weapon Platform (HMMWV, ASV)

Target

Minimum Target

Main gun

5

Machine gun

11

AP point

9

HE point

5

Coax point

5

TOW

1 (per table)

Infantry targets

37 (individual silhouettes)

Point

6

PREREQUISITES 18-22. Sections and platoons must complete these prerequisite activities before conducting a live-fire gunnery exercise: z All crew members (including the platoon leader’s backup crew member for mechanized infantry) must have passed the Gunnery Skills Test (GST) and GT I within the previous three months (six months for reserve component [RC] units). z All vehicle crews must have qualified as a crew on their respective Table VI within the previous six months. z All rifle squad members must have qualified on their individual weapons within the previous six months. z Rifle squads must have qualified on Rifle Table VI within the previous six months.

18-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Collective Gunnery

z z

Engineer squads must have qualified as a squad on Engineer Qualification Table VIII within the previous six months. BFIST crews must have completed the fire support team (FIST) certification exercises within the previous six months.

SECTION II – SECTION GUNNERY

TABLE VII–SECTION PROFICIENCY EXERCISE PURPOSE 18-23. Table 18-3, Table VII introduces crews and squads to fire and maneuver as a section. It is a device-based exercise that focuses on conducting battle drills. The objective is to develop proficiency working as either a pure or combined arms section. Table 18-3. Table VII–Section Proficiency Exercise TASK:

Conduct selected collective tasks while engaging a threat force during both day and night operations. CONDITIONS: Given the following: z A fully equipped maneuver element section. z MILES (PGS for Bradleys). z Allocated training ammunition. z Full-size or scaled targets. z OPORD. Note. Target presentation must adhere to the minimum proficiency levels for collective tables. STANDARDS: Section must achieve an overall rating of Needs Practice (P).

AMMUNITION 18-24. Table 18-4, Table VII will be conducted using the device-based training method for Abrams tanks. Bradleys and unstabilized weapon platforms will conduct this table dry if Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System (MILES) is not available for a particular weapon system (MK19). At no time will blank ammunition and live ammunition be fired on the same range. Table 18-4. Table VII–Ammunition allocations per vehicle Vehicle

Abrams

Bradley

Unstabilized Weapon Platform (HMMWV, ASV)

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Allocations per Vehicle

120mm

MILES

Caliber .50 blank

5 0 rounds with MILES

7.62mm blank

150 rounds with MILES

25mm AP

PGS or MILES

25mm HE

PGS or MILES

7.62mm blank

PGS or 200 rounds with MILES

TOW ATWESS

PGS or 1 round with MILES

Squad individual weapons

Blank ammunition

Caliber .50 blank

350 rounds with MILES

MK19 40mm

DRY

7.62mm blank

100 rounds with MILES

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

18-11

Chapter 18

TABLE VIII–SECTION PRACTICE PURPOSE 18-25. Table 18-5, Table VIII prepares the section for qualification. The objective is to enhance the skills developed in Table VII in preparation for Table IX. Table 18-5. Table VIII–Section Practice TASK:

Conduct selected collective tasks while engaging a threat force during both day and night operations. CONDITIONS: Given the following: z A fully equipped maneuver element section. z Caliber .50 inbore device for Abrams. z Allocated training ammunition. z Full-size or scaled targets. z OPORD. Note. Scoring of target presentation must adhere to the MPL for collective tables. STANDARDS: Section must achieve an overall rating of Needs Practice (P).

AMMUNITION 18-26. Table 18-6, Table VIII will be conducted live-fire subcaliber for Abrams and full-caliber main gun for Bradleys. Table 18-6. Table VIII–Ammunition allocations per vehicle Vehicle

Abrams

Bradley

Ammunition

Allocations per Vehicle

Caliber .50 SLAP-T

8 rounds

Caliber .50

DRY

7.62mm

DRY

25mm AP

24 rounds

25mm HE

24 rounds

7.62mm

DRY

TOW

DRY

Squad individual weapons

Ball and tracer ammunition based on resources available and targets presented

Caliber .50 Unstabilized Weapon Platform MK19 40mm (HMMWV, ASV) 7.62mm

18-12

DRY DRY DRY

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Collective Gunnery

TABLE IX–SECTION QUALIFICATION PURPOSE 18-27. Section qualification evaluates the section’s ability to execute collective tasks in a tactical live-fire environment. Collective task evaluations and target destruction measure the section’s combat proficiency. All elements within the section are integrated and evaluated on their ability to fight as a cohesive maneuver force. z The section must meet all prerequisites described in Section I. z Section qualification must be conducted live-fire using full-caliber ammunition. z Sections must qualify Table IX as a prerequisite to Tables X, XI and XII (see Table 18-7). Table 18-7. Table IX–Section Qualification TASK:

Conduct selected collective tasks while engaging a threat force during both day and night operations.

CONDITIONS:

Given the following: z A fully equipped maneuver element section. z Allocated training ammunition. z Full-size targets. z OPORD.

Note. Scoring of target presentation must adhere to the minimum proficiency levels for collective tables. STANDARDS: Section must achieve an overall rating of Needs Practice (P).

AMMUNITION 18-28. Table 18-8, Table IX will be conducted full-caliber live-fire. Table 18-8. Table IX–Ammunition allocations per vehicle Vehicle

Abrams

Bradley

Unstabilized Weapon Platform (HMMWV, ASV)

3 September 2009

Ammunition

Allocations per Vehicles

120-mm TPCSDS-T

7 rounds

120-mm Canister

1 round (fired by only one tank per section)

Caliber .50

200 rounds

7.62mm

350 rounds

25mm AP

72 rounds

25mm HE

40 rounds

7.62mm

250 rounds

TOW

1 missile

Squad individual weapons

Ball and tracer ammunition based on resources available and targets presented

Caliber .50

300 rounds

MK19 40mm

64 rounds

7.62mm (if equipped)

300 rounds

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

18-13

Chapter 18

SECTION TABLE EXAMPLES 18-29. Figure 18-4 through Figure 18-6 describes examples of pure and mixed section engagements. Mission: Task: Task: Task:

Attack (Day Phase) Conduct Assembly Area Activities Conduct Tactical Movement Destroy an Inferior Force FT: 2 T-90s, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads Task: React to Chemical/Biological Attack Task: Conduct an Overwatch/Support by Fire (FT) 3 T-90s, 2 armed trucks, 2 rifle squads, 1 RPG team

Mission: Task: Task: Task:

Defend (Night Phase) Conduct a Rearm and Resupply Conduct Troop-Leading Procedures Conduct a Platoon Defense (FT) 3 T-90s, 1 BMP-3, 3 rifle squads, 2 RPG teams Task: Conduct Tactical Movement Figure 18-4. Section pure (armor)

Mission: Task: Task: Task:

Move/Generic (Day Phase) Conduct Troop-Leading Procedures Conduct a Tactical Road March Execute Actions on Contact/Take Action on Contact (FT) Iteration 1: 2 T-90s, 2 BMP-3s, 1 BRDM-2, 1 RPG team, 2 rifle squads Iteration 2: 3 BMP-3s, 2 rifle squads Task: React to Indirect Fire Drill Task: React to Chemical/Biological Attack/React to a Chemical Attack

Mission: Task: Task: Task:

Stability/Support (Night Phase) Conduct a Rearm and Resupply/Perform Resupply Operations Conduct Area Security/Conduct a Security Patrol Support Roadblock/Checkpoint Operations/Establish a Checkpoint (FT) Iteration 1: 1 T-90, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 3 rifle squads Iteration 2: 3 BMP-3s, 1 armed truck, 2 rifle squads, 2 RPG teams Task: Conduct an Overwatch/Support by Fire/Conduct a Raid (FT) Iteration 1: 2 T-90s, 1 armed truck, 2 rifle squads, 1 RPG team Iteration 2: 3 BMP-3s, 2 armed trucks, 2 rifle squads, 2 RPG teams Task: Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Activities Figure 18-5. Section mixed (1 Abrams/2 Bradley with 1 rifle squad)

18-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Collective Gunnery

Mission: Task: Task: Task:

Attack (Day Phase) Conduct Assembly Area Activities Conduct Tactical Movement Destroy an Inferior Force/Attack an Inferior Force (FT) 2 T-90s, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads Task: React to Chemical/Biological Attack Task: Conduct an Overwatch/Support by Fire/Conduct Overwatch (FT) 2 T-90s, 2 armed trucks, 2 rifle squads, 1 RPG team Task: Conduct Target Acquisition Indirect-Fire Targets: 3 T-90s, 2 BMP-3s

Mission: Task: Task: Task:

Move/Screen (Night Phase) Conduct a Rearm and Resupply/Rearm and Resupply Conduct a Tactical Road March Execute Actions on Contact/Disengage from Threat Contact (FT) 1 BMP-3, 1 armed truck, 3 rifle squads Task: Conduct a Screen (FT) 1 BMP-3, 2 armed trucks Task: Conduct Target Acquisition Indirect-Fire Targets: 2 T-90s, 3 armed trucks Task: Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Activities/Perform Consolidation and Reorganization Figure 18-6. Combined arms section (1 Abrams/2 unstabilized weapon platforms/1 BFIST)

SECTION III – PLATOON GUNNERY

TABLE X–PLATOON PROFICIENCY EXERCISE 18-30. Table 18-9, Table X introduces sections and squads to fire and maneuver as a platoon. It is a device-based exercise that focuses on conducting battle drills. The objective is to develop proficiency working as an integrated platoon. Table 18-9. Table X–Platoon Proficiency Exercise TASK: CONDITIONS:

Conduct selected collective tasks while engaging a threat force during both day and night operations. Given the following: z z z z z z

A fully equipped maneuver element platoon. MILES. PGS for Bradleys (MILES if PGS is not available). Allocated training ammunition. Full-size or scaled targets. OPORD.

Note. Scoring of target presentation must adhere to the minimum proficiency levels for collective tables. STANDARDS: Platoon must achieve an overall rating of Needs Practice (P).

AMMUNITION 18-31. Table 18-10, Table X will be conducted device-based using the device-based training method for Abrams and Bradleys. Armed HMMWVs will conduct this table dry if MILES is not available for a particular weapon system (MK19). At no time will blank and live ammunition be fired on the same range.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

18-15

Chapter 18

Table 18-10. Table X–Ammunition allocations per vehicle Vehicle

Abrams

Bradley

Ammunition

Allocations per Vehicle

120-mm

MILES

Caliber .50 blank

50 rounds with MILES

7.62-mm blank

150 rounds with MILES

25mm AP

PGS or MILES

25mm HE

PGS or MILES

7.62-mm blank

PGS or 200 rounds with MILES

TOW ATWESS

PGS or 1 missile with MILES

Squad individual weapons

Blank ammunition

Caliber .50 blank Unstabilized Weapon Platform MK19 40mm (HMMWV, ASV) 7.62mm blank

350 rounds with MILES DRY 100 rounds with MILES

TABLE XI–PLATOON PRACTICE 18-32. Table 18-11, Table XI prepares the platoon for qualification. The objective is to enhance the skills developed in Table X in preparation for Table XII. Table 18-11. Table XI–Platoon Practice TASK: CONDITIONS:

Conduct selected collective tasks while engaging a threat force during both day and night operations. Given the following: z z z z z

A fully equipped maneuver element platoon. Caliber .50 inbore device for Abrams. Allocated training ammunition. Full-size or scaled targets. OPORD.

Note. Scoring of target presentation must adhere to the minimum proficiency levels for collective tables. STANDARDS: Platoon must achieve an overall rating of Needs Practice (P) and meet all minimum requirements stated in Section II.

18-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Collective Gunnery

AMMUNITION 18-33. Table 18-12, Table XI will be conducted using the live-fire subcaliber training for Abrams. Bradleys will conduct this table with full-caliber main gun ammunition. Table 18-12. Table XI–Ammunition allocations per vehicle Vehicle

Abrams

Bradley

Ammunition

Allocations per Vehicle

Caliber .50 SLAP-T

8 rounds

Caliber .50

DRY

7.62mm

DRY

25mm AP

24 rounds

25mm HE

24 rounds

7.62mm

DRY

TOW

DRY

Squad individual weapons

Ball and tracer ammunition based on resources available and targets presented

Caliber .50 Unstabilized Weapon Platform MK19 40mm (HMMWV, ASV) 7.62mm

DRY DRY DRY

TABLE XII–PLATOON QUALIFICATION 18-34. Platoon qualification evaluates the platoon’s ability to execute collective tasks in a tactical live-fire environment (see Table 18-13). Collective task evaluations and target destruction measure the platoon’s combat proficiency. All elements within the platoon are integrated and evaluated on their ability to fight as a cohesive maneuver force. z The platoon must meet all prerequisites described in Section I. z Platoon qualification must be conducted live-fire using full-caliber ammunition. Table 18-13. Table XII–Platoon Qualification TASK: CONDITIONS:

Conduct selected collective tasks while engaging a threat force during both day and night operations. Given the following: z z z z

A fully equipped maneuver element platoon. Allocated training ammunition. Full-size targets. OPORD.

Note. Scoring of target presentation must adhere to the minimum proficiency levels for collective tables. STANDARDS: Platoon must achieve an overall rating of Needs Practice (P).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

18-17

Chapter 18

AMMUNITION

18-35. Table 18-14, Table XII will be conducted full-caliber live-fire. Table 18-14. Table XII–Ammunition allocations per vehicle Vehicle

Abrams

Bradley

Unstabilized Weapon Platform (HMMWV, ASV)

Ammunition

Allocations per Vehicle

120-mm TPCSDS-T

7 rounds

Caliber .50

200 rounds

7.62mm

350 rounds

25mm AP

72 rounds

25mm HE

40 rounds

7.62mm

250 rounds

TOW

1 missile

Squad individual weapons

Ball and tracer ammunition based on resources available and targets presented

Caliber .50

300 rounds

MK19 40mm

64 rounds

7.62mm

300 rounds

PLATOON TABLE EXAMPLES 18-36. Figure 18-7 through Figure 18-9 describes examples of pure and combined arms platoon engagements. Mission: Task: Task: Task: Task:

Task:

Task:

Task: Task:

Offense (Day Phase) Occupy an Assembly Area Conduct Troop-Leading Procedures Conduct Tactical Movement Take Action on Contact (FT) Iteration 1: 2 BMP-3s, 1 BRDM-2, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads Iteration 2: 1 BMP-3, 2 BTR-80s, 1 armed truck, 1 RPG team, 1 rifle squads Conduct an Attack (FT) Iteration 1: 1 BMP-3, 1 BRDM, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads Iteration 2: 1 BMP-3, 2 BTR-80s, 2 armed trucks, 1 RPG team, 2 rifle squads Clear a Trench Line (FT) Iteration 1: 1 BMP-3, 1 BRDM-2, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 3 rifle squads Iteration 2: 1 BMP-3, 1 BTR-80, 1 armed truck, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads React to a Chemical Attack Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Figure 18-7. Platoon pure (infantry)

18-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Collective Gunnery

Mission: Task: Task: Task:

Defense (Night Phase) Conduct Tactical Movement Report Tactical Information Conduct a Defense (FT) Iteration 1: 2 BMP-3s, 1 BRDM-2, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 3 rifle squads Iteration 2: 1 BMP-3, 2 BTR-80s, 1 armed truck, 1 RPG team, 3 rifle squads Iteration 3: 2 BMP-3s, 1 BTR-80, 1 T-90, 2 rifle squads Task: Employ Fire Support Indirect Fire Targets: 2 T-90s, 3 BMP-3s >3,500 meters Task: Perform Resupply Operations Figure 18-7. Platoon pure (infantry) (continued)

Mission: Task: Task: Task:

Move/Reconnaissance and Security (Day Phase) Conduct Troop-Leading Procedures Conduct a Convoy Escort Execute Actions on Contact/Take Action on Contact (FT) Iteration 1: 3 T-90s, 1 BMP-3, 2 BRDM-2s, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads Iteration 2: 2 T-90s, 1 BMP-3, 1 BTR-80, 2 armed trucks, 2 rifle squads Task: Conduct an Attack by Fire/Attack by Fire (FT) Iteration 1: 3 T-90s, 1 BMP-3, 2 BRDM-2s, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads Iteration 2: 2 BMP-3s, 2 BTR-80s, 2 armed trucks, 1 RPG team, 2 rifle squads Task: Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Activities

Mission: Stability/Support (Night Phase) Task: Conduct Area Security/Conduct a Security Patrol Task: Respond to a Civil Disturbance/React to a Civil Disturbance (FT) Iteration 1: 2 armed trucks, 1 RPG team, 2 rifle squads Iteration 2: 3 armed trucks, 2 rifle squads, 1 RPG team Task: Support Roadblock/Checkpoint Operations/Establish a Checkpoint (FT) 2 BMP-3s, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 1 rifle squad Task: Conduct a Rearm and Resupply/Perform Resupply Operations Figure 18-8. Platoon mixed (2 Abrams/2 Bradleys with 2 rifle squads)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

18-19

Chapter 18

Mission: Task: Task: Task:

Attack (Day Phase) Conduct Assembly Area Activities Conduct Tactical Movement Destroy an Inferior Force/Attack an Inferior Force (FT) 2 T-90s, 1 BMP-3, 3 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads Task: React to Chemical/Biological Attack Task: Conduct an Overwatch/Support by Fire (FT) Iteration 1: 2 T-90s, 1 armed truck, 2 rifle squads, 1 RPG team Iteration 2: 2 T-90s, 1 armed truck, 1 RPG team Task: Conduct Target Acquisition Indirect Fire Targets: (3) T-90s, (2) BMP-3s

Mission: Task: Task: Task:

Move/Screen (Night Phase) Conduct a Rearm and Resupply/Rearm and Resupply Conduct a Tactical Road March Execute Actions on Contact/Disengage from Threat Contact (FT) 2 T-90s, 1 BMP-3, 2 armed trucks, 3 rifle squads, 1 RPG team Task: Conduct a Screen (FT) Iteration 1: 2 BMP-3s, 2 armed trucks, 2 rifle squads Iteration 2: 1 BMP-3, 1 armed truck, 1 rifle squad Task: Conduct Target Acquisition Indirect Fire Targets: 2 T-90s, 3 armed trucks Task: Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Activities/Perform Consolidation and Reorganization

Figure 18-9. Combined Arms Platoon (2 Abrams/2 unstabilized weapon platforms/1 BFIST)

18-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Chapter 19

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise Chapter 19 covers the Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise (CALFEX). The CALFEX is the culmination of weapon systems training at the company team level. It combines the various capabilities of multiple weapon platforms into one exercise and trains them to perform their primary combat missions in a realistic, live-fire environment.

Contents Section I – Conduct of the Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise .......................... 19-1 Concept ............................................ 19-1 Prerequisites ..................................... 19-2 Training Philosophy .......................... 19-2 Section II – Planning Guidelines ............ 19-2 Weapon System Considerations ....... 19-3 Personnel Requirements ................ 19-11 Section III – Training ............................. 19-12 Progressive Training ....................... 19-12 Key Personnel Training................... 19-13 Observer/Controller and Evaluator Preparation ..................................... 19-13

Section IV – Execution .......................... 19-13 Phase One – Pre-Live-Fire ............. 19-13 Phase Two – Tactical Movement, Mission Execution ........................... 19-14 Phase Three – Reorganization and Reconstitution ................................. 19-14 Section V – Evaluation .......................... 19-15 Standards for Evaluation ................ 19-15 Scoring ........................................... 19-17

SECTION I – CONDUCT OF THE COMBINED ARMS LIVE-FIRE EXERCISE

CONCEPT 19-1. A CALFEX is a costly, resource-intensive exercise in which combined arms teams, or task forces, maneuver and employ organic and supporting weapon systems. It is the most realistic measure of combined arms combat readiness and should be an integral part of every unit’s training program. Commanders must be aware of the limitations of the CALFEX, particularly in regard to flank maneuvering, and firing on livefire ranges. Available terrain will rarely support this type of maneuver. Use of nonfiring maneuver areas, in conjunction with live-firing ranges will assist in promoting realism as well as adding tactical training not possible on live-fire ranges alone. Commanders should use live-fire exercises (LFX) to train certain aspects of combat readiness, such as distribution, coordination, and synchronization of fires. Commands should try to link multiple digital multipurpose range complexes (DMPRC), coordination of all six warfighting functions available should be synchronized, coordinated, and controlled whether at the same ranges or multiple facilities or a variety of live-fire ranges for maximum training value whenever possible. 19-2. For an exercise of this nature to be effective, it must involve detailed planning and careful resourcing. Supplementary missions and a wide range of supporting tasks can be integrated into the exercise. Resources, including ammunition, personnel, equipment, maneuver areas and firing ranges must be programmed and coordinated early in the planning process to ensure that the exercise can be conducted day and night.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

19-1

Chapter 19

Notes. This information is not intended to supersede the live-fire program at the National Training Center (NTC), but to compliment it. Certain planning aspects described herein address common constraints at Army posts worldwide. These same constraints may be relaxed at the NTC because of the nature of terrain and to enhance realism. All reports, orders, and graphics will be sent digitally, along with backup hard copies. During contact, however, FM will be the primary means of communications. Digital communications will continue as soon as the situation permits.

PREREQUISITES 19-3. Individual and crew-level weapon system proficiency is a critical prerequisite to the effectiveness of CALFEX. It is required that participating platoons be qualified on Combat Table XII or equivalent platoon qualification prior to a CALFEX. Command elements (platoon leaders; platoon sergeants; sustainment unit commanders; and company, battalion, brigade, and division commanders) must successfully participate in and complete a fire coordination exercise (FCX) prior to a CALFEX. Note. DA Pam 350-38 provides the frequency of resourced events.

TRAINING PHILOSOPHY 19-4. Command elements (battalion, brigade, or division) participate in all aspects of planning, execution, and evaluation of CALFEX participants. They receive reports from the maneuvering company team, issue fragmentary orders (FRAGO), portray the friendly and enemy situation throughout the battlefield, and coordinate the maneuver and support of sustainment unit elements not under the company’s span of control. If the exercise actively integrates sustainment tasks, the command elements provide command and control and direct and support resupply and reconstitution. A CALFEX must have a minimum of three different weapon system platforms participating in the event (such as Abrams, Bradley, and mortars). 19-5. The primary trainer during a company team CALFEX is the battalion commander. His participation reinforces the chain of command and provides first-hand observation of the subordinate staff, commanders, and supporting assets. A CALFEX gives units the opportunity to accomplish multi-echelon, combined arms training and evaluation throughout the task force. 19-6. The training objective of a CALFEX is to accomplish a designated combat mission (attack, defend, movement to contact) with live ammunition, a realistic target array, and required support and sustainment unit assets. Standards are found in applicable Combined Arms Training Strategies (CATS) for the selected mission, as modified by local conditions and the commander’s guidance. 19-7. The training assessment of the unit(s) is important in determining the tasks to be trained during a CALFEX, as well as all preliminary training, which should precede all exercises. z What is the required level of unit proficiency? z What is the current level of training? z What training is necessary?

SECTION II – PLANNING GUIDELINES 19-8. A CALFEX is a major training event. To be realistic and effective, it must be well planned and well supported with specific consideration given to each unit and weapon system to be employed. The number of inherent supporting missions and tasks that are exercised may vary according to a number of planning factors, such as the number and types of weapon systems used, the nature of the training land and ranges available, and weather conditions anticipated for the exercise. The capabilities of the ranges (target pits,

19-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise

lifting devices, control console, range limits, weapons authorized, freedom of maneuver, and range time available) have an impact on the conduct of the exercise. 19-9. Long-range planning considerations are crucial in the allocation of major resources, identification of participants, and the prerequisite training and qualification needed prior to a CALFEX. 19-10. Short-range planning includes the identification and allocation of ammunition, petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL), equipment and support personnel. Coordination of facilities and resources is a continuous process through execution. Scenario development is initiated during the midterm and finalized during the short-term planning phase. Prerequisite individual and collective training continues throughout the planning phases. 19-11. Detailed planning by the control headquarters focuses on the training objectives and development of the scenario. The mission specified by the control headquarters may be the same primary mission for each company, or it may vary between companies based on their mission-essential task list (METL) assessments. The inherent tasks to be exercised may be specified in the commander’s initial guidance, or developed as the scenario is designed. 19-12. The S-2 develops the appropriate threat array based on threat doctrine, potential theaters of operation and contingency tasks. The participating units’ S-1, S-4, battalion executive officer (XO) and battalion maintenance officers (BMO) provide the estimate of troops and equipment available for the exercise. The identification of sustainment unit assets, internal support capabilities, and external tasking requirements is crucial in the early stages of a CALFEX planning. 19-13. Once the control headquarters approves the scenario concept, the scenario is drafted and submitted for the approval of range control. The firing overlay is included with the scenario. From the scenario, the operation order (OPORD) and control plans are developed, and the detailed schedule is finalized and published. 19-14. The scenario is written in narrative format with key cues and responses in operational terms. Different installations vary in the degree of detail required. As much freedom of maneuver as possible should be retained for the maneuver commanders to execute training effectively with the utmost realism. 19-15. A friendly/neutral presentation, to be presented within the CALFEX scenario, is recommended to further enforce fire control and facilitate the training of established anti-fratricide measures. 19-16. Use of urban clusters (discussed in Chapter 13) during the CALFEX can enhance the realism of training and provide better training opportunities for dismounted infantry operations. 19-17. Planners must not underestimate the time and resources required in the planning and conduct of a CALFEX.

WEAPON SYSTEM CONSIDERATIONS 19-18. Each unit, with its specific weapon systems, involved in CALFEX must be included in the planning process. The following is a discussion of the key considerations for the different types of units. 19-19. The unprecedented ground mobility of the M1-series tank and M2/M3 Bradley teams necessitates the design of deep ranges in order to make maximum use of their advanced capabilities. Targets on ranges should be heated to facilitate acquisition by weapon platforms that are equipped with thermal optics. If local conditions require range fan markers, they should also be heat-enhanced. 19-20. The use of screening smoke (to include thermal-defeating agents), both friendly and enemy, must be considered in planning. Friendly use is a function of indirect-fire support planning as well as the employment of on-board smoke grenade launchers and vehicle smoke generators. Enemy use is developed in conjunction with the target array and in accordance with (IAW) threat doctrine. This includes the assumption that the threat will mix chemical agents with smoke, forcing the exercising unit to operate in a protected posture to survive and accomplish the mission. The possibility of smoke (as well as chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear [CBRN] simulations) drifting into adjacent ranges, roads, training areas, and civilian land must be dealt with according to local procedures.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

19-3

Chapter 19

MECHANIZED INFANTRY 19-21. As mechanized infantry employs a wide variety of organic weapon systems, the exercise must include— z Long-range targets for tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire-guided (TOW) missiles and 120-mm tank main gun. z Medium-range targets for 25-mm, caliber .50 and 7.62-mm automatic weapons, Javelin, and MK19. z Close-in targets for traditional squad weapons. z Threat targetry movement while on the offense. z Depleting arrays. z Threats targets IAW TC 25-8. z Friendly targets with combat identification panels (CIP) panels. z Neutral presentations. z Maximum surface danger zone (SDZ). 19-22. For dismounted maneuver and exposed crewmen, the requirements for overwatching fires must be considered. (For example, hazards of 120mm target practice cone stabilized discarding sabot tracer (TPCSDS-T), 25-mm armor-piercing discarding sabot with tracer (APDS-T), antitank guided missile (ATGM), grenades, claymores, MK19, M203, and firing port weapons must be given special consideration.) When exercising ATGM weapon systems, the low allocation and high cost of training and service ammunition may be overcome by using the corresponding Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System (MILES) Combat Vehicle System (CVS)/Precision Gunnery System (PGS) equipment. 19-23. Defilade positions for fighting vehicles may be required, depending on the scenario, facilities, and tasks to be trained. Also, improved fighting positions may be required for dismounted personnel.

ARMOR 19-24. With tanks, a key consideration is freedom of maneuver. On many high-technology ranges, roads have been constructed to protect wiring systems and contain the maneuver unit within the range boundaries. Such facilities have a recognized limiting effect on freedom of maneuver. The design of the target array and the use of obstacles can facilitate a realistic scenario in a constrained environment. 19-25. Another element of the maneuver equation is the extent to which cross fires and overwatching fires can be used. Cross fires are often limited on training ranges, precluding attacks on the flanks of objectives and into the flanks of target arrays. Long-range, high-velocity rounds such as tank cannon projectiles, 25mm, and missiles are most restricted in this regard. The doctrinal application of the cross-fire control technique seeks to attack targets from the flank. Ways to incorporate this technique involve the following: z Limit available positions that maneuvering vehicles may occupy. z Present concentrated target groups (correlated to engagement area) that can be engaged safely using cross fires. z Administratively control the presentation sequence to preclude exposing targets to an element that would result in a violation of the approved SDZ. z Emplace flank vehicle targets and firing (overwatch) positions in a way that simulates trapping the opposing forces (OPFOR) in a multiunit cross fire, where the other units are notional. 19-26. Tanks main gun rounds and other weapons may not be fired over the heads of unprotected troops, as outlined in DA PAM 385-63. Discarding sabot rounds should not be fired overhead if armored personnel carriers or other lightly armored vehicles are in the down-range field of view of the firing tank (the discarding sabots may penetrate the vehicle). Buttoned-up vehicles may maneuver parallel to the line of fire to a certain extent. The exact limit of advance is determined by the SDZ for the overwatch element, and corresponds to a 15-degree fan outside the limit of fire. An additional SDZ extends farther to the flank

19-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise

when firing sabot rounds (or when unprotected troops are maneuvering down range). Dimensions of SDZs are given in DA PAM 385-63.

LASER SAFE DESIGNATION 19-27. The procedures for designating a range facility laser safe are discussed in DA PAM 385-63, Chapter 19. All laser devices should be treated as direct-fire weapons.

SCOUTS 19-28. Maneuver battalion and cavalry scouts should be integrated into both offensive and defensive scenarios to exercise security and reconnaissance missions. This may be accomplished independently or in conjunction with a company team exercise. If scouts are to be deployed forward of uploaded weapon systems, their safety is paramount.

ARMY AVIATION 19-29. When aviation assets are to be integrated, the range control office requires enough lead time to coordinate airspace management issues with the installation airspace management office. The battalion task force headquarters will assume operational control (OPCON), approve their maneuver, and coordinate the aviation element and ground maneuver company team. To fully exploit the mobility and stand-off range advantage of aviation assets, increased range depth must be considered when developing the fires synchronization matrix. 19-30. The use of aviation requires additional SDZ applications, as outlined in AR 385-63, Chapter 13. They may fire from the flanks of ground maneuver units, or between them, but not from their rear (no overhead fire). When ATGMs or aerial rockets are to be fired, the backblast area must be considered. If helicopters are to maneuver down range from the ground element, their safety must be considered. 19-31. If Hellfire is being used in the indirect mode, special consideration must be given to the locations of the firing aircraft and the designator. The SDZ for the Hellfire includes a seeker angle 20 degrees to either side of the gun-target line. The designator may not be located anywhere within the seeker angle, and preferably would be masked from the launch point by terrain or foliage. 19-32. If Joint Air Attack Team (JAAT) operations are planned, the fire support officer (FSO), forward air controller (FAC), and air battle captain (ABC) exercise the necessary command and control measures. While the aviation systems involved are entirely out of the sphere of control of the maneuver company team commander, the event may be integrated into the scenario without interfering with the flow of the exercise. This is a valid training objective for Army aviation units, close air support (CAS) pilots, and battalion fire support elements. Note. Most installations have an Air Force representative (Joint Tactical Air Controller [JTAC]) that assists in the planning of CAS.

FIELD ARTILLERY 19-33. Field artillery (FA) units may support a CALFEX as an externally evaluated exercise or as internally evaluated sustainment training. The internally evaluated sustainment training requires greater coordination between the maneuver and FA headquarters in the planning stage, so that required FA tasks are included in the exercise. The fires battalion typically incorporates CALFEX support into its field training and LFXs. CALFEX offers the FA commander an opportunity to observe and evaluate his subordinate battalion fire support elements and fire support teams (FIST). If necessary, the firing points that support the CALFEX range must be identified, and the sequence of events may have to allow for FA registration fires. The CALFEX is another opportunity for the brigade and battalion commanders to collectively train and evaluate the brigade’s fire support system as described in Chapter 13.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

19-5

Chapter 19

19-34. The impact area must be large enough (within the limits of local range constraints) to accommodate the adjustment of indirect fires. Units will not normally be allowed to maneuver into permanent artillery impact areas because of the possibility of unexploded ordnances (UXO). Temporary impact areas may be established, if necessary but cannot be used if dud producing munitions will be fired. With the concurrence of range control, certified ammunition (INERT) may be fired into a temporary impact area that is to be maneuvered through later. Participants should be alert to the possibility of duds and take appropriate action if one is encountered. After the exercise is completed, the user clears the area, with the assistance of the explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) detachment. 19-35. Units may maneuver in proximity to indirect fires under certain conditions. Troops and vehicles involved in training may operate under the gun-target line in certain areas during firing. Armored vehicles may maneuver under air bursts if variable time (VT) or time fuses are used on certified ammunition, and if the firing data meet certain conditions explained in DA PAM 385-63, paragraph 11-4j. In this case, all downrange vehicles must remain buttoned up. 19-36. Waivers may be pursued to facilitate the maneuver of helicopters near and under the gun-target line and around the flanks of the SDZ; the key to imaginative training is detailed planning and coordination. 19-37. Personnel may occupy approved bunkers within 200 meters of impacting artillery in areas surrounding the impact area; however, this situation must be planned to fit into the CALFEX scenario and approved by range control. 19-38. As many variables become known, the supporting artillery unit can compute a relatively accurate buffer zone (safety diagram) for planning purposes. When constructing laser range danger fans for Copperhead employment, safety computations are especially critical (from the standpoint of eye-safe laser designator use). These data will have to be approved by the local range control office before the scenario is finalized. 19-39. The use of illumination and smoke and the employment of Copperhead should be incorporated into CALFEX fire support. The FIST chief must perform a detailed analysis of the terrain to support the company team commander’s scheme of maneuver, especially when employing Copperhead. The FIST chief should accompany the company team commander on his leader’s reconnaissance of the maneuver area. (Fire support planning and coordination are accomplished IAW FM 6-20. FM 6-30 provides a detailed explanation of Copperhead and the ground/vehicular laser locator designator [G/VLLD].)

MORTARS 19-40. When supporting a LFX, mortar firing points must be planned to avoid firing over the heads of troops. To increase the training benefit for mortar crews, the exercise should be planned to cause mortars to displace and provide continuous support. (Many of the safety considerations discussed for FA are applicable to mortars.) 19-41. As required by each installation, a certified safety officer must be on the mortar point. The mortar platoon/section leader and FSO must know the location of the maneuver units so they can make sure the SDZ is enforced with respect to the gun-target line. If the mortars are fired from direct lay, it is relatively easy to verify friendly unit positions.

CLOSE AIR SUPPORT 19-42. Employment of United States Air Force (USAF) assets requires a certified forward air controller to assume the responsibility for integrating tactical aircraft into the scenario. Considerations for employment include identification of friendly troops and the target area, and control of surface fires. SDZs are discussed in Air Force Instruction (AFI) 13-212. 19-43. When employed, the sorties should be allocated to the battalion task force and controlled by the unit’s FAC. Within the constraints of local range regulations, an airspace coordination area should be established to allow surface fires while CAS is employed. An alternative method is to apply CAS against a second-echelon battalion in a defensive scenario, or the main defensive belt or a reserve unit in an

19-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise

offensive scenario. If ingress is parallel to the gun-target line and the aircraft break away to the opposite side, airspace coordination is vastly simplified. (Overflight by participating aircraft before the exercise meets USAF regulatory guidance without disrupting the scenario.) Note. Most installations have an Air Force representative that assists in the planning of CAS.

AIR DEFENSE ARTILLERY 19-44. Missile systems (such as Stinger, Redeye) may be maneuvered on the range IAW the unit’s task organization; however, the availability of missiles is normally too low to facilitate live-fire as well as SDZ sizes. Also, air defense artillery (ADA) missile systems are more difficult to integrate into CALFEX. Therefore, it may be more effective to employ gun systems (Avenger, Bradley Fire Support Team [BFIST]). Note. If local conditions preclude live-fire, the supporting ADA unit should still maneuver with the combined arms team. 19-45. There are several alternatives to exercising ADA systems in CALFEX: z Missile systems may be exercised with tracker-trainer systems during assembly area or reconsolidation operations when the live-fire phase is not in progress, pursuant to local restrictions. Note. Radio-controlled miniature aerial targets (RC-MAT) are currently available. However, the constraints applicable to firing the ballistic aerial target system (BATS) could prove very cumbersome if integrated into the scenario. Until infrared-capable RC MATs are available, alternative (tracker-trainer) systems will continue to require live aircraft targets and will be difficult to employ without disrupting the remainder of the exercise. Future models of RC MATs will include an infrared source that provides a signature sufficient for tracker-trainer interface. z z

MILES/AGES (air-to-ground engagement system)/air defense (AD) equipment may be used (with laser-interfaced targets, if available). The Stinger Training Launch/Simulator (STLS) provides a method by which man-portable air defense system (MANPADS) teams can effectively train their primary mission in conjunction with a CALFEX. STLS replicates actual launch conditions, and fires a reusable, inert missile approximately 50 feet. This short range should accommodate 360-degree engagement on all facilities.

Note. MANPADS gunners will be required to avoid launching in the direction of dismounted personnel and thin-skinned vehicles, because of the possibility of injury or damage. Projectiles should be retrieved as soon as possible to avoid damage to the missile by armored vehicles.

z

Use of gun systems in a ground support role may be exercised, but the appropriate doctrinal conditions should be accurately portrayed. Gun systems may move with the company team and engage static helicopters or RC MATs. (Maneuver unit organic weapon systems may be used in an air defense role, if local conditions permit.)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

19-7

Chapter 19

Note. Caution must be exercised to ensure that the target remains within the appropriate range limit with respect to the firing weapons. Gun crews should be aware of their proximity to the remainder of the company team to ensure safe firing. A realistic technique is to cause the supporting gun systems to engage an RC MAT off to the side of the maneuver axis. This equates to an OPFOR aircraft attacking the friendly unit’s flank from a crossing air avenue of approach. The gun section leader must be prepared to maneuver his element to achieve a clear field of fire. Scenario cues may be used to facilitate the employment of air defense systems.

ENGINEERS 19-46. The extent and nature of engineer tasks are based, in part, on the type of scenario and range facility. The task force and engineer unit are involved in the planning, execution, and selection of the maneuver area prior to the occupation of the range facility.

Countermobility 19-47. Minefields, demolitions, and other obstacles should be planned in support of a defensive exercise. On some facilities, the actual emplacement of obstacles may be restricted for various reasons. If the obstacle is to be simulated, it must be emplaced (as much as the situation will allow) on an adjacent training area. Obstacles that are planned, resourced, and emplaced should be granted obstacle effect by increasing target engagement times and decreasing the array according to the type of obstacle. If demolition is authorized on the range, the required safety precautions must be strictly enforced. Except for Claymores used in defensive scenarios.

Survivability 19-48. Defilade and improved positions may already exist on some range facilities. If not, survivability may be exercised in the preparation of a defensive position, based on the priority of work established by the task force commander.

Mobility 19-49. In an offensive scenario, obstacle-breaching tasks may require the employment of organic or supporting engineer equipment and offensive munitions. Threat doctrine for obstacle employment should be reflected in the scenario and target array. The obstacle should be realistic, but not so much that it overwhelms the unit. It must key certain responses, resulting in certain actions to reduce or bypass the obstacle. Safety constraints for any munitions planned in the operation (bangalore torpedoes, line charges, mine-clearing line charges [MICLIC], M908 high-explosive obstacle reducing with tracer [HE-OR-T]) must be briefed to all participants (for example, if the MICLIC is to be used to breach a minefield, or an obstacle reducing (OR) round is to be used to breech a concrete wall all personnel within 1,000 meters and 70 meters on either side of the gun-target line must be buttoned up in a combat vehicle.) The engineers maneuver with the company team as appropriate to the scenario. Note. Each range facility has authorized dig areas for training units. Always refer to the local range standing operating procedures (SOP) for conditions and waiver requests to support training.

Ground Surveillance Radar 19-50. Radar requires some form of movement to track. Moving targets may be used to provide such a radar signature. In an offensive scenario, ground surveillance radar (GSR) may be used to vector friendly elements. Target acquisition and tracking reports that GSR would normally provide for long-range or flank surveillance might be as effectively portrayed by inputs from the incident list. If GSR is employed, the protection of the system and personnel should be considered in positioning, setup, breakdown, and

19-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise

maneuver to avoid detracting from the firing unit’s operation. GSR should be employed to supplement the unit’s limited-visibility operation, and can also be used to monitor range boundaries.

Sustainment Unit Support 19-51. The extent to which sustainment unit support is portrayed is again determined from training objectives. Ammunition and fuel should be dispensed in the tactical assembly area prior to the exercise. The company combat trains should displace as appropriate in the scenario. If desired, some of the ammunition allocated may be prestocked in a secondary battle position for a defensive scenario, or maintained with a logistics package to perform emergency resupply on the objective during consolidation. Ammunition redistribution should be an integral part of the tactical scenario. Broken-down vehicles or designated battle-damaged vehicles should be used to exercise maintenance and recovery crews in any phase of the exercise. Enemy prisoners of war (EPW) processing or casualty treatment should be exercised throughout the operation. 19-52. A decontamination exercise may also be integrated into the CALFEX during the reconsolidation/reorganization phase. This will facilitate the participation of CBRN units into the exercise. Simulation agents will provide realism in portraying a chemical environment. The simulation used must conform to local regulations. The decontamination exercise will require decontaminating apparatus, other decontaminators, spare chemical suits for exchange, and mask filters.

Ammunition Requirements 19-53. The ammunition requirements must conform to the allocations in DA Pam 350-38 for the current FY as much as possible. Ammunition is not resourced for CALFEX, therefore this ammunition must be provided through harvested ammunition and first round hit savings from previous gunnery tables (GT). The tables below depict recommended ammunition allocations. Table 19-1 through Table 19-4 are based on a general assessment of the level of support envisioned for a standard company team level exercise. These must be resourced from the existing allocation for evaluation or sustainment. DA Pam 350-38 represents rounds per weapon per exercise, and assumes one exercise per year by each system. Table 19-1 through Table 19-4 use an annual company team exercise as the base figure, with some sustainment units supporting multiple iterations. Table 19-1. Ammunition allocation for armor/cavalry units (per vehicle) SABOT TPCSDS-T

HEAT-TPT

Cal .50

7.62mm

SMK GRD/RP

MGSS

25mm TPDS-T

25mm TP-T

TOW

DODIC

C785/C520

C784/C511

A557

A131

G978

LA06

A940

A976

WH05

M1-series

3

-

200

200

4

20

-

-

-

M2/M3

-

-

-

200

16

0

24

24

1

Table 19-2. Ammunition allocation for mortar (per gun) HE

WP

ILLUM

HE

WP

ILLUM

ILLUM

HE

WP

DODIC

BA16

BA14

B647

C868

C870

C871

C625

C623/CA04

CA03

60mm

24

2

3

-

-

-

-

-

-

81mm

-

-

-

24

2

3

-

-

-

120mm

-

-

-

-

-

-

8

16

7

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

19-9

Chapter 19

Table 19-3. Ammunition allocation for artillery units (per bn/btry) HE

WP

ILLUM

SMOKE

HE

WP

ILLUM

SMOKE

DODIC

C445

C454

C449

C479

D544

D550

D505

D528

105 Btry 3X6

71

0

18

6

-

-

-

-

105 Bn 3X6

223

6

18

-

-

-

-

-

155 DS Btry 3X8

-

-

-

-

83

6

12

6

155 DS Bn 3X8

-

-

-

-

173

6

18

-

155 GS Btry 3X8

-

-

-

-

83

6

12

6

155 DS Btry 3X6

-

-

-

-

77

6

12

6

155 DS/GS Bn 3X6

-

-

-

-

173

6

18

-

155 GS Btry 3X6

-

-

-

-

83

6

12

-

155 CAV Btry 1X6

-

-

-

-

81

6

-

6

155 CAV Bn 1X6

-

-

-

-

76

6

16

155 SEP Btry 1X8

-

-

-

-

95

6

-

8

155 SEP Bn (LI) 1X8

-

-

-

-

77

6

18

-

Table 19-4. Ammunition allocation for infantry units (per gun) DODIC

A131

A059

A063

A557

AA11

A064

B519

B584

M16A2/M4

-

110

10

-

-

-

-

-

M21/24 Sniper Rifle

-

-

-

-

10

-

-

-

M249 SAW

-

-

-

-

-

200

-

-

M60/M240B

200

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

M2 HB

-

-

-

100

-

-

-

-

M203 GL

-

-

-

-

-

-

12

-

MK19

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

24

Note. This table is not all-inclusive. Refer to the appropriate chapter and weapon systems in DA Pam 350-38 for any questions concerning allocations of ammunition and pyrotechnics not covered in this table.

Range Requirements 19-54. Many military training areas have areas suitable for company-level LFXs. Digital multipurpose range complexes and supporting digital doctrine are under construction or programmed for most active training posts. The generic design concept for the DMPRC allows it to support a CALFEX; however, local conditions and final construction details may necessitate use of adjacent ranges and remote targets with the DMPRC to establish a realistic company-level exercise. 19-55. Optimally, a CALFEX range maneuver area would be 5 to 10 km deep, 3 to 5 km wide (possibly smaller for a defensive scenario), with multiple terrain features, and would allow for some cross and flanking fires. The target array should be capable of portraying a mechanized infantry company or tank company in the offense or a mechanized infantry company (-) with at least one platoon forward in the defense. The SDZ required could extend up to 25 km deep and 15 km wide. (This can be smaller if cross fires are limited and the terrain provides a backstop.) Appropriate sites should be available for the tactical operation center (TOC), battalion trains, after action review (AAR) site, and company team assembly areas (AA). The CALFEX range should be supported by suitable areas for a forward arming and refueling point (FARP), if attack helicopters are included, as well as mortar and FA firing points. Other areas may be required for decontamination exercises, convoy live-fires, incorporation of mount and other full spectrum training events to support the CALFEX.

19-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise

19-56. Range occupation will involve a series of administrative requirements. Unless the range has a hard-wired power system, batteries may be required for target lifters. The responsibility for servicing and emplacing targets and other administrative requirements will rest with a range support organization or the using unit. Local range regulations and FM 3-20.21 will assist the unit in establishing range responsibilities. The unit must identify its needs for targets, operators, target operator training, transportation, lift capability, and engineer support.

COMPOSITE SURFACE DANGER ZONES 19-57. A composite SDZ is an overlay of all the SDZs involved in a given exercise. It considers each type of weapon to be employed, the scheme of maneuver, and the resulting relationships between each firing position, firing maneuver boxes and groups of targets. It represents the worst case for each phase of the operation and is used to coordinate known constraints with realistic training. This process is somewhat tedious to carry out, but is a necessary step in detailed planning. 19-58. Templates of SDZs must be created for all weapons to be employed. These may be made using clear acetate, straight edge, compass, protractor, and the data in DA PAM 385-63. See Chapter 13 for instructions.

PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS 19-59. Typically, when firing a CALFEX, there will be an overall officer in charge (OIC) of the entire event, the range OIC. This OIC and his duties, responsibilities and prerequisites are outlined in DA PAM 385-63. The number and type of personnel required to support an exercise depend in part on local range requirements. Wherever possible, the existing command and control apparatus should accomplish the range control functions. The training unit chain of command (assisted by evaluator personnel) is responsible for overall range safety.

COMMAND AND CONTROL 19-60. The battalion task force commander is the senior trainer/evaluator during a company-level CALFEX. He is assisted by his staff and any external support personnel provided to control the maneuvering and supporting units and range operations.

EVALUATORS 19-61. As a rule, observer/controllers (O/C) (evaluators) should be assigned to every maneuver platoon and supporting element. As current roles of the maneuver section and mixed platoon evolve, the unit should assign additional evaluators as necessary. The existing chain of command should be augmented by as many evaluators as necessary to assure the safe execution of the exercise, and to observe the performance of each participating unit. After the exercise, each evaluator will conduct an AAR with the subunit he observed, then provide input to the senior evaluator for the unit AAR. 19-62. Evaluators should provide coaching and encouragement during pre-exercise training, but remain as passive and unobtrusive as possible during the actual live-fire maneuver. Units should determine the evaluator prerequisites and experience level. If necessary, units may wish to request support from other units within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) to ensure the experience level matches the level required by the complexity of the exercise.

EQUIPMENT 19-63. All personnel forward of the baseline should be aboard their designated combat vehicles, unless conducting dismounted operations. Evaluators moving with the maneuver unit should be provided the same protection, communications, and mobility as the unit being observed. Distinctive markings for evaluators and their vehicles will help prevent confusion among the exercise participants. Evaluators should select positions to the rear of the unit (immediately behind the unit or well behind on a suitable vantage point)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

19-11

Chapter 19

where they can best evaluate tactical movement, fire distribution, and effect and serve as live-fire safeties as appropriate. 19-64. Communications equipment must be provided to allow all participating units to operate on all internal frequencies and report and monitor on the appropriate external (task force) frequencies. A separate frequency must be provided for evaluator use, and evaluators must monitor the training unit. The TOC must continuously monitor the designated range control frequency as well as primary operational frequencies. Units digitally equipped will report and monitor digitally to appropriate higher echelons. An evaluator will be present in the TOC to monitor all digital traffic as required.

SECTION III – TRAINING 19-65. Success during a CALFEX depends largely on the preparatory training that a unit conducts. While CALFEX focuses on gunnery through the direct-fire score, the correct use of terrain and movement enables the unit to maximize its combat power. Therefore, all aspects of company-level tactical training support the CALFEX. 19-66. The LFX is not, however, the end goal of training. The ultimate goal of combat training is the ability to fight and win. CALFEX and company-level force-on-force training with tactical engagement simulations are the two exercises that most closely replicate the conditions of combat; therefore, are the most important events in the overall unit training program.

PROGRESSIVE TRAINING 19-67. Training should be conducted in a crawl-walk-run sequence to build on previous training. An accurate assessment of a unit’s capabilities is imperative to ensure that each event focuses on known weaknesses and reinforces previous training. Throughout the training program, unit status is continually updated, and each event is organized to continue the building process. If the CALFEX is seen as the most stressful, realistic training event in a training program, then a unit’s success depends entirely on progressive training that increases the level of complexity and causes leaders and Soldiers to learn during each step of the process. 19-68. The parent battalion trains all subordinate units to section/platoon level in the maneuver and employment of organic combat and sustainment systems. Training within the maneuver unit includes crew, squad, section, and platoon drills; weapons qualification; and situational training exercises (STX). Aviation and FA battalions train to company level in similar fashion. Proficiency at the small unit level is fundamental. It is the foundation for more complex training, as well as a very valuable tool in a sustainment program where personnel rotation and support taskings are common distracters. 19-69. An equally important part of the training program is leader training. Units can make extremely effective use of map exercises (MAPEX), tactical exercise without troops (TEWT), terrain-board exercises, leader’s reconnaissance, and battle simulations to develop and sustain tactical skills. With little coordination, all elements of the combined arms team can be represented in leader training. This affords the various players the opportunity to build and reinforce relationships that become critical in combat, while developing their ability to fight together as a potent combined arms force. Finally, these basic types of leader training can be accomplished while Soldiers are involved in other types of training or on support details, allowing the leaders to make the most of training opportunities. 19-70. Maneuver battalions train company team commanders to integrate organic, attached, and supporting fires and to maneuver their combat forces. Where sustainment unit elements are maneuvered or controlled by headquarters other than the company team, the battalion level headquarters either coordinates the support or requires the company team to do so. The emphasis is on training the way the unit intends to fight or support.

19-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise

KEY PERSONNEL TRAINING 19-71. Leader training is a critical element of the training program. Crew commanders and squad-, teamsection-, and platoon-level leaders and sergeants must be afforded the opportunity to participate in leader exercises that sharpen their tactical skills away from the scrutiny of their subordinates. The exercises previously mentioned (MAPEX, TEWT, FCX) provide a convenient forum to train leaders at a reduced cost. 19-72. Evaluator training should include supervised range reconnaissance, rehearsals, and detailed briefings. Controller-evaluators must be thoroughly familiar with the scenario and range facility. Their preparation should include a thorough wargaming session that seeks to address all possible problems and develop appropriate solutions. Evaluators must be able to apply all aspects of mission, enemy, terrain, (weather), troops and support available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC) to the unit’s performance to reinforce strengths as well as identify weaknesses. 19-73. During the evaluator rehearsals, communications are verified on the control net. Evaluators must thoroughly understand their relationship to the exercising unit. Safety is a command and control function. Therefore, it is the responsibility of the unit commander and each of his subordinates to control fires and movement to preclude friendly casualties. Controller-evaluators accompany the maneuvering element and advise the tower of its progress. The target operator, at the direction of the chief controller, presents targets that can be engaged safely by the maneuver element. By use of such passive measures, the evaluators support the chain of command without interfering with its function. Unity of command is achieved by designating the player unit’s battalion task force commander as the chief controller. 19-74. To increase the training value of CALFEX at battalion staff level, every phase of staff planning and conduct are evaluated as well. By establishing separate frequencies and call signs to represent other (notional) units within the battalion task force and brigade, the radio traffic on the command nets is more realistic, and the staff is exercised in conjunction with the company team. If a separate battalion performs the control and evaluation function, evaluators are stationed within the TOC and administrative/logistics center (ALC) to provide feedback to the player headquarters. By using CALFEX as a staff STX, and using battalion task force level command post exercises (CPX) and FCX, the headquarters sustains its ability to command and control the combined arms battle.

OBSERVER/CONTROLLER AND EVALUATOR PREPARATION 19-75. All O/Cs, and evaluators must be trained in AAR techniques and prepared to conduct AARs with subgroups. The chief controller should debrief all controllers and assistants prior to the AARs. 19-76. Commanders and O/Cs should not critique or lecture. They should guide the discussions by asking leading questions and enter the discussion only to sustain the AAR, to get the discussion back on the right track, or bring out new points.

SECTION IV – EXECUTION 19-77. The sequence of events for the exercise will vary according to local conditions. Whether the CALFEX is a separate evaluation or an integral part of a larger training exercise, the exercise falls into three distinct phases.

PHASE ONE – PRE-LIVE-FIRE 19-78. The unit receives a warning order, conducts its before-operation checks, receives its OPORD, and conducts troop-leading procedures. If units are digitized, information will be sent digitally. 19-79. Controller-evaluators must be present throughout to observe the process and provide feedback. Depending on the unit’s level of proficiency and the objectives of the exercise, the controller-evaluators should coach and train during the pre-live-fire phase.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

19-13

Chapter 19

19-80. A pre-exercise rehearsal may be programmed, at the commander’s discretion. It may be accomplished on the range with the same target array as the live-fire, or on adjacent terrain with a representative array. The rehearsal is a dry-fire training event. It should be accomplished tactically; time should be allocated at its conclusion for an AAR and final coordination. A walk-through using MILES CVS/PGS/MILES equipment and interfaced targets increase the target acquisition and the fire distribution training value of the rehearsal. When operating tempo (OPTEMPO) and mileage inhibits a unit’s ability to conduct a pre-exercise rehearsal, simulators can be used (Close-Combat Tactical Trainer [CCTT]). Deficiencies should be identified and corrected. Where specific deficiencies can be related to actual or potential combat failures, those points should be made and reinforced. 19-81. To allow the company team commander to receive feedback on his concept, he should back-brief the battalion task force commander before issuing his OPORD. This provides the battalion commander an opportunity to train his subordinates and ensures that the scenario is followed.

FIRE COORDINATION EXERCISE 19-82. The FCX is a scaled-down CALFEX. It allows the unit commander to integrate direct and indirect fires using subcaliber munitions, MILES CVS/PGS, and representative portions of the combined arms team on a scaled range complex. If properly prepared, it is an extremely effective training event, and can be accomplished at platoon, company, or battalion level. TC 25-4-1 provides additional guidance on the preparation of an FCX.

DRY-FIRE EXERCISE 19-83. A dry-fire exercise can be used to drill or rehearse the maneuver team prior to live-fire, or as a separate training event. As a separate event, it allows the unit to practice company and platoon drills, to shake down communications and SOP, and to establish intervals and sectors of observation/responsibility. As a final rehearsal, it affords the company and battalion commanders the opportunity to correct lastminute problems in movement techniques and overwatching fires. It also allows the controllers to ensure that the players will comply with the planned scenario, at least with regard to a safe target sequence. If the firing unit commander is to be afforded complete freedom of maneuver, the rehearsal allows the exercise controller to verify the suitability of the target sequence and make necessary corrections. 19-84. Dry-fire exercises involve little or no expenditure of training ammunition, and no impact area is required; however, a maneuver area, personnel, time, fuel, and a realistic target array are essential to an effective dry fire exercise.

PHASE TWO – TACTICAL MOVEMENT, MISSION EXECUTION 19-85. The unit moves tactically from the AA and performs a forward passage of lines as part of a movement to contact, or occupies the initial defensive position. On order, weapons are loaded and the first target sequence is presented. The unit fires and moves against the array, integrating the appropriate supporting elements. During the battle, emergency ammunition resupply and medical evacuation may be accomplished. Once the target array is defeated or the training objectives are met, the unit conducts a rearward passage of lines and clears the range.

PHASE THREE – REORGANIZATION AND RECONSTITUTION 19-86. The unit withdraws to a designated AA for reorganization and reconstitution. If required, the unit is decontaminated. Vehicles are downloaded and ammunition is turned in. Once all training objectives are attained, AARs are conducted. Figure 19-1 outlines the training strategy for a CALFEX.

19-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise

Figure 19-1. CALFEX training strategy

SECTION V – EVALUATION 19-87. A fundamental principle of training is that performance is evaluated and feedback is provided to the unit. The aspect that sets a CALFEX apart from a firepower demonstration is that its objective is to train the combined arms team to fight together in a synchronized and coordinated effort. The most important factor in reinforcing that training is an appropriate set of standards (against which the unit is evaluated) and the application of those standards by qualified evaluators. 19-88. The standards for a CALFEX are extracted from respective CATS and this manual. Those references are listed at the end of this publication. Conditions and standards discussed in the Army Training and Evaluation Program (ARTEP) may be modified to reflect local range standards and limitations.

STANDARDS FOR EVALUATION 19-89. As a minimum, the company team must accomplish the standards, based on the conditions, for an attack, defense, and movement to contact mission.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

19-15

Chapter 19

19-90. The general conditions for the attack, defend, and movement to contact missions are— z Given a general situation in which the battalion task force is attacking, a task organization, a warning order, and an OPORD. z Sustainment unit elements (organic, attached, OPCON, or DS) may support the company team. z The target array represents a threat-style mechanized infantry or tank unit in a defensive posture, grouped in platoon or depleted platoon-size positions in depth (security zone), with a reserve (counterattack force) up to battalion strength. z The mission is conducted under all environmental conditions, day or night. The company team operates under threat of CBRN attack or in an active (simulated) CBRN environment. z A friendly presentation is to be included within the scenario to further enhance controlling of fires among CALFEX players. z The company team may be the lead element or may be following other units and attack through them. The attack may be hasty or deliberate. z A security force may be employed forward of the company team. The company team may defend in sector or in a battle position or strongpoint. 19-91. The general standards for the attack, defend, and movement to contact missions are— z Perform troop-leading procedures allowing subordinate units enough time to prepare for the operation. z If digitally equipped, send and receive all reports digitally as required and as the situation permits. z Transfer data and update the situational awareness (SA) digitally. z Coordinate the fire support plan and mobility operations with battalion task force headquarters. z Resupply, as required, to sustain combat power. z Upon gaining contact, develop the situation rapidly and choose an appropriate course of action. z Employ all available combat power to suppress or destroy OPFOR weapons and gain a favorable ratio at the decisive point. z Report the situation as required to the battalion task force headquarters. Reports must be secure, accurate, and timely. z Achieve a direct-fire score of 70 percent or better. z Extract specific supporting task training and evaluation outlines (T&EOs) from the appropriate manuals; modify to fit local conditions, as required. Unit SOPs and the battalion task force orders are sources for standards regarding load plans, specified tasks, and combat priorities. z Plan for and rehearse counterattack options. z Detect and report OPFOR elements. Reports must be accurate, timely, and secure. 19-92. The standards for the attack mission are— z Initiate the attack at the specified time. z Before gaining contact, select and execute the appropriate movement techniques and combat formations. z Make effective use of terrain, movement, and smoke to minimize exposure of friendly forces to enemy systems. z Breach or bypass OPFOR obstacles encountered during the attack. z Destroy, capture, or force the withdrawal of OPFOR encountered during the attack. z Seize or secure the designated objective IAW the battalion task force OPORD and FRAGOs. Consolidate and reorganize on the objective and prepare to continue the mission. z Repel enemy counterattacks IAW the defend mission. z Accomplish coordination with adjacent and supporting units, as required.

19-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise

19-93. The standards for the defend mission are— z Occupy and prepare initial positions not later than the time specified in the battalion task force OPORD. z Reconnoiter and prepare subsequent positions not later than the time specified in the battalion task force OPORD. z Use obstacles to increase enemy exposure times, slow his advance, turn his flanks, and facilitate disengagement, IAW priorities in the battalion task force OPORD. z Assist the rearward passage of security and engineer elements through the company team position. z Conduct direct-fire engagements IAW the company team fire plan. z Prevent the OPFOR attack from succeeding. z Make effective use of cover, concealment, and smoke to minimize exposure of friendly forces to enemy systems. z On order, counterattack IAW the attack mission. 19-94. The standards for the movement to contact mission are— z Initiate movement at the specified time. z Before gaining contact, select and execute the appropriate movement techniques and combat formations. z Destroy, capture, or force the withdrawal of OPFOR vehicles during the movement to contact. z Make effective use of terrain, movement, and smoke to minimize exposure of friendly forces to enemy weapon systems. z Seize or secure the designated objective IAW the battalion task force OPORD and FRAGOs. Consolidate and reorganize on the objective and prepare to continue the mission. z Repel enemy counterattacks.

SCORING 19-95. Indirect-fire evaluation is applied against time and accuracy standards contained in ARTEP 6-115-MTP. While no points are directly allocated for indirect-fire planning and usage, use of indirect fires can directly attrite the threat target arrays leading to a potentially higher direct-fire score. Timely and accurate calls for fire should enable the company team to achieve a higher direct-fire score. 19-96. The direct-fire scoring system provides a way to evaluate the company team’s ability to engage a threat array quickly, efficiently, and effectively. The scoring system developed for the direct-fire portion of the CALFEX provides both objective, measurable evaluation by established standards and subjective comments on the tactical and procedural strengths and weaknesses of the evaluated unit. The evaluated unit will receive a numerical direct-fire score and a subjective tactical proficiency score. The methodology is threat-based, yielding an objective measurement of direct-fire effectiveness and a subjective measurement of the unit’s tactical proficiency.

DIRECT-FIRE SCORING 19-97. The direct-fire score for the company team will be expressed as a percentage, based on the number of target hits divided by the total number of targets presented. A 10-percent penalty will be deducted from the overall direct-fire score if a friendly presentation is engaged. The purpose of this penalty is to reduce the platoon’s overall score one qualification level (for example: If a platoon’s preliminary score is 95% [Distinguished], and the platoon engaged the friendly presentation, their overall score would be 85% [Superior]). Evaluation will be based on the ratings currently applied to all GTs (see Figure 19-2). Overall scoring will be as follows: z Distinguished–90 to 100 percent. z Superior–80 to 89 percent.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

19-17

Chapter 19

z z

Qualified–70 to 79 percent. Unqualified–0 to 69 percent.

Example: Gunnery Score Penalty for Engaging a Friendly Presentation Overall Score

-98% -10% -88%

88% -10% 78%

76% -10% 66%

Figure 19-2. Example of direct-fire scoring

DIRECT-FIRE STANDARDS AND APPLICATIONS 19-98. The evaluated unit’s direct-fire effectiveness and distribution are measured by structuring the threat scenario. The unit’s allocation of ammunition will be limited, forcing the company team commander to control and distribute his direct-fire weapon systems onto the appropriate targets. 19-99. The target-kill standards are as follows: z Tanks and missiles (TOW and Javelin): one round through the target. z 25mm: at least three rounds through the target. z MK19: round impacts within 5 meters of target. z Machine guns and small arms: 25 percent hits on each set of troop targets and three rounds through the respective unarmored vehicles. 19-100. On computerized ranges, target kill sensors should be set for minimum kills according to the probability of kill (PK) of the weapon systems capable of killing that particular target (for example, the 25mm would register a kill only on certain vehicles such as a personnel carrier [PC] when the vehicle is within the killing range of the weapon system).

TACTICAL AND PROCEDURAL SCORING 19-101. Units will be evaluated on their tactical and procedural proficiency as well as their direct-fire proficiency. The tactical and procedural evaluation is rated as trained (T), practice (P), or untrained (U), based on the judgment of the unit evaluator.

CHECKLISTS AND SCORESHEETS 19-102. Checklists and scoresheets are provided to record aspects of performance during the exercise and provide feedback after the exercise. Items included in the checklist are doctrinally based and are developed from CATS standards. Checklists are prepared by the controlling headquarters. 19-103. To calculate a direct-fire score for a combined arms team, determine target hits in two areas– vehicle targets and troop targets. For the score for vehicle targets, divide the total vehicle targets hit by the total vehicle targets presented (minimum score for qualification is 70 percent). To receive a hit on troop targets, the combined arms team must hit 25 percent of each individual set of troop targets presented. (See Table 19-5 for a sample direct-fire computation sheet.) 19-104. Evaluator checklists are used to record key observations that bear on unit performance. The items on the checklist should directly support exercise objectives and be graded on a GO/NO-GO basis. The checklist should be self-explanatory, and its use should not detract from the observation of the unit. Items on the checklist may be used to formulate the AAR; the checklist can be used to outline standards. (See Table 19-6 for a sample evaluator checklist.) 19-105. The CALFEX summary sheet is a one-page synopsis of unit performance in the seven operations. An overall rating (Trained/Practice/Untrained) is assigned for each operation, and the weak areas within

19-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise

the operation are circled. The standards for each area are applied as outlined in Chapter 4. Additional comments are entered at the bottom of the summary sheet as required. The summary sheet is used as a cover sheet for the CALFEX evaluation packet. See Table 19-7 for a sample CALFEX summary sheet. Note. Many of the operations addressed are not within direct control or the participating maneuver commander. Consequently, the results of the exercise are not attributed to a single company team, but to the entire combined arms organization. Table 19-5. Example of a direct-fire computation sheet Ammunition

Ammunition Expended

Targets Killed

Offense

Defense

Offense

Defense

Point Targets 120-mm TOW Javelin 25-mm Point Target Totals Area Targets (Machine Gun)

Computation: Targets Presented Targets

Offense

Defense

Targets Killed

Percentages

Offense

Offense

Defense

Defense

Point Area Offense Score:

+

Defense Score: Penalty for Engaging Friendly Target Presentation:

10%

Rating: (circle one) UNQUALIFIED (0 to 69%) QUALIFIED (70 to 79%) SUPERIOR (80 to 89%) DISTINGUISHED (90 to 100%)

Overall Score:

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

19-19

Chapter 19

Table 19-6. Example of Class V expenditure Class V Expenditure Type

Drawn -

Turned In

-

=

-

=

-

=

-

=

Expended

Plt/Sec_______________ Co Tm_______________ Date______________________________________ Evaluator___________________________________

= Yes

No

Not Observed

1. Precombat Checks. Overall evaluation of the platoon/section is based on observation and spot checks. Enter comments on reverse. Note impact on combat operation. SOP: Load plans. Local security. z Hotloop. z CBRN automatic chemical agent detection alarms deployed. z Camouflage. Maintenance: z PMCS accomplished per TM. z DA Form 2404/5988-E initiated. z All subsystems checks. (Circle exceptions) Turret Hull Crew-served weapons Communications CBRN Generators Ammunition NVGs PEWs Personal weapons Engineer tools Overall Rating: GO/NO-GO z z

2. Troop-Leading Procedures. Observe the platoon/section leader and spot check the TCs/squad leaders. Enter comments in margin or on reverse. Time Co Tm warning order received: (Digitally if applicable) z Plt/sec warning order issued: (Digitally if applicable) z Co Tm OPORD received: (Digitally if applicable) z Plt/sec OPORD issued: (Digitally if applicable) Overall Rating: GO/NO-GO z

19-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise

Table 19-6. Example of Class V expenditure (continued) Yes

No

Not Observed

3. Leader’s reconnaissance conducted by TC. z Sqd ldr level. z Supervision. z Rehearsals conducted. Overall Rating: GO/NO-GO 4. React to indirect fires. z Button up. z Assume MOPP 4. z Report digitally. Overall Rating: GO/NO-GO 5. Employ supporting fires. z Digitally request indirect fires. z Digitally adjust indirect fires. Overall Rating: GO/NO-GO 6. Employ direct fires. z Control Plt/sec fires. z Plt/sec fires distributed laterally/in-depth. Overall Rating: GO/NO-GO

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

19-21

Chapter 19

Table 19-7. Example of a CALFEX summary sheet UNIT ___________________________________________________ DATE ______________________ OPERATION

TRAINED

PRACTICE

UNTRAINED

Maneuver: z Offense. z Defense. z Infantry mounted/dismounted. z Tanks. z Movement. z Direct fire (score _________). z Aviation. z TOW.

___________

___________

____________

Fire Support: z z z z

Missions standards achieved. Mortars _______ _______________. Field artillery _______ _______________. Close air support _______________.

Intelligence: z Collection. z Analysis. z Digital reporting. z Reporting. Air Defense: z z z

Small arms. Dedicated assets. Passive.

Mobility/Countermobility/Survivability: z z z

Obstacle employment. Obstacle breaching. Survivability measures.

Sustainment Maintenance/Recovery: z z z

Resupply. Medical. Digital reporting.

Command and Control: Planning Execution Notes. 1. Areas circled indicate weak support, both time and accuracy standards must be met for satisfactory achievement of the objective. 2. Under fire support, both time and accuracy standards must be met for satisfactory achievement of the objective.

Integration of Indirect and Supporting Fires 19-106. The company team commander’s effective integration of the combined arms team should be reflected with an appropriate attrition rate within the threat array. Many ranges do not support engineer efforts, indirect fires, or CAS within the target area of the range. Units firing a CALFEX on such ranges should be evaluated on their ability to plan for, request, and pinpoint supporting fires. (For example, if the

19-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise

evaluated unit requests a fire mission that would have achieved target effect, the succeeding target array presentation should reflect threat losses by presenting fewer targets. An engineer plan that would effectively structure the engagement area would delay the threat arrays appropriately.) 19-107. The direct-fire score can be affected by the use of available combat multipliers. By effectively using combat multipliers, the company team commander can attrite the threat array both before it moves within the effective range of his direct-fire systems and by slowing the threat rate of advance, creating a more favorable engagement environment for his forces. Commanders who do not make effective use of their combat multipliers will face corresponding greater numbers of threat targets advancing toward them at a higher rate, automatically penalizing the evaluated company team. The attrition of the threat target arrays by planning combat multipliers effectively provides a direct link, readily apparent to the commander, between the direct-fire fight and the integration of combat multipliers.

After Action Review 19-108. The AAR is the forum for the feedback and discussion of a unit’s performance during an exercise. The AAR format and procedures may be modified by the actual situation. 19-109. Once the exercise is completed, each subunit evaluator will conduct an AAR with the element he observed. This review focuses specifically on the performance of that small unit, and should involve all personnel in the unit. A terrain model of the range or a vantage point overlooking the range will help focus the discussion. 19-110. Once all subunit AARs are completed, the evaluators, unit commander, and all subordinate and supporting leaders gather for the overall AAR conducted by the battalion commander. Evaluators gather first and provide information to help the commander develop a complete picture of the exercise. If video equipment is used, it should be reviewed beforehand and included in the AAR. Once the commander organizes his notes, he assembles all participants. The battalion commander conducts the AAR in his role as senior controller-evaluator. He may require the S-3 or another officer to conduct the AAR but should actively participate.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

19-23

This page intentionally left blank.

Appendix A

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation Appendix A discusses boresighting, pre-fire checks, armament accuracy checks (AAC), live-fire accuracy screening test (LFAST), zeroing procedures, post-fire checks, malfunctions, error sources, range determination methods for the Abrams main battle tanks, ammunition stowage and historical records. In conjunction with performing regular preventive maintenance, checks, and services (PMCS) the crew conducts monthly AACs to ensure their fire control system is fully operational. Before any firing event the crew performs pre-fire checks and boresights all weapon systems. This ensures all turret weapon systems operate properly and prevents many of the common malfunctions that can occur during firing. If a malfunction does occur, the crew tries to correct it; if they cannot, they report the malfunction to the master gunner. After firing the weapon systems, the crew conducts a post-fire check.

Contents Section I – Boresighting ...........................A-2 M27A3 Muzzle Boresight Device Alignment Procedures ........................ A-2 Boresighting the M1A1 ....................... A-9 Boresighting the M1A2 SEP/V2 ........ A-21 Air Temperature and Atmospheric (Barometric) Pressure ....................... A-40 Section II – Abrams Pre-Fire Checks .....A-42 Section III – Armament Accuracy Checks .....................................................A-44 M1A1 Procedures ............................. A-46 M1A2 SEP Procedures ..................... A-61 Expanded AAC Checks .................... A-72 Cam Bracket Operating Cable Adjustment ........................................ A-82 Section IV – Live-Fire Accuracy Screening Test ........................................A-85 Proofing Team .................................. A-85 Screening Procedures ...................... A-86 Section V – Zeroing Tank-Mounted Machine Guns ..........................................A-99 Boresighting the Caliber .50 Machine Gun (M1A1) ...................................... A-99 Zeroing the Caliber .50 Machine GunA-104 Zeroing the Coaxial Machine Gun .. A-105

3 September 2009

Section VI – Post-Fire Checks ............. A-109 Section VII – Abrams Weapons System Malfunctions ......................................... A-109 Main Gun Malfunction .................... A-110 M240 7.62-mm Coaxial Machine Gun Malfunction ............................. A-110 M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun Malfunction..................................... A-111 M250/M257 Smoke Grenades Malfunction..................................... A-111 Communications Malfunction ......... A-111 Section VIII – Error Sources ................ A-111 Fixed Biases .................................. A-112 Variable Biases .............................. A-112 Random Errors ............................... A-116 Section IX – M1 Series Specific Range Determination ....................................... A-116 Range Determination ..................... A-116 Deliberate Range Determination .... A-123 Section X – Tank Ammunition Stowage Plan ........................................................ A-130 Section XI – Historical Records........... A-133 General Information ....................... A-133 Electronic DA Form 2408-4 ............ A-133

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-1

Appendix A

SECTION I – BORESIGHTING A-1. Boresighting is the key to tank main gun accuracy. For survival and success on the battlefield, tank crews must train as they will fight. Boresighting, if not the most critical skill for tank crews, is certainly one of the most important. Therefore, tank crews must become proficient in boresighting their weapon system under any circumstance and environmental condition (such as air temperature and barometric pressure). Platoon sergeants must make sure that crews can, without assistance, boresight accurately and prepare their tanks to fire in accordance with this manual and the appropriate TM.

M27A3 MUZZLE BORESIGHT DEVICE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES A-2. The M27A3 muzzle boresight device (MBD) is the latest model MBD for the 120-mm Abrams tank. It has a fixed-head design, which means the optical head no longer rotates around the operating shaft. This design will improve the ability of the MBD to retain collimation. Since the optics are now fixed in relation to the cone, the procedures for inserting and aligning this MBD to the witness marks on the muzzle face of the tube are different than the previous MBD models. The national stock number (NSN) for the M27A3 MBD is 4933-01-504-6263.

PROCEDURES FOR INSERTING AND ALIGNING A-3. The purpose of the fixed head MBD is to reduce errors when boresighting. Only use these procedures with the M27A3 fixed-head boresight device: z Step 1. Insert the MBD (see Figure A-1). Do not worry about aligning any marks.

Figure A-1. Step 1 - insert MBD

A-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z

Step 2. Tighten the MBD finger tight (see Figure A-2).

Figure A-2. Step 2 - tighten MBD finger tight z

Step 3. Note location of alignment arrow on the marking plate. Place a mark on the cone adjacent to the arrow (see Figure A-3).

Figure A-3. Step 3 - place a mark on the cone z

Step 4. Remove the MBD (see Figure A-4).

Figure A-4. Step 4 - remove the MBD z

Step 5. Reinstall the MBD with the mark on the cone at the 3 o’clock position (see Figure A-5).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-3

Appendix A

Note. There is a dimple on the gun tube at the 3 o’clock position.

Figure A-5. Step 5 - reinstall the MBD z

Step 6. Tighten the MBD finger tight (see Figure A-6).

Figure A-6. Step 6 - tighten the MBD finger tight „

When the MBD is tight, the alignment arrow will align with the mark on the cone and the 3 o’clock mark (see Figure A-7). (If not, restart the procedures.) The eyepiece will also be at the 3 o’clock position. Continue with the MBD collimation or collimation check procedures.

Figure A-7. Proper alignment of the MBD

A-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z

Step 7. To flip the MBD 180 degrees, insert the MBD with the mark on the cone at the 9 o’clock position. When the MBD is tight, the 9 o’clock dimple, the cone mark, the marking plate arrow, and the MBD eyepiece will align (see Figure A-8).

Figure A-8. MBD flipped 180 degrees to the 9 o’clock position Note. Collimation and boresight procedures remain the same after the M27A3 MBD has been aligned.

MUZZLE BORESIGHT DEVICE COLLIMATION A-4. An MBD may be collimated to the particular tank on which it will be used. When an MBD is collimated to a particular tank, boresighting the tank is faster and more accurate.

Collimation Check A-5. The tank crew will conduct a collimation check periodically during routine maintenance to make sure the MBD is correctly collimated and to determine if it needs to be turned in for repair. The vehicle commander (VC) is responsible for the collimation of his MBD. The platoon sergeant is overall responsible for ensuring his tank crews are conducting collimation checks periodically and collimating MBDs when necessary. The crew conducts a collimation check using the following steps: Notes. Make sure the turret power is on and the turret hydraulic pressure gauge reads between 1,500 and 1,700 psi. Before conducting a collimation check, select a target with a well-defined aiming point as close as possible to 1,200 meters. (Use the eyesight parallax shield [optic cover with hole] to reduce the eyesight parallax. If no parallax shield is available, do not conduct a collimation check at ranges less than 500 meters.) Make sure the end of the tube, as far in as the MBD is inserted, is clean. z z z

Step 1. Tell the gunner to lay the gun on the upper left corner of the target. Step 2. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL. Step 3. Insert the MBD, and make sure the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 12 o’clock position by aligning it with the 12 o’clock witness mark on the face of the gun tube.

Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 3 o’clock position.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-5

Appendix A

CAUTION Never hold the eyepiece while turning the operating handle.

z

Step 4. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle finger tight, and make sure the eyepiece is positioned at the 3 o’clock position.

Note. With the eyepiece at the 3 o’clock position, the light port used for night boresighting is pointed up. During bright days, the sun may shine through this port and cause blurring of the MBD reticle; use one hand to shield the light port from the sun. z

Step 5. With a pencil, mark the operating handle at the 12 o’clock position (on line with the index mark) to make sure the operating handle is tightened to the same position each time the MBD is repositioned. (Once boresighting is complete, erase the mark. A new mark should be used each time the tank is boresighted or the MBD is collimated.)

Note. Focus the eyepiece and turn it so the reticle lines of the MBD are parallel to the edges of the boresight target. z

z z

Step 6. Without touching the gun or the MBD, sight through the MBD eyepiece and direct the gunner to traverse the turret and elevate the main gun, using manual controls, to lay the aiming reticle of the MBD on the target aiming point. Step 7. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, hold the tapered muzzle cone firmly and loosen the operating handle two complete turns to unseat the MBD; remove the MBD. Step 8. Rotate the MBD 180 degrees; make sure that the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 6 o’clock position by aligning it with the 6 o’clock witness mark on the face of the gun tube.

Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 9 o’clock position. z

z

Step 9. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle two turns until finger tight and the pencil mark on the operating handle is aligned with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone. (If the device is positioned correctly, the eyepiece will be at the 9 o’clock position. If the pencil mark does not line up with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone, erase the pencil mark and start boresight device collimation check procedures over.) Step 10. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, look through the MBD eyepiece to make sure the reticle is on the target aiming point.

Note. If the MBD reticle is on the target aiming point, the MBD is collimated (see Figure A-9 on page A-8). If the reticle is off the target aiming point more than one reticle line width in azimuth or elevation, collimate the MBD (M26A1, M27A1, or M27A3).

Collimation Procedures (M26A1, M27A1, or M27A3) A-6. Collimation procedures should be performed on an MBD when it fails the collimation check. Meticulous adjustments are required during collimation to ensure the MBD reticle is laying directly on the target aiming point (see Table A-1). Tools required to collimate an MBD are— z Spline key kit (Part #6257, NSN 5120-00-087-6415). z Two jeweler’s screwdrivers (NSN 5120-00-288-8739).

A-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

A-7. Use the following procedures to collimate an MBD (M26A1, M27A1, or M27A3): z Step 1. With the MBD eyepiece still at the 9 o’clock position, use the spline key wrench to loosen the collar (spline) screw behind the optical eyepiece and rotate the collar to expose the three (or four) collimation screws. z Step 2. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, look through the eyepiece and make a mental note of where the reticle is laying (in relation to the target aiming point) (see Figure A-9). z Step 3. Using the jeweler’s screwdrivers, adjust the collimation screws to move the MBD reticle half the distance to the target aiming point. (Read the following notes carefully before making any adjustments.) Notes. Use two jeweler’s screwdrivers simultaneously, to adjust collimation screws. Adjust the collar and collimation screws carefully to make sure the screws are not stripped while adjusting the MBD. Reticle movement occurs when an adjustment screw is turned clockwise while an opposing screw is, simultaneously, turned counterclockwise. Depending on the tolerance of both the MBD and the gun tube, the collimation screws may not turn enough to move the reticle close enough to the target aiming point. This does not necessarily mean that the MBD cannot be collimated; try the MBD on another tank. If an MBD cannot be collimated on two different tanks, turn the MBD in to maintenance for repair. Table A-1 provides general guidance for reticle adjustment with either a three-or fourscrew MBD. Table A-1. Reticle adjustment guide Desired Reticle Movement

Adjustment Screw (Turn Clockwise)

Opposing Screw (Turn Counterclockwise)

Down and Right

Upper Left

Lower Right

Down and Left

Upper Right

Lower Left

Up and Right

Lower Left

Upper Right

Up and Left

Lower Right

Upper Left

Left

Lower Right

Lower Left

Right

Lower Left

Lower Right

Up

Lower Left or Right

Top

Down

Top

Lower Left or Right

Down and Right

Top

Lower Right

Down and Left

Top

Lower Left

Up and Right Up and Left

Lower Left Lower Right

Top Top

Four Adjustment Screws

Three Adjustment Screws

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-7

Appendix A

z

Step 4. Once the reticle moves half the distance to the target aiming point use the jeweler’s screwdrivers to tighten the collimation screws finger tight before rotating the MBD (see Figure A-9). (This eliminates further reticle movement.)

Figure A-9. Target aiming point z

z

Step 5. With the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone in the 6 o’clock position, hold the tapered muzzle cone firmly and loosen the operating handle two turns to unseat the MBD; remove the MBD. Step 6. Rotate the MBD 180 degrees and insert it into the muzzle of the main gun; make sure the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 12 o’clock position.

Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 3 o’clock position. z

z

z z

Step 7. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle two turns until finger tight; make sure the pencil mark on the operating handle is aligned with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone. (If the MBD is positioned correctly, the eyepiece will be at the 3 o’clock position.) Step 8. Looking through the MBD with the eyepiece at the 3 o’clock position (index mark at the 12 o’clock position) direct the gunner to use the manual controls to move the gun to the target aiming point. Step 9. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, loosen the operating handle two complete turns to unseat the MBD; remove the MBD. Step 10. Rotate the MBD 180 degrees and insert it into the muzzle of the main gun; make sure the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 6 o’clock position.

Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 9 o’clock position. z

z

A-8

Step 11. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle two turns until finger tight and the pencil mark on the operating handle is aligned with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone. (If the MBD is positioned correctly, the eyepiece should be at the 9 o’clock position.) Step 12. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, look through the MBD eyepiece to make sure the reticle is on the target aiming point.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Note. If the MBD reticle is on the target aiming point, the collimation procedures are complete. If not, repeat the collimation procedures (steps 2 through 12) until the reticle is on the target aiming point with the muzzle cone in both the 12 o’clock (eyepiece at 3 o’clock) and 6 o’clock (eyepiece at 9 o’clock) positions. Normally, several adjustments have to be made to collimate an MBD. z

z z z

Step 13. Once collimation is complete, view through the eyepiece, and carefully tighten the collimation screws without moving the reticle off the target aiming point. (Do not over tighten and strip the screws.) Step 14. Perform a final collimation check (page A-5). Step 15. Rotate the collar to the closed position and tighten the locking screw. Step 16. Remove the MBD from the tube.

Note. If the MBD loses collimation, these procedures will have to be performed again. Loss of collimation may be caused by— Loose collimation screws. Stripped collimation screws. Inoperative MBD. Gun tube wear. Mishandling the MBD.

BORESIGHTING THE M1A1 A-8. Boresighting establishes a definitive relationship between the axis of the bore of the gun and the sights at zero super elevation, providing a basis for all sight alignment. When the tank is boresighted at a known range, the fire control system provides system parallax corrections to the gunner’s primary sight (GPS) and the thermal imaging system (TIS) at other ranges. It is impossible to fire accurately without sight alignment; therefore, boresighting is fundamental in tank gunnery. A-9. The numbers in the computer control panel (CCP) display change as the reticle is adjusted during boresighting. Using the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch can induce reticle movement of 7.5 mils in any direction; however, with a cold gun, no more than 2 to 3 mils movement in any direction should be required to boresight. If the reticle must be moved more than 5 mils off center to reach boresight alignment, recheck the procedure. Look for uncontrolled reticle drift, and perform a computer self-test. A-10. The main gun, GPS, TIS, muzzle reference system (MRS), and gunner’s auxiliary sight (GAS) should be boresighted each time the gunner or tank commander (TC) is changed, when loss of boresight occurs, or as the situation permits. In training, perform complete boresight procedures before firing each table. In combat, boresight before anticipated contact and after extended movement. The gunner should adjust the browpad to fit his face snugly. This will limit the movement of the gunner’s head and reduce sight parallax.

COMPUTER CORRECTION FACTORS AND AMMUNITION SUB-DESIGNATIONS A-11. Computer correction factors (CCF) refine and improve the computer ballistic solutions, which are calculated using ballistic data from stationary tanks and fixed gun mount test firings (see Table A-2). These factors correct the ballistic data for part of the mean jump error not considered during these test firings. A-12. The Abrams computer electronics unit (CEU) is capable of storing and providing zero information (CCF) for any ammunition type designed to be fired from the tank. Because the ballistic characteristics of different models of a particular type of ammunition can vary, the CEU can also store and provide zero information (CCF) for different ammunition by its sub-designation.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-9

Appendix A

Table A-2. M1A1 computer correction factors Ammunition

Sub-designation

Azimuth

Elevation

HEAT

0(M830)

-.25(L)

+.37(D)

HEAT

1(M831)

+.15(R)

+.35(D)

HEAT

1 (M831A1)

+.15(R)

-.15(U)

MPAT

0(M830A1)

+.05(R)

-.60(U)

MPAT

1(M1002)

+.10(R)

-.55(U)

HE-OR-T

0(M908)

+.05(R)

-.60(U)

Sabot

0(M829)

-.13(L)

-.65(U)

Sabot

1(M865IP/PIP)

+.15(R)

-.60(U)

Sabot

1(current or T-S1 M865)*

+.15(R)

-.60(U)

Sabot

5(M829A1)

0.0

-.45(U)

M1A1 (120mm)

Sabot

6(M829A2)

-.05(L)

-.85(U)

Sabot

7(M829A3)

-0.1(L)

-0.4(U)

Canister

0(M1028)

0.0

0.0

* See Chapter 4 to determine the most up-to-date marking system. Notes. These values reflect numeric data entered into the CEU. If the CCFs are entered using the numeric keypad, the negative values correspond to up and left movements of the reticle (negative values are entered by pressing the minus [-] key first); positive values correspond to down and right movements. The CCFs can be toggled into the CEU using the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch. For example, the M831 HEAT elevation correction of +0.35 can be toggled into the CEU as 0.35 down. The 120-mm M831A1, HEAT-TP-T is a replacement round for the M831, HEAT-TP-T and is used by M1A1 tanks to conduct gunnery training exercises. During the LFAST with the M831A1 round, units should begin with the CCF of right 0.15, and up 0.15. If the first four tanks fail to screen due to low impacts or all hit very low on the screening panel (within 12 inches of the bottom edge of the target), then all subsequent tanks should switch to an alternate CCF of right 0.15, down 0.35.

Muzzle Boresight Procedures (M26A1, M27A1, and M27A3 MBD) A-13. The MBD method of boresighting the main gun is preferred over the two-point (string) method. Tank cannons are long and heavy; therefore, droop slightly due to gravitational pull. Using the two-point method of boresighting, this droop error is neither properly measured nor properly compensated for. The MBD measures the axis of the gun at the muzzle end; therefore, muzzle boresighting compensates for this droop and more reliably reflects where rounds will impact. A-14. For best firing consistency, to standardize procedures, and to ensure devices are used properly, the muzzle boresight procedure must be followed carefully: Note. Before boresighting, make sure all PMCS have been completed (TM 9-2350-264-10-1 [M1A1], Table 2-1), to include entering the CCF. z z z z

A-10

Step 1. Position the tank on as level terrain as possible with the gun tube over the front slope. Step 2. Clear all weapons and leave the main gun breech open. Step 3. Make sure the end of the gun tube is clean. Step 4. Select a boresight target with a clearly defined aiming point (always a right angle). Any part of the boresight panel may be used. Make sure all crew members involved in boresighting the vehicle know which target aiming point will be used.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Note. In operational situations, the tank may be boresighted at any known distance between 200 and 4,000 meters. z

z z z z

Step 5. With the engine running, make sure the turret hydraulic pressure gauge shows 1,500 to 1,700 psi. (If unable to operate the engine, move the AUX HYDR POWER switch to ON and make sure the pressure gauge shows 1,150 to 1,500 psi.) Step 6. Make sure the GUN SELECT switch is set on MAIN and both ballistic doors are open. Step 7. Move the GPS MAGNIFICATION to 10X. Step 8. Move the FLTR/CLEAR/shutter (SHTR) switch to CLEAR. Step 9. Ensure MBD has been collimated; if not, perform an MBD collimation check (see page A-5).

Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, make sure proper alignment procedures have been completed (see pages A-2 through A-4). z

z

z

z z z

Step 10. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY, squeeze one of the palm switches on the gunner’s power control handles (GPCH), and check for drift. (If more than 0.5 mil of drift in 2 seconds is observed, notify organizational maintenance.) Step 11. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL, squeeze one of the palm switches on the GPCH, and check for drift. Remove all drift. (Drift should be less than 0.5 mils in 20 seconds.) Step 12. With the GPCH, lay the GPS aiming dot on the boresight target, and lase. Make sure the laser range finder (LRF) is returned to the SAFE position before continuing. If lasing is not possible, with a palm switch depressed, index the known tank-to-target range into the CCP. Step 13. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL. Step 14. Move the THERMAL MODE switch on the TIS to STBY and, if the tank is equipped with an ANTI-GLARE knob, turn the ANTI-GLARE knob to position 1. Step 15. Insert the MBD into the muzzle of the main gun and make sure the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 12 o’clock position by aligning it with the 12 o’clock witness mark on the face of the gun tube.

Notes. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 3 o’clock position. All movements of the main gun will be made using manual controls. The last movement of the main gun will be up. Always use a clearly defined right angle on the target as the aiming point. If a boresight device is not available, refer to Boresight Main Gun–Alternate method under Unusual Conditions in the operator’s manual.

CAUTION Never hold the MBD eyepiece while turning the operating handle.

z

Step 16. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle finger tight and make sure the MBD eyepiece is positioned at the 3 o’clock position.

Note. With the MBD eyepiece at the 3 o’clock position, the light port used for night boresighting is pointed up. During bright days, the sun may shine through this port and cause blurring of the MBD reticle; use one hand to shield the light port from the sun.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-11

Appendix A

z

Step 17. With a pencil, mark the operating handle at the 12 o’clock position (on line with the index mark) to make sure the operating handle is tightened to the same position each time the MBD is rotated. (Once boresighting is complete, erase the mark. A new mark should be used each time the tank is boresighted or the MBD is collimated.)

Note. Focus the eyepiece and turn it so the reticle lines of the MBD are parallel to the edges of the boresight target. z

z z z z z z z

Step 18. Without touching the gun or the MBD, sight through the MBD eyepiece and direct the gunner to traverse the turret and elevate the main gun using manual controls to lay the reticle of the MBD on the target aiming point, with the last movement being up. Step 19. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY. Step 20. Ensure the GUN SELECT switch is set to MAIN. Step 21. Open the CCP door and turn the PWR switch to ON. Step 22. Press and release the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP; make sure the BORESIGHT light comes on. Step 23. Viewing through the GPS, the gunner uses the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch to move the GPS aiming dot to the boresight target aiming point. Step 24. Viewing through the GPS, the gunner uses a G pattern to lay off the target manually and re-lay the GPS aiming dot on the target aiming point, with the last movement being up. Step 25. Make sure the MBD reticle is on the defined target aiming point. If the reticle aiming points are still on target, record the boresight readings from the CCP display and proceed to step 26. If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, at least one of the following is true: „ The gunner has made an incorrect referral. „ The gunner has made an incorrect lay. „ The fire control system is faulty.

Note. If any fault is identified, correct it immediately and start boresight procedures over.

CAUTION Rotating the MBD inside the main gun may damage the gun or leave the device improperly aligned.

z z

Step 26. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, hold the tapered muzzle cone firmly and loosen the operating handle to unseat the MBD (two complete turns); remove the MBD. Step 27. Rotate the MBD 180 degrees and reinsert it into the muzzle of the main gun; make sure the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 6 o’clock position by aligning it with the 6 o’clock witness mark on the face of the gun tube.

Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 9 o’clock position.

A-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z

z

z z z

z

Step 28. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle until finger tight and the pencil mark on the operating handle is aligned with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone. (If the device is positioned correctly, the MBD eyepiece will be at the 9 o’clock position. If the pencil mark does not line up with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone, erase the mark and start boresight procedures over.) Step 29. Check the reticle of the MBD to see if it is still on the target aiming point. „ If the MBD reticle is on the target aiming point, record the azimuth (AZ) and elevation (EL) readings from the CCP display on DA Form 2408-4; proceed to step 36. „ If the MBD aiming reticle is not within one reticle line width of the target aiming point, perform collimation procedures (see page A-6). Once collimation is complete, start boresight procedures over. If collimation procedures are impractical, proceed to step 30 to determine the mean boresight reading. Step 30. Direct the gunner onto the target aiming point, as in step 18. (The gunner must use the manual controls.) Step 31. Viewing through the GPS, the gunner uses the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch to move the GPS aiming dot to the target aiming point. Step 32. Record the boresight readings from the CCP display. „ If the boresight readings for both AZ and EL are within .2 mil of the first readings (first bullet of Step 29), proceed to step 33. „ If the boresight readings for both AZ and EL are not within .2 mil of the first readings (second bullet of Step 29), and the MBD has been collimated, start boresight procedures over. „ If the boresight readings for AZ and/or EL are not within .2 mil of the first readings and the MBD is not collimated, proceed to step 33 to determine mean readings. Step 33. Determine the mean AZ and EL of the two sets of boresight readings.

Notes. If the azimuth readings are in the same direction, use the same direction calculation technique below to determine the mean. If azimuth readings are in the opposite direction, use the opposite direction calculation technique below to determine the mean. If the elevation readings are in the same direction, use the same direction calculation technique below to determine the mean. If the elevation readings are in the opposite direction, use the opposite direction calculation technique below to determine the mean. „

„

3 September 2009

Same direction calculation technique (see Table A-3a [Example 1] and Table A-3b [Example 2]): (1) Add the two readings. (2) Divide the result by 2. (3) Round off to two digits, if necessary. Opposite direction calculation technique (see Table A-3b [Example 2], and Table A-3c, [Example 3]): (1) Ignore the +, -, L, R, U, and D labels, and subtract the smaller reading from the larger reading. (2) Divide the result by 2. (3) Round off to two digits, if necessary. (4) The direction will be the same as the larger number from step (1) (+, -, L, R, U, or D).

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-13

Appendix A

Table A-3a. Example 1 EXAMPLE 1 First reading: AZ: +1.8(R), EL: +1.8(D) Second reading: AZ: +2.0(R), EL: +1.6(D) Since both azimuth and elevation readings are in the same direction, use same direction calculation technique for both. For example: AZ First reading: Second reading: Add (1st + 2d)

EL +1.8(R) +2.0(R) +3.8(R)

First reading: Second reading: Add (1st + 2d)

+1.8(D) +1.6(D) +3.4(D)

Divide by 2: +3.8(R) ÷ 2 = +1.9(R)

Divide by 2:

Mean reading: AZ: +1.9(R)

Mean reading: EL: +1.7(D)

+3.4(D) ÷ 2 = +1.7(D)

Table A-3b. Example 2 EXAMPLE 2 First reading: AZ: +.05(R), EL: -.10(U) Second reading: AZ: -.10(L), EL: -.05(U) In this case, since the azimuth readings are in the opposite directions, use the opposite direction calculation technique. Since the elevation readings are in the same direction, use the same direction calculation technique. For example: AZ Larger reading: Smaller reading: Subtract (lg -sm)

EL -.10(L) +.05(R) .05

First reading: Second reading: Add (lg + sm)

-.10(U) -.05(U) -.15(U)

Divide by 2: .05 ÷ 2 = .025 Round off to two digits: .025 = .03. Assign direction taken from larger number in step 1: -.03(L)

Divide by 2: -.15(U) ÷ 2 = -.075(U) Round off to two digits: -.075(U) = -.08(U)

Mean reading: AZ: -.03(L)

Mean reading: EL: -.08(U)

Table A-3c. Example 3 EXAMPLE 3 First reading: AZ: +.05(R), EL: -.10(U) Second reading: AZ: -.15(L), EL: +.05(D) Since both azimuth and elevation readings are in the opposite direction, use opposite direction calculation technique for both. For example: AZ Larger reading: Second reading: Subtract (lg -sm):

A-14

EL -.15(L) +.05(R) .10

Larger reading: Second reading: Subtract (lg -sm):

-.10(U) +.05(D) .05

Divide by 2: .10 ÷ 2 = .05 Assign direction taken from larger number in step 1: -.05(L)

Divide by 2: .05 ÷ 2 = .025 Round off to two digits: .025 = .03 Assign direction taken from larger number in step 1: -.03(U)

Mean reading: AZ:-.05(L)

Mean reading: EL: -.03(U)

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation z z z z z z

z

z

Step 34. The gunner uses the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch until the AZ and EL mean readings are shown on the CCP display. Step 35. Record the AZ and EL readings from the CCP display on DA Form 2408-4. Step 36. Press the ENTER push button on the CCP. Step 37. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP and make sure the proper data is displayed on the CCP display. Step 38. Make sure the BORESIGHT light is still illuminated. The gunner, using manual controls, aligns the GPS aiming dot to the boresight target aiming point. Step 39. Using the GAS boresight knobs, the gunner aligns the GAS boresight aiming cross to the boresight target aiming point and, making sure the GAS boresight knobs are fully seated, slips the scales to 0 and 0. Step 40. Make sure the GPS aiming dot, GAS boresight cross, and MBD are still aligned on the target aiming point. „ If the GPS aiming dot, GAS boresight cross, and MBD are still aligned on the target aiming point, continue boresight procedures with step 41. „ If a mean boresight reading was not determined in step 33 and the GPS aiming dot, GAS boresight cross, and MBD are not still aligned on the target aiming point, start boresight procedures over. „ If a mean boresight reading was determined in step 33, the MBD reticle will not be aligned with the target aiming point. Step 41. Move the THERMAL MODE switch to ON and the FLTR/CLEAR/SHTR switch to SHTR.

Note. USMC Abrams go to Step 46. z z z z

Step 42. Unlock the TIS BORESIGHT knobs. Align the TIS (10X magnification) RETICLE to the target aiming point. Step 43. Lock the TIS BORESIGHT knobs and record the settings. Step 44. Move the THERMAL MODE switch to STBY and the FLTR/CLEAR/SHTR switch to CLEAR. Step 45. Remove the MBD from the muzzle of the main gun.

WARNING Do not use the LRF when operating the MRS.

Note. US Army Abrams go to Step 67. z

Step 46. Perform firepower enhancement program (FEP) TIS boresight.

Note. Do not superimpose FEP reticle over GPS reticle. FEP TIS reticle will not be accurate. z z z z

31 May 2010

Step 47. Make sure right (THERMAL) ballistic door is open. Step 48. Look into the GPS eyepiece and make sure GPS day reticle is on the target aiming point. Step 49. Set THERMAL MODE knob to ON. Step 50. Set FLTR/CLEAR/SHTR switch to SHTR.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

A-15

Appendix A z z z z

Step 51. Set SEARCH/STARE knob to STARE. Step 52. Set MODE knob to NORMAL. Step 53. Set MAGNIFICATION knob to 12X or 25X. Step 54. Set FILTER knob to MAN-CLR.

Note. It may be necessary to make adjustments with CONTRAST knob and BRIGHTNESS knob for best image and identification when BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST knob is in MAN (manual) position. In normal conditions, the BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST knob should be set in to AUTO position for best results. z z z z z z z z z z z z z z

Step 55. Set BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST knob to AUTO. Step 56. Set MODE knob to BS (boresight). Step 57. Look into GPS eyepiece or BICU CRT and use BORESIGHT switch L, R, UP and DOWN to align FEP TIS boresight reticle on the target aiming point. Step 58. Press center of BORESIGHT switch to save boresight data. Step 59. Read data displayed in GPS TIS FOV to ensure new boresight data is updated. Step 60. Record CURRENT BS settings. Step 61. Set MODE knob to NORM to exit boresight. Step 62. Set THERMAL MODE knob to SDBY or OFF as required. Step 63. Set FLTR/CLEAR/SHTR switch to CLEAR. Step 64. Close right (THERMAL) ballistic door. Step 65. Press ENTER pushbutton on CCP. Step 66. Remove MBD from the end of the gun tube. Step 67. Press the ENTER pushbutton on the CCP. Step 68. Perform MRS boresight. „ Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL.

*Note. Make sure the LRF is on SAFE. Move the MRS lever to IN. (The MRS light on the CCP should illuminate and 0.0 should be displayed on the CCP display; if not, notify organizational maintenance.) „ Press and release the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP; make sure the BORESIGHT light comes on. „ Grasp and hold the GPCH for approximately 5 seconds, after the gun goes to zero elevation, release the GPCH. „ Use the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch to align the GPS reticle within the MRS reticle. (If unable to obtain a clear picture of both the GPS and MRS reticles, notify organizational maintenance.) „ Record the AZ and EL readings from the display on DA Form 2408-4. (If unable to align the GPS and MRS, notify organizational maintenance.) „ Push the MRS lever to OUT; make sure the display has cleared and the BORESIGHT and MRS lights have gone out. Step 69. Make sure the KE and HEAT AMMO SUBDES are correct (for example, the appropriate service round subdesignation for wartime conditions or AMMO SUBDES 1 [training HEAT and training sabot] for the training environment). Step 70. Make sure the following fire control inputs are correct: „ *Air temperature. (If current temperature is not available, see Table A-7 on page A-40). „ Ammunition temperature. „ *Barometric pressure. Barometric pressure. (If current barometric pressure is not available, see Table A-8 on page A-41). „ CCFs. Step 71. Conduct precision alignment of the GAS (see steps below). „

z

z

z

A-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

PRECISION ALIGNMENT OF THE GAS z z z z

Step 1. Zero the CROSSWIND: Press the CROSSWIND, 0, and ENTER push buttons; the CROSSWIND light will stay on. Step 2. Zero the CANT: Press the CANT, 0, and ENTER push buttons; the CANT light will stay on. Step 3. Zero the LEAD: Press the LEAD, 0, and ENTER push buttons; the LEAD light will stay on. Step 4. Move the AMMUNITION SELECT switch on the GPS to SABOT. With the palm switches pressed, re-lase or manually index the range to the boresight target and, using manual controls, lay the GPS aiming dot on the target aiming point. The boresight panel may be at any range; however, it should be at battlesight range for the primary ammunition to be used.

Note. The boresight panel must be placed at a range that corresponds to a range line on the GAS reticle. z

z z

z

Step 5. Without slipping the scales on the GAS BORESIGHT knobs, refer the GAS KE/STAFF reticle to the range line at which you have boresighted. Record the readings from the GAS AZ and EL knobs on DA Form 2408-4; be sure to place these readings on the GAS when firing sabot. Step 6. Using the GAS AZ and EL knobs, return the settings to 0 and 0. Turn the RETICLE select knob on the GAS to HEAT. Step 7. Move the AMMUNITION SELECT switch on the GPS to multipurpose antitank (MPAT)/HEAT and re-lase or, with the palm switches pressed, manually index the range to the boresight target. Release the palm switches, then using manual controls, re-lay the GPS aiming dot on the target aiming point. Step 8. Without slipping the scales on the GAS BORESIGHT knobs, refer the GAS HEAT to the range line at which you have boresighted. Record the readings from the GAS AZ and EL knobs on DA Form 2408-4; be sure to place these readings on the GAS when firing HEAT.

Note. At this point, to use a particular reticle (sabot or HEAT), select the correct reticle and add the information for that reticle to the GAS BORESIGHT knobs for the ammunition being used. z

z

Step 9. To re-enable CROSSWIND, CANT, and LEAD automatic inputs to the computer, press the CROSSWIND push button, then the CANT push button, then the LEAD push button; the keys should no longer be illuminated. Step 10. Turn off the CCP by closing and latching the CCP door.

NIGHT BORESIGHTING A-15. Night boresighting can be accomplished following normal boresighting procedures. The boresight target must have an illuminated and heated reference point that can be seen through the MBD, GPS, GAS, and TIS. The TC can use a chemlight or filtered flashlight to illuminate the MBD aiming reticle. (M26A1 and M27A1 MBDs have a built-in light port to facilitate night boresighting.)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-17

Appendix A

A-16. Most training ranges are equipped with targets that allow the crew to boresight at night. The following are examples of field-expedient boresight targets for tactical situations: z Caliber .50 ammunition can with charcoal (for heating) and a chemlight or flashlight for the reference point. z Any POL container with charcoal (for heating) and a chemlight or flashlight for the reference point. z A small boresight panel (18 inches by 18 inches) quartered, colored with sand and olive drab paint, with a visible and heated aiming point, and a chemlight or flashlight for the reference point. z Any object in the tank’s sector that has a clearly defined right angle for use as a reference point when viewed through the TIS. Place a chemlight on that point as a reference point for the MBD, GPS, and GAS.

BORESIGHTING THE GAS (GPS AND TIS INOPERATIVE) USING THE M26A1, M27A1, AND M27A3 MBD A-17. In some tactical situations (because of mechanical breakdown or the effects of ballistic shock), the tank crew must use the GAS. The crew can boresight the tank and, with accurate range determination, still fire effectively. Notes. These procedures are only to be used in tactical situations. The GAS can be boresighted at any range. The parallax caused by boresighting at any range will be minimal. These procedures are best used with the boresight panel at the battlesight range for your primary service KE ammunition. z

Step 1. Insert the MBD into the muzzle of the main gun, and make sure the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 12 o’clock position by aligning it with the 12 o’clock witness mark on the face of the gun tube. (Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 3 o’clock position.)

CAUTION Never hold the MBD eyepiece while turning the operating handle.

z

Step 2. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle finger tight, and make sure the MBD eyepiece is positioned at the 3 o’clock position.

Note. With the MBD eyepiece at the 3 o’clock position, the light port used for night boresighting is pointed up. During bright days, the sun may shine through this port and cause blurring of the MBD reticle; use one hand to shield the light port from the sun’s rays. z

z

z z

A-18

Step 3. With a pencil, mark the operating handle at the 12 o’clock position (on line with the index mark) to make sure the operating handle is tightened to the same position each time the MBD is repositioned. (Once boresighting is complete, erase the mark. A new mark should be used each time the tank is boresighted or the MBD is collimated.) Step 4. Without touching the gun or the MBD, sight through the MBD eyepiece, and direct the gunner to use manual controls to traverse the turret and elevate the main gun to lay the reticle of the MBD on the target aiming point. Step 5. Using the GAS boresight knobs, the gunner aligns the GAS boresight cross to the boresight target aiming point, making sure the knobs are fully seated. Step 6. Slip the AZ and EL scales on the GAS to 0 and 0.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

CAUTION Rotating the MBD inside the gun tube may damage the gun or leave the device improperly aligned.

z

z

Step 7. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, hold the tapered muzzle cone, loosen the operating handle two complete turns to unseat the MBD, and remove the MBD from the gun tube. Step 8. Rotate the MBD 180 degrees and reinsert it into the muzzle of the main gun; make sure the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 6 o’clock position by aligning it with the 6 o’clock witness mark on the face of the gun tube.

Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 9 o’clock position. z

z

z z z

z z z

31 May 2010

Step 9. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle until finger tight and the pencil mark on the operating handle is aligned with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone. (If the device is positioned correctly, the MBD eyepiece will be at the 9 o’clock position. If the mark does not line up with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone, erase the mark and start boresight procedures over.) Step 10. Check the reticle of the MBD to see if it is still on the target aiming point. „ If the MBD reticle is on target, proceed to step 16. „ If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, collimate the MBD (see page A-5). „ If the MBD cannot be collimated, continue boresight procedures. Step 11. Direct the gunner onto the target aiming point. (The gunner must use the manual controls.) Step 12. Using the GAS boresight knobs, the gunner will align the GAS boresight cross to the boresight target aiming point, making sure the knobs are fully seated. Step 13. The gunner will record the readings from the GAS AZ and EL boresight knobs and divide the readings by 2. *Example: AZ(R)0.4 ÷ 2 = (R)0.2 EL(L)0.6 ÷ 2 = (L)0.3 Step 14. The gunner will move the AZ and EL boresight knobs on the GAS to the readings determined in step 13. Step 15. Without moving the GAS boresight knobs, slip the scales to 0 and 0. Step 16. Apply the appropriate sight correction factor (SCF) for the round to be fired (see Table A-4).

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

A-19

Appendix A

Note. To apply new SCFs when changing battlecarry ammunition or firing a different type of ammunition, return the GAS boresight knobs to AZ and EL readings of 0 and 0 before applying the new SCF. Table A-4. M1A1 sight correction factors Ammunition

Azimuth

Elevation

HEAT (M830)

0.2(R)

0.6(R)

HEAT (M831)

0.2(L)

0.6(R)

HEAT (M831A1)

0.2(L)

0.0

M1A1

MPAT (M830A1)

0.0

0.4(L)

HE-OR-T (M908)

0.0

0.4(L)

Sabot (M829)

0.2(R)

0.8(L)

Sabot (M829A1)

0.0

0.2(L)

Sabot (M829A2)

0.0

1.2(L)

Sabot (M829A3)

0.0

0.2(L)

Sabot (M865IP/PIP)

0.2(L)

0.2(L)

Sabot (current or T-S1 M865)*

0.2(L)

0.2(L)

Canister (M1028)

0.0

0.0

* See Chapter 2 to determine the most up-to-date marking system. Note. Left (L) and right (R) symbols indicate the direction to turn the GAS boresight knobs.

BORESIGHT LOSS A-18. Boresighting is simply an alignment process by which the gun and sighting system are referred to the same point. Any movement of the gun or sights away from that alignment is a loss of boresight. The gun may move out of alignment because— z The gun temperature has changed since boresighting. z Firing or other shocks to the system (such as extensive road travel or enemy round impacts) disturbed the sight alignment. A-19. For the tank crew in combat, it is not important how boresight loss occurs, just that it does. While the tank has a system to correct for artificial boresight loss (MRS), the most reliable method of correcting boresight loss is to re-boresight the system. In training, the system should be boresighted before every firing table. In a hostile environment, the system should be boresighted whenever the tactical situation permits.

BORESIGHT CHECK A-20. During the long periods between the time the system is boresighted and the time the tank is fired, boresight loss may occur due to changes in weather conditions. Crews can check for boresight loss by conducting a boresight check: z Step 1. Select a target as close as possible to the range at which the tank was boresighted. z Step 2. Lase or manually index the range to target. z Step 3. Place fire control mode into EMERGENCY mode. z Step 4. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP.

A-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z z z

Step 5. Lay the GPS reticle on a clearly defined aiming point. Step 6. Insert the MBD into the gun tube. Step 7. Note the position of the MBD reticle. „ If the MBD reticle is on the same target aiming point determined during boresighting, no boresight loss has occurred. „ If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point and a collimated MBD was used, boresight has been lost: reboresight the tank. „ If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, and a noncollimated MBD was used, remove the MBD and rotate it (180 degrees). If the midpoint between the first and second reticle positions coincides with the gunner’s aiming point, the tank is still boresighted. If it does not, boresight has been lost; reboresight the tank.

MRS CONFIRMATION A-21. An MRS update is used to correct for boresight loss when re-boresighting or a boresight check cannot be performed. An MRS update can be accomplished only if the tank sights and the MRS have been properly boresighted. A-22. Armament accuracy check 6 determines only whether the MRS can correct an artificial boresight loss induced by the crew. A-23. During live-fire training, crews can monitor the performance of their MRS to determine if the MRS performs within tolerance. Upon completion of a live-fire event, perform the following procedures: z Step 1. Perform an MRS update and record the readings. (If the MRS update indicates no change, perform a boresight check.) Move the MRS lever to the OUT position. z Step 2. Select a target as close as possible to the range at which the tank was boresighted. z Step 3. Lase or manually index the range to target. z Step 4. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP. z Step 5. Using manual controls, lay the GPS aiming dot on the target aiming point. z Step 6. Insert the MBD into the gun tube. z Step 7. Note the position of the MBD reticle. „ If the MBD reticle is on the same target aiming point determined during boresighting, the MRS performed correctly. „ If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, and a noncollimated MBD was used to boresight, remove and rotate the MBD 180 degrees. If the midpoint between the first and second positions of the reticle coincides with the gunner’s aiming point, the MRS performed correctly. „ If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point as described above, use the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch and refer the GPS aiming dot to the target aiming point. „ To determine if the MRS is within tolerance, compare the new boresight readings to the previous boresight readings or MRS update readings established in Step 1. If the difference in either AZ or EL is greater than .15 mil, the MRS is out of tolerance; notify organizational maintenance.

EMERGENCY BORESIGHT PROCEDURES A-24. If immediate return fire is not required, attempt an MRS update; then at the first opportunity, move the tank to a position where it can be re-boresighted. If boresighting with an MBD is not possible, initiate emergency boresight procedures using the alternate method described in the operator’s manual. A-25. When a component of the fire control system malfunctions or is damaged by fire, the remaining components should be boresighted.

BORESIGHTING THE M1A2 SEP/V2 A-26. Boresighting establishes a definitive relationship between the axis of the bore of the gun and the sights at zero super elevation, providing a basis for all sight alignment. When the tank is boresighted at a

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-21

Appendix A

known range, the fire control system provides system parallax corrections to the GPS and the TIS at other ranges. It is impossible to fire accurately without sight alignment; therefore, boresighting is fundamental in tank gunnery. A-27. The numbers in the GCDP change as the reticle adjusts during boresighting. Reticle movements of 7.5 mils in any direction may be induced by using the four-way switch on the GCDP; however, with a cold gun and the GPS properly mounted, no more than 2 to 3 mils movement in any direction should be required to boresight. If the reticle must be moved more than 5 mils off center to reach boresight alignment, recheck the procedure. Look for uncontrolled reticle drift and perform a fire control system test. A-28. The main gun, GPS, TIS, CITV, MRS, and GAS should be boresighted each time the gunner or TC changes, loss of boresight occurs, or as the situation permits. In training, perform complete boresight procedures before each firing table. In combat, boresight before anticipated contact and after movement.

COMPUTER CORRECTION FACTORS AND AMMUNITION SUB-DESIGNATIONS A-29. CCFs refine and improve the computer ballistic solutions, which are calculated using ballistic data from stationary tanks and fixed gun mount test firings. These factors correct the ballistic data for part of the mean jump error not considered during these test firings (see Table A-5). A-30. Because the ballistic characteristics of different models of a particular type of ammunition can vary, the turret mission processor unit (TMPU) can store zero information (CCF) for every ammunition type designed to be fired from the tank. A-31. To enter the AMMO SUBDES into the Fire Control System (FCS), press the ADJUST push button on the main menu of the GCDP, then the AMMO SUBDES push button. Use the four-way switch on the GCDP to highlight the desired ammunition. Press the ENT key on the GCDP numeric keypad to store the AMMO SUBDES in the TMPU. Repeat this procedure for each type of ammunition to be fired. A-32. The CCFs and AMMO SUBDES are entered into the FCS manually during before-operation checks. To apply CCFs, go to the ADJUST menu, press the ZERO push button and, using the four-way switch (or keypad) on the GCDP, display the desired values in the GCDP window. Press the ENT key on the GCDP numeric keypad to store the values in the TMPU.

MUZZLE BORESIGHT PROCEDURES (M27A1 OR M27A3 MBD) A-33. The MBD method of boresighting the main gun is preferred over the old two-point (string) method. Tank cannons are long and heavy; therefore, droop slightly due to gravitational pull. Using the two-point method of boresighting, this droop is neither measured nor compensated for. The MBD measures the axis of the gun at the muzzle end; therefore, muzzle boresighting compensates for this droop and more reliably reflects where rounds will impact. A-34. For best firing consistency, to standardize procedures, and to ensure devices are used properly, the muzzle boresight procedure must be followed carefully.

A-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Table A-5. M1A2 SEP computer correction factors Ammunition

Sub-designation

Azimuth

Elevation

HEAT

M830

-0.25(L)

+0.37(D)

HEAT

M831

+0.15(R)

+0.35(D)

HEAT

M831A1

+0.15(R)

-0.15(U)

MPAT

M830A1

+0.05(R)

-0.60(U)

MPAT

M1002

+0.10(R)

-0.55(U)

HE-OR-T

M908

+0.05(R)

-0.60(U)

TPMP-T

M1002

+0.10(R)

-0.55(U)

M1A2 SEP

Sabot

M829

-0.13(L)

-0.65(U)

Sabot

M829A1

0.00

-0.45(U)

Sabot

M829A2

-0.05(L)

-0.85(U)

Sabot

M829A3

-0.1(L)

-0.4(U)

Sabot

M865IP/PIP

+0.15(R)

-0.60(U)

Sabot

Current or T-S1 M865*

+0.15(R)

-0.60(U)

Canister

M1028

0.0

0.0

* See Chapter 2 to determine the most up-to-date marking system. Notes. These values reflect numeric data entered into the TMPU. If the CCFs are entered using the numeric keypad, the negative values correspond to up and left movements of the reticle (negative values are entered by pressing the minus [-] key first); positive values correspond to down and right movements. The CCFs can be toggled into the TMPU using the gunner’s four-way adjust switch; for example, the M831 HEAT elevation correction of +0.35 can be toggled into the TMPU as 0.35. The 120-mm M831A1, HEAT-TP-T is a replacement round for the M831, HEAT-TP-T and is used by M1A2 SEP tanks to conduct gunnery training exercises. During the LFAST with the M831A1 round, units should begin with the CCF of right 0.15, and up If the first four tanks fail to screen due to low impacts or all hit very low on the screening panel (within 12 inches of the bottom edge of the target), then all subsequent tanks should switch to an alternate CCF of right 0.15, down 0.35.

Note. Before boresighting, make sure all PMCS have been completed (TM 9-2350-388-10-1, Table 2-1), to include entering the CCFs. z z z z

Step 1. Position the tank on as level terrain as possible with the gun tube over the front slope. Step 2. Set FIRE CONTROL switch to MANUAL and clear all weapons and leave the main gun breech open. Step 3. Make sure the end of the gun tube is clean. Step 4. Select a boresight target with a clearly defined aiming point (always a right angle) as close to 1,200 meters as possible. Any part of the boresight panel may be used. Make sure all crew members involved in boresighting the vehicle know which target aiming point will be used.

Note. In operational situations, the tank may be boresighted at any known distance between 200 and 5,000 meters.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-23

Appendix A

z

z z z z

Step 5. With the engine running, make sure the turret hydraulic pressure gauge shows 1,500 to 1,750 psi. (If unable to operate the engine, move the AUX HYDR POWER switch to ON and make sure the pressure gauge shows 900 to 1,750 psi.) Step 6. Make sure the GUN SELECT switch is turned to MAIN and both ballistic doors are open. Step 7. Move the GPS MAGNIFICATION switch to 10X. Step 8. Move the FLTR/CLEAR/SHTR switch to CLEAR. Step 9. Make sure the MBD has been collimated; if not, perform an MBD collimation check (see page A-6).

Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, make sure proper alignment procedures have been completed; see pages A-2 through A-5. z

z

z

z z

Step 10. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY, squeeze one of the palm switches on the GCH, and check for drift. If more than 0.5 mil of drift in 1second is observed null out the EMERGENCY mode drift. Step 11. Turn on the CITV, make sure the CITV is in CITV GLOS (gunner’s line of sight) mode, move the CITV to NFOV 13X, move the FILTERS ANTI GLARE to AUTO, and move the FRAME INTEGRATION switch to SEARCH. Step 12. With the GCH, lay the GPS aiming dot on the boresight target, and lase. Make sure the LRF is returned to the SAFE position before continuing. If lasing is not possible, with a palm switch depressed, index the known tank-to-target range into the GCDP. Step 13. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL. Step 14. Move the THERMAL MODE switch to STBY, turn the ANTI-GLARE knob to AUTO CLEAR, and turn the SEARCH/STARE knob to SEARCH.

Note. Ensure that you have entered the correct CCF’s and that you have returned the GCDP to MAIN MENU. z

Step 15. Set the Turret Hull Power Distribution (M1A2) (THPD) VALVE AZ DRIVE and THPD VALVE EL DRIVE circuit breakers to OFF at the GCDP.

z

Step 16. Press RETURN twice to return to the MAIN MENU.

z

Step 17. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL, grasp the GCH and attempt to traverse left/right and elevate/depress the main gun. Ensure the hydraulic solenoids do not engage and the turret and main gun do not move. If the hydraulic solenoids engage and the turret and main gun move notify unit maintenance. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL. Step 18. Insert the MBD into the muzzle of the main gun, and make sure the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 12 o’clock position.

z

Notes. If using the M27A3 MBD, proceed to step 22. All movements of the main gun will be made using manual controls. The last movement of the main gun will be up. Always use a clearly defined right angle on the target as the aiming point. If a boresight device is not available, refer to Boresight Main Gun-Alternate Method under Unusual Conditions in the operator’s manual.

A-24

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

CAUTION Never hold the MBD eyepiece while turning the operating handle.

Note. With the MBD eyepiece at the 3 o’clock position, the light port used for night boresighting is pointed up. During bright days, the sun may shine through this port and cause blurring of the MBD reticle. Use one hand to shield the light port from the sun. z z

Step 19. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle finger tight and make sure the MBD eyepiece is positioned at the 3 o’clock position. Step 20. With a piece of chalk, mark the operating handle at the 12 o’clock position (on line with the index mark) to make sure the operating handle is tightened to the same position each time the MBD is repositioned. (Once boresighting is complete, erase the mark. A new mark should be used each time the tank is boresighted or the MBD is collimated.) Proceed to step 30.

Note. Focus the eyepiece and turn it so the reticle lines of the MBD are parallel to the edges of the boresight target. If using the M27A3 MBD, use steps 22 through 28. z z z z z z

z z z

z z z z

Step 21. Insert the MBD into the muzzle end of the main gun and ensure the tapered muzzle cone is fully seated into the muzzle end of the main gun. Step 22. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, rotate the operating handle clockwise until it is finger tight, to secure the MBD in the gun tube. Step 23. With a piece of chalk, mark the edge of the tapered muzzle cone parallel with the silver arrow. Step 24. While holding the tapered muzzle cone, rotate the operating handle counterclockwise to loosen the MBD and completely remove the MBD from the gun tube. Step 25. Insert the MBD into the gun tube ensuring the chalk mark on the edge of tapered muzzle cone is positioned at 3 o’clock relative to the gun tube. Step 26. While ensuring the tapered muzzle cone is firmly seated in the muzzle end of the gun tube, rotate the operating handle clockwise until it is finger tight and the silver arrow corresponds with the chalk mark on the tapered muzzle cone. The optical eyepiece should be at the 3 o’clock position. Step 27. If the optical unit eyepiece is located at the 3 o’clock position, then proceed to step 28. If not, remove the MBD, erase the chalk mark line and repeat steps 22 through 26. Step 28. While looking through the optical unit eyepiece, adjust focus until the reticle and target are sharp and clear then proceed to step 29. Step 29. Without touching the gun or the MBD, sight through the MBD eyepiece and direct the gunner to traverse the turret and elevate the main gun using manual controls to lay the reticle of the MBD on the target aiming point, with the last movement being up. Step 30. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY. Step 31. With the GCDP on the MAIN MENU, press the ADJUST push button. Step 32. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the ADJUST menu. Step 33. Press the GPS push button on the BORESIGHT menu.

Note. If AZ or EL numbers in GCDP display for GPS MAIN MENU are more than 7.5 mils or the reticle will not align, notify unit maintenance.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-25

Appendix A

Step 34. Viewing through the GPS, the gunner uses the four-way switch on the GCDP to move the GPS reticle aiming dot to the boresight target aiming point. z Step 35. Viewing through the GPS, the gunner uses a G pattern to lay off the target manually and re-lay the GPS aiming dot on the target aiming point with the last movement being up. z Step 36. Make sure the MBD reticle is on the defined target aiming point. If the reticle aiming points are still on target, record AZ values, indicating negative values, and EL values, indicating negative values, as displayed on the GPS MAIN menu for future reference and proceed to step 37. If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, at least one of the following is true: „ The gunner has made an incorrect referral. „ The gunner has made an incorrect lay. „ The fire control system is faulty. A-35. If the MBD reticle still fails to align to upper left corner of the boresight target, or the main gun drops without GCH or CCHA palm switches depressed, notify unit maintenance. z

Note. If any fault is identified, correct it immediately and start boresight procedures over. z

Step 37. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, hold the tapered muzzle cone firmly and loosen the operating handle two complete turns to unseat the MBD; remove the MBD.

CAUTION Rotating the MBD inside the main gun may damage the gun or leave the device improperly aligned.

z

Step 38. Rotate the MBD 180 degrees and reinsert it into the muzzle of the main gun; make sure the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 6 o’clock position.

Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 9 o’clock position. z

z

z z z

A-26

Step 39. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle until finger tight and the chalk mark on the operating handle is aligned with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone. (If the device is positioned correctly, the MBD eyepiece will be at the 9 o’clock position. If the chalk mark does not line up with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone, erase the mark and start boresight procedures over.) Step 40. Check the reticle of the MBD to see if it is still on the target aiming point. „ If the MBD reticle is on the target aiming point, record the AZ and EL readings from the GCDP on DA Form 2408-4; proceed to step 47. „ If the MBD aiming reticle is not within one reticle line width of the target aiming point, perform collimation procedures (see page A-5). Once collimation is complete, start boresight procedures over. „ If collimation procedures are impractical, proceed to step 41 to determine the mean boresight reading. Step 41. Direct the gunner onto the target aiming point, as in step 29. (The gunner must use the manual controls.) Step 42. Viewing through the GPS, the gunner uses the four-way switch on the GCDP to move the GPS reticle to the target aiming point. Step 43. Record the boresight readings from the GCDP. „ If the boresight readings for both AZ and EL are within .2 mil of the first readings (step 37), proceed to step 44. „ If the boresight readings for both AZ and EL are not within .2 mil of the first readings (step 36), and the MBD is collimated, start boresight procedures over.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

If the boresight readings for both AZ and EL are not within .2 mil of the first readings and the MBD was not collimated, proceed to step 44 to determine mean reading. Step 44. Determine the mean AZ and EL of the two sets of boresight readings.

„

z

Note. If the azimuth readings are in the same direction, use the same direction calculation technique below to determine the mean. If azimuth readings are in the opposite direction, use the opposite direction calculation technique below to determine the mean. Same direction calculation technique (see Table A-3a and Table A-3b on page A-14): − Add the two readings. − Divide the result by 2. − Round off to two digits, if necessary. „ Opposite direction calculation technique (see Table A-3b and Table A-3c on page A-14): − Ignore the +, -, L, R, U, and D labels, and subtract the smaller reading from the larger reading. − Divide the result by 2. − Round off to two digits, if necessary. − The direction will be the same as the larger number from step (1) (+, -, L, R, U, or D). Step 45. The gunner uses the four-way switch on the GCDP to enter the mean reading for AZ and EL. Step 46. Record AZ and EL readings from the GCDP on DA Form 2408-4. Step 47. Press the ENT key on the GCDP keypad twice to enter the AZ and EL readings; then verify the boresight numbers on the GPS menu. Step 48. Using the manual controls, re-lay the GPS reticle aiming dot on the target aiming point. Step 49. Press the CITV SETUP push button on the VEHICLE SYSTEMS menu. Step 50. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the CITV SETUP menu to enter BORESIGHT (MAIN) menu. Step 51. Align the CITV (NFOV) reticle aiming dot to the target aiming point using the fourway switch. Step 52. Record the AZ and EL readings from the CITV (indicated on the BORESIGHT (MAIN) menu) on DA Form 2408-4. Step 53. Press the ENT key twice to enter the AZ and EL readings; then verify the CITV boresight numbers on the BORESIGHT (MAIN) menu and on GCDP BORESIGHT menu. Step 54. Prior to boresighting the GAS or TIS, make sure the GPS, CITV, and MBD are still on the target aiming point. Step 55. Using the GAS boresight knobs, the gunner aligns the GAS boresight aiming cross to the boresight target aiming point and, making sure the GAS boresight knobs are fully seated, slips the scales to 0 and 0. Step 56. Make sure the GPS aiming dot, GAS boresight cross, and MBD are still aligned on the target aiming point. „ If the GPS aiming dot, GAS boresight cross, and MBD are still aligned on the target aiming point, continue boresight procedures with step 57. „ If a mean boresight reading was not determined (step 44) and the GPS aiming dot, GAS boresight cross, and MBD are not still aligned on the target aiming point, start boresight procedures over. „ If a mean boresight reading was determined in step 45, the MBD reticle will not be aligned with the target aiming point. Step 57. Set FLTR/CLEAR/SHTR switch to SHTR. „

z z z z z z z z z z z

z

z

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-27

Appendix A

z z z z z z z z z z z

Step 58. Look in the GPS eyepiece and make sure the reticle is still on the target aiming point of the boresight panel. Step 59. Move the THERMAL MODE switch to BIOC OFF position. Step 60. Move the MODE knob to BS, move the MAGNIFICATION knob to 13X, and move the POLARITY switch to white/hot (W/H) or black/hot (B/H), as desired. Step 61. Adjust the picture to the desired levels. Step 62. Align the TIS reticle aiming dot on target aiming point of the boresight target using the BORESIGHT switch. Step 63. Record AZ and EL values, indicating negative values, as displayed on TIS thermal display on a DA Form 2408-4. Step 64. Move the MODE knob to NORMAL, and move the THERMAL MODE switch to the required position. Step 65. Press RETURN on the CDU to return to VEHICLE SYSTEMS menu. Step 66. Press the RETURN push button three times on the BORESIGHT menu to return to the MAIN MENU. Step 67. Remove the MBD from the muzzle of the main gun. Step 68. Press the MAINT pushbutton on the GCDP MAIN menu. Press FIRE CONTROL CB pushbutton on the MAINTENANCE menu. Set THPD VALVE AZ DRIVE and THPD EL DRIVE circuit breakers to on. Press the RETURN pushbutton on MAINTENANCE menu twice to return to MAIN menu.

WARNING Do not use the LRF when operating the MRS.

z

Step 69. Perform MRS boresight.

Note. Make sure the LRF is on SAFE. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL. With the GCDP on the MAIN menu, press the ADJUST pushbutton on the GCDP. „ Press the BORESIGHT pushbutton on the ADJUST menu. „ Press the MRS pushbutton on BORESIGHT menu. „ Grasp and hold the GPCH and palm switches for five seconds, then release; the gun will go to zero degrees elevation. „ Use the four-way switch on the GCDP to align the GPS reticle within the black MRS reticle. (If unable to obtain a clear picture of both the GPS and MRS reticles, notify organizational maintenance.) „ Record the AZ and EL readings from the display on DA Form 2408-4. (If unable to align the GPS and MRS, notify organizational maintenance.) „ Press the ENT key on the GCDP keypad twice to store the AZ and EL readings for the MRS boresight data. „ Press the RETURN push button on the GCDP three times to return to the MAIN menu. Step 70. Make sure the following fire control inputs are correct: „ Air temperature. (If current temperature is not available, see Table A-7 on page A-33.) „ Ammunition temperature. „ Barometric pressure. (If current barometric pressure is not available, see Table A-8 on page A-34.) „ CCFs. „ „

z

A-28

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z

z

z

Step 71. To verify data stored in the turret mission processor unit (TMPU), press the ADJUST push button on the MAIN menu of the GCDP. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the ADJUST menu and make sure the GPS, CITV, and MRS boresight readings coincide with previously recorded boresight readings. Step 72. Make sure the KE and HEAT ammunition sub-designations are correct (for example, the appropriate service round sub-designation for wartime conditions or AMMO SUBDES 1 [training HEAT and training sabot] for the training environment). Step 73. Perform precision alignment of the GAS (see steps below).

PRECISION ALIGNMENT OF THE GAS z

z z

z

Step 1. With the GCDP at the MAIN menu, select METRL DATA, CROSSWIND, and MANUAL, enter the number 0, press the ENT push button on the GCDP keypad, and press RETURN two times. Step 2. With the GCDP at the MAIN menu, select SENSORS, press the ATTD and CANT push buttons, select MANUAL, enter the number 0, and press RETURN three times. Step 3. With the GCDP at the main menu, press the SENSORS push button. At the sensors menu, push the LEAD push button and the MANUAL push button. Press the 0 push button and the ENTER push button on the key pad. Press the RETURN push button twice to return to main menu. Step 4. Push the SABOT push button on the AMMUNITION SELECT panel on the GPS. With the palm switches pressed, re-lase or manually index the range to the boresight target and, using manual controls, lay the GPS aiming dot on the target aiming point. The boresight panel may be at any range; however, it should be at battlesight range for the primary ammunition to be used.

Note. The boresight panel must be placed at a range that corresponds to a range line on the GAS reticle. z

z z

z

Step 5. Without slipping the scales on the GAS BORESIGHT knobs, refer to the GAS KE/STAFF reticle 1,200-meter aiming dot (or the range line at which you have boresighted) to the target aiming point. Record the readings from the GAS AZ and EL knobs; be sure to place these readings on the GAS when firing sabot. Step 6. Using the GAS AZ and EL knobs, return the settings to 0 and 0. Turn the RETICLE select knob on the GAS to HEAT. Step 7. Push the HEAT push button on the AMMUNITION SELECT panel on the GPS and relase or, with the palm switches pressed, manually index range to the boresight target. Re-lay the GPS reticle aiming dot on the target aiming point. Step 8. Without slipping the scales on the GAS BORESIGHT knobs, refer the GAS MPAT/HEAT reticle 1,200-meter aiming point (or the range line at which you have boresighted) to the target aiming point. Record the readings from the GAS AZ and EL knobs; be sure to place these readings on the GAS when firing HEAT.

Note. At this point, to use a particular reticle (KE/STAFF or MPAT/HEAT), select the correct reticle and add the information for that reticle to the GAS BORESIGHT knobs for the ammunition being used. z z z

Step 9. Re-enable CROSSWIND: With the GCDP at the MAIN menu, select METRL DATA, CROSSWIND, and AUTO, and press RETURN two times. Step 10. Re-enable CANT: With the GCDP at the MAIN menu, select SENSORS, press the ATTD and CANT push buttons, select AUTO, and press RETURN three times. Step 11. Re-enable LEAD: With the GCDP at the MAIN menu, press the SENSORS push button. At the SENSORS menu, push the LEAD, then AUTO push buttons, and press RETURN twice to return to the MAIN menu.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-29

Appendix A

Note. After boresighting and before screening, verify plumb and synchronization. WHAT PLUMB AND SYNCHRONIZATION IS AND WHY WE PLUMB/SYNC THE M1A2SEP/V2 TANK A-36. Many Master Gunners are asked to explain plumb and sync, and why it must be performed. Hopefully, the following paragraphs will answer your questions.

Plumb and Synchronization Defined A-37. Plumb is the vertical alignment (a straight line). M1A2SEP/V2 tank crewmen translate vertical alignment into the guns vertical range of motion (30 degree of travel equaling +20 degrees to -10 degrees) and the range of motion of the Dual Axis Head Assembly (DAHA) and the CITV headmirror. In a perfect world, the gun will move in a vertical straight line throughout its axis. But, due to specification variances that are allowed for in tank production, this is not always true. The sights and the sight mounts, gun mounts, gun trunnions, and the cradle are allowed variances that meet production standards, but may not track along a perfectly straight line through its full range of motion. Now for Synchronization (Sync) it is defined as moving at the same rate, exactly together. This is because the gun is fixed in its mount and the vertical line it travels cannot be changed. Because of its variance, as the elevation or depression angle increases the gun will deviate from vertical center. In other words, the gun, GPS DAHA, and CITV headmirror need to move together at the same rate and along the same vertical axis on the M1A2SEP family of tanks. As stated, the gun is fixed in the mount as it travels through its range of motion in a path that cannot be changed. So, synchronization is made to the DAHA it the GPS and CITV headmirror, thus making the GPS and CITV follow the gun throughout its full range of vertical motion.

Purpose of Plumb and Synchronization A-38. When verifying and performing plumb and sync there are three readings taken. The 1st input taken is as close to zero elevation as possible. The 2nd input is taken after applying 89 mils of elevation, as measured by the gunner’s quadrant. The 3rd input is then taken after applying another 89 mils of elevation. The tanks FCS will then average these three inputs and apply the average into the system. By applying this average the FCS makes adjustments to the torques in the GPS DAHA, and torques in the CITV headmirror. Making these adjustments ensures that proper alignment is maintained between the GPS, CITV, and main gun. This angle is then maintained as the gun moves in its vertical axis in all angles of elevation. A-39. Why the 3 angles? First any three angles will work. But most tank engagements are fired between zero and +10 degrees of elevation. In order to achieve a minus elevation measurement it would require a different type of ramp or berm would have to be designed. The quick fix Army standard existing ramps, the three angles of 0 degrees, +89 mils and then another +89 mils, was selected and written into the TM for the three angles for plumb and sync. A-40. Once plumb and sync is complete, the DAHA in the GPS and CITV headmirror will align themselves with the gun at the 1,200 meter boresight panel. This causes a refining of the boresight, meaning the original boresight is now off, and results in a need to reboresight the tank. In addition, the boresight data, since it has been refined, should seldom—if ever—be more than 0.05 mils off in either azimuth or elevation for both the GPS and CITV.

Why You Verify Your Plumb and Synchronization Data A-41. Tank crews must boresight first prior to verifying plumb/sync data. Tank crews given an opportunity to lase to various targets at different ranges. Crews can verify that the gun (looking through the GAS), GPS, and CITV are aligned on the same target aiming point. If the laser cannot be used suggest two additional targets be emplaced at known ranges so that tank crews can verify plumb and sync after boresighting. The effects of plumb and sync become more evident when viewing through the CITV, because of the CITV’s location on the turret compared to the gun. In addition, verifying has the added benefit of building crew confidence in their FCS by showing them that plumb and sync actually works.

A-30

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Verify Plumb and Synchronization Notes. The purpose of this procedure is to ensure alignment of the main gun, GPS, and CITV at all angles of elevation. Fire control accuracy check must be performed prior to doing this procedure. Fire control system test must be performed prior to doing this procedure. This procedure requires the use of a muzzle boresight device (MBD), gunner’s quadrant, and ramp. Tank engine must be running before starting procedure. Boresight should be done at sync ramp using sync target. Position tank as level as possible with the gun tube over the front slope. The relationship between gun tube and target must be as close to zero mils as possible (plus or minus 35 mils). z z z

z z z z z z z z z

Step 1. Boresight tank. Step 2. Set the THPD VALVE AZ DRIVE and THPD VALVE EL DRIVE circuit breakers to OFF at the GCDP. Step 3. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL, grasp the GCH and attempt to traverse left/right and elevate/depress the main gun. Ensure the hydraulic solenoids do not engage and the turret and main gun do not move. If the hydraulic solenoids engage and the turret and main gun move notify unit maintenance. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL. Step 4. With the GCDP on the MAIN MENU, press the ADJUST push button. Step 5. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the ADJUST menu. Step 6. Press the GPS push button on the BORESIGHT menu. Step 7. Record GPS AZ values, indicating negative values, and EL values, indicating negative values, as displayed on the GPS MAIN menu. Step 8. Press VEH SYS MODE pushbutton on the CDU. Step 9. Press CITV SETUP pushbutton on VEHICLE SYSTEMS menu. Step 10. Press BORESIGHT pushbutton on CITV SETUP menu. Step 11. Record CITV BORESIGHT AZ values, indicating negative values, and EL values, indicating negative values. Step 12. Index 89 mils on the gunner’s quadrant and place on the breech pads with LINE-OFFIRE arrow facing toward muzzle end of the gun.

Note. Hold gunner’s quadrant in place when main gun is being moved. z z z z z z

z

Step 13. Using manual controls, elevate the main gun until bubble centers in level vial on the gunner’s quadrant. Step 14. Remove gunner’s quadrant from breech pads. Step 15. While looking through GAS eyepiece, direct driver to back slowly up ramp until GAS boresight cross is near upper left corner of target. Have driver stop and set parking brake. Step 16. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY. Step 17. Using manual controls, align the GAS boresight cross on the upper left corner of target. Step 18. View through the GPS eyepiece. If the GPS reticle is not on the upper left corner of target, move 4-way switch on GCDP up/down, left/right to lay GPS reticle on upper left corner of target. Step 19. Record AZ values, indicating negative values, and EL values, indicating negative values as displayed on the GPS MAIN menu.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-31

Appendix A

z z z z

Step 20. Look at the CITV reticle. If CITV reticle is not on the upper left corner of target, move 4-way switch on CDU up/down, left/right to lay CITV reticle on upper left corner of target. Step 21. Record AZ values, indicating negative values, and EL values, indicating negative values as displayed on the BORESIGHT MAIN menu. Step 22. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL. Step 23. Index 89 mils on the gunner’s quadrant and place on the breech pads with LINE-OFFIRE arrow facing toward muzzle end of the gun.

Note. Hold gunner’s quadrant in place when main gun is being moved. z z z z z z

z z z z z z z

A-32

Step 24. Using manual controls, elevate the main gun until bubble centers in level vial on the gunner’s quadrant. Step 25. Remove gunner’s quadrant from breech pads. Step 26. While looking through GAS eyepiece, direct driver to back slowly up ramp until GAS boresight cross is near upper left corner of target. Have driver stop and set parking brake. Step 27. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY. Step 28. Using manual controls, align the GAS boresight cross on the upper left corner of target. Step 29. View through the GPS eyepiece. If the GPS reticle is not on the upper left corner of target, move 4-way switch on GCDP up/down, left/right to lay GPS reticle on upper left corner of target. Step 30. Record AZ values, indicating negative values, and EL values, indicating negative values as displayed on the GPS MAIN menu. Step 31. Look at the CITV reticle. If CITV reticle is not on the upper left corner of target, move 4-way switch on CDU up/down, left/right to lay CITV reticle on upper left corner of target. Step 32. Record AZ values, indicating negative values, and EL values, indicating negative values as displayed on the BORESIGHT MAIN menu. Step 33. Direct driver to move vehicle back to level ground. Step 34. Press RETURN pushbutton on the BORESIGHT MAIN menu two times to return to VEH SYS mode. Step 35. Press RETURN pushbutton on GPS MAIN menu three times to return to MAIN menu. Step 36. Determine plumb and synchronization error by using the boresight values recorded as the examples below: „ If values are in the same direction, subtract the smallest value from the largest value, and disregard the third value. „ As an example, if there are three AZ readings of 1.95, 2.02, and 1.89, subtract 1.89 from 2.02. The plumb and synchronization error would be 0.13. „ As an example, if there are three EL readings of 1.81, 1.76, and 2.01, subtract 1.76 from 2.01. The plumb and synchronization error would be 0.25. „ If two of the three values are in opposite directions, disregard the smallest value of the same direction, and add the values of opposite direction. Disregard any plus or minus signs and direction arrows when adding or subtraction.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

As an example, if there are three AZ readings of -0.13, -0.10, and 0.05, disregard -0.10 and add - 0.13 and 0.05. The plumb and synchronization error would be 0.18. „ As an example, if there are three EL readings of 0.09, -0.13, and 0.11, disregard 0.09 and add - 0.03 and 0.11. The plumb and synchronization error would be 0.14. Step 37. If the plumb and synchronization error is less than .3 for GPS and .4 for CITV, go to step 40. Step 38. If the plumb and synchronization error is greater than .3 for GPS and .4 for CITV, perform plumb and synchronization. Step 39. If after performing plumb and synchronization procedure, the error is greater than .3 for GPS and .4 for CITV, notify unit maintenance. Step 40. Set the THPD VALVE AZ DRIVE and THPD VALVE EL DRIVE circuit breakers to ON at the GCDP. Step 41. Verify boresight values and reenter if necessary. „

z z z z z

Perform Plumb and Synchronization z z z

z z z z z

z

Step 1. Boresight tank. Step 2. Set the THPD VALVE AZ DRIVE and THPD VALVE EL DRIVE circuit breakers to OFF at the GCDP. Step 3. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL, grasp the GCH and attempt to traverse left/right and elevate/depress the main gun. Ensure the hydraulic solenoids do not engage and the turret and main gun do not move. If the hydraulic solenoids engage and the turret and main gun move, notify unit maintenance. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY. Step 4. With the GCDP on the MAIN MENU, press the MAINT push button. Step 5. Press SET UP pushbutton on the MAINTENANCE menu. Step 6. Press PLUMB/SYNC pushbutton on SET UP menu. Step 7. Press GPS PLUMB/SYNC pushbutton on PLUMB/SYNC menu. Step 8. Viewing through the GAS eyepiece, make sure the GAS boresight cross is still on the upper left corner of target. If not, use manual controls to align GAS boresight cross on upper left corner of target. Step 9. View through the GPS eyepiece. If the GPS reticle is not on the upper left corner of target, move 4-way switch on GCDP up/down, left/right to lay GPS reticle on upper left corner of target.

Note. GPS reticle may move off the upper left corner of target when ENT key is pressed. If GPS reticle moves from the upper left corner of target, ignore reticle movement. z

Step 10. Press the ENT key on GCDP.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-33

Appendix A

Notes. In the event of a tactical display failure, CITV plumb and synchronization can be performed by the gunner selecting CITV PLUMB/SYNC function of the PLUMB/SYNC menu. The vehicle commander would then verbally instruct the gunner to move the CITV reticle in the required direction. GPS and CITV plumb and synchronization cannot be performed simultaneously from the GCDP. Make sure CITV display has a clear sharp image. Currently, CITV PLUMB/SYNC numbers are not updated on CDU. Ignore CITV PLUMB/SYNC numbers displayed on CITV PLUMB/SYNC menu when performing the following steps. New plumb/sync corrections for CITV will be calculated when step 39 is completed. z z z z

Step 11. Press the VEH SYS MODE pushbutton on CDU. Step 12. Press the CITV SETUP pushbutton. Step 13. Press PLUMB/SYNC pushbutton on CITV SETUP menu. Step 14. Look at the CITV display. If CITV reticle is not on the upper left corner of target, move 4-way switch on CDU up/down, left/right to lay CITV reticle on upper left corner of target.

Note. CITV reticle may move off the upper left corner of target when ENT key is pressed. If CITV reticle moves from the upper left corner of target, ignore reticle movement. z z z

Step 15. Press the ENT key on CDU. Step 16. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL. Step 17. Index 89 mils on the gunner’s quadrant and place on the breech pads with LINE-OFFIRE arrow facing toward muzzle end of the gun.

Note. Hold gunner’s quadrant in place when main gun is being moved. z z z z z z

Step 18. Using manual controls, elevate the main gun until bubble centers in level vial on the gunner’s quadrant. Step 19. Remove gunner’s quadrant from breech pads. Step 20. While looking through GAS eyepiece, direct driver to back slowly up ramp until GAS boresight cross is near upper left corner of target. Have driver stop and set parking brake. Step 21. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY. Step 22. Using manual controls, align the GAS boresight cross on the upper left corner of target. Step 23. View through the GPS eyepiece. If the GPS reticle is not on the upper left corner of target, move 4-way switch on GCDP up/down, left/right to lay GPS reticle on upper left corner of target.

Note. GPS reticle may move off the upper left corner of target when ENT key is pressed. If GPS reticle moves from the upper left corner of target, ignore reticle movement. z z

A-34

Step 24. Press the ENT key on GCDP. Step 25. Look at the CITV reticle. If CITV reticle is not on the upper left corner of target, move 4-way switch on CDU up/down, left/right to lay CITV reticle on upper left corner of target.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Note. CITV reticle may move off the upper left corner of target when ENT key is pressed. If CITV reticle moves from the upper left corner of target, ignore reticle movement. z z z

Step 26. Press the ENT key on CDU. Step 27. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL. Step 28. Index 89 mils on the gunner’s quadrant and place on the breech pads with LINE-OFFIRE arrow facing toward muzzle end of the gun.

Note. Hold gunner’s quadrant in place when main gun is being moved. z z z z z z

Step 29. Using manual controls, elevate the main gun until bubble centers in level vial on the gunner’s quadrant. Step 30. Remove gunner’s quadrant from breech pads. Step 31. While looking through GAS eyepiece, direct driver to back slowly up ramp until GAS boresight cross is near upper left corner of target. Have driver stop and set parking brake. Step 32. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY. Step 33. Using manual controls, align the GAS boresight cross on the upper left corner of target. Step 34. View through the GPS eyepiece. If the GPS reticle is not on the upper left corner of target, move 4-way switch on GCDP up/down, left/right to lay GPS reticle on upper left corner of target.

Note. GPS reticle may move off the upper left corner of target when ENT key is pressed. If GPS reticle moves from the upper left corner of target, ignore reticle movement. z

Step 35. Press the ENT key on GCDP.

Note. New plumb and synchronization corrections for the GPS are calculated upon pressing RETURN pushbutton. Failure to press the RETURN pushbutton a total of three times during this procedure will cause the system to ignore new inputs and default to last calculated data. z z z

Step 36. Press the RETURN pushbutton one time to return to PLUMB/SYNC menu. Step 37. Press the RETURN pushbutton three times to return to MAIN menu. Step 38. Look at the CITV reticle. If CITV reticle is not on the upper left corner of target, move 4-way switch on CDU up/down, left/right to lay CITV reticle on upper left corner of target.

Note. CITV reticle may move off the upper left corner of target when ENT key is pressed. If CITV reticle moves from the upper left corner of target, ignore reticle movement. z

Step 39. Press the ENT key on CDU.

Note. New plumb and synchronization corrections for the CITV are calculated upon pressing RETURN pushbutton. Failure to press the RETURN pushbutton a total of three times during this procedure will cause the system to ignore new inputs and default to last calculated data. z z z z

Step 40. Press the RETURN pushbutton on PLUMB/SYNC menu to return to CITV SETUP menu. Step 41. Press RETURN pushbutton on CITV SETUP menu one time to return to VEH SYS mode. Step 42. Direct driver to move vehicle back to level ground. Step 43. Perform VERIFY PLUMB AND SYNCHRONIZATION.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-35

Appendix A

NIGHT BORESIGHTING A-42. Night boresighting can be accomplished following normal boresighting procedures. The boresight target must have an illuminated and heated reference point that can be seen with the MBD, GPS, CITV, GAS, and TIS. The TC can use a chemlight or filtered flashlight to illuminate the MBD aiming reticle. (M27A1 MBDs have a built-in light port for night boresighting.) A-43. Most training ranges are equipped with targets that allow the crew to boresight at night. The following are examples of field-expedient boresight targets for tactical situations: z Caliber .50 ammunition can with charcoal (for heating) and a chemlight or flashlight for the reference point. z Any POL container with charcoal (for heating) and a chemlight or flashlight for the reference point. z A small boresight panel (18 inches by 18 inches) quartered, colored with sand and olive drab paint, with a visible and heated aiming point using a chemlight or flashlight for the reference point. z Any object in the tank’s sector that has a clearly defined right angle for use as a reference point when viewed through the TIS. Place a chemlight on that point as a reference point for the MBD, GPS, and GAS.

BORESIGHTING THE GAS (GPS AND TIS INOPERATIVE) USING THE M27A1 OR M27A3 MBD A-44. In some tactical situations (because of mechanical breakdown or the effects of ballistic shock), the tank crew must use the GAS. The crew can boresight the tank and, with accurate range determination, still fire effectively. Note. These procedures are only to be used in tactical situations. The GAS can be boresighted at any range. The parallax caused by boresighting at any range will be minimal. These procedures are best used with the boresight panel at the battlesight range for your primary service KE ammunition. z

Step 1. Insert the MBD into the muzzle of the main gun, and make sure the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 12 o’clock position by aligning it with the 12 o’clock witness mark on the face of the gun tube.

Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 3 o’clock position.

CAUTION Never hold the MBD eyepiece while turning the operating handle.

z

Step 2. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle finger tight, and make sure the MBD eyepiece is positioned at the 3 o’clock position.

Note. With the MBD eyepiece at the 3 o’clock position, the light port used for night boresighting is pointed up. During bright days, the sun may shine through this port and cause blurring of the MBD reticle; use one hand to shield the light port from the sun’s rays.

A-36

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation z

z

z z

Step 3. With a pencil, mark the operating handle at the 12 o’clock position (on line with the index mark) to make sure the operating handle is tightened to the same position each time the MBD is repositioned. (Once boresighting is complete, erase the mark. A new mark should be used each time the tank is boresighted or the MBD is collimated.) Step 4. Without touching the gun or the MBD, sight through the MBD eyepiece, and direct the gunner to use manual controls to traverse the turret and elevate the main gun to lay the reticle of the MBD on the target aiming point. Step 5. Using the GAS boresight knobs, the gunner aligns the GAS boresight cross to the boresight target aiming point, making sure the knobs are fully seated. Step 6. Slip the AZ and EL scales on the GAS to 0 and 0.

CAUTION Rotating the MBD inside the gun tube may damage the gun or leave the device improperly aligned.

z

z

Step 7. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, hold the tapered muzzle cone, loosen the operating handle two complete turns to unseat the MBD, and remove the MBD from the gun tube. Step 8. Rotate the MBD 180 degrees and reinsert it into the muzzle of the main gun; make sure the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 6 o’clock position by aligning it with the 6 o’clock witness mark on the face of the gun tube.

Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 9 o’clock position. z

z

z z z

Step 9. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle until finger tight and the pencil mark on the operating handle is aligned with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone. (If the device is positioned correctly, the MBD eyepiece will be at the 9 o’clock position. If the mark does not line up with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone, erase the mark and start boresight procedures over.) Step 10. Check the reticle of the MBD to see if it is still on the target aiming point. „ If the MBD reticle is on target, proceed to step 16. „ If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, collimate the MBD (see page A-5). If the MBD cannot be collimated, continue boresight procedures. Step 11. Direct the gunner onto the target aiming point. (The gunner must use the manual controls.) Step 12. Using the GAS boresight knobs, the gunner will align the GAS boresight cross to the boresight target aiming point, making sure the knobs are fully seated. Step 13. The gunner will record the readings from the GAS AZ and EL boresight knobs and divide the readings by 2. *Example: AZ(R)0.4 ÷ 2 = (R)0.2 EL(L)0.6 ÷ 2 = (L)0.3

z z z

31 May 2010

Step 14. The gunner will move the AZ and EL boresight knobs on the GAS to the readings determined in step 13. Step 15. Without moving the GAS boresight knobs, slip the scales to 0 and 0. Step 16. Apply the appropriate SCF for the round to be fired (Table A-6).

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

A-37

Appendix A

Note. To apply new SCFs when changing battlecarry ammunition or firing a different type of ammunition, return the GAS boresight knobs to AZ and EL readings of 0 and 0 before applying the new SCF. Table A-6. M1A2 SEP/V2 sight correction factors Ammunition

Azimuth

Elevation

HEAT (M830)

0.2(R)

0.6(R)

HEAT (M831)

0.2(L)

0.6(R)

HEAT (M831A1)

0.2(L)

0.0

MPAT (M830A1)

0.0

0.4(L)

HE-OR-T (M908)

0.0

0.4(L)

Sabot (M829)

0.2(R)

0.8(L)

Sabot (M829A1)

0.0

0.2(L)

Sabot (M829A2)

0.0

1.2(L)

M1A2 SEP

Sabot (M829A3)

0.0

0.2(L)

Sabot (M865IP/PIP)

0.2(L)

0.2(L)

Sabot (current or T-S1 M865)*

0.2(L)

0.2(L)

Canister (M1028)

0.0

0.0

* See Chapter 2 to determine the most up-to-date marking system. Note. Left (L) and right (R) symbols indicate the direction to turn the GAS boresight knobs.

BORESIGHT LOSS A-45. *Boresighting is simply an alignment process by which the gun and sighting system are referred to the same point. Any movement of the gun or sights away from that alignment is a loss of boresight. The gun may move out of alignment because⎯ z The gun temperature has changed since boresighting. z Firing or other shocks to the system (such as extensive road travel or enemy round impacts) disturbed the sight alignment. A-46. For the tank crew in combat, it is not important how boresight loss occurs, just that it does. While the tank has boresight retention equipment (MRS), the most reliable method of correcting boresight loss is to re-boresight the system. In training, boresight before every firing table. In a hostile environment, boresight whenever the tactical situation permits.

BORESIGHT CHECK A-47. During the long periods between the time the system is boresighted and the time the tank is fired, boresight loss may occur. Crews can check for boresight loss by conducting a boresight check: z Step 1. Select a target as close as possible to the range at which the tank was boresighted. z Step 2. Lase or manually index the range to target. z Step 3. Place fire control mode to EMERGENCY.

A-38

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Note. To manually index a range, press the SENSORS push button on the MAIN menu of the GCDP. Press the RANGE push button on the SENSORS menu. Manually index the known range using the keypad on the GCDP. When the known range is displayed on the RANGE menu, hold the palm switches on the GPCH and press ENT on the GCDP keypad. z z z z z z

z

Step 4. With the GCDP on the MAIN menu, press the ADJUST push button. Step 5. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the ADJUST menu. Step 6. Press the GPS push button on the BORESIGHT menu. Step 7. Manually lay the GPS reticle aiming dot on a clearly defined aiming point, with last movement up. Step 8. Insert the MBD into the gun tube. Step 9. Note the position of the MBD reticle. „ If the MBD reticle is on the same target aiming point determined during boresighting, no boresight loss has occurred (proceed to step 10). „ If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, and a collimated MBD was used, boresight has been lost: reboresight the tank. „ If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, and a non-collimated MBD was used, remove the MBD and rotate it (180 degrees). If the midpoint between the first and second reticle positions coincides with the gunner’s aiming point, the tank is still boresighted. If it does not, boresight has been lost; reboresight the tank. Step 10. Press the RETURN pushbutton on the GPS MAIN menu three times to return to the MAIN menu.

MRS CONFIRMATION A-48. When re-boresighting, or when a boresight check cannot be performed, an MRS update is used to correct for boresight loss. An MRS update can be accomplished only if the tank sights and MRS have been properly boresighted. A-49. Armament accuracy check 6 determines only whether the MRS can correct an artificial boresight loss induced by the crew. A-50. During live-fire training, crews can monitor the performance of their MRS to determine if the MRS performs within tolerance. Upon completion of a live-fire event, perform the following procedures: z Step 1. Perform an MRS update and record the readings. (If the MRS update indicates no change, perform a boresight check.) z Step 2. Select a target as close as possible to the range at which the tank was boresighted. z Step 3. Lase or manually index the range to target. z Step 4. With the GCDP on the MAIN menu, press the ADJUST push button. z Step 5. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the ADJUST menu. z Step 6. Press the GPS push button on the BORESIGHT menu. z Step 7. Using the manual controls, lay the GPS reticle aiming dot on the target aiming point, with last movement up. z Step 8. Insert the MBD into the gun tube. z Step 9. Note the position of the MBD reticle. a. If the MBD reticle is on the same target aiming point determined during boresighting, the MRS performed correctly. b. If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, and a non-collimated MBD was used, remove the MBD and rotate it (180 degrees). If the midpoint between the first and second reticle positions coincides with the gunner’s aiming point, the MRS performed correctly.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-39

Appendix A

c.

If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point (as described in steps 9a or b), use the gunner’s four-way adjust switch and refer the GPS aiming dot to the target aiming point. d. To determine if the MRS is within tolerance, compare the new boresight readings to the previous boresight readings or MRS update readings established in step 1. If the difference in either AZ or EL is greater than .15 mil, the MRS is out of tolerance; notify organizational maintenance.

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES A-51. If immediate return fire is not required, attempt an MRS update; then at the first opportunity, move the tank to a position where it can be re-boresighted. If boresighting with an MBD is not possible, initiate emergency boresight procedures using the alternate method described in the operator’s manual. A-52. When a component of the fire control system malfunctions or is damaged by fire, the remaining components should be boresighted.

AIR TEMPERATURE AND ATMOSPHERIC (BAROMETRIC) PRESSURE A-53. The firing table solutions are simple main gun corrections based on standard environmental conditions. Air density affects accuracy. Standard air temperature is 59 degrees Fahrenheit and barometric pressure is 29.92 inches of mercury. As air pressure increases, air density generally increases. This slows rounds, which may cause them to strike low on the target. Firing when air density is less than average has the opposite effect. The tank’s computer compensates for this effect, using values input into the system. A-54. Recommended standard inputs for major geographical areas, by seasons, in the Table A-7 should be used whenever current information is not available. Always use the current, local barometric pressure and temperature, if it is available (see Table A-8). Temperature should be updated whenever it deviates more than 10 degrees Fahrenheit from the indexed value; barometric pressure should be updated whenever it deviates more than one inch of mercury from the indexed value. Table A-7. Nominal temperature values for M1A1 and M1A2 SEP/V2 fire control input Location

Season

Air Temp (ºF)

Central USA

Nov-Apr

42

May-Oct

70

Nov-Apr

59

May-Oct

83

Southeast USA

Nov-Apr

59

May-Oct

77

Central Europe

Nov-Apr

38

May-Oct

59

Nov-Apr

63

May-Oct

77

Southwest USA

Middle East Korea

A-40

Nov-Apr

41

May-Oct

70

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Table A-8. Barometric pressure values for M1A1 and M1A2 SEP/V2 fire control input Meters Above Sea Level

Barometric Pressure (Inches)

0

29.92

100

29.57

200

29.22

300

28.87

400

28.53

500

28.19

600

27.85

700

27.52

800

27.19

900

26.86

1,000

26.54

1,100

26.22

1,200

25.90

1,300

25.59

1,400

25.28

1,500

24.97

1,600

24.66

1,700

24.36

1,800

24.06

1,900

23.77

2,000

23.47

2,100

23.19

2,200

22.90

2,300

22.61

2,400

22.33

2,500

22.05

2,600

21.78

2,700

21.51

2,800

21.24

2,900

20.97

3,000

20.71

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-41

Appendix A

A-55. Whenever barometric pressure information is available, but is from a location that is at a significantly different elevation, the barometric pressure values can be converted. If your elevation is lower, add 0.30 for each 100 meters of elevation difference. If your elevation is higher, subtract 0.30 for each 100 meters of elevation difference. For example, if you receive a barometric reading of 30.04 from an airfield that is at 2,070 feet (631 meters) elevation and your elevation is 1,400 meters, subtract 2.40 from 30.24, which will give you a barometric reading of 27.84. Sample computations are as follows. z Step 1. 1,400m (your elevation) -631m (airfield elevation) = 769m (round to 800m) (difference in elevation). z Step 2. 800 100 = 8. z Step 3. 8 X 0.30 = 2.40. z Step 4. 30.24 (reading from airfield) -2.40 (you are higher, so subtract) = 27.84 (FCS input). Note. If you get pressure readings from an airfield, make sure you get actual barometric pressure, not barometric pressure corrected to sea level that pilots require.

SECTION II – ABRAMS PRE-FIRE CHECKS A-56. Before conducting live fire, the crew performs pre-fire checks to reduce vehicle malfunctions on the firing range. z The preferred pre-fire checks are conducted when a crew completes a thorough PMCS as outlined in TM 9-2350-264-10-1 and TM 9-2350-388-10-1. z When time or conditions do not allow for a complete and thorough PMCS tank crews should conduct the following pre-fire checks as a minimum (Table A-9). Note. Crews should correct any deficiencies if using the checklist below before conducting any live fire training.

WARNING Ensure all weapons are clear before conducting pre-fire checks.

A-42

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Table A-9. Abrams pre-fire checklist Station

Check

Go

Driver

Power up driver’s station IAW TM -10.

No-Go

Check CBRN mask and mask microphone. Loader

Power up loader’s station IAW TM -10. Check CBRN Mask and mask microphone. Ensure communications system is powered up: z Radio frequencies set. z Intercom operational. z Perform jump radio check. Conduct function check on loader’s M240: z Clear weapon. z Check weapon. z Check mount. z Secure ready ammunition. Conduct breechblock function check. Check ready ammunition door operation. Check ammunition storage. Check coax ammunition ready box and feed chute.

TC

Power up tank commander’s station IAW TM-10. Power up CITV (M1A2 SEP only). Check CBRN mask and mask microphone. Establish digital communications (if available).

Gunner

Prepare CWS for operations: z Mount weapon and check equilibrator. z Set headspace and timing. z Conduct function check. z Boresight CWS (M1A1). z Secure ready ammunition. Power up gunner’s station IAW TM -10: z Main accumulator pressure check. z Exercise turret hydraulics. z Perform TIS checkout. z Null drift. z Perform computer self-test/FCS test. z Conduct firing circuit check. z Conduct computer data check. Boresight the tank Conduct function check on coaxial M240: z Clear coaxial M240. z Conduct function check using electrical triggers). z Check spent ammunition can. z Check feed chute. Check CBRN mask and mask microphone.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-43

Appendix A

SECTION III – ARMAMENT ACCURACY CHECKS A-57. AACs help to ensure that the fire control system is fully operational and verifies that special inputs to the ballistic solutions are implemented properly for fire control components and all main gun ammunition. They also verify that the MRS can correct an artificially induced boresight loss. These checks are designed to be performed by the crew monthly and should be performed on one vehicle at a time. A-58. AACs are conducted at 100m +/- 1m and the tank should be positioned as close to the center of the AAC board as possible. To measure distance, it is recommended that crews use a 100 meter measuring tape to verify distance once the vehicle is in place. AAC checks should be run on one vehicle at a time to reduce test set-up errors. If time is critical the maximum allowable vehicles conducting AACs at the same time should be no more than two. Caution should be used when conducting AACs on more than one vehicle at a time. Performing AACs on more than one vehicle at the same time on the same panel increases the angle at which the vehicles look at the board and may cause a false failure or mask an actual system failure. Figure A-10 shows the proper positioning of the tank while conducting AACs with more than one vehicle at a time. Vehicle should be parked as close together as safety allows (no less than 2 feet no more than 4 feet) with the AAC board centered between the two vehicles. A-59. Before performing the AACs, complete a thorough PMCS (see the operator’s manual) and bleed the air from the hydraulic system (grasp the GPCH in one hand and the manual elevation pump handle in the other hand; turn the manual elevation pump handle fully in one direction and the GPCH in the opposite direction). A-60. Perform Checks 1 through 6 in sequence. (For a more thorough check, conduct the expanded AACs in this Appendix.) A-61. Record faults found during each check on DA Form 2404, Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet, or DA Form 5988-E, Equipment Maintenance and Inspection Worksheet, and notify organizational maintenance. Further diagnostics require the use of test, measurement, and diagnostic equipment (TMDE). All faults must be corrected before performing the next check.

A-44

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-10. Crew set up

31 May 2010

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

A-45

Appendix A

Note. Expanded AAC checks have been added to provide more in-depth checks of the main gun and functioning of FCS components. It is recommended that these checks be performed in conjunction with the standard AAC checks 1-6, but can also be useful in troubleshooting tanks that fail LFAST.

M1A1 PROCEDURES CHECK 1 M1A1―MAIN ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE Purpose A-62. The main accumulator pressure check ensures that the system can maintain proper hydraulic pressure.

Conditions z z z z

All personnel are clear of the main gun. The engine is off, the TURRET POWER is on. AUX HYDR POWER is off. The turret is positioned with the main gun over the number 1 (right) road wheel.

Procedures z

Step 1. Slowly elevate and depress the main gun with the power controls while watching the hydraulic pressure gauge needle. The pressure should slowly decrease to 830-550 psi, based on the ambient temperature as outlined on Table A-10, then drop rapidly to 0 psi. *Table A-10. Nitrogen gas temperature versus precharge pressure chart

Nitrogen Gas Temperature vs. Precharge Pressure Chart TEMP (F)

-70

-50

-25

0

+25

+50

+75

+100

+125

PRECHARGE (PSI)

550

580

620

650

685

720

755

790

830

z z z

Step 2. Check the reservoir fluid gauge behind the loader’s position beneath the turret ring. If the fluid level is below the ADD 1 GAL mark, add fluid per the vehicle’s lubrication order. Step 3. Make sure the two pop-out indicators to the left above the fluid-level gauge have not popped out. If they are out, push them in. Step 4. Turn the auxiliary hydraulic pump on, and watch the pressure gauge needle. If the popout indicators were reset in Step 3, recheck to make sure they did not pop out again; if they did, notify organizational maintenance.

Note. The auxiliary hydraulic pump should shut off when the pressure reaches 1,500 to 1,700 psi.

A-46

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

CHECK 2 M1A1―POWER ELEVATION AND ELEVATION CYLINDER Purpose A-63. The power elevation and elevation cylinder check ensure that the main gun elevation cylinder responds to elevation inputs and is capable of maintaining the lay of the gun on an aiming point.

Conditions z z z

Check 1 has been completed. Hydraulic system is pressurized to at least 1,500 psi. The engine is off; TURRET POWER and AUX HYDR POWER are on.

Procedures z z z

z z z z

z

Step 1. Position the turret with the main gun over the front or side of the hull. Step 2. Turn the manual elevation handle, depressing the gun until the handle can no longer be turned easily with one hand. Step 3. With the FIRE CONTROL MODE set at NORMAL, check for smooth operation of the gun by raising and lowering the cannon with the GPCH. (Always center the controls before releasing the palm switches.) Step 4. Look through the GPS and lay on a distant aiming point. Step 5. While in NORMAL mode, null out all reticle drift. Step 6. Set the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL (this will prevent injury to personnel because of accidental turret movement). Step 7. Level the gun tube and lay on a distant aiming point. Have one crew member push the muzzle up and release. Repeat the muzzle movement in vertical and horizontal planes while observing a distant aiming point through the GPS. (The reticle will move. Upon release of pressure at the muzzle, the sight should return to its original aiming point.) Step 8. Record deficiencies on DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E.

CHECK 3 M1A1―FAULT INDICATOR Purpose A-64. The fault indicator check verifies that the fire control system’s continuous malfunction detection system and computer self-test have not identified faults that affect direct-fire precision.

Conditions z z z z z

Checks 1 and 2 have been completed. The RANGE switch on the LRF is in the SAFE position. The TURRET POWER is on and the FIRE CONTROL MODE is in the NORMAL position. The circuit breakers to the TNB are set at ON and the LAMP RESET button is pressed. All cable connectors in the fire control system are securely installed.

Note. On the M1A1 tank, TNB CB-3 may be left off.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-47

Appendix A

Procedures z

z z z

z

Step. 1. Check the displayed data in the GPS field of view. (If the fire control fault symbol [F] appears, the continuous malfunction detection system has detected one of two faults: Electrical continuity within the fire control system is interrupted or a malfunction signal has been generated by the TIS, crosswind sensor, LRF, or computer system. Table A-11 describes the kinds of faults that can cause an F symbol to be displayed.) Step 2. If an F symbol is present in the GPS field of view, recheck the conditions for this check. Turn the TURRET POWER off, then on again, and see if an F symbol appears. Step 3. Check the TIS fault indicator. If it is on, notify organizational maintenance. Step 4. Cover up the crosswind sensor, and then call up the crosswind value on the CCP. If the value is 3 mph or less, uncover the crosswind sensor and proceed to step 5. If the value is 4 mph or greater, clean the crosswind sensor, and perform the test again. If the crosswind sensor still does not function properly, notify organizational maintenance. Uncover the crosswind sensor. Step 5. Run the computer self-test. (In most cases, the self-test will indicate the source of the fault. Table A-12 describes the kinds of faults that trigger a self-test failure. If, after a self-test pass, the F symbol shows in the GPS, a problem may exist in the CEU, which controls the malfunction detection system. Organizational-level test equipment must be used to find this kind of fault.)

Note. Run the self-test two or three times to ensure consistency of results. The computer selftest evaluates system response based on threshold values preprogrammed into the computer. If the tank fails two out of three times with the same fault, notify organizational maintenance.) Table A-11. Causes of fault indication in the GPS field of view Fault Electrical continuity interrupted at—

Source of Fault z z z z z z z z

TIS fault warning due to—

z z z

Crosswind fault warning due to—

z z

Computer fault warning due to—

z z z z

LRF fault warning due to—

z z z

A-48

Principal fire control components. Interconnecting cables. Power control handles, gyros. Azimuth and elevation servos. Loader’s knee switch and door-closed sensor. Coax solenoid. Zero-degree elevation switch. Crosswind sensor. Power supplies out of tolerance. Disabled scan capability. Electrical current levels out of tolerance. Power supplies out of tolerance. Ion emitter/resistor elements inoperable or dirty. Analog-digital conversion circuits out of tolerance. Unexplained changes in stored data values. Inoperable reticle drive in GPS. Any failure of last computer self-test. Laser pulse signal out of tolerance. Inoperable laser firing circuit. Range counters not biased. (The LRF continuous monitor will evaluate the LRF circuit when the laser button is depressed with RANGE set at SAFE.)

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation Table A-12. Causes of computer self-test failure Subsystem Tested

Fault Test Code Seq (CCP)

Test Seq

Fault Code (CCP)

CEU

1

1

1

1

Tolerance test of known value solutions and power supplies. A fault here will stop the self-test immediately.

Cant Sensor

2

2

2

2

Deflects the pendulum and reflects the amount of movement to ensure the pendulum returns to original value in one second. If a fault is detected, self-test stops until the gunner presses CANT, then ENTER.

Crosswind Sensor

3

3

3

3

Electrically simulates predetermined wind value, then checks response. If a fault is detected, self-test stops until the gunner presses CROSSWIND, then ENTER.

400 Hz Reference

NA

NA

NA

NA

Ensures 400 Hz reference signal is present. If 400 Hz signal fails, the self-test stops, and 400 FA is displayed.

Turret Drive (AZ)

4

4

5

4

Initializes the lead angle circuits for subsequent ballistic computations (an important prepare-to-fire check); causes the turret to move, imparting a deliberate lead solution, and checks the tolerance of the resulting rate of traverse. If a fault is detected, self-test stops until the gunner presses LEAD, then ENTER.

Sight Stabilization (EL)

5

5

6

5

Elevation rate tolerance test in line of sight and gun/turret drive; checks data link after elevation rate test.

Gunner’s Servo

6

6

7

6

Displaces reticle a fixed amount and checks response time.

Data Link (DCT)

7

7

8

7

The CEU commands an elevation input rate of 5 mils per second; then checks the output voltage from the digital control transformer (DCT). The self-test will continue if this test fails.

LRF

8

8

9

8

The LRF runs its own internal self-test, verifying that the counter chains are functioning, power supplies are within limits, and last transmitted energy output was within limits. If the LRF is functional, it transmits a known range to the computer.

Description

CHECK 4 M1A1―SPECIAL INPUT Purpose A-65. The special input check verifies the proper function of manual and automatic inputs. This check ensures all individually tested component circuits are operational prior to testing full solution data. Checks 4 and 5 correspond closely to the gunnery checks described in TM 9-2350-264-10-2, Appendix F. Note. Checks 4 and 5 do not test components of the FCS; they test the ability of the CEU to compensate for the values received from these components and to determine a ballistic solution for a given round.

31 May 2010

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

A-49

Appendix A

Conditions z

z z

*Prior to beginning the procedures, the crew must verify which version of the ballistic solution card is in the CEU of their tank. The most up-to-date card will include the M829A3 solution information, which can be verified by selecting SABOT on the lower panel of the GPS, and then pressing the AMMO SUBDES push button of the CCP and pressing the number 7 on the keypad display. If the computer does not flash, then you have the latest version; use the Upgraded CEU Chart, Table A-14a on page A-55. The ballistic solution board is shown in Figure A-11, Abrams Combined Solution Board. If the computer flashes, then you do not have the latest version; use Table A-14b on page A-55. Checks 1, 2, and 3 have been completed. *The tank is on level ground with the solution board 100 meters (±1 meter) from the front slope of the tank (see Figure A-10 on page A-45).

Note. A hardwood solution board should be used whenever possible. A vinyl solution board can expand and contract with weather and environmental conditions. This can affect your azimuth tolerance. The maximum allowable tolerance for the tank is .25 mils at 1000 meters. z

z

The horizontal reference line on the solution board is level with the gun trunnions. (An easy way to check this is to move the MRS lever to IN and squeeze the palm switches on the GPCH [the main gun will move to zero elevation]. Move the MRS lever to OUT and align the reference line on the solution board with the center horizontal reference line in the GPS reticle.) (Figure A-11, Abrams Combined Solution Board is a scale drawing of the solution board to be used.) An MBD is available with eyesight parallax shield (optic cover with hole).

Note. Proper use of parallax shield on the MBD will reduce eyesight parallax. z

The engine is off; the VEHICLE MASTER POWER, TURRET POWER, and AUX HYDR POWER are on; the CCP power is on; and the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch is in the NORMAL position.

Note. Checks 4 and 5 must be performed with the AUX HYDR POWER on. Performing checks 4 and 5 at zero pressure does not test the FCS’s ability to apply offsets to the gun.

WARNING Range solutions must be entered manually with the CCP data key during checks 4 and 5. Do not use the LRF; it may expose unprotected personnel to injury.

A-50

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Table A-13. Abrams combined solution board dimensions Minimum solution board dimensions are 96 inches wide by 60 inches high. GUN and GPS squares are 12 inches on each side. The upper right and lower left quadrants are dark colored. The 12 solution rectangles are 2 inches by 4 inches, dark colored, with 6” horizontal lines and 6” vertical lines through the center of each rectangle. The horizontal reference line should go across the board and be centered through the GPS box. The line should be no smaller than 1 inch in width and extend along the entire width of the solution board. All lettering is at least 4 inches high. Place the center of the GUN target right 48 inches and up 12 inches from the lower left corner of the solution board. All other measurements are from the center of the GUN target: To center of GPS

Right 22 inches, up 16 inches

To center of BASIC

Right 0 inches, up 19 inches

To center of CANT

Right 6 inches, up 39 inches

To center of CROSSWIND

Left 24 inches, up 39 inches

To center of LEAD

Left 46 inches, up 39 inches

To center of rectangle 1

Right 3 inches, up 26 inches

To center of rectangle 2

Left 33 inches, up 7 inches

To center of rectangle 3

Right 43 inches, up 12 inches

To center of rectangle 4

Left 38 inches, up 32 inches

To center of rectangle 5

Right 32 inches, up 20 inches

To center of rectangle 6

Right 24 inches, up 32 inches

To center of rectangle 7

Left 22 inches, up 29 inches

To center of rectangle 8

Right 46 inches, up 42 inches

Note. The vertical reference line runs through the center of the GPS block and should be at least 1-inch wide. The solution board solution block placement tolerance is 1/16 of an inch.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-51

Appendix A

Figure A-11. Abrams combined solution board (see Table A-13 for dimensions for the solution board)

Procedures z z

A-52

Step 1. Record the GPS boresight, zero data (CCF), MRS update, and MRS boresight numbers from the CCP before conducting check 4. Step 2. Set zero data for all AMMO SUBDES, MRS update, and MRS boresight to 0.0 and 0.0 before conducting check 4. (Failure to do so may cause a failure of check 4.) For example— a. Index sabot on the ammo select switch. b. Press AMMO SUBDES on the CCP. c. Press the ZERO push button. d. Press ENTER on the CCP. e. Press the ZERO push button. f. Enter 0.0 and 0.0. g. Press ENTER on the CCP. h. Press AMMO SUBDES on the CCP. i. Press the numeral 1 key on the CCP. j. Press ENTER on the CCP. k. Press the ZERO push button on the CCP. l. Enter 0.0 and 0.0. m. Press ENTER on the CCP. n. Repeat for all sabot AMMO SUBDES 0 through 6. o. Repeat for all HEAT AMMO SUBDES 0 through 3. p. Repeat for MPAT AMMO SUBDES 0. q. For tanks with an upgraded CEU, repeat for CAN SUBDES 0. r. Repeat steps a through f above for coax ammunition.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z

z

Step 3. Grip one of the palm switches; then (with the palm switch pressed) press the RANGE push button, index 1,200 meters into the CCP, and press the ENTER push button. Hold the palm switch for five seconds, then release. (When conducting the special input check, the range values must be entered with the palm switch pressed. Failure to enter range with the palm switch pressed will result in a failure of check 4.) Step 4. Put the FCS in the BORESIGHT mode by pressing the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP.

Note. Do not rotate the MBD while performing checks 4 and 5. z

Step 5. Insert the MBD and direct the gunner to lay the main gun manually on the center of the target marked GUN on the solution board, with last movement up.

Note. When using the MBD at this distance, make sure the GPS brow pad is adjusted to the gunner’s face to reduce eyesight parallax, and use the MBD’s eyesight parallax shield (optic cover with hole) to reduce eyesight parallax. z z

Step 6. When the main gun is properly laid for direction, the gunner toggles the GPS reticle, using a last movement up pattern, to the center of the target marked GPS on the solution board. Step 7. Store the boresight data by pressing ENTER on the CCP.

Note. The gunner may refer the GAS boresight cross to the gun box as a reference for gun position, as well as the MBD. z

z

Step 8. Check the boresight solution. a. Grip the palm switches for five seconds and release. b. Press the BORESIGHT push button, and using a G pattern and manual controls, re-lay the sight on the GPS target, with last movement up. (The MBD aiming dot reticle should be pointing to the original aiming point of the GUN target on the solution board.) c. Press the ENTER push button to cancel the BORESIGHT mode. Step 9. Enter the fire control inputs from Table A-14a on page A-46 or Table A-14b. a. Enter the basic solution.

Note. The basic solution has all manual and automatic inputs set at neutral values. If the basic solution fails, the crew should check their set-up and rerun the check for a second time, paying close attention to make sure the correct procedures are used and the correct data is put into the computer; If the solution fails for the second time notify organizational maintenance. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

3 September 2009

Manually enter the data inputs (except for range) into the CCP. Index range, squeeze the GPCH, and press the ENTER push button. Hold the GPCH for five seconds. Using a G pattern and the manual controls, lay the GPS aiming dot back on the aiming point, with last movement up. The crewman on the outside views through the MBD and confirms that the gun is on the correct block. Push the MAINT DATA push button, index 88, and press the ENTER push button. Record the readings in the CCP display under the CCP column on Table A-14a or Table A-14b. Press the MAINT DATA push button, index 89, and press the ENTER push button. Record the readings in the CCP display under the CCP column on Table A-14a or Table A-14b. Press the MAINT DATA push button, index 90, and press the ENTER push button (this takes you out of the MAINT DATA mode). Compare the readings entered in the CCP column with the actual readings on Table A-14a or Table A-14b.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-53

Appendix A

Notes. Evaluate each column individually. If the differences for both 88 and 89 are equal to or less than .02, the tank will pass; however, if the difference for either 88 or 89 is greater than .02, the tank will fail. If a solution fails, the crew should check their set-up and then rerun the check a second time, paying close attention to make sure the correct procedures are used and the correct data is put into the computer; If the solution fails for the second time notify organizational maintenance. The crewman viewing through the MBD should make sure the aiming dot is on the appropriate block; if it is not, he should note that the MBD was not on the appropriate block. Failures due to differences of .03 or greater indicate problems with the CEU. If the difference is .02 or less, but the MBD is not on the appropriate block, possible problems are— Crew set-up. Incorrect boresight. Not taking the same sight picture with the MBD that was taken during boresighting. CCP not zeroed (for example, CCF). Incorrect entry of check data into the CCP. Problems with the FCS. (11)

Record the position of the MBD aiming point (in relation to the target block) on the Sample M1A1 AAC Data Worksheet for Checks 4 and 5, Figure A-12.

Note. Repeat steps 9a(1) through (11) for each of the remaining solutions (cant, crosswind, and lead).

z

A-54

b. Enter the cant solution. (If it fails, the cant value is incorrectly set or the computer is not processing the cant function.) c. Enter the crosswind solution. (If it fails, the crosswind value is incorrectly set or the computer is not processing the crosswind function.) d. Enter the lead solution. (If it fails, the lead value is incorrectly set or the computer is not processing the lead function.) Step 10. After completing check 4 (all faults have been corrected), proceed to check 5.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Table A-14a. M1A1 (upgraded CEU chart) ballistic computer inputs for check 4 Subdes

Wind

Cant

Lead

Ammo Temp

Baro Press

Air Temp

*Range

Solution from Board

Actual Solution

EL 88

AZ 89

CCP Difference Pass/Fail

HEAT

1

0.00

0.00

0.10

70

29.92

59.0

1,023

Basic

4.81

0.00

1

1.10

10.40

0.01

70

29.92

59.0

1,849

Cant

9.86

-1.51

1

44.50

0.00

0.00

70

33.45

59.0

1,765

Crosswind

9.86

6.02

1

0.00

0.00

5.44

70

29.92

59.0

1,829

Lead

9.86

11.54

* Range is the last input entered into the computer.

Table A-14b. M1A1 ballistic computer inputs for check 4 Subdes

Wind

Cant

Lead

Ammo Temp

Baro Press

Air Temp

*Range

Solution from Board

Actual Solution EL 88

AZ 89

CCP Difference Pass/Fail

HEAT

1

0.00

0.00

0.10

70

29.92

59.0

1,027

Basic

4.80

0.00

1

1.00

10.70

0.02

70

29.92

58.0

1,853

Cant

9.86

-1.51

1

44.90

0.00

0.00

70

33.00

58.0

1,778

Crosswind

9.86

6.02

1

0.00

0.00

5.44

70

29.92

58.0

1,832

Lead

9.86

11.54

* Range is the last input entered into the computer.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-55

Appendix A

Figure A-12. Sample AAC data sheet for Checks 4 and 5 Note. The number in parenthesis on the AAC data sheet indicates the ammunition subdes being used.

CHECK 5 M1A1―BALLISTIC SOLUTION Purpose A-66. The ballistic solution check verifies that the FCS is correctly implementing ballistic solutions in all main gun channels. Note. Checks 4 and 5 do not test components of the FCS; they test the ability of the CEU to compensate for values received from these components and determine a ballistic solution for a given round.

Conditions z

A-56

Prior to beginning the procedures, the crew must verify which version of the ballistic solution card is in the CEU of their tank. The most up-to-date card will include the M829A3 solution information, which can be verified by selecting SABOT on the lower panel of the GPS, and then pressing the AMMO SUBDES push button of the CCP and pressing the number 7 on the keypad display. If the computer does not flash, then you have the latest version; use the Upgraded CEU Chart, Table A-15a on page A-59. The ballistic solution board is shown in Figure A-11, Abrams Combined Solution Board on page A-52. If the computer flashes, then you do not have the latest version; use Table A-15b on page A-59.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z

The engine is off; the VEHICLE MASTER POWER, TURRET POWER, and AUX HYDR POWER are on; and the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch is in the NORMAL position.

Note. Checks 4 and 5 must be performed with the AUX HYDR POWER on. Performing checks 4 and 5 at zero pressure does not test the FCS’s ability to apply offsets to the gun correctly.

Procedures Note. If the tank passed check 4 and the current boresight is still valid, start at step 7. If maintenance was performed on the system or the boresight has changed, start at step 1. z

Step 1. Grip one of the palm switches; then (with the palm switch pressed) press the RANGE push button, index 1,200 meters into the CCP, and press the ENTER push button. Hold the palm switch for 5 seconds, then release. (The range values must be entered with the palm switch pressed. Failure to enter range with the palm switch pressed will result in a failure of check 5.)

Note. Do not rotate the MBD during checks 4 and 5. z z

Step 2. Put the FCS in the BORESIGHT mode by pressing the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP. Step 3. Insert the MBD and direct the gunner to lay the main gun manually on the center of the target marked GUN on the solution board, with last movement up.

Note. When using the MBD at this distance, make sure the GPS browpad is adjusted to the gunner’s face and the MBD eyesight parallax shield (optic cover with hole) is used to reduce eyesight parallax. z z

Step 4. When the main gun is properly laid for direction, the gunner toggles the GPS reticle to the center of the target marked GPS on the solution board. Step 5. Store the boresight data by pressing the ENTER push button on the CCP.

Note. The gunner may refer the GAS boresight cross to the gun box as a reference for gun position, as well as the MBD. z

Step 6. Check the boresight solution. a. Grip the palm switches for 5 seconds and release. b. Press the BORESIGHT push button and, using a G pattern and manual controls, re-lay the sight on the GPS target, with last movement up. (The MBD reticle should be pointing to the original aiming point of the GUN target on the solution board.) c. Press the ENTER push button to cancel the boresight mode.

Note. If the tank failed check 4 and maintenance was performed, make sure the zero data (CCF) for each AMMO SUBDES is set at 0.0 and 0.0, and the MRS update and boresight numbers are set at 0.0 and 0.0 before conducting check 5. Failure to do so will result in a failure of check 5.

31 May 2010

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

A-57

Appendix A z

Step 7. Check the 12 separate main gun solutions. a. *Manually index the data inputs (except for range) into the CCP for a given solution as provided in Table A-15a on page A-59 or Table A-15b on page A-60. b. Grip one of the palm switches; then (with the palm switch pressed) press the RANGE push button, index the range value into the CCP, and press the ENTER push button. Hold the palm switch for 5 seconds, then release. (The range value must be entered with the palm switch pressed. Failure to enter range with the palm switch pressed will result in a failure of check 5.) c. Using a G pattern and manual controls, lay the GPS aiming dot back on the aiming point, with last movement up. d. The crewman on the outside views through the MBD and confirms that the gun is on the correct block. e. Press the MAINT DATA push button, index 88, and press the ENTER push button. f. *Record the readings in the CCP display under the CCP column in Table A-15a on page A-59 or Table A-15b on page A-60. g. Press the MAINT DATA push button, index 89, and press the ENTER push button. h. *Record the readings in the CCP display under the CCP column in Table A-15a on page A-59 or Table A-15b on page A-60. i. Press the MAINT DATA push button, index 90, and press the ENTER push button (this takes you out of the MAINT DATA mode). j. *Compare the readings entered in the CCP column with the readings in the actual solution column in Table A-15a on page A-59 or Table A-15b on page A-60. k. Record the position of the MBD aiming point (in relation to the target block) on the Sample M1A1 AAC Data Worksheet for Checks 4 and 5, Figure A-12, page A-56.

Notes. Evaluate each column individually. If the differences for both 88 and 89 are equal to, or less than, .02, the tank will pass; however, if the difference for either 88 or 89 is greater than .02, the tank will fail. If a solution fails, the crew should check their setup and then rerun the check a second time, paying close attention to make sure the correct procedures are used and the correct data is put into the computer; If the solution fails for the second time, notify organizational maintenance. *The crewman viewing through the MBD should make sure the aiming dot is on the appropriate block; if it is not, he/she should note that the MBD was not on the appropriate block. Failures due to differences of .03 or greater indicate problems with the CEU. If the difference is .02 or less, but the MBD is not on the appropriate block, possible problems are⎯ Crew setup. Incorrect boresight. Not taking the same sight picture with the MBD that was taken during boresighting. CCP not zeroed (for example, CCF). Incorrect entry of check data into the CCP. Problems with the FCS. Repeat steps 7b-k for each AMMO SUBDES to be checked. *The solution is correctly implemented if the MBD reticle is within the solution square identified in Table A-15a on page A-59 or Table A-15b on page A-60. If a solution fails, the crew should check their setup and rerun the check a second time, paying close attention to make sure the correct procedures are used and the correct data is put into the computer. (If a second try produces the same results, record the results on DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988E and notify organizational maintenance.) Be sure to reenter previously recorded data for zero (CCF), MRS boresight, and MRS update back into the CCP upon completion of check 5.

A-58

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

*Table A-15a. M1A1 (upgraded CEU chart) ballistic computer inputs for check 5 Subdes

Wind

Cant

Lead

Ammo Temp

Baro Press

Air Temp

Range*

Solution from Board

Actual Solution EL 88

AZ 89

CCP Difference Pass/Fail

SABOT 0

14.00

0.00

-0.63

75

30.00

75

3,530

1

6.57

-0.75

1

6.40

0.00

15.93

100

30.00

100

834

2

1.77

8.28

2

-22.00

0.10

-10.69

25

24.00

25

1,579

3

3.03

-10.79

3

35.00

0.00

3.08

50

28.00

50

3,975

4

8.09

9.53

4

-45.00

0.00

-2.68

25

29.96

25

1,970

5

5.06

-8.03

5

22.50

1.00

-0.70

75

30.00

75

3,116

1

6.57

-0.75

6

19.00

5.00

-0.41

90

29.60

90

3,700

1

6.57

-0.75

7

19.50

-6.00

-6.58

85

25.50

85

2,067

5

5.06

-8.03

0

39.00

5.20

-4.60

100

25.00

100

1,802

6

8.09

-6.02

1

-9.00

10.00

5.09

100

26.00

100

1,390

7

7.33

5.52

2

-7.20

0.00

-5.02

0

23.92

0

1,909

8

10.62

-11.54

3

-5.20

0.00

-5.13

0

25.07

0

1,882

8

10.62

-11.54

0

17.80

0.00

2.02

75

28.00

75

2,369

7

7.33

5.52

1

18.00

0.00

1.93

75

28.28

75

2065

7

7.33

5.52

-2.40

0.00

53

29.89

51

400

1

6.57

-0.75

HEAT

MPAT

CANISTER 0

0.40

* Range is the last input entered into the computer.

31 May 2010

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

A-59

Appendix A

Table A-15b. M1A1 ballistic computer inputs for check 5

Subdes

Wind Cant

Lead

Ammo Temp

Baro Press

0

14.00

0.00

-0.63

75

30.00

1

6.60

0.00

15.83

100

30.00

2

-22.0

0.10

-10.69

25

24.00

3

35.00

0.00

3.08

50

4

-45.00

0.00

-2.68

25

5

22.50

1.00

-0.70

6

19.00

4.80

0

39.00

1

-9.00

2 3

Air Temp

Range*

Solution Actual from Solution Board EL 88 AZ 89

75

3,530

1

6.57

-0.75

100

840

2

1.77

8.28

25

1,579

3

3.03

-10.79

28.00

50

3,975

4

8.09

9.53

29.96

25

1,970

5

5.06

-8.03

75

30.00

75

3,116

1

6.57

-0.75

-0.41

90

30.80

90

3,700

1

6.57

-0.75

5.20

-4.60

100

25.00

100

1,802

6

8.09

-6.02

9.90

5.09

100

25.83

100

1,385

7

7.33

5.52

-7.20

0.00

-5.02

0

23.92

0

1,909

8

10.62 -11.54

-5.20

0.00

-5.13

0

25.07

0

1,882

8

10.62 -11.54

17.80

0.00

2.02

75

28.00

75

2,369

7

7.33

CCP Difference Pass/Fail

SABOT

HEAT

MPAT 0

5.52

* Range is the last input entered into the computer.

CHECK 6 M1A1―MUZZLE REFERENCE SYSTEM Purpose A-67. The MRS check determines whether the MRS can correct an artificial boresight loss.

Conditions z

None.

Procedures z z

z

z

A-60

Step 1. Boresight the FCS at a known range. The GUN and GPS targets on the 100-meter solution board may be used if 1,200 meters is indexed into the computer. Step 2. Boresight the MRS and enter the data. a. Move the MRS lever to the IN position. b. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP. c. Hold the GPCH for 5 seconds, then release. d. Refer the GPS to the MRS, record the readings. e. Move the MRS lever to the OUT position. Step 3. Move the MRS lever to the IN position. (The computer display panel should read zero, and the GPS reticle should be aligned with the MRS collimator on the muzzle; if not, notify organizational maintenance.) Step 4. Move the MRS lever to the IN position and the OUT position several times. The GPS reticle should align with the collimator each time. If it does not, notify organizational maintenance.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z z z

z z

z z

Step 5. With the MRS lever turned to the OUT position, press the BORESIGHT push button. Step 6. Using the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch, move the reticle up .5 mil, and enter the new value. Step 7. Move the MRS lever to the IN position, and update the MRS. (The result should have an elevation value between down 0.65 and down 0.35 and an azimuth value between left 0.15 and right 0.15.) Step 8. Using the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch, move the MRS reticle so that the update display again reads 0.0 and 0.0. Move the MRS lever to the OUT position. Step 9. Press the BORESIGHT push button and take out the .5-mil error entered in step 6 by moving the reticle down .5 mil to its original boresight value. Then, introduce an azimuth boresight error by moving the reticle right .5 mil. Enter the new value. Step 10. Move the MRS lever to IN and update the MRS. (The result should have an azimuth value between left 0.65 and left 0.35 and an elevation value between up 0.15 and down 0.15.) Step 11. Move the MRS lever to the OUT position. Press the BORESIGHT push button and move the reticle .5 mil to the left. Enter the new value.

Notes. Failing to meet the criteria in steps 7 and 10 may mean the MRS collimator on the muzzle was not aligned when it was attached to the muzzle, or that the collimator has shifted since initial alignment. In either case, a turret mechanic must realign the collimator. Except for realignment of the collimator by maintenance, there is no way to correct a failure of the MRS to restore a boresight reference. Crews should be aware that MRS updating is generally not as accurate as total system re-boresighting. z

Step 12. Record the deficiencies on DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E.

M1A2 SEP PROCEDURES CHECK 1 M1A2 SEP―MAIN ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE Purpose A-68. The main accumulator pressure check ensures that the system is can maintain proper hydraulic pressure.

Conditions z z z z

All personnel are clear of the main gun. The engine is off, the TURRET POWER is on. AUX HYDR POWER is off. The turret is positioned with the main gun over the number 1 (right) road wheel.

Procedures z

Step 1. Slowly elevate and depress the main gun with the power controls while watching the hydraulic pressure gauge needle. The pressure should slowly decrease to 830-550 psi, based on the ambient temperature as outlined in Table A-16, then drop rapidly to 0 psi.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-61

Appendix A

Table A-16. Nitrogen gas temperature vs. pre-charge pressure chart TEMP (F)

-70

-50

-25

0

+25

+50

+75

+100

+125

PRECHARGE (PSI)

550

580

620

650

685

720

755

790

830

z z z

Step 2. Check the reservoir fluid gauge behind the loader’s position beneath the turret ring. If the fluid level is below the ADD 1 GAL mark, add fluid per the vehicle’s lubrication order. Step 3. Make sure the two pop-out indicators to the left above the fluid-level gauge have not popped out. If they are out, push them in. Step 4. Turn the auxiliary hydraulic pump on, and watch the pressure gauge needle. If the popout indicators were reset in Step 3, check to make sure they did not pop out again; if they did, notify organizational maintenance.

Note. The auxiliary hydraulic pump should shut off when the pressure reaches 1,500 to 1,700 psi.

CHECK 2 M1A2 SEP―POWER ELEVATION AND ELEVATION CYLINDER Purpose A-69. The power elevation and elevation cylinder check ensure that the main gun elevation cylinder responds to elevation inputs and is capable of maintaining the lay of the gun on an aiming point.

Conditions z z z z

Check 1 has been completed. Hydraulic system is pressurized to at least 1,500 psi. The engine is off. TURRET POWER and AUX HYDR POWER are on.

Procedures z z z

z z z z

z

A-62

Step 1. Position the turret with the main gun over the front or side of the hull. Step 2. Turn the manual elevation handle, depressing the gun until the handle can no longer be turned easily with one hand. Step 3. With the FIRE CONTROL MODE set at NORMAL, check for smooth operation of the gun by raising and lowering the cannon with the GPCH. (Always center the controls before releasing the palm switches.) Step 4. Look through the GPS and lay on a distant aiming point. Step 5. While in NORMAL mode, null out all reticle drift. Step 6. Set the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL (this will prevent injury to personnel because of accidental turret movement). Step 7. Level the gun tube and lay on a distant aiming point. Have one crew member push the muzzle up and release. Repeat the muzzle movement in vertical and horizontal planes while observing a distant aiming point through the GPS. (The reticle will move. Upon release of pressure at the muzzle, the sight should return to its original aiming point.) Step 8. Record deficiencies on DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

CHECK 3 M1A2 SEP―FAULT INDICATOR Purpose A-70. The fault indicator check verifies that the fire control system’s continuous malfunction detection system and computer self-test have not identified faults that affect direct-fire precision.

Conditions z z z z z z

Checks 1 and 2 have been completed. The RANGE switch on the LRF is in the SAFE position. The TURRET POWER is on. FIRE CONTROL MODE is in the NORMAL position. All the circuit breakers in the CDU and the GCDP are set at ON. All cable connectors in the fire control system are securely installed.

Procedures z

z z z z z

Step 1. Check the displayed data in the GPS field of view. (If the fire control fault symbol [F] appears, the continuous malfunction detection system has detected one or more of the following FCS malfunctions: „ The last fire control system test failed. „ There is no LRF power. „ The RANGE switch on the LRF was not in the SAFE position when the turret power was turned on. „ There is no thermal imaging system power. „ The automatic self test has detected a fault, and a caution message is displayed in the GCDP. (See TM 9-2350-388-10-1 for a complete list of GCDP caution messages.) Step 2. If an F symbol is present in the GPS field of view, recheck the conditions for this check. Turn the TURRET POWER off, then ON again, and see if an F symbol appears. Step 3. Check the TIS fault indicator. If it is on, notify organizational maintenance. Step 4. If the F symbol is still present, check the cautions and warnings and proceed to TM 9-2350-388-10-2, Caution/Warning Verification Procedure, and follow the instructions. Step 5. If the F symbol is still active, run the built-in-test and notify organizational maintenance. Step 6. Once the fault has been cleared, perform a fire control system test.

CHECK 4 M1A2 SEP―SPECIAL INPUT Purpose A-71. The M1A2 SEP special input check verifies the proper function of manual and automatic inputs. This check ensures all individually tested component circuits are operational prior to testing full solution data. The M1A2 SEP special input check and M1A2 SEP ballistic solution check correspond closely to the special gunnery checks described in TM 9-2350-388-10-2, Appendix F. Note. The M1A2 SEP special input check and M1A2 SEP ballistic solution check do not test components of the FCS; they test the ability of the TMPU to compensate for the values received from these components and determine a ballistic solution for a given round.

31 May 2010

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

A-63

Appendix A

Conditions z

z

z z

Prior to beginning the procedures, the crew must verify which software version of the ballistic solutions is in the fire control electronics unit (FCEU) of their tank. „ Commander presses DIAG. Pushbutton. „ DIAGNOSTICS menu will appear on CDU. „ Press DIAG pushbutton to enter DIAGNOSTICS menu. „ Press STATUS pushbutton to enter STATUS menu. „ VIEW STATUS - DIAGNOSTICS MODE. „ Press C/W pushbutton to enter C/W menu. „ Do the following: press PAGE UP pushbutton or PAGE DOWN pushbutton to view current cautions or warnings. „ Press RETURN pushbutton one time to return to STATUS menu, the vehicle software version will be displayed on SW STATUS menu. *(Use the appropriate chart at Figure A-14a on page A-69 and Figure A-14b on page A-70 for your software version to complete Checks 4 and 5 for M1A2 SEP special inputs and ballistic solution checks). Checks 1, 2, and 3 have been completed. *The tank is on level ground with the solution board 100 meters (±1 meters) from the front slope of the tank (see Figure A-10 on page A-45).

Note. A hardwood solution board should be used whenever possible. A vinyl solution board can expand and contract with weather and environmental conditions. This can affect your azimuth tolerance. The maximum allowable tolerance for the tank is .25 mils at 1,000 meters. z

z

The horizontal reference line on the solution board is level with the gun trunnions. (Level criterion is achieved when the horizontal reference line on the solution board and the center horizontal reference line in the GPS are aligned with the gun at zero elevation. An easy way to check this is to select MRS on the GCDP and squeeze the palm switches on the power control handles [the main gun will move to zero elevation]. Press the ENT push button on the GCDP keypad. Align the reference line on the solution board with the center horizontal reference line in the primary sight reticle.) (The Abrams Combined Solution Board, Figure A-11 on page A-52 is a scale drawing of the solution board to be used.) An MBD is available with eyesight parallax shield (optic cover with hole).

Note. Proper use of parallax shield on the MBD will reduce eyesight parallax. z

The engine is off; the VEHICLE MASTER POWER, TURRET POWER, CITV, and AUX HYDR POWER are on; the GCDP power is on; and the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch is in the NORMAL position.

Note. The M1A2 SEP special input check and M1A2 SEP ballistic solution check must be performed with the AUX HYDR POWER on. Performing these checks at zero pressure does not test the FCS’s ability to apply offsets to the gun.

Procedures

WARNING Range solutions must be entered manually with the GCDP data key during the M1A2 SEP special input check and M1A2 SEP ballistic solution check. Do not use the LRF; it may expose unprotected personnel to injury.

A-64

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z z z

z z

Step 1. Record the GPS boresight, zero data, MRS update, and MRS boresight numbers before conducting the M1A2 SEP special input check. Step 2. Set zero data for all AMMO SUBDES, MRS update, and MRS boresight to 0.00 and 0.00 before conducting the M1A2 SEP special input check. Step 3. Grip one of the palm switches; then (with the palm switch pressed) press the SENSOR push button on the main menu. Press the RANGE push button on the SENSOR menu, index 1,200 meters into the GCDP, and press the ENT push button on the keypad. Hold the palm switch for five seconds, then release. Step 4. Put the FCS in the BORESIGHT mode by pressing the ADJUST push button on the main menu, then pressing the BORESIGHT push button on the ADJUST menu. Step 5. Press the GPS push button.

Note. Do not rotate the MBD while performing the M1A2 SEP special input check and M1A2 SEP ballistic solution check. z

Step 6. Insert the MBD and direct the gunner to manually lay the main gun on the center of the target marked gun on the solution board, with last movement up.

Note. When using the M27A1 at this distance, make sure the GPS brow pad is adjusted to the gunner’s face to reduce eyesight parallax, and use the MBD’s eyesight parallax shield (optic cover with hole) to reduce eyesight parallax. z

z

Step 7. When the main gun is properly laid for direction, the gunner looks through the GPS eyepiece parallax shield and, using the four-way switch on the GCDP, moves the reticle, using a last movement up pattern, to the center of solution board target marked GPS. Step 8. Store the boresight data by pressing the ENT push button on the GCDP keypad.

Note. The gunner may refer the GAS boresight cross to the gun box as a reference for gun position, as well as the MBD. z

z

Step 9. Check the boresight solution. a. Grip the palm switches for five seconds, then release. b. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the ADJUST menu, and then press the GPS push button on the BORESIGHT menu (the MBD aiming dot should be pointing to the original aiming point of the gun target on the solution board). c. Press the RETURN push button twice to exit the BORESIGHT mode. Step 10. Enter the fire control inputs using the charts at Figure A-14a on page A-69 and Figure A-14b on page A-70, depending on the software version for your vehicle. a. Enter the basic solution.

Note. The basic solution has all manual and automatic inputs set at neutral values. If the basic solution fails, the crew should check their set-up and rerun the check for a second time, paying close attention to make sure the correct procedures are used and the correct data is put into the computer; If the solution fails for the second time notify organizational maintenance. (1)

3 September 2009

Select MAINT DATA from the main menu, and then select SETUP, BAL/SOLN, M1A2 SEP version 4.0, enter keypad number 1) on the keypad display, and ENTER. Grasp the power control handles, select TEST on the GCDP, and wait for the computer to automatically run the test. Then verify the numbers with the appropriate chart.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-65

Appendix A

(2) (3)

Using a G pattern and the manual controls, lay the GPS aiming dot back on the aiming point, with last movement up. The crewman on the outside views through the MBD and confirms that the gun is on the correct block (basic).

Note. Evaluate each column individually. The crewman by the MBD should make sure the aiming dot is on the appropriate block; if it is not, he should note that the MBD was not on the appropriate block. If the MBD is not on the appropriate block, possible problems are— Crew set-up. Incorrect boresight. Not taking the same sight picture with the MBD that was taken during boresighting. GCDP not zeroed (for example, CCF). Incorrect entry of checks data into the GCDP. Problems with the FCS. (4) Record the position of the MBD aiming point (in relation to the target block) on the Sample M1A2 SEP Data Worksheet for the M1A2 SEP Special Input Check and M1A2 SEP Ballistic Solution Check, see Figure A-13. Note. Repeat steps 10a (1) through (4) for each of the remaining solutions (cant, crosswind, and lead).

z

A-66

b. Enter the cant solution. M1A2 SEP enter keypad number 2 on the keypad display, and ENTER. Grasp the power control handles, select TEST on the GCDP, and wait for the computer to automatically run the test. Then verify the numbers with the appropriate chart. c. Enter the crosswind solution. M1A2 SEP enter keypad number 3 on the keypad display, and ENTER. Grasp the power control handles, select TEST on the GCDP, and wait for the computer to automatically run the test. Then verify the numbers with the appropriate chart. d. Enter the lead solution. M1A2 SEP enter keypad number 4 on the keypad display, and ENTER. Grasp the power control handles, select TEST on the GCDP, and wait for the computer to automatically run the test. Then verify the numbers with the appropriate chart. Step 11. After completing the M1A2 SEP special input check (all faults have been corrected), proceed to Check 5 (M1A2 SEP)—Ballistic Solution.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-13. Sample M1A2 SEP data worksheet for the M1A2 SEP special input check and M1A2 SEP ballistic solution check

CHECK 5 M1A2 SEP―BALLISTIC SOLUTION Purpose A-72. The ballistic solution check verifies that the FCS is correctly implementing ballistic solutions in all main gun channels. Note. Ballistic solution checks do not test components of the FCS; they test the ability of the TMPU to compensate for the values received from these components and determine a ballistic solution for a given round.

Conditions z z z z

A fire control system test has been completed (see TM 9-2350-388-10-1). Use the appropriate chart at Figures A-14a on page A-69 and Figure A-14b on page A-70, for your software version to complete Check 5 for M1A2 SEP ballistic solution checks). The AUX HYDR POWER is on. The FIRE CONTROL MODE switch is in EMERGENCY mode. The commander’s station, turret, and gunner’s station are powered up.

Procedures z z

Step 1. Open the GPS left (DAY) ballistic door. Step 2. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY, squeeze one of the palm switches on the GPCH, and check for drift. (If more than 0.5 mil of drift in 2 seconds is observed, press the MAINT push button, then the DRIFT push button, to null out the EMERGENCY mode drift.)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-67

Appendix A

z

Step 3. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL, squeeze one of the palm switches on the GPCH, and check for drift. (If more than 0.5 mil of drift in 20 seconds is observed, null out the drift using the AZ and EL DRIFT push buttons.)

Note. If the NORMAL mode drift and EMERGENCY mode drift are not nulled out before running the ballistic solution tests, false test results may occur. z z z z

Step 4. Press the MAINT push button on the MAIN MENU screen. Step 5. Press the SET UP push button on the MAINTENANCE menu. Step 6. Press the BAL/SOLN push button on the SET UP menu. Step 7. Use the keypad to enter the solution number from B/S Tests 10 through 22 for version 4.0 (see Figure A-14a or B/S Tests 8 and 10 through 22 for version 4.2 and 4.3). T The other B/S checks listed on the charts at Figure A-14a and Figure A-14b cannot be verified on the solution board, however, they will be completed if time allows. We strongly recommend that you do all 52 checks; however, as a minimum, you must do the ones listed for this step.)

Note. The B/S Test numbers in this step are required to conduct AACs on the solution board on page A-56.

z

Step 8. To start the test, squeeze and hold the palm switch, then press the START TEST button.

Notes. After pressing the START TEST push button, hold the palm switch for a minimum of 45 seconds, or until pass/fail results are displayed. If a FAIL is displayed, rerun the test one time prior to recording the solution number. Make sure the gun is as close to zero elevation as possible. Performing ballistic solutions for sabot ammunition may change the sabot ammo subdes indexed on the GCDP. Check the ammo subdes for sabot after performing the ballistic solutions checks. Check the ballistic solution charts for information concerning checks 1 through 52 (see Figure A-14a, Figure A-14b, and Figure A-14c. z

Step 9. Repeat steps on BAL/SOLN menu until all required ballistic solutions have been run.

Note. If one or more FAILS were displayed during the test, notify unit maintenance. z

A-68

Step 10. Press the RETURN push button on the BAL/SOLN menu three times to return to the MAIN MENU screen.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-14a. M1A2 SEP ballistic solution chart for check 5 (4.0 version)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-69

Appendix A

Figure A-14b. M1A2 SEP ballistic solution chart for check 1 (4.2-4.3 version) (continued)

A-70

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

CHECK 6 M1A2 SEP―MUZZLE REFERENCE SYSTEM Purpose A-73. The MRS check determines whether the MRS can correct an artificial boresight loss.

Conditions z

None.

Procedures z z

z

z

z

z

z z

z

z z

Step 1. Boresight the FCS at a known range. The GUN and GPS targets on the 100-meter solution board may be used if 1,200 meters is indexed into the computer. Step 2. Boresight the MRS and enter the data. a. Press the ADJUST push button at the main menu of the GCDP. b. Press the BORESIGHT push button at the ADJUST menu. c. Press the MRS push button at the BORESIGHT menu. d. Hold the GPCH for five seconds, the release. e. Refer the GPS reticle to the MRS collimator using the four-way switch, and record the readings. f. Press the ENTER push button twice. g. Press the RETURN push button. Step 3. With GCDP on MAIN MENU, press COMBAT push button. Press the MRS UPDATE push button on COMBAT menu. Grasp the GPCH for 5 seconds, then release. (The MRS UPDATE display should read 0.00 and 0.00, and the GPS reticle should be aligned with the MRS collimator on the muzzle; if not, notify organizational maintenance.) Step 4. Press the RETURN push button, then press the MRS UPDATE push button (repeat this several times). The GPS reticle should align with the collimator each time. If it does not, notify organizational maintenance. When complete, press the RETURN push button one time to return to the BORESIGHT menu. Step 5. Press the GPS push button at the BORESIGHT menu and, using the four-way switch, move the reticle up .5 mils. Enter the new value by pressing the ENTER push button twice. When complete, press the RETURN push button three times. Step 6. Press the COMBAT push button at the main menu, then press the MRS UPDATE push button. Grasp GPCH for 5 seconds and then release. Update the MRS using the four-way switch to realign the GPS reticle and the MRS collimator. (The result should have an elevation value between down .65 and down .35 and an azimuth value between left 0.15 and right 0.15.) Step 7. Using the four-way switch, move the MRS reticle so that the update display reads 0.00 and 0.00. Press the ENTER push button twice, and then press the RETURN push button. Step 8. Press the ADJUST push button at the main menu, and then press the BORESIGHT push button and the GPS push button. Remove the .5 mil error that was entered in step 5 by moving the reticle down .5 mil to its original boresight value. Introduce an azimuth boresight error by moving the reticle right .5 mil. Enter the new value by pressing the ENTER push button twice. When complete, press the RETURN push button three times. Step 9. Press the COMBAT push button at the main menu, then press the MRS UPDATE push button. Grasp the GPCH for 5 seconds and then release. Update the MRS. (The result should have an azimuth value between left .65 and left .35 and an elevation value between up 0.15 and down 0.15.) Step 10. Using the four-way switch, move the MRS reticle so that the update display reads 0.00 and 0.00. Press the ENTER push button twice, and then press the RETURN push button. Step 11. Press the ADJUST push button at the main menu, and then press the BORESIGHT push button and the GPS push button. Remove the .5 mil error that was entered in step 5 by

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-71

Appendix A

moving the reticle left .5 mil to its original boresight value. Press the ENTER push button twice to enter the new value. Notes. Failing to meet the criteria in steps 6 and 9 may indicate that the MRS collimator on the muzzle was not aligned when it was attached to the muzzle, or the collimator shifted after initial alignment. In either situation, a turret mechanic must realign the collimator. Except for realignment of the collimator by a turret mechanic, there is no way to correct a failure of the MRS to restore boresight reference. MRS updating is generally not as accurate as total system re-boresighting. z

Step 12. Record any deficiencies on DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E.

EXPANDED AAC CHECKS CHECK 1―MAIN GUN RECOIL PISTON SLEEVE POSITION CHECK Purpose A-74. The main gun recoil piston sleeve check ensures that the main gun recoil system parts are assembled correctly. An improperly seated recoil piston may cause abnormal ammunition jump characteristics; that is, the tank may need a discreet CCF.

Conditions z z z z z z z

All personnel are clear of the main gun. The engine is off and the TURRET POWER is off. The main gun is in SAFE. The loader’s panel is in MANUAL. The turret travel lock is locked. The system hydraulic pressure is reduced to zero. The main gun is maximum elevated by using the manual control handles.

Procedures z

Step 1. Check the position of the recoil piston sleeve at the small slot at the 12 o’clock position where the breech butts against the gun mount (see Figure A-15).

Figure A-15. Checking position of recoil piston sleeve Note. If using the piston seating gauge, go to Step 4.

A-72

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z

Step 2. For the crew-level check, the maximum allowable is 0.012 inches. Using the 0.012 mechanics feeler gauge, hold the gauge back against the front of the breech and attempt to insert it into the slot (see Figure A-16).

Figure A-16. Feeler gauge z

Step 3. If the piston sleeve is in the proper position, the gauge will go down only about an inch. If the check fails, it will go down further as depicted in Figure A-17.

Figure A-17. Depiction of faulty piston sleeve Note. If the gauge goes in more than one inch as depicted in Figure A-18, notify maintenance immediately. z

Step 4. When using the piston seating gauge 120 mm to check the gap, it will read at the top of the coax ammunition feed chute. Hold the gauge against the breech ring and insert it into the slot (see Figure A-18). This check passes if the green or “GO” portion of the gauge overlaps the top edge of the feed chute. The check fails if the gauge inserts deep enough so that the red or “NOGO” portion of the gauge is at the top edge of the feed chute. If the check fails, notify maintenance and proceed to Check 2, Breech Alignment Block Check.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-73

Appendix A

Note. The piston seating gauge 120mm is locally manufactured. The specifications are in Appendix D of TM 9-2350-264-20-2-4 and TM 9-2350-388-20-2-4.

Figure A-18. Piston seating gauge, 120 mm Note. If the gauge goes into the red NO-GO, notify maintenance.

CHECK 2―BREECH ALIGNMENT BLOCK CHECK Purpose A-75. The breech alignment block check ensures that the tolerance between the breech alignment block and the breech is correct, which ensures the position of the gun tube is consistent after each round fired.

Conditions z z z z z

All personnel are clear of the main gun. The engine is off and the TURRET POWER is off. The main gun is in SAFE. The loader’s panel is in MANUAL. The turret is in TRAVEL LOCK. The system hydraulic pressure is reduced to zero. The main gun is maximally depressed by using the manual control handles.

Procedures z

A-74

Step 1. For the crew-level check, use a .005 feeler gauge to check the distance between the antirotation key and the side of the keyway (see Figure A-19a and Figure A-19b). The keyway is in the right underside of the breech. If the feeler gauge will not go between the anti-rotation key and the side of the keyway that is closest to the gunner’s position, then the breech is rotated fully clockwise; go to Step 2. If; however, the blade goes between them, notify maintenance, and proceed to Check 3, Elevation Mechanism Check.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-19a. Starting position for anti-rotation key tolerance check

Figure A-19b. Checking distance between the anti-rotation key and the side of the keyway z

Step 2. The large white mounting bracket that supports the breech operating cam has a small 45degree ramp on it. This ramp is located near the front, bottom, gunner’s side of the breech—it is the front end of the anti-rotation keyway that rides up on it. Try to insert the .005 feeler gauge between the ramp and the breech (see Figure A-20). Be sure to check this distance on both sides of the anti-rotation keyway. If the blade does not go in on either side, then the breech is rotated fully clockwise. In other words, if the breech is touching either the gunner’s side of the antirotation key or the ramp on the mounting bracket, it is fully rotated. If the blade goes between them, notify maintenance, and proceed to Check 3.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-75

Appendix A

Figure A-20. Checking the distance between the ramp and the breech z

Step 3. With the breech fully clockwise, measure the distance between the left front bottom of the breech and the top of the breech alignment block. The gap should be 0.005 inches or less, so use the 0.006 blade of your feeler gauge (see Figure A-21a and Figure A-21b). If it does not go in, then the block does not need shimming. If it does go in, shims must be added under the block–notify maintenance.

Figure A-21a. Starting position for breech alignment block check

A-76

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-21b. Position for breech alignment block check

CHECK 3―ELEVATION MECHANISM CHECK Purpose A-76. The elevation mechanism check ensures that the support system is secured properly and does not have excessive movement. Excessive movement may result in a continual round-to-round dispersion.

Conditions z z z z z z

All personnel are clear of the main gun. The engine is off and the TURRET POWER is off. The main gun is in the SAFE position. The main gun is in the TURRET position, and the elevation is locked. The turret is in the TRAVEL LOCK position. The system hydraulic pressure is reduced to zero.

Procedures z

Step 1. Above the Gun. With the main gun in the TRAVEL LOCK position, use the manual elevation crank to raise and lower the gun quickly (rock), as far as the travel lock will allow. At the same time, a second person should— a. Place his hand across the top of the elevation mechanism’s rod end bearing and its mounting bracket to feel for play (see Figure A-22a). b. Repeat this at the head of the rod end pin and mounting bracket where it protrudes on the side (see Figure A-22b).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-77

Appendix A

Figure A-22a. Top view of main gun and elevation mechanism

Figure A-22b. Side view of rod end pin z

A-78

Step 2. Below the Gun. With the gun still in the TRAVEL LOCK position, use the manual elevation crank to raise and lower the gun quickly (rock), as far as the travel lock will allow. At the same time, a second person should look for movement between— a. The elevation mechanism and the yoke (see Figure A-23). b. Between the yoke and the outside support bracket (see Figure A-23).

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-23. Lower elevation mechanism, yoke, and support bracket z

Step 3. Check the elevation mechanism and forward struts, the struts have two nuts and two washers apiece. Check the lower ends of the forward and rear struts to ensure all bolts are tight. Loose mounting bolts will result in excessive round-to-round dispersion (see Figure A-24a and Figure A-24b).

Note. The forward lower struts, washers, and nuts must be checked from the driver’s compartment.

Figure A-24a. Rear elevation mechanism support strut

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-79

Appendix A

Figure A-24b. Rear elevation mechanism support strut (continued)

SUPERELEVATION AAC CHECK Purpose A-77. Using FCS inputs that approximate those used during screening for both KE and HEAT training rounds, determine if FCS computes and implements the correct superelevation.

Conditions z z

Completed prep-to-fire checks. Passed computer self-test and hydraulic pressure check.

Procedures z z

z z z z z z z

A-80

Step 1. Zero out automatic inputs, crosswind, lead, cant, and attitude. Step 2. Zero out boresight, MRS boresight, and MRS update. a. Press the ADJUST button on the main menu, press BORESIGHT, press GPS, and zero boresight numbers. b. Press the ADJUST button on the main menu, press MRS, zero MRS boresight, and MRS update. Step 3. Enter the ammunition temperature, 69.8; barometric reading, 29.92; and air temperature, 59.0. Step 4. Ammunition select to SABOT, AMMO SUBDES for M865A3. Step 5. Enter the CCF for M865: +0.15 (Right), -0.60 (Up). Step 6. Ammunition select to HEAT, AMMO SUBDES for M831A1. Step 7. Enter the CCF for M831A1: +0.15 (Right), -0.15(Up). Step 8. Select MANUAL mode. Step 9. Press the ADJUST button on the main menu, press BORESIGHT, and press GPS.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z

z z z

Step 10. Using the gunner’s quadrant and manual controls, level the gun to 0 mils. (Use either the gunner’s quadrant location pads on the breech or, more safely, the bracket to the left of the gunner’s left arm.) Step 11. Toggle the GPS reticle to a well-defined aim point. Step 12. Press ENTER twice on the GCDP, and press the return key three times. Step 13. Select NORMAL mode.

M865IP, TPCSDS-T z Step 14. Ammunition select to KE. z Step 15. While depressing the palm switch, press the SENSOR key and enter a range 1,500 meters on the CCP—hold the palm switch for 5 seconds. z Step 16. Release the palm switch. z Step 17. Manually lay the GPS reticle on the original aim point. Note. Maintenance data will not be available for superelevation for the M1A2 SEP until software version 4.1 is fielded. z

z

z z

Step 18. For tanks without an upgraded CEU (do not have M829A3 or M1028 solution), depress the MAINT DATA key, and then 9, 1, and ENTER. The number in the CCP display should be 2.68, +/-0.02 mils. In other words, the reading should be between 2.66 and 2.70. Press the MAINT DATA key, then 9, 0, and ENTER to clear the display. If the value is not within tolerance, recheck the manual and automatic inputs. If the value is still not within tolerance, the fire control computer is not computing the correct superelevation value; notify maintenance. Step 19. For the tanks with the upgraded CEU, depress the MAINT DATA key, and then 9, 1, and ENTER. The reading should be 2.65, +/-0.02 mils, or between 2.63 and 2.67. Press the MAINT DATA key to clear the display. If the value is not within tolerance, recheck the manual and automatic inputs. If the value is still not within tolerance, the fire control computer is not computing the correct superelevation value. Notify maintenance. Step 20. Using the gunner’s quadrant, measure the elevation of the gun. Step 21. Whether the tank has the old CEU or the upgraded CEU, the reading should be between 2.5 and 2.9 mils. If the applied elevation is not within tolerance, notify maintenance.

M831 and M831A1, TP-T z Step 22. Ammo select to HEAT. z Step 23. While depressing the palm switch, enter a range of 1,500 meters on the CCP—hold the palm switch for 5 seconds. z Step 24. Manually lay the GPS reticle on the original aim point. z Step 25. For tanks without an upgraded CEU (do not have M829A3 or M1028 solution), depress the MAINT DATA key, and then press 9, 1, and ENTER. The reading should be 7.46, +/-0.02, or between 7.44 and 7.48. Press the MAINT DATA key, then 9, 0, and ENTER to clear the display. If the value is not within tolerance, recheck the manual and automatic inputs. If the value is still not within tolerance, the fire control computer is not computing the correct superelevation value; notify maintenance. z Step 26. For tanks with the upgraded CEU, depress the MAINT DATA key, and then press 9, 1, and ENTER. The reading should be 7.52, +/-0.02, or between 7.50 and 7.54. Press the MAINT DATA key, then 9, 0, and ENTER to clear the display. z Step 27. Using the gunner’s quadrant, measure the elevation of the gun.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-81

Appendix A

z z

Step 28. For tanks with either the old or upgraded CEU, the gunner’s quadrant reading should be between 7.3 and 7.7 mils. Step 29. Re-enable all automatic inputs, turn off the CCP, and close the door.

Cold and Hot Temperature Checks A-78. Crews can also conduct superelevation checks at cold and hot temperatures. Use the same procedures listed above, except enter either 20°F or 120°F for ammunition temperature. Table A-17a and Table A-17b depict the desired solutions. Table A-17a. Temperature checks, old CEU For tanks with the old CEU: Maintenance Data 91

M865IP/PIP M831

Ammo Temp

Solution

Tolerance

Gunner’s Quadrant QE

20°F

2.91

2.89 -2.93

2.7 -3.1

120°F

2.47

2.45 -2.49

2.3 -2.7

20°F

7.88

7.86 -7.90

7.7 -8.1

120°F

7.10

7.08 -7.12

6.9 -7.3

Table A-17b. Temperature checks, new CEU For tanks with the new CEU (has M829A3 and M1028 solutions): Maintenance Data 91

M865IP/PIP M831

Ammo Temp

Solution

Tolerance

Gunner’s Quadrant QE

20°F

2.81

2.79 -2.83

2.6 -3.0

120°F

2.47

2.49 -2.53

2.3 -2.7

20°F

7.88

7.98 -8.02

7.8 -8.2

120°F

7.10

6.99 -7.03

6.8 -7.2

CAM BRACKET OPERATING CABLE ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE A-79. The cam bracket operating cable adjustment is used to obtain the correct clearance between the breech crank roller and cam bracket when the distance between the two is less or greater than 0.005-inch to 0.010-inch (0.127mm to 0.254mm).

CONDITIONS z z z z z z z

A-82

Tools: artillery and turret mechanic’s tool kit; ordinance (SC 5180-95-CL-A12). Ammunition box assembly removed. All personnel are clear of the main gun. Engine if off and TURRET POWER is off. The turret is in travel lock. The stub base deflector is removed. Breech is in the closed position.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

PROCEDURES z

Position cable. Step 1. Look at the threaded collar of the operating cable at the bracket. If the collar of the operating cable is not centered between the two jamnuts, proceed to step 4 of Adjust Cable below. „ Step 2. Hold one jamnut and loosen the other jamnut. Center the collar of the operating cable between both of the jamnuts. Tighten the two jamnuts against the bracket(see Figure A-25a). „

Figure A-25a. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment z

Adjust Cable: Step 1. Raise arming handle to the ARM position. „ Step 2. Using the breech operating handle, fully open the breechblock. „ Step 3. Lower arming handle to the SAFE position. The cam bracket should move enough to allow breech crank roller to disengage from the cam. Breechblock should now be held open at extractors. „ Step 4. Measure the distance between the face of the breech crank roller (1) and cam bracket (2). If the clearance is between 0.005-inch to 0.010-inch (0.127mm to 0.254mm), go to step 8 (see Figure A-25b). „

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-83

Appendix A

Figure A-25b. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment (continued) Note. It may be necessary to adjust the operating cable at both ends to obtain correct clearance between the roller and bracket (2). „

Step 5. To move the roller and bracket closer together, loosen the left jamnut and turn the right jamnut clockwise. To move roller and bracket farther apart, loosen the right jamnut and turn the left jamnut counterclockwise (see Figure A-25c).

Figure A-25c. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment (continued)

A-84

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Step 6. If correct clearance between the roller and bracket was obtained in step 5 above then go to step 8. Step 7. To move roller and bracket farther apart, loosen the bottom jamnut (6) at the SAFE/ARM handle and turn the top jamnut (8) counterclockwise. To move roller and bracket closer together, loosen the top jamnut (8) and turn the bottom jamnut (6) clockwise (see Figure A-25d).

„

„

Figure A-25d. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment (continued) z z

Step 8. Close breechblock using manual release (9). Step 9. Install stub base deflector.

SECTION IV – LIVE-FIRE ACCURACY SCREENING TEST

PROOFING TEAM A-80. The commander and master gunner must select the most technically competent TCs and gunners to act as the proofing team. At home station, the proofing team assists the master gunner with training the tank crews, as necessary (or directed by the commander). The proofing team must be on hand to help crews prepare for, and conduct, the screening test. The proofing team also assists the crew in firing the screening test, if necessary. (When available, direct support contact teams should also participate.) Success of the screening test depends on the proofing team and crew members eliminating mechanical faults and crew errors before firing the first round of the screening test. The following must be completed before the screening test: z Collimation checks of the MBD (M26A1 and M27A1). z Preventive maintenance checks and services (see appropriate operator’s manual). z ACC. z Boresighting with an MBD. z Verify plumb and synchronization (M1A2 SEP) (see operator’s manual).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-85

Appendix A

SCREENING PROCEDURES A-81. The screening test consists of firing first sabot, then HEAT ammunition at a screening test target at 1,500 meters (M1A1 and M1A2 SEP) (see Figure A-26). (The target must be within [+ or -] 20 meters of the required range.)

Figure A-26. Screening test target (ST-5) Note. Units may use a fill color inside the circle to ease in round sensing. A-82. The TC ensures the gunner makes a precise lay using the power control handles with the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch in the NORMAL position. The gunner lases to the target and announces the range to the target. If the correct range cannot be obtained, the known range must be indexed into the fire control system. Using the power control handles, the gunner makes a precise lay on the target aiming point, making the last movement up. When firing, the gunner keeps at least one of the palm switches on the gunner’s power control handles depressed. To pass the screening test, one of the first two rounds fired for each ammunition type must hit the target fully within the circle (see Table A-18a and Table A-18b and Table A-19a and Table A-19b). Targets should be checked physically or confirmed with high-power optics. There is no time limit for this screening test. The steps illustrated in Figure A-27 outline the screening test procedures: Notes. If the tank was given a discrete CCF during the LFAST, and no turret components have been replaced, fire the LFAST with the discrete CCF. If the tank fires erratically during the screening test, the proofing team should inspect the tank. If more than the full width or height of the ST-5 circle separates the round strikes, the tank is firing erratically, and the problem must be fixed. A-83. Zero the coax and M2 caliber .50 machine guns in accordance with the operator’s manual (see also page A-93).

A-86

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-27. Flow chart for screening test procedures

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-87

Appendix A

Table A-18a. Screening test actions checklist (M1A1) Action

Item

Alpha

Complete prior to pulling forward to conduct screening test: Conduct PMCS IAW operator’s manual. Conduct prep-to-fire checks. Verify that the EMERGENCY and NORMAL mode drifts were nulled out. Make sure the boresight and CCF (zero) data is current. Verify boresight, if condition warrants.

Bravo

Read back the following: “My GPS boresight data is ___________ and ______________.” “My MRS boresight data is ___________ and ______________.” “My MRS update data is 0.0 and 0.0.” “My AMMO SUBDES for sabot is _______________.” “My CCF for sabot is ____________ and _____________.” “Crosswind is _________________.” “Cant is __________________.” “Air temp is _______________.” “Barometric pressure is _________________.” “Ammo temp is ________________.”

Charlie

Make sure no lights are illuminated on the CCP. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL. Move the GPS MAGNIFICATION switch to 10X. Load one round of Sabot. Index Sabot. Move the GUN SELECT switch to MAIN. Lase to appropriate ST-5. Report range to tower. Report REDCON when complete.

Delta

Fire one round of sabot at designated screening target. The gunner— Uses the power control handles. Makes a G pattern. Makes last movement up. Announces “ON THE WAY” to alert tower. Squeezes GPCH trigger gently; does not flinch or pull. Takes further instructions from the tower.

Note. If Discreet CCF was determined, go to Golf.

A-88

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Table A-18b. Screening test actions checklist (M1A1) (continued) Action

Item

Echo

Move the GUN SELECT switch to MAIN. Index HEAT. Read the following back to the tower: “My AMMO SUBDES for HEAT is ______________.” “My CCF for HEAT is ___________ and _______________.” Lase to same ST-5; report range to tower.

Foxtrot

Fire one round of HEAT at designated screening target. The gunner— Uses the power control handles. Makes a G pattern. Makes last movement up. Announces “ON THE WAY” to alert tower. Squeezes GPCH trigger gently; does not flinch or pull. Takes further instructions from the tower.

Note. If Discreet CCF was determined, go to Golf. Golf

Index Sabot or HEAT. Move the CCP PWR to ON. Press the ZERO push button; make sure the ZERO light comes on. Report REDCON when complete.

Hotel

Gunner uses the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch to enter data. Press the ENTER push button on the CCP to enter data into the CEU. Make sure there are no lights illuminated on the CCP. Call the tower and read back the CCF data in the computer.

India

Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL. Load one round of Sabot or HEAT. Read back the range displayed in the GPS. Go back to Delta (for Sabot) or Foxtrot (for HEAT).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-89

Appendix A

Table A-19a. Screening test actions checklist (M1A2 SEP) Action

Item

Alpha

Complete prior to pulling forward to conduct screening test: Conduct PMCS IAW operator’s manual. Null out EMERGENCY and NORMAL mode drift. Make sure the boresight and CCF (zero) data is current. Verify boresight, if condition warrants.

Bravo

Read back the following: “My GPS boresight data is __________ and ____________.” “My MRS boresight data is __________ and ____________.” “My MRS update data is __________ (or none).” (Should be 0.0 and 0.0.) “My AMMO SUBDES for sabot is ______________.” “My CCF for sabot is __________ and ____________.” “Crosswind is _____________.” “Cant is ____________.” “Air temp is _______________.” “Barometric pressure is _____________.”

Charlie

Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL. Move the GPS MAGNIFICATION switch to 10X. Load one round of Sabot. Index Sabot. Move the GUN SELECT switch to MAIN. Lase to appropriate ST-5. Report range to tower. Report REDCON when complete.

Delta

Fire one round of Sabot at designated screening target. The gunner Uses the power control handles. Makes a G pattern. Makes last movement up. Announces “ON THE WAY” to alert tower. Squeezes GPCH trigger gently; does not flinch or pull. Takes further instructions from tower.

Note. If Discreet CCF was determined, go to Golf.

A-90

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Table A-19b. Screening test actions checklist (M1A2 SEP) (continued) Action

Item

Echo

Move the GUN SELECT switch to MAIN. Index HEAT. Read back to tower: “My AMMO SUBDES for HEAT is _____________.” “My CCF for HEAT is __________ and _____________.” Lase to same ST-5. Report range to tower. Go back to action Delta.

Foxtrot

Fire one round of HEAT at designated screening target. The gunner— Uses the power control handles. Makes a G pattern. Makes last movement up. Announces “ON THE WAY” to alert tower. Squeezes GPCH trigger gently; does not flinch or pull. Takes further instructions from the tower.

Note. If Discreet CCF was determined, go to Golf. Golf

Index Sabot or HEAT. Press the ZERO push button on the ADJUST menu. Report REDCON when complete.

Hotel

Gunner enters data using the GCDP key pad. Press the ENT push button to enter data into the TEU. Call the tower and read back the CCF data in the GCDP.

India

Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL. Load one round of Sabot or HEAT. Read back the range displayed in the GPS. Go back to Delta (for Sabot) or Foxtrot (for HEAT).

DETERMINING THE MEAN POINT OF IMPACT AND INDIVIDUAL TANK CCF A-84. To ensure the most accurate measurements, the screening test target should be exactly level and at 1,500 meters. A vertical and horizontal line should bisect the center of the target aiming point and extend out to the edges of the screening test target. These lines are required to measure the strike of the rounds. Follow the steps below to determine the mean point of impact for each round. z Step 1. Measure the distance from the horizontal and vertical lines to the center of the round. The distance from the horizontal line to center of round is the elevation; the distance from the vertical line to center of the round is the azimuth. When all rounds have been measured, record the AZ and EL measurements for each round (in centimeters) with the appropriate positive (right, down) or negative (left, up) sign. z Step 2. Find the mean (average) point of impact (MPI). Note. When determining the mean with a calculator, make sure all left and up readings are entered as negative (-) values.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-91

Appendix A

„

Add all AZ and EL measurements. 1st Round 2d Round 3d Round Total

„

-53 cm (Up) -10 cm (Up) +20 cm (Down) -43 cm (Up)

Find the MPI. Divide the AZ and EL totals by the number of rounds fired (3). Azimuth Elevation

z

-125 cm (Left) -150 cm (Left) -175 cm (Left) -450 cm (Left)

-450 ÷ 3 = -150 cm -43 ÷ 3 = -14.3333 cm

Step 3. Convert the MPI to milliradians. Find 1/10 of the range: 1,500 ÷ 10 = 150. „ Divide each MPI (Step 2b) by 1/10 of the range (Step 3a). „

Azimuth Elevation z

Step 4. Convert to mils. Multiply results from step 3b by 1.02 and round to two digits. (The computer accepts two digits, regardless of the position of the decimal [for example, .15 or 1.5]. If the third number is 4 or less, the second number will remain the same. If the third number is 5 or more, the second number will increase by 1.) Azimuth Elevation

z

-150 cm ÷ 150 = -1.00 -14.3333 cm ÷ 150 = -0.09555

-1.00 x 1.02 = -1.02 = -1.00 -0.09555 x 1.02 = -0.097466 = -0.10

Step 5. Add the AZ and EL from step 4 to the old CCF. The result is the new CCF. Old CCF (M865-IP) Result of Step 5 New CCF

A-92

+0.15 -1.00 -0.85 (Left)

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

-0.60 -0.10 -0.70 (Up)

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-28. Sample discrete CCF worksheet (DA Form 7556-R)

31 May 2010

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

A-93

Appendix A

*ALTERNATE METHOD⎯DETERMINING MEAN POINT OF IMPACT AND INDIVIDUAL TANK CCF A-85. You may need to determine an approximate MPI when firing on tank gunnery ranges that share a common impact area (on which you cannot go down range to get the measurements to calculate a CCF). A-86. Using high-powered optics, such as a ground-mounted TOW sight, is essential. Use the Discrete CCF Worksheet, DA Form 7556-R (see Figure A-28) for this procedure. The following steps describe the procedures. Note. Mark all previous impacts (holes) on the ST-5 using the Discrete CCF Worksheet, DA Form 7556-R in Figure A-29. Use a Discrete CCF Worksheet for each tank. z

Step 1. Mark the impact of each round fired with an S for sabot or H for HEAT (this is for later historical reference), and the sequence (1, 2, 3) in which they were fired (see Figure A-29).

Figure A-29. Target z

Step 2. Draw a line connecting the center of any two round impacts on the Discrete CCF Worksheet (see Figure A-30) (S-1 and S-3 were used in this example).

Figure A-30. Target–mark 1/2 way

A-94

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z

Step 3. Make a mark on this line halfway between the two impacts (see Figure A-31).

Figure A-31. Target–mark 1/3 way z z

Step 4. From the halfway mark, draw a line to the center of the remaining round impact. Step 5. From the halfway mark, make a second mark one-third the distance to the third impact. (This mark is the MPI.)

Note. Have gunner look at the Discrete CCF Worksheet, DA Form 7556-R when completed. This will aid the gunner in recognizing the MPI. z

Step 6. Have the gunner move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY. M1A1. − Have the gunner press the ZERO push button on the CCP. − Manually lay the GPS reticle aiming dot on the target aiming point of ST-5, with last movement up. Using the reticle adjust toggle switch on the CCP, move the GPS reticle aiming dot to the approximate MPI, as determined on the Discrete CCF Worksheet, and record. − Make sure the appropriate ammunition is selected; press the ENTER key on the CCP keypad to store this data in the CEU. „ M1A2 SEP. − Have the gunner press the ADJUST push button on the GCDP. Press the ZERO push button on the ADJUST menu. − Manually lay the GPS reticle aiming dot on the target aiming point of ST-5, with last movement up. Using the four-way adjust switch on the GCDP, move the GPS reticle aiming dot to the approximate MPI, as determined on the Discrete CCF Worksheet, and record. (The tank discrete CCF for this round of ammunition is shown on the GCDP.) − Make sure the appropriate ammunition is selected; press the ENT key on GCDP keypad to store this data in the TMPU. − Press the RETURN push button on the GCDP twice to return to the MAIN menu. „

Note. The firing tank will fire a confirmation round of the same type and lot number of ammunition.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-95

Appendix A

SCREENING UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS A-87. The target dimensions (other than 1,500 meters) shown in Figure A-32 and Table A-20 for 120mm are to be used only when conditions preclude use of normal screening procedures. (Such instances are excessive heat shimmer from extreme temperatures or terrain not available to place targets at 1,500 meters.) Targets must be reduced in size to correspond to the range (tank-to-target distance) being fired. If the range to the ST-5 is 1,000m or less, the tank-to-target range must be within +10 meters. Note. See pages A-99 through A-102 for screening procedures.

Figure A-32. Screening test target (ST-5) with dimension A Table A-20. Dimensions of screening targets under unusual conditions (120mm)

A-96

1,500m

175.0cm

305cm

1,400m

163.4cm

284cm

1,300m

151.6cm

264cm

1,200m

140.0cm

244cm

1,100m

128.4cm

224cm

1,000m

116.6cm

203cm

900m

105.5cm

183cm

800m

93.4cm

163cm

700m

81.6cm

142cm

600m

70.0cm

122cm

500m

58.4cm

102cm

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

SCREENING TEST FAILURES Failures A-88. The proofing team inspects tanks that fail the screening test for mechanical or crew procedural errors that might have caused the failure. (When available, direct support contact teams should also participate.) The proofing team should check the following: z What were the failure indicators? (This basic information may help determine if there was an obvious procedural error.) „ Was one round fired so far off the first target that further firing was halted? „ What were the sensings from the tower? „ Is the crew experienced? „ Has the tank performed well (or poorly) in the past? „ Have any FCS components been replaced since last live firing? z Is the system still boresighted? „ Did the crew update the MRS during the test? (They should not have.) Check this by moving the MRS lever to IN and examining the display numbers on the CCP. (They should be 0 and 0.) „ Verify boresight. z Check for possible crew error by asking the crew: „ Where did the gunner aim (reticle lay)? „ Did the gunner remember to depress the palm switches while firing? z Check for possible maintenance problems: „ Did the vehicle pass all checks on AACs? „ Were the proper ammunition and AMMO SUBDES indexed? „ Were the proper CCFs applied? „ How was the target range entered in the system? „ Were the manual inputs correct? „ Press the CROSSWIND key. The value should be close to the estimated wind speed. Traverse the turret 180 degrees. The crosswind reading should be from the opposite direction. (Look for obvious differences only.) „ Press the CANT key. For level-platform firings, the value should be within 2 degrees of level. „ Press the LEAD key. The value for a motionless turret should be less than 1. „ Was the correct ammunition fired? (Look at the bases of the expended shell casings if there is any doubt.) „ Was the hydraulic system pressurized to at least 1,500 psi with the engine running? „ Were any of the fire control malfunction lights illuminated? „ Were any circuit breakers open? „ Was there any normal/emergency mode drift in the fire control system? „ Will the computer pass a self-test? A-89. If a correctable mechanical problem or procedural error is found, it is corrected, and the crew reboresights the tank, with supervision from the proofing team. Then, the tank crew refires the portion of the screening test the tank failed. If the tank passes the screening test, the crew and tank proceed with combat operations or training. If a mechanical problem or procedural error was not found, the crew needs to complete the following checks: (for the M1A1): M1A1 Check 4 (Special Input), page A-49 and M1A1 Check 5 (Ballistic Solution), page A-56; or (for the M1A2 SEP): M1A2 SEP Check 4 (Special Input Check), page A-63; M1A2 SEP Check 5 (Ballistic Solution), page A-67. If no Abrams Combined Solution Board is available, crews can perform the Superelevation AAC Check on page A-80. A-90. If the tank is sent to direct support maintenance or a line replaceable unit is changed, the tank crew must re-boresight the tank and fire another screening test (when the faults are corrected) using the fleet CCF, or the tank discrete CCF if one has been established, with supervision from the proofing team.

31 May 2010

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

A-97

Appendix A

Screening Failure Data A-91. *Results of all proofing tests must be compiled by the firing unit and sent to the U.S. Army Armor Center (USAARMC) (see address below). The data will enable USAARMC to monitor unit experience under these calibration policies. Required data includes⎯ z Type of ammunition. z CCF the tank fired and screening round impact measurements. z Impact measurements of confirmation round. z New CCF. z Reason for failure, if known. z Follow-on action. z Unit identification. z Location of firing and environmental conditions. z Ammunition lot number. z Date fired. z Automatic and manual inputs in the computer. (When recording automatic inputs, make sure that a palm switch on the GPCH is depressed.) A-92. Mail the data to⎯ Directorate of Training, Doctrine, Combat Development, and Experimentation (DTDCD-E) ATTN: ATZK-TDD-G 204 1st Cavalry Regiment Rd Ste 216 Fort Knox, KY 40121-5123

M1A1/M1A2 Gunner’s Quadrant End-for-End Test A-93. *There are occasions when crews or master gunners need to precisely measure the pointing elevation of a gun. The M1A1/M1A2 gunner’s quadrant is used to make measurements (see Figure A-33). Beforehand, the crew must perform an end-for-end test on the M1A1/M1A2 gunner’s quadrant to make sure the quadrant is in tolerance. (The quadrant is in tolerance if the end-for-end correction is between +0.4 and -0.4. The quadrant should be turned in for calibration if the end-for-end correction is ±0.5 or greater.)

Figure A-33. Gunner’s quadrant (M1A1 shown)

A-98

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation z z z z z z z

z

Step 1. Inspect the elevation quadrant seats on the weapon. Step 2. Inspect the quadrant shoes. Step 3. Zero the micrometer by turning the micrometer knob. Step 4. Set the index at zero mils. Step 5. Position the quadrant on the weapon pointing toward the muzzle end. Step 6. Depress or elevate the tube to center the bubble in the level vial. Step 7. Reverse the direction of the quadrant (the bubble should center). „ If the bubble centers, the test is complete. „ If the bubble does not center, go to step 8. Step 8. Center the bubble with the micrometer knob. „ *If the bubble centers⎯ *(1) Divide the micrometer reading by 2 to obtain the positive correction (for example, 0.4 ÷ 2 = 0.2). (2) Put the result on the micrometer scale. (3) Point the quadrant toward the muzzle end of the weapon. (4) Depress or elevate the tube to center the bubble. (5) Reverse the direction of the quadrant (the bubble should center). (6) Record the end-for-end correction on the carrying case. „ *If the bubble does not center⎯ (1) Set the index at -10 mils for a negative correction. (2) Center the bubble in the level vial with the micrometer knob. (3) Add 10 mils to the micrometer reading (for example, 9.8 + 10 = 19.8). (4) *Divide the result by 2 (for example, 19.8 ÷ 2 = 9.9). (5) Put the result on the micrometer scale. (6) Point the quadrant toward the muzzle end. (7) Depress or elevate the tube to center the bubble. (8) Reverse the direction of the quadrant (the bubble should center). (9) Subtract 10 from the micrometer reading (for example, 9.9 -10.0 = -0.1). (Since this is a negative correction, a minus sign must be placed in front of the correction factor.) (10) Record the end-for-end correction on the carrying case.

SECTION V – ZEROING TANK-MOUNTED MACHINE GUNS A-94. The machine gun is the tank’s secondary armament. It allows the crew to engage, suppress, and destroy personnel and light-armored vehicles. It is imperative that the machine gun is properly zeroed.

BORESIGHTING THE CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN (M1A1) A-95. The following are conducted in preparation to boresighting: z Position the tank on as level terrain as possible, with the gun tube over the front. z Select the boresight target with a well-defined right angle, at a range as near 500 meters as possible. z Lase on the target using the commander’s handle, if possible, to confirm the range to the boresight target.

BORESIGHTING WITHOUT THE CALIBER .50 (LENZAR) BORESIGHT DEVICE z z z z

31 May 2010

Step 1. Clear the machine gun. Step 2. Remove the rear mounting pin, and lift the rear of the machine gun above the firing roller. Step 3. Remove the back plate, and take the bolt group out of the caliber .50 receiver. Step 4. Lower the rear of the machine gun, and reinsert the rear mounting pin.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

A-99

Appendix A z

z

z z

Step 5. Look into the back of the receiver and out through the machine gun barrel. Manually traverse the CWS, and elevate or depress the machine gun to align the center of the barrel on the target’s upper left corner. Step 6. Without moving the machine gun or CWS, look through the commander’s weapon sight, and align the boresight cross of the reticle on the upper left corner of the target as follows: „ Loosen the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to allow the horizontal adjustment control screw to turn. „ Adjust the vertical line of the boresight cross on the left edge of the target, using the flat-tip screwdriver. „ Tighten the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to lock the horizontal adjustment control screw. „ Loosen the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to allow the vertical adjustment control screw to turn. „ Adjust the horizontal line of the boresight cross on the top edge of the target using the flattip screwdriver. „ Tighten the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to lock the vertical adjustment control screw. Step 7. Look through the back of the caliber .50 receiver and out the gun barrel. Elevate, and then depress the machine gun onto the upper left corner of the target, using the elevation crank. Step 8. Look through the CWS sight to see if the boresight cross is on the upper left corner of the target.

Notes. If the boresight cross is not on the upper left corner of the target, notify unit maintenance. If the machine gun and boresight cross are both on the upper left corner of the target, the machine gun is properly boresighted. z z z z

Step 9. Remove the rear mounting pin, and lift the rear of the machine gun above the firing roller. Step 10. Put the bolt group back into the caliber .50 receiver, and install the back plate. Step 11. Lower the rear of the machine gun, and reinsert the rear mounting pin. Step 12. Make sure the roller is over the butterfly trigger.

BORESIGHTING WITH THE CALIBER .50 (LENZAR) BORESIGHT DEVICE z z z z

A-100

Step 1. Clear the machine gun. Step 2. Insert the caliber .50 boresight device. Step 3. Manually traverse the CWS, and elevate or depress the machine gun to align the caliber .50 boresight device on the target upper left corner. Step 4. Without moving the machine gun or CWS, look through the commander’s weapon sight, and align the boresight cross of the reticle on the upper left corner of the target as follows: „ Loosen the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to allow the horizontal adjustment control screw to turn. „ Adjust the vertical line of the boresight cross on the left edge of the target, using the flat-tip screwdriver. „ Tighten the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to lock the horizontal adjustment control screw. „ Loosen the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to allow the vertical adjustment control screw to turn. „ Adjust the horizontal line of the boresight cross on the top edge of the target, using the flattip screwdriver. „ Tighten the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to lock the vertical adjustment control screw.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z z

Step 5. Look through the caliber .50 boresight device. Elevate, and then depress the machine gun onto the upper left corner of the target, using the elevation crank. Step 6. Look through the CWS sight to see if the boresight cross is on the upper left corner of the target.

Notes. If the boresight cross is not on the upper left corner of the target, notify unit maintenance. If the machine gun and boresight cross are both on the upper left corner of the target, the machine is properly boresighted. z

Step 7. Remove the caliber .50 boresight device.

BORESIGHT COMMANDER’S WEAPON SIGHT (CALIBER .50 THERMAL SIGHT/DAY TV SYSTEM) TO COMMANDER’S WEAPON – PRIMARY METHOD Note. Make sure that the commander’s weapon sight reticle has been set for use with the caliber .50 machine gun. If alternate weapon (M240) is installed alternate boresighting procedure has to be used. Position tank on level ground. Select boresight target with defined right angle at a range as near 500 meters as possible. Lase on target using commander’s handle, if possible, to confirm range to boresight target. z

Step 1. Install commander’s weapon.

WARNING Make sure weapon is cleared before boresighting. z z z

z

Step 2. Insert .50 caliber boresight device adapter into machine gun barrel. Step 3. Insert .50 caliber boresight device optical unit into caliber .50 boresight device adapter with optical unit eyepiece at 12 o’clock position. Step 4. Look through optical unit eyepiece while manually traversing CWS and elevating and depressing machine gun to align boresight devise reticle with upper left corner of boresight target. Step 5. Without moving the machine gun or CWS, look through commander’s weapon sight and align boresight cross of reticle on upper left corner of boresight target as follows: a. Press VID SEL button on CWS Digital Control Monitor (DCM) until day TV image is displayed. b. Hold MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM to left until menu is displayed on sight. c. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle down until indicator arrow is pointing at BORESIGHT. Press the MULTI FUNCTION button to right to select BORESIGHT. d. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle up and/or down placing the horizontal line of the boresight cross on top edge of boresight target. e. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on the CWS DCM toggle left and/or right placing the vertical line of the boresight cross on the left edge of the boresight target. If reticle displacement displayed in the CWS display is greater than L 5.00 or R 5.00 then move reticle until it is R 0.00 then go to step f. If less than L 5.00 or R 5.00 then go to step 5i.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-101

Appendix A

f.

z

z z

Loosen setscrew with 9/64 inch socket head key to allow control of horizontal adjustment control screw. g. Adjust horizontal adjustment control screw with a screwdriver, placing vertical line of boresight cross on left edge of boresight target. h. Tighten setscrew with 9/64 inch socket head key. Repeat steps 5d and 5e. i. Look through optical unit eyepiece and CWS DCM sight to see if boresight cross is on upper left corner of boresight target. j. If boresight cross is not on upper left corner of boresight target, start BORESIGHT COMMANDER’S WEAPON SIGHT TO COMMANDER’S WEAPON PRIMARY METHOD with step 4. If boresight cross is still not on upper left and corner of boresight target, notify unit maintenance. k. If boresight device reticle and boresight cross are both on upper left corner of boresight target, machine gun is properly boresighted. Press the E-ZOOM button to save the day TV boresight and check that “BORESIGHT SAVED” is displayed in CWS DCM. Step 6. Without moving the machine gun or CWS, look through commander’s weapon sight and align boresight cross of reticle on upper left corner of boresight target as follows: a. Press VID SEL button on CWS DCM until thermal image is displayed. b. Hold MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM to left until menu is displayed on sight. c. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle down until indicator arrow is pointing at BORESIGHT. Press the MULTI FUNCTION button to right to select BORESIGHT. d. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle left and/or right placing the vertical line of the boresight cross on left edge of boresight target. e. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle down and/or up placing the horizontal line of the boresight cross on top edge of boresight target. If reticle displacement displayed in the CWS display is greater than U 5.00 or D 5.00 then move reticle until it is U 0.00 then go to step 6f. If less than U 5.00 or D 5.00 then go to step 6h. f. Loosen the four bolts on the CWS equilibrator bracket with a 9/16 inch socket. Adjust cam bolt with 7/16 inch socket placing horizontal line of the boresight cross on top edge of the boresight target. g. Tighten the four bolts n the CWS equilibrator bracket with a 9/16 inch socket. Repeat steps 6d and 6e. h. Look through optical unit eyepiece and CWS sight to see if boresight cross is on the upper left corner of boresight target. i. If boresight cross is not on upper left corner of boresight target, start BORESIGHT COMMANDER’S WEAPON SIGHT TO COMMANDER’S WEAPON – PRIMARY METHOD with step 6. j. If boresight cross is still not on upper left and corner of boresight target, notify unit maintenance. k. If boresight device reticle and boresight cross are both on upper left corner of boresight target, machine gun is properly boresighted. Press the E-ZOOM button to save the thermal system boresight and check that “BORESIGHT SAVED” is displayed in CWS DCM. Step 7. Remove .50 caliber boresight device machine gun adapter and boresight optical unit from machine gun barrel. Step 8. Check head space and timing (see TM 9-1005-213-10).

BORESIGHT COMMANDER’S WEAPON SIGHT (CALIBER .50 THERMAL SIGHT/DAY TV SYSTEM) TO COMMANDER’S WEAPON – ALTERNATE METHOD Notes. Make sure that the commander’s weapon sight reticle has been set for use with the caliber .50 machine gun. If alternate weapon (M240) is installed alternate boresighting procedure has to be used. Position tank on level ground.

A-102

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Select boresight target with defined right angle at a range as near 500 meters as possible. Lase on target using commander’s handle, if possible, to confirm range to boresight target. z

Step 1. Install commander’s weapon.

WARNING Make sure weapon is cleared before boresighting. Make sure bolt is forward before removing backplate. Springloaded parts may release and injure operator. z z z z

z

z

Step 2. Remove rear mounting pin and lift rear of machine gun above firing roller. Step 3. Remove backplate and take bolt group out of caliber .50 receiver. Step 4. Lower rear of machine gun and insert rear mounting pin. Step 5. Look into back of receiver and out through machine gun barrel. Manually traverse CWS, and elevate or depress machine gun to align the center barrel on upper left corner of boresight target. Step 6. Without moving machine gun or CWS, look through commander’s weapon sight and align boresight cross of reticle on upper left corner of boresight target as follows. a. Press VID SEL button on CWS DCM until day TV image is displayed. b. Hold MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM to left until menu is displayed on sight. c. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle down until indicator arrow is pointing at BORESIGHT. Press the MULTI FUNCTION button to right to select BORESIGHT. d. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle up and/or down placing the horizontal line of the boresight cross on top edge of boresight target. e. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on the CWS DCM toggle left and/or right placing the vertical line of the boresight cross on the left edge of the boresight target. If reticle displacement displayed in the CWS display is greater than L 5.00 or R 5.00 then move reticle until it is R 0.00 then go to step 6f. If less than L 5.00 or R 5.00 then go to step 6i. f. Loosen setscrew with 9/64 inch socket head key to allow control of horizontal adjustment control screw. g. Adjust horizontal adjustment control screw with a screwdriver, placing vertical line of boresight cross on left edge of boresight target. h. Tighten setscrew with 9/64 inch socket head key. Repeat steps 6d and 6e. i. Look through back of caliber .50 receiver and out the gun barrel. Elevate, and then depress machine gun onto upper left hand corner of boresight target with elevation crank. j. If boresight cross is not on upper left corner of boresight target, notify unit maintenance. k. If machine gun and boresight cross are both on upper left corner of boresight target, machine gun is properly boresighted. Press the E-ZOOM button to save the day TV boresight and check that “BORESIGHT SAVED” is displayed on the CWS DCM. Step 7. Without moving the machine gun or CWS, look through commander’s weapon sight and align boresight cross of reticle on upper left corner of boresight target as follows: a. Press VID SEL button on CWS DCM until thermal image is displayed. b. Hold MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM to left until menu is displayed on sight. c. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle down until indicator arrow is pointing at BORESIGHT. Press the MULTI FUNCTION button to right to select BORESIGHT.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-103

Appendix A

d. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle left and/or right placing the vertical line of the boresight cross on left edge of boresight target. e. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle down and/or up placing the horizontal line of the boresight cross on top edge of boresight target. If reticle displacement displayed in the CWS display is greater than U 5.00 or D 5.00 then move reticle until it is U 0.00 then go to step 7f. If less than U 5.00 or D 5.00 then go to step 7h. f. Loosen the four bolts on the CWS equilibrator bracket with a 9/16 inch socket. Adjust cam bolt with 7/16 inch socket placing horizontal line of the boresight cross on top edge of the boresight target. g. Tighten the four bolts n the CWS equilibrator bracket with a 9/16 inch socket. Repeat steps 7d and 7e. h. Look through back of caliber .50 receiver and out the gun barrel. Elevate, and depress machine gun onto upper left hand corner of boresight target with elevation crank. Notes. If boresight cross is not on upper left corner of boresight target, notify unit maintenance. If machine gun and boresight cross are both on upper left hand corner of boresight target, machine gun is properly boresighted. i.

z z z z z

Look through CWS sight to see if boresight cross is on the upper left corner of boresight target. If it is the machine gun is properly boresighted. Press the E-ZOOM button to save the thermal system boresight and check that “BORESIGHT SAVED” is displayed on CWS DCM. Step 8. Remove rear mounting pin and lift rear of machine gun above roller. Step 9. Put bolt group back into caliber .50 receiver and install backplate. Step 10. Lower rear of machine gun and insert rear mounting pin. Step 11. Ensure roller is over machine gun butterfly trigger. Step 12. Check head space and timing (see TM 9-1005-213-10).

ZEROING THE CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN A-96. Before zeroing the caliber .50 machine gun on the M1A1, make sure the commander’s weapon has been boresighted and is loaded. z Step 1. Move the butterfly trigger safety until an F can be seen.

WARNING If the butterfly trigger on the back plate is pushed, the gun will fire and could injure or kill someone.

z

Step 2. Alert the crew by announcing “CALIBER .50” on the intercom.

WARNING If the button on the CWS elevation handle is pressed down, and the ARMED light is lit, the gun will fire and could injure or kill someone. z

A-104

Step 3. Lay the 500-meter aiming point in the commander’s weapon sight on the center of the target, 500 meters out, using the manual controls.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z z z z z z

z z z

Step 4. Move the SAFE/ARMED switch to the ARMED (right) position, then let go, and make sure the ARMED light is lit. Step 5. Fire a burst of 10 to 15 rounds by pressing the button on the CWS elevation handle. Release the button to cease firing. Step 6. Look at the beaten zone on the target in relation to the aiming point on the sight reticle. Step 7. Move the SAFE/ARMED switch to the SAFE (left) position, then let go, and make sure the ARMED light is not lit. Step 8. If the aiming point in the sight reticle is centered on the beaten zone, zeroing is complete. If the aiming point is not in the center of the beaten zone, go to step 9. Step 9. Without moving the machine gun or CWS sight, align the aiming point in the sight reticle to the center of the beaten zone as follows: „ Loosen the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to allow the horizontal adjustment control screw to turn. „ Adjust the vertical line of the boresight cross on the left edge of the target using the flat-tip screwdriver. „ Tighten the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to lock the horizontal adjustment control screw. „ Loosen the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to allow the vertical adjustment control screw to turn. „ Adjust the horizontal line of the boresight cross on the top edge of the target, using the flattip screwdriver. „ Tighten the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to lock the vertical adjustment control screw. Step 10. Repeat steps 3 through 8 until the aiming point on the sight reticle is centered on the beaten zone. Step 11. Move the butterfly trigger safety until the S can be seen. Step 12. Clear the commander’s weapon.

ZEROING THE COAXIAL MACHINE GUN z z z z

Before zeroing the coaxial machine gun— Position the tank on as level terrain as possible with the gun tube over the front. Select a target with a range as near 800 meters as possible. Lase on the target, using the gunner’s power control handle, if possible, to confirm the range to the target.

M1A1 PROCEDURES z z z z z z z z

Step 1. Sight through the GPS eyepiece. Using the GPCH, lay the reticle aiming point on the target. Step 2. Lase on the target, or manually input 800 meters range into the computer. Step 3. Fire a burst of 20 to 30 rounds. Mentally note the center-of-impact of the bullet strike area. Do not change the lay of the gun or reticle. Keep the GPCH centered. Step 4. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, release the gunner’s handles. Step 5. Open the CCP door. Move the CCP power switch to the ON position. Step 6. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, press the BORESIGHT push button; the push button will illuminate. Step 7. Move the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch up (U), down (D), left (L), or right (R), as needed, to center the reticle aiming point to within 3 mils of the strike area. Step 8. Press the ENTER push button. The BORESIGHT push button light will go out. The boresight information is stored in the computer.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-105

Appendix A

z

Step 9. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, press the ZERO push button; the push button will illuminate.

Note. If the reticle aiming point is not at the center of the bullet strike area, go to step 10. If the aiming point is centered in the strike area, go to step 14. z z z z

Step 10. Move the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch up (U), down (D), left (L), or right (R), as needed to center the reticle aiming point in the strike area. Step 11. Press the ENTER push button. The ZERO push button light will go out. The zero information is stored in the computer. Repeat step 1 only, then go to step 12. Step 12. Without disturbing the lay of the gun (keep the gunner’s handles centered), fire another burst of 20 to 30 rounds. Step 13. If the reticle aiming point is centered in the strike area, the coax machine gun is zeroed; repeat step 9. Record the zero setting in the display, and go to step 14. If the reticle aiming point is not centered in the strike area, repeat steps 9 through 13.

Note. Record the zero setting from the computer display. z z z

Step 14. Press the ENTER push button. The ZERO push button light will go out. The zero information is stored in the computer. Step 15. Close and latch the CCP door. Step 16. Clear the coaxial machine gun.

ZERO COMMANDER’S WEAPON DAY TV SIGHT (CALIBER .50 THERMAL SIGHT/DAY TV SYSTEM) z z z z

Step 1. Install commander’s weapon. Step 2. Boresight commander’s weapon. Step 3. Load commander’s weapon. Step 4. Move the butterfly trigger safety until “F” can be seen.

WARNING Gun will now fire and could injure or kill someone if butterfly trigger on backplate is pushed.

z

Step 5. Alert crew on intercom by announcing “Caliber .50”.

WARNING If button is pressed down with ARMED light lit, gun will fire and could injure or kill someone.

z

A-106

Step 6. Lay 500 meter aiming point in commander’s weapon sight (make sure you are in day TV mode) on center of target 500 meters distant with manual controls.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z z z z z z

z z z

Step 7. Set SAFE/ARMED switch to ARMED position then let go and make sure ARMED light is lit. Step 8. Fire a burst of 10-20 rounds by pressing button on CWS elevation crank handle. Release button to cease firing. Step 9. Look at beaten zone on target in relation to aiming point on sight reticle. Step 10. Set SAFE/ARMED switch to SAFE (left position and then let go) and make sure ARMED light is not lit. Step 11. If aiming point in sight reticle is centered on beaten zone zeroing is complete. If aiming point is not in center of beaten zone then go to step 12. Step 12. Without moving machine gun or CWS sight, align aiming point reticle to center of beaten zone as follows: a. Make sure that CWS DCM is still ion DAY TV mode. b. Hold MULTI-FUNCTION button on CWS DCM to left until menu is displayed on sight. c. Using the MULTI-FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle down until indicator arrow is pointing at BORESIGHT. Press the MULTI FUNCTION button on the right to select BORESIGHT. d. Using MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle up and/or down placing the horizontal line of aiming point in the center of beaten zone. e. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle left and/or right placing the vertical line of the aiming point in center of beaten zone. If reticle displacement displayed in the CWS display is greater than L 5.00 or R 5.00 then move reticle until it is R 0.00 then go to step 12f. If less than L 5.00 or R 5.00 then go to step 12i. f. Loosen setscrew with a 9/64 inch socket head key to allow control of horizontal adjustment control screw. g. Adjust horizontal adjustment control screw with a screwdriver, and place vertical line of aiming point in center of beaten zone. h. Tighten setscrew with 9/64 inch socket head key. Repeat steps 12d and 12e. i. Press the E-ZOOM button to save the day TV zero information and check that “BORESIGHTED SAVED” is displayed in the CWS DCM. Step 13. Repeat step 6 thru step 11 until aiming point on sight reticle is centered on beaten zone. Step 14. Move butterfly trigger safety until “S” can be seen. Step 15. Clear the commander’s weapon.

ZERO COMMANDER’S WEAPON THERMAL SIGHT (CALIBER .50 THERMAL SIGHT/DAY TV SYSTEM) z z z z

Step 1. Install commander’s weapon. Step 2. Boresight commander’s weapon. Step 3. Load commander’s weapon. Step 4. Move the butterfly trigger safety until “F” can be seen.

WARNING Gun will now fire and could injure or kill someone if butterfly trigger on backplate is pushed.

z

Step 5. Alert crew on intercom by announcing “Caliber .50”.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-107

Appendix A

WARNING If button is pressed down with ARMED light lit, gun will fire and could injure or kill someone.

z z z z z z z

z z z

Step 6. Lay 500 meter aiming point in commander’s weapon sight (make sure you are in thermal sight mode) on center of target 500 meters distant with manual controls. Step 7. Set SAFE/ARMED switch to ARMED position then let go and make sure ARMED light is lit. Step 8. Fire a burst of 10-20 rounds by pressing button on CWS elevation crank handle. Release button to cease firing. Step 9. Look at beaten zone on target in relation to aiming point on sight reticle. Step 10. Set SAFE/ARMED switch to SAFE (left position and then let go) and make sure ARMED light is not lit. Step 11. If aiming point in sight reticle is centered on beaten zone zeroing is complete. If aiming point is not in center of beaten zone then go to step 12. Step 12. Without moving machine gun or CWS sight, align aiming point reticle to center of beaten zone as follows: a. Make sure that CWS DCM is still ion DAY TV mode. b. Hold MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM to left until menu is displayed on sight. c. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle down until indicator arrow is pointing at BORESIGHT. Press the MULTI FUNCTION button on the right to select BORESIGHT. d. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle left and/or right placing the vertical line of aiming point in the center of beaten zone. e. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle up and/or down placing the horizontal line of the aiming point in center of beaten zone. If reticle displacement displayed in the CWS display is greater than U 5.00 or D 5.00 then move reticle until it is U 0.00 then go to step 12f. If less than U 5.00 or D 5.00 then go to step 12h. f. Loosen the four bolts on the CWS equilibrator bracket with 9/16 inch socket. Adjust cam bolt with a 7/16 inch socket placing horizontal line of aiming point in center of beaten zone. g. Tighten the four bolts on the CWS equilibrator bracket with a 9/16 inch socket. Repeat steps 12d and 12e. h. Press the E-ZOOM button to save the thermal sight zero information and check that “BORESIGHT SAVED” is displayed in CWS DCM. Step 13. Repeat step 6 thru step 11 until aiming point on sight reticle is centered on beaten zone. Step 14. Move butterfly trigger safety until “S” can be seen. Step 15. Clear the commander’s weapon.

M1A2 SEP PROCEDURES z z z z z z

A-108

Step 1. Sight through the GPS eyepiece. Using the gunner’s handles, lay the reticle aiming point on the target. Step 2. Lase on the target, or manually input 800 meters range into the computer. Step 3. Fire a burst of 20 to 30 rounds. Do not change the lay of the gun or reticle. Keep the gunner’s handle centered. Step 4. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, release the gunner’s handles. Step 5. With the GCDP on the MAIN MENU, press the ADJUST push button. Step 6. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the ADJUST menu.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z z z

Step 7. Move the four-way switch on the GCDP (up, down, left, or right) as needed to center the reticle aiming point to within 3 mils of the strike area. Step 8. Press the ENT key on the keypad. The boresight information is now stored in the computer. Step 9. Press the ZERO push button on the ADJUST menu.

Note. If the reticle aiming point is not at the center of the bullet strike area, go on to step 10. If the aiming point is centered in the strike area, go to step 14. z z z z

Step 10. Move the four-way switch on the GCDP (up, down, left, or right), as needed to center the reticle aiming point in the strike area. Step 11. Press the ENT key on the keypad. The zero information is now stored; repeat step 1 only. Step 12. Without disturbing the lay of the gun (keep the gunner’s handles centered), fire another burst of 20 to 30 rounds. Step 13. If the reticle aiming point is centered in the strike area, the coaxial machine gun is zeroed; repeat step 9. Record the ZERO setting on the ZERO menu, and go to step 14. If the reticle aiming point is not centered in the strike area, repeat steps 9 through 13.

Note. Record the ZERO setting from the ZERO menu. z z

Step 14. Press the ENT key on the keypad. Press the RETURN push button on the ZERO menu two times to return to the MAIN MENU. Step 15. Clear the coaxial machine gun.

SECTION VI – POST-FIRE CHECKS A-97. After firing, the crew clears all weapon systems and removes all ammunition residue from the exterior of the vehicle. Leaders verify that crews clear all weapon systems IAW DA PAM 385-63. On training ranges, range safety officers verify that crews have cleared all weapon systems. Post-fire checks prevent many accidents.

DANGER AFTER FIRING, ENSURE ALL WEAPONS ARE CLEAR.

SECTION VII – ABRAMS WEAPONS SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS A-98. Malfunctions cost a lot of firing time on tank ranges. Crew error causes most malfunctions. Crews must know the possible reasons for a typical malfunction to occur, this way they can take the necessary steps to correct the malfunction(s) and continue with training. As a precaution, the crew performs standard misfire procedures before correcting any error.

DANGER WHEN A MALFUNCTION OCCURS, ALWAYS PERFORM MISFIRE PROCEDURES BEFORE TAKING ANY OTHER CORRECTIVE ACTION.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-109

Appendix A

DANGER WAIT 15 MINUTES BEFORE UNLOADING A MAIN GUN ROUND THAT HAS MISFIRED TO PREVENT A HANGFIRE. A HANGFIRE OF THE ROUND COULD KILL OR SERIOUSLY INJURE CREW MEMBER.

MAIN GUN MALFUNCTION A-99. Tank main gun malfunctions typically fall into three main categories–main gun misfires; aft caps malfunctions; and breech malfunctions. z If the main gun fails to fire— „ Conduct misfire procedures. „ If the round doesn’t fire wait 15 minutes and clear the main gun. „ Conduct a firing circuit check. „ If firing circuit test passes, mark the misfired round as defective and turn it in to the ammunition NCO when complete with your run. z If aft caps from the rounds are hanging up in the aft cap deflector— „ Check the aft cap deflector for missing/loose/broken parts. „ Check that the loader is not disarming the main gun until the gun has returned fully into battery after firing. „ Manually check the operation of the aft cap deflector. z If the breach is not opening or closing properly— „ Manually operate the breech: „ Does it open smoothly? „ Does it lock in the open position? „ Is the breech/breechblock fouled with dust/propellant residue? „ Does the breech close automatically? „ Adjust the breech operating cam IAW the TM-10 (breeches that don’t lock open after firing typically have the cam speed set too fast). „ Check the cam operation by arming the main gun and manually opening the breech. If the cam tension is properly set the cam will now be in the path of the lug on the breech operating lever (which automatically opens the gun using the same operating shaft as is used on the other side of the breech for manual opening).

M240 7.62-MM COAXIAL MACHINE GUN MALFUNCTION A-100. If none of the following steps corrects the malfunction, notify the master gunner or maintenance personnel. z If the bolt did not go forward, check the following: z Is the gun select switch in the COAX position? z Is the coaxial machine gun in the F position? z Does the coax solenoid move when the triggers are pulled? z Is the coax solenoid properly adjusted? z If the bolt did go forward, check the following: z Is the ammunition belt seated in the feed tray? z Is there a round or casing stuck in the chamber? z Is the machine gun out of ammunition? z Is the coax spent case can full?

A-110

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z z

Is the coax chute flush with the M240 feed tray cover? Is the ammunition weight in the coax storage preventing the weapon from feeding?

M2 HB CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN MALFUNCTION A-101. If none of the following steps corrects the malfunction, notify the master gunner or maintenance personnel. z Is the CWS armed (M1A1)? z Is the weapon armed? z Does the solenoid move and is it properly adjusted on the butterfly (M1A1)? z Does the butterfly trigger bar engage the trigger (M1A2 SEP)? z Check for ruptured/deformed cartridges on turret roof. z Clear the weapon. z Check the headspace and timing. z Check that the ammunition is aligned in links and not binding in the feed tray.

M250/M257 SMOKE GRENADES MALFUNCTION A-102. When smoke grenades fail to launch, perform immediate action, then— z Use the vehicle intercom system to tell the driver to move the vehicle to a safe area. Make sure the driver moves it at least 125 meters from the nearest vehicle, building, person, or equipment. z Fire the smoke grenades. z Look for the smoke through the periscopes. z Move the turret power switch to OFF. z Move the master power switch to OFF. z Check the smoke grenade launcher for misfired smoke grenades. z Remove the smoke grenades from the side where the misfire occurred. z Move the smoke grenades to a well-marked spot at least 200 meters from the nearest vehicle, person, or equipment. z Notify the chain of command of the exact location, type, and number of smoke grenades that malfunctioned. z Notify unit maintenance that the M250/M257 smoke grenade launchers on the vehicle malfunctioned.

COMMUNICATIONS MALFUNCTION A-103. If communications are lost, check the following: z Is the master control station power light on? z Are the radio cable connections loose? z Has BIT failed on the master control station? z Is the CVC cord disconnected? z Does the VIC1 FBCB2 display a green status?

SECTION VIII – ERROR SOURCES A-104. The greater the range, the lower the probability of hit. This means that, as the range to the target increases, expectations of first-round hits decrease. Many other factors affect firing accuracy. The system and environmental and human factors involved in any target engagement comprise what is called the tank gun error budget. Error budget is defined as the influence of the hardware, environmental conditions and human factors that affect accuracy and consistency. The three major categories of the error budget are: fixed biases, variable biases, and random errors. Each error source has varying effects on firing accuracy. The effect of these errors may be significant when a number of error sources act on the fire control system

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-111

Appendix A

at the same time. Also, the effect of these error sources is magnified when engaging targets at long ranges. The error sources listed below are not all inclusive; several additional sources of error exist.

FIXED BIASES A-105. Fixed biases are error sources induced by ammunition, weapon, and fire control system design and manufacturer that at any given range will cause the ammunition to miss the desired aiming point in a constant direction. Because they are fixed or built-in, these error sources are predictable and can be compensated.

SYSTEM PARALLAX A-106. System parallax is the vertical and horizontal distance between the center line of the main gun and the optical axis of the sights. When the gun and sights are boresighted, all lines of sight converge at the boresight range. At ranges less than or greater than the boresight range, the lines of sight differ. Normally, the ballistic computer compensates for system parallax in the GPS and CITV; a correction is determined and incorporated into the solution sent to the GPS (daylight or thermal channel) and the CITV. With the GAS, it is only eliminated at the range boresighted.

BALLISTIC DRIFT A-107. Drift, the lateral departure of spin-stabilized ammunition from the gun-target line, is the product of air resistance and projectile spin. Projectiles will drift in the same direction as the spin caused by the rifling of the main gun. The M68 gun rifling has a uniform right-hand twist; therefore, all spin-stabilized ammunition fired from it will drift to the right. The computer offsets drift in the ballistic solution. When firing from the GAS, the ballistic reticles compensate for drift. The current combat sabot, HEAT-T, and MPAT rounds (for the M1A1, M1A2, and M1A2 SEP tanks) are fin-stabilized and not affected by drift. The computer takes this into account when the correct ammunition sub-designation is entered into the computer. Note. The ballistic drift mentioned above is not to be confused with emergency or normal mode drift.

MEAN JUMP A-108. Mean jump is the average difference between the actual impact of a group of rounds fired over many occasions and the intended strike of those rounds, given that all inputs to the FCS are correct or within tolerance. As a fixed bias, mean jump error is corrected by entering a CCF or SCF as either a fleet zero or a discreet computer correction factor.

VARIABLE BIASES A-109. Variable biases are error sources that remain fairly constant when firing one type of ammunition at a particular target and a given range, but can change considerably from one engagement to the next. BORESIGHT/BORESIGHT RETENTION

A-110. Initial boresight errors can occur due to tolerances in the muzzle boresight device, round-off errors in splitting means, or if the MBD operator and gunner are not sighting on exactly the same target aiming point. Once an initial boresight is established, errors can occur when the spatial relationship between the end of the tube and the GPS changes. Two primary causes are gun tube droop or turret deformation (due to the sun or wind, the turret heats up unevenly and changes the initial alignment). Boresight retention can also be affected by inaccuracies in performing an MRS update. A-111. Although initial boresight/boresight retention errors are some of the largest error sources, they are more easily controlled or corrected by the crew.

A-112

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

CANT (TRUNNION TILT) A-112. Cant occurs when the tank is on uneven ground and one gun trunnion is higher than the other. When superelevation is applied to the gun, it is applied vertically to an imaginary perpendicular line drawn between the gun trunnions. When cant is present, superelevation is applied at an angle to the vertical plane, inducing range and deflection errors. When firing from a stationary tank (M1A1), cant data is supplied to the computer from the cant unit, and the ballistic solution includes a reticle adjustment to compensate for cant. On the M1A2/M1A2 SEP, cant is also supplied from the ballistic computer, the hull-turret position sensor (HTPS), and the POS/NAV unit during offensive posture, and this is called “dynamic cant.”

CROSSWIND A-113. Air turbulence (wind) moving laterally to the gun-target line will cause the projectile to deviate from the gun-target line. The effect of crosswind on any round other than APFSDS-T and APCSDS-T is significant, regardless of engagement range. The crosswind sensor on the tank measures crosswind at the rear of the turret and feeds this data to the computer. The computer calculates a correction based on the assumption that this crosswind is constant all the way to the target. This correction is incorporated into the ballistic solution sent to the reticle azimuth drive, and is updated continuously.

FIRE CONTROL A-114. Errors can be induced by certain stresses placed on the fire control system. The fire control system cannot compensate for most of these stresses, such as design tolerances, metal fatigue, and vehicle vibrations. however, it can compensate for the following factors: A-115. Muzzle displacement, or thermal bending is caused by uneven heat distribution along the gun tube. Gun tube droop is caused by gravity acting on the gun, and can disturb the gun-sight relationship established through boresighting. The thermal shroud reduces muzzle displacement caused by uneven heat distribution, but does nothing about the gravitational effect. Frequent boresighting/MRS updates will reduce the effect of muzzle displacement by reestablishing the gun-sight relationship.

AIR DENSITY A-116. Air density is the weight of a certain volume of air which consists of the amount of water vapor in the air, air temperature, and barometric pressure. Air density affects the ballistic characteristics of the projectile. Air density varies with temperature and altitude. Since the computer accepts data on barometric pressure and temperature, it compensates for air density.

BALLISTIC SOLUTION A-117. An incorrect ballistic solution may be computed for various reasons: incorrect ammunition selected, incorrect range determined, an unknown failure of an automatic input, or an unknown incorrect computer correction factor. To ensure the computer receives the correct information, the gunner should double check the ammunition selected on the AMMUNITION SELECT switch or push button after the loader announces “UP.” The TC must evaluate the range before firing. If an F appears in the symbology, and a manual self-test (or FCS test on the M1A2/M1A2 SEP) reveals no primary direct-fire control failure, a manual self-test (or FCS test on the M1A2/M1A2 SEP) should be performed after every engagement until turret mechanics can resolve the problem. The crew can detect incorrect ballistic solutions by conducting special gunnery checks (see operator’s manual, Appendix F). Conducting the special gunnery checks requires an M1A1 gunner’s quadrant. (See pages A-99 through A-101 for the tolerance of the M1A1 gunner’s quadrant). They can also detect incorrect ballistic solutions by performing the AACs using a solution board.

MUZZLE VELOCITY VARIATION A-118. Changes in the muzzle velocity of the projectile are due to the ammunition or weapon. The following factors will cause a vertical deviation in the strike of a round: z Tube wear. z Temperature of the propellant.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-113

Appendix A

Change of loading density. Tube length. z Loss of muzzle velocity when employing the canister round in cold weather. A-119. Gun tube wear results in lowered muzzle velocity and increased dispersion. When firing from the GAS, there is no way to compensate for gun tube wear. Gun tube wear is not determined, nor is data input for the M1A1, M1A2, or the M1A2 SEP. z z

RANGE ESTIMATION A-120. Range estimation errors are errors associated with incorrect determination of a range to a specific target. Errors associated with range determination are primarily a training problem (see page A-118, Section IX, M1 Series Specific Range Determination).

OPTICAL PATH BENDING A-121. The apparent illusion of target displacement is commonly called refraction. Under certain light and environmental conditions, the path of light (line of sight) may not travel in a straight line. Refraction may cause problems for tank crews attempting engagements at ranges beyond 1,500 meters. Refraction may occur under the following conditions: z Day–clear sky, flat terrain, winds less than 10 miles per hour (see Figure A-34). z Night–clear sky, flat terrain, winds less than 4 miles per hour (see Figure A-35). Note. Any time heat shimmer is present, refraction may also be present. A-122. Refraction makes the target appear lower during the day; the sight picture, though it appears center of visible mass to the gunner, is actually below the target. The result of this may be a short round. At night, the effects are opposite and may result in an over round. Note. The laser beam will refract with other light rays and still hit the desired target. A-123. The most effective measure available to the crew to minimize refraction is an elevated firing position. A position at least ten meters above intervening terrain will generally negate any effects. When a crew operating under conditions favorable to refraction misses short during daylight and over during night with their first round (an elevated position is not available), they should apply the following adjustment: z Day. Adjust the sight picture up one-half target form (top of target) (see Figure A-34). z Night. Adjust the sight picture down one-half target form (bottom of target) (see Figure A-35). Note. Under normal conditions, crews do not need to make a correction for refraction at ranges less than 1,500 meters. A-124. Boresight does not correct refraction, but crews must make sure that all before-operation checks and boresighting procedures are done correctly. When a crew is missing targets under these conditions, the cause may be refraction and not crew error or loss of boresight due to improper procedures.

A-114

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-34. Day refraction (exaggerated view)

Figure A-35. Night refraction (exaggerated view)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-115

Appendix A

VARIABLE JUMP A-125. Variable jump is the average difference between actual impacts for a particular occasion and the intended strike of those rounds, given all inputs to the fire control system are correct or within tolerance. Variable jump may be corrected using standard sight adjustments after subsequent round misses.

RANDOM ERRORS A-126. Random error sources are those that vary for each round fired. They cannot be predicted from one round to the next, nor can the crew compensate for them. The TC and gunner must be aware of random errors and not be unduly influenced by them when they occur.

ROUND-TO-ROUND DISPERSION A-127. With a perfect gun and ammunition firing under ideal conditions, all rounds would hit the same spot. In reality, there is a spread of shots around a central point. The area into which these shots fall is called the dispersion zone. There is no way the crew can compensate for dispersion, but they should be aware of its effects. As the range to the target increases, so does the size of the dispersion zone. Factors that may cause dispersion are— z Crosswinds. z Thermal bending. z Lot numbers. A-128. Although there are no compensations for round-to-round dispersion, a re-lay and reengage technique may achieve a target hit if the round misses by only a slight amount.

GUNNER LAY ERROR A-129. Gunner lay error is caused when the gunner fails to make a correct lay to the target aiming point while either boresighting or engaging targets. It is a significant error source and primarily a training problem. To reduce this error, each gunner must be trained to make his final lay to the correct aiming point, ending his lay in elevation. This will minimize the effects of gunner lay error. Gunner lay errors are influenced by the following: z Inability to identify the center of the target. z Inability to properly superimpose the reticle onto the center of the target. z Firing too quickly due to the criticality of time. z Optical path bending. z Parallax.

SECTION IX – M1 SERIES SPECIFIC RANGE DETERMINATION

RANGE DETERMINATION A-130. Range determination significantly affects target engagement. Errors in range determination cause more first round misses than errors in deflection. Range errors that cause the first round to go over the target are particularly serious because observing and adjusting from that round is difficult. Range determination can be broken down into three broad categories–immediate range determination, immediate range estimation, and deliberate range determination.

IMMEDIATE RANGE DETERMINATION A-131. Immediate methods of range determination afford the combat crew the most reliable determination of the range to a given target. The preferred method of immediate range determination is the LRF or eyesafe laser range finder (ELRF) on those vehicles so equipped. The other methods of immediate range determination all rely on crew members employing the properties of the sighting systems of their vehicles, and are preferred to other methods of range determination/estimation. Below are the immediate range determination methods for the Abrams tank.

A-116

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Abrams Tank Immediate Range Determination M1A1/M1A2 SEP Laser Range Finder A-132. The preferred method of range determination on the Abrams tank is the LRF/ELRF. The LRF can range to targets located 200 to 7,990 meters from the tank. If the range to the target is between 200 meters and 4,000 meters (5,000 meters on the M1A2 SEP), the range is automatically induced into the fire control system for a ballistic solution and the range will appear in the GPS symbology. Various conditions can cause effective use of the LRF to be lost— z Internal LRF failure. z Vehicle failure. z Environmental conditions (fog, falling snow, heavy rain). z Man-made or battlefield obscurants (smoke). z Multiple returns from a target smaller than the LRF beam width with obstructions to the front and/or rear of the target. A-133. Abrams gunners and TCs must be familiar with all of the range determination tools that their system offers them to cope with loss of effective use of the LRF. M1A2 SEP Commander’s Independent Thermal Viewer Stadia Reticle A-134. The stadia reticle is displayed when the NFOV is selected using the FOV button on the CCHA, the CITV is in SEARCH mode, and the range/stadia reticle switch is pressed. The stadia reticle can be used to determine the approximate range to tank-height targets when the LRF is inoperable, or the TC wishes to avoid traversing the turret to align the LRF. Range is determined by matching the apparent height of the target with the stadia reticle, which can be made smaller or larger by moving the range/stadia reticle switch. z The range/stadia reticle switch will only operate the stadia reticle when the CITV is in a nonGUN LOS state or in SEARCH mode. z The stadia reticle will only appear when in NFOV. z There are 11 different reticle sizes that provide ranges from 500 meters to 3,630 meters. z Moving the range/stadia reticle switch backward will increase the size of the stadia reticle. Moving the range/stadia reticle switch forward will decrease the size of the stadia reticle. z The stadia reticle will disappear from view after 10 seconds if the range/stadia reticle switch is not used. The last range input will remain displayed. z The stadia reticle is most accurate when used with tank-height targets. Ranges to targets that are of different heights will be inaccurate. z When the stadia reticle is used, the range will be input into the fire control system once the DESIGNATE button is pushed. A-135. To determine the range to a full-height target, move the range/stadia reticle switch forward or backward until the bottom index line rests on the bottom of the target and the top index line rests on the top of the target. The approximate range is displayed on the CITV display. A-136. To determine the range to a hull-down target, move the range/stadia reticle switch forward or backward until the bottom center index line rests on the bottom of the target and the top center index line rests on the top of the target. The approximate range is displayed on the CITV display (see Figure A-36).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-117

Appendix A

Figure A-36. CITV stadia reticle Gunner’s Auxiliary Sight Stadia Reticle A-137. On the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP, the stadia reticle pattern is included on both GAS reticles. If the LRF is inoperative, the stadia reticle may be used to determine the range to a target. The pattern has a base line and a series of range lines for full-height targets, and a series of dots for ranging at a target in hull defilade (see Figure A-37). The GAS stadia reticle is designed to permit gunners to determine range to the target if other, more precise, ranging methods are not available. The full-size portion of the reticle is designed for a 2.30-meter-high target, while the turret portion is for a 0.90-meter-high target (see Figure A38a and Figure A-38b). With practice, gunners using the stadia reticle can consistently determine the range to within 100 meters.

Figure A-37. GAS stadia reticle

A-118

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-38a. GAS stadia reticle, displaying target

Figure A-38b. GAS stadia reticle, displaying target (continued) Reticle Relationship Method A-138. This method is a combination of the range estimation and engagement technique. It provides the TC a rapid, accurate alternate method of determining range to a target and successfully engaging the target. The reticle relationship method is based on an average enemy tank with the following dimensions. z Width 3.8 meters. z Height 2.2 meters. z Length 6.9 meters. A-139. When the reticle of either the GPS or GAS is superimposed over the enemy tank, the properly trained gunner or TC can rapidly determine if the target is within a pre-selected battlesight range, or if further range determination is required. The dimensions of the reticles are shown in Figures A-39 through Figure A-44. The GPS and GAS reticles can also be used to deliberately determine range using the milrelationship method discussed later in this chapter. A-140. Gunners should also be trained to use the SABOT/STAFF and MPAT/HEAT reticles on the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP GAS to determine range. Since there is no vertical mil value established for these reticles, using a vertical measurement is not recommended.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-119

Appendix A

A-141. GPS (Day Channel). The GPS has a dual power capability–a wide-angle mode (3X magnification with a 16.5-degree field of view) for acquisition and a high magnification mode (10X magnification with a 6.5-degree field of view) for target identification and engagements. This reticle may also be used to assist in range determination. Figure A-39 shows the mil values of the GPS reticle for range (vertical line) and lead (horizontal line).

Figure A-39. Gunner’s primary sight (daylight reticle) A-142. GPS (Thermal Channel). The thermal electronics unit provides reticle and display symbols similar to those of daylight optics. The gunner can select the polarity of the TIS image to help interpret thermal images. Hot areas in the field of view can be displayed as either white hot or black hot. Crew members familiar with daylight ranging techniques for the Abrams may be confused by incorrect range readouts even though the target is clearly visible using the TIS. Incorrect readouts may occur because the spectrum of particle sizes that can obscure or block the TIS differs from that which affects LRF or daylight optics. The TIS may be able to see through screening smoke, dust, or camouflage; however, these same factors can degrade LRF accuracy. Therefore, the tank crew should train on visual range estimation using the TIS image alone and on manually indexing the range in the computer. A-143. Forward-Looking Infrared (Thermal Channel). The 2d Gen FLIR (thermal channel) on the M1A2 SEP provides the crew the ability to detect, recognize, and identify targets at greater ranges. The 2d Gen FLIR has 3X, 6X, 13X, 25X, and 50X magnification. The 25X and 50X are digital enhancements of the 13X picture. The 2d Gen FLIR allows the crew to use both the GPS daylight and thermal channels simultaneously, although they may choose to have the thermal scene projected into the GPS sight to engage targets. This is totally crew choice, and crews that train to engage targets using the binocular sight should be able to do so. Crews should be able to detect both hot and cold targets by using the thermal binocular sight and the GPS daylight channel simultaneously during daylight operations. A-144. GPS Extension (GPSE). The GPSE provides the TC the same sight picture and symbology display the gunner receives. However, on an M1A2 SEP, if the gunner is using the GPS daylight channel and the binocular thermal sight simultaneously, the TC will only be able to see the GPS daylight in his extension. A-145. GAS. The GAS is an articulated telescope, coaxially mounted to the main gun. The M1A1 and M1A2 SEP include illuminated ballistic reticles for KE/STAFF and MPAT/HEAT ammunition. The GAS offers 8X magnification with an 8-degree field of view. It is filtered to protect the gunner’s vision from laser reflections (see Figure A-40 through Figure A-43).

A-120

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-40. Abrams gunner’s auxiliary sight reticles (MPAT/HEAT)

Figure A-41. Abrams gunner’s auxiliary sight reticles (MPAT/HEAT) lead pattern

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-121

Appendix A

Figure A-42. Abrams gunner’s auxiliary sight reticles (KE/STAFF) example

Figure A-43. Abrams gunner’s auxiliary sight reticles (KE/STAFF)

A-122

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

A-146. CWS. The CWS includes a 3X, fixed-focus periscope. This periscope contains a ballistic reticle graduated for caliber .50 ammunition out to a range of 1,800 meters. The sight can be oriented independently of the turret by power or manual rotation of the CWS and by elevating or depressing the TC’s machine gun. If the M240 machine gun is mounted in the CWS, there is an aiming data chart for the TC on the side of the periscope (see Figure A-44).

Figure A-44. Commander’s weapon station sight reticle Tank Commander’s Machine Gun Method A-147. The TC’s machine gun with sight reticle gradation can be used to determine range out to 1,800 meters (see Figure A-45). The TC’s machine gun allows him to suppress the target and determine range at the same time. To aid the gunner in target identification and to reduce engagement time, the CWS should be aligned with the main gun. The disadvantage of this method is that the tank’s position will be disclosed. (This method cannot be used on the M1A2 or M1A2 SEP.) A-148. *To use this method, the TC initiates the fire command (for example, “GUNNER ⎯ HEAT ⎯ ANTITANK,” “CALIBER FIFTY ⎯ RANGING”). The TC places his sight reticle aiming point on the target, and fires. He then observes the tracers and adjusts their impact until they strike the target. Once the tracers impact on, or near, the target, the TC reads the corresponding aiming point of the reticle and announces the range to the gunner, (for example, “ONE EIGHT HUNDRED” or “INDEX ONE EIGHT HUNDRED”) followed by the execution element (“FIRE”). *Note. If the tank is in a turret-down defensive position, it should move to a hull-down position; the commands “DRIVER ⎯ MOVE OUT” and “DRIVER ⎯ STOP” must be issued before the execution command. A-149. The TC’s initial aiming point should correspond with the battlesight range for the ammunition announced in the fire command. By applying the battlesight range to the TC’s sight, if the initial burst is observed over the target, the TC can engage immediately by announcing the battlesight range.

DELIBERATE RANGE DETERMINATION MIL RELATIONSHIP METHOD A-150. The mil relation may be used in deliberate range determination. When using the mil relation method the crew must use binoculars or a sight system with a calibrated mil-scale to measure the target. A-151. The basis of the mil relation method is that one mil or equals a width (or height) of 1 meter at a range of 1,000 meters or in a unit of angular measurement, equal to 1/6,400 of a circle or about 17.79 (17.8) degrees. The relationship of the angle, the length of the sides of the angle (range), and the width

31 May 2010

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

A-123

Appendix A

(height) between the sides remains constant. Figure A-45 shows the constant relationship as the angle increases from 1 to 2 mils and the range increases from 1,000 to 2,000 meters. A-152. Standard Army measurements are completed and expressed in the metric system. Other units of measurement (yards, feet, or inches) may be substituted to express the target size or range; however, all information must be expressed in the same unit of measure.

Figure A-45. Constant mil-angle relationship A-153. To use this method, the crew member must know the width, height, and length of the target. He determines the known dimension with the binoculars’ mil scale or a nonballistic sight reticle, substitutes the mil relation, and computes the range (see Table A-21). When measuring the frontal width, he measures only the vehicle’s front slope (from left front corner to right front corner). When measuring flank width, he measures the entire vehicle (see Figure A-46). Accuracy of this method depends on knowing the target dimensions and the commander’s ability to make precise measurements with binoculars or the sight reticle. A-154. Using Table A-21 and by achieving proper vehicle identification, a crew member can properly determine the standard mil size of the vehicle. This can be used into the calculation of the mil relationship method of range determination. Figure A-46 through Figure A-51 shows the frontal and flank view of a BMP-2 and where the information in the table applies. Table A-21. Mil relation for various targets BMP-2 Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 6.75 meters

1400

1500

1700

1900

2300

2700

3400

4500

6800

Front 3.0 meters

600

700

800

900

1000

1200

1500

2000

3000

Height 2.3 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 5.5 meters

1100

1200

1400

1600

1800

2200

2800

3700

5500

Front 2.35 meters

500

500

600

700

800

1000

1200

1600

2400

Height 2.3 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

BRDM-2

HAVOK

A-124

Target Width (mils)

22.5

20

17.5

15

12.5

10

7.5

5

2.5

Flank 17.01 meters

800

900

1000

1100

1400

1700

2300

3400

6804

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Front 4.81 meters

1000

1100

1200

1400

1600

1900

2400

3200

4800

Height 3.82 meters

800

800

1000

1100

1300

1500

1900

2500

3800

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

HIND-D HELICOPTER Target Width (mils)

22.5

20

17.5

15

12.5

10

7.5

5

2.5

Flank 17.25 meters

800

900

1000

1200

1400

1700

2300

3500

6900

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Height 3.9 meters

800

900

1000

1100

1300

1600

2000

2600

3900

Front 6.9 meters

1400

1500

1700

2000

2300

2800

3500

4600

6900

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 7.1 meters

1300

1500

1700

1900

2200

2700

3400

4500

6700

Front 3.4 meters

700

800

900

1000

1100

1400

1700

2300

3400

Height 2.3 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 7.0 meters

1400

1600

1800

2000

2300

2800

3500

4700

7000

Front 3.6 meters

700

800

900

1000

1100

1400

1700

2300

3400

Height 2.2 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 6.9 meters

1400

1500

1700

2000

2300

2800

3500

4600

6900

Front 3.8 meters

800

900

1000

1100

1300

1500

1900

2500

3800

Height 2.2 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

T-72 TANK

T-80 TANK

T-90 TANK

Note. This table is a quick reference for determining the range of widely sold vehicles at various ranges. The ranges have been rounded-off to the nearest hundredth.

Figure A-46. Frontal BMP-2 dimensions

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-125

Appendix A

Figure A-47. Flank BMP-2 dimensions

Figure A-48. Frontal Hind-D dimensions

A-126

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-49. Flank Hind-D dimensions

Figure A-50. Frontal T-72 dimensions

Figure A-51. Flank T-72 dimensions

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-127

Appendix A

A-155. Since the relationship of the target width in mils (  and meters (W) is constant at varying distances, accurate range determination is possible. The mil relation holds true whether the W factor is width, height, or length. Therefore, the range can be determined provided the target dimensions are known. Target height may be the most consistent measurement, because length and width are changing as targets move on the battlefield. A-156. There are two WORM formulas beneficial to crew members that can be used to determine information about an object or target. The crew member determining range will be required to decide which formula will be used based on known information gathered (see Figure A-52). A-157. The first formula should be used to determine range. This formula will need both the width and mil value of the vehicle.

Figure A-52. Measuring width with binoculars Example: Step 1. The BMP is 6.75 meters long (W). Using binoculars, the commander determines that the BMP measures 10 mils in length (see Figure A-53). Step 2. The individual determining range substitutes known information into the formula.

or Step 3. Since R is expressed in thousands of meters, multiply by 1,000; and round off to the nearest tenth. For example: 0.675=0.7 so 0.7 x 1,000 = 700 meters, the range to the BMP.

A-128

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

A-158. The second formula is used to determine the width (width, length, height) of an object. This is important to determine the width of a bridge for example, that has not been previously identified. The formula carries the same basic concept as the first formula for determining range. The operator will need to know the range to the target and the mil size.

Example: Step 1. The gunner has determined that the range to a bridge is 1,200 meters. The vehicle commander, looking through his binoculars, determined the mil value to be 2.5 mils. Step 2. The individual determining range substitutes known information into the formula.

or

Maps/Digital Maps Method A-159. The vehicle crew must have a map to navigate. They must constantly know where they are and where they are going. (The [precision lightweight GPS receiver] PLGR or any other GPS navigational system will not eliminate the need for maps.) The vehicle crew can also use the map to determine range. Besides computing distances on a traditional map, special features on the FBCB2 allow the crew to plot points on the digital map and find the distance between them. A map also allows them to determine the best battlecarry range setting for the terrain and enemy situation and to adjust the battlecarry range when the situation changes. z Both in offense and defense, the vehicle crew must continually assess likely enemy locations, engagement areas, and engagement ranges. This information gives the vehicle crew the capability to determine range rapidly when contact is made. z TRPs are used as both direct and indirect fire control measures. These are entered in the sector sketch for the vehicle commander to control his fires and ensure that his reports of enemy sightings are accurate. Since the range to each TRP is known, this will assist in range determination.

Known Range (Range/Sketch Cards) Method A-160. The primary use of the range or sketch card is to assist the crew in engaging targets during limited visibility or when effective use of the LRF has been lost. The vehicle commander may also use the range or sketch card to assist in determining range, since range data is recorded on the card. The range to a previous target engagement is also classified as a known range.

Adjacent Vehicle Method A-161. Range information can be obtained from an adjacent vehicle that has an operable LRF. If the vehicle providing the range data is relatively close (lateral distance) to the receiving vehicle, then it will be at the same range from the target.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-129

Appendix A

Flash-To-Bang Method A-162. Sound travels through the air at a fairly constant speed, about 330 meters (approximately 1,100 feet) per second. This makes it easy to estimate range, if you can see and hear the action. For example, when you see the flash or smoke of a weapon, or the dust it raises, immediately start counting at a rate of one count per second. When you hear the report of the weapon, stop and multiply the number you were counting when you heard the report by the constant 330. This will be the range to the weapon in meters. If you stop on the number 3, the range is about 990 meters. A-163. Practice timing the speed of your count. The best way to do this is to practice with pyrotechnics fired at known distances. If this is not possible, have someone time you while you count; start over when the count reaches a number higher than 10. Counting numbers such as 12 and 13 will throw your timing off. With practice, you can estimate range more accurately with this method than by eye alone.

SECTION X – TANK AMMUNITION STOWAGE PLAN A-164. The ammunition stowage plan for all tanks within the HBCT is part of the unit SOP. The stowage plan should include the location of all ammunition authorized for the basic load, by type and number of rounds. During darkness, when lights inside the turret will reduce the crew’s night vision or give away the tank’s position, a standardized stowage plan will help the loader rapidly locate the ammunition announced in the initial fire command. The stowage plan also helps the crew keep track of the number of rounds (by type) that have been fired (see Figure A-53 and A-54). A-165. Crew members must ensure that only the KE or canister rounds are stowed in the upper and outer tubes in the ammunition racks. Stowage of chemical energy rounds in these tubes can result in injury or death if the rounds explode in the rack.

A-130

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-53. Ammunition stowage plan, 16 and 18 round racks

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-131

Appendix A

Figure A-54. Ammunition stowage plan, 17 round rack

A-132

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

SECTION XI – HISTORICAL RECORDS

GENERAL INFORMATION A-166. Historical records are kept on specific items of equipment. They show the required information and events in the life of the equipment. These records must be controlled and kept safe from loss or damage. These records give commanders information on equipment transfers, gains, losses, usage, modifications, and firing data. Historical records may be sent on dispatch, however these forms are normally sent on dispatch only when they will be needed during the dispatch. Commanders and master gunners will consolidate historical records in one or more binders. Historical records will always be filled out in ink (blue or black) or typed, unless specific instructions for the form tell you to use pencil.

ELECTRONIC DA FORM 2408-4 A-167. The electronic 2408-4 is the preferred method for recording all firing and nonfiring data for tank, artillery, and mortar tubes and is maintained by the company or troop master gunner. The electronic gun card can be accessed from the Army Electronic Product Support home page at https://aeps.ria.army.mil/aepspublic.cfm. The electronic 2408-4, used with TB 750-231 and TM 9-1000202-14, provides commanders with an estimated remaining life of the gun tube, tube serial number, cannon serial number (breech ring), and the weapon on which they are mounted. The electronic 2408-4 allows the same data to be recorded online on a real time data base system. Use of the electronic 2408-4 negates the requirement to mail the completed 2408-4 to TACOM, Rock Island Arsenal, as outlined in DA PAM 7508. This form is used to figure the total equivalent full charge (EFC) for the rounds fired. The electronic 2408-4 calculates EFC and remaining life of the tube. TCs can use a second DA Form 2408-4 solely to note zeroing and boresight information on the M1A1/A2. The DA Form 2408-4 and electronic form is used to enter non-firing data such as borescope and pull over gauge readings. A-168. A hard copy of DA Form 2408-4 is maintained with the gun, cannon, or mortar tube for operational purposes (when in use); to document rounds fired, to keep up with services pulled on a tube or capture other periodic maintenance inspections or actions taken. The commander maintains hard copies of DA Form 2408-4 in a logbook binder for the purpose of keeping a working copy for dispatch, for firing or maintenance. The permanent record is entered into the electronic site by the master gunner each occasion the tube is fired or a non-firing action is performed. A hard copy may be printed from the electronic database as necessary. If historical information is needed from a DA Form 2408-4, it may be accessed from the Army Electronic Product Support (AEPS) database to obtain firing and non-firing data from previously submitted information. If the information needed cannot be found, an e-mail is sent to [email protected] for tank information. When inquiring about a specific cannon, the following information is included— z Tube serial number. z Cannon size, model or series. z Cannon serial number. A-169. When the serial number, size, or model number is not available, all other information on hand is provided. A-170. Entries on DA Form 2408-4 are made in blocks 10a through 10j by the section chief, crew chief, or someone designated in writing by the unit commander. These entries are made within 24 hours of firing. The information on this form is critical to safety. All entries must be correct, add up, and be readable. The electronic 2408-4 makes the calculations. If access to the AEPS Web site is not possible, a hard copy of DA Form 2408-4 is completed and mailed to TACOM, Rock Island, ATTN: AMSTA-LC-CIPPA, Rock Island, IL 61299-7630. Cards should be mailed in accordance with the following schedule. z Active Army units send in the form on 10 April and 10 October each year. z Reserve and National Guard units send in the forms on 10 October each year. A-171. When mailing in a card, a note is entered in the remarks block (column I) why the form is being sent in, such as (April 1 report or condemned and the reason for the condemnation), if the tube is condemned.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-133

Appendix A

A-172. When the weapon is put in storage, transferred or turned in, the card is mailed if data cannot be entered into the AEPS system and a copy printed to forward with the weapon. A copy of DA Form 2408-4 is kept showing all the data from the form sent. A copy of DA Form 2408-4 goes with the weapon when it is evacuated for repair or maintenance, even if the data are entered in the AEPS database. Support maintenance units enter the data into the electronic 2408-4 or mail in DA 2408-4 when— z The tube or cannon is condemned. z The tube, cannon, or weapon is lost to the Army inventory for any reason. A-173. If access to AEPS is not possible, and before mailing DA Form 2408-4 to TACOM, Rock Island, the following must be done: z A note in column i (Remarks) should be entered explaining why the form is being sent in. For example, 10 April report is written in column i for forms sent in on that date. “Condemned” is printed along with the reason in column i if the tube has been condemned. The date sent is entered in column a. The unit commander signs in column j. z A new DA Form 2408-4 is started by bringing forward all necessary information. The unit commander signs in column j (see DA Form 2408-4 on pages A-139 through A-141). A-174. A DA Form 2408-4 that shows only boresight and zero data, or Measured Correction and AFCS Offsets, is held until filled. When it is filled, the last boresight and zero information are entered on a new DA Form 2408-4. Boresight and Zero are printed in the top and bottom margins of the new DA Form 2408-4 (see DA Form 2408-4 on pages A-139 through A-141). The old DA Form 2408-4 is discarded. A-175. Completion Instructions DA Form 2408-4 (Each number corresponds to the block number for the DA Form 2408-4): (1) Tube serial number. Enter the gun tube serial number. TM 9-1000-202-14 and Figure A-55 shows you the location of the gun tube serial number. (2) Cannon type, model or series. Enter the gun tube nomenclature (120mm M256A1). (3) Organization (UIC). Owning organization and unit identification code (PENCIL ENTRY ONLY). (4) Special life data. Enter special life data on the specific weapon system. z Use this space to record EFC round life and other tube life information. z Compare the remaining EFC life of the gun tube in column 10h to the remaining life of the breechring. If the EFC life of the breechring is less than the entry on column, print in column 10g “Do not exceed (whatever the remaining breech mechanism EFC life is)”. Example: Dual condemnation criteria, 1500 EFC rounds or 5mm wear into the base metal. Borescope every 150 EFC rounds. Breechring life 4500 EFC rounds or 2 retubings. (5) End item identification. Enter the weapon end item identification, type, series or model and the chassis serial number. Example: Tank Combat M1A1 SN D12112. (6) RDS/EFC computation. Enter “equivalent full charge” factors for the various rounds fired. TM 9-1000-202-14 gives you the EFC factor values. Example: M829 A1/A2 = 1.0. (7) Cannon serial number. Enter the breech ring serial number with breech ring in parenthesis. TM 9-1000-202-14 and Figure A-56 show the location of the breech ring serial number.

A-134

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Figure A-55. Gun tube serial number

Figure A-56. Breech ring serial number (8) Retubings. Divide this block into two sections by drawing a diagonal line from the upper right to the lower left corner. z In the upper section enter the number of times the installed breechring has been retubed. z In the lower section enter the total number of EFC rounds fired on the installed breechring. (9) Rebushings. Leave blank. (10) This block is divided into ten columns a. through j. z Date. Write the calendar date of when the action occurred. z Projectile type. Enter the type of projectile and cartridge model. z Zone or charge. Leave blank. z Rounds fired. Write the number of rounds actually fired.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-135

Appendix A

z z z z z

z

A-136

EFC rounds fired. Multiply the number of rounds fired in column 10d by the EFC factor for that round in block 6. Cumulative rounds fired. Add the number of rounds fired in column 10d to the last entry in column 10f. Cumulative EFC rounds fired. Add the number in column 10e to the last entry in column 10g. Remaining life. Subtract the EFC rounds fired in column 10e from the last entry in column 10h. The difference is the remaining life of the gun tube. Remarks. Enter any remarks you need on the operation or maintenance of the weapon. This includes borescope and recoil exercise data. Example: Borescope 4 JUN 07 1270 efc rds, RE 4 JUN 07. Signature. The person designated by the unit commander to make entries on the DA Form 2408-4 will sign this column. Put your name, rank, title and signature here. When support personnel make entries, put support unit identity under signature and rank. The unit commander will sign on the column on the first line and last line entries (see Figure A-57 and Figure A-58).

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

z

Figure A-57. DA Form 2408-4 with firing and maintenance data

Figure A-58. DA Form 2408-4 condemning gun tube

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-137

Appendix A

TRANSFERRED DATA TO NEW FORM A-176. Before you send a form to Watervliet Arsenal, the following information must be transferred to the new card: z All the information contained in blocks 1 through 7. z Block eight enter number of times the breech ring has been retubed if it has changed. Enter the total number of EFC rounds fired on the breech ring. Add the difference between the first entry of column 10g. and the last entry in column 10g. to the EFC rounds fired in block 8 of the old DA Form 2408-4. This will give you the new total EFC rounds fired on the breech ring for the new DA Form 2408-4. z Block 10a. Enter current date. z Block 10b. through 10e. Leave blank. z Block 10f. Cumulative rounds fired. Enter the total rounds fired from the last entry in column 10f. of the form to be sent in. z Block 10g. Cumulative EFC rounds. Enter the total EFC rounds fired from last entry in column 10g of the form to be sent z Block 10h. Remaining life in EFC rounds. Enter the remaining life in EFC rounds. Make sure this entry matches the last entry in column 10h of the previous DA Form 2408-4. z Block 10i. Transfer any needed remarks from the previous form. Enter the last borescope and recoil exercise data. z Signature. The unit commander signs in this column on the first line and the last line entries. The unit commander’s signature shows that all the information has been transcribed to a new DA Form 2408-4 (see Figure A-59).

Figure A-59. DA Form 2408-4 transfer to new form

A-138

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

BORESIGHT AND ZERO DATA DA FORM 2408-4 z z z z z z z z z z

Tube serial number. Leave blank. Cannon type, model or series. Leave blank. Organization (unit identification code [UIC]). Enter the unit identification code (PENCIL ONLY) Special life data. Leave blank. End item identification. Enter the weapon and item identification type and model. RDS/EFC computation. Leave blank. Cannon serial number. Leave blank. Retubings. Leave blank. Rebushings. Leave blank. This block is divided into 10 columns. Date: Entered when action occurred; Projectile type: Enter the type of projectile and cartridge model; Block 10c through 10h: Leave Blank; Block 10i remarks: Enter boresight and zero data for different types of ammo being fired (see Figure A60).

Note. Change boresight and zero data whenever the gun tube, periscope, telescope, range finder or computer are changed; Block 10j: Signature of TC.

Figure A-60. DA Form 2408-4 boresight and zero data

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

A-139

This page intentionally left blank.

Appendix B

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation Appendix B discusses the dual feed system, pre-fire checks, boresighting, malfunctions, post-fire checks, Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) range determination, zeroing procedures and tube-launched, optically-tracked, wide-guided (TOW) limitations for the BFV family of systems. Before zeroing, the crew boresights all weapon systems to ensure they align correctly before firing. They also conduct a thorough pre-fire check to ensure that the turret and all turret weapon systems operate properly. This prevents many of the common malfunctions that can occur during firing. If a malfunction does occur, the crew tries to clear it. If they cannot, they report the malfunction to the Master Gunner. After firing the weapon systems, the crew conducts a post-fire check.

Contents Section I – Dual-Feed System ................. B-1 Section II – Boresighting ......................... B-4 Visibility Conditions ............................. B-4 Restricted Areas ................................. B-4 Preparation ......................................... B-5 Indications .......................................... B-5 Equipment Testing Procedures........... B-5 Boresighting the 25-mm Gun ............ B-12 Boresighting and Weapon Checks with the Close-In Panel ..................... B-35 Section III – Pre-Fire Checks ..................B-51 Pre-Fire Checklist for ODS and Below ................................................ B-52 Bradley A3 Gunner’s Pre-Fire Checklist ........................................... B-53 Bradley A3 Commander’s Pre-Fire Checklist ........................................... B-54 Section IV – Zeroing Procedures ...........B-54 Procedures for Zeroing the 25-mm, ODS, and Below ............................... B-54 Procedures for Zeroing the Coax, ODS, and Below ............................... B-55 Procedures for Zeroing, A3 Only ...... B-55

Section V – Bradley Weapons System Malfunctions ........................................... B-57 25-mm Gun ...................................... B-57 M240C 7.62-mm Coaxial Machine Gun .................................................. B-58 M257 Smoke Grenades ................... B-58 Turret Drive ...................................... B-58 Communications .............................. B-59 Section VI – Post-Fire Checks ............... B-59 Section VII – BFV Range Determination B-59 BFV Laser Range Finder ................. B-59 ISU Horizontal Ranging Stadia (Choke Sight) ................................... B-61 ISU Reticle Lead Line and Mil Relation ............................................ B-62 BFVA3 IBAS/CIV Reticle and Horizontal Ranging Stadia ............... B-65 Backup Sight (Auxiliary Sight) .......... B-67 Section VIII – TOW Limitations .............. B-69

SECTION I – DUAL-FEED SYSTEM B-1. A dual-feed system uses sprockets and extractor grooves to control rounds (see Figure B-1). A system of clutches allows either sprocket to engage and feed either an armor-piercing (AP) or highexplosive (HE) cartridge. The ammunition ready box contains 300 rounds of mixed ammunition. One ammunition box holds 70 rounds, and the other holds 230 rounds. Each box can hold either AP- or HE-

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-1

Appendix B

type ammunition. A single 1.5 horsepower volts direct current (VDC) motor externally powers the 25mm. The enhanced gun uses a 1.0-horsepower VDC motor. For all 25-mm guns, unit maintenance replaces inoperable 1.5-horsepower VDC motors with the newer 1.0-horsepower VDC motors. B-2. The gunner can choose from three rates of fire: z Single Shot. The vehicle commander (VC) or gunner can shoot as fast as he can squeeze the trigger. z Low Rate. The VC or gunner can shoot 100 rounds a minute, plus or minus 25 rounds. z High Rate. The VC or gunner can shoot 200 rounds a minute, plus or minus 25 rounds.

Figure B-1. Dual-feed system

B-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

CYCLES OF FUNCTION B-3. The 25-mm automatic gun has eight cycles of function that relate to the bolt position indicator (BPI) (see Figure B-2). The BPI shows the crew where the bolt is located the whole time the gun moves through its eight cycles of function: z Step 1–Sear or charge. The bolt is 25mm forward of its rear-most position. The sear engages the master link. As a safety measure, the firing pin remains uncocked. The bolt position arrow points to SEAR. z Step 2–Feed. Linked ammunition enters the 25-mm gun feeder. The feed sprockets strip the rounds from the links and move the round into the round positioner one at a time. The round positioner pushes the round into the ready position. During the feed cycle, the bolt moves about 25mm to the rear of the sear position. The feeder rotor rotates one-third of a turn, allowing the round positioner to place a round into the rotor. The position arrow points to FEED or to DON’T REMOVE FEEDER. Absolute hang-fire protection activates in this position. z Step 3–Chamber or ram. The rotor stops moving counterclockwise once the round is positioned on the bolt face. The bolt, bolt carrier, and round move forward until the round seats fully in the chamber. The position arrow points to RAM. z Step 4–Lock. The bolt is in the full forward position and the bolt carrier is still moving forward. The cam pin moving in its channel causes the bolt to rotate counterclockwise. This allows the lugs on the bolt to engage in the recesses of the breech, making a solid lock. Before the round fires, the position arrow points at the red zone. z Step 5–Fire. The final rotation of the bolt pushes the firing pin tang off the firing pin pawl in the track assembly. This causes the firing pin spring to push the firing pin forward. In its full forward position, the firing pin’s tip protrudes 2 millimeters through the bolt face. The indicator arrow points to FIRE. Although the gun requires no gas to operate, it does use 12 mm of recoil to deactivate mechanical interlock. If the breech fails to recoil, the gun stops cycling with the bolt still locked in the breech. The position arrow points to MISFIRE. z Step 6–Unlock. Once past the MISFIRE position, the master link and slider start to the rear. The slider pulls the bolt carrier with it. The cam pin rotates the bolt clockwise, causing it to unlock from the recesses in the breech. As the bolt unlocks, the arrow points to EXTRACT. z Step 7–Extract. As the bolt moves to the rear, the fixed T-slot extractors remove the cartridge case from the chamber. The case remains positioned on the face of the bolt. The bolt continues to the rear until it locks in the sear position. As this happens, the position arrow moves from EXTRACT to SEAR. z Step 8–Eject. The expended case remains in the bolt face until the gunner pulls the trigger to fire another round. When that happens, the bolt moves to the FEED position. The rotor rotates one-third of a turn, feeding a round onto the bolt face and sweeping the expended case into the feeder ejection chute. As the bolt moves forward to chamber the round, the eject arm on the bolt carrier pushes the expended case from the receiver cartridge eject port.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-3

Appendix B

Figure B-2. The M242 25-mm gun’s eight cycles of function

SECTION II – BORESIGHTING B-4. Boresighting aligns the Integrated Sight Unit (ISU) or Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS) and weapon systems to a common point of aim and simplifies the task of zeroing the turret weapon systems (see Figure B-3). The crew must ensure that boresight kits meet the accuracy standards in this appendix before using them to boresight the weapon systems. They must turn in to unit maintenance any kits that fail the accuracy test. They perform accuracy tests during semiannual servicing of vehicles, or whenever they detect problems during zeroing. They can swap telescopes and adapters to form complete kits that meet the standards, if needed. Specific boresighting instructions follow.

VISIBILITY CONDITIONS B-5. During good visibility, boresight the gun’s daysight using the convenient-target method. During limited visibility, for all but the A3, use the buddy boresight method to boresight the daysight (Technical Manual [TM] 9-2350-252-10-2, TM 9-2350-284-10-2 and TM 9-2350-294-10-2). Only after completing this step can you boresight the thermal sight to the daysight. Before boresighting, reset the boresight knobs to zero.

RESTRICTED AREAS B-6. For restricted or confined areas, such as a motor pool, use the close-in boresight panel to boresight the turret weapons. In such areas, you can boresight the Bradley A3 sights to a point of aim as near as 200 meters.

B-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-3. Reticle for boresight telescope NSN 4933-00-867-6607

PREPARATION B-7. Select the boresight mode from the menu on the Commander’s Tactical Display (CTD) (A3 only). The boresight menu takes you step-by-step through aligning the IBAS, the Commander’s Independent Viewer (CIV), and the backup sight’s line of sight (LOS) to the weapon systems. Before entering the boresight mode on the CTD, ensure the vehicle is stationary and level. Adjust the IBAS and CIV (brightness, contrast, focus, and polarity), then collimate in accordance with (IAW) TM 9-2350-294-10-21.

INDICATIONS B-8. Boresight all turret weapon systems before you fire any crew live-fire exercise. Boresight again only if you remove either the 25-mm receiver or the M240C, 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun (the coax), or unless another member of the crew stands on or pulls either weapon system from outside of the vehicle.

EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES B-9. Accurate boresighting is critical in combat situations. The crew must master boresighting procedures and the use of boresighting equipment. Boresighting aligns the sight to the aiming point of the 25-mm gun bore. Zeroing then aligns the sights with the point of round impact. A skilled crew can boresight and zero accurately with only a few sight adjustments and rounds.

EQUIPMENT B-10. Boresighting the 25-mm gun requires a boresight telescope (national stock number [NSN] 4933-00867-6607) and one of two 25-mm adapters, depending on the BFV model. The adapter fits into the gun bore, and the telescope fits into the adapter. Note. Boresight telescope (NSN 4933-00-867-6607) is being phased out currently throughout the US Army. The newer 1-1000 boresight telescope assembly (NSN 1240-01-490-5099) will become the primary boresight telescope used to boresight the BFV. Due to this change taking place, all photos referencing the boresight telescope in the end of the 25-mm barrel will be the 1-1000 boresight telescope assembly.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-5

Appendix B

Boresight Telescope B-11. Figure B-4 shows the reticle of the telescope. The reticle has crosshairs, a 2-mil circle, and a 10-mil circle. The azimuth (AZ) crosshair is the vertical line; the elevation (EL) crosshair is the horizontal line. Use the 2-mil circle to test the accuracy of the 25-mm boresight kit. z The telescope's 5X magnification allows the viewer to focus on any target between 5 meters and infinity. After you have properly focused the telescope, the aiming point of the reticle stays put, even if you move your head while looking at it. z Adjust the telescope's two focusing rings (see Figure B-4) in the following order: „ Reticle-Focus Ring. Point the telescope at the sky or toward any other evenly lit field of view. This forces you to look at the reticle rather than at a target. To focus, turn the reticlefocus ring until the reticle appears sharp and clear. „ Target Objective-Focus Ring. TM 9-2350-252-10-2 calls this ring a "vernier focus dial." To adjust it, turn it back and forth until its reticle aiming point remains the same when you move your head back and forth above the eyepiece.

Figure B-4. Boresight telescope NSN 4933-00-867-6607 z z

Avoid unscrewing or disassembling the telescope itself. It is not waterproof. If it does get wet, dry it at once. Water inside the telescope fogs the view. A plate on the base of the telescope lists the federal ordnance number and the serial numbers. The serial number is the bottom (last) number listed.

1-1000 Boresight Telescope Assembly and Integral 7.62-mm Adapter B-12. The tapered stem of the A3 boresight telescope (NSN 1240-01-490-5099, see Figure B-5) fits a 7.62mm coax gun bore. The 25-mm adapter (NSN 1240-01-441-5410, see Figure B-6) fits the 25-mm gun

B-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

bore. Together, these two parts comprise the boresight telescope assembly (BTA). When used properly, this 12X telescope offers a fast, easy, and accurate way to align the gunner's sight to the axis of the gun bore. Figure B-7 shows the reticle, which has a vertical crosshair (for AZ), horizontal crosshair (for EL), and a 1-mil circle (for testing the accuracy of the boresight kit). Note. If after five or six rotations you cannot collimate the 25-mm gun using the 1-1000 telescope, then turn in the telescope to unit maintenance.

Figure B-5. The 1-1000 boresight telescope

Figure B-6. Adapter for the 1-1000 boresight telescope

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-7

Appendix B

Figure B-7. Reticle for 1-1000 telescope z z z z z

Objective Assembly. The objective assembly has an objective lens, an objective cell assembly, and a lens cap with a parallax-reduction hole. Diopter-Adjustment Knob. The diopter-adjustment knob allows you to adjust the image to plus or minus 4 diopters. Knurled Handle. Grasp the knurled handle (end) of the 25-mm adapter to install, rotate, or remove it from the gun bore. Tapered Muzzle Cone. Each piece has a tapered muzzle cone to fit the appropriate gun bore. Spring-Loaded Fingers. These center and secure the telescope to the adapter and the adapter to the gun bore.

CAUTION Only rotate the telescope itself when using it with the 7.62-mm coax, that is, when using it without the 25-mm adapter. When using the 25-mm adapter, do not turn the telescope itself; instead, grasp and rotate the knurled end of the 25-mm adapter.

z z z z z z

B-8

Purging Valve Assembly. The telescope has a valve assembly to purge and charge nitrogen. Outlet Port Screw. This allows for nitrogen purging. Index Mark. Align the red index mark (dot) on the 25-mm adapter with the muzzle face of the gun bore. Shroud Protector. A shroud protects the collimation knobs. Collimation Knobs. Use these knobs (AZ, EL) to adjust the reticle during collimation. The light port is exposed in both positions. Adapter Interface. This refers to the juncture of the 7.62-mm stem and the adapter.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

z

Slotted Hole. This is where you will insert the drift key if the 7.62-mm stem gets stuck in the adapter.

CAUTION If the telescope stem gets stuck in the adapter, insert the drift key in the slotted hole. To loosen the stem from the adapter, work the key gently, without forcing it into the slot. Pushing too hard would damage the fingers on the end of the adapter stem.

Older 25-mm Adapter B-13. Figure B-8 shows the older 25-mm adapter (part number [PN] 12524010). The knob inserts into the 25-mm gun barrel. The adapter is fully inserted when the tapered stop contacts the end of the gun barrel. Insert the adapter slowly with a slight twisting motion to keep it from locking in the barrel. The adapter is fully inserted when the tapered stop contacts the end of the gun barrel. z The newer adapter (PN 12524144) offers improved accuracy over the older model, (see Figure B-9). On the newer one, both the plated knob and plated, tapered stop reduce wear. Although the knob's diameter exceeds that of the bore, slots in the knob allow it to compress (in diameter) to fit into the gun barrel. z The telescope fits into the telescope receptacle on the adapter. When inserting the telescope, hold it at the base without touching the glass lens. Insert the telescope firmly by using a slight twisting motion. If the telescope is stuck in the adapter, gently hit the telescope knockout rod. Hard hits on the rod could damage the telescope shaft.

CAUTION Be careful hitting the telescope–knockout rod too hard could damage the telescope shaft.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-9

Appendix B

Figure B-8. Older 25-mm adapter, PN 12524010, fits 25-mm barrel on all BFVs through A2 ODS

Figure B-9. Newer 25-mm adapter, PN 12524144, fits 25-mm barrel on all BFVs

KIT ACCURACY TEST B-14. Test the 25-mm kit for accuracy before you boresight the gun with it. To prepare for testing, follow Steps 1 through 18 in the section entitled "Boresight 25-mm Gun" in TM 9-2350-252-10-2. B-15. The kit rotation test described in this appendix differs from the turret TM’s accuracy test. The TM prescribes two 90-degree rotations of the telescope to test its accuracy. The 180-degree kit-rotation test described in this appendix tests the entire kit. B-16. To test the accuracy of the kit, follow these steps rather than those in the TM: z Focus the telescope reticle using the reticle-focus ring. z Focus on the target using the target objective-focus ring. z Rotate the telescope so that the eyepiece faces right. If when you rotate the telescope it slips in the adapter, hold both so that it does not. B-17. Tell the gunner to lay the gun so that the telescope reticle aims at a target with a corner such as a boresight panel or building. Figure B-10 shows an 8-foot-square boresight panel at 1,200 meters.

B-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-10. Telescope reticle aimed at a corner of boresight panel B-18. Rotate the telescope and adapter together 180 degrees until the telescope faces left (see Figure B-11).

Figure B-11. Telescope facing to the left B-19. Score accuracy. The kit meets standards if the original aiming point stays in or on the 2-mil circle of the telescope reticle (see Figure B-12). It fails the standards if the original aiming point moves outside the 2-mil circle.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-11

Appendix B

Figure B-12. Aiming point in the 2-mil circle

BORESIGHTING THE 25-MM GUN B-20. After identifying an accurate kit, boresight weapons as described in TM 9-2350-252-10-2, beginning with Step 23. Use both the boresight telescope and the 25-mm adapter.

PREPARATION TO SCREEN EQUIPMENT B-21. A 25-mm boresight kit could be inaccurate due to the telescope, adapter, or both. If a 25-mm kit did not meet standards of the kit-accuracy field test, then test the telescope and 25-mm adapter separately. If a large number of kits fail to meet the standards, then the unit must screen all of its telescope and 25-mm adapters (see Figure B-13). Then, it puts each accurate adapter with an accurate telescope to form accurate 25-mm kits. Before screening equipment:

BFV AND TESTING PERSONNEL B-22. Use one BFV to test boresight equipment. The 25-mm gun barrel should have fired no more than 5,000 rounds, because gun erosion can affect testing results. z Two Master Gunners at unit level should conduct testing. Testers should know correct boresighting procedures. They should also know how to accurately obtain, record, and score the boresight data. One tester observes aiming points of tested equipment and the other tester records data on a standardized scoresheet (discussed later). z To prevent eyestrain, testers should alternate between testing and recording. Screening all of the boresighting equipment in a unit may take from three to five days.

B-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-13. Preparations before screening equipment

TESTING AREA B-23. Conduct testing close to where the boresight equipment is stored or secured. This will help facilitate movement of equipment to and from the test vehicle. You will need a 52-meter line of sight from the end of the 25-mm gun barrel to the test panel.

BORESIGHT TEST PANEL B-24. Use a special test panel to test the equipment. The panel is a scoring grid of 2-inch squares. Figure B-14 shows an example panel. Your local Training Activity Support Center (TASC) must produce the actual-size drawing. With the panel 52 meters from the end of the 25-mm gun barrel, each 2-inch square of the scoring grid, as seen through the boresight telescope, measures 1 mil high and wide. This grid allows the tester to observe the location of the boresight aiming point. The tester then records the aiming point on the score sheet.

Figure B-14. Example boresight test panel B-25. The test panel has a white background. Solid 1/8-inch-wide black lines mark squares on the panel. The length of each side of a square is 2 inches (5 centimeters). Numbers measure 1 1/2 to 2 inches tall. B-26. If you waterproof the drawing like a map, you can staple it to a piece of plywood and use it as a test panel. Lean it against a fence or any other rigid structure for support. To keep the wind from knocking it down, tie the panel to the support structure in the upright position. Be sure to locate the panel 52 meters from the 25-mm gun. It does not need to sit at gun level.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-13

Appendix B

SCORESHEET

B-27. Use DA Form 7523-R, Boresight Telescope Accuracy Test, to record and score boresight data as well as to screen all equipment-adapters, telescopes, and 25-mm boresight kits. Figure B-15 shows an example of a completed Boresight Telescope Accuracy Test.

B-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-15. Example of a completed DA Form 7523-R

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-15

Appendix B

B-28. Use the information section at the top of the scoresheet to record your (the tester's) name, when testing occurred, what you tested, and what results you obtained (GO or NO GO). Record test data in the two screening blocks labeled Test 1 and Test 2, one for each screening subtest. For equipment to pass the screening test, it must receive a GO on both the subtests. B-29. Before testing begins, you must know how to record and plot boresight-aiming points on the scoresheet. B-30. Before recording an aiming point, align the telescope reticle with the scoring grid of the test panel. If the reticle is out of alignment, rotate the telescope until you see the correct sight picture (see Figure B-16).

Figure B-16. Reticle alignment z

z

B-16

Marking the Aiming Point on the Scoring Grid. One technique for observing and plotting the telescope's aiming point is to draw an "X" on the scoring grid where the telescope reticle aims at the panel (see Figure B-17). However, the clutter between the reticle and grid lines can make using this technique difficult. Determining Grid Coordinates for Each Aiming Point. The second technique resembles that of using grid coordinates on a map. Determine grid coordinates for each aiming point using the numbers along the bottom and right sides of the test panel. Read the coordinates to the right and up, starting from the lower left-hand corner of the grid. Take two readings for each aiming point of the telescope—an AZ coordinate and an EL coordinate. „ Read the right AZ coordinate where the AZ crosshair crosses the scale at the bottom of the grid. In the example shown in Figure B-18, the AZ coordinate is 3 3/4 mils. Record this in the RIGHT AIM–POINT COORDINATES blank in data section 1 of the scoresheet. „ Read the right EL coordinate where the EL crosshair crosses the right side of the grid. In the example shown in Figure B-19, the EL coordinate is 3 1/2 mils. Record this in the RIGHT AIM–POINT COORDINATES blank in data section 1 of the scoresheet.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-17. Sight picture and scoring grid

Figure B-18. Azimuth for right aim-point coordinates

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-17

Appendix B

Figure B-19. Elevation for right aim-point coordinates z

Plotting Aiming Point on Scoring Grid. Plot the aiming point on the scoring grid of the scoresheet. In this case, go right 3 3/4 mils and up 3 1/2 mils (see Figure B-20). You and another tester can practice recording boresight aiming points with this technique by laying the 25-mm gun on different parts of the test panel. Practice observing and recording the AZ and EL coordinates for the same aiming point. You should be able to obtain AZ and EL readings to at least the nearest 1/4 mil. However, taking readings to the nearest 1/8 mil produces optimal testing results and aiming point accuracy.

Figure B-20. Plotted aiming point

B-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Gun Lay B-31. Before testing begins, aim the gun near the center of the test panel. This increases the likelihood that aiming points will fall on the grid during testing. Aiming points off the grid are difficult to record and score. Lay the gun with boresight equipment and with the turret in manual operational mode. You will need boresight equipment score sheet and pencil. You can lay a gun accurately with a boresight kit, if you have one, using the following procedures: z Insert the adapter into the gun barrel. z Insert the telescope into the adapter with the eyepiece facing up. z Tell the gunner to lay the gun so that the telescope reticle aims at the center of the panel. z Focus the telescope (see Figure B-21). „ Focus the reticle using the reticle-focus ring. „ Focus on the target using the target objective-focus ring.

Figure B-21. Reticle aimed at center of panel

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-19

Appendix B

z z z

The telescope is now aiming at the center of the target, but if the boresighting equipment is inaccurate, the gun will not be aiming at the center of the target. Rotate the kit (telescope plus adapter) until the eyepiece faces to the right. Mark the aiming point on scoring grid 1 (see Figure B-22).

Figure B-22. Kit right aiming point z z z

B-20

Rotate the kit until the telescope eyepiece faces left. Mark the left aiming point on scoring grid 1 (see Figure B-23). Taking right and left aiming points is like using a shot group to zero a weapon. To determine the middle of the two aiming points, so you can estimate where the gun is aiming, lay the gun on the estimated center of the panel.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-23. Kit left aiming point z

Determine aiming point of gun. „ Draw a line between the two aiming points marked on the scoresheet. „ Mark the middle of the line. This is where the gun is aiming (see Figure B-24).

Figure B-24. Aiming point

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-21

Appendix B

z z z z

Lay the gun on the estimated center of the panel. Draw an arrow from the middle of the line to the center of the panel. The arrow shows the distance and direction of the gun to target center (see Figure B-25). Helper tells the gunner to lay the gun the distance and direction shown by the arrow from the last lay of the telescope (see Figure B-26). The example shows the start and stop points of a gun lay with the telescope starting in the left position. In this case, the gun was moved about 1 1/4 mils in the direction of one o'clock. You can lay the gun with the telescope in any position (left or right), but you must move the gun the distance and direction indicated by the arrow.

Figure B-25. Distance and direction from center

Figure B-26. Adjusted aim point

B-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

ADAPTER-SCREENING TEST B-32. Adapters are tested first using an accurate telescope. New telescopes usually meet accuracy requirements, so they are preferable for use. A new telescope can be obtained from a new vehicle or from direct exchange for a defective telescope. A new telescope is easy to identify as such if it is still wrapped in shipping material. However, some new telescopes have been unwrapped, but remain unused. These will still have tape over the eyepiece. An inspection for scratches, dirt, and fingerprints on the lens also gives a good estimate of prior use. B-33. Mark adapters before screening. Wrap a piece of 1-inch-wide masking tape around the telescope end of the adapter. Make position marks ("A" and "B") on the tape to align the adapter in the barrel and the telescope with the adapter. You can use an adapter-marking template for this (see Figure B-27). If you use the template, you can also tape it to your clipboard to hold scoresheets during testing. Place the telescope end of the adapter on the template and on the position marks. Adapters have no permanent identification marks, so you must add them yourself. Then you must mark an identification number for each adapter on the tape. The example adapter shown in Figure B-28 is marked with the number "4."

Figure B-27. Adapter-marking template

Figure B-28. Marked adapter B-34. Begin testing when you have emplaced the vehicle and panel, aimed the gun at the panel, marked the adapters, and obtained an accurate telescope. The data recorder must have a set of scoresheets and a clipboard. z Before testing each piece of equipment, record the date, time, unit, test type, telescope serial number, adapter number, and your name on the scoresheet. Test type indicates whether tester is checking an adapter, telescope, or kit. z Test the adapters using the same kit-rotation procedure that you used for the kit-accuracy field test. Begin testing with the telescope facing right. Observe and record the reticle's aiming point on the scoresheet. Rotate the adapter and telescope together one-half turn (180 degrees), until the eyepiece faces left. Record this aiming point on the scoresheet.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-23

Appendix B

z

Test each adapter twice. This provides a more reliable estimate of accuracy. Record data for the first test in the Test 1 section of the scoresheet; record data for the second test in the Test 2 section. The tests differ only in the adapter's position in the gun barrel. The following describes a sample test: „ Insert the 25-mm adapter into the gun barrel with the position mark "A" facing right. „ Insert the telescope into the adapter with the eyepiece facing right. „ Estimate the AZ and EL coordinates for the aiming point. For this example, the AZ coordinate is 3 3/4, and the EL coordinate is 2 3/4 (see Figure B-29).

Figure B-29. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the right, at mark "A" „

„

Record the AZ and EL coordinates in the RIGHT AIM–POINT COORDINATES block of scoring grid 1 on the scoresheet. Plot the right aiming point for Test 1 on scoring grid 1 (see Figure B-30).

Figure B-30. Right aiming point as recorded on scoresheet

B-24

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

z

z

Ideally, plot an aiming point after recording its AZ and EL coordinates in the data section on the scoresheet. Two testers collect data and record the aiming points. „ The tester observing the aiming point reads the AZ and EL coordinates to the other tester, who records them on the scoresheet. „ Using the AZ and EL data on the scoresheet, the observer plots the aiming point on the scoring grid. „ The observer compares the scoresheet and sight picture to check the accuracy of the recorded aiming point data. Now that the testers have taken Test 1's right reading, they must take the left reading. During kit rotation, maintain the position of the telescope in the adapter. If the telescope slips in the adapter while rotating the kit, make sure that the adapter's position mark "A" faces left before you record the aiming point. „ Rotate both the telescope and the adapter until the eyepiece faces left (see Figure B-31). „ Record the AZ and EL coordinates of the aiming point in the LEFT AIM–POINT COORDINATES blank in data section 1 of the scoresheet. In the example, the AZ coordinate is 2 1/2, and the EL coordinate is 2 1/2.

Figure B-31. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the left, at mark "A"

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-25

Appendix B

„

Plot the left aiming point for Test 1 on the scoring grid 1 (see Figure B-32).

Figure B-32. Left aiming point as recorded on scoresheet z

B-26

Test 1 of the adapter is now complete. Conduct Test 2 just like Test 1, except that, before testing, you must align the telescope with the adapter's position mark "B." „ Rotate the adapter until mark "B" faces right. „ Rotate the telescope to the right. In this example, the AZ coordinate reads 3 1/2, and the EL coordinate reads 2 1/4 (see Figure B-33). „ Estimate and record the AZ and EL coordinates in the RIGHT AIM–POINT COORDINATES item in the Test 2 section of the scoresheet. „ Plot the right aim point on scoring grid 2 (see Figure B-34).

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-33. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the right, at mark "B"

Figure B-34. Right aim point coordinates, Test 2

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-27

Appendix B

Rotate both the adapter and telescope to the left. Position the adapter's "B" mark so that it faces left. AZ and EL coordinates should read 2 1/4 and 2 1/4, respectively (see Figure B-35). „ Estimate and record the AZ and EL coordinates in the LEFT AIM–POINT COORDINATES blank in data section 2 of the scoresheet. „ Plot the left aim point on scoring grid 2 (see Figure B-36). You have now collected all of the data for one adapter. Continue testing until you have tested all of the adapters from the unit. Testing one adapter takes about 2 to 3 minutes, so you can test 13 adapters in about an hour. Test the adapters one troop at a time until you have tested all of the equipment in the unit, then score the adapters. „

z

Figure B-35. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the left, at mark "B"

Figure B-36. Left aiming point, Test 2

B-28

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

B-35. The distance between the two aiming points is the criterion used to measure accuracy during one iteration of a test. For the adapter to receive a GO, the distance between the telescope's two aiming points must measure 1 mil or less. On the scoring grid, 1 mil equals 1/2 inch. Use a standard ruler to measure the distance between points. For an adapter to score a GO, the distance must measure no more than 1/2 inch. To pass the screening test, it must score a GO on both Tests 1 and 2. The following steps for scoring the adapter are based on the previous example: z Use a ruler that has markings every 1/16 of an inch. A 1/16-scale allows measurement to the nearest 1/8 mil of the scoresheet. z Measure the distance between the two aiming points marked on scoring grid 1. The distance in this example is 7/16 inch. z Record the measured distance in the DISTANCE BETWEEN AIM POINTS block of data section 1. z Score Test 1. „ Circle GO in data section 1 if distance is 1/2 inch or less. „ Circle NO GO in data section 1 if distance is more than 1/2 inch. z Record distance in mils between aim points (see Figure B-37). See the conversion chart in Table B-1.

Figure B-37. Distance between aim points, Test 1 Table B-1. Inch-to-mil conversion chart Inches

1/8

1/4

3/8

1/2

5/8

3/4

7/8

1

Mils

1/4

1/2

3/4

1

1 1/4

1 1/2

1 3/4

2

z

z

Measure the distance between aiming points marked on scoring grid 2. The distance in this example is 5/8 inch. Record this distance in the DISTANCE BETWEEN AIM POINTS block in data section 1. Score Test 2 (see Figure B-38). „ Circle GO in data section 1 if distance is 1/2 inch or less. „ Circle NO GO in data section 1 if distance is more than 1/2 inch.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-29

Appendix B

Figure B-38. Distance between aim points, Test 2 z

Score the screening test. „ Circle PASS at top of scoresheet if telescope received a GO on both Test 1 and Test 2. „ Circle FAIL at top of scoresheet if one or both tests yield a score of NO GO. Figure B-15 on page B-14 shows an example of a completed scoresheet for this data. In Figure B-15, the adapter received a GO score for Test 1 and a NO GO for Test 2. Therefore, the adapter in the example failed the screening test.

TELESCOPE-SCREENING TEST B-36. After adapter screening, telescopes are paired with a highly accurate adapter and are tested for accuracy. The most accurate adapter is the one proven by testing to have the shortest distance between right and left aiming points. B-37. Each telescope has a serial number stamped on the base plate near the shaft. Mark the serial number on a piece of tape, then apply the tape to the 7.62-mm boresight kit container. This simplifies the task of sorting accurate and inaccurate telescopes after testing. B-38. Test telescopes using telescope-rotation procedures. After inserting the adapter into the gun barrel, insert the telescope with the eyepiece facing to the right. Observe and record the aiming point on the scoresheet. Rotate the telescope only until the eyepiece faces to the left. The telescope meets the standards if the aiming point changes 1 mil or less after you rotate the telescope. To pass the screening test, each telescope must meet the standard on two iterations of it. The following describes the screening procedure for telescopes. Because you record data for, plot, and score the telescope test the same as you did for the adapter test, this list need not repeat the sample data: z Record date, time, tester, unit, telescope serial number, adapter assigned number, and test type in information section of scoresheet. z Insert an accurate 25-mm adapter into the gun barrel with the position mark facing up. z Insert telescope into adapter with the eyepiece facing right (see Figure B-39). z Record AZ and EL coordinates in the RIGHT AIM–POINT COORDINATES item in the Test 1 section of the scoresheet. z Plot the right aim point on the scoring grid.

B-30

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-39. Mark "A" facing up, telescope to the right Rotate only the telescope 180 degrees so that the eyepiece faces left. Ensure that the adapter's mark "A" faces up (see Figure B-40). z Record the AZ and EL coordinates in the LEFT AIM–POINT COORDINATES item in the Test 1 section of the scoresheet. z Plot the left aim point on scoring grid 1. Test 1 is now complete. Test 2 is like Test 1 except that the adapter's mark "B" faces up. z Rotate the adapter until the "B" faces up. z Rotate the telescope to the right. Ensure "B" still faces up. z Record right aim point in data section 2. z Plot right aim point on scoring grid 2. z Rotate telescope to the left. Ensure that "B" faces up. z Record aim point in the LEFT AIM–POINT COORDINATES item in the Test 2 section of the scoresheet. z Plot left aim point on scoring grid 2. You have now tested one telescope. Continue until you have tested all of the telescopes in the unit. B-39. Score the telescopes after you collect the accuracy data for all telescopes. Score them the same as you did the adapters. Score a "GO" on an iteration of the test procedure when the distance between right and left aiming points measures no more than 1/2 inch on the scoring grid. To pass the screening test, the telescope must earn a GO score on both iterations. It fails if it receives a NO GO on either one. Circle PASS or FAIL in the information section of the scoresheet. z

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-31

Appendix B

Figure B-40. Mark facing up, telescope to the left

ACCURATE BORESIGHT KITS B-40. The objective is to form accurate 25-mm boresight kits from accurate telescopes and 25-mm adapters. The crew screens kits using the same procedures and standards used for the adapters: namely, they use the kit-rotation procedure with a 1-mil standard. They pair and test individual adapters and telescopes that meet the required standards, then they issue accurate kits to the squad. B-41. You can only form accurate kits from pairs of accurate adapters and telescopes. If the number of accurate telescopes exceeds the number of accurate adapters, then start kit testing with the telescopes, specifically, start with the ones that have the least distance between the left and right readings. B-42. After you form an accurate kit, keep it together. Use an electrical etching tool to mark the telescope's serial number on the adapter.

QUALITY DEFICIENCY REPORTS B-43. The unit Master Gunner reports telescopes and 25-mm adapters that fail the screening tests on the Standard Form (SF) 68, Product Quality Deficiency Report. He can complete a separate QDR for each defective piece of equipment, but completing one form for all defective or inaccurate telescopes and another for all defective or inaccurate adapters is easier. Figure B-41 on page B-33 shows an example completed QDR reporting defective and inaccurate telescopes. This form is available electronically. Users can complete it electronically, copy it from the back of the book and complete it manually, or some of each. For example, the unit Master Gunner can complete common data electronically and print copies to finish later manually.

B-32

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Telescope B-44. The unit Master Gunner reports defective or inaccurate telescopes using SF 368, Product Quality Deficiency Report, as follows: z Block 1a. Enter your unit designation, address (including zip code), and the Department of Defense Ammunition Code (DODAC) for the defective equipment. z Block 1b. Enter your name and duty phone number, then, in the same block, sign your name to signify that you completed the QDR. z Block 2a. Enter the name and address of the manager who will receive the QDR. z Blocks 2b and 2c. Leave blank. z Block 3. This block has exactly twelve places. In the first six, enter the DODAC again; in the next two, enter the last two digits of the calendar year; in the last four places, enter how many QDRs you are submitting for your unit at this time. z Block 4. Enter the dates when the equipment was examined and tested. z Blocks 5 and 6. Enter on this form the NSN and nomenclature from the boresight telescope's data plate. z Block 7. Enter the telescope's manufacturer. z Block 8. Enter the part number, which you will find on the telescope's base plate. z Block 9. Enter the serial, lot, batch number, or any of these that you know for the telescope adapters. z Blocks 10a and 10b. Enter "UNKNOWN." z Block 11. If telescopes are either new or repaired, check the appropriate box in Block 11. z Block 12. Enter manufacturing and repair dates, if you know them. z Block 13. Enter "NA." z Block 14. Check the NO square. z Block 15. Complete Block 15a if appropriate. In Block 15b, enter the number of items that were examined and tested. In Block 15c, enter the total number of telescopes that were found defective or inaccurate. Complete Block 15d if appropriate. z Block 16. In Block 16a(1), enter the BFV's NSN. In all the other parts of Block 16, enter "NA." z Blocks 17 and 18. Enter "UNKNOWN." z Block 19. Check UNKNOWN. z Block 20. Enter the letter "O," since defective items were detected and reported at the organizational level. z Block 21. Check and write "45" in the blank for HOLDING EXHIBIT FOR ____ DAYS, so that defective items will be held 45 days pending disposition instructions. z Block 22. This is the most important block–here you describe the problem in detail. Be sure to write what data suggests or indicates that a problem exists, for example, "excessive ammunition expenditure during zeroing." Here you must also describe how the equipment was examined or tested to detect the problem, for example, telescope rotation test, and the results of testing. If you need more space, include another sheet, and write the report control number on it to indicate that it goes with your completed SF 368 (see Figure B-41).

Adapter B-45. Instructions for filling out a QDR for a defective or inaccurate adapter follow (see Figure B-42). Since this is a separate QDR from the one reporting telescopes, this report will have its own control number: z Blocks 1 and 2. Complete the same as for telescopes. z Block 8. The part number depends on the design of the adapter. z Blocks 9 through 21. Complete as described for telescopes. z Block 22. Complete this, the most important part of the QDR, as described for telescopes, but write in how many adapters you are reporting as defective (from Block 4).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-33

Appendix B

Repair B-46. Either depot maintenance or the manufacturer must repair boresight kits, depending on the deficiency.

Figure B-41. Example completed SF 368 (telescopes)

B-34

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-42. Example completed SF 368 (adapters)

BORESIGHTING AND WEAPON CHECKS WITH THE CLOSE-IN PANEL B-47. This portion describes how a crew uses the close-in boresight panel. It then describes how they use the panel to boresight the BFV turret weapons in a restricted or confined area like the motor pool.

DESCRIPTION OF PANEL B-48. Five of the reference crosses bear the labels TOW, ISU, AUX, 25mm, and COAX. A sixth, "T"shaped reference is made of metal to allow boresighting of the thermal sight. The panel's background color

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-35

Appendix B

is white. The ISU cross and "T" are black; and the TOW, 25mm, COAX, and AUX crosses are orange (see Figure B-43).

Figure B-43. Close-in panel

WEAPON CHECKS B-49. The close-in boresight panel also tests backlash, equilibrator, drift, and boresight retention. These tests allow the BFV crew to identify weapon system errors that decrease firing accuracy as well as to learn their weapons. Before firing live, while they are still in the motorpool, the crew tests backlash, equilibration, and drift.

PANEL PLACEMENT B-50. Depending on the positioning of vehicles and the placement of the boresight panel, the unit should be able to boresight all of their vehicles utilizing one, centrally placed panel. The panel may be emplaced at ground level or when utilizing existing structures, no more than 25 meters off of the ground. Vehicles must be placed within 30 meters left or right of the centerline from the boresight panel at distances between 100 and 120 meters from the panel. Between 120 and 150 meters from the panel, they may be placed as far away as 50 meters to the left or right of the centerline. B-51. Figure B-44 shows an example of an overhead view of panel placement and location of vehicles relative to it.

B-36

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-44. Panel placement B-52. Determine direct-line distance when the panel is first placed in the motor pool. Insert a boresight kit into the 25-mm gun of a vehicle positioned on a direct line with the panel. Align the boresight reticle with the 25-mm cross on the panel. Use ranging gaps in the 25-mm cross to determine the panel's distance. Vehicles are at a correct distance if the 2-mil circle of the boresight reticle is on the edge, or in the gaps of the 25-mm cross. Figure B-45 shows examples of vehicles located at the correct distances for boresighting.

Figure B-45. Correct distance alignment for boresighting

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-37

Appendix B

PREPARATION B-53. Crews should know the boresight procedures described in TM 9-2350-252-10-2. All turret weapons must be mounted and operational. A boresight kit and turret tool kit is required. Crews use the following checklist to prepare for boresighting with the close-in boresight panel: z Master power ON. z Turret power ON. z Night vision switch ON. z Turret, gun, and TOW select levers in POWER (to raise TOW launcher). z TOW launcher raised. z Turret AZ selection lever in MANUAL. z Gun EL selection lever in MANUAL. z TOW EL drive selection lever in POWER. z Day and thermal ballistic sight cover doors open. z Sensor select switch set on NEUTRAL. z Range control knob set at "0." z Reticle brightness turned all the way to the right. z Magnification set on HI. z AP or HE selected on weapons control panel. z Status indicator displays ammunition and range index. z Gun reticle displayed. z Turret travel lock disengaged.

WEAPONS AND SIGHT ALIGNMENT B-54. The crew aligns weapons and sight as follows: z Perform the boresight kit accuracy test before aligning the sight and weapon. z To control backlash, lay the 25-mm gun so that the gun-lay pattern ends in EL. „ (Helper) rotate the telescope until the eyepiece faces upward. „ (Helper) align the boresight reticle with the 25-mm cross on the panel. − Tell gunner to align the top of the 10-mil circle of the boresight reticle with the 25-mm cross on the panel (see Figure B-46). − Tell gunner to align the boresight reticle with the 25-mm cross on the panel (see Figure B-47). Note. Traverse the turret, or elevate or depress the gun, only after aligning the TOW weapon system. z

Align the ISU day reticle. The neutral sensor-select setting works better on bright, sunny days. Move the sensor select switch to CLEAR or NEUTRAL for the best view of the ISU reticle and panel. „ Align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel using the AZ and EL boresight adjustment knobs. „

B-38

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-46. 10-mil circle aligned with the 25-mm cross

Figure B-47. Boresight reticle aligned with the 25-mm cross „

3 September 2009

Adjust the browpad (see Figure B-48). When the panel is 100 to 150 meters away, head movement on the browpad changes the aim of the reticle. For example, moving the head to the left shifts the aim to the left. Correct adjustment of the browpad is important. − Move head to the left until the sight begins to black out. Note the aiming point of the reticle; this aiming point is called the left limit. − Move head to the right and note the right limit of the reticle.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-39

Appendix B

− − −

Move head up and note the upper limit of the reticle. Move head down and note the lower limit of the reticle. Adjust the browpad so that the reticle appears centered between the left, right, upper, and lower limits.

Figure B-48. Reticle centered between left, right, and lower limits If after adjusting the browpad the ISU reticle is no longer aligned with the ISU cross, realign the reticle using the AZ and EL boresight knobs. Align the auxiliary sight. „ Focus sight with the eyepiece diopter. „ If necessary, align the cross of the auxiliary sight with the AUX cross on the panel. − Loosen locknut. − Adjust thumbscrews (see Figure B-49) to align the level (horizontal) line of the reticle crosshair with the level line of the AUX cross on the panel. − Tighten the locknut. − Loosen horizontal adjustment lock screw by about one-half turn to the left. − Turn the horizontal adjustment screw to align the vertical line of the reticle. Crosshair with the vertical line of the AUX cross on the panel. − Tighten the horizontal adjustment lock screw (see Figure B-50). Align the 7.62-mm coax machine gun. „ Select ammunition. − Press the 7.62 button on the weapon control box. − Ensure that "7.62" appears on the status indicator. „

z

z

B-40

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-49. Locknut, crank, and thumbscrews

Figure B-50. Horizontal adjustment lock screw and horizontal adjustment screw

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-41

Appendix B

(Helper) insert the 7.62-mm adapter and boresight telescope into the coaxial machine gun. − He then tells the gunner to align the boresight reticle with the COAX cross on the panel. − Tell the gunner to use the AZ knob on the gun to align the boresight AZ crosshair (vertical) with the vertical line on the COAX cross. − Tells the gunner to use the EL knob on the gun to align the boresight EL crosshair (horizontal) with the level line on the COAX cross. Align the ISU night reticle. „ Move sensor select switch to NIGHT. „ Use black hot (BH) to make the ISU reticle more visible on the "T" of the panel, so set the polarity (PLRT) switch to that BH. „ Adjust the thermal sight until you can see the "T" clearly: − Turn the CON knob all the way to the right. − Turn the BRT knob all the way to the left. − Turn the BRT knob to the right until you can see the "T" on the panel. − Focus on the "T" using the focus ring. − Turn the CON knob left about one-quarter turn. − Turn the BRT knob to the right until the "T" becomes clearer. − Repeat focus ring, CON knob, and BRT knob adjustments, if necessary. „ Align the ISU reticle with the "T" on the panel using the night boresight EL and AZ knobs (see Figure B-51). Align the TOW weapon system. „ Move the sensor select switch to CLEAR or NEUTRAL. „ Place the 25-mm gun EL select lever in the POWER mode. „ Place the TOW elevation lever in the MANUAL mode. „ (Helper) insert the boresight telescope into the alignment hole between the TOW launcher bores. „ Press the TOW button. „ Check that the TOW indicator light goes out when the self-test finishes. „ Ensure that "TOW" appears on the status indicator. „ (Helper) align the boresight reticle with the TOW cross on the panel. − Tell gunner to traverse to align the boresight AZ crosshair (vertical) with the vertical line of the TOW cross. − Tell gunner to elevate or depress to align the boresight EL crosshair (horizontal) with the level line of the TOW cross. „ Align the TOW reticle EL crosshair (horizontal) with the level line on the ISU cross of the panel using the TOW boresight screw. „ Traverse to align the TOW reticle with the ISU cross on the panel (see Figure B-52). „ Determine launcher alignment error. − Observe the aiming point of the boresight reticle on the TOW cross of the panel. − Estimate distance (mils) between the boresight reticle and TOW cross using the 2-mil circle of the boresight reticle. „ Adjust the launcher if the error is more than 1 mil. „

z

z

B-42

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-51. ISU reticle aligned with "T"

Figure B-52. Alignment of TOW cross and 2-mil circle

BACKLASH TEST B-55. When the direction of gun elevation is reversed, such as when the gun is depressed after being elevated, the sight may not immediately move with the gun. This slack between the sight and gun is called backlash. Backlash is controlled during boresighting by using a gun-lay ending in elevation. To prevent gunnery errors due to backlash, gunners should also engage targets using a gun lay ending in elevation. This paragraph describes the separate backlash-testing procedures for the ISU and auxiliary sight.

Boresight B-56. Before testing the backlash, boresight the 25-mm gun, ISU day reticle, and auxiliary sight as previously described. Set the weapon, sight, and turret controls the same as at the start of boresighting.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-43

Appendix B

MEASUREMENT OF ISU BACKLASH B-57. If necessary, select armor-piercing-single shot (AP-SS) on the weapon control box. Avoid moving or removing the 25-mm boresight kit until you complete backlash testing. z Insert the 25-mm adapter and boresight the telescope in the 25-mm gun. If necessary, focus the telescope. z Use the gun and turret handwheels to align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel. z Use the gun elevation handwheel to depress the gun until the top of the ISU reticle touches the bottom of the ISU cross on the panel (see Figure B-53).

Figure B-53. Position of ISU reticle below the 25-mm cross z z z z z z

B-44

Elevate the gun to align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel. (Helper) note the aiming point of the boresight reticle. Elevate the gun. Use the gun handwheel to elevate the gun until the bottom of the ISU reticle touches the top of the ISU cross on the panel. Depress the gun to align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel. (Helper) note the aiming point of the boresight reticle. Measure backlash. The helper— „ Notes the location of the boresight reticle and the 25-mm cross. „ Uses the 2-mil circle of the boresight reticle to estimate the distance (in mils) between aiming points observed in elevation and depression. The backlash measures 1.5 mils for the example shown in Figure B-54. „ Notifies unit maintenance if backlash measures more than 2 mils.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-54. Distance between aiming points

Measurement of Auxiliary Sight Backlash B-58. Insert the 25-mm adapter and boresight telescope into the 25-mm gun. z Align the auxiliary sight reticle with the AUX cross on the panel using the turret and gun handwheels. z Use the gun's handwheel to depress the gun until the top of the auxiliary sight reticle touches the bottom of the AUX cross on the panel (see Figure B-55).

Figure B-55. Auxiliary sight reticle positioned below the AUX cross

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-45

Appendix B

z z z

Elevate the gun to align the auxiliary sight reticle with the AUX cross on the panel. (Helper) note the aiming point of the boresight reticle. Use the gun handwheel to elevate the gun until the bottom of the auxiliary sight reticle touches the top of the AUX cross on the panel (see Figure B-56).

Figure B-56. Auxiliary sight reticle positioned above the AUX cross z z z

Depress the gun to align the auxiliary sight reticle with the AUX cross of the panel. (Helper) note the aiming point of the boresight reticle. Measure backlash as described for the ISU.

EQUILIBRATOR TEST B-59. When the ISU reticle is laid on target in power mode, the aiming point should not change when the gunner releases the palm switches. If when he releases the switches the sight and the gun drop, then the weapon might have a faulty equilibrator. This test follows boresighting and the backlash test. Turret and gun select levers remain on POWER during this test. z Using the gunner's handstation, align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel. z Release the palm switches. z Notify unit maintenance if the ISU circle and ISU cross fail to align after the gunner releases the palm switches. Either a faulty equilibrator or a faulty gun elevation brake can cause the weapon to fail the equilibrator test.

DRIFT TEST B-60. Drift is tested after the equilibrator test. Switch settings and vehicle conditions are the same as at the end of the equilibrator test. With stabilization on, the gunner depresses the palm switches. The BFV remains stationary throughout the test, and the 25-mm and coax reticle may drift away from the aiming point no more than 0.1 mil per second. To conduct a 5 second drift test— z Turn stabilization on. Stabilization indicator light should come on. z Press the drift button. Conduct the test within the one minute after you press the drift button. z Using the gunner's handstation, align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel.

B-46

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

z

Start the five-second test. (Helper) use your watch to signal the start of the test. „ (Gunner) press the palm switches, while keeping the handstation in the NEUTRAL position. Stop the test. „ (Helper) signal end of five-second test. „ (Gunner) release palm switches on helper's signal. Score the drift. „ The drift standard is met if the ISU cross of the panel falls on or within the 1-mil circle in the ISU reticle (see Figure B-57). „ Notify unit maintenance if the ISU cross of the panel falls outside the 1-mil circle of the ISU reticle. „

z

z

Figure B-57. Drift within 1-mil circle

BORESIGHT-RETENTION TEST B-61. After the 25-mm gun and ISU are boresighted, sight alignment should change no more than 0.25 mil for vehicle operation up to 50 miles. This holds true only as long as the ambient temperature remains within 54 degrees, plus or minus, from what it was when boresighting occurred. If boresight retention requirements are met, the weapon can be boresighted in the motor pool and the vehicle moved to a fighting position without having to re-boresight before zeroing. B-62. Test vehicles to ensure that they meet boresight retention requirements. Use your most accurate boresighting equipment to test boresight retention. Due to the extent of boresight equipment errors, the retention standard for field-testing is strictly held to 1 mil. B-63. You can measure boresight retention during a tactical road march or any other movement exercise that requires no adjustment of the boresight knobs. You can measure it after moving any distance; you need not travel 50 miles. B-64. Boresight retention testing helps crews learn what conditions typically affect boresight retention on their vehicle. They must know this so they can determine when to re-boresight their weapons. z Obtain a 25-mm boresight kit that passes the kit accuracy test. z Prepare, lay the 25-mm gun, and align the ISU day reticle as described in previously. z Tape the covers of the boresight knobs to prevent accidental movement or adjustment. z Record distance traveled and temperature variations during the vehicle operations. For example, record extreme temperatures and precipitation.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-47

Appendix B

z

Test boresight retention. „ Return vehicle to same position it was in when the weapons were last boresighted. „ Prepare to test boresight retention as previously described. „ Insert the boresight kit into the 25-mm gun. „ Align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel using a gun lay pattern ending in elevation. „ Determine boresight retention. „ The weapon meets the 1-mil field standard if the 25-mm cross on the panel falls on or within the 2-mil circle on the boresight telescope (see Figure B-58). „ The weapon fails to meet the standard if the 25-mm cross on the panel falls outside the 2mil circle on the boresight telescope.

Figure B-58. Boresight retention met

PANEL CONSTRUCTION B-65. The panel can be constructed locally.

Panel Dimensions and Features B-66. The close-in boresight panel is 4 feet by 8 feet. Measure the location of the center of each cross from the lower left corner of the panel (see Table B-2). Table B-2. Distance (in inches) between crosses and lower left hand corner or close-in boresight panel Reference Cross Direction

Right Up

TOW

19 35

ISU

T

41 31

AUX

49 31

63 31

25-mm

64 14

COAX

74 19

B-67. The lines of all crosses, except the "T," measure 1/2 inch long. The 1-inch lines of the "T" are made of steel. They are screwed onto the panel to enhance the image for thermal boresighting. Lines are either

B-48

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

black or orange. Crosses viewed through a black reticle (boresight telescope and auxiliary sight) are orange. The two references, ISU and "T," are black when viewed through the 25-mm reticle (see Table B3). Table B-3. Cross colors and line widths Reference Cross Feature

Color Width (Inches)

TOW

ISU

Orange 1/2

T

Black 1/2

AUX

Black 1

25-mm

Orange 1/2

Orange 1/2

COAX

Orange 1/2

B-68. Table B-4 shows the length of each arm on the crosses. The 8-inch upper and lower lines of the 25mm cross have ranging gaps from 4 to 6 inches from the center of the cross. Table B-4. Length of lines on crosses Reference Cross ARM

TOW

Upper Lower Right Left

8 8 8 8

ISU

T

10 10 4 8

AUX

0 8 4 4

6 6 6 6

25-mm

COAX

8 8 6 6

8 6 6 6

Supplies B-69. If the names of crosses are not painted on, then use 3-inch vinyl stick-on letters to spell TOW, ISU, AUX, 25-mm, and COAX. You will need— z One each—plywood, exterior, 4- by 8-foot sheet, 3/4-inch. z One each—sheet steel, 1-inch wide, 15 1/2-inches long. z Four each—screws, wood, flat-head, size 6, length 3/4 inches. z One each—white paint primer, exterior, quart (oil or alkyd base). z One each—white paint, exterior, quart (latex or oil base). z One each—black paint, exterior, pint (latex or oil base). z One each—orange paint, exterior, pint (latex or oil base). z One each—paint thinner or brush cleaner. z One each—package of medium-grit sandpaper.

Equipment B-70. You will also need the following equipment: z One each—straightedge, 8 feet long. z Two each—C-clamps. z One each—framing square. z One each—tape measure at least 8 feet longer. z Several—paint pads, 6 inch or 8 inch; or paint brushes; or both. z One each—paint brush, 3/8 inch. z One each—router. z One each—bit, router, straight, 1/2 inch. z One each—power drill. z One each—bit, drill, 1/4 inch. z One each—jigsaw. z One each—pencil.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-49

Appendix B

Procedures B-71. If you can measure, paint, and use a jigsaw, router, and drill, then you can construct the panel yourself. Use a router to cut grooves for the crosses. This simplifies painting them, because all you have to do is to paint in the grooves: z Sand the front, back, and edge of the plywood to remove dirt and grease. z Mark the words "LOW, LEFT" on the lower left-hand corner of the panel. z To mark the TOW cross, use a pencil and the 8-foot long straightedge (see Figure B-59). „ Mark 19 inches to the right "A" of the lower left edge of the panel. (Figure B-59 shows that the TOW cross is 19 inches from the left edge of the panel.). „ Mark 19 inches to the right "B" of the upper left edge of the panel. „ Draw a line connecting the two marks made at "A" and "B". „ Mark (C) 35 inches up from the bottom edge of panel (along 8-foot side). „ Mark (D) 35 inches up from the lower right edge of the panel at "D". „ Draw a line connecting the two marks made at "C" and "D". „ Mark "E," "F," "G," and "H" at a distance of 8 inches from the center of the cross formed by the lines drawn. Table B-4 shows the length of each arm. z Mark the ISU, AUX, 25-mm, and COAX crosses as follows: „ Using the data from the RIGHT direction row of Table B-2, mark the vertical lines of the crosses as previously described for the TOW cross. „ Using the data from the UP direction row of Table B-2, mark the horizontal lines of the crosses as previously described for the TOW cross. „ Mark the length of each arm of each cross using the data from Table B-4. z Rout each cross as follows: „ Set the router's depth shallow, at either 1/32 inch or 3/64 inch. This keeps the router from cutting through the first layer of the plywood. „ Clamp the straightedge to the wood to make a jig (guide) for the router. „ Use the router to cut grooves between the tick marks for the lines of the cross. z Apply a coat of primer to the front, back, and edge of the panel. Avoid letting the paint build up in the grooves. Let the primer dry. z Apply a coat of white paint to the entire panel. Let the paint dry.

B-50

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-59. Position of TOW cross z z

z

z

Paint the crosses using a 3/8-inch paintbrush and colors described in Table B-3. Let this paint dry also. Make the "T" as follows: „ Use a jigsaw and cut the steel strip into two sections, one 8 inches long and the other 7 1/2inches long. „ In each section, drill a 1/4-inch hole 1 1/2 inches from each end, so each section will have two holes in it. „ Apply a coat of primer to each section. Let the primer dry. „ Apply a coat of black paint to each section. Let the paint dry. Mount the "T" as follows: „ Lay a straight edge along the right arm of the ISU cross. „ Start at the edge of the right arm and draw a 9-inch line along the straightedge. „ Align the 8-inch strip of steel on the line. The left edge of the strip must touch the right edge of the right arm of the ISU cross. „ Mount the strip using two wood screws. „ Center the 7 1/2-inch strip crossways beneath the 8-inch strip to form the letter "T". „ Mount the 7 1/2-inch strip using two more wood screws. Label the crosses using vinyl letters and numbers. Apply labels as shown in Figure B-43.

SECTION III – PRE-FIRE CHECKS B-72. Before conducting live fire, the crew performs pre-fire checks. z The crew uses a checklist similar to that shown in Table B-5 and to the turret preventative maintenance checks and services (PMCS) outlined in TM 9-2350-252-10-2 or TM 9-2350-28410-2 to reduce vehicle problems on the firing range. z Bradley A3 crews can make a pre-fire checklist using the example shown in Table B-6 on page B-52 and Table B-7 on page B-53; and in the PMCS provided in TM 9-2350-294-10-2-1.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-51

Appendix B

PRE-FIRE CHECKLIST FOR ODS AND BELOW Table B-5. Example format for pre-fire checklist GNR

BC

STEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

24 25 26 27

GUNNER’S CHECKS Ensure the 25-mm gun is cleared. Ensure that before-operation PMCS has been completed on the hull and the turret. Ensure the barrel is locked in (grab it and twist, remove the muzzle brake plug). Ensure the receiver is locked in, and that the breech is properly lubricated. Ensure the bolt and track are lubricated, and that the track hook is locked. Ensure the bolt is locked in sear. Ensure the manual SAFE is on. Verify the timing and install the feeder. Ensure the BPI is locked in sear. Ensure the straight drive shaft is locked in. Ensure the power cable is properly attached and securely fastened. Ensure the feeder handle locks in place without resistance. Ensure the AP and HE feed and link eject-chutes are secure (front, back, top and bottom). Ensure the sear retractor is in the outmost position (flush with receiver). Ensure the feed shaft stops neither protrude nor bend. Ensure the feed-select solenoid operates manually. Manually cycle the 25-mm gun in the AP and HE. Ensure that the feed-select solenoid operates properly in power mode (select AP and HE SS, LO, HI). Power cycle the 25-mm gun AP and HE. Use the gunner’s, VCs and manual handwheel triggers. Ensure the gun fan activates when you squeeze each trigger. Manually check the turrets ability to elevate, depress, and traverse. Elevate and traverse the gun. Traverse the turret 360 degrees in normal and fast turret modes. Raise and lower the TOW launcher. Ensure the launcher elevates and depresses properly. Ensure that the ISU operates properly: a. Clean the optics (the eyepieces and outside lens). b. Ensure the correct reticle appears when you select AP, HE, TOW, and the coax. c. Ensure the superelevation changes as you rotate the range-select knob. d. Ensure the ammunition and range settings are correct. e. Ensure you can focus the thermal sight in high magnification. f. Ensure the defogger is operating. Ensure you can null the drift out of the system. Boresight the 25-mm gun, the coax, the TOW, the auxiliary sight, and the LRF, as required. Ensure chemical, biological, radiological, nuclear (CBRN) operates. Ensure the 25-mm’s ready boxes upload with no more than two rounds above the forwarder. VEHICLE COMMANDER CHECKS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

B-52

Ensure the coax is cleared and that the barrel is securely locked in the receiver. Ensure the azimuth (AZ) and elevation (EL) knobs turn freely. Install the coax. Ensure that it locks with the front and rear pins. Ensure the coax feed chute fastens at both ends. Charge the coax. Check the chamber and manually ride the bolt forward. Power cycle the coax from the VC’s, gunners, and manual handwheel triggers. Charge the coax ready box and place it on SAFE. Ensure the coax ready box is on board. Check communications. a. Ensure the red, yellow, and green flags are on board. b. Conduct radio checks: Administration net. Firing net.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

BRADLEY A3 GUNNER’S PRE-FIRE CHECKLIST Table B-6. Example format for Bradley A3 gunner’s pre-fire checklist, part 1 GNR

STEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

3 September 2009

GUNNER’S CHECKS Ensure the pre-operational PMCS has been completed on the hull and turret. Ensure the receiver is locked in. Ensure the barrel is locked in (grab it and twist, remove the muzzle brake plug). Ensure the bolt and track are lubricated and locked in the receiver. Ensure the bolt is locked in sear. Ensure the manual safe is on. Ensure the BPI is locked in sear. Ensure the straight drive shaft is locked in. Ensure the AP and HE quick-release link guides are locked in (top and bottom). Ensure the AP and HE feed and link eject-chutes are secured (front, back, top and bottom). Ensure the manual sear retractor is out (flush with receiver). Ensure the feed shaft stops neither protrude nor bend. Ensure the weapon’s power cable is properly attached and securely fastened. Ensure the feeder handle locks in place. Ensure the feed select-solenoid operates properly in the manual mode. Ensure the sear light is on, but not flashing. Manually cycle the 25-mm gun in the AP and HE. Ensure the feed-select solenoid operates properly in power mode (select AP and HE SS, LO, HI). Power cycle the 25-mm gun AP and HE. Use the GHS and manual handwheel triggers. Ensure that the fans activate (and operate for about 75 seconds) after one trigger pull. In the power mode, using the GHS, elevate and depress the gun, and traverse the turret. Raise and lower the TOW launcher. Check the SCB to ensure the TOW launcher UP indicator lamp lights. Check with the driver to ensure the launcher UP indicator lamp lights up on his instrument panel. Adjust the IBAS binocular display’s brightness and contrast. Adjust the IBAS day TV (DTV) focus in WFOV and NFOV. Ensure the DVO is focused. Adjust the FLIR’s focus, gain, and level in WFOV and NFOV. Adjust and ensure symbology is present in the gunner’s binocular display, with no flashing “M”. Select the FLIR’s polarity and zoom. Ensure all of the reticles for the DTV, FLIR, and DVO are adjusted for the desire brightness. Ensure the TAS is nulled and aligned.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-53

Appendix B

BRADLEY A3 COMMANDER’S PRE-FIRE CHECKLIST Table B-7. Example format for Bradley A3 commander’s pre-fire checklist, part 2 CDR

STEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21

COMMANDER’S CHECKS Ensure the front and rear mounting pins are seated properly. Ensure the coax feed chute is fastened at both ends. Charge the coax and check the chamber for obstructions. Power cycle the coax from the GHS, CHS, and manual handwheel triggers, manually riding the bolt forward. Charge the coax and place it on SAFE. Ensure the coax ready box is uploaded. Ensure all indicators and displays operate by performing a lamp test. Ensure the system built-in test is 100% complete as indicated on the CTD. Acknowledge all CTD pop-up messages and check the malfunction (MAL) advisory menu for failure messages. Ensure the CIV is unstowed. Select CIV video on the commander’s RBD. Move the CIV in elevation and depression and traverse under control of the CHS. Ensure the commander’s RBD is adjusted for FLIR and day TV for all models of operation using the CSCP. Adjust and ensure that symbology is present in the CIV binocular display. Ensure the CIV drift is nulled out. Ensure IBAS video is selectable on the commander’s RBD. Ensure that the commander’s override symbology is present when the commander elevates or depresses the gun and traverse the turret using the CHS. Ensure the ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS are set to the days-estimated values. Update it if significant weather occurs or if the temperature changes. Ensure all weapon systems are boresighted IAW with the instructions provided in the boresight menu on the CTD. Ensure the RED and GREEN range flags are displayed. Ensure the battlecarry (range ammo and weapon) is selected. Digital communication setup. Ensure the— z FFCS initial setup follows unit SOP. z MASTER CONTROL STATION setup follows unit SOP. z EPLRS is set up for operation. z SINCGARS is set up for operation. z FBCB2 is green on COMMS and PLGR.

SECTION IV – ZEROING PROCEDURES B-73. Zeroing the 25-mm gun allows the gunner to confirm the weapon system’s boresight and to adjust the sight reticle relative to the impact of the round. Whereas boresighting aligns the ISU LOS and the weapon systems point of aim, zeroing allows finer alignment (TM 9-2350-252-10-2, TM 9-2350-284-10-2, and TM 9-2350-294-10-2).

PROCEDURES FOR ZEROING THE 25-MM, ODS, AND BELOW B-74. After boresighting the 25-mm gun, zero it manually. Zero the Bradley on a level surface. Zero the 25-mm gun at 1,200 meters and the coax at 800 meters. Use the most accurate ammunition available. Avoid switching between HE and AP ammunition, because that changes superelevation in the ISU. (If any problems with superelevation occur during firing, notify unit maintenance.) Both the gunner and the VC

B-54

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

must observe the strike of the round through their respective primary sights. To fire a round, lay the reticle on the target and squeeze the manual trigger switch. If the round strikes within the center of the reticle circle, the 25-mm gun is zeroed. If the round does not strike within the center of the reticle circle, adjust the boresight control knobs to align the reticle with the round impact. Then, re-lay the reticle and fire another round. Repeat this procedure until either the 25-mm gun is zeroed or three rounds are fired. If the three rounds are fired before the gun is zeroed the gun, then the Master Gunner must check the system to determine if the problem is mechanical. After zeroing the 25-mm gun to the daysight, leave the gun aimed at the same point on the target. The crew will adjust the nightsight and auxiliary sight reticles to the daysight’s point of aim. This does not require the crew to fire any more zeroing rounds. Note. After zeroing, record the boresight control knob numbers. Then, should something jostle the weapon boresight control knobs, the crew can simply reset them.

PROCEDURES FOR ZEROING THE COAX, ODS, AND BELOW B-75. The gunner and VC should work together to zero the coax. Fire a short burst of 10 to 15 rounds and use your primary sight to observe the impact of the tracer. The VC watches through his sight extension. After the tracer impacts, the VC moves the AZ and EL knobs to adjust the impact to the reticle aiming point. Repeat this procedure until the coax is zeroed. Note. After zeroing, Bradley Operation Desert Storm (ODS) crews must ensure that they realign the reticles of the laser range finder (LRF) and of the gun.

PROCEDURES FOR ZEROING, A3 ONLY B-76. Zero the Bradley A3 on a level surface. Zero the 25-mm to a target at 1,200 meters and the coax to a target at 800 meters in front of and at the same elevation as the vehicle. Once the vehicle is zeroed, the vehicle’s computer will remember the zero until someone changes it or until the system suffers a catastrophic memory loss. The Bradley A3 crew can save their calculations in vehicle records or commander notes. Then, to avoid having to boresight and zero again in the future, they can simply verify their calculations before range operations. Note. If procedures in this manual differ from CTD procedures, follow the CTD procedures.

Zero IBAS to 25-MM Gun B-77. To zero the gun in the daytime, refer to the A3 zero screens on the CTD. z If the crew cannot zero the 25-mm gun within three rounds, notify the Master Gunner. z Do not press CONTINUE. This would close the 25-mm screen, which would in turn cause the A3 system to move to the next screen during zeroing procedures, leaving the 25-mm improperly zeroed. „ Step 1. Use the direct-view optics (DVO) (preferred) or the TV or forward looking, infrared (FLIR) (using FLIR or TV switch on the gunner’s handstation (GHS) to select TV or FLIR) for best viewing. „ Step 2. Select HI MAG (narrow field of view [NFOV]) using the HI/LO switch on the GHS. „ Step 3. Center the Target Acquisition System (TAS) reticle on the target using the traverse and elevation (T&E) handwheels. „ Step 4. Range target using the LRF, or enter range manually on the Gunner’s Sight Control Panel (GSCP). „ Step 5. Repeat Step 3 if required.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-55

Appendix B

Step 6. Cycle a ghost round. Step 7. Have the commander observe the impact of the round. „ Step 8. Fire one tracer round at the target. „ Step 9. Ensure the TAS reticle still aligns with the zero target. Re-aim as needed. „ Step 10. Press AIM POINT. „ Step 11. Enter the TAS reticle at the impact point using the CHS or the GHS. „ Step 12. Press CALCULATE. „ Step 13. To use the new values, press SAVE. Repeat Steps 7 through 14 until you have zeroed the 25-mm gun or until you have fired three rounds. „ Step 14. Center the TAS reticle on the target using the T&E handwheels. Zero Auxiliary Sight to 25mm. To verify the zero using the backup sight (AUX), follow the steps shown below. If you cannot align the auxiliary sight to the 25mm within two rounds, notify the unit Master Gunner. „ Step 1. Verify that the TAS reticle aligns with the zero target. „ Step 2. Check the backup sight reticle’s center vertical line aligns with the target. (To move reticle in AZ, loosen horizontal adjustment lockscrew and turn horizontal adjustment screw. Use screwdriver). „ Step 3. Align reticle so that the AP range line aligns with the target at the appropriate range. (To move reticle in elevation, loosen locknut on elevation lever and adjust thumbscrews. Use wrench and socket). „ Step 4. Verify that the TAS reticle and the AUX reticle range line are both on target. „ Step 5. Have commander observe round impact point. „ Step 6. Fire one confirmation tracer round at the zero target. „ Step 7. If round does not hit the target, verify TAS reticle is center mass of zero target. Zero Auxiliary Sight to Coax. To zero the coax, use the checklist shown below. „ Step 1. Ideally, use the DVO. If you use the TV FLIR, do so only at night. „ Step 2. Select HI MAG (NFOV) using the HI/LO switch on the GHS. „ Step 3. Using the T&E handwheels, center the AUX sight on the target. Use the HE range line (the outer, broken range lines) for the range displayed in the DVO (800-meter target). „ Step 4. Range the target using the LRF or manually index it on the GSCP. „ Step 5. Using the T&E handwheels, center the AUX sight on the target using the HE range lines for the range displayed in the DVO (800 meters). Make the following adjustments with the coax knobs, not with the AUX sight. „ Step 6. Have the commander observe the round impact. „ Step 7. Fire one burst of 10 to 15 rounds at the target. „ Step 8. Open the coax access doors. Manually move the coax AZ and EL knobs. This will move the strike of the rounds to center mass of the coax target. „ Step 9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 until you zero the coax. If you cannot zero the coax in three bursts, notify the unit Master Gunner. Zero Coax to TAS. To zero the coax to the TAS, use the checklist shown below. „ Step 1. Ensure that the AUX reticle still aligns with the zero target. Re-aim as needed. „ Step 2. Press AIM POINT. „ Step 3. Center the TAS reticle on the point of round impact using the CHS or the GHS. „ Step 4. Press CALCULATE. „ Step 5. To use the new values, press SAVE. „ Step 6. Verify the coax zero through the TAS by firing a burst at the zero target. „ „

z

z

z

z

B-56

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

CONFIRMATION B-78. The crew zeroes during Gunnery Table (GT) IV, Basic Main Gun. They confirm the zero during GT V, Basic Crew Practice, and GT VI, Basic Crew Qualification. Confirming the zero allows them to ensure the vehicle's weapon systems have retained their zero. Normally, confirmation only requires firing one or two rounds. During confirmation, the crew might need to make some adjustments. If so, they follow the steps previously described. Environmental parameters and TAS alignment are critical to accuracy of the Bradley A3 weapon system. The crew aligns the TAS and adjusts for applicable environmental parameters IAW TM 9-2350-294-10-2-1.

DANGER AFTER FIRING, ENSURE ALL WEAPONS ARE CLEAR.

SECTION V – BRADLEY WEAPONS SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS B-79. Malfunctions cost a lot of firing time on BFV ranges. Crew error causes most malfunctions. Crews must know the possible reasons for a typical malfunction to occur, this way they can take the necessary steps to correct the malfunction(s) and continue with training. As a precaution, the crew performs standard misfire procedures before correcting any error. If they are not sure that the 25mm is clear, they can use the cleaning rod to ensure that it is clear.

DANGER WHEN A MALFUNCTION OCCURS, ALWAYS PERFORM MISFIRE PROCEDURES BEFORE TAKING ANY OTHER CORRECTIVE ACTION.

25-MM GUN B-80. If none of these steps corrects the malfunction, notify the Master Gunner or maintenance personnel. z If the gun did not cycle, check the following: „ Is the ARM-SAFE-RESET switch on SAFE? „ Is the ammunition selected? z If the gun cycled to misfire, check the following: „ Is the manual safety switch set to SAFE? „ Is the tension released from the ammunition belt? „ Is the gun out of ammunition? z If the gun cycled, but not to SEAR or MISFIRE, check for the following. Then, use the hand crank to manually cycle the gun back to SEAR, and try again: „ Is the tension released from the ammunition belt? „ Is the sear retractor out? „ Is the straight drive shaft down? z If you cannot clear a weapons malfunction IAW the TM, then you must clear it by removing the feeder and physically inspecting the chamber for unfired ammunition. z If the straight drive shaft has dropped after a malfunction, remove the feeder from the receiver and visually check the weapon for unfired ammunition. z The 25-mm ammunition can double feed if the protective nose caps are broken, cracked, or missing; or if a weapon stoppage occurs and is cleared improperly.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-57

Appendix B

M240C 7.62-MM COAXIAL MACHINE GUN B-81. If none of these steps corrects the malfunction, notify the Master Gunner or maintenance personnel. z If the bolt did not go forward, check the following: „ Is the ARM-SAFE-RESET switch set to SAFE? „ Is the manual safety switch set to SAFE? „ Is the LO AMMO OVRD light flashing? „ Is the coax solenoid plug connected? „ Is the ammunition selected? z If the bolt did go forward, check the following: „ Is the ammunition belt seated in the feed tray? „ Is there a round or casing stuck in the chamber? „ Is the machine gun out of ammunition?

M257 SMOKE GRENADES B-82. When smoke grenades fail to launch, perform immediate action, then— z Use the vehicle intercom system to tell the driver to move the vehicle to a safe area. Ensure the driver moves it at least 125 meters from the nearest vehicle, building, person, or equipment. z Move the grenade launch switch to ON. z Fire the smoke grenades. z Look for the smoke through the periscopes. z Move the smoke grenade-launcher switch to OFF. z Open the commander’s hatch cover. z Check the smoke grenade launcher for misfired smoke grenades. z Have helpers leave the vehicle. z Move the turret power switch to OFF. z Move the master power switch to OFF. z Remove the smoke grenades from the side where the misfire occurred. z Tell the gunner that the smoke launchers are clear; have helpers clear the turret area. z Move the smoke grenades to a well-marked spot at least 200 meters from the nearest vehicle, person, or equipment. z Notify the chain of command of the exact location, type, and number of smoke grenades that malfunctioned. z Notify unit maintenance that the M257 smoke grenade launchers on the vehicle malfunctioned.

TURRET DRIVE B-83. If none of these steps corrects the malfunction, notify the Master Gunner or maintenance personnel. z If the turret will not traverse, check the following: „ Is the turret travel lock locked? „ Is the drive motor in manual? „ Is the turret drive on? If so, turn it off for 30 seconds, then back on. z If the gun will not elevate or depress, check the following: „ Is the drive motor in manual? „ Is the turret drive on? If so, turn it off for 30 seconds, then back on.

B-58

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

COMMUNICATIONS B-84. If you lose communications, check the following: z Is the master control station power light on? z Are the radio cable connections loose? z Has the built-in test (BIT) failed on the master control station? z Is the combat vehicle crewman (CVC) cord disconnected? z Does the VIC1 Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) display a green status?

SECTION VI – POST-FIRE CHECKS B-85. After firing, the crew clears all weapon systems and removes all ammunition residue from the exterior of the vehicle. Leaders verify that crews clear all weapon systems IAW AR 385-63. On training ranges, range safety officers verify that crews have cleared all weapon systems. Post-fire checks prevent many accidents.

SECTION VII – BFV RANGE DETERMINATION B-86. Range determination greatly affects target engagement. Range-determination errors cause more firstround misses than do deflection errors. Those that cause the first round to fly beyond the target present the greatest challenge, because observing and adjusting from a round that lands out of sight is hard. The VC bears the main responsibility for determining range. He has more ways to do so than do other crew members. Also, he knows more than they do about the terrain and tactical situation.

BFV LASER RANGE FINDER B-87. Eye-safe laser range finder (ELRF) (BFV A2 ODS and BFV A3). The ELRF allows the commander or gunner to rapidly and accurately determine the target range. The four-digit range display is in 5-meter increments from 190 to 9,990 meters plus or minus 10 meters. See Figure B-60 through Figure B-62 for examples of BFV sight reticles.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-59

Appendix B

Figure B-60. 25-mm sight reticle (M2/M3)

Figure B-61. 25-mm sight reticle (ODS)

B-60

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-62. BFVA3 reticle selection

ISU HORIZONTAL RANGING STADIA (CHOKE SIGHT) B-88. The ISU has a choke sight that can be used to estimate the range to BMP-type targets, that is, any target that measures 1.8 meters high. Since the hull of a BMP is a standard hull that is used on various vehicles throughout the world, the ranging stadia can be used for accurately ranging to these different vehicles (see Figure B-63). z To use the choke sight, the gunner moves the turret until the ranging stadia line appear to touch the vehicle in the following manner: z Align the horizontal line to the bottom (track) of the target vehicle. z Move the turret horizontally along the target until the top of the hull appears to touch the stadia line. The range is read from the stadia line at the point where the top of the hull touches. If this point is between the tick marks, estimation must be made, and the range is then indexed into the ISU. Then, the gunner or commander should re-lay the reticle on the target. z The choke sight can be used to estimate range to targets in turret-down positions. The gunner aligns the bottom horizontal line to the bottom of the target and aligns the stadia line until the top of the target appears to touch the lines. The gunner reads this range and divides that number in half. This technique is less accurate than ranging a fully exposed target. Note. Choke only the hull, not the whole vehicle. Do not choke weapons or lights mounted on top of the turret.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-61

Appendix B

Figure B-63. Choking a hull-down vehicle

ISU RETICLE LEAD LINE AND MIL RELATION B-89. Lead lines of the reticle can be used to determine the range to a target, since each lead line is 2.5 mils from the center of the reticle. First, the gunner must classify the target as a frontal or a flank view. (see Figure B-64). This is accomplished by comparing the appearance of the front and side of the vehicle. Figure B-65 illustrates the relative amount of front and side that can be seen as a BMP rotates from a full front view (0 degrees) to a full flank view (90 degrees).

B-62

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-64. Frontal and flank views of a BMP

Figure B-65. Full frontal and full flank views of a BMP

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-63

Appendix B

z

Accurate measurement of vehicle width in mils is required when determining range with the 25mm gun reticle. The BFV reticle provides greater magnification and smaller graduated markings on the reticle. The gunner can use the 25-mm gun reticle for range determination by using the reference markings, which measure 2, 2.5, 3, and 5 mils.

Note. No zoom applies for the BFVA3 gun reticle.) z

z z z

Determining the critical target range is based on the size of the target. Size of the target is estimated using the mil-relation formula (see page 7-10 for a discussion of how to determine the mil relation). When firing armor-piercing discarding sabot with tracer (APDS-T), 1,400 meters is the maximum range for an index setting of 12. The recommended maximum engagement range for APDS-T is 2,000 meters. Maximum engagement range determination for the TOW is critical. Another vehicle can provide the range or the 25-mm or coax reticle can be used. Using the 25-mm reticle, the sight picture for TOW when the target is at the maximum engagement range (3,750 meters) is as shown in Figure B-66.

Figure B-66. Determine TOW maximum engagement range

B-64

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Note. On ODS vehicles, the ELRF cannot be used with the TOW selected. If the ELRF must be used to determine range to the TOW target, the crew uses the ELRF with 25mm or 7.62mm selected. After determining the range, the crew selects the TOW. On Bradley A3 vehicles, the gunner or VC can use the ELRF with the TOW selected.

BFVA3 IBAS/CIV RETICLE AND HORIZONTAL RANGING STADIA B-90. The BFVA3 IBAS reticle and CIV reticle have the capability to select the default reticle, gun reticle, air defense reticle, and horizontal ranging stadia through the CTD (see Figure B-67). z To estimate the range to a BMP-type target with the BFVA3 horizontal ranging stadia, refer to horizontal ranging stadia on page 7-9. z To estimate the range to a BMP-type target with the aid of the BFVA3 gun reticle, see the reticle lead line and mil relation in Table 7-4 on page 7-13. Note. On both the IBAS and CIV, the gun reticle, air defense reticle, and horizontal ranging stadia only display in high magnification of the Day TV and FLIR. On the IBAS, the DVO sight will display the selected reticle in both high and low magnification (IBAS only). z

*The BFVA3 default reticle lead lines can be used to determine the range to a target by using the same technique discussed in TM 9-2350-252-10-2. The gunner or commander can use the default reticle for range determination by using the reference markings (see Figure B-67). These reference marks measure 1.2, 1.3, 2.5, and 5 mils (see Figure B-68). Reference marks 13.72 and 12.38 are not used for this technique.

Figure B-67. BFVA3 default reticle lead line and mil relation

31 May 2010

FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21, C1

B-65

Appendix B

TARGET 1

TARGET 2

Figure B-68. Determine ranges for a BMP at target 1 (1,400 meters) and target 2 (1,800 meters) Note. For a quick reference to determine range of threat vehicles, see Table 7-4 (mil relation for various targets) on page 7-13. z

B-66

Using the BFVA3 default reticle, the sight picture for TOW when the target is at the maximum engagement range (3,750 meters) is shown in Figure B-69.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1

31 May 2010

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Figure B-69. Determine TOW maximum engagement range for a BFVA3 default reticle

BACKUP SIGHT (AUXILIARY SIGHT) B-91. The backup sight, known as the auxiliary (aux) sight, is used when the ISU/IBAS is not operational or turret power has failed. The auxiliary sight has stadia lines for range determination and application of the correct superelevation based on range. There are stadia lines for APDS-T and high-explosive incendiary with tracer (HEI-T) ammunition. This system is used to determine the range and to engage the frontal or flank view of a BMP. z The auxiliary sight has two range scales. The HE scale is on the left side of the reticle and is represented by broken lines that extend to 3,200 meters. The AP scale is on the right side represented by a solid line that extends to 3,400 meters (see Figure B-70). The numbers 4 and 6 represent 400 meters and 600 meters, respectively. The HE range scale continues to 32 (not shown in figure).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-67

Appendix B

z

z

The range to a flank target is determined by elevating the gun until both the front and rear of the target appears to be touching the AP stadia lines, as shown in Figure B-70. The range to a flank HE target is choked in the same manner, using the HE lines. To determine the range to a frontal target, the gunner uses the half stadia method of aligning the center vertical ranging lines with one side of the target and aligns the appropriate ammunition stadia line on either side of the target (see Figure B-70). When using the coax, the gunner uses the HE stadia lines.

Figure B-70. Determine range using the auxiliary sight

B-68

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

SECTION VIII – TOW LIMITATIONS B-92. Some conditions limit the TOW's firing and engagement capabilities and effectiveness. The following is a consolidated list of the TOW’s limitations: z Firing over water. The following should be considered when employing the TOW over water: „ Firing across bodies of water wider than 1,100 meters can reduce the range of the TOW. Signals traveling through the command-link wires short out when a large amount of the wire falls in the water. At ranges less than 1,100 meters, submersion of the wire does not affect missile range. „ A TOW position should sit as high above and as far back from the water as the tactical situation will allow. As soon as the vehicle occupies the position, the commander should analyze the sector to determine if water will affect the employment of the TOW. z Firing over electrical wires. Contact between the command-link wires and a live high-voltage power line can kill or injure personnel, cause a loss of control of the missile, and damage launcher electronics. z Firing in windy conditions. Gusty, flanking, or quartering winds can move the missile around during flight. As long as the crosshairs remain on the center mass of the target, the weapon system will compensate for wind effects. z Firing through smoke. For the firer to maintain a proper sight picture, he must be able to see the target. Smoke can obscure the line of sight and hide the target. TOW missiles have a xenon beacon for tracking. In addition to the xenon beacon, TOW 2, TOW 2A, and TOW 2B missiles also have a thermal beacon. This thermal beacon allows the gunner to track through most smoke obscuration. When a target disappears into a smoke cloud, the firer should hold a smooth tracking rate so that the missile will still be on target. z Firing through area fires. The firer follows the same visibility and target-tracking instructions that apply to firing through smoke. The firer should also avoid firing through or over fire if he thinks that the fire could touch the wires before missile impact. A fire can burn through the command-link wire, causing the firer to lose control of the missile.

Precautions B-93. Soldiers need to take the following precautions: z Back-Blast. The TOW weapon system has a back-blast area that extends 75 meters to the rear of the vehicle in a 90-degree cone (see Figure B-71). This area comprises both a 50-meter danger zone and a 25-meter caution zone. The vehicle moves so that no personnel, unarmored vehicles, or obstructions (such as walls, embankments, or large trees) remain in the back-blast area for its missile. „ Danger zone. Flying debris can cause serious injury or damage equipment. Keep all personnel and equipment out of the back-blast area. „ Caution zone. In all training situations, keep all personnel and equipment clear of the caution zone.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

B-69

Appendix B

Figure B-71. TOW back-blast area z

z

B-70

Firing. Do not fire a damaged encased missile such as one with large dents or cracks in the launch container. If the missile has minor bending of the end rings only, this is not serious, and can be fired without danger. Make sure the litmus in the humidity indicator is blue-pink indicates possible degradation in missile condition. If this happens in a training environment, return the missile to the supply point. If it happens during combat, you can fire the missiles. Handling Precautions. The electrolyte in the emergency battery assembly is highly corrosive. If the battery sustains damage, electrolytes might leak out and cause serious injury, especially to the eyes. „ Report all duds or defective missiles to an explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) team. „ In training, wait 30 minutes before removing a misfired missile from the launcher. (TM 9-2350-252-10-2, TM 9-2350-284-10-2, TM 9-2350-284-10-2-1, and TM 9-2350-294-102-1 provide more information.) „ The command link wires are strong. Move carefully through areas where missiles were fired. „ Do not move or handle duds or defective missiles except to remove a misfire from the launcher and place it a safe distance from the vehicle (200 meters).

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Appendix C

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation The success of U.S. forces on the battlefield depends on the effective use of the appropriate weapons systems against threat targets. Appendix C discusses the procedures for employing the weapon systems on the light trucks that are available within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT). This includes the sights available for each weapon system, pre-fire checks, zeroing, malfunctions, sight offsets, postfire checks, and the implementation of the Long-Range Advanced Scout Surveillance System (LRAS3).

Contents Section I – Weapons Sights Available..... C-1 AN/PEQ-2A Target Pointer/Illuminator/Aiming Light .......... C-2 AN/PAQ-4C Aiming Light ................... C-3 M145 Machine Gun Optic ................... C-3 AN/PVS-4 Individual Served Night Vision Weapon Sight .......................... C-4 AN/TVS-5A Crew-Served Night Vision Weapon Sight .......................... C-5 AN/PAS-13B (V)2 MWTS) and (V)3 HWTS ................................................. C-7 Section II – Pre-fire Checks .................... C-15 Section III – Zeroing ................................ C-15 M249 Squadron Automatic Weapon . C-16 M240B Machine Gun ........................ C-17 M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun ...... C-20 MK19 Grenade Machine Gun ........... C-22

Section IV – Weapon System Malfunctions ............................................C-23 M249 5.56-mm Squad Automatic Weapon ............................................C-23 M240B 7.62-mm Machine Gun .........C-24 M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun ......C-24 MK19 Machine Gun ..........................C-24 Communications ...............................C-25 Section V – Sight Offset Information .....C-25 Borelight Dry-Zero Procedure ...........C-25 Sight Offsets for Crew-Served Weapons ..........................................C-30 Section VI – Post-fire Checks .................C-33 Section VII – Long-Range Advanced Scout Surveillance System.....................C-33 Sight Sensor Reticles .......................C-33 Boresighting ......................................C-35

SECTION I – WEAPONS SIGHTS AVAILABLE C-1. This section illustrates the sights that are available for each weapon system. This section includes information on the most commonly used optics for crew-served weapons. The charts included in this section outline which sights can be used with each weapon and describe their capabilities. This list is not all-inclusive; it is not meant to replace the information in the applicable technical manuals (TM) (see Figure C-1).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-1

Appendix C

Figure C-1. Machine gun to night vision sight matrix

AN/PEQ-2A TARGET POINTER/ILLUMINATOR/AIMING LIGHT C-2. Target pointer/illuminator/aiming light (TPIAL) is a laser sight for use on rifles fitted with a Picatinny rail system. The AN/PEQ-2A has two infrared laser emitters–one narrow beam used for aiming the rifle, and one wide beam used for illuminating targets, like a flashlight. The beams can only be seen through night vision goggles. Each beam can be zeroed independently, and the illuminator’s radius is adjustable. The two lasers are tied into one six-mode switch, as shown in Figure C-2.

Figure C-2. AN/PEQ-2A

C-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

AN/PAQ-4C AIMING LIGHT C-3. This is used in conjunction with night vision goggles to direct weapon fire at night, enables highly accurate laser aiming in darkness at maximum firing distances. The AN/PAQ-4 provides an invisible, continuous infrared beam along the weapon’s line of fire, highlighting the point of impact on the target (see Figure C-3).

Figure C-3. AN/PAQ-4C

M145 MACHINE GUN OPTIC C-4. This is a 3.4x28 scope (see Figure C-4). A tritium-illuminated reticle provides for sighting in normal and low-light conditions. The scope itself is nitrogen-purged to prevent fogging and is covered with an armored coating of rubber. It can be mounted to a variety of light machine guns using standard rail mounts. The M145 Machine Gun Optic is commonly mounted on M240 and M249 machine guns. The M145 is unusual when compared with other optical sights in use with the U.S. military in that ballistic compensation is in the reticle, rather than in the mount. Figure C-5 shows the ballistic reticle of the M145 MGO. The reticle is illuminated by a battery-powered LED with varying intensity settings. The mount fits directly to any MIL-STD-1913 Picatinny rail or receiver. The optic remains zeroed despite repeated removal from and reattachment to the weapon. The M145 is extremely resistant to shock and water immersion and has an antireflection device and rubber lens caps. For low-light operations, the reticle can be illuminated to show the 300-, 500-, 700-, and 800-meter aiming marks as shown in Figure C-6. The sight is equipped with variable intensity LED illumination of the reticle. It has 10 positions—one OFF position and 9 positions for different reticle intensity settings.

Figure C-4. M145 machine gun optic (MGO)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-3

Appendix C

Figure C-5. M14 MGO reticle

Figure C-6. M145 MGO illuminated reticle

AN/PVS-4 INDIVIDUAL SERVED NIGHT VISION WEAPON SIGHT C-5. The AN/PVS-4 is a portable, battery-operated, second-generation image intensification device used for observation and aimed fire of weapons at night designed for the 7.62-mm machine gun (see Figure C-7). Figure C-8 provides an example of the AN/PVS-4 reticle.

C-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

Figure C-7. AN/PVS-4

Figure C-8. AN/PVS-4 reticle

AN/TVS-5A CREW-SERVED NIGHT VISION WEAPON SIGHT C-6. The AN/TVS-5A is a portable, battery-operated; Generation Three Image Intensifying (GEN III I2) device used for observation and aimed fire of weapons at night (see Figure C-9). The AN/TVS-5A can be tripod mounted for surveillance; however, it is generally used as a crew-served weapon sight. The AN/TVS-5A is used with the M2 caliber .50 and the MK19 40-mm machine guns. The AN/TVS-5 has two different reticles based upon the sight’s date of manufacture. The older style reticle is a ballistic reticle for the M2 HB only (see Figure C-10). The newer style reticle is a ballistic reticle for the M2 HB and the MK19 (see Figure C-11).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-5

Appendix C

Figure C-9. AN/TVS-5A

Figure C-10. AN/TVS-5A earlier reticle

C-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

Figure C-11. AN/TVS-5A newer reticle

AN/PAS-13B (V)2 MWTS) AND (V)3 HWTS C-7. The thermal weapon sight (TWS) is a lightweight, low-power, high-performance forward looking infrared (FLIR) device that will augment existing crew-served night vision sights. The TWS is completely passive. Although primarily designed for target detection and engagement with individual and crew-served weapons, it can also be used for all weather surveillance. The medium weapon thermal sight (MWTS) can effectively engage targets out to 1,100 meters (see Figure C-12). The heavy weapon thermal sight (HWTS) can effectively engage targets out to 2,200 meters (see Figure C-13).

Figure C-12. AN/PAS-13 (V) 2 MWTS

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-7

Appendix C

Figure C-13. AN/PAS-13 (V) 3 HWTS C-8. Figure C-14 illustrates the common display in the AN/PAS-13 family of thermal sights.

Figure C-14. TWS common display

C-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

C-9. Figure C-15 and Figure C-16 illustrate the wide field of view (WFOV) and the narrow field of view (NFOV) of the M249 reticles in the MWTS. They also illustrate the mil reticle relationship of each reticle.

Figure C-15. MWTS M249 WFOV aim points

Figure C-16. MWTS M249 NFOV aim points

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-9

Appendix C

C-10. Figure C-17 and Figure C-18 illustrate the WFOV and the NFOV of the M240 reticles in the MWTS. They also illustrate the mil reticle relationship of each reticle.

Figure C-17. MWTS M240 WFOV aim points

Figure C-18. MWTS M240 NFOV aim points

C-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

C-11. Figure C-19 and Figure C-20 illustrate the WFOV and the NFOV of the M2 HB reticles in the HWTS. They also illustrate the mil reticle relationship of each reticle.

Figure C-19. HWTS M2 HB WFOV aim points

Figure C-20. HWTS M2 HB NFOV aim points

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-11

Appendix C

C-12. Figure C-21 illustrates the MK19 reticle in the HWTS. Its also illustrates the mil reticle relationship of the reticle.

Figure C-21. HWTS MK19 aim points C-13. Following are figures that show which sights can be used with each of the truck-mounted weapon systems in the HBCT. The chart for each weapon also shows the maximum effective range of the weapon and its respective sights. Note. Because the Army is constantly improving its equipment, these charts are not meant to be all-inclusive or a replacement for the appropriate TMs.

C-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

C-14. Figure C-22 shows available sights for the M249 Squad Automatic Weapon (SAW).

Figure C-22. Available sights for M249 SAW C-15. Figure C-23 shows available sights for the M240B machine gun.

Figure C-23. Available sights for M240B

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-13

Appendix C

C-16. Figure C-24 shows available sights for the M2 HB caliber .50 machine gun.

Figure C-24. Available sights for M2 HB machine gun C-17. Figure C-25 shows available sights for the MK19 grenade machine gun.

Figure C-25. Available sights for MK19 machine gun

C-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

SECTION II – PRE-FIRE CHECKS C-18. Pre-fire checks of the armed truck weapon systems are important crew tasks. They help the crew eliminate all deficiencies associated with cleaning, maintenance, and functioning of the weapon systems, ensuring that each weapon is safe to operate. Note. Post-fire checks, which are required after firing of a weapon system to detect any maintenance problems incurred during firing, are covered later in this appendix. C-19. The pre-fire checklist is used, along with the appropriate operator’s manuals, to prepare vehiclemounted crew-served weapons for use (see Table C-1). These weapons are the M240B 7.62-mm machine gun (TM 9-1005-313-10), M2 HB caliber .50 machine gun (TM 9-1005-213-10), and MK19 40-mm (TM 9-1010-230-10). Crew members should ensure they reference the appropriate TM when conducting pre-fire checks. Table C-1. Pre-fire checklist Weapon

Pre-fire Action

Ammunition

Check all ammunition against TB 9-1300-385. Inspect the link alignment. Check for long or short rounds. Check the cleanliness. Report and turn in any corroded or damaged rounds.

M249 5.56-mm Squad Automatic Weapon

Ensure the M249 is cleaned IAW TM 9-1005-201-10. Ensure the M249 is secured to the mount. Ensure the bore is wiped dry. Conduct a function check of the M249.

M240B 7.62-mm Machine Gun

Ensure the M240B is cleaned and lubricated IAW TM 9-1005-313-10. Ensure the machine gun is installed and secured to the mount. Ensure the machine gun is clear of ammunition. Ensure the bore is wiped dry. Conduct a function check of the M240B.

M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun

Ensure the M2 HB is cleaned and lubricated IAW TM 9-1005-213-10. Ensure the machine gun is secured to the mount. Ensure the headspace and timing are set. Ensure the bore is wiped dry. Conduct a function check of the M2 HB.

MK19 40-mm Grenade Launcher Machine Gun

Ensure the MK19 is cleaned IAW TM 9-1010-230-10. Ensure the MK19 is secured to the mount. Ensure the bore is wiped dry. Conduct a function check of the MK19.

SECTION III – ZEROING C-20. The concept of zeroing is simple; it is no more than the method to adjust the sights of the weapon so the point of aim of the sights and the point of impact of the rounds are the same at a given range. Before zeroing, the crew conducts thorough pre-fire checks to ensure that the turret and weapon system operate

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-15

Appendix C

properly. This prevents many of the common malfunctions that can occur during firing. If a malfunction does occur, the crew tries to clear it. If they cannot, they report the malfunction to the unit Master Gunner and/or maintenance team chief as appropriate. After firing the weapon systems, the crew conducts a postfire check.

M249 SQUADRON AUTOMATIC WEAPON C-21. This discussion provides information on how to set the sights for elevation and windage for the M249 SAW. It also includes information on how to make corrections if the initial setting on the windage knob or peep sight is not accurate. Figure C-26 shows the rear sight of the M249 SAW. On a 10-meter target, each paster is 1 cm. Therefore, two clicks on the windage knob in either direction moves the strike of the round left or right 1 cm, and two turns on the peep sight moves the strike of the round up or down 1 cm. For example, if the shot group was 2 cm above and 1 cm to the right of the paster, sight corrections are made first by correcting the windage. In this case, the windage knob is rotated two clicks toward the buttstock (clockwise). The elevation knob is rotated four turns toward the buttstock (clockwise) to lower the strike of the round.

Figure C-26. M249 SAW rear sight

ELEVATION C-22. Adjustments for elevation (range) require the automatic rifleman to turn the elevation knob (closest to the buttstock) on the rear sight to the desired range setting. Range settings are graduated increments from 300 to 1,000 meters. Even-numbered settings are on the left side of the scale wheel and are numbered 4, 6, 8, 10, which represent 400, 600, 800, and 1,000 meters, respectively. Odd-numbered settings are on the right side of the scale wheel and are marked with the number 3 and three index lines, which represent 300, 500, 700, and 900 meters, respectively. Rotation of the elevation knob toward the muzzle (counterclockwise) increases the range, while rotation toward the buttstock (clockwise) decreases the range. Fine adjustments, like zeroing, are made by adjusting the peep sight. Each 180-degree turn equals a half-mil change in elevation, which equals a half-cm change in impact at a range of 10 meters. Clockwise (to the right) rotations decrease elevation, while counterclockwise (to the left) rotations increase elevation. The peep sight can be turned nine 180-degree turns from top to bottom. To make the peep sight easier to grasp, the elevation knob is turned to its highest point (1,000 meters). The appropriate adjustment is made for the peep sight, and then the sight is returned to the desired range. Whenever the range is readjusted, the point of aim is never changed. The point of aim is the center base of the target.

C-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

WINDAGE CORRECTION C-23. Adjustments for windage are made by traversing the rear sight right and left along the sliding scale. The sliding scale is marked or graduated with index lines. Each index line is equal to a half-mil change in direction or a half-cm change of impact at 10 meters. Rotation of the windage knob (closest to the muzzle end) toward the muzzle (counterclockwise) moves the rear sight aperture right, which moves the strike of the rounds right. Rotation toward the buttstock (clockwise) moves the aperture left, which moves the strike of the rounds left.

10-METER ZEROING–SETTING OF THE SIGHTS (MECHANICAL ZEROING) C-24. The gunner indexes or places the elevation knob on a range of 700 meters. He centers the rear peep sight by rotating it clockwise (right) as far as it will go, then rotating counterclockwise (left) five clicks or half-turns. He rotates the windage knob toward the muzzle until the peep sight is completely to the right, then rotates the windage knob toward the buttstock twelve clicks to the left. This places the peep sight in the approximate center of the sight. Each sight may vary as to how many clicks are needed. To check the sight, the gunner starts with the sight all the way to the right and, while counting the clicks, rotates the windage knob until it stops on the left side. He divides the clicks by two. If the click is an uneven number, he rounds it up. To center the sight, he rotates the windage knob toward the center (right) while counting the appropriate number of clicks. He adjusts the sliding scale at the rear of the sight to center the large index line under the zeroed windage mark on the sight. Two threads should be showing on the front sight post. If more or less are showing, the gunner turns in the weapon for maintenance. Procedures for windage and elevation corrections for the M249 are summarized in Table C-2. Table C-2. Windage and elevation (peep sight) correction chart for the M249 SAW Range

Movement of the Sight

Inches

Centimeters

100 m

1 Click =

2”

5 cm

200 m

1 Click =

4”

10 cm

300 m

1 Click =

6”

15 cm

400 m

1 Click =

8”

20 cm

500 m

1 Click =

10”

25 cm

600 m

1 Click =

12”

30 cm

700 m

1 Click =

14”

35 cm

800 m

1 Click =

16”

40 cm

900 m

1 Click =

18”

45 cm

Note. The primary and spare barrels are zeroed by making adjustments on the front sight.

M240B MACHINE GUN C-25. This discussion provides information on how to make corrections if the initial setting is not accurate. At a 10-meter target, each paster is 1 cm. Therefore, 10 clicks on the adjusting screw (windage) of the front sight assembly in either direction moves the strike of the round left or right 1 cm. One complete turn on the front sight blade moves the strike of the round up or down 1 cm. Figure C-27 shows the rear sight for the M240B.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-17

Appendix C

Figure C-27. M240B rear sight

ELEVATION CORRECTION C-26. If the shot group is above or below the point of aim, the front sight posts must be adjusted using the front sight-adjusting tool. Unlock the front-sight retaining strap and rotate it up. If the shot group is above the point of aim, rotate the sight post counterclockwise. If the shot group is below the point of aim, rotate the sight post clockwise. Rotating the front sight post counterclockwise brings the point of impact down on the target. Rotating the front sight post clockwise brings the point of impact up on the target. At a range of 10 meters, one-half turn of the front sight post blade will move the point of impact by 5 mm (.5 cm). One full turn of the front sight post blade moves the point of impact by 1 cm. After rotating the front sight post blade the desired amount, lower the retaining strap, but do not lock it down until elevation is confirmed. If the front sight post blade must be rotated counterclockwise to a point where its base is past flush (Number 2 blade), it should be replaced with a Number 1 front sight blade, which is shorter than a Number 2 blade. If the front sight post blade must be rotated counterclockwise to a point where its base is more than one full turn past flush (Number 1 blade), it should be replaced with a Number 2 front sight blade, which is taller than a Number 1 blade.

WINDAGE CORRECTION C-27. If the shot group is to the left of the point aim, move the front sight assembly to the right to shift the point of impact to the left (towards the point of aim). Using the front sight adjusting tool, loosen (turn counterclockwise) the adjusting screw on the front sight assembly the desired amount. Then tighten (turn clockwise) the opposite side screw on the left exactly the same number of clicks. At a range of 10 meters, one complete rotation of the adjusting screws will move the point of impact 8 mm (.8 cm). As the adjusting screws are turned, noticeable clicks (eight per revolution) should be detected. Each click is 1 mm (.1 cm). If this is not the case, have the armorer repair it. The front sight windage adjusting procedure is the combination of creating slack on one side and then taking up that slack from the opposite side. The front sight protector assembly should always be clamped between the heads of the two opposing screws. Remember, each time one screw is loosened or backed off, the opposite screw must be turned exactly the same amount. Check for play in the front sight assembly by lightly clamping it between finger and thumb and attempting to move the sight assembly laterally. If you feel no play, the windage adjustment is completed. If play is evident, carefully check both screws for looseness.

C-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

10-METER ZEROING (MECHANICAL ZEROING) C-28. Ten-meter zeroing (mechanical zeroing) is the standardized starting point for all weapons in the U.S. Army. The gunner places the range scale on a range of 500 meters on the rear sight. He gets the front sight post blade approximately centered for both elevation and windage. The gunner identifies what number blade is on the weapon for elevation, using the following considerations: z Number 1 blade (low–9.8 mm). Unlock the retaining strap and unscrew (counterclockwise) until the base of the blade is flush with the front sight protector surface, then make one full turn (counterclockwise). This should put the base of the blade past the base of the protector. Screw in (clockwise), counting the number of turns it takes until it stops, making sure the blade is on line with the barrel. If needed, back off until the blade is in line. Unscrew (counterclockwise) half the number of turns. This brings the blade to about the center. z Number 2 blade (high–11.8 mm). Unlock the retaining strap and unscrew (counterclockwise) until the base of the blade is flush with the front sight protector surface. Screw in (clockwise); counting the number of turns it takes until it stops, making sure the blade is in line with the barrel. If needed, back off until the blade is in line. Unscrew (counterclockwise) half the number of turns. This procedure brings the blade to about the center. Assume the prone position and sight on the target. Ensure windage is accomplished by making sure the front sight protector is centered left and right on its base. C-29. Procedures for windage and elevation corrections for the M240B are summarized in Table C-3 and Table C-4. Table C-3. Elevation correction chart for the M240B Range

Movement of the Sight

Inches

Centimeters

100 m

1 Full Turn =

4.25”

10.8 cm

200 m

1 Full Turn =

8.5”

21.6 cm

300 m

1 Full Turn =

12.75”

32.4 cm

400 m

1 Full Turn =

17”

43.2 cm

500 m

1 Full Turn =

21.25”

54 cm

600 m

1 Full Turn =

25.5”

64.8 cm

700 m

1 Full Turn =

39.75”

75.6 cm

800 m

1 Full Turn =

34”

86.4 cm

900 m

1 Full Turn =

38.25”

97.2 cm

Table C-4. Windage correction chart for the M240B Range

Movement of the Sight

Inches

Centimeters

100 m

1 Full Turn =

3.15”

8 cm

200 m

1 Full Turn =

6.3”

16 cm

300 m

1 Full Turn =

9.45”

24 cm

400 m

1 Full Turn =

12.6”

32 cm

500 m

1 Full Turn =

15.75”

40 cm

600 m

1 Full Turn =

18.9”

48 cm

700 m

1 Full Turn =

22”

56 cm

800 m

1 Full Turn =

25.2”

64 cm

900 m

1 Full Turn =

28.35”

72 cm

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-19

Appendix C

M2 HB CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN C-30. This discussion provides information on how to set the sight for elevation and windage for the M2 HB machine gun. Figure C-28 shows an example of the adjustable rear sight of the M2. A properly zeroed M2 gives the gunner the highest probability of hit for most combat targets with the least adjustment to the point of aim. There are three methods of zeroing/targeting used with the caliber .50 machine gun: z Ten-meters range zeroing. z Field zeroing. z Night or limited visibility zeroing.

Figure C-28. M2 HB rear sight

10-METER RANGE ZEROING C-31. Setting the zero for the 10-meter range allows the gunner to learn basic traverse and search techniques with the M2 machine gun while using the standard machine gun target. As with other weapons, the sight on the M2 must also be set at an initial start point. The following procedures apply: z Rear Sight. The rear sight is set at 1,000. Use these guidelines: „ Set elevation. Raise the rear sight by lifting straight up until it snaps into the upright position. Adjust the range scale to 1,000 yards by rotating the elevation screw knob in the necessary direction. (Clockwise moves the scale up; counterclockwise moves the scale down). „ Set windage. Rotate the windage knob until the zero index mark on the base rear sight is aligned with the index mark on the top of the receiver. (Clockwise moves the windage scale to the left; counterclockwise moves it to the right.) Note. Obtain the proper sight picture by looking through the zero aperture and centering the front sight blade in it. Once the sight alignment is obtained, place this combination on the center base of the selected target.

C-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

z

z

Three-Round Group. The gunner fires three single rounds, loaded individually, at the center base of the aiming points on the basic machine gun marksmanship target. He fires the three rounds without making any adjustments to the sights. The shot group must be in a 4-centimeter circle or smaller to establish the center of the group in relation to the center base of the aiming paster. Grid Square Overlay. For a more accurate adjustment, the gunner moves downrange and places the grid square overlay over pasters 1 and 2. He ensures that he aligns the overlay with the pasters and squares. These guidelines apply: „ The gunner counts the number of squares it will take to move the shot group to the aiming paster. „ Upon completion, he returns to the firing line to make corrections to the weapon. Figure C-29 illustrates a zero group size on which adjustment can be made and a group that is too loose for adjustments. If a group is too loose, the gunner checks his position and group.

Figure C-29. Zero group size

Note. Large shot groups are usually caused by incorrect position and grip. Incorrect sight alignment, sight picture, or zeroing usually causes small shot groups outside the scoring space. If the center of the group is to the left or right of the black aiming paster, the gunner must correct for windage. „ If the center of the shot group is above or below of the black aiming paster, the gunner must correct for elevation. Confirmation. The gunner fires another three-shot group (loaded individually) after making his corrections for windage and elevation. If the center of the group is still off the aiming point, he adjusts further until the group is centered on the point of aim. Recording of Zero. There is no reason to record the 10-meter zero because it applies only to firing at the 10-meter basic machine gun target. „

z

z

FIELD ZEROING C-32. Field zeroing is another method of obtaining a zero. When preparing to field zero, make sure the M2 is mounted securely on the M3 tripod, make sure the traverse and elevation (T&E) mechanism is working properly, and finally, know the distance to your zero target. The only difference in initial sight setting for field zeroing is range setting on the scale. The gunner must also remember that the range scale on the M2 is indicated in yards; therefore, to get as close to the target as possible, you may have to convert the meters to the target into yards so you can set the range on the rear sight. Conversion of meters to yards is

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-21

Appendix C

accomplished by multiplying the number of meters by 1.094. For example, 600 meters x 1.094 = 656.4 yards; the gunner would set his range scale at 650 yards.

NIGHT OR LIMITED VISIBILITY ZEROING C-33. To bring accurate fire onto the target at night or during limited visibility, night optics must be zeroed to the weapon, which requires the optic to be properly mounted and boresighted. The zero can then be confirmed by firing at a target at engagement ranges. All of the night optics are zeroed for 500 meters on the 10-meter range. M16A2/A4 25-meter zeroing targets, specially marked with each of the optic’s offsets, are used.

MK19 GRENADE MACHINE GUN C-34. Zeroing procedures for the MK19 are crucial for hitting targets during limited visibility from a stationary vehicle. Figure C-30 shows the adjustable rear sight of the MK19. It is strongly recommended that a target at 400 meters be used to zero. FM 3-22.27 (Chapter 3) discusses the correct way to install the mounted T&E mechanism to the High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV).

Figure C-30. MK19 rear sight C-35. To zero the MK19 using the T&E device, follow these steps: z Loosen the range plate screw. Move the range plate to the midpoint between the two studs. Tighten the range plate screw. Move the rear sight slide to the meter mark that represents the distance to the target. For example, move to the 400-meter mark to zero on a target known to be 400 meters away. Set the windage knob at the zero index line. z Align the sights on the base of the target. z Fire a single round and spot the impact of the round. If it is on the target, fire another short burst to confirm the zero. If the round is not on target, go to the next step.

C-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

z

Adjust as needed. To adjust for a round that is not on target, do the following: „ If the impact of the round is short or over, adjust the elevation knob. Estimate how short or over the round is. If the round is short, use this estimate to adjust the elevation knob clockwise, which moves the sights up onto the knob counterclockwise to bring the sights down to the target. For example, if the rounds impact 10 mils short, adjust the elevation knob 10 mils up by turning it clockwise. Realign the sights and adjust the gun back on target using the T&E mechanism before the next round is fired.

Note. If the adjustment was correct, the second round should be on target. If so, fire another short burst to confirm the zero. If not, repeat the previous step. If the impacts are not observed, bold adjustments may be necessary. If the round is to the right or left, adjust the windage knob. Estimate how far to the right or left the sight needs to move to bring the rounds on target. Turn the windage knob clockwise to adjust to the right; turn the windage knob counterclockwise to adjust to the left. For example, if the rounds impact 10 mils to the right, adjust the sight 10 mils to the left by turning the windage knob counterclockwise. Realign and adjust the sights back on target using the T&E mechanism before firing the next round. „ Once the zero is completed, align the range plate scale at the exact range of the target used to zero, and tighten it. When the gunner maintains the same sight picture, the type of firing position does not alter the zero. „

z

SECTION IV – WEAPON SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS C-36. Malfunctions cause a loss of firing time on gunnery ranges. Crew error is the primary cause of most malfunctions. Crews must know the possible reasons that typical malfunctions have occurred to take the necessary steps to correct the malfunctions and continue with training. As a precaution, the crew performs standard stoppage procedures before correcting any error. DANGER When a malfunction or stoppage occurs, always perform misfire procedures before taking any other corrective action.

M249 5.56-MM SQUAD AUTOMATIC WEAPON C-37. If immediate action fails to correct a stoppage, use the following procedure: z Clear the weapon. z Check for a ruptured cartridge. z Check ammunition and links (alignment and orientation). z Check feed pawls and springs for damage or weakness. z Check operating rod assembly for damage. z Check gas plug and port for excessive carbon buildup. z Inspect the extractor to ensure its not damaged or broken z If none of these steps corrects the stoppage, notify the unit Master Gunner or maintenance personnel.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-23

Appendix C

M240B 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN C-38. If immediate action fails to correct a stoppage, use the following procedure: z Clear the weapon. z Check for a ruptured cartridge. z Check ammunition and links (alignment and orientation). z Check feed pawls and springs for damage or weakness. z Check drive spring rod assembly for damage. z Check gas plug and port for carbon buildup. z Inspect the extractor to ensure it is not damaged or broken. z If none of these steps corrects the stoppage, notify the unit Master Gunner or maintenance personnel.

M2 HB CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN C-39. If immediate action fails to correct a stoppage, use the following procedure: z Check to ensure the weapon is armed. z Check for ruptured or deformed cartridges on the HMMWV roof. z Clear the weapon. z Check headspace and timing. z Check to ensure ammunition is aligned in links and not binding in feed tray. z Check for damaged feed pawls and springs. z Check for damaged firing pin. z If none of these steps corrects the stoppage, notify the unit Master Gunner or maintenance personnel.

MK19 MACHINE GUN C-40. If immediate action fails to correct a stoppage, use the following procedure: z Clear the weapon. z Check for bad ammunition. (If the primer of a round is dented, the ammunition is bad, if not, the firing pin may be damaged.) z Check for damaged firing pin. z Check for ammunition jammed in feeder: „ Check for proper attachment of the feed throat. „ Check for rounds that are crooked or not seated firmly. „ Check for broken links. „ Check for links that are off the rotating band. „ Check for female links that are not first. z Check for defective feeder or feed slide assembly: „ Check for broken or worn feed pawls. „ Check for badly worn or gouged link guides. „ Check for binding feed slide assembly. z If none of these steps corrects the stoppage, notify the unit Master Gunner or maintenance personnel.

C-24

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

COMMUNICATIONS C-41. If you lose communications, check the following: z Is the master control station power light ON (if equipped)? z Are the radio cable connections loose? z Has the built-in test (BIT) failed on the master control station (if equipped)? z Is the CVC cord disconnected (if equipped)? z Does the VIC1 Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) display a green status (if equipped)?

SECTION V – SIGHT OFFSET INFORMATION C-42. This section provides the procedures to zero truck-mounted machine guns and their respective sights with a borelight. Also provided in this section is the sight offset information for machine guns and the different types of mounts and sights that can be attached to them.

BORELIGHT DRY-ZERO PROCEDURE C-43. This discussion covers the borelight dry-zero procedure for the M249 SAW and M240B machine gun with AN/PEQ-2 sight.

WARNING Before inserting the borelight into the weapon, clear the machine gun, perform PMCS, and visually inspect the chamber to ensure that it is empty and no ammunition is in position to be chambered. Additionally, inspect the bore and muzzle to ensure there are no obstructions. Clean the weapon if necessary.

PREPARATION C-44. Begin the procedure by performing the following steps: z Attach/mount AN/PEQ-2 IR pointer to the weapon and ensure the device is secured tightly. On the M240B, the AN/PEQ-2 is attached to the rail on top of the feed cover. On the M249 SAW, the AN/PEQ-2 is attached to the rail on top of the M249 TWS bracket. z Stabilize the machine gun. This can be accomplished by placing the weapon on a tripod. If no tripod is available, stabilize the weapon using an open bipod and with sand bags or rucksacks. z An unobstructed line of sight of 10 meters is required. Using the 10-meter length of cord included with the laser borelight kit, measure 10 meters measured from the barrel carrying handle.

WARNING Do not turn on the laser borelight at this time.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-25

Appendix C

z

Wipe the laser borelight mandrel with a clean cloth and apply a light film of oil on the mandrel. Insert the laser borelight mandrel in the machine gun muzzle using light, steady force until the mandrel taper seats in the muzzle.

CAUTION Do not apply excessive inward force to the laser borelight once the tapered end of the mandrel has seated in the muzzle.

ZEROING THE BORELIGHT C-45. This procedure for zeroing the borelight to the machine gun requires a minimum of three people. One person stabilizes the weapon by applying firm pressure downward with two hands on the barrel; the second person rotates and adjusts the borelight; and the third person is positioned at the target board to call out adjustments. Use the steps below. C-46. Select/place the proper 10-meter dry-zeroing target at a 10-meter distance from the carrying handle of the machine gun barrel. When used for zeroing the borelight laser, the target board MUST be kept level. Ignore machine gun orientation at this time. C-47. Turn on the laser borelight. With the help of an assistant, hold a target at 10 meters and place the target board so that the laser dot strikes the center of the laser borelight dot on the selected target board.

DANGER All individuals MUST wear ballistic laser eye protection (BLEPS) during this procedure. DO NOT look directly into the laser beam, whether with the unaided eye, through binoculars or telescopes, or using BLEPS. DO NOT point the laser at mirror surfaces. DO NOT point the laser in the vicinity of another individual’s eyes.

Note. Rotate the borelight tool clockwise. Rotating the laser borelight housing counterclockwise may cause the borelight to unscrew from mandrel. z

z

C-26

Slowly rotate the borelight while watching the dot made by the laser on the target area. If the dot remains stationary the borelight is aligned and boresighted to the weapon. Proceed to the procedure for zeroing the machine gun. If the laser dot rotates in a circular pattern, the borelight windage or elevation or both MUST be adjusted. This procedure can be done at the 10-meter distance, or the target can be moved to as close as 2 meters. Use the following procedures: „ Slowly rotate the borelight one-half turn. Note the new location of the laser dot. Adjust the borelight windage and elevation until the laser dot moves one-half the space from its original location. „ Continue the procedure until the laser dot remains stationary when the borelight is rotated. If the target board was moved closer to the borelight, move target back to a distance of 10 meters and re-check the boresight. If the boresight is correct, the weapon is ready to be dryzeroed.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

ZEROING THE MACHINE GUN C-48. This procedure is for boresighting the weapon for a 300-meter dry-zero. Use the AN/PEQ-2 infrared aiming/illumination lights. Notes. Do not touch or bump the borelight. Night vision equipment is required when using the AN/PEQ-2 light.

ZEROING FROM BIPOD C-49. Use the following steps when using a bipod: z Remove the machine gun from the tripod or from sandbags or rucksacks. z From the same 10-meter location, shoulder the machine gun in a prone firing position with bipod legs in contact with the ground. z Manually stabilize the weapon without cant and orient the selected target board in a levelvertical position. Note. Proper positioning of the target is CRITICAL for accurate boresighting results.

ZEROING FROM TRIPOD C-50. Use the following steps when using a tripod: z From the same 10 meter location, stabilize the weapon without cant. z Orient the selected target board in a level-vertical position. Notes. Proper positioning of the target is CRITICAL for accurate boresighting results. If the machine gun is zeroed from the tripod and fired from the bipod, the center of the cone of fire will be approximately 18 inches high (+2 mils) from the center of the target at 300 meters. If the machine gun is zeroed from the bipod and fired from the tripod, the center of the cone of fire will be approximately 18 inches low (-2 mils) from the center of the target at 300 meters.

USE OF TARGET BOARDS C-51. Follow these instructions for the target boards (see Figure C-31 and Figure C-32): z Aim/place the borelight at the proper figure on the chart and adjust the windage and elevation controls on the AN/PEQ-2 infrared aiming lights until they are centered on their labeled spot(s). z (Optional) Rotate the borelight one-half turn and again aim at the proper device(s) target. If properly boresighted, the laser borelight spot should still be centered on its spot even after a half turn rotation. If not centered, repeat the steps to center the borelight. z Turn off the laser borelight (LBL) tool and remove it from the machine gun. The machine gun is now dry-zeroed for 300 meters. The 300-meter dry-zero should be confirmed by live fire.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-27

Appendix C

Figure C-31. Target board for dry-zeroing

C-28

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

Figure C-32. Example of DA Form 7476-R, 10-Meter Boresight Offset Target

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-29

Appendix C

SIGHT OFFSETS FOR CREW-SERVED WEAPONS C-52. See Table C-5 for sight offset information for machine guns and the different types of mounts and sights that can be attached to them. Table C-5. Machine gun sight offset data Weapon M249

Accessory

Mount

Iron Sight

N/A

M249

AN/PAQ-4C

M249

AN/PAQ-4C

M249

AN/PAQ-4C No Feed Tray Cover Rail or Forward Rails

M249

AN/PAQ-4C Left Rail

M249

AN/PAQ-4C Right Rail

M249

AN/PAQ-4C Left Rail

M249

AN/PAQ-4C Right Rail

M249

AN/PAS13A/B(V)2 (MWTS)

M249

C-30

AN/PEQ-2A on Feed Tray Cover Rail

Range Zeroed 400m

Mounting Bracket/Picatinny Rail Grabber & AN/PAQ-4C Spacer NSN: 5340-01-458-0473 Part No: 12598109 Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket “Insight” NSN: 5340-01-458-0990 Part No: ITP-090 Adapter Bracket NSN: 5340-01-362-9873 Part No: A3186952 With Mounting Bracket Assembly, M249 NSN: 5340-01-387-0866 Part No: A3187016 and Mounting Knob Assembly, M16A1/A2 NSN: 5355-01-039-2834 Part No: SM-D-850500-1 Mounting Bracket/Picatinny Rail Grabber & AN/PAQ-4C Spacer NSN: 5340-01-458-0473 Part No: 12598109 Mounting Bracket/Picatinny Rail Grabber & AN/PAQ-4C Spacer NSN: 5340-01-458-0473 Part No: 12598109 Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket “Insight” NSN: 5340-01-458-0990 Part No: ITP-090 Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket “Insight” NSN: 5340-01-458-0990 Part No: ITP-090 Mount Assembly, Rail Grabber NSN: 1240-01-490-0737 Part No: A3281312-1 Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket “Insight” NSN: 5340-01-458-0990 Part No: ITP-090

25m M16A2/A4 Target Zero Offset Squares AZ EL 0.0 5.1U

10m Boresight Target Offset cm AZ 0.0

EL 1.7U

400m

AZ 1.8R

EL 0.0

AZ 1.8L

EL 5.4U

400m

AZ 1.8R

EL 2.0U

AZ 1.8L

EL 4.7U

400m

AZ 2.5R

EL 1.5D

AZ 4.1L

EL 6.1U

400m

AZ 7.5R

EL 14.0D

AZ 7.6L

EL 8.3D

400m

AZ 7.6L

EL 10.7U

AZ 7.7R

EL 4.0D

400m

AZ 5.9R

EL 14.0D

AZ 6.0L

EL 8.3D

400m

AZ 5.8R

EL 10.7D

AZ 5.9L

EL 4.0D

400m

AZ 0.0

EL 2.8D

AZ 0.0

EL 8.6U

400m

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

AZ 2.0L

EL 1.3U

Aiming AZ EL 2.0R 4.8U Flood AZ EL 2.0L 4.8U

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

Table C-5. Machine gun sight offset data (continued) Weapon

M249

Range Zeroed

Accessory

Mount

AN/PEQ-2A Feed Tray Cover with no Rail

Adapter Bracket NSN: 5340-01-362-9873 Part No: A3186952 and Mounting Bracket Assembly, M249 NSN: 5340-01-387-0866 Part No: A3187016

25m M16A2/A4 Target Zero Offset Squares

10m Boresight Target Offset cm Aiming

400m

AZ 5.0R

EL 4.0D

AZ 0.5L

EL 6.5U Flood

AZ 4.5L

EL 6.5U Aiming

M249

AN/PEQ-2A on Left Rail

Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket “Insight” NSN: 5340-01-458-0990 Part No: ITP-090

400m

AZ 5.9R

EL 10.0D

AZ 6.0L

EL 4.4D Flood

AZ 6.6L

EL 8.4D Aiming

M249

AN/PEQ-2A on Right Rail

M249

AN/PVS-4 on Feed Tray Cover Rail

M249

AN/PVS-4 on Feed Tray Cover with no Rail

M249

M145 on Feed Tray Cover Rail

M240B

Iron Sights

M240B

AN/PAQ-4C on Feed Tray Cover Rail

M240B

AN/PAQ-4C on Feed Tray Cover Rail

M240B

AN/PAQ-4C on Left Rail

3 September 2009

Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket “Insight” NSN: 5340-01-458-0990 Part No: ITP-090

400m

Adapter AN/PVS-4 (Spacer) NSN: 5365-01-447-8991 Part No: 12598098 and Bracket Mounting (Rail Grabber) NSN: 5340-01-449-8533 Part No: 12598120

400m

AZ 0.0

AZ 6.0L

EL 14.0U

AZ 6.1R

EL 7.6D Flood

AZ 6.1R

EL 3.6D

EL 4.2D

AZ 0.0

EL 10.0U

Mounting Bracket, M249 NSN: 3040-01-233-0352 Part No: A3079160 Uses integral M145 Grabber. No special bracket or mount is required.

400m

AZ 2.5R

EL 4.9D

AZ 2.3L

EL 11.3U

All Ranges Use 10mZ Reticle

N/A

N/A

AZ 0.0

EL 0.0

N/A

500m

AZ 0.0

EL 9.2U

AZ 0.0

EL 2.5U

500m

AZ 1.8R

EL 2.2D

AZ 1.5L

EL 3.5U

500m

AZ 1.8R

EL 8.3U

AZ 1.8L

EL 0.8U

500m

AZ 7.8R

EL 17.7U

AZ 7.9L

EL 8.1D

Mounting Bracket/Picatinny Rail Grabber & AN/PAQ-4C Spacer NSN: 5340-01-458-0473 Part No: 12598109 Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket “Insight” NSN: 5340-01-458-0990 Part No: ITP-090 Mounting Bracket/Picatinny Rail Grabber & AN/PAQ-4C Spacer NSN: 5340-01-458-0473 Part No: 12598109

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-31

Appendix C

Table C-5. Machine gun sight offset data (continued) Weapon

Accessory

M240B

AN/PAQ-4C on Right Rail

M240B

AN/PAQ-4C on Left Rail

M240B

AN/PAQ-4C on Right Rail

M240B

AN/PAS13A/B(V)2 (MWTS)

Range

Mount

Zeroed

Mounting Bracket/Picatinny Rail Grabber & AN/PAQ-4C Spacer NSN: 5340-01-458-0473 Part No: 12598109 Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket “Insight” NSN: 5340-01-4580990 Part No: ITP-090 Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket “Insight” NSN: 5340-01-4580990 Part No: ITP-090 Mount Assembly, Rail Grabber NSN: 1240-01-490-0737 Part No: A3281312-1

25m M16A2/A4 Target Zero Offset Squares

10m Boresight Target Offset cm

500m

AZ 7.8L

EL 13.5U

AZ 7.5R

EL 4.4D

500m

AZ 6.2R

EL 17.7U

AZ 6.2L

EL 8.1D

500m

AZ 5.9L

EL 13.5U

AZ 6.0R

EL 4.4D

500m

AZ 0.0

EL 2.3U

AZ 0.0

EL 8.0U

Aiming AZ EL 1.7R 2.2U Flood AZ EL 2.3L 2.2U Aiming AZ EL 6.2L 4.1D Flood AZ EL 6.2L 8.1D Aiming AZ EL 6.2R 7.9D Flood AZ EL 6.2R 3.9D

AN/PEQ-2A on Feed Tray Cover Rail

Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket “Insight” NSN: 5340-01-4580990 Part No: ITP-090

500m

AZ 1.7L

EL 6.0U

M240B

AN/PEQ-2A on Left Rail

Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket “Insight” NSN: 5340-01-4580990 Part No: ITP-090

500m

AZ 6.2R

EL 13.5U

M240B

AN/PEQ-2A on Right Rail

Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket “Insight” NSN: 5340-01-4580990 Part No: ITP-090

500m

AZ 6.1L

EL 17.7U

M240B

AN/PVS-4 on Feed Tray Cover Rail

Adapter AN/PVS-4 (Spacer) NSN: 5365-01-447-8991 Part No: 12598098 and Bracket Mounting (Rail Grabber) NSN: 5340-01-449-8533 Part No: 12598120

500m

AZ 0.0

EL 6.2D

AZ 0.0

EL 6.0U

M240B

M145 MGO on Feed Tray Cover Rail

Uses integral M145 Grabber. No special bracket or mount is required.

N/A

N/A

AZ 0.0

EL 0.0

M240B

M2

Iron Sights

M2

AN/PAS13A/B(V)3 (HWTS)

C-32

N/A Bracket Assembly, M2 NSN: 5340-01-502-7233 Part No: A3170570

All Ranges Use 10mZ Reticle 500m 500m

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

TBD AZ 0.0

TBD EL 12.8D

AZ 0.0

EL 16.3U

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

SECTION VI – POST-FIRE CHECKS C-53. After firing, the crew clears all weapon systems and removes all ammunition residue from the exterior of the vehicle. Leaders verify that crews clear all weapon systems in accordance with AR 385-63. On training ranges, range safety officers verify that crews have cleared all weapon systems. Post-fire checks prevent many accidents. As always after firing, the crew will perform proper PMCS and cleaning in accordance with the applicable technical manual.

DANGER After firing, ensure all weapons are clear.

SECTION VII – LONG-RANGE ADVANCED SCOUT SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM C-54. The LRAS3 is a long-range multisensor system for the U.S. Army, providing scouts with the realtime ability to detect, recognize, identify, and geo-locate distant targets. The LRAS3 is the premier ground combat reconnaissance and surveillance system on the modern battlefield. It enables Soldiers to conduct 24-hour reconnaissance and surveillance missions, remaining outside threat acquisition and engagement ranges. The LRAS3 replaces obsolete systems that require Soldiers to close within direct fire range of the threat they seek to detect.

SIGHT SENSOR RETICLES C-55. The LRAS3 sight sensor uses seven reticles–five FLIR reticles and two day TV reticles–most of which are illustrated in this discussion. Common mil reticle relationships are shown in Figure C-33.

Figure C-33. Common reticle FORWARD LOOKING, INFRARED RETICLES

C-56. The FLIR has an NFOV reticle with three electronic zoom positions (1X, 2X, and 4X). Magnification power for NFOV is 16.6X. The FLIR also has a WFOV with two electronic zoom positions (1X and 2X). Magnification power for WFOV is 5.5X. Figure C-34 through Figure C-37 show four types of FLIR reticles (WFOV 1X and 2X and NFOV 1X and 4X).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-33

Appendix C

Figure C-34. FLIR WFOV reticle (1X)

Figure C-35. FLIR WFOV reticle (2X)

Figure C-36. FLIR NFOV reticle (1X)

Figure C-37. FLIR NFOV reticle (4X)

C-34

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

DAY TV RETICLES C-57. The day TV has a WFOV reticle (magnification 5.5X), shown in Figure C-38, and an NFOV reticle (magnification 16.6X), shown in Figure C-39.

Figure C-38. Day TV WFOV reticle

Figure C-39. Day TV NFOV reticle

BORESIGHTING C-58. This discussion covers boresighting procedures for LRAS3 devices equipped with either FLIR or day TV sight sensors. Figure C-40 illustrates the main menu tree for LRAS3 boresighting.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-35

Appendix C

Figure C-40. LRAS3 boresight main menu tree

FORWARD LOOKING, INFRARED BORESIGHTING Note. Whenever there is a change of 20 degrees or more in sight sensor operating temperature, a BORESIGHT REQUIRED message will appear. When the FLIR is not ready and the NOT COOL indicator is displayed, FLIR boresighting cannot be selected. C-59. Use the following steps for FLIR boresighting: z Install the sight sensor lens cover. z Using the main menu, select MODE and then BOTH EO SENSORS. z Using the SGT SEL push button on the left hand grip, select FLIR. FLIR-WH is displayed in operational parameter block. z Using the main menu, select BORESIGHT and then select BORESIGHT FLIR. The ABORT/DONE menu appears. A message is displayed in the message area stating FLIR BORESIGHTING IN PROGRESS. The boresight reticle is displayed. Note. The boresight dot can be hard to see. Prior to boresighting, install the lens cover. If the sight sensor is not far out of boresight, the boresight reticle may already be on top of the boresighting dot, making the boresighting dot difficult to see. Move the boresight reticle off center. If the boresighting dot is still hard to see, use the BCF menu to adjust focus and to turn reticle brightness down and display brightness and contrast up. If necessary, adjust FLIR contrast/brightness to improve boresight dot visibility. z

C-36

The boresighting dot will appear on the display. Using the BA switch on the right-hand grip, move the reticle aim point on top of the boresighting dot.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

Note. If FLIR boresighting cannot be completed within three minutes, BORESIGHT TIMEOUT appears in the message area. z

When boresighting is accomplished, select DONE from the ABORT/DONE menu. The FLIR BORESIGHTING IN PROGRESS message disappears from the message area, and the main menu is displayed.

Note. After completion of boresighting, the boresighting dot may appear to briefly “jump” out from underneath the reticle. This is a normal behavior and does not indicate a loss of boresight. z

To exit the BORESIGHT menu without making or saving changes, select ABORT from the ABORT/DONE menu. The BORESIGHT ABORT message is displayed in the message area for approximately 30 seconds.

DAY TV BORESIGHTING Note. Whenever there is a change of 20 degrees or more in sight sensor operating temperature, a BORESIGHT REQUIRED message may appear. C-60. Use the following steps for day TV boresighting: z Install the sight sensor lens cover. z Using SGT SEL push button on left-hand grip, select DAY TV. DAY TV is displayed in operational parameter block. z Using the main menu, select BORESIGHT and then select BORESIGHT DAY TV. The ABORT/DONE menu appears. A message is displayed in the message area stating DAY TV BORESIGHTING IN PROGRESS. The boresight reticle is displayed. Note. If the sight sensor is not far out of boresight, the boresight reticle may already be on top of the boresighting dot, making the boresighting dot difficult to see. Move the boresight reticle off center. If the boresighting dot is still hard to see, install the lens cover, and use the BCF menu to adjust reticle brightness down and display brightness and contrast up. z z

The boresighting dot will appear on the display. Using the BA switch on right-hand grip, move the reticle aim point on top of the boresighting dot. To exit the BORESIGHT menu without making or saving changes, select ABORT from the ABORT/DONE menu. The BORESIGHT ABORTED message is displayed in the message area for approximately 30 seconds.

Note. If day TV boresighting cannot be completed within three minutes, BORESIGHT TIMEOUT appears in the message area. After completion of boresighting, the boresighting dot may appear to briefly “jump” out from underneath the reticle. This is a normal behavior and does not indicate a loss of boresight. C-61. When boresighting is accomplished, select DONE from the ABORT/DONE menu. The DAY TV BORESIGHTING IN PROGRESS message in the message area and the BORESIGHT REQUIRED message disappear, and the BORESIGHT menu is displayed. Select CANCEL to return to the main menu.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

C-37

This page intentionally left blank.

Appendix D

Rifle Squad Gunnery Rifle squad gunnery is a necessary stage of training that teaches rifle squad leaders to control organic fires in a live-fire exercise (LFX). This chapter provides information necessary for developing a rifle squad gunnery training program, whereas FM 321.71 provides the information necessary for the tactical employment of the rifle squad. STP 7-11 B1-SM-TG provide the tasks, conditions, and standards for both the tactical and gunnery situational training and live-fire training exercises. Training must be battle focused, challenging, and must emphasize infantry skills. Live-fire training for the rifle squad starts with the buddy team/fire and maneuver exercise and progresses through rifle squad live-fire exercise. Integration of the Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) or BFV section should begin with execution of Rifle Squad Table IV. The BFV(s), if not Combat Table IV qualified, can execute these tables dry-fire or using appended training devices. Mounted and dismounted elements training as a team must start at the earliest opportunity.

Contents Section I – Considerations ...................... D-1 Weapons and Equipment Training and Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction .......................................... D-2 Section II – Rifle Squad Fire Control and Distribution .......................................D-13 Principles ..........................................D-13 Fire Control Measures ......................D-15 Engagement Techniques ..................D-16 Direct Fire .........................................D-17 Sector Sketches................................D-18

Section III – Exercise Development....... D-19 Prerequisites .................................... D-20 Evaluation ........................................ D-20 Rifle Squad Gunnery Training Program ........................................... D-20 Preliminary Rifle Squad Gunnery Training ............................................ D-20 Basic Rifle Squad Gunnery Training D-21

SECTION I – CONSIDERATIONS D-1. Tough standards help build infantrymen who can win on the battlefield. Leaders and trainers should review their training responsibilities for planning and execution in FM 3-21.71 and FM 3-90.1. When conducting rifle squad training, they must consider— z Fundamentals. Shoot, move, communicate, sustain, and secure. z Simplicity. Ensure proficiency in basics before moving to more complex tasks. z Prerequisites. Certify crew and battle drills before executing collective live-fire tasks. z Realism. Expose leaders and Soldiers to unexpected and challenging situations–good and bad. z Conditions. Replicate battlefield conditions for live-fire training. z Risk. Assess risk before training. z Evaluations. Conduct after action reviews (AAR) as part of training.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

D-1

Appendix D

WEAPONS AND EQUIPMENT TRAINING AND PRELIMINARY MARKSMANSHIP INSTRUCTION D-2. Weapons and equipment training consists of preliminary weapon training and qualification. All squad members must establish their proficiency with their assigned weapons and equipment before moving on to collective task training. During preliminary weapons training, squad members learn and demonstrate their proficiency in disassembly, assembly, preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS), and operation of their weapons and all other squad equipment. Preliminary weapons training and marksmanship instruction should include the following equipment: z M4 carbines. z M16A2 rifles. z M203 grenade launchers. z M249 light machine guns. z M240B machine gun. z Javelins. z AT-4s. z Night-vision devices. z Weapons optics and lasers. z Mines and demolitions. z Squad communication equipment.

M4 CARBINE/M16A2 RIFLE D-3. The M16/M4-series weapons are 5.56-mm, magazine-fed, gas-operated, air-cooled, shoulder-fired weapons. They are the infantryman’s primary weapons. See Table D-1 and Table D-2 for technical and ammunition data. Table D-1. M16A2/M4 carbine rifle technical data

Weight Maximum effective rate of fire: • Semiautomatic (rounds per minute). •

Burst (3 rounds per minute).

•

Sustained (rounds per minute).

Range: • Maximum range (meters). •

M16A2

M4

7.78 lbs

6.49 lbs

45 90 12-15

45 90 12-15

3,600 meters

3,600 meters

550 meters 800 meters

500 meters 600 meters

7 3,100 ft/sec 700-900 rds/sec

7 2,970 ft/sec 700-900 rds/sec

Maximum effective range. Point target (meters). Area target (meters).

Operational Characteristics: • Barrel (rifling-right hand 1-inch twist). •

Muzzle velocity.

•

Cyclic rate of fire.

References: • FM 3-22.9. •

D-2

TM 9-1005-319-10.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Rifle Squad Gunnery

Table D-2. M4/M16-series weapons ammunition Ammunition

DODIC

Use

M855 Ball

A059

The M855 cartridge has a 62-grain gilded, metal-jacketed, lead alloy core bullet with a steel penetrator. The primer and case are waterproof. This ammunition is also linked and used in the M249. (Green tipped.)

M856 Tracer

A063

The M865 tracer cartridge has characteristics similar to the M196 tracer with a slightly longer tracer burnout distance. This cartridge has a 63.7grain bullet. The M856 does not have a steel penetrator. (Red tipped; also orange when linked 4 to 1 for the M249.)

M200 Blank

A080

The M200 blank cartridge has no projectile. The case mouth is closed with a seven-petal rosette crimp. (Violet tipped.)

M199 Dummy

A060

The M199 dummy cartridge is used during dry firing and other training. It can be identified by the six grooves along the side of the case beginning about 1/2 inch from its tip. It contains no propellant or primer. The primer well is open to prevent firing-pin damage.

M862 SRTA

A065

The M862 short-range training ammunition (SRTA) is designed exclusively for training. It can be used in lieu of service ammunition on indoor ranges and by units that have a limited range fan that does not allow the firing of service ammunition. SRTA ammunition must be used with the M2 training bolt.

M203 40-MM GRENADE LAUNCHER D-4. The M203 grenade launcher is a lightweight, single-shot, shoulder-fired weapon that attaches to the M16-, M4 carbine- (M203A1), or M4 carbine- (with rail system) series rifles. The grenade launcher is breech-loaded with a pump-action sliding barrel. See Table D-3 for technical data on the M203 grenade launcher. Note. The M203 grenade launcher must be mounted to the M16-series rifles by the unit’s armorer. The M203A1 must be mounted to the M4 carbine-series rifles by the forward support element of the Brigade Support Battalion (BSB). D-5. The M203 grenade launcher fires several fixed-type, low-velocity 40-mm rounds. Ammunition includes HE, illuminating, signaling, sustainment, training, and multipurpose. See Table D-4 for a description of the most commonly used M203 rounds.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

D-3

Appendix D

Table D-3. M203 40-mm grenade launcher technical data Feature

Data

Weight: • Launcher, unloaded. •

Launcher, loaded.

•

Rifle and grenade launcher, both fully loaded.

3.0 lbs (1.4 kg). 3.5 lbs (1.6 kg). 11.0 lbs (5.0 kg).

Operational characteristics: •

Action.

•

Sights: 1. 2. 3.

Single shot.

Front. Rear. PSQ-18A Day Night Sight (DNS).

Leaf sight assembly. Quadrant sight. Replaces both the leaf and quadrant sights.

•

Muzzle velocity.

76 mps (250 fps).

•

Maximum range.

About 400 meters (1,312 feet).

•

Maximum effective range: 1. 2.

•

Fire-team sized area target. Vehicle or weapon point target.

350 meters (1,148 feet). 150 meters (492 feet).

Minimum safe firing range (HE): 1. 2.

Training. Combat.

130 meters (426 feet). 31 meters (102 feet).

•

Minimum arming range.

About 14 to 38 meters (46 to 125 feet).

•

Rate of fire.

5-to-7 rounds per minute.

•

Maximum combat load.

36 HE rounds (or per SOP).

References: • FM 3-22.31. •

D-4

TM 9-1010-221-10.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Rifle Squad Gunnery

Table D-4. M203 40-mm grenade launcher ammunition Ammunition

DODIC

Use

High-Explosive, Dual-Purpose (HEDP) Round

B546

The HEDP round has an olive-drab aluminum skirt with a steel cup attached, white markings, and a gold ogive (round head). It penetrates at least 5 cm (2 inches) when fired straight into steel armor at 150 meters or less. The round arms between 14 and 27 meters, causes casualties within a 130-meter radius, and has a kill radius of 5 meters.

High-Explosive (HE) Round

B568, B569, B574, B575

The HE round has an olive-drab aluminum skirt with a steel projectile attached, gold markings, and a yellow ogive. It arms between 14 and 27 meters, produces a ground burst that causes casualties within a 130-meter radius, and has a kill radius of 5 meters.

Star Parachute Round

Green B504 Red B505 White B535

This round is white impact or bar alloy aluminum with black markings. It is used for illumination or signals, is lighter and more accurate than comparable handheld signal rounds, and lowers on an attached parachute at 7 feet per second. The candle burns for about 40 seconds. A raised letter on the top of the round denotes the color of the parachute.

White Star Cluster Round

B536

This round is white impact or bar aluminum alloy with black markings. Also used for illumination or signals, this round’s attached plastic ogive has five raised dots for night identification. It is lighter and more accurate than comparable handheld signal rounds, and burns for about 7 seconds during free fall. Individual stars distinguish its use.

Ground Marker Round

Red B506 Green B508 Yellow B509

This round is light green impact aluminum with black markings. Used for aerial identification and marking the location of Soldiers on the ground, it arms between 15 and 45 meters. If a fuze fails to function on impact, the output mixture provided in the front end of the delay casing backs up the impact feature. The color of the ogive indicates the color of the smoke.

Practice Round

B577, B567

Used for practice, this round is blue zinc or aluminum with white markings. It produces a yellow or orange signature on impact, arms between 14 and 27 meters, and has a danger radius of 20 meters.

CS Round

B537, B567

This round is gray aluminum with a green casing and black markings. This multipurpose round has proven most effective for riot control and during urban operations. It arms between 10 and 30 meters and produces a white cloud of CS gas on impact.

Multiple Projectile Round

B534

This round is olive drab with black markings, has proven to be very effective in thick vegetated areas, and for room clearing. It contains over 2,000 pellets that cast a cone of fire 30-meters wide and 30-meters high at a velocity of 269 meters per second. Always aim multiple projectile rounds at the foot of the target. This round has no mechanical-type fuze.

M249 SAW 5.56-MM MACHINE GUN D-6. The M249 machine gun is a gas-operated, air-cooled, automatic weapon that fires from the open-bolt position. It is belt or magazine fed. Ammunition is fed into the weapon from a 200-round ammunition box

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

D-5

Appendix D

that contains a disintegrating metallic split-link belt or a 100-round ammunition soft pack. As an emergency means of feeding, the M249 can use a 20- or 30-round M16 rifle magazine; however, use of the M16 magazine increases the chance of stoppages. This gun can be fired from the shoulder, hip, or underarm position; from the bipod-steadied position; or from a tripod-mounted position. The machine gun uses several types of 5.56-mm standard military ammunition. Soldiers should use only authorized ammunition that is manufactured to U.S. and NATO specifications. See Tables D-5 and Table D-6 for technical and ammunition data. Table D-5. M249 SAW 5.56-mm machine gun technical data Feature

Data

Weight: • M249. •

M122A1 tripod w/T&E mechanism and pintle.

16.41 lbs 23.7 lbs

Maximum range

3,600 meters

Maximum effective range: • Area:

1,000 meters w/tripod and T&E

Tripod. •

Bipod. Point: Tripod.

•

Bipod. Suppression.

Rates of fire: • Sustained.

•

Rapid.

•

Cyclic.

Basic load, ammunition

1,000 meters 800 meters 800 meters 600 meters 1,000 meters 85 rpm - fired in 3- to 5-round bursts with 3 to 5 seconds between bursts (change barrel every 10 minutes) 200 rpm - fired in 6- to 8-round bursts with 2 to 3 seconds between bursts (change barrel every 2 minutes) 850 rpm - continuous burst (change barrel every minute) 600 rounds (in 200-round drums)

References: • FM 3-22.68. •

D-6

TM 9-1005-201-10.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Rifle Squad Gunnery

Table D-6. M249 SAW 5.56-mm machine gun ammunition Ammunition

DODIC

Use

Cartridge, 5.56-mm ball M855

A059

The M855 cartridge has a gilding, metal-jacketed, lead-alloy core bullet with a steel penetrator. The primer and case are waterproof. A disintegrating metallic split-linked belt links this ammunition so it can feed from the ammunition box. It is identified by a green tip, has a projectile weight of 62 grains, and is 2.3 cm long. This is the NATO standard round. It is effective against personnel and light materials, not vehicles.

Cartridge, 5.56-mm tracer, M856

A064 (see note below)

This cartridge has a projectile weight of 63.7 grains and lacks a steel penetrator. It is identified by an orange tip. The tracer is used for adjustments after observation, incendiary effects, and signaling. When tracer rounds are fired, they are mixed with ball ammunition in a ratio of four ball rounds to one tracer round.

Cartridge, 5.56-mm dummy M199

A060

This cartridge can be identified by the six grooves along the side of its case, beginning about one-half inch from its head. It contains no propellant or primer. The primer well is open to prevent damage to the firing pin. The dummy round is used during mechanical training, dry-fire exercises, and function checks.

Cartridge, 5.56-mm blank M200

A075 (M2 link)

This round has no projectile and is used during training when simulated live fire is desired. Its case mouth is closed with a seven-petal rosette crimp and has a violet tip. The M249 blank-firing attachment (NSN 1005-21-912-8997) must be used to fire this ammunition.

Note. Four-and-one mix (four M855 ball and one M856 tracer) for training and combat has the DODIC A064.

M240B 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN D-7. The M240B machine gun is a tripod-mounted or bipod-supported 7.62-mm machine gun. Designed for ground force use, the M240B is a fully automatic machine gun; fires from the open-bolt position; and is belt fed, gas operated, and air cooled with fixed headspace and timing. This weapon has a butt stock that can be grounded on the M122A1 tripod mount (see TM 9-1005-245-13&P) or integral bipod. See Table D7 and Table D-8 for ammunition and technical data. Table D-7. M240B 7.62-mm machine gun ammunition Ammunition

DODIC

Use

M61 ArmorPiercing

A120

Against light-armor targets.

M62 Tracer

A146

For observation of fire, incendiary effects, signaling, and training.

M80 Ball

A130

Against light, material targets and personnel, and for range training.

M172 Dummy

A159

During mechanical training.

M82 Blank

A111

During training when simulated live fire is desired. (A blank firing attachment must be used to fire this ammunition.)

Note. Four-and-one mix (four M80 ball and one M62 tracer) for training and combat has the DODIC A131.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

D-7

Appendix D

Table D-8. M240B 7.62-mm machine gun technical data Feature

Data

Weight of M240B.

27.6 lbs

Weight of M122A1 tripod w/flex-mount complete.

25 lbs

Maximum range.

3,725 meters

Maximum effective range: • Area:

1,100 meters w/tripod and T&E 1,100 meters 800 meters

Tripod. •

Bipod. Point:

800 meters 600 meters 1,800 meters

Tripod. •

Bipod. Suppression:

Maximum extent of grazing fire – obtainable over level or uniformly sloping terrain.

600 meters

Rates of fire.

Sustained: 100 rpm fired in 6- to 9-round bursts and 4 to 5 seconds between bursts (barrel change every 10 minutes) Rapid: 200 rpm fired in 10- to 13-round bursts and 2 to 3 seconds between bursts (barrel change every 2 minutes) Cyclic: 650-to-950 rounds continuous burst (change barrel every minute).

References: • FM 3-22.68. • TM 9-1005-313-10.

M136 AT4 LIGHTWEIGHT ANTI-ARMOR WEAPON D-8. The M136 AT4 is a lightweight, self-contained, anti-armor weapon that fires a free flight, finstabilized, rocket-type cartridge. Packed in an expendable, one-piece, fiberglass-wrapped tube, the manportable M136 AT4 is designed for right-shoulder firing, and is constructed with a watertight launcher for ease of storage and transportation. Though it can be employed in limited visibility, the M136 AT4 firer must see and identify the target to estimate its range. Unlike the M72-series light anti-tank weapons (LAW), the M136 AT4 launcher does not need to be extended before firing. D-9. The integral, rocket-type cartridge fired by the M136 AT4 consists of a fin assembly with tracer element; a point-initiating, base-detonating, piezoelectric fuze; a warhead body with liner; and a precisionshaped explosive charge. D-10. The M136 AT4’s warhead has excellent penetration ability and lethal after-armor effects. The extremely destructive 440-gram shaped-charge explosive penetrates more than 14 inches of armor. See Table D-9 and Table D-10 for technical data and warhead actions and effects.

D-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Rifle Squad Gunnery

Table D-9. M136AT4 lightweight anti-armor weapon technical data Feature

Data

Weight (complete system)

14.8 lbs (6.7 kg)

Rear sight

Range indicator, graduated in 50-meter increments.

Caliber

84 mm

Minimum range: • Training. •

Combat.

•

Arming.

30 meters (100 ft) 10 meters (33 ft) 10 meters (33 ft)

Maximum range

2,100 meters (6,890 ft)

Maximum effective range

300 meters (985 ft)

References: • FM 3-23.25. •

TM 9-1315-886-12.

Table D-10. M136 AT4 lightweight anti-armor weapon actions and effects Action

Effect

Impact

The nosecone crushes; the impact sensor activates the fuze.

Ignition

The piezoelectric fuze activates the electric detonator. The booster detonates, initiating the main charge.

Penetration

The main charge fires and forces the warhead body liner into a directional gas jet that penetrates the armor plate.

After-Armor Effects (Spalling)

The projectile fragments and incendiary effects produce blinding light and destroy the interior of the target.

Color-Coding

M136 AT4 launchers are marked with color-coded bands. A black with yellow band indicates an HE anti-armor round (early models had a solid black band). A gold or yellow band indicates a field-handling trainer. No band indicates an M287 9-mm tracer bullet trainer.

JAVELIN ANTITANK GUIDED MISSILE D-11. The Javelin is a fire-and-forget, man-portable, medium, anti-armor, shoulder-fired weapon designed with a reusable M98A1 command launch unit (CLU). The CLU houses the daysight, night-vision sight (NVS), controls, and indicators. The round consists of the missile, launch tube assembly (LTA), and battery coolant unit (BCU). The missile contains the guidance section, mid-body section, warhead section, propulsion section, and control actuator section. The LTA serves as the launch platform and missile carrying container.

Basic Skills Trainer D-12. The basic skills trainer (BST) is an indoor training device that consists of a student station (SS) and instructor station (IS). The student station consists of a simulated command launch unit (SCLU) and a missile simulation round (MSR). The IS incorporates a desktop computer, monitor, keyboard, mouse, interconnect cable, and a surge suppressor. BST training exercises use real terrain models, actual visible and infrared (IR) imagery, and matching three-dimensional target models for natural target movements. The gunner sees a realistic, simulated, battlefield.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

D-9

Appendix D

Field Tactical Trainer D-13. The FTT is an outdoor force-on-force trainer used in conjunction with a tactical CLU and simulated round (SR). The FTT includes an IS to monitor the student. The SR is equipped with Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System (MILES).

Missile Simulation Round D-14. The MSR, issued with a simulated launch tube, is a field-handling round used to train gunners proper maintenance and handling of a Javelin round. Its replicated weight and balance are precise, so simulated training is accurate for feel. FTT contains no MSR instruments to monitor this aspect of training

Capabilities and Features D-15. The missile has two gunner-selectable attack modes—top attack or direct attack. Each mode has its own flight path or profile for reaching the target. Top-Attack Mode D-16. Top attack is the default mode when the missile seeker is first activated. In top-attack mode, the missile approaches from above to impact and detonate on top of a target. This capacity allows the gunner to attack a target from the front, rear, or side with increased kill probability. Armored vehicles usually have less protective armor on top. The minimum engagement distance is 150 meters. D-17. The exact profile of the missile flight path depends on the range to the target and is determined automatically by the missile’s on-board software. When firing at a 2,000-meter target, the missile reaches a height of around 160 meters above the battlefield. If a target is under a protective structure, firing in topattack mode will cause the missile to detonate on the structure instead of on the target. The gunner can select the direct-attack mode to counter targets hiding under protective cover. Direct-Attack Mode D-18. Direct-attack mode can be selected only after seeker cool-down, and before lock-on. The gunner pushes the ATTACK SELECT (ATTK SEL) switch on the right handgrip to change attack modes. In direct-attack mode, the missile flies along a more direct path to the target. The missile impacts and detonates on the target’s front, side, or rear. The minimum engagement distance is 65 meters. D-19. The exact profile of the missile-flight path shown in a general configuration depends on the range to the target, and is determined automatically by the missile’s on-board software. With a 2,000-meter target, the missile reaches a height of about 60 meters above the battlefield. This path allows the missile to reach a target under a protective structure. See Table D-11 for technical data for the Javelin.

D-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Rifle Squad Gunnery

Table D-11. Javelin antitank guided missile technical data Javelin Missile System

Surface attack guided missile and M98A1 command launch unit

Type of System

Fire and forget

Crew

One- to three-Soldier teams based on TO&E

Missile modes

Top attack (default), direct attack

Ranges

Top-attack mode minimum effective engagement

150 meters

Maximum effective engagement range (direct-attack and top-attack modes)

2,500 meters

Direct-attack mode minimum effective engagement range

65 meters

Flight Time

About 14 seconds at 2,000 meters

Backblast Area

Primary danger zone extends out 25 meters at a 60-degree (cone shaped) angle Caution zone extends the cone-shaped area out to 100 meters

Propulsion—Two Stage Motor Firing from Inside Enclosures Complete Round (Launch tube assembly with missile and BCU)

BCU

Launch motor ejects the missile from the LTA Flight motor propels the missile to the target Minimum room length

15 feet

Minimum room width

12 feet

Minimum room height

7 feet

Weight

35.14 lb (15.97 kg)

Length

47.60 in (120.90 cm)

Diameter with end caps

11.75 in (29.85 cm)

Inside diameter

5.52 in (1.32 kg)

Weight

2.91 lb (1.32 kg)

Length

8.16 in (20.73 cm)

Width

4.63 in (11.75 cm)

Type

Lithium, non-rechargeable

Life

4 min of BCU time

Coolant gas

Argon

References: • FM 3-22.37. •

TM 9-1425-687-12/TM 9-1425-688-12.

D-20. Soldiers need to follow the following precautions with the Javelin: z Backblast Area. The backblast of the Javelin comes from the firing of the launch motor and the flight motor (see Figure D-1). The Javelin has little recoil because the propellant gases escape to the rear of the weapon. This backblast can damage equipment or seriously injure personnel who are too close to the rear of the LTA at time of firing. The Javelin backblast area extends 100 meters to the rear and up to 25 meters to the sides of the launcher and forms a 60-degree danger area. It is divided into a primary danger zone and two caution areas. „ Primary Danger Area. The primary danger area is a 60-degree included sector, with the apex of the sector at the aft end of the missile launch motor. The primary danger area radius of curvature is 25 meters. Serious injury or fatality is possible for personnel in the

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

D-11

Appendix D

„

„

primary danger area during firing. A portion of the primary danger area has been extended forward to the firing line. This portion is within the range of 1 to 5 meters left and right of launch tube centerline. Caution Area 1. Caution area 1 is an area extending radially (25 meters) from each side of the primary danger zone to the firing line. Serious hearing impairment or damage from frequent exposure could occur to personnel in this area during firings. Personnel should always wear the approved hearing and eye protection when positioned in caution area 1. Caution Area 2. Caution area 2 is identified as a 100-meter radius, aft of the launcher and within the 60-degree sector. This area is affected by the activation of the FM pressure relief system. Caution area 2 is an extension to the rear of the primary danger area. Hearing impairment and eye damage could occur to personnel that are 10 meters beyond the primary danger area during firing. Personnel should always wear the approved hearing and eye protection when positioned in caution area 2.

Figure D-1. Javelin backblast safety zones

DANGER KEEP ALL PERSONNEL CLEAR OF THE BACKBLAST AREA. FLYING DEBRIS PRODUCED BY FIRING A JAVELIN MISSILE COULD INJURE OR KILL ANYONE REMAINING IN THE BACKBLAST AREA.

CAUTION Remove all equipment and debris from the backblast area. Flying debris produced by firing a Javelin missile could badly damage any equipment remaining in the backblast area.

D-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Rifle Squad Gunnery

Javelin Missile D-21. The Javelin missile uses a dual-charged warhead (see Figure D-2). The warhead has a precursor charge and main charge. z Precursor. The precursor charge is a high-explosive antitank (HEAT) shaped charge. Its purpose is to cause reactive armor on the target to detonate before the main charge reaches the armor. Once the reactive armor is penetrated, the target’s main hull is exposed to the warhead’s main charge. If the target is not equipped with reactive armor, the precursor provides additional explosives to penetrate the main armor. z Main. The main charge is the second charge of a dual-charge warhead and is also an HEAT shaped charge. The primary warhead charge is designed to penetrate the target’s main armor to achieve a target kill.

Figure D-2. Javelin missile

WEAPONS QUALIFICATION D-22. Leaders will evaluate squad members’ individual proficiency in using their assigned weapons every 6 months during weapon qualifications. (For detailed training strategies, see the applicable weapon FMs and DA Pam 350-38.)

SECTION II – RIFLE SQUAD FIRE CONTROL AND DISTRIBUTION

PRINCIPLES D-23. Effective direct-fire control requires a rifle squad to acquire the enemy rapidly, mass effects of fire, and achieve decisive results in the close fight. The squad and fire team leader must know how to apply several fundamental principles when planning and executing direct fires. The purpose of these direct-fire principles is not to restrict the actions of subordinates. Applied correctly, they will help the squad accomplish its primary goal of acquiring first and shooting first in any direct-fire engagement. They also give riflemen, machine gunners, and grenadiers the freedom to act quickly upon acquisition of the enemy. The principles of direct-fire control are discussed below.

MASS EFFECTS OF FIRE D-24. The squad masses the effects of its fires to achieve decisive results. Massing entails focusing fires at critical points, distributing the effects, and shifting to new critical points as they appear. Random application of fires is unlikely to have a decisive effect. (Example: Concentrating a squad’s fires at a single target might ensure its destruction or suppression, but probably would not achieve a decisive effect on the enemy formation, personnel, or position.)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

D-13

Appendix D

TASK ORGANIZE D-25. When determining task organization, leaders consider the capabilities and limitations of individual Soldiers. In both offensive and defensive positions, the squad leader selects a position where he can best control his fire teams.

DESTROY THE GREATEST THREAT FIRST D-26. The squad engages targets from most to least dangerous. If two or more equally threatening targets appear, the squad engages the nearest first. Leaders determine specific threat conditions from command guidance for that operational area.

EMPLOY THE BEST WEAPON FOR THE TARGET D-27. The squad has many weapons. Choosing the best weapon for a particular threat increases the likelihood of rapidly destroying or suppressing that threat.

AVOID OVERKILL D-28. Using too many weapons against single targets wastes ammunition and decreases a squad’s ability to acquire and engage multiple targets effectively. Properly distributing squad fires also prevents overkill by keeping the squad from using more ammunition and effort than needed to destroy or suppress a single target. To best distribute direct fire among infantry squads, the squad leader divides his engagement areas (EA) into sectors of fire for each of his fire teams.

MINIMIZE FRIENDLY EXPOSURE D-29. To increase survivability, rifle squads avoid exposure to threat observation and fire, except when they must engage it. Using natural and man-made defilade positions for cover and concealment helps reduce exposure. Additionally, it is important for the squad leader to know how to identify and hand off enemy targets to the Bradley crews.

PLAN FOR EXTREME LIMITED VISIBILITY D-30. Limited visibility fire-control equipment enables a squad to engage enemy forces at nearly the same ranges, day and night. Fog, smoke, blowing sand, and other obscurants can reduce visibility and prevent night-vision-equipped systems from covering their surveillance responsibilities. Such obscurants can also restrict target engagements at normal ranges. Every limited visibility plan relies on coordinating and using the BFV’s thermal capabilities to assist rifle squads, even though rifle squads have their own internal nightvision devices and illumination. Squad leaders must be ready and plan for the need to adjust their fire plans based on visibility conditions and on the acquisition capabilities of their systems.

FRATRICIDE PREVENTION D-31. Leaders use 11 tools to prevent the platoon from causing friendly and civilian casualties (fratricide): z Rules of engagement (ROE). z Weapons control status (WCS). z Weapons safety postures. z Weapons safety procedures. z Combat vehicle and aircraft identification training. z Situational awareness. z Positional awareness. z BFV commander confirmation. z Vehicle recognition markings. z Combat identification panels. z Graphic control measures.

D-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Rifle Squad Gunnery

DEVELOP CONTINGENCIES FOR DIMINISHED CAPABILITIES D-32. Leaders develop engagement plans based on maximum capabilities. They also incorporate backup plans that allow for casualties and damaged or inoperable weapons. Though every possible problem cannot be planned for, leaders can plan for the most likely ones.

FIRE CONTROL MEASURES D-33. To establish a direct-fire standing operating procedures (SOP), the squad leader applies fire control measures. He modifies the direct-fire plan based on mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC) conditions and as reconnaissance permits. Fire control and distribution measures consist either of physical control measures or of simple, concise, clearly written weapons control instructions.

TARGET REFERENCE POINT D-34. The squad leader designates recognizable terrain features as target reference points (TRP). He uses TRPs to control both direct and indirect fire in support of the engagement plan. During movements, halts, and hasty actions, he selects and adjusts TRPs, depending on the terrain he can see at the time. In defense, he assigns TRPs along likely enemy avenues of approach wherever he wants elements to mass fire.

SECTOR OF FIRE D-35. To cover the entire area of responsibility, the squad leader divides it into sectors of fire. He assigns each sector to a fire team, a crew-served weapon crew, or an individual soldier. Sector assignment means responsibility for acquiring and engaging targets in that area. The squad leader must ensure that sectors overlap for complete coverage with the direct-fire plan; the leader can use TRPs, clock directions, terrainbased quadrants, and friendly-based quadrants. The squad leader can also assign secondary sectors of fire to increase mutual support.

PRIMARY DIRECTION OF FIRE D-36. When time is short or reference points are too few to assign a sector of fire, the leader assigns a primary direction of fire (PDF) instead of a TRP. The leader uses the closest TRP, clock direction, cardinal direction, tracer on target, or IR laser pointer to orient the fire teams, crew-served weapon system, or Soldier to a particular battlefield area.

TRIGGER LINE D-37. The trigger line is a prominent feature, natural or man-made, such as a ridge, stream, road, or railroad track. The squad leader uses this feature as a trigger line to initiate an engagement or to distribute fires in depth within a sector.

WEAPONS CONTROL STATUS D-38. There are three levels of WCS that define the conditions (based on target identification criteria) in which friendly elements engage targets. The platoon leaders set and adjust WCS based on the disposition of friendly and enemy forces and on the clarity of the situation; however, squad leaders apply the status within their squad. In general, any mission-anticipated fratricide should be counteracted with heightened restrictive weapons control. The three levels of WCS, in descending order of restriction are— z Weapons hold. Engage only if engaged or ordered to engage. z Weapons tight. Engage only those targets positively identified as enemy. z Weapons free. Engage any targets not positively identified as friendly.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

D-15

Appendix D

ENGAGEMENT PRIORITIES D-39. Engagement priorities are set by the platoon leader and commander. Squad leaders use these priorities as fire control measures to adequately engage and kill the enemy in accordance with the platoon leader’s plan. Engagement priorities serve three functions: z Identify what type(s) of targets to engage first. z Distribute fire among the various types of targets. z Match weapons and ammunition to target type.

CEASE FIRE CRITERIA D-40. Cease fire criteria consists of instructions the squad leader gives to prevent overkill and free the greatest number of systems to acquire and engage other targets.

FIRE PATTERNS D-41. The squad leader distributes and adjusts the fire of the rifle squads into one or more of three basic fire patterns–frontal, cross, and depth. He does this to best cover a threat formation of multiple or simultaneous targets.

Frontal Fire D-42. When targets appear in front of the squad in a lateral configuration, the squad leader initiates frontal fire. The squad members engage targets to their fronts. The left-most flank of the squad engages the leftmost target. The right-most flank of the squad engages the right-most target. As targets are destroyed, the squad shifts their fires toward the center of the enemy formation.

Cross Fire D-43. The squad leader initiates cross fire when targets position themselves laterally in front of the squad, or when obstructions prohibit frontal fire. With cross fire, each squad engages the farthest target on the opposite side of the EA. The right-most flank of the squad engages the left-most target. The left-most flank of the squad engages the right-most target. Firing diagonally across the EA gives the squad the desired flank shots with antitank (AT) weapons and leaves enemy infantry unaware of their compromised positions. If the threat keeps moving forward, cross fire increases the chance of kills and reduces the chance of detection. As the squad destroys its targets, it shifts fire toward the center of the enemy, and from near to far.

Depth Fire D-44. Leaders use depth fire for targets dispersed in columns or column-like formations. The center of the squad engages the closest target while the flanks of the squad engage deeper targets. As the platoon destroys targets, the squad shifts their fires toward the center of the enemy formation.

ENGAGEMENT TECHNIQUES D-45. The squad leader can apply any of eight engagement techniques to destroy or suppress enemy targets, while minimizing friendly exposure. Techniques include alternating, simultaneous, sequential, volley, point, and area fire; time of suppression; and reconnaissance by fire.

ALTERNATING FIRE D-46. The rifle squad alternates fire into an area or onto a specific target. This technique— z Provides constant suppressive fires. z Keeps the enemy from acquiring friendly elements.

D-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Rifle Squad Gunnery

z z

Minimizes rifle squad exposure. Presents multiple points of fire.

SIMULTANEOUS FIRE D-47. All rifle squad members fire into their assigned sectors at the same time. Simultaneous fire achieves maximum destruction and fire superiority.

SEQUENTIAL FIRE D-48. A single soldier fires multiple AT4s in sequence, correcting each subsequent round until he achieves the desired target effect. Firing sequentially lets the Soldier correct his fire based on previous rounds.

VOLLEY FIRE D-49. The squad fires volleys to rapidly mass the effects of their fire or to gain fire superiority. (Example: A squad could initiate a support-by-fire operation with volley fire, and then use alternating or sequential fire to maintain suppression.) Firing in volleys also increases the chance that certain anti-armor weapons will hit and kill their targets. (Example: To rapidly destroy a BMP that is engaging a friendly position, the rifle squad can volley AT4 fire onto it.)

POINT FIRE D-50. This process directs all weapons fire onto a specific target such as a machine gun or antitank guided missile (ATGM) position. Spreading out the squad on the ground improves point fire because the squad can then hit the target from multiple directions.

AREA FIRE D-51. For numerous or less obvious enemy positions, the squad distributes fire over a large area. The squad leader assigns each fire team a sector of fire within the target area. This ensures that the squad covers the entire target area with fire and observation.

TIME OF SUPPRESSION D-52. This is the time period, specified by the squad leader, when the squad must suppress an enemy position or force. Both the platoon’s rifle squads and BFVs receive the task to suppress an area in support of another element’s assault.

RECONNAISSANCE BY FIRE D-53. This is the process of engaging possible enemy locations to elicit a tactical response such as return fire or movement. This response helps the squad leaders acquire targets accurately and mass fires against an enemy element.

DIRECT FIRE D-54. A well rehearsed direct-fire SOP ensures that all members of the squad react quickly and predictably. The squad leader bases each element of a direct-fire plan on anticipated conditions, squad capabilities, and in support of the platoon’s plan. D-55. Choosing a standard, respective position for TRPs allows the squad leader to quickly establish and communicate his location (for example, the squad leader might number all reference points from left to right). One or two TRPs usually suffice for a squad during movements, halts, and hasty actions. D-56. The squad leader assigns sectors and identifies engagement priorities to ensure the squad acquires all targets and distributes fires effectively. One technique incorporates the squad leader and his squads in a

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

D-17

Appendix D

search to engage near-range troops while the mounted section observes for mid- to long-range light-armor fighting vehicles. D-57. The platoon leader designates a weapons-readiness posture for established sectors and engagement priorities. The squad leader is responsible for executing the weapons-readiness posture for established sectors and engagement priorities. D-58. Executing a standing fire pattern enables the squad to distribute fire while engaging multiple, similar targets. When implemented, the squad leader engages all close-range targets while working their way through the enemy formation. At the same time, the mounted section engages all mid- to long-range targets while working their way through the enemy formation ensuring interlocking fields of fire. D-59. It is the platoon leader who sets standard engagement techniques to achieve desired target effects and minimize friendly exposure. (Example: One infantry squad suppression pattern technique engages initially with simultaneous fires, then sustains suppression with alternating fires as each weapon fires or bursts a given number of rounds. On the squad leader’s command, the squad initiates simultaneous fire, and then reverts to alternating fires.) D-60. It is also the platoon leader’s responsibility to select an initial WCS that restricts the chance of fratricide while engaging the enemy. Weapons tight is a good initial WCS. D-61. The platoon SOP should implement signals for shifting fire that all members can hear and see. The SOP could use a green pyrotechnic with a certain code word to shift fires, and a red pyrotechnic with another assigned code word to adjust or cease fires. It is his responsibility for all platoon members to possess the knowledge of the signals before execution. D-62. The squad leader must plan for degraded capabilities and loss. (Example: If an automatic rifleman or anti-armor (M249, M240B) gunner becomes a casualty, the squad leader must reorganize immediately, ensuring the most casualty producing weapons are manned first. Additionally the squad leader may need to readjust or reassign sectors of responsibility.

SECTOR SKETCHES D-63. The squad leader uses sector sketches to make sure he covers his acquisition and engagement responsibilities to orient subordinate elements, provide information to higher leaders, and control fires. After confirming weapons positions, he sketches his own engagement plan (see Figure D-3). z Each position prepares sector sketches or range cards (for crew-served weapons) on acetate overlays to a scale established by the squad leader. z Each fighting position submits their completed sector sketch or range card to their team leader for approval. The squad leader consolidates the sketches, prepares his sector sketch, and submits one of two copies to the platoon leader. If approved, the second copy is the sketch from which the squad leader fights. z Every sector sketch must show— „ Main terrain features. „ TRPs. „ Primary and alternate positions. „ Primary and secondary sectors of fire and maximum engagement lines. „ Primary directions of fire or final protective lines. „ Dead spaces. „ Observation post(s). „ Obstacles. „ Indirect fires associated with the engagement plan. „ Adjacent element positions. „ Remount point(s). „ Alternate fighting positions for BFVs and squads.

D-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Rifle Squad Gunnery

Figure D-3. Sector sketch

SECTION III – EXERCISE DEVELOPMENT D-64. The principle focus of LFXs is weapon integration in a tactical operation. Squads must learn the procedures to command, control, and distribute well-aimed, effective fires, including small arms, indirect fire support assets, and other weapons, demolitions, and pyrotechnics. D-65. The commander determines which STP 7-11B1-SM-TG collective task will be evaluated based on his mission-essential task list (METL) and command guidance. D-66. The commander, with help from his master gunner, selects enemy target arrays that the rifle squad can expect to see in combat. These target arrays are developed based on threat analysis and command emphasis. Enemy scenarios must include the ability for all organic weapons for the squad to be employed, to include AT targets. D-67. Commanders should include night and chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) conditions into scenarios. Soldiers should wear the complete individual MILES for situational training exercises and dry and blank runs. They should wear the harnesses during live-fire exercises, which allow exercise controllers to cause a near miss or to kill personnel for tactical errors or to induce stress. Sustainment (casualty evacuation [CASEVAC] and resupply) can be added to the scenario.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

D-19

Appendix D

PREREQUISITES D-68. Squads must meet the following prerequisites before an LFX: z Each soldier must have qualified with his individual weapon (M16A2, M16A4, M4, M203, M240B, and M249) within the previous six months. z Javelin gunners must have certified with the Javelin within the past three months.

EVALUATION D-69. Commanders will assess each squad with a rating of “T” for trained, “P” for needs practice, or “U” for untrained. Commanders and observer/controller (O/C) trainers use T&EOs from STP 7-11B1-SM-TG, the dismounted infantry target exposure matrix in Chapter 8, and the evaluation procedures from Chapter 9 to assist them in accurately assessing the squad.

RIFLE SQUAD GUNNERY TRAINING PROGRAM D-70. Units must develop training programs that train and evaluate infantry squads. Successful training programs use the individual tasks that serve as building blocks to support identified collective tasks. Collective tasks build upon each other beginning with fire team, then squad, and finishing with platoon collective tasks. Integration of the BFV or BFV section should begin with execution of Rifle Squad Table IV. The BFV(s), if not Combat Table VI qualified, can execute these tables dry-fire or using appended training devices. Mounted and dismounted elements training as a team must start at the earliest opportunity. This gets them both prepared to take part in integrated training during the advanced gunnery tables.

PRELIMINARY RIFLE SQUAD GUNNERY TRAINING D-71. Preliminary rifle squad gunnery training consists of fire and maneuver training as a buddy team (Rifle Squad Table I) and as an infantry fire team (Rifle Squad Table II). Preliminary rifle squad gunnery tables, as with all rifle squad live-fire tables should be conducted using the crawl (dry fire), walk (blank fire with MILES) and run (live fire) method of training.

RIFLE SQUAD TABLE I, BUDDY TEAM/FIRE AND MOVEMENT EXERCISE D-72. The purpose of Table I is to train and evaluate individual movement techniques as part of a buddy team in a live-fire and maneuver exercise. Table I should be conducted as a crawl (dry fire) walk (blank fire) and run (live-fire exercise) event. Tasks evaluated include— z Individual. Movement under Direct Fire (071-326-0502). „ High crawl. „ Low crawl. „ Rush. „ Select Temporary Fighting Positions (071-326-0513). z Buddy Team. „ Move Over, Through, or Around Obstacles (Except Minefields) (071-326-0503). „ React to Indirect Fire while Dismounted (071-326-0510).

D-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Rifle Squad Gunnery

RIFLE SQUAD TABLE II, FIRE TEAM MANEUVER EXERCISE D-73. The purpose of Table II is to train and evaluate a fire team’s ability to live fire and maneuver. This is the first table that the fire team leader is able to maneuver and control the fire of his team in a live-fire event. Table II should be conducted as a crawl (dry fire) walk (blank fire) and run (LFX) event. Tasks evaluated include— z Move as a Member of a Fire Team (071-326-0510). z Control Movement of a Fire Team (071-326-5605). z Conduct the Maneuver of an M2 BFV Section/Squad (071-420-0007-A).

BASIC RIFLE SQUAD GUNNERY TRAINING D-74. Basic rifle squad gunnery training consists of— z Squad Battle Drill Exercise (Rifle Squad Table III). z Squad Situational Training Exercises (Rifle Squad Table IV). z Rifle Squad Practice (Rifle Squad Table V). z Rifle Squad Live Fire Exercise (Rifle Squad Table VI). D-75. Preliminary rifle squad gunnery tables should be conducted using the crawl (dry fire), walk (blank fire with MILES) and run (live fire) method of training. Once a squad has completed the battery of rifle squad tables in the basic rifle squad gunnery training, it is ready for advanced gunnery training. Rifle Squad Table VI is a prerequisite for Combat Table XII.

RIFLE SQUAD TABLE III, SQUAD BATTLE DRILL EXERCISES D-76. The purpose of Table III is to train and evaluate a rifle squad’s ability to exercise battle drills in a field setting. A battle drill is a collective action executed by a platoon or smaller element without applying a deliberate decision-making process and generally supports other collective tasks. Battle drills that are identified as a platoon battle drill can and should still be executed either as a platoon in Combat Table X and XI or conducted as a squad as part of a larger element. Tasks evaluated include— z Battle Drill 1. Platoon Attack (Dismounted). z Battle Drill 1A. Platoon Attack (Mounted). z Battle Drill 2. React to Contact (Platoon or Squad) (Dismounted). z Battle Drill 2A. React to Contact (Section or Platoon) (Mounted). z Battle Drill 3. Break Contact (Platoon or Squad) (Dismounted). z Battle Drill 3A. Break Contact (Section or Platoon) (Mounted). z Battle Drill 4. React to Ambush (Platoon or Squad) (Dismounted). z Battle Drill 4A. React to Ambush (Platoon) (Mounted). z Battle Drill 5. Enter Building/Clear Room/Building (Platoon). z Battle Drill 6. Enter/Clear a Trench (Platoon). z Battle Drill 7. Knock Out Bunkers (Platoon). z Battle Drill 8. Conduct Initial Breach of a Mined Wire Obstacle (Platoon).

RIFLE SQUAD TABLE IV, SQUAD SITUATIONAL TRAINING EXERCISES D-77. The purpose of Rifle Squad Table IV is to train and evaluate a squad’s ability to execute collective tasks in an STX. This is the first opportunity for new squad leaders to maneuver both fire teams as an evaluated event. Tasks evaluated include, but are not limited to, those found in STP 7-11B1-SM-TG. Collective training events for the rifle squad should be organized as part of a larger element.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

D-21

Appendix D

RIFLE SQUAD TABLE V, SQUAD PRACTICE D-78. The purpose of Rifle Squad Table V is to train and evaluate a squad’s ability to execute collective tasks in a live-fire training exercise. This is the first opportunity for squad leaders to fire and maneuver both fire teams during a new gunnery density as an evaluated event. Tasks evaluated include, but are not limited to those found in STP 7-11B1-SM-TG. Collective training events for the rifle squad should be organized as part of a larger element. This table is the building block to Rifle Squad Table VI (Squad Qualification) and should focus on collective tasks or battle drills identified as a firing task for subsequent tables.

RIFLE SQUAD TABLE VI, SQUAD QUALIFICATION D-79. The purpose of Rifle Squad Table VI is to qualify rifle squads. Rifle Squad Table VI should encompass an entire operation from troop-leading procedures through consolidation and reorganization. Rifle squads should be evaluated on their ability to effectively move tactically, control organic fires, and report/communicate as a squad and as part of a BFV platoon. Well-prepared squad qualification tables are interactive (forces squad and team leaders to make clear, decisive decisions) and multi-echeloned (trains platoon leaders to fight both dismounted and mounted elements).

D-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Appendix E

Engineer Squad Qualification Tables As the engineer regiment transforms into a modular force, maneuver commanders are responsible for the training and readiness oversight of their embedded engineers. It is the engineer regiment’s responsibility to provide maneuver commanders with the tools to qualify their engineer platoons and companies, to provide quality training oversight, and to validate engineer training. Engineer Qualification Tables (EQT) play an important role in this process. Commanders can use the 12 EQTs to determine which tasks to train, qualify, and certify based on their assessment and mission analysis. Note. Training is resourced only by DA Pam 350-38. Appendix E explains the use of the EQTs, which are intended to assist maneuver commanders and the engineer regiment by providing a standard methodology required to train individuals, squads, and platoons. Sequentially, each EQT encompasses the tasks required for Brigade Combat Team (BCT) mission success at those three levels. The commander can then focus the EQT on the unit’s mission by adding or deleting tasks based on the unit’s capabilities, mission analysis, and modularity build. Appendix E is organized in a manner parallel to the infantry and armor qualification tables. This organization provides a common-sense approach to training by echelon. Individual tasks are trained and tested first, followed by squad and platoon tasks. This appendix includes introductory information about the EQT concept. Commanders are encouraged to develop a local scenario that is tactically sound for the range layout available and that directly reflects their units’ capabilities and missions. The training strategy provides the actual tables and the tasks that create a foundation for the commander’s training scenario. As units select tasks, their methodology should follow. A platoon collective task drives a squad collective task that drives an individual task. Each engineer squad/team must have a qualified squad leader who can exercise sound judgment based on his ability to perform the leader/individual tasks that support the unit’s mission-essential task list (METL). In accordance with (IAW) DA Pam 350-38, the squad/team must have Soldiers who meet the standard for individual weapons qualification, mines, and demolitions, and it must be able to man assigned crewserved weapons (M2, M240B, MK19) with qualified gunners. M2A2 ODS-Eequipped units must be qualified on Bradley Table VI. The vehicle commander (VC) must meet crew qualification IAW Chapter 9 and DA Pam 350-38.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

E-1

Appendix E

Contents Section I – Concept ...................................E-2 Section II – Training Strategy ...................E-2 Section III – Proposed Engineer Qualification Tables ..................................E-3 Conduct of Table I–Individual and Crew Weapons Qualification ...............E-3 Conduct of Table II–Leader Demolition, Munitions, and Explosive Hazards Certification...........................E-3 Conduct of Table III–Individual Demolition, Munitions, and Explosive Hazards Certification...........................E-4 Conduct of Table IV–Individual Certification .........................................E-4 Conduct of Table V–Squad React to Contact ...............................................E-4 Conduct of Table VI–Squad Sapper Training ...............................................E-4 Conducts of Table VII–Squad Training (Dry) ......................................E-5 Conduct of Table VIII–Squad Qualification ........................................E-5 Conduct of Table IX–Platoon React to Contact ...........................................E-5 Conduct of Table X–Platoon Sapper Training ...............................................E-5 Conduct of Table XI–Platoon Training (Dry) ......................................E-5 Conduct of Table XII–Platoon Qualification ........................................E-5

Evaluation Guidance .......................... E-5 Standards and Training Commission Resources .......................................... E-6 Unit Status Report .............................. E-6 Section IV – List of Individual Tasks for Engineer Qualification Tables I through IV ................................................................ E-6 Table I–Tasks that Support Individual and Crew Weapons Qualification ....................................... E-7 Tables II Through IV–Leader and Individual Training and Certification ... E-7 Section V – List of Collective Tasks for Engineer Qualification Tables V through VIII................................................ E-9 Table V–Squad React to Contact ....... E-9 Table VI–Squad Sapper Training ....... E-9 Table VII–Squad Training (Dry)........ E-10 Table VIII–Squad Qualification ......... E-11 Section VI – List of Collective Tasks for Engineer Qualification Tables IX through XII............................................... E-11 Table IX–Platoon React to Contact .. E-12 Table X–Platoon Sapper Training .... E-12 Table XI–Advanced Training (Dry) ... E-13 Table XII–Advanced Qualification .... E-13

SECTION I – CONCEPT E-1. The EQTs are designed to establish a common standard for skills that are unique to combat engineers in a BCT unit or separate company. These qualification tables add structure to unit training plans, articulate combat readiness, and help units compete for installation ranges and resources. The tables also assist the unit by outlining a strategy for evaluating training readiness for individuals, squads, and platoons. Establishing these training and evaluation standards allows commanders to make efficient use of training resources, to articulate readiness, and most important, to ensuring consistent battlefield results regardless of which engineer unit is in support.

SECTION II – TRAINING STRATEGY E-2. Maneuver commanders must resource qualification training IAW DA PAM 350-38, this includes coordination and evaluation of engineer training. Engineer unit commander must have the flexibility to identify particular tasks to qualify their Soldiers based on the unit’s mission and future deployments. The EQTs are designed to permit preliminary training, proficiency training, and qualification of engineer units. They are designed to develop and test the proficiency of individual, squad and platoon techniques at the basic, intermediate and advanced levels for both active and reserve components. The series of combat engineer tasks or engagements in each table is intended to duplicate typical battlefield tasks under realistic

E-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engineer Squad Qualification Tables

conditions, against likely situations and target arrays, and within safety and resource constraints of live-fire ranges. The tables are to be accomplished sequentially. E-3. The EQTs enable commanders to determine squad and platoon training readiness ratings. Leaders and Soldiers must qualify CMF 21Bs assigned to the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) with slight variances. The HBCT engineer company is equipped with the Engineer Bradley Fighting Vehicles (EBFV). During the preliminary and basic phases, the EBFV crew will train and qualify on EQTs I through VIII first, then conduct the Gunnery Tables (GT) I through VIII IAW standards in this manual. All other 21Bs in squads/platoons assigned to the HBCT will train and qualify on EQTs I through VIII. During the advanced phase of gunnery, engineer platoons will conduct EQTs IX through XII.

SECTION III – PROPOSED ENGINEER QUALIFICATION TABLES

CONDUCT OF TABLE I–INDIVIDUAL AND CREW WEAPONS QUALIFICATION E-4. Table I is designed to train each member of a combat engineer squad on his basic weapon. These tasks develop coordination skills and provide the Soldier with an opportunity to identify individual strengths and weaknesses. The crew section of Table I will be conducted with an existing crew. Table I tasks are constructed to support the remainder of the EQTs. Units will man assigned individual and crewserved weapons with qualified gunners and assistant gunners IAW DA PAM 350-38.

CONDUCT OF TABLE II–LEADER DEMOLITION, MUNITIONS, AND EXPLOSIVE HAZARDS CERTIFICATION E-5. All leaders in the combat engineer platoon must be certified on demolitions, munitions, and explosives hazards within 90 days of assignment. All leaders will recertify annually. They must complete Table II tasks within a three-week period before executing Tables III and IV. Companies determine which tasks to train and certify based on their training assessment and mission analysis. At a minimum, leaders will certify on the following common core Sapper tasks: z Demolitions: „ Determine safe distance when firing explosives. „ Direct placement of timber, steel, breaching, and cratering charges. „ Calculate timber, steel, breaching, and cratering charges. „ Prepare demolition reconnaissance report. „ Calculate field expedient explosives. „ Clear misfires. z Reconnaissance: „ Prepare a route reconnaissance overlay. „ Determine the radius of curves. „ Determine stream velocity. „ Determine the percent of slope. „ Determine gap width. „ Conduct road, tunnel, ford, bridge, and engineer reconnaissance. „ Determine the rapid field classification of a fixed bridge. z Explosives hazards: „ Direct construction of wire entanglements. „ Conduct a breach of a minefield. „ Determine logistical requirements for wire obstacles. „ Conduct route sweep operations.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

E-3

Appendix E

„ „

Supervise operational minefield clearing operations. Supervise minefield breaching operations.

CONDUCT OF TABLE III–INDIVIDUAL DEMOLITION, MUNITIONS, AND EXPLOSIVE HAZARDS CERTIFICATION E-6. Squad leaders conduct individual training of their squads on demolitions, munitions, and explosive hazards using inert training devices. This is a hands-on, performance-oriented table that requires the Soldier to demonstrate proficiency in mine and demolition procedures using inert training aids. All leaders in the platoon are responsible for ensuring that they and their subordinate leaders are qualified in Table II before executing Table III or IV tasks. At a minimum, squad leaders will certify their Soldiers on the following common core Sapper tasks: z Demolitions: „ Construct demolition firing systems. „ Prime military explosives. „ Construct demolition initiating system. z Explosives hazards: „ Perform detection operations with the AN/PSS-12, and AN/PSS-14 mine detectors. „ Install wire obstacle materials.

CONDUCT OF TABLE IV–INDIVIDUAL CERTIFICATION E-7. The platoon certifies squad members on demolitions, munitions, and explosive hazards using live demolitions (if available). Note. The commander must use collective training ammunition IAW DA PAM 350-38.

CONDUCT OF TABLE V–SQUAD REACT TO CONTACT E-8. This table is designed to train all members of the combat-engineer squad on fire control and distribution in offensive and defense engagements. Squads train under locally developed scenarios that are tactically sound and supported by the existing range layout using the following drills: z React to ambush. z React to indirect fire. z Break contact. z React to an improvised explosive device (IED). z Evacuate injured person.

CONDUCT OF TABLE VI–SQUAD SAPPER TRAINING E-9. Squads train on the following Sapper tasks: z Conduct reconnaissance. z Create a lane in an obstacle. z Clear obstacles using demolitions. z Construct wire obstacles. z Breach a passageway into a building.

E-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engineer Squad Qualification Tables

CONDUCTS OF TABLE VII–SQUAD TRAINING (DRY) E-10. Squads execute Sapper tasks in a tactical scenario using blank ammunition, simulated demolitions, and inert munitions.

CONDUCT OF TABLE VIII–SQUAD QUALIFICATION E-11. Squads execute Sapper tasks in a tactical scenario using live ammunition, demolitions, and inert munitions. The engineer company commander will evaluate and qualify squads. Note. The commander must use collective training ammunition IAW DA PAM 350-38.

CONDUCT OF TABLE IX–PLATOON REACT TO CONTACT E-12. Platoons conduct advanced react to contact training and practice shoot, move, and communications skills at the platoon level. Commanders determine which tasks will be trained and certified based on their assessment and mission analysis.

CONDUCT OF TABLE X–PLATOON SAPPER TRAINING E-13. Platoons train on four Sapper missions: z Breach obstacles. z Detect, neutralize, and mark explosive hazards. z Emplace situational obstacles. z Conduct clearing operations (obstacle, route, and area).

CONDUCT OF TABLE XI–PLATOON TRAINING (DRY) E-14. Platoons execute missions in a tactical scenario using blank ammunition, simulated demolitions, and inert munitions.

CONDUCT OF TABLE XII–PLATOON QUALIFICATION E-15. Platoons execute missions in a tactical scenario using live ammunitions, demolitions, and inert munitions. Battalion/maneuver commanders evaluate and qualify platoons. If resources are available, the ideal platoon qualification scenario entails conducting this table as part of a combined arms training exercise/qualification event.

TRAINING FREQUENCY E-16. Table I through Table VIII are designed to be conducted semiannually, while Tables IX through XII are designed to be conducted annually. A company commander or maneuver commander may increase the frequency based on his own assessment of unit proficiency and training requirements.

EVALUATION GUIDANCE E-17. The training and evaluation outlines are provided for the collective tasks identified in this EQT. The field manual (FM) 5-Drill provides the information needed to train to standard for drills. EQTs IX through XII will be evaluated IAW Chapter 11, Section II.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

E-5

Appendix E

STANDARDS AND TRAINING COMMISSION RESOURCES E-18. Analysis shows that current Standards and Training Commission Resources (STRAC) requirements are sufficient. Details are the following: z Table I. Usage rates for small arms are resourced IAW DA Pam 350-38. z Table II. Certification will be completed with inert Class V. z Table III. This entails inert training only. z Table IV. DA Pam 350-38 does not resource this certification. Use of inert training aids is recommended. z Table V. This training should be conducted with blanks (Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System [MILES] gear) and pyrotechnics. Statistics show blanks usage rates are very low throughout the Army and are projected to remain low. z Table VI. Urban breaching is resourced for infantry only by DA. See TC 90-1 for guidance in developing training. z Table VII. No Class V issues are applicable in the walk phase. Blanks are plentiful. z Table VIII. All training is resourced in DA Pam 350-38. z Table IX. The following considerations apply: „ Walk phase–dry fire 2. „ Crawl phase–blanks 3. „ Run phase–use live rounds and SRTA when applicable. z Table X. All training is resourced in DA Pam 350-38. z Table XI. All training is resourced in DA Pam 350-38. z Table XII. Class V is allocated for collective training. All Class V should be harvested when retraining and extra qualification is required by platoons. Note. Live ammunition is resourced for qualification and collective training only IAW DA Pam 350-38. Commanders have the option to assess their annual allocation of ammunition early in the training process to determine whether use of live ammunition for individual certification (Table III) will improve soldier readiness and build confidence.

UNIT STATUS REPORT E-19. The unit commander uses EQTs as a tool to assist in developing the unit’s annual training and in providing input to determine the unit’s T-Rating in the unit status report (USR).

SECTION IV – LIST OF INDIVIDUAL TASKS FOR ENGINEER QUALIFICATION TABLES I THROUGH IV E-20. Table I is designed to train each member of a combat engineer squad on his basic weapon. These tasks develop coordination skills and provide a Soldier with an opportunity to identify individual strengths and weaknesses. The crew section of Table I should be conducted with an existing crew. Table I tasks are constructed so they will support the remainder of the tables. Tables II through IV are individual and leader training and certification. Squad leaders conduct PMI for individual and crew-served weapons and qualify with their assigned weapons. They also certify and conduct individual training on munitions, explosive hazards, and demolitions. Squads train on tasks covering preliminary react to contact, react to ambush, react to indirect fire, break contact, react to an IED, and evacuate injured personnel. Refer to the attached individual tasks supporting the EQT training. These baseline skills will be reinforced throughout the training events.

E-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engineer Squad Qualification Tables

E-21. Each engineer squad/team must have a qualified squad leader (commander’s judgment based on the Soldier’s ability to perform the leader/individual tasks that support the unit’s mission/capabilities). Units must have Soldiers who meet the standards for individual weapon qualification, mines, and demolitions training IAW DA Pam 350-38. Units must be able to man assigned individual and crew-served weapons (M2, M136, M240B, M249, MK19) with qualified gunners and assistant gunners IAW DA Pam 350-38.

TABLE I–TASKS THAT SUPPORT INDIVIDUAL AND CREW WEAPONS QUALIFICATION E-22. This table is designed to train all members of an engineer platoon on individual/crew weapons. It will be executed using standard weapons and ranges according to the appropriate FMs, which are listed with the applicable weapon systems: z FM 3-22.9, M16A1 rifle and M16A2 rifle marksmanship. z FM 3-22.68, M249 light machine gun. z FM 3-22.37, Javelin medium anti-armor weapon system. z FM 3-22.27, MK19, 44-mm grenade machine gun. z FM 3-23.30, grenade and pyrotechnic symbols. z FM 3-22.31, 40-mm grenade launcher, M203. z FM 3-23.35, combat training with pistols and revolvers. z FM 3-22.65, Browning machine gun, caliber .50, M2.

TABLES II THROUGH IV–LEADER AND INDIVIDUAL TRAINING AND CERTIFICATION DEMOLITIONS E-23. Training tasks are the following: z 052-193-1310, Construct demolition firing systems. z 052-193-1311, Prime military explosives. z 052-193-1312, Construct demolition initiating system. z 052-193-2014, Determine the safe distance when firing explosives. z 052-193-2015, Direct placement of timber-cutting charges. z 052-193-2016, Direct placement of steel-cutting charges. z 052-193-2017, Direct placement of breaching charges. z 052-193-2018, Direct placement of cratering charges. z 052-193-3022, Calculate timber–cutting charges. z 052-193-3023, Calculate steel–cutting charges. z 052-193-3024, Calculate breaching charges. z 052-193-3025, Calculate explosive requirements for road craters. z 052-193-3054, Prepare a demolition reconnaissance report. z 052-193-3070, Calculate concrete-stripping charges. z 052-193-2030, Clear misfires. z 052-221-1008, Construct a door breaching charge. z 052-221-1010, Place explosive urban breaching charges.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

E-7

Appendix E

RECONNAISSANCE E-24. Training tasks are the following: z 052-196-2002, Determine the radius of curves. z 052-196-2004, Determine stream velocity. z 052-196-2101, Determine the percent of slope. z 052-196-2103, Determine gap width. z 052-196-3030, Prepare a road reconnaissance report. z 052-196-3031, Prepare a tunnel reconnaissance report. z 052-196-3032, Prepare a ford reconnaissance report. z 052-196-3033, Prepare a bridge reconnaissance report. z 052-196-3035, Prepare an engineer reconnaissance report. z 052-196-3065, Prepare a route reconnaissance overlay. z 052-196-3150, Conduct a route reconnaissance. z 052-196-4022, Determine the rapid field classification of a fixed bridge.

EXPLOSIVES HAZARDS E-25. Training tasks are the following: z 071-325-4407, Employ hand grenades. z 071-325-4425, Employ an M18A1 claymore mine. z 071-325-4426, Recover an M18A1 claymore mine. z 052-192-1270, React to a possible IED. z 052-192-1271, Identify visual indicators of an IED. z 052-192-3261, React to an IED attack. z 052-192-3262, Prepare for an IED threat prior to movement. z 052-192-1141, Load a multi-delivery mine system (Volcano). z 052-192-1231, Perform preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) on the mine clearing line charge (MICLIC). z 052-192-1232, Prepare a modular pack mine system (MOPMS) for operation in the hardwired mode. z 052-192-1233, Identify the components of a multi-delivery mine system (Volcano). z 052-192-2077, Operate a ground Volcano system. z 052-192-2080, Perform Volcano bit and arm test. z 052-192-2081, Perform a Volcano mine canister test. z 052-192-2082, Operate a Volcano dispenser control unit. z 052-192-2083, Perform troubleshooting procedures on a Volcano. z 052-192-2030, Operate a MOPMS. z 052-192-1251, React to explosive hazard visual indicators. z 052-192-1253, Perform self-extraction from an explosive hazard area. z 052-192-1254, Perform casualty extraction from an explosive hazard area. z 052-192-1258, Conduct a booby trap search. z 052-192-1266, Locate mines by probing. z 052-192-1269, Detect explosive-hazard indicators by visual means. z 093-401-5040, React to unexploded ordnance hazards. z 052-193-1101, Install an M142 multipurpose firing device. z 052-193-1102, Remove an M142 multipurpose firing device. z 052-195-1020, Install wire obstacle materials.

E-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engineer Squad Qualification Tables

z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z

052-192-2026, Direct a minefield marking party. 052-192-2084, Direct a MICLIC loading team. 052-195-2101, Direct construction of wire entanglements. 052-192-3060, Conduct a breach of a minefield. 052-192-3140, Direct the mounting of a Volcano dispenser on a ground vehicle. 052-192-3141, Direct the removal of a Volcano dispenser from a ground vehicle. 052-192-3142, Direct the operation of a ground Volcano system. 052-192-3165, Supervise the installation of Volcano minefield. 052-192-3166, Supervise the installation of a MOPMS minefield. 052-192-3177, Supervise MICLIC operations. 052-195-3067, Determine logistical requirements for wire obstacles. 052-192-4045, Conduct route sweep operations. 052-192-4052, Supervise operational minefield clearing operations. 052-192-4053, Supervise minefield breaching operations. 052-192-4110, Determine Volcano minefield logistical requirements. 052-192-4112, Determine MOPMS minefield logistical requirements. 052-221-1006, Perform a ballistic breach with a 12-gauge shotgun.

SECTION V – LIST OF COLLECTIVE TASKS FOR ENGINEER QUALIFICATION TABLES V THROUGH VIII E-26. Tables V through VIII are conducted under locally developed scenarios that are tactically sound and supported by the existing range layout and the unit’s capabilities. These tables are designed to be progressive in nature in that the conditions change for each table while the tasks remain the same. Table V is designed to train all members of the combat engineer squad on fire control and distribution in offensive and defense engagements. Tables VI through VIII begin at the basic level to provide the engineer squad with training in developing mobility assessments, detecting and neutralizing explosive hazards, and supporting mobility through urban terrain.

TABLE V–SQUAD REACT TO CONTACT E-27. Squads train on the following battle drills: z Conduct action on contact (platoon/squad), 07-3-9013. z Evacuate casualties, 0 8-2-0004. z React to a possible ground-emplaced IED, 05-2-3091. z React to an IED attack, 052-192-3261.

TABLE VI–SQUAD SAPPER TRAINING E-28. Squads train on the following Sapper battle drills: z Perform an obstacle and restriction reconnaissance, 05-3-1004. z Create a lane in an obstacle. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using mechanical techniques, 05-3-1001. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using manual techniques, 05-3-1003. z Clear obstacle using demolitions. „ Clear a footpath through an obstacle with a Bangalore torpedo, 05-4-D0003. „ Create a footpath through an obstacle with an APOBS, 05-4-D0014.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

E-9

Appendix E

Create a lane with a MICLIC, 05-4-D0005. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using explosive techniques, 05-3-1000. Identify/neutralize explosive hazards. „ React to a possible ground-emplaced IED, 05-2-3091. „ React to an IED attack, 052-192-3261. Emplace munitions and sensors. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. „ Emplace a disrupt/fix Volcano (ground) minefield, 05-4-D0008. „ Emplace a MOPMS, disrupt, or fix minefield, 05-3-2012. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. Construct a wire obstacle, 05-3-2019. Breach a window, door, and wall. „ Breach a door with explosive techniques, 05-4-0821. „ Breach a door with manual techniques, 05-4-0822. „ Breach a window with explosive techniques, 05-4-0823. „ Breach a window with manual techniques, 05-4-0824. „ Breach a wall with explosive techniques (non-RWBK), 05-4-0825. „ Breach a wall with manual techniques, 05-4-0826. „

z

z

z z

TABLE VII–SQUAD TRAINING (DRY) E-29. Squads execute Sapper battle drills in a tactical scenario using blank ammunition, simulated demolitions, and inert munitions. Drill Updated in 2005 located on the Reimer Digital Library (RDL) or Army Training Information Architecture (ATIA) on Army Knowledge Online (AKO). Execution is done with inert devices. E-30. Squads train on the following Sapper battle drills: z Perform an obstacle and restriction reconnaissance, 05-3-1004. z Create a lane in an obstacle. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using mechanical techniques, 05-3-1001. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using manual techniques, 05-3-1003. z Clear obstacle using demolitions. „ Clear a footpath through an obstacle with a Bangalore torpedo, 05-4-D0003. „ Create a footpath through an obstacle with an APOBS, 05-4-D0014. „ Create a lane with a MICLIC, 05-4-D0005. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using explosive techniques, 05-3-1000. z Identify/neutralize explosive hazards. „ React to a possible ground-emplaced IED, 05-2-3091. „ React to an IED attack, 052-192-3261. z Emplace munitions and sensors. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. „ Emplace a disrupt/fix Volcano (ground) minefield, 05-4-D0008. „ Emplace a MOPMS, disrupt, or fix minefield, 05-3-2012. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. z Construct a wire obstacle, 05-3-2019. z Breach a window, door, and wall. „ Breach a door with explosive techniques, 05-4-0821. „ Breach a door with manual techniques, 05-4-0822. „ Breach a window with explosive techniques, 05-4-0823.

E-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engineer Squad Qualification Tables

„ „ „

Breach a window with manual techniques, 05-4-0824. Breach a wall with explosive techniques (non-RWBK), 05-4-0825. Breach a wall with manual techniques, 05-4-0826.

TABLE VIII–SQUAD QUALIFICATION E-31. Squads execute Sapper battle drills (5-Drill) in a tactical scenario using live ammunition, demolitions, and inert munitions: z Perform an obstacle and restriction reconnaissance, 05-3-1004. z Create a lane in an obstacle. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using mechanical techniques, 05-3-1001. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using manual techniques, 05-3-1003. z Clear obstacle using demolitions. „ Clear a footpath through an obstacle with a Bangalore torpedo, 05-4-D0003. „ Create a footpath through an obstacle with an APOBS, 05-4-D0014. „ Create a lane with a MICLIC, 05-4-D0005. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using explosive techniques, 05-3-1000. z Identify/neutralize explosive hazards. „ React to a possible ground-emplaced IED, 05-2-3091. „ React to an IED attack, 052-192-3261. z Emplace munitions and sensors. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. „ Emplace a disrupt/fix Volcano (ground) minefield, 05-4-D0008. „ Emplace a MOPMS disrupt or fix minefield, 05-3-2012. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. z Construct a wire obstacle, 05-3-2019. z Breach a window, door, and wall. „ Breach a door with explosive techniques, 05-4-0821. „ Breach a door with manual techniques, 05-4-0822. „ Breach a window with explosive techniques, 05-4-0823. „ Breach a window with manual techniques, 05-4-0824. „ Breach a wall with explosive techniques (non-RWBK), 05-4-0825. „ Breach a wall with manual techniques, 05-4-0826.

SECTION VI – LIST OF COLLECTIVE TASKS FOR ENGINEER QUALIFICATION TABLES IX THROUGH XII E-32. Tables IX through XII are conducted under locally developed scenarios that are tactically sound for the existing range layout. Table IX is designed to qualify all members of a combat engineer platoon on fire control and distribution in offensive and defensive engagements. Target array is based on the threat situation and the scenario developed by a commander. Target arrays must realistically represent mission, enemy, terrain (weather), troops and support available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC) conditions and provide realistic tactical scenarios. A unit should rehearse the table to maximize proficiency in fire distribution, control techniques, and platoon standing operating procedures (SOP) before expending ammunition. Tables X through XII are designed to train all members of a combat engineer platoon at an advanced level in providing mobility assessments, detecting and neutralizing explosive hazards, and supporting mobility through urban terrain.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

E-11

Appendix E

TABLE IX–PLATOON REACT TO CONTACT E-33. Platoons train to shoot, move, and communicate at platoon level by performing the following drills: z Conduct action on contact (platoon/squad) 07-3-9013. z Evacuate casualties, 08-2-00046. z React to a possible ground-emplaced IED, 05-2-3091. z React to an IED attack, 052-192-3261.

TABLE X–PLATOON SAPPER TRAINING E-34. Platoons train on four platoon missions (with supporting tasks): z Breach obstacles. „ Clear a footpath through an obstacle with a Bangalore torpedo, 05-4-D0003. „ Create a footpath through an obstacle with an APOBS, 05-4-D0014. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using explosive techniques, 05-3-1000. „ Breach a door with explosive techniques, 05-4-0821. „ Breach a door with manual techniques, 05-4-0822. „ Breach a window with explosive techniques, 05-4-0823. „ Breach a window with manual techniques, 05-4-0824. „ Breach a wall with explosive techniques (non-RWBK), 05-4-0825. „ Breach a wall with manual techniques, 05-4-0826. z Detect, neutralize, and mark explosive hazards. „ React to a possible ground-emplaced IED, 05-2-3091. „ React to an IED attack, 052-192-3261. z Emplace situational obstacles. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. „ Emplace a disrupt/fix Volcano (ground) minefield, 05-4-D0008. „ Emplace a MOPMS disrupt or fix minefield, 05-3-2012. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. „ Construct a wire obstacle, 05-3-2019. „ Emplace situational obstacles, 05-3-2001. z Conduct clearance operations (obstacle, route, and area). „ Provide engineer support to clearing operations, 05-2-1700. „ Breach obstacles, 05-2-0114. „ Emplace situational obstacles, 05-3-2001. „ Conduct clearance operations, 05-2-1700. „ Clear a footpath through an obstacle with a Bangalore torpedo, 05-4-D0014. „ Create a footpath through an obstacle with an APOBS, 05-4-D0014. „ Create a lane with a MICLIC, 05-4-D0005. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. „ Emplace a disrupt/fix Volcano (ground) minefield, 05-4-D0008. „ Emplace a MOPMS disrupt or fix minefield, 05-3-2012. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using explosive techniques, 05-3-1000. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using mechanical techniques, 05-3-1001. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using manual techniques, 05-3-1003.

E-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Engineer Squad Qualification Tables

TABLE XI–ADVANCED TRAINING (DRY) E-35. Platoons train on platoon missions in a tactical scenario using blank ammunition, simulated demolitions, and inert munitions. Platoons train on four platoon missions: z Breach obstacles. „ Clear a footpath through an obstacle with a Bangalore torpedo, 05-4-D0003. „ Create a footpath through an obstacle with an APOBS, 05-4-D0014. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using explosive techniques, 05-3-1000. „ Breach a door with explosive techniques, 05-4-0821. „ Breach a door with manual techniques, 05-4-0822. „ Breach a window with explosive techniques, 05-4-0823. „ Breach a window with manual techniques, 05-4-0824. „ Breach a wall with explosive techniques (non-RWBK), 05-4-0825. „ Breach a wall with manual techniques, 05-4-0826. z Detect, neutralize, and mark explosive hazards. „ React to a possible ground-emplaced IED, 05-2-3091. „ React to an IED attack, 052-192-3261. z Emplace situational obstacles. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. „ Emplace a disrupt/fix Volcano (ground) minefield, 05-4-D0008. „ Emplace a MOPMS disrupt or fix minefield, 05-3-2012. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. „ Construct a wire obstacle, 05-3-2019. „ Emplace situational obstacles, 05-3-2001. z Conduct clearance operations (obstacle, route, and area). „ Provide engineer support to clearing operations, 05-2-1700. „ Provide engineer support to breaching operations, 05-2-0114. „ Emplace situational obstacles, 05-3-2001. „ Provide engineer support to clearing operations, 05-2-1700. „ Clear a footpath through an obstacle with a Bangalore torpedo, 05-4-D0003. „ Create a footpath through an obstacle with APOBS, 05-4-D0014. „ Create a lane with a MICLIC, 05-4-D0005. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. „ Emplace a disrupt/fix Volcano (ground) minefield, 05-4-D0008. „ Emplace a MOPMS disrupt or fix minefield, 05-3-2012. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using explosive techniques, 05-3-1000. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using mechanical techniques, 05-3-1001. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using manual techniques, 05-3-1003.

TABLE XII–ADVANCED QUALIFICATION E-36. Platoons execute the platoon missions in a tactical scenario using live ammunition, live demolitions, and inert munitions. Maneuver commanders evaluate and qualify platoons on four platoon missions: z Breach obstacles. „ Clear a footpath through an obstacle with a Bangalore torpedo, 05-4-D0003. „ Create a footpath through an obstacle with an APOBS, 05-4-D0014. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using explosive techniques, 05-3-1000. „ Breach a door with explosive techniques, 05-4-0821. „ Breach a door with manual techniques, 05-4-0822.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

E-13

Appendix E

Breach a window with explosive techniques, 05-4-0823. Breach a window with manual techniques, 05-4-0824. „ Breach a wall with explosive techniques (non-RWBK), 05-4-0825. „ Breach a wall with manual techniques, 05-4-0826. Detect, neutralize, and mark explosive hazards. „ React to a possible ground-emplaced IED, 05-2-3091. „ React to an IED attack, 052-192-3261. Emplace situational obstacles. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. „ Emplace a disrupt/fix Volcano (ground) minefield, 05-4-D0008. „ Emplace a MOPMS disrupt or fix minefield, 05-3-2012. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. „ Construct a wire obstacle, 05-3-2019. „ Emplace situational obstacles, 05-3-2001. Conduct clearance operations (obstacle, route, and area). „ Provide engineer support to clearing operations, 05-2-1700. „ Provide engineer support to breach operations, 05-2-0114. „ Emplace situational obstacles, 05-3-2001. „ Provide engineer support to clearing operations, 05-2-1700. „ Clear a footpath through an obstacle with a Bangalore torpedo, 05-4-D0003. „ Create a footpath through an obstacle with an APOBS, 05-4-D0014. „ Create a lane with a MICLIC, 05-4-D0005. „ Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001. „ Emplace a disrupt/fix Volcano (ground) minefield, 05-4-D0008. „ Emplace a MOPMS disrupt or fix minefield, 05-3-2012. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using explosive techniques, 05-3-1000. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using mechanical techniques, 05-3-1001. „ Create a lane through an obstacle using manual techniques, 05-3-1003. „ „

z

z

z

E-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Appendix F

Safety Risk is the chance of injury or death for individuals and damage to or loss of vehicles and equipment. Risks, and/or the potential for risks, are always present in every combat and training situation a platoon faces. Risk management must take place at all levels of the chain of command during each phase of every operation; it is an integral part of tactical planning. The platoon leader, his noncommissioned officers (NCO), and all other platoon soldiers must know how to use risk management, coupled with fratricide reduction measures, to ensure that the mission is executed in the safest possible environment within mission constraints. The primary objective of risk management is to help units protect their combat power through accident prevention, enabling them to win the battle quickly and decisively, with minimum losses. This appendix outlines the process that leaders can use to identify hazards and implement a plan to address each identified hazard. It also includes a detailed discussion of the responsibilities of the platoon’s leaders and individual soldiers in implementing a sound risk management program. See FM 100-14 for additional information on risk management.

Contents Section I – Risk Management Procedures ................................................ F-1 Step 1 - Identify Hazards .................... F-2 Step 2 - Assess Hazard to Determine Risks ................................. F-3 Step 3 - Develop Controls and Make Risk Decisions .................................... F-3 Step 4 - Implement Controls ............... F-4 Step 5 - Supervise and Evaluate ........ F-4

Section II – Implementation Responsibilities .........................................F-5 Abrams Tank.......................................F-6 Bradley Fighting Vehicle ...................F-12

SECTION I – RISK MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES F-1. This section outlines the five steps of risk management. Leaders must always remember that the effectiveness of the process depends on situational awareness. They should never approach risk management with “one size fits all” solutions to the hazards their element will face. Rather, in performing the steps, they must keep in mind the essential tactical and operational factors that make each situation unique. F-2. There are two types of hazards–tactical and accident. Tactical hazards deal with hazards imposed upon us by the threat (such as antitank guided missiles [ATGM] positions or untemplated threat positions on our flanks). Accident hazards are those hazards imposed upon us due to terrain, weather, or mission requirements (such as traveling an unimproved road at night in a snow storm).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

F-1

Appendix F

STEP 1 - IDENTIFY HAZARDS F-3. A hazard is a source of danger. It is any existing or potential condition that could entail injury, illness, or death of personnel; damage to or loss of equipment and property; or some other sort of mission degradation. Tactical and training operations pose many types of hazards. F-4. The platoon leader must identify the hazards associated with all aspects and phases of the platoon’s mission, paying particular attention to the factors of mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available (METT-TC). Risk management must never be an afterthought; leaders must begin the process during their troop-leading procedures and continue it throughout the operation. F-5. Table F-1 lists possible sources of risk that the platoon might face during a typical tactical operation. The list is organized according to the factors of METT-TC. Table F-1. Examples of potential hazards Sources of Battlefield Risk

Mission • Duration of the operation. • Complexity/clarity of the plan. (Is the plan well developed and easily understood?) • Proximity and number of maneuvering units. Enemy • Knowledge of the enemy situation. • Enemy capabilities. • Availability of time and resources to conduct reconnaissance. Terrain and Weather • Visibility conditions, including light, dust, fog, and smoke. • Precipitation and its effect on mobility. • Extreme heat or cold. • Additional natural hazards (broken ground, steep inclines, and water obstacles). Troops and Support Available • Equipment status. • Experience the units conducting the operation have working together. • Danger areas associated with the platoon’s weapon systems. • Soldier/leader proficiency. • Soldier/leader rest situation. • Degree of acclimatization to environment. • Impact of new leaders and/or crew members. Time Available • Time available for troop-leading procedures and rehearsals by subordinates. • Time available for precombat checks (PCC)/precombat inspections (PCI). Civil Considerations • Applicable rules of engagement (ROE). • Potential stability and/or civil operations involving contact with civilians (such as nongovernmental organizations (NGO), refugee or disaster assistance, or counterterrorism). • Potential for media contact/inquiries.

F-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Safety

STEP 2 - ASSESS HAZARD TO DETERMINE RISKS F-6. Hazard assessment is the process of determining the direct impact of each hazard on an operation (in the form of hazardous incidents). Use the following steps: z Determine which hazards can be eliminated or avoided. z Assess each hazard that cannot be eliminated or avoided to determine the probability that the hazard can occur. z Assess the severity of hazards that cannot be eliminated or avoided. Severity, defined as the result or outcome of a hazardous incident, is expressed by the degree of injury or illness (including death), loss of or damage to equipment or property, environmental damage, or other mission-impairing factors (such as unfavorable publicity or loss of combat power). z Taking into account both the probability and severity of a hazard, determine the associated risk level (extremely high, high, moderate, and low). Table F-2 summarizes the four risk levels. z Based on the factors of hazard assessment (probability, severity, and risk level, as well as the operational factors unique to the situation), complete the risk management worksheet. Table F-3 outlines the risk assessment matrix used to determine the level of risk. FM 100-14 contains a risk management worksheet that can be used in lieu of the risk assessment matrix. Table F-2. Risk levels and impact on mission execution Levels of Risk

Extremely High

Someone will die or suffer permanent disability.

High

More often than not, someone will suffer an injury that requires less than 3 months to heal.

Moderate

More often than not, someone will require first aid or minor medical treatment.

Low (Worst Case)

Someone is likely to need first aid or minor medical treatment. Table F-3. Risk assessment matrix

Risk Assessment Matrix

Probability Severity Catastrophic

Frequent

Likely

E

E

Occasional

Seldom

Unlikely

H

H

M

Critical

E

H

H

M

L

Marginal

H

M

M

L

L

Negligible

M

L

L

L

L

E - Extremely High Risk H - High Risk

M - Moderate Risk L - Low Risk

STEP 3 - DEVELOP CONTROLS AND MAKE RISK DECISIONS DEVELOPING CONTROLS F-7. After assessing each hazard, develop one or more controls that will either eliminate the hazard or reduce the risk (probability and/or severity) of potential hazardous incidents. When developing the controls, consider the reason for the hazard and not just the hazard by itself.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

F-3

Appendix F

MAKING RISK DECISIONS F-8. A key element in the process of making a risk decision is determining whether accepting the risk is justified or, conversely, is unnecessary. The decision-maker (the tank platoon leader, if applicable) must compare and balance the risk against mission expectations. He alone decides if the controls are sufficient and acceptable and whether to accept the resulting residual risk. If he determines the risk is unnecessary, he directs the development of additional controls or alternative controls; as another option, he can modify, change, or reject the selected course of action for the operation.

STEP 4 - IMPLEMENT CONTROLS F-9. Controls are the procedures and considerations the unit uses to eliminate hazards or reduce their risk. Implementing controls is the most important part of the risk management process; this is the chain of command’s contribution to the safety of the unit. Implementing controls includes coordination and communication with appropriate superior, adjacent, and subordinate units and with individuals executing the mission. The tank platoon leader must ensure that specific controls are integrated into operational plans (OPLAN), operation orders (OPORD), standing operating procedures (SOP), and rehearsals. The critical check for this step is to ensure that controls are converted into clear, simple execution orders understood by all levels. F-10. If the leaders have conducted a thoughtful risk assessment, the controls will be easy to implement, enforce, and follow. Examples of risk management controls include the following: z Thoroughly brief all aspects of the mission, including related hazards and controls. z Conduct thorough precombat checks (PCC) and precombat inspections (PCI). z Allow adequate time for rehearsals at all levels. z Drink plenty of water, eat well, and get as much sleep as possible (at least 4 hours in any 24-hour period). z Use buddy teams. z Enforce speed limits, use of seat belts, and driver safety. z Establish recognizable visual signals and markers to distinguish maneuvering units. z Enforce the use of ground guides in assembly areas and on dangerous terrain. z Establish marked and protected sleeping areas in assembly areas. z Limit single-vehicle movement. z Establish SOPs for the integration of new personnel.

STEP 5 - SUPERVISE AND EVALUATE F-11. During mission execution, it is imperative for leaders to ensure that risk management controls are properly understood and executed. Leaders must continuously evaluate the unit’s effectiveness in managing risks to gain insight into areas that need improvement.

SUPERVISION F-12. Leadership and unit discipline are the keys to ensuring that effective risk management controls are implemented. All leaders are responsible for supervising mission rehearsals and execution to ensure standards and controls are enforced. In particular, NCOs must enforce established safety policies as well as controls developed for a specific operation or task. Techniques include spot checks, inspections, situation reports (SITREP), confirmation briefs, buddy checks, and close supervision. F-13. During mission execution, leaders must continuously monitor risk management controls, both to determine whether they are effective and to modify them as necessary. Leaders must also anticipate, identify, and assess new hazards. They ensure that imminent danger issues are addressed on the spot and that ongoing planning and execution reflect changes in hazard conditions.

F-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Safety

EVALUATION F-14. Whenever possible, the risk management process should also include an after action review (AAR) to assess unit performance in identifying risks and preventing hazardous situations. Leaders should then incorporate lessons learned from the process into unit SOPs and plans for future missions.

SECTION II – IMPLEMENTATION RESPONSIBILITIES F-15. Leaders and individuals at all levels are responsible and accountable for managing risk. They must ensure that hazards and associated risks are identified and controlled during planning, preparation, and execution of operations. The tank platoon leader and his senior NCOs must look at both tactical risks and accident risks. The same risk management process is used to manage both types. The platoon leader alone determines how and where he is willing to take tactical risks. With the assistance of his platoon sergeant, NCOs, and individual soldiers, the platoon leader manages accident risks. F-16. Sometimes, despite the need to advise higher headquarters of a risk taken or about to be assumed, the risk management process may break down. Such a failure can be the result of several factors; most often, it can be attributed to the following: z The risk denial syndrome in which leaders do not want to know about the risk. z A soldier who believes that the risk decision is part of his job and does not want to bother his platoon leader or section leader. z Outright failure to recognize a hazard or the level of risk involved. z Overconfidence on the part of an individual or the unit in the capability to avoid or recover from a hazardous incident. z Subordinates not fully understanding the higher commander’s guidance regarding risk decisions. F-17. The tank platoon leader gives the platoon direction, sets priorities, and establishes the command climate (values, attitudes, and beliefs). Successful preservation of combat power requires him to embed risk management into individual behavior. To fulfill this commitment, the platoon leader must exercise creative leadership, innovative planning, and careful management. Most importantly, he must demonstrate support for the risk management process. The tank platoon leader and others in the platoon chain of command can establish a command climate favorable to risk management integration by taking the following actions: z Demonstrate consistent and sustained risk management behavior through leading by example and by stressing active participation throughout the risk management process. z Provide adequate resources for risk management. Every leader is responsible for obtaining the assets necessary to mitigate risk and for providing them to subordinate leaders. z Understand their own and their soldier’s limitations, as well as their unit’s capabilities. z Allow subordinates to make mistakes and learn from them. z Prevent a “zero defects” mindset from creeping into the platoon’s culture. z Demonstrate full confidence in subordinates’ mastery of their trade and their ability to execute a chosen course of action (COA). z Keep subordinates informed. z Listen to subordinates. F-18. For the platoon leader, his subordinate leaders, and individual soldiers alike, responsibilities in managing risk include the following: z Make informed risk decisions; establish and then clearly communicate risk decision criteria and guidance. z Establish clear, feasible risk management policies and goals. z Train the risk management process. Ensure that subordinates understand the “who,” “what,” “when,” “where,” and “why” of managing risk and how these factors apply to their situation and assigned responsibilities.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

F-5

Appendix F

z z

Accurately evaluate the platoon’s effectiveness, as well as subordinates’ execution of risk controls during the mission. Inform higher headquarters when risk levels exceed established limits.

ABRAMS TANK F-19. Various components of the Abrams fire control system may become damaged if an enemy round hits the tank; however, that need not render the tank or its crew powerless. The emergency procedures in this chapter identify actions the crew can take to survive a direct hit and continue to fight. Notes. When the operational status of the tank changes significantly, the tank commander (TC) should report to the platoon leader or platoon sergeant. The phrase “immediate return fire is required” in this chapter refers to a situation in which failure to fire will result in a subsequent hit on your tank.

AMMUNITION COMPARTMENT HIT F-20. The Abrams tank was designed with crew survivability as a primary consideration. Part of this design is the compartmentalization of the ammunition away from the crew. Numerous tests of fully loaded bustle and hull ammunition compartments show the crew can survive when the tank is hit in an ammunition compartment. The ammunition compartment doors protect the crew from the fire and blast of the exploding propellant and the multipurpose antitank (MPAT) or high-explosive antitank (HEAT) warheads. The safest place for the crew during an ammunition compartment fire is inside the tank. If crewmen attempt to evacuate the tank while the propellant is still burning, they could be injured by the extreme heat and flame outside the turret.

Bustle Ammunition Compartment Fires F-21. When an incoming round ignites ammunition stored in the bustle compartment, the explosion will cause the turret blow-off panels to fly off. The force of the explosion, therefore, is vented away from the crew compartment. The 120-mm combustible case cartridges will be consumed in about one minute; some unburned primers may pop off within the next minute.

CAUTION Do not stow or strap equipment on blow-off panels. This could prevent proper functioning of panels during bustle compartment fire.

F-22. Following the initial explosions, there will be a two-minute period of haze or light dust around the turret. This will be followed by a lull of about 5 minutes, then some of the MPAT or HEAT warheads may cook off. Although a cook off is unlikely, it is possible that MPAT or HEAT warheads will cook off for nearly an hour after the fire. After that hour, the turret will have cooled sufficiently to preclude further cook off. F-23. If ammunition in the bustle compartment ignites, crewmen must react quickly to ensure their safety and the continued operation of the tank. M1A1 and M1A2 System Enhancement Package (SEP) crews should use the tank’s overpressure system rather than the gas particulate filter system to help clean the turret of toxic fumes and smoke. The M1A1’s and M1A2’s gas particulate filter system draws air from outside the vehicle in the vicinity of the turret bustle and may pump flame or toxic fumes into the turret. If the overpressure system is inoperative on the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP tank, the crew should use their protective masks only.

F-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Safety

F-24. The turret should be rotated to get the gun tube over the side of the tank, if possible. This action protects the engine and limits the amount of flame and hot air being pulled into the engine air cleaner and overpressure system. F-25. If the tank automotive system is operational, the crew should seek a turret-down protected position and wait inside the tank for at least 60 minutes. (After 60 minutes, the possibility of secondary explosions will have passed.) The tank should then be driven, with the hatches open to ventilate the turret, to a maintenance collection point. While the crew is in the sustainment area, they should replace their protective mask filters and tank filters. F-26. If the tank is inoperative and the TC determines it should be evacuated, the crew should evacuate between two and five minutes after the initial explosion. Evacuating during this time window reduces the possibility of the crew being hurt from secondary warhead detonations. The crew should wear gloves as they exit, to protect their hands from hot metal and sharp edges. Note. Because the crew may have been exposed to smoke and toxic fumes before they masked, they should avoid strenuous exercise after a bustle fire. Strenuous exercise may worsen injury from toxic gases; therefore, for the next 24 hours, the crew should be as physically inactive as possible. Problems with severe coughing, difficulty in breathing, and chest pain are most likely to start within a few hours of exposure. Anyone having such symptoms should be promptly evacuated for medical attention, by stretcher if possible. If no such problems arise within 24 hours, the local commander may return soldiers to full duty with little risk of residual harmful effect.

Hull Ammunition Compartment Fires F-27. When an incoming round ignites the ammunition propellant in the rounds stored in the hull, the hull blow-off panels will fly off. Only trace amounts of toxic fumes will enter the crew compartment. The propellant fire will last for about 15 seconds. Because the fire is short-lived, there is no danger of HEAT warheads exploding. F-28. In the heat of battle, the crew may not notice an explosion. The proper crew action is to continue the mission.

CREW COMPARTMENT AMMUNITION FIRES F-29. The fire suppression system is designed to suppress hull and crew compartment fires (fuel, hydraulic fluid); the system will not suppress ammunition propellant fires. The propellant contains its own oxygenating agent and will continue to burn, even under water. To minimize the chance of an ammunition fire in the crew compartment, it is important that the loading procedures described in this manual and in the operator’s manual be followed. Note. Ammunition doors must remain closed, except when the loader is removing a round to load immediately into the empty chamber, or returning a round to the compartment after it has been removed from the chamber. All guards and safety devices must be in place before firing.

Exit an M1A1 or M1A2 SEP Tank during an Ammunition Fire F-30. The following procedures are used to evacuate an M1A1 and M1A2 SEP tank during an ammunition fire in the crew compartment. Assume the tank has just completed an engagement, and the main gun is loaded with HEAT and considered hot. The TC has issued the command “BATTLECARRY SABOT.” As the loader removes the HEAT round, the alert “AMMO FIRE” is given. (The removed round is smoldering or burning.)

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

F-7

Appendix F

F-31. The following conditions are assumed for these procedures: z Vehicle. „ A fully equipped, operational M1A1 or M1A2 SEP tank in a hull-down position or on the move. „ All safety guards are in position. „ The main gun is loaded and considered a hot gun. Note. A hot gun is defined as one or more rounds fired in the previous minute. z

Crew. All crewmen are in the prescribed uniform with combat vehicle crewman (CVC) cords hooked up.

Note. Prescribed uniform is complete Nomex, if available. If not, it is coveralls with gloves. If coveralls are not available, it is Army combat uniform (ACU) (with collar up and buttoned, sleeves down and buttoned) and gloves. z

TC’s station. The command has been given for a change of ammunition. „ The TC’s stand is adjusted for standing position. „ Seats and platforms are adjusted in accordance with (IAW) the operator’s manual. „ The TC’s hatch is in open-protected or closed position. Loader’s station. „ The loader’s hatch is in the locked position (closed). „ The GUN/TURRET DRIVE switch is in the POWERED position. „ The main gun is loaded and the ARM/SAFE lever is in the SAFE position; make sure the MAIN GUN STATUS white SAFE light is lit. Gunner’s station. The gunner’s seat is adjusted. Driver’s station. „ The driver’s hatch is in the closed position. „ The T-bar is fully extended. „ The night vision viewer and power cable are installed (at night). „ The engine is running. „

z

z z

Note. A proficient crew should be able to execute these procedures within 15 seconds (25 seconds if the night-vision viewer is installed).

F-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Safety

Table F-4. M1A1/M1A2 SEP ammunition fire exit procedures TC

Gunner

Loader

Driver

Stops breathing.

Stops breathing.

Announces “AMMO FIRE,” and stops breathing.

Stops breathing.

If moving, commands “DRIVER, STOP.”

Disconnects CVC cord.

If round is only partially out of chamber when fire is noticed, attempts to rechamber once; if unsuccessful, leaves it alone.

If moving, stops tank, pushes T-bar to stowed position, loosens AN/VVS-2 mounting wing nuts, and drops sight to left side of driver’s seat.

Disconnects CVC cord and opens loader’s hatch.

Opens hatch and disconnects CVC cord.

Exits the tank.

Exits the tank. Moves to cover behind the vehicle.

Traverses the main gun to allow the driver to exit the tank. Opens TC’s hatch and disconnects CVC cord.

Moves FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL mode.

Exits the tank. Helps the gunner exit the tank.

Exits the tank through the TC’s hatch.

Helps the gunner exit the tank.

Moves to cover behind the vehicle.

Moves to cover behind the vehicle.

Moves to cover behind the vehicle.

Notes. The gunner escapes his position by grabbing the TC’s sight extension, turret handhold and pulls himself up and out while facing forward. He does not have to turn around and face the TC’s position. The TC must be able to open the hatch while sitting (closed-hatch mode) or standing (open-protected mode). In the closed-hatch mode, the TC is sitting. The seat must be adjusted IAW the operator’s manual; seat adjustment is critical so the right arm is not over-extended. The TC unlocks the hatch with his left hand, then moves his left hand to the locking lever and places his right hand, palm up, on the under side of the hatch. In one motion, he should unlock the hatch with his left hand and push it to the full-open position with his right hand, then exit the tank. When in the open-protected mode, the TC should always be standing. The upper and lower platforms must be adjusted IAW the operator’s manual; it is critical that his platforms are adjusted so his arm is not over-extended. He follows the same procedures (as in closed-hatch mode) for opening the hatch (it should not lock in the open-protected position). Make sure the CVC cord going to the commander’s weapon station fire control handle is out of the way so the gunner does not become entangled in it. The CVC cords should never be tied, taped, or looped together; this may prevent escape.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

F-9

Appendix F

LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS F-32. A malfunction or the impact from an enemy round may cause one or more members of the tank crew to lose communications. Within the turret, a loss of communication is easily handled. However, a loss of communication between the TC and the driver presents a serious problem with increasing severity under combat conditions. F-33. If the TC senses something is wrong with the intercom system, he initiates a crew report. If all stations hear the command, they will report their status, and the crew will continue the mission. F-34. If the problem is in the TC’s intercom, he tries to locate the problem and fix it. If he cannot, he takes the gunner’s CVC helmet and gives his helmet to the gunner. The crew continues the mission with the TC operating off the gunner’s intercom box. F-35. If the gunner or loader loses communication, the TC shouts his instructions, ensuring they are understood. F-36. If the driver does not report that he is ready, the TC must relay instructions to him through the gunner or loader. After ensuring that the driver is clear of the turret ring, the TC directs the gunner to traverse the turret so the gunner or loader can get the driver’s attention. The gunner or loader then relays the TC’s instructions to the driver. F-37. If the driver notices a loss of communications with the turret, he should— z In training, stop the tank, tell the TC that he has no communication, and get it fixed. z In combat, attempt to locate the problem by checking the following items: „ Mike connection at helmet. „ CVC cord connections. „ Driver’s control box. z In combat, if the driver cannot locate the problem, he must follow the crew SOP established by the TC and decide whether to— „ Continue under the TC’s last instructions. „ Seek a hide position.

CREW EVACUATION F-38. If one of the turret crewmen is wounded and immediate return fire is required, you must adjust controls and crew positions, and fire. When the situation permits, move to a covered position, report the crew’s status, request medical evacuation (MEDEVAC) (if required), evaluate wounded crewman, and begin first aid. F-39. If the wounded crewman is the driver and immediate return fire is required, return fire. When the situation permits, report the crew’s status, request MEDEVAC (if required), traverse the turret to gain access to the driver from the turret, evaluate the driver’s wounds, and begin first aid. Note. If under hostile fire, when the situation permits, traverse the turret and evacuate the driver through the turret; move to a covered position as soon as possible.

WARNING Before traversing the turret, make sure the driver’s body is clear of the turret, or you could kill him. F-40. If immediate return fire is not required, report the crew’s status, request MEDEVAC (if required), traverse the turret, evaluate the driver’s wounds, and begin first aid.

F-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Safety

TANK ROLLOVER F-41. During fast-paced combat operations, the tank may roll over. The procedures in Table F-5 allow the crew to exit the overturned tank safely and prevent a subsequent fire. The TC must decide, based on METT-TC, whether to remain with the vehicle and await recovery. F-42. If the external fire extinguisher does not shut off the engine, once the danger of a fire has passed or the fire has been extinguished, the crew should secure personal weapons and protective masks. Note. The crew member who first notices that the tank is beginning to roll over announces “ROLLOVER.” Table F-5. Tank rollover procedures TC

Gunner

Loader

Driver

Drops inside the turret and braces for impact.

Braces for impact.

Drops inside the turret and braces for impact.

Braces for impact.

Note. Tank is turned over on its side. Once the tank has stabilized, directs the driver to shut down the engine. If a turret fire exists, uses a portable fire extinguisher to fight the fire.

Once the tank has stabilized, moves the main gun select switch to the TRIGGER SAFE position.

Once the tank has stabilized, moves the SAFE/ARM handle to the SAFE position.

Once the tank has stabilized, on TC’s order, shuts down the engine. If a fire exists and the first shot bottle has not extinguished the fire, activates the second shot switch.

Checks the crew for injuries, administers first aid if critical condition exists, and radios for assistance.

Checks self and crew for injuries.

Checks self and crew for injuries.

Checks self and crew for injuries.

If evacuation is possible, orders the crew to evacuate the tank. If the driver cannot exit through the driver’s hatch, and a life threatening situation exists, the TC orders the gunner to traverse the turret, first manually then with power, to allow the driver to exit through the driver’s hatch. Ensures turret traverse lock is locked before the driver or crew exit.

On order from the TC, clears the turret of obstructions and traverses the turret, first manually then with power, to gain access to the driver’s compartment. (One or more screens may need to be removed to access the driver’s compartment.) Orders the loader to lock the turret traverse lock and assist the driver into the turret.

Assists the gunner clearing obstructions, locks the turret traverse lock when ordered from the gunner, and assists the driver into the turret.

Opens hatch, if possible, and tells the TC whether he can exit through the hatch.

Orders the crew to evacuate the tank through the hatch closest to the ground, and designates an assembly area 30 meters behind the tank.

Exits the tank through the hatch closest to the ground.

Exits the tank through the hatch closest to the ground.

Exits the tank through the driver’s hatch or, if directed by the TC, moves into the turret and exits through the hatch closest to the ground.

Reports to the assembly area.

Reports to the assembly area.

Reports to the assembly area.

Reports to the assembly area.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

F-11

Appendix F

BRADLEY FIGHTING VEHICLE LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS F-43. A malfunction or the impact from an enemy round may cause one or more members of the Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) crew to lose communications. Within the turret, a loss of communication is easily handled. However, a loss of communication between the vehicle commander (VC) and the driver presents a serious problem with increasing severity under combat conditions. F-44. If the VC senses something is wrong with the intercom system, he initiates a crew report. If all stations hear the command, they will report their status, and the crew will continue the mission. F-45. If the problem is in the VC’s intercom, he tries to locate the problem and fix it. If he cannot, he takes the gunner’s CVC helmet and gives his helmet to the gunner. The crew continues the mission with the VC operating off the gunner’s intercom box. F-46. If the gunner loses communication, the VC shouts his instructions, ensuring they are understood. F-47. If the driver does not report that he is ready, the VC must relay instructions to him through the gunner or squad leader. F-48. If the driver notices a loss of communications with the turret, he should— z In training, stop the tank, tell the VC that he has no communication, and get it fixed. z In combat, attempt to locate the problem by checking the following items: „ Microphone connection at helmet. „ CVC cord connections. „ Driver’s control box. z In combat, if the driver cannot locate the problem, he must follow the crew SOP established by the VC and decide whether to— „ Continue under the VC’s last instructions. „ Seek a hide position.

CREW EVACUATION F-49. If one of the turret crewmen is wounded and immediate return fire is required, you must adjust controls and crew positions, and fire. When the situation permits, move to a covered position, report the crew’s status, request MEDEVAC (if required), evaluate wounded crewman, and begin first aid. F-50. If the wounded crewman is the driver and immediate return fire is required, return fire. When the situation permits, report the crew’s status, request MEDEVAC (if required), Open drive’s hatch to gain access to the driver, evaluate the driver’s wounds, and begin first aid. Note. If under hostile fire, evacuate the driver through the squad compartment; move to a covered position as soon as possible. F-51. If immediate return fire is not required, report the crew’s status, request MEDEVAC (if required), open driver’s hatch, evaluate the driver’s wounds, and begin first aid.

F-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Safety

BRADLEY ROLLOVER F-52. The Bradley can roll over in rough terrain. This paragraph explains how crews can get out of the vehicle quickly and safely, depending on the situation. The first crew member to notice the vehicle starting to roll over should announce "Rollover" and act IAW Table F-6. z Equipment Stowage. Proper stowage of equipment prevents unnecessary injuries. Crew members must stow all equipment IAW published TMs and unit SOPs. z Fire-Suppression System. When a vehicle rolls over while still running, fuel and oil pouring from the engine can start a fire. The internal fire-suppression system trips only when the flame sensors detect a blazing fire. The system dispenses large amounts of carbon dioxide into the crew compartment, which can suffocate the crew. Consequently, during operation, the driver can leave the system set to the manual mode, and exiting crew members can activate the system themselves. He generally leaves the system in automatic mode when the vehicle is unmanned. If the crew exits a burning vehicle, they should try to take all weapons and protective gear, if they can do so safely. Table F-6. Bradley rollover procedures Vehicle Commander

Gunner

Driver

Squad Member

Braces for impact by holding the bottom of seat.

Braces for impact by placing hands on walls of driver compartment.

Braces for impact by placing hands on inside of troop compartment; maintains control of weapon.

Begins crew checks to ensure no fires have started, and to account for personnel.

Ensures weapon system is on electrical and manual SAFE.

Pulls fuel shutoff and turns off Checks for injuries accessories. If needed, sets off and reports to the VC. internal (CO2) fire-suppression system in engine compartment.

Checks for injured personnel. Reports rollover.

Helps the VC evacuate the vehicle.

Exits vehicle through hatch, if Exits vehicle through unobstructed; or, if driver hatch clear hatch. is blocked, exits through the crew compartment.

BFV is rolling over: Drops inside turret and braces for impact.

BFV has rolled over:

Note. Sometimes the crew should remain in the vehicle and wait for recovery.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

F-13

This page intentionally left blank.

Appendix G

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation The Guardian Armored Security Vehicle (ASV) enables MP forces to observe the battlefield and engage the enemy while remaining secure behind vehicle armor. This includes boresighting, pre-fire checks, zeroing procedures, post-fire checks, range determination, ASV weapons malfunctions. In conjunction with performing regular preventive maintenance, checks, and services (PMCS) the crew conducts weekly to ensure their fire control system is fully operational. Before any firing event the crew performs pre-fire checks and boresights all weapon systems. This ensures all turret weapon systems operate properly and prevents many of the common malfunctions that can occur during firing. If a malfunction does occur, the crew tries to correct it; if they cannot, they report the malfunction to maintenance. After firing the weapon systems, the crew conducts a post-fire check.

Contents Section I – Boresight................................ G-1 Boresight Procedure: Minor Boresighting Using the Laser Boresight ........................................... G-1 Boresighting the 40mm Machine Gun using Night Sight ........................ G-5 Boresighting the M48 ......................... G-6 Section II – Pre-Fire Checks .................... G-7 Section III – Zeroing ASV-Mounted Machine Guns ........................................... G-8 Zeroing the Turret Weapon Systems . G-8 Zeroing the M48 Caliber .50 Machine Gun ................................... G-10 M36E Sight ...................................... G-12

Section IV – Post-Fire Checks ............... G-13 Section V – Range Determination ......... G-14 Deliberate Range Determination ...... G-14 Section VI – ASV Weapons System Malfunctions ........................................... G-20 Stop a Runaway Gun MK19 and M48 .................................................. G-20 Immediate Action to Clear a Jammed Bolt MK19 .......................... G-20 Action Upon Misfire, Hang-Fire or Jam Procedures for MK19 ............... G-21 Action Upon Hang Fire , Misfire or Jam For M48 Caliber .50.................. G-22 M257 Smoke Grenades Malfunction G-22 Communications Malfunction ........... G-22

SECTION I – BORESIGHT

BORESIGHT PROCEDURE: MINOR BORESIGHTING USING THE LASER BORESIGHT Notes. Crew will accomplish boresighting. Both day and night sights will be boresighted. Steps listed below are provided for ASV use of boresight kit for 40/50 turret components not covered in the kits operator manual. The borelight must be zeroed prior to boresighting your weapons.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

G-1

Appendix G

WARNING Visible laser beam can cause eye Injury. Avoid direct exposure to the beam. Do not stare into the laser beam. Do not look into the laser beam through binoculars or telescopes. Do not point laser beam at reflective surfaces. Do not shine laser beam into eyes of personnel.

Note. If unit does not have the issued boresight target construct boresight target to the exact dimensions shown in Figure 1 of Technical Bulletin ASV024 or TM 9-2320-309-10, Page #2-19. z

Step 1. Erect boresight target 30 ft. (10) meters from turret. The 40 mm alignment boresight aiming point on boresight target should be at the same height as 40mm barrel with mantles at 0 elevation (see Figure G-1).

Figure G-1. Boresight panel dimensions z

G-2

Step 2. Check that AA battery is installed in laser boresight (LBS). Assemble bore light to 5.56mm mandrel (see Figure G-2).

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation

Figure G-2. Mandrel and borelight assembly z

Step 3. Position vehicle on level terrain. Using angle meter gauge, ensure level gauge shows zero degrees, front to back and side to side. Vehicle and weapons need to be at same degree on angle meter gauge (see Figure G-3).

Figure G-3. Angle gauge z z z

z

Step 4. Insert LBS and mandrel into 40mm mandrel adapter, and insert adapter assembly into barrel of 40mm machine gun. Step 5. Place LBS in the START position in a vertical plane with battery compartment facing up. Step 6. Turn LBS on using the low switch position, adjust position of target to place laser dot from LBS on center of 40mm boresight target boresight aiming point (lower left corner of target). Step 7. The half turn position places the LBS in a vertical plane with the battery compartment facing down.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

G-3

Appendix G

Notes. Rotating the LBS must always be in a counter clockwise direction as viewed from above and behind the LBS. The LBS must be zeroed before initiating boresight procedures. The terms START and HALF TURN shall be used as standard commands. z z

Step 8. Rotate LBS to half turn position and mark LBS dot. Step 9. Use adjusters to move laser to half the two dots, rotate bore light back to start position. If laser strike point is still on reference point, bore light zeroing is completed. If not, repeat steps so that the laser strike point stays in the same location when bore light is in both start and half turn positions.

Notes. Proper positioning of boresight target is critical for accurate boresight results. Turret must remain stationary throughout boresight alignment procedures. Personnel not involved in boresighting should be kept off of and away from vehicle. This will move the point of aim and will cause the crew to begin boresight procedures again. Sight alignment will be inaccurate if the Reticle control adapter lever is not down against the eccentric stop screw on the sight drive arm. z

Step 10. Ensure that Reticle control adapter lever is down against eccentric stop screw on sight drive arm (see Figure G-4).

Figure G-4. Reticle control adapter lever z z

G-4

Step 11. Use angle gauge to ensure weapon system is level with the vehicle. Step 12. With 40mm machine gun aligned on boresight target 40mm boresight aiming point look through day sight.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation

z

z

Step 13. If day reticle does not align with 40mm day sight boresight aiming point on boresight target in azimuth, pull out azimuth adjustment knob on day sight and rotate knob until proper alignment is achieved. Step 14. If reticle does not align with 40mm day sight Boresight aiming point on boresight target in elevation, pull out elevation adjustment knob on day sight and rotate knob until proper alignment is achieved (see Figure G-5).

Figure G-5. Night sight azimuth/elevation adjustment

CAUTION Boresight filter must be properly installed before night switch is moved to ON position. If night sight is turned on during daylight hours without filter, image intensifier tube will be severely damaged. Failure to follow this caution will result in damage to image intensifier in the night sight. If boresight filter is not available, boresighting should take place just after sunset or just before sunrise. Twilight conditions will allow night sight to be used while boresight target is still visible.

BORESIGHTING THE 40MM MACHINE GUN USING NIGHT SIGHT z z z z

Step 1. Place night sight cover over night sight head assembly and secure in place. Step 2. Rotate handle fully clockwise to darkest setting. Step 3. Move night sight switch to ON position. Step 4. Rotate night sight cover handle counter clockwise, one click at a time until target becomes visible through the night sight optic.

Notes. Rotate disk on boresight filter to larger pinhole only if necessary to see boresight target. To aid in focusing on target, turn tube brightness and the reticle brightness adjustment knobs as required. Under most conditions the low setting will result in clearest Image. If, necessary, turn diopter ring for a clear focus of target.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

G-5

Appendix G

z

z

z

Step 5. With 40mm machine gun aligned on boresight target 40mm boresight aiming point, sight through night sight eyepiece and focus on night sight boresight aiming point (upper right boresight aiming point). Step 6. If night Reticle does not align with night sight boresight aiming point on boresight target in azimuth, pull out azimuth adjustment knob on night sight and rotate knob until proper alignment is achieve. Step 7. If night sight Reticle does not align with night sight boresight aiming point in elevation, pull out elevation adjustment knob on night sight and rotate knob until proper alignment is achieved.

Notes. If target cannot be aligned with sight adjustment knobs, major boresighting required. Notify maintenance personnel IAW TM 9-2320-309-24. Azimuth and elevation adjustment knobs on both day and night sights are spring loaded and held in position by serrations on knobs and sight assemblies. Make sure knobs are securely seated before completing bore-sighting procedures. Do not leave night sight reticle ON when not being used. Excessive exposure of reticle to light will damage Image Intensifier tube. z z z z

Step 8. Move night sight switch to OFF position. Step 9. Turn LBS OFF, and remove 40mm mandrel adapter assembly from 40mm machine gun barrel. Step 10. Remove 5.56mm mandrel adapter. Step 11. Remove LBS from 5.56mm mandrel.

BORESIGHTING THE M48 z z

Step 1. Assemble LBS to the caliber .50 mandrel, and insert mandrel assembly into barrel of caliber .50 machine gun. Step 2. Turn the LBS on. Re-zero the LBS in accordance with MK19 procedures.

Note. Caliber .50 boresight adjustments are made at rear gun mount of the caliber .50 cradle using a 7/16 inch wrench. z

z

G-6

Step 3. Loosen azimuth-locking screw and turn azimuth adjustment Reticle screw until sight Reticle bore sight cross is aligned in azimuth, with caliber .50 boresight aiming point on boresight target (lower right boresight aiming point). Tighten azimuth-locking screw. Step 4. Loosen elevation-locking screw. Turn elevation adjustment screw until sight reticle boresight cross is aligned with .50 boresight aiming point on boresight target (lower right boresight aiming point). Tighten elevation-locking screw (see Figure G-6).

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation

Figure G-6. Daylight sight azimuth/elevation adjustment z z z

Step 5. Check that all screws are tightened securely. Step 6. Turn LBS OFF, and remove caliber .50 mandrel assembly from caliber .50 machine gun barrel. Step 7. Remove LBS from caliber .50 mandrel.

Note. Verify boresight retention by manually rotating turret and elevation mantel. Look through day sight and move back onto day sight boresight aiming point on boresight target. Check to ensure 40mm, caliber .50 and night sight are still aimed at their respective butterflies. G-1. Look into sight eye piece. You will not see your target. z Step 1. While looking into sight, slowly move the Reticle control adapter lever up until the target is back into and even with the boresight cross. (Point to boresight cross on the slide.) z Step 2. Now you must compensate for spin drift. Rotate turret until target is on the 14 on the horizontal line. (Point to the 14 on the horizontal line.)

SECTION II – PRE-FIRE CHECKS G-2. Before conducting live fire, the crew performs pre-fire checks to reduce vehicle malfunctions on the firing range. G-3. The preferred pre-fire checks are conducted when a crew completes a thorough PMCS as outlined in TM 9-2320-307-10 and TM 9-2320-309-10. G-4. When time or conditions do not allow for a complete and thorough PMCS ASV crews should conduct the following pre-fire checks as a minimum (see Table G-1). Note. Crews should correct any deficiencies if using the checklist below before conducting any live fire training.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

G-7

Appendix G

WARNING Ensure all weapons are clear before conducting pre-fire checks.

Table G-1. ASV pre-fire checklist Station

Check

Go

Driver

Power up driver’s station IAW TM -10.

No-Go

Establish communications with crew members. Check CBRN mask and mask microphone. Establish Communications with higher echelons. Establish communications with crew members. Check CBRN mask and mask microphone.

TC

z z z z z z

Gunner

Prepare ASV Crew for operations: Mount weapons. Set solenoid. Conduct function check. Power up turret IAW TM -10. Boresight Weapons (MK19/M48).

Power up turret. Establish communication with crew members. Mount weapons. Set solenoid (M48). Conduct functions check. Boresight weapons (MK19/M48). Check feed chute (MK19).

SECTION III – ZEROING ASV-MOUNTED MACHINE GUNS

ZEROING THE TURRET WEAPON SYSTEMS G-5. Before zeroing the MK19 and the M48 on the ASV, make sure the weapons have been boresighted and are loaded (see Figure G-7). Notes. Ensure the reticle control adapter lever is completely down when firing the MK19 at distances below 800 meter and is in the up position when firing at targets 800 meters and greater. When firing the M48 the reticle control adapter lever is always in the down position. The unit MUST have two targets for zeroing. One placed at 550m for the .50 Cal and one placed at 400m for the MK19. Purpose. The ASV has a graduated sight and there is an offset that takes into account flight trajectory of each round.

G-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation

Figure G-7. Reticle control adapter z z z z

Step 1. Load and ready the MK19. Step 2. Power up turret. Step 3. Alert the crew by announcing “MK19” on the intercom. Step 4. On the MK19 move selector to fire position.

WARNING Power to weapon’s firing relay is interrupted if ASV driver’s, team leader or gunner’s hatches are not latched in the closed position. Close and latch all hatches before attempting to fire weapons. Firing machine guns with turret override selected, will allow fired rounds to strike ASV deck in certain azimuth positions. Turret override will also override hatch safety interlocks allowing weapons to be fired with vehicle or turret hatches open. Operation of machine guns while in override may damage vehicle or cause personal injury or death.

z z z z

Step 5. Lay the 400-meter aiming point in the gunner’s weapon sight (MK19) on the center of the target, 400 meters out, using the manual controls (see Figure G-8). Step 6. On the gunners control panel move the selector to the left for the MK19. The red light should come on indicating the weapon is armed and ready to fire. Step 7. Fire one round by pressing the button on the elevation handle. Release the button to cease firing. Step 8. Observe the beaten zone on the target in relation to the aiming point on the sight reticle.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

G-9

Appendix G

z

z z

z z

Step 9. On the gunners control panel move the selector to the center position, then let go, and make sure the ARMED light is not lit.

Figure G-8. Daylight reticle Step 10. If the aiming point in the sight reticle is centered on the beaten zone, zeroing is complete. If the aiming point is not in the center of the beaten zone, go to step 11. Step 11. Using the elevations and azimuth adjustment knobs move sight reticle for 40mm to the center of the beaten zone. Re-acquire the target in the sights by traversing and elevating the weapons until the target is properly acquired and fire another round. Observe the beaten zone rounds should impact on target. Step 12. On the MK19 move selector switch to safe. Step 13. Clear the weapon.

ZEROING THE M48 CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN z z z z

Step 1. Load and ready the M48. Step 2. Power up turret. Step 3. Alert the crew by announcing “M48” on the intercom. Step 4. On the M48 move selector to fire position.

WARNING Power to weapon’s firing relay is interrupted if ASV driver’s, team leader or gunner’s hatches are not latched in the closed position. Close and latch all hatches before attempting to fire weapons. Firing machine guns with turret override selected, will allow fired rounds to strike ASV deck in certain azimuth positions. Turret override will also override hatch safety interlocks allowing weapons to be fired with vehicle or turret hatches open. Operation of machine guns while in override may damage vehicle or cause personal injury or death.

G-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation

z z z z z z

Step 5. Lay the 550-meter aiming point in the gunner’s weapon sight (M48) on the center of the target, 550 meters out, using the manual controls. Step 6. On the gunners control panel move the selector to the right for the M48. The red light should come on indicating the weapon is armed and ready to fire. Step 7. Fire a 5 to 7 round burst by pressing the button on the elevation handle. Release the button to cease firing. Step 8. Observe the beaten zone on the target in relation to the aiming point on the sight reticle. Step 9. On the gunners control panel move the selector to the center position, then let go, and make sure the ARMED light is not lit. Step 10. If the aiming point in the sight reticle is centered on the beaten zone, zeroing is complete. If the aiming point is not in the center of the beaten zone, go to step 11.

Figure G-9. Caliber .50 mount and AZ/EL adjust z

z z z

Step 11. Without moving the machine gun or sight, align the aiming point in the sight reticle to the center of the beaten zone as follows (see Figure G-9): „ Loosen the setscrew with a 7/16-inch socket head key to allow the horizontal adjustment control screw to turn. „ Adjust the vertical line of the boresight cross on the left edge of the target using the flat-tip screwdriver. „ Tighten the setscrew with a 7/16-inch socket head key to lock the horizontal adjustment control screw. „ Loosen the setscrew with a 7/16-inch socket head key to allow the vertical adjustment control screw to turn. „ Adjust the horizontal line of the boresight cross on the top edge of the target, using the flattip screwdriver. „ Tighten the setscrew with a 7/16-inch socket head key to lock the vertical adjustment control screw. Step 12. Repeat steps 3 through 8 until the aiming point on the sight reticle is centered on the beaten zone. Step 13. Move the selector on the weapon to safety until the S can be seen. Step 14. Clear the weapon.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

G-11

Appendix G

M36E SIGHT G-6. Using the M36E sight unique to other sighting systems due to the reticle control adapter lever— z Step 1. Caliber .50.

WARNING Be certain that Reticle Control Adapter is down against stop screw when firing the caliber .50 machine gun. Failure to follow this warning could result in injury or death.

„ „ „ „

All rounds drop as they travel. The reticle has a scale that calculates the drop for you. The caliber .50 scale is on the left. Estimate distance to target. If target is 1,400 meters, elevate mantled so that the target is even with 14 on the scale (see Figure G-10 and Figure G-11) (point to 14 on the scale). If target is 1,600 meters elevate to the 16 on the scale (point to the 16 on the scale).

Figure G-10. Daylight reticle

G-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation

Figure G-11. Night sight reticle Fire weapon. Step 2. 40mm, 800 meters or less. „ The 40mm rounds travel much slower so they drop more than the caliber .50. The rotation of the rounds also causes them to drift to the right as they travel. The 40mm scale calculates the drop and "spin drift" for you. „ The 40mm scale is on the right. „ Estimate distance to target. „ If target is 600 meters elevate the weapon so that the target is even with the 6 on the scale. „ Notice that the vertical line curves right as the distance gets farther. This is compensating for the spin drift. „ Fire weapon. „

z

SECTION IV – POST-FIRE CHECKS G-7. After firing, the crew clears all weapon systems and removes all ammunition residue from the exterior of the vehicle. Leaders verify that crews clear all weapon systems IAW DA PAM 385-63. On training ranges, range safety officers verify that crews have cleared all weapon systems. Post-fire checks prevent many accidents.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

G-13

Appendix G

DANGER AFTER FIRING, ENSURE ALL WEAPONS ARE CLEAR.

SECTION V – RANGE DETERMINATION

DELIBERATE RANGE DETERMINATION MIL RELATIONSHIP METHOD G-8. The mil relation may be used in deliberate range determination. When using the mil relation method the crew must use binoculars or a sight system with a calibrated mil-scale to measure the target. G-9. The basis of the mil relation method is that one mil or equals a width (or height) of 1 meter at a range of 1,000 meters or in a unit of angular measurement, equal to 1/6,400 of a circle or about 17.79 (17.8) degrees. The relationship of the angle, the length of the sides of the angle (range), and the width (height) between the sides remains constant. Figure G-12 shows the constant relationship as the angle increases from 1 to 2 mils and the range increases from 1,000 to 2,000 meters. G-10. Standard Army measurements are completed and expressed in the metric system. Other units of measurement (yards, feet, or inches) may be substituted to express the target size or range; however, all information must be expressed in the same unit of measure.

Figure G-12. Constant mil-angle relationship G-11. To use this method, the crew member must know the width, height, and length of the target. He determines the known dimension with the binoculars’ mil scale or a nonballistic sight reticle, substitutes the mil relation, and computes the range (see Table G-2). When measuring the frontal width, he measures only the vehicle’s front slope (from left front corner to right front corner). When measuring flank width, he measures the entire vehicle. Accuracy of this method depends on knowing the target dimensions and the commander’s ability to make precise measurements with binoculars or the sight reticle. G-12. Using Table G-2 and by achieving proper vehicle identification, a crew member can properly determine the standard mil size of the vehicle. This can be used into the calculation of the mil relationship method of range determination. Figure G-13 through Figure G-18 shows the frontal and flank view of a BMP-2 and where the information in the table applies.

G-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation

Table G-2. Mil relation for various targets BMP-2 Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 6.75 meters

140 0

1500

1700

1900

2300

2700

3400

4500

6800

Front 3.0 meters

600

700

800

900

1000

1200

1500

2000

3000

Height 2.3 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 5.5 meters

1100

1200

1400

1600

1800

2200

2800

3700

5500

Front 2.35 meters

500

500

600

700

800

1000

1200

1600

2400

Height 2.3 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

Target Width (mils)

22.5

20

17.5

15

12.5

10

7.5

5

2.5

Flank 17.01 meters

800

900

1000

1100

1400

1700

2300

3400

6804

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Front 4.81 meters

1000

1100

1200

1400

1600

1900

2400

3200

4800

Height 3.82 meters

800

800

1000

1100

1300

1500

1900

2500

3800

Target Width (mils)

22.5

20

17.5

15

12.5

10

7.5

5

2.5

Flank 17.25 meters

800

900

1000

1200

1400

1700

2300

3500

6900

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Height 3.9 meters

800

900

1000

1100

1300

1600

2000

2600

3900

Front 6.9 meters

1400

1500

1700

2000

2300

2800

3500

4600

6900

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 7.1 meters

1300

1500

1700

1900

2200

2700

3400

4500

6700

Front 3.4 meters

700

800

900

1000

1100

1400

1700

2300

3400

Height 2.3 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 7.0 meters

1400

1600

1800

2000

2300

2800

3500

4700

7000

Front 3.6 meters

700

800

900

1000

1100

1400

1700

2300

3400

Height 2.2 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

Target Width (mils)

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

Flank 6.9 meters

1400

1500

1700

2000

2300

2800

3500

4600

6900

Front 3.8 meters

800

900

1000

1100

1300

1500

1900

2500

3800

Height 2.2 meters

500

500

600

700

800

900

1200

1500

2300

BRDM-2

HAVOK

HIND-D HELICOPTER

T-72 TANK

T-80 TANK

T-90 TANK

Note. This table is a quick reference for determining the range of widely sold vehicles at various ranges. The ranges have been rounded-off to the nearest hundredth.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

G-15

Appendix G

Figure G-13. Frontal BMP-2 dimensions

Figure G-14. Flank BMP-2 dimensions

Figure G-15. Frontal Hind-D dimensions

G-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation

Figure G-16. Flank Hind-D dimensions

Figure G-17. Frontal T-72 dimensions

Figure G-18. Flank T-72 dimensions

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

G-17

Appendix G

G-13. Since the relationship of the target width in mils (  and meters (W) is constant at varying distances, accurate range determination is possible. The mil relation holds true whether the W factor is width, height, or length. Therefore, the range can be determined provided the target dimensions are known. Target height may be the most consistent measurement, because length and width are changing as targets move on the battlefield. G-14. There are two WORM formulas beneficial to crew members that can be used to determine information about an object or target. The crew member determining range will be required to decide which formula will be used based on known information gathered. G-15. The first formula should be used to determine range. This formula will need both the width and mil value of the vehicle (see Figure G-19).

Figure G-19. Measuring width with binoculars Example: Step 1. The BMP is 6.75 meters long (W). Using binoculars, the commander determines that the BMP measures 10 mils in length (see Figure G-18). Step 2. The individual determining range substitutes known information into the formula.

or Step 3. Since R is expressed in thousands of meters, multiply by 1,000; and round off to the nearest tenth. For example: 0.675=0.7 so 0.7 x 1,000 = 700 meters, the range to the BMP.

G-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation

G-16. The second formula is used to determine the width (width, length, height) of an object. This is important to determine the width of a bridge for example, that has not been previously identified. The formula carries the same basic concept as the first formula for determining range. The operator will need to know the range to the target and the mil size.

Example: Step 1. The gunner has determined that the range to a bridge is 1,200 meters. The vehicle commander (VC), looking through his binos, determined the mil value to be 2.5 mils. Step 2. The individual determining range substitutes known information into the formula.

or

MAPS/DIGITAL MAPS METHOD G-17. The vehicle crew must have a map to navigate. They must constantly know where they are and where they are going. (The precision lightweight GPS receiver [PLGR] or any other GPS navigational system will not eliminate the need for maps.) The vehicle crew can also use the map to determine range. Besides computing distances on a traditional map, special features on the Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) allow the crew to plot points on the digital map and find the distance between them. A map also allows them to determine the best battlecarry range setting for the terrain and enemy situation and to adjust the battlecarry range when the situation changes. z Both in offense and defense, the vehicle crew must continually assess likely enemy locations, engagement areas, and engagement ranges. This information gives the vehicle crew the capability to determine range rapidly when contact is made. z Target reference points (TRP) are used as both direct and indirect fire control measures. These are entered in the sector sketch for the VC to control his fires and ensure that his reports of enemy sightings are accurate. Since the range to each TRP is known, this will assist in range determination.

KNOWN RANGE (RANGE/SKETCH CARDS) METHOD G-18. The primary use of the range or sketch card is to assist the crew in engaging targets during limited visibility or when effective use of the laser range finder has been lost. The VC may also use the range or sketch card to assist in determining range, since range data is recorded on the card. The range to a previous target engagement is also classified as a known range.

ADJACENT VEHICLE METHOD G-19. Range information can be obtained from an adjacent vehicle that has an operable LRF. If the vehicle providing the range data is relatively close (lateral distance) to the receiving vehicle, then it will be at the same range from the target.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

G-19

Appendix G

FLASH-TO-BANG METHOD G-20. Sound travels through the air at a fairly constant speed, about 330 meters (approximately 1,100 feet) per second. This makes it easy to estimate range, if you can see and hear the action. For example, when you see the flash or smoke of a weapon, or the dust it raises, immediately start counting at a rate of one count per second. When you hear the report of the weapon, stop and multiply the number you were counting when you heard the report by the constant 330. This will be the range to the weapon in meters. If you stop on the number 3, the range is about 990 meters. G-21. Practice timing the speed of your count. The best way to do this is to practice with pyrotechnics fired at known distances. If this is not possible, have someone time you while you count; start over when the count reaches a number higher than 10. Counting numbers such as 12 and 13 will throw your timing off. With practice, you can estimate range more accurately with this method than by eye alone.

SECTION VI – ASV WEAPONS SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS G-22. Malfunctions cost a lot of firing time on tank ranges. Crew error causes most malfunctions. Crews must know the possible reasons for a typical malfunction to occur, this way they can take the necessary steps to correct the malfunction(s) and continue with training. As a precaution, the crew performs standard misfire procedures before correcting any error.

DANGER WHEN A MALFUNCTION OCCURS, ALWAYS PERFORM MISFIRE PROCEDURES BEFORE TAKING ANY OTHER CORRECTIVE ACTION.

STOP A RUNAWAY GUN MK19 AND M48 z

z

Step 1. Continue to keep weapons within the range fans, do not attempt to break the ammunition belt let the weapon fire until is stops. (Sometimes, due to a delay in the cycle of operation, the weapon will appear to fire one round after the trigger is released.) Step 2. After the weapon has stopped firing, unload, and clear it. Then attempt to determine and correct the cause. Do not fire the weapon until the malfunction is corrected.

WARNING Never attempt to twist the ammunition belt to stop a runaway gun. Injury could result to the gunner and damage to the weapon system.

IMMEDIATE ACTION TO CLEAR A JAMMED BOLT MK19 z z z z

G-20

Step 1. Place the weapon on safe. Step 2. Keep weapons within the range fans. Step 3. Wait 10 seconds then crank charging handle clockwise until machine gun bolt comes all the way to the rear. Step 4. While holding charging handle back, and chain in position keeping the bolt to the rear, have assistant crew personnel open machine gun feed cover.

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation

z z z z

Step 5. Remove any ammunition from the bolt face, and from the receiver. Step 6. Ride the bolt forward. Step 7. Index the feed slide assembly. Step 8. Close the feed cover.

ACTION UPON MISFIRE, HANG-FIRE OR JAM PROCEDURES FOR MK19 z z z z z z z z

z z z z z z z z z

Step 1. Gunner moves weapons selector switch to the center position. Step 2. Gunner moves turret over top deck of vehicle keeping weapons pointed down range and within the range fans at all times. Step 3. Gunner moves turret power switch to the off position. Step 4. VC moves the master turret power switch to the off position, and ensures the turret override switch is engaged. Step 5. Gunner waits 5 minutes to allow for a possible delay of the round firing. Step 6. Assistant gunner exits the vehicle from either a side or rear door exit, and gains access to the top of the vehicle from a point behind the weapons. Step 7. Gunner rotates the charging handle clockwise, locking the bolt to the rear and maintains pressure on the handle. Step 8. If the bolt will not go the rear, gunner will rotate the charging handle clockwise as far as possible, and maintain pressure on the handle in order to prevent the bolt from going forward when the feed tray is opened. Step 9. Assistant gunner removes the 40mm mantlet cover, and feed chute cover. Step 10. Assistant gunner disconnects the feed chute from the 40mm machine gun. Step 11. Assistant gunner opens the feed tray cover and removes linked rounds from weapon and checks the chamber for obstruction, blockage, live or expended rounds. Step 12. Assistant gunner clears blockages, and/or obstructions, and removes any live or expended rounds remaining in weapon. Step 13. Once weapon has been cleared assistant checks barrel for obstructions, utilizing bore obstruction device from the rear of the weapon (chamber side) or barrel rod from the front. Step 14. Once barrel has been checked for obstructions and cleared. Assistant gunner directs gunner to slowly ride the bolt forward. Step 15. Gunner rides bolt forward and assistant gunner reloads weapon Step 16. Assistant gunner replaces weapon cover, and feed chute cover and re-enter the vehicle. Step 17. Gunner charges and fires weapon

WARNING Do not allow bolt to slam forward when feed cover is open. Damage to the weapon may occur. Be sure gun is clear of all ammunition and bolt is forward before removing back plate pin. Be prepared to catch dropped/ejected live round. Failure to follow these procedures could result in death or severe injury.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

G-21

Appendix G

ACTION UPON HANG FIRE , MISFIRE OR JAM FOR M48 CALIBER .50 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z

Step 1. Gunner moves weapons selector switch to the center position. Step 2. Gunner moves turret over top deck of vehicle keeping weapons pointed down range and within the range fans at all times. Step 3. Gunner moves turret power switch to the off position. Step 4. VC moves the master turret power switch to the off position, and ensures the turret over -ride switch is engaged. Step 5. Gunner waits 5 minutes to allow for a possible delay of the round firing. Step 6. Gunner elevates mantlets to gain access to feed tray. Keep all personnel clear of line of fire in case round goes off. Step 7. Assistant gunner exits the vehicle from either a side or rear door exit, and gains access to the top of the vehicle from a point behind the weapons. Step 8. Gunner opens feed tray cover and removes ammunition from weapons. Step 9. Gunner pulls down and back on charging handle, locking bolt to the rear. Step 10. Gunner observes chamber and removes any obstructions, clears all ammunition, brass, or links from the weapon. Step 11. Assistant gunner rods the barrel of the M48 ensuring the rod enters the chamber far enough for the gunner to observe it. Step 12. Assistant gunner re-enters the vehicle. Step 13. Gunner pulls down and back on charging handle and slowly rides bolt forward. Step 14. Gunner reloads weapon, charges and fires.

M257 SMOKE GRENADES MALFUNCTION G-23. When smoke grenades fail to launch, perform immediate action, then— z Use the vehicle intercom system to tell the driver to move the vehicle to a safe area. Make sure the driver moves it at least 125 meters from the nearest vehicle, building, person, or equipment. z Fire the smoke grenades. z Look for the smoke through the periscopes. z Move the turret power switch to OFF. z Move the master power switch to OFF. z Check the smoke grenade launcher for misfired smoke grenades. z Remove the smoke grenades from the side where the misfire occurred. z Move the smoke grenades to a well-marked spot at least 200 meters from the nearest vehicle, person, or equipment. z Notify the chain of command of the exact location, type, and number of smoke grenades that malfunctioned. z Notify unit maintenance that the M257 smoke grenade launchers on the vehicle malfunctioned.

COMMUNICATIONS MALFUNCTION G-24. If communications are lost, check the following: z Is the master control station power light on? z Are the radio cable connections loose? z Has the built-in test (BIT) failed on the master control station? z Is the CAPS cord disconnected? z Does the VIC3 FBCB2 display a green status?

G-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Appendix H

120-mm Mortar Gunnery Commanders determine how to train their units and the manner chosen becomes the commander’s training strategy. The mortar gunnery sustainment training tables provide a comprehensive list of gunnery tasks, both firing and nonfiring, that commanders can use to help develop their mortar training strategy. The tables provide the structure for a progressive and sequential gunnery training strategy using dry-fire exercises with gunnery and fire direction center (FDC) examinations as certification prior to live-fire qualifications. The intent is to align mortar gunnery training and qualification with the direct fire platforms of the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) using these tables.

Contents Section I – References ............................. H-1 Section II – Features ................................ H-1 Section III – Description........................... H-2 Critical Gates ..................................... H-3 Phases ............................................... H-5

Qualification Scenarios....................... H-6 Mortar Table Execution ...................... H-6

SECTION I – REFERENCES H-1. The references are— z Field Manual (FM) 3-22.91. z FM 3-22.90. z FM 7-90. z FM 3-22.65. z FM 3-22.68. z Soldier’s Training Publication (STP) STP 7-11B1-SM-TG. z STP 7-11C14-SM-TG. z Technical manual (TM) 9-1015-250-10 (C6). z TM 9-1220-248-10. z TM 9-1220-249-10.

SECTION II – FEATURES H-2. Mortar Tables (MT) provide a consolidated menu of individual and collective gunnery tasks. Commanders choose the battle tasks from this menu to support his mission-essential task list (METL) requirements while operating within training environment and resource constraints. H-3. MTs provide a descriptive gunnery training strategy. As always, the commander must decide how to best use his resources to accomplish training goals. Commanders can modify the MTs to meet unique METL requirements. H-4. DA PAM 350-38 specifies the ammunition required for each firing task and table.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

H-1

Appendix H

SECTION III – DESCRIPTION H-5. MTs provide the structure, frequency, and sequence for the individual and collective training events for mortar sustainment training and qualification. They identify the tasks for dry fire training, examinations for certification as well as live fire qualification. Units should train using training aids, devices, simulators, and simulations (TADSS), when available for the dry fire portion of the tables. Authorization for the use of TADSS in lieu of live fire qualification based on ammunition limitations or availability of impact areas is at the commander’s discretion. Table H-1 through Table H-17 and Figure H-1 depicts the frequency and levels for MT 1 through MT 12. Table H-1. Mortar Table frequency Mortar Table

Description

Frequency

1

Individual Training (Dry-Fire)

Quarterly

2*

Individual Qualification (Dry-Fire)

Quarterly

3

Squad Training (Dry-Fire)

Quarterly

4*

Squad Qualification (Dry-Fire)

Quarterly

5

M2/M240B/M249 Training/Qualification (Dry-/Live-Fire)

IAW Readiness Requirements

6

Section Training (Dry-Fire)

Quarterly

7*

Section Qualification (Dry-Fire)

Quarterly

8**

Section Qualification (Live-Fire)

Semiannually

9**

Mortar Section/Platoon STX Lanes (Dry-/Live-Fire)

Semiannually

10

Section/Platoon Training (Dry-Fire)

Semiannually

11*

Section/Platoon Qualification (Dry-Fire)

Semiannually

12**

Section/Platoon Qualification (EXEVAL-LFX)

Semiannually

* Indicates a critical gate. ** Indicates boresight, misfire procedures, and safety checks must be to standard prior to execution of this table.

H-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

120-mm Mortar Gunnery

MT 3

MT 6 MT 7* MT 8**

MT 9** MT 10 MT 11* MT 12**

MT 4*

MT 9** (Optional)

SECTION/PLATOON

MT 1

MT 5

SECTION

MT 2*

SQUAD

INDIVIDUAL Note. MT 9 (Mortar STX Lanes) can be conducted at section and/or platoon level. * Indicates a critical gate. ** Indicates boresight, misfire procedures, and safety checks must be to standard prior to execution of this table. Figure H-1. Mortar table levels

CRITICAL GATES H-6. Critical gates are tasks or events that Soldiers and units must perform to standard before they progress to subsequent tasks or events. MTs 2, 4, 7, and 11 are critical gates.

MORTAR TABLE 2 H-7. MT 2 (Individual Qualification – Dry) is the critical gate preceding squad training. z The goal is to achieve 90 percent or better on all of the MT 2 tasks. To be qualified, all personnel must perform to the standard in accordance with (IAW) FM 3-22.90. z All MOS 11C personnel assigned to the task force mortar platoon or cavalry squadron mortar section, to include the platoon leader (task force mortars) and troop executive officers (XO) (cavalry squadron troop XO) are required to complete MT 2 (guns) to standard listed above. Section leaders, FDC personnel’s (FDC chief, check computer, and driver/radio/telephone operator [RTO] as well as each gun squad leader must also complete MT 2 (FDC – M16 plotting board) with a passing score goal of 90 percent, and a score IAW with the Army Standard minimum passing score of 70 percent as established by the United States Army Infantry Center (USAIC). z Units will train MT 2 quarterly, or as required to certify new personnel. z Squad leaders and section leaders will serve as observer/controllers (O/C) evaluators for MT 1 Guns. Section leaders/platoon sergeants will serve as O/C evaluators for MT 1 FDC – M16 plotting board. The HBCT S-3 should develop and control the administration and dissemination of the FDC Examination IAW FM 3-22.91, Appendix E. z MT 2 (FDC – M16 plotting board) is also a critical task for the squad leaders assigned to mortar carriers.

MORTAR TABLE 4 H-8. MT 4 (Squad Qualification – Dry) is the squad’s critical gate preceding the section and platoon qualification. z The goal is to achieve 90 percent or better on all of the MT 4 tasks performed to standard IAW the mission training plan (MTP)/DRILL standard. Squads must meet or exceed the standard to be qualified. z Squads must successfully qualify MT 4 before participating in live-fire exercises (LFX).

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

H-3

Appendix H

z z

z

z z

z

Mortar squads/crews/FDCs must be qualified before proceeding to the section qualification. Crew stabilization is critical. Each squad has critical personnel who must be present during the qualification. Commanders can designate additional personnel as critical. If new critical personnel are assigned to a squad, that squad will be retrained and qualified (MT 1 through 4) proceeding to section level tables. The minimum critical personnel are squad leader, gunner, and assistant gunner. FDC critical personnel are the FDC chief and check computer. The weapon system TM establishes minimum crew size. Commanders should use this guidance, in conjunction with critical personnel changes, to determine if a crew can perform expected tasks and retain its qualification. Units will train MT 4 not less than once per quarter. O/C evaluators for MT 4 (guns) will be the section leader. O/C evaluators for MT 4 (FDC – Mortar Fire Control Systems [MFCS]) will be the platoon sergeant/platoon leader. The HBCT S-3 should develop and control the administration and dissemination of the MFCS examination IAW FM 3-22.91 Appendix. E. MT 4 (FDC – MFCS) is also a critical task for the squad leaders assigned to units with (MFCS).

MORTAR TABLE 7 H-9. MT 7 (Section Qualification – Dry) is the section’s critical gate to proceed to the Section Live Fire (MT 8) or Platoon Qualification – Dry (MT 11). z The goal is to achieve 90 percent or better on all of the MT 7 tasks performed to standard IAW FM 3-22.90. Sections must meet or exceed the standards to be qualified. z The section must be qualified dry (MT 7) prior to participation in dry fire section/platoon qualification (MT 11). z The section has an additional critical leader position that must be present during qualification. The same critical leader must be present during the section/platoon qualification (MT 11) for the section to retain its qualification. The additional critical leader position is the section leader. Commanders can designate additional positions as critical. z Units will train MT 7 not less than once per quarter. z O/C evaluators will be the platoon sergeant, and platoon leader.

MORTAR TABLE 11 H-10. MT 11 (Section/Platoon Qualification – Dry) is the section’s/platoon’s critical gate to proceed to the Section/Platoon Qualification – EXEVAL/Live Fire (MT 12). z The goal is to achieve 90 percent or better on all of the MT 11 tasks performed to standard IAW STP 7-11B1-SM-TG standards. Sections/platoons must meet or exceed the standard to be qualified. z The section/platoon must be qualified dry (MT 11), prior to participating in the Section/Platoon EXEVAL/Live Fire (MT 12). z The sections/platoons have critical leader positions in addition to the squad and section critical personnel that must be present during qualification. The critical leader positions are the platoon leader, platoon sergeant, and FDC personnel. Commanders can designate additional positions as critical. z Units will train MT 11 not less than semiannually. z An O/C evaluator package for MT 11 will come from a different unit’s mortar section/platoon. It will consist of a platoon leader/troop XO and/or platoon sergeant, section leader, FDC representative, and squad leader.

H-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

120-mm Mortar Gunnery

SAFETY NOTE Prior to each and every live-fire training event, regardless of the level of collective training, mortar squads are required to demonstrate mastery of three critical tasks. They are as follows: (1) Remove a Misfire (MTP Task 7-4-9294) using the 120mm mortar inert training round (NSN 6920-01-383-2939) as outlined in the TM with the most current change and Safety of Use Message (SOUM). (2) Conduct Boresighting (071-090-0003) in the manual mode and when operating digitally with the Mortar Fire Control System (M95, MFCS), Conduct Pointing Device and Boresight IAW the TM Work Package (WP 0010 00). (3) Perform Safety Checks (071-090-0001). The squad must demonstrate they can perform these tasks to standard in a “dry” situation before they can execute live fire missions. Simulation or merely talking through the sequences or procedures for these three critical tasks is not sufficient to certify this process.

PHASES H-11. MTs divide the sustainment training plan into at least three phases for each echelon above individual. They are training, qualification (dry), and qualification (live). Multiechelon training is the simultaneous training of more than one echelon on different tasks, the conduct of different exercises by a unit, or the training of different tasks by elements of the unit. Multiechelon training occurs whenever an element conducts collective training. Anytime training above Soldier level is conducted, that is multiechelon training. MTs, by their collective nature, are considered multiechelon training. Training, dry qualification, and live fire qualifications are designed to help train or evaluate training at the individual, squad, section, and platoon levels. All MTs sustain individual military occupational specialty (MOS) proficiency.

TRAINING MORTAR TABLES H-12. Training MTs prepare individuals, squads, sections, and platoons for dry fire qualification. The emphasis is on leader training and performing the gunnery and FDC tasks safely to standard without using mortar ammunition. H-13. Units train by using these tables with dry fire procedures. The training tables are MT 1 (individual), MT 3 (squad), MT 5 (crew), MT 6 (section), and MT 10 (section/platoon). H-14. These tables require little training land and operating tempo (OPTEMPO) and no mortar ammunition, only 5.56-mm, 7.62-mm, and caliber .50 ammunition and a firing range once the crew has successfully completed all preliminary marksman instruction (PMI) and dry fire exercises to standard.

DRY QUALIFICATION MORTAR TABLES H-15. Dry qualification MTs prepare individuals, squads, sections, and platoons for maneuver and live-fire qualification. The emphasis is to certify that the unit can perform the maneuver, gunnery and FDC tasks safely to standard before live-fire qualification. H-16. Units train by using these tables with dry-fire procedures. The dry-fire qualification tables are MT 2 (individual), MT 4 (squad), MT 7 (section), and MT 11 (section/platoon) H-17. These tables minimize the use of training resources.

LIVE QUALIFICATION MORTAR TABLES H-18. Live qualification MTs allow the platoon leader/troop XO, company/troop commander, and battalion/squadron commander the ability to assess and evaluate that the platoon can perform all maneuver, gunnery, and FDC tasks safely to standard in support of the unit’s METL.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

H-5

Appendix H

H-19. Units train by using these tables with live-fire procedures. The live-fire qualification mortar and situational training exercise (STX) tables are MT 8 (section), MT 9 (section/platoon STX Lanes), and MT 12 (section/platoon). H-20. The live-fire qualification MTs require extensive use of training land, OPTEMPO, and ammunition.

QUALIFICATION SCENARIOS H-21. Leaders at the squad, section, and platoon levels must develop a METL based scenario when using the STX/qualification tables. These scenarios will help make the qualification tables more meaningful, thus making the training more beneficial.

MORTAR TABLE EXECUTION MORTAR TABLE 1 H-22. MT 1 will be conducted quarterly, prior to the execution of MT 2. MT 1 is designed to prepare personnel for the successful execution of the Gunner’s Examination and FDC Examination for section leaders, FDC personnel, and gun squad leaders (MT 2). MT 2 FDC focuses on manual fire control using the M16 plotting board. The duration of training of MT 1 is not specified and can be conducted during sergeant’s time or as the commander deems necessary.

MORTAR TABLE 2 H-23. MT 2 will be conducted quarterly or as required to certify new personnel. All MOS 11C personnel assigned to the task force mortar platoon or cavalry squadron mortar section, to include the platoon leader (task force mortars) and troop XO (cavalry squadron troop XO) are required to complete MT 2 (guns) to standard IAW FM 3-22.90. MT 2 (FDC) will examine the section leader, FDC personnel, and gun squad leaders on the M16 plotting board. Squad leaders and section leaders will serve as O/C evaluators for MT 2 gunnery tasks; the platoon sergeant/platoon leader will administer the FDC certification examination.

MORTAR TABLE 3 H-24. MT 3 will be conducted quarterly, prior to the execution of MT 4. MT 3 is ideal training for sergeant’s time, and will facilitate crew drill training in conjunction with specific tasks associated with this table. MT 3 FDC transitions from manual fire control to automated and digital fire control using the MFCS M95/M96.

MORTAR TABLE 4 H-25. MT 4 will be conducted quarterly. MT 4 is the critical gate for MT 7 and all squads must qualify MT 4 (guns and FDC both using MFCS) prior to conducting any live-fire training. Mortar squads and FDCs must meet the established standards on all tasks to be considered qualified. Section leaders will O/C the gunnery portion of the table; the platoon sergeant/platoon leader will administer the FDC certification examination. In the maneuver task forces, their respective mortar platoon sergeants, and platoon leaders certify the squads. In the cavalry squadron, the troop commanders certify his mortar squads on this table.

MORTAR TABLE 5 H-26. MT 5 is conducted IAW crew-served weapons readiness standards. MT 5 is designed to orient, familiarize, and train personnel on the M2/M240B/M249 crew drill. MT 5 will be used as a part of the unit PMI prior to any M2/M240B/M249 familiarization/qualification range.

H-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

120-mm Mortar Gunnery

MORTAR TABLE 6 H-27. MT 6 is conducted at the section level quarterly. MT 6 is mandatory for the training progression of cavalry squadron mortar sections. Task force mortar platoons are encouraged to train this table to ensure success and competency at section/platoon operations (MT 10 through MT 12).

MORTAR TABLE 7 H-28. MT 7 will be conducted quarterly if possible and semiannually at a minimum. MT 7 is a critical gate for MT 8 and section or higher echelon live-fire training. All tasks must be accomplished to the established standards IAW the appropriate manuals. Sections that successfully complete MT 7 will be considered qualified (dry). MT 7 is mandatory for the training progression of cavalry squadron mortar sections. Although optional for task force mortar platoons, they are highly encouraged to train this table to ensure success and competency at platoon operations (MT 10 through 12). In the cavalry squadron, section leaders from a different troop’s mortar section will O/C this table. In the maneuver task forces, the mortar platoon sergeant or platoon leader will O/C this table. In the cavalry squadrons, the respective troop commanders will certify their mortar sections. In the task forces, the S-3 will certify this training.

MORTAR TABLE 8 H-29. MT 8 will be conducted semiannually. MT 8 will be a live-fire section field training exercise (FTX). Focus on maximizing the responsiveness of fires and streamlining mortar maneuver. MT 8 is mandatory for the training progression of cavalry squadron mortar sections. Sections that successfully complete MT 7 will be considered qualified for live-fire. Although optional for task force mortar platoons they are highly encouraged to train this table to ensure success and competency at section/platoon operations (MT 10 through MT 12). In the cavalry squadron, section leaders from a different troop’s mortar section will O/C this table. In the maneuver task forces, the mortar platoon sergeant or platoon leader will O/C this table. In the cavalry squadrons, the respective troop commanders will certify their mortar sections. In the task forces, the S-3 will certify this training.

MORTAR TABLE 9 H-30. MT 9 will be conducted semiannually. MT 9 will be a dry- or live-fire section/platoon STX and can be conducted at section or platoon level. The STX lanes will focus on the conduct of tasks in the following areas: z Deploy/conduct maneuver. z Employ fire power. z Develop intelligence. z Protect the force. z Exercise command and control. z Perform sustainment.

MORTAR TABLE 10 H-31. MT 10 will be conducted at section/platoon level semiannually. MT 10 is mandatory for the training progression of task force mortar platoons. Cavalry squadron mortar sections are encouraged to train to this table given competent section operations (MT 6 through MT 8).

MORTAR TABLE 11 H-32. MT 11 will be conducted semiannually. MT 11 is the critical gate for MT 12 (EXEVAL/LFX). Sections/platoons that successfully complete MT 11 will be considered qualified (dry). MT 11 is mandatory for the training progression of both the cavalry squadron mortar sections and task force mortar platoons prior to any EXEVAL LFX. Another troop XO/section sergeant from within the squadron, or mortar platoon’s platoon leader and platoon sergeant from within the brigade are required to O/C this table.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

H-7

Appendix H

The certifier for this table is the task force commander for task force mortars or the cavalry squadron commander for cavalry squadron mortar sections.

MORTAR TABLE 12 H-33. MT 12 will be conducted semiannually. MT 12 will be a live-fire platoon maneuver FTX. MT 12 will be used to conduct section/platoon EXEVAL for each mortar section/platoon. Sections/platoons that successfully complete MT 11 will be considered qualified for live-fire. MT 12 is the culminating event for both the task force mortar platoons and cavalry squadron mortar sections for use in deployability certification rating. Another troop XO/section sergeant from within the squadron, or mortar platoon’s platoon leader and platoon sergeant from within the brigade are required to O/C this table. The certifier for this table is the task force commander for task force mortars or the cavalry squadron commander for cavalry squadron mortar sections.

EXECUTION NOTES H-34. Tables 6 through 8 will be executed in the conventional (or degraded) mode (simulating the digital MFCS is completely inoperable) as noted by the tasks for each table. Units will use manual fire control (the M16 plotting boards, M2 compasses/aiming circles, M67 sights, and aiming stakes) to execute their training/qualification, just as they would in the event of catastrophic systems failure. These skill sets are highly perishable and have been shown as fundamentally deficient throughout the force. H-35. Tables 9 through 12 will be executed in the digital mode (full functionality/slight degradation). Units will use all functions within the MFCS digital packages (M95/M96) to execute their training/qualification. The slight degradation element will be the receipt of calls for fire via FM (simulating unit elements requesting fires without Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS), or software/hardware incompatibility issues within AFATDS). Units will also execute missions with fully functional digital systems using AFATDS if available.

H-8

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

120-mm Mortar Gunnery

Table H-2. Mortar Table 1 FDC examination Mortar Table 1 (Individual Training - Dry)

Fire Direction Center Examination Training Reference

Task Title

Task Number

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Operate a Fire Direction Center

07-3-5072

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Process a Call For Fire

07-3-5090

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Record Information on Firing Records

071-283-0002

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Use Mortar Firing Tables

071-321-4011

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Prepare a Plotting Board for Operation Using the Pivot-Point Method

071-078-0001

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Prepare a Plotting Board for Operation Using the Below the Pivot Point Method

071-078-0002

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Angle T

071-076-0010

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Apply No-Fire Data (Safety Fan) to a Plotting Board

071-076-0008

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Data for a Grid Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0012

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Data for a Mark-Center-of-Sector Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0013

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Data for a Shift Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0016

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Data for a Polar Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0004

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Registration Corrections Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0019

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Data for a Sheaf Adjustment Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0006

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Re-registration Corrections Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0003

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Record Data Using Meteorological Data Sheet

071-076-0003

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Meteorological Firing Corrections

071-076-0004

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

*Compute Data for an Illumination Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0008

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

*Compute Data for a Coordinated Illumination Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0009

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

*Compute Data for a Traversing and/or Searching Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0007

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

*Compute Data for a Quick-Smoke Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0011

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

*Compute Data for a Split-Section Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0017

FM 3-22.91

*Compute Data for Final Protective Fires (FPF)

Page 14-20

This training will enhance the section leader’s, FDC personnel’s (FDC chief, check computer, and driver/RTO) and the gun squad leader’s ability to perform basic FDC tasks using the M16 plotting board. Note. Tasks with an asterisk (*) are considered advanced FDC tasks/special missions and are not required to be tested during MT 2 FDC.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

H-9

Appendix H

Table H-3. Mortar Table 1 gunner's examination Mortar Table 1 (Individual Training - Dry) Gunner's Examination Training - Track Mounted M121 Reference

Task Title

Page Number

FM 3-22.90

Place the Mortar into a Firing Position from the Traveling Position

9-15

FM 3-22.90

Small Deflection Change

9-17

FM 3-22.90

Referring the Sight and Realigning the Aiming Posts

9-18

FM 3-22.90

Large Deflection and Elevation Change

9-19

FM 3-22.90

Reciprocal Laying

9-20

Table H-4. Mortar Table 2 FDC examination Mortar Table 2 (Individual Qualification - Dry) Fire Direction Center Examination Reference

Task Title

Task Number

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Operate a Fire Direction Center

07-3-5072

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Process a Call For Fire

07-3-5090

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Record Information on Firing Records

071-283-0002

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Use Mortar Firing Tables

071-321-4011

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Prepare a Plotting Board for Operation Using the Pivot-Point Method

071-078-0001

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Prepare a Plotting Board for Operation Using the Below the Pivot Point Method

071-078-0002

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Angle T

071-076-0010

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Apply No-Fire Data (Safety Fan) to a Plotting Board

071-076-0008

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Data for a Grid Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0012

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Data for a Mark-Center-of-Sector Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0013

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Data for a Shift Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0016

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Data for a Polar Mission Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0004

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Registration Corrections Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0019

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Data for a Sheaf Adjustment Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0006

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Re-registration Corrections Using a Plotting Board

071-078-0003

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Record Data Using Meteorological Data Sheet

071-076-0003

STP 7-11C14-SM-TG

Compute Meteorological Firing Corrections

071-076-0004

This examination tests the section leader’s, FDC personnel’s (FDC chief, check computer, and driver/RTO) and the gun squad leader’s ability to perform basic FDC tasks using the M16 plotting board.

H-10

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

120-mm Mortar Gunnery

Table H-5. Mortar Table 2 gunner's examination Mortar Table 2 (Individual Qualification - Dry) Gunner's Examination - Track Mounted M121 Reference

Task Title

Page Number

FM 3-22.90

Place the Mortar into a Firing Position from the Traveling Position

9-15

FM 3-22.90

Small Deflection Change

9-17

FM 3-22.90

Referring the Sight and Realigning the Aiming Posts

9-18

FM 3-22.90

Large Deflection and Elevation Change

9-19

FM 3-22.90

Reciprocal Laying

9-20

Table H-6. Mortar Table 3 FDC training Mortar Table 3 (Squad Training – Dry) FDC Training (Dry) - Mortar Fire Control System (MFCS) Reference

Task Title

Page Number

TM 9-1220-248-10

Initialization and Setup as FDC

WP 0039 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Ammo Status

WP 0040 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Grid Mission

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Shift Mission

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Polar Mission

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Quick Fire

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Fire for Effect

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Store Safety Fan

WP 0050 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Store Fire Support Coordination Measures (FSCM)

WP 0049 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Store Meteorological (MET) Data

WP 0045 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Registration

WP 0046 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Converged Sheaf

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Special Sheaf

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Simultaneous Missions

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Final Protective Fire (FPF)

WP 0044 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Illumination and Coordinated Illumination

WP 0043 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Immediate Smoke

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Quick Smoke

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Digital Missions for all Missions as Listed Above

WP 0042 00

This training enhances the section leader’s, FDC personnel’s (FDC chief, check computer, and driver/RTO) and the gun squad leader’s ability to perform manual and digital FDC tasks using the MFCS.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

H-11

Appendix H

Table H-7. Mortar Table 3 squad training Mortar Table 3 (Squad Training – Dry) Squad Training (Dry) - Track/Ground Mounted, M121 Reference

Task Title

Page Number

FM 3-22.90

Place a Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar Into Action

5-26

FM 3-22.90

Perform Safety Checks on a Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar

5-28

TM 9-1220-248-10

Pointing Device and Boresight

WP 0010 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Description and Use of Operator Controls and Indicators

WP 0004 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Startup, Daily Checks, Self Test, and Shutdown Procedures

WP 0007 00

FM 3-22.91

Initialization and Configuration of the MFCS

Chapter 15

TM 9-1220-248-10

Alerts

WP 0009 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Ammo Status

WP 0011 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Navigation and Emplacement

WP 0012 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Fire Command

WP 0013 00

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Lay Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar for Direction with the M2 Compass

3-3

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Reciprocal Lay with Aiming Circle

3-6

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Reciprocal Lay Using Mortar Sight

3-14

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Perform Hasty Lay for Hipshoot Carrier Mounted

3-41

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Perform Direct Lay Carrier Mounted

3-42

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Perform Direct Alignment Carrier Mounted

3-30

FM 3-22.91

Execute Standard Fire Missions

16-1

FM 3-22.91

Execute Basic Fire Missions

16-5

FM 3-22.91

Execute Special Fire Missions

16-15

FM 3-22.90

Lay for Small Deflection and Elevation Change Carrier Mounted

5-29

FM 3-22.90

Lay for Large Deflection and Elevation Change Carrier Mounted

5-29

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Load and Fire the Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar

3-44

TM 9-1015-250-10 C-6

Removal of a Misfire on a Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar

2-148.16

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Take the Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar out of Action

3-49

FM 3-22.90

Mount the Mortar from a Carrier to a Ground-Mounted Position

5-27

FM 3-22.90

Perform Safety Checks on a Ground Mounted 120-mm Mortar

5-11

TM 9-1015-250-10 C-6

Removal of a Misfire on a Ground-Mounted 120-mm Mortar

2-148.16

FM 3-22.90

Taking the Mortar Out of Action (Ground-Mounted to M1064A3 Carrier-Mounted)

5-37

FM 3-22.90

Subcaliber Insert, M303; Characteristics, Maintenance, Misfire Procedures

B-14

FM 3-22.90

Subcaliber Trainer, M313; Characteristics, Maintenance, Misfire Procedures

B-16

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Reconnoiter a Firing Position

5-8

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Occupy a Firing Position

5-54

H-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

120-mm Mortar Gunnery

Table H-8. Mortar Table 4 FDC qualification Mortar Table 4 (Squad Qualification – Dry) FDC Qualification (Dry) - Mortar Fire Control System Reference

Task Title

Page Number

TM 9-1220-248-10

Initialization and Setup as FDC

WP 0039 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Ammo Status

WP 0040 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Grid Mission

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Shift Mission

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Polar Mission

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Quick Fire

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Fire for Effect

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Store Safety Fan

WP 0050 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Store Fire Support Coordination Measures (FSCM)

WP 0049 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Store Meteorological (MET) Data

WP 0045 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Registration

WP 0046 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Converged Sheaf

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Special Sheaf

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Simultaneous Missions

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Final Protective Fire (FPF)

WP 0044 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Illumination and Coordinated Illumination

WP 0043 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Immediate Smoke

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Manual Quick Smoke

WP 0041 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Digital Missions for all Missions as Listed Above

WP 0042 00

This examination tests the section leader’s, FDC personnel’s (FDC chief, check computer, and driver/RTO) and the gun squad leader’s ability to perform manual and digital FDC tasks using the MFCS.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

H-13

Appendix H

Table H-9. Mortar Table 4 squad qualification Mortar Table 4 (Squad Qualification – Dry) Squad Qualification (Dry) Track/Ground Mounted, M121 Reference

Task Title

Page Number

FM 3-22.90

Place a Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar into Action

5-26

FM 3-22.90

Perform Safety Checks on a Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar

5-28

TM 9-1220-248-10

Pointing Device and Boresight

WP 0010 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Description and Use of Operator Controls and Indicators

WP 0004 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Startup, Daily Checks, Self Test, and Shutdown Procedures

WP 0007 00

FM 3-22.91

Initialization and Configuration of the MFCS

Chapter 15

TM 9-1220-248-10

Alerts

WP 0009 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Ammo Status

WP 0011 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Navigation and Emplacement

WP 0012 00

TM 9-1220-248-10

Fire Command

WP 0013 00

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Lay Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar for Direction with the M2 Compass

3-3

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Reciprocal Lay with Aiming Circle

3-6

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Reciprocal Lay Using Mortar Sight

3-14

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Perform Hasty Lay for Hipshoot Carrier Mounted

3-41

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Perform Direct Lay Carrier Mounted

3-42

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Perform Direct Alignment Carrier Mounted

3-30

FM 3-22.91

Execute Standard Fire Missions

16-1

FM 3-22.91

Execute Basic Fire Missions

16-5

FM 3-22.91

Execute Special Fire Missions

16-15

FM 3-22.90

Lay for Small Deflection and Elevation Change Carrier Mounted

5-29

FM 3-22.90

Lay for Large Deflection and Elevation Change Carrier Mounted

5-29

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Load and Fire the Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar

3-44

TM 9-1015-250-10 C6

Removal of a Misfire on a Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar

2-148.16

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Take the Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar out of Action

3-49

FM 3-22.90

Mount the Mortar from a Carrier to a Ground-Mounted Position

5-27

FM 3-22.90

Perform Safety Checks on a Ground Mounted 120-mm Mortar

5-11

TM 9-1015-250-10 C6

Removal of a Misfire on a Ground-Mounted 120-mm Mortar

2-148.16

FM 3-22.90

Taking the Mortar Out of Action (Ground-Mounted to M1064A3 Carrier-Mounted)

5-37

FM 3-22.90

Subcaliber Insert, M303; Characteristics, Maintenance, Misfire Procedures

B-14

FM 3-22.90

Subcaliber Trainer, M313; Characteristics, Maintenance, Misfire Procedures

B-16

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Reconnoiter a Firing Position

5-8

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Occupy a Firing Position

5-54

H-14

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

120-mm Mortar Gunnery

Table H-10. Mortar Table 5 machine gun crew training/qualification Mortar Table 5 (Machine Gun Crew Training/Qualification - Dry/Live) Machine Gun Training/Qualification (Dry/Live) - M2/M249/M240B Reference

Task Title

Page Number

FM 3-22.68

Perform Operator Maintenance on the M249

1-21

FM 3-22.68

Perform Operator Maintenance on the M240B

3-22

FM 3-22.68

Operate the M249

1-30

FM 3-22.68

Operate the M240B

3-30

FM 3-22.68

Load, Correct Malfunction, Unload the M249

1-30

FM 3-22.68

Load, Correct Malfunction, Unload the M240B

3-30

FM 3-22.68

Engage Targets with the M249

Appendix D

FM 3-22.68

Engage Targets with the M240B

Appendix D

FM 3-22.68

Disassemble and Reassemble the M249

1-13

FM 3-22.68

Disassemble and Reassemble the M240B

3-11

FM 3-22.65

Perform Operator Maintenance on the M2 HB, .50 Caliber

2-10

FM 3-22.65

Set Headspace and Timing on the M2 HB, .50 Caliber

3-11

FM 3-22.65

Operate the M2 HB, .50 Caliber

3-1

FM 3-22.65

Load, Correct Malfunction, Unload the M2 HB, .50 Caliber

3-1

FM 3-22.65

Engage Targets with the M2 HB, .50 Caliber

Chapter 5

FM 3-22.65

Disassemble and Reassemble the M2 HB, .50 Caliber

2-1

FM 3-22.68

Qualify Crews with assigned Machine Guns (M249/M240B)

Appendix D

FM 3-22.65

Qualify Crews with assigned Machine Guns (.50 Caliber)

Chapter 5

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

H-15

Appendix H

Table H-11. Mortar Table 6 section training - dry/conventional mode Mortar Table 6 (Section Training - Dry/Conventional Mode) Section Training (Dry) – Track Mounted, M121 Reference

Task Title

Page Number

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Prepare for Combat Conduct Tactical Road march (Mounted) Prepare for a Chemical Attack Conduct Troop Leading Procedures Conduct Passive Air Defense Measures Employ Protective Obstacles Perform Resupply Operations Maintain Operations Security Conduct a Rehearsal Conduct Risk Management Report Tactical Information Reconnoiter a Firing Position Operate a Fire Direction Center Process Call for Fire Fire Hipshoot (Adjust) Lay Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar for Direction with the M2 Compass Reciprocal Lay Using Mortar Sight Occupy a Firing Position Reciprocal Lay with Aiming Circle Fire Adjust Fire (Mark Center of Sector – MCS) Register and Adjust a Parallel Sheaf Fire Adjust Fire (Grid/Shift/Polar) Fire for Effect Fire Immediate Suppression/Smoke Fire Priority Target Fire Time on Target Fire Quick Smoke Fire Simultaneous Missions Defend Against a Ground Attack Fire Hipshoot (Immediate Suppression/Smoke) Perform Direct Lay Carrier Mounted Treat and Evacuate Casualties Handle Enemy Prisoners of War Process Captured Documents and Equipment Displace by Echelon Perform Direct Alignment Carrier Mounted Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Fire Hipshoot (Immediate Suppression/Smoke) Adjust Final Protective Fire Fire Final Protective Fire React to a Chemical Attack Fire Illumination Fire Coordinated Illumination

5-190 5-37 5-140 5-182 5-132 5-124 5-160 5-136 5-171 5-179 5-12 5-8 5-187 5-197 5-87

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

3-3 3-14 5-54 3-6 5-94 5-121 5-94 5-100 5-105 5-109 5-118 5-112 5-115 5-46 3-41 3-42 5-168 5-157 5-166 5-51 3-30 5-175 3-41 5-80 5-85 5-147 5-102 5-97

Note. MT 6 is mandatory for cavalry squadron mortar sections and optional for task force mortar platoons.

H-16

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

120-mm Mortar Gunnery

Table H-12. Mortar Table 7 section qualification - dry/conventional mode Mortar Table 7 (Section Qualification - Dry/Conventional Mode) Section Qualification (Dry) – Track Mounted, M121 Reference

Task Title

Page Number

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Prepare for Combat Conduct Tactical Road march (Mounted) Prepare for a Chemical Attack Conduct Troop Leading Procedures Conduct Passive Air Defense Measures Employ Protective Obstacles Perform Resupply Operations Maintain Operations Security Conduct a Rehearsal Conduct Risk Management Report Tactical Information Reconnoiter a Firing Position Operate a Fire Direction Center Process Call for Fire Fire Hipshoot (Adjust) Lay Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar for Direction with the M2 Compass Reciprocal Lay Using Mortar Sight Occupy a Firing Position Reciprocal Lay with Aiming Circle Fire Adjust Fire (Mark Center of Sector – MCS) Register and Adjust a Parallel Sheaf Fire Adjust Fire (Grid/Shift/Polar) Fire for Effect Fire Immediate Suppression/Smoke Fire Priority Target Fire Time on Target Fire Quick Smoke Fire Simultaneous Missions Defend Against a Ground Attack Fire Hipshoot (Immediate Suppression/Smoke) Perform Direct Lay Carrier Mounted Treat and Evacuate Casualties Handle Enemy Prisoners of War Process Captured Documents and Equipment Displace by Echelon Perform Direct Alignment Carrier Mounted Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Fire Hipshoot (Immediate Suppression/Smoke) Adjust Final Protective Fire Fire Final Protective Fire React to a Chemical Attack Fire Illumination Fire Coordinated Illumination

5-190 5-37 5-140 5-182 5-132 5-124 5-160 5-136 5-171 5-179 5-12 5-8 5-187 5-197 5-87

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

3-3 3-14 5-54 3-6 5-94 5-121 5-94 5-100 5-105 5-109 5-118 5-112 5-115 5-46 3-41 3-42 5-168 5-157 5-166 5-51 3-30 5-175 3-41 5-80 5-85 5-147 5-102 5-97

Note. MT 7 is mandatory for cavalry squadron mortar sections and optional for task force mortar platoons.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

H-17

Appendix H

Table H-13. Mortar Table 8 section qualification - live/conventional mode Mortar Table 8 (Section Qualification - Live/Conventional Mode) Section Qualification (Live) – Track Mounted, M121 Reference

Task Title

Page Number

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Prepare for Combat Conduct Tactical Road March (Mounted) Prepare for a Chemical Attack Conduct Troop Leading Procedures Conduct Passive Air Defense Measures Employ Protective Obstacles Perform Resupply Operations Maintain Operations Security Conduct a Rehearsal Conduct Risk Management Report Tactical Information Reconnoiter a Firing Position Operate a Fire Direction Center Process Call for Fire Fire Hipshoot (Adjust) Lay Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar for Direction with the M2 Compass Reciprocal Lay Using Mortar Sight Occupy a Firing Position Reciprocal Lay with Aiming Circle Fire Adjust Fire (Mark Center of Sector – MCS) Register and Adjust a Parallel Sheaf Fire Adjust Fire (Grid/Shift/Polar) Fire for Effect Fire Immediate Suppression/Smoke Fire Priority Target Fire Time on Target Fire Quick Smoke Fire Simultaneous Missions Defend Against a Ground Attack Fire Hipshoot (Immediate Suppression/Smoke) Perform Direct Lay Carrier Mounted Treat and Evacuate Casualties Handle Enemy Prisoners of War Process Captured Documents and Equipment Displace by Echelon Perform Direct Alignment Carrier Mounted Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Fire Hipshoot (Immediate Suppression/Smoke) Adjust Final Protective Fire Fire Final Protective Fire React to a Chemical Attack Fire Illumination Fire Coordinated Illumination

5-190 5-37 5-140 5-182 5-132 5-124 5-160 5-136 5-171 5-179 5-12 5-8 5-187 5-197 5-87 3-3

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

3-14 5-54 3-6 5-94 5-121 5-94 5-100 5-105 5-109 5-118 5-112 5-115 5-46 3-41 3-42 5-168 5-157 5-166 5-51 3-30 5-175 3-41 5-80 5-85 5-147 5-102 5-97

Note. MT 8 is mandatory for cavalry squadron mortar sections and optional for task force mortar platoons.

H-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

120-mm Mortar Gunnery

Table H-14. Mortar Table 9 mortar section/platoon STX lanes - dry/live/digital mode Mortar Table 9 (Mortar Section/Platoon STX Lanes - Dry/Live/Digital Mode) Mortar Section/Platoon STX Lanes (Dry/Live) - Track Mounted, M121 Reference Task Title LANE: DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Displace by Echelon STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Occupy a Firing Position STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Conduct Tactical Road March (Mounted) STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Conduct a Passage of Lines as the Passing Unit STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Defend Against a Ground Attack LANE: EMPLOY FIRE POWER STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Fire Hipshoot (Immediate Suppression/Smoke) STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Fire Hipshoot (Adjust) STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Perform Direct Lay Carrier Mounted STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Perform Direct Alignment Carrier Mounted STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Register and Adjust a Parallel Sheaf STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Fire Adjust Fire STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Fire for Effect STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Adjust Final Protective Fire STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Fire Final Protective Fire STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Fire Priority Target STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Fire Time on Target STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Fire Immediate Suppression/Smoke STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Fire Quick Smoke STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Fire Illumination STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Fire Coordinated Illumination STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Fire Simultaneous Missions LANE: DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Report Tactical Information STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Reconnoiter a Firing Position LANE: PROTECT THE FORCE STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Employ Protective Obstacles STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Conduct Passive Air Defense Measures STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Maintain Operations Security STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Prepare for a Chemical Attack STP 7-11B1-SM-TG React to a Chemical Attack LANE: PERFORM SUSTAINMENT STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Handle Enemy Prisoners of War STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Perform Resupply Operations STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Process Captured Documents and Equipment STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Treat and Evacuate Casualties LANE: EXERCISE COMMAND AND CONTROL STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Conduct a Rehearsal STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Conduct Risk Management STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Conduct Troop-Leading Procedures STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Operate a Fire Direction Center STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Prepare for Combat STP 7-11B1-SM-TG Process Call for Fire

Page Number 5-51 5-54 5-37 5-22 5-46 3-41 5-87 3-42 3-30 5-121 5-94 5-100 5-80 5-85 5-109 5-118 5-105 5-112 5-102 5-97 5-115 5-12 5-8 5-124 5-132 5-136 5-140 5-147 5-157 5-160 5-166 5-168 5-171 5-175 5-179 5-182 5-187 5-190 5-197

Note. MT 9 is mandatory for both the cavalry squadron sections and task force mortar platoons.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

H-19

Appendix H

Table H-15. Mortar Table 10 section/platoon training - dry/digital mode Mortar Table 10 (Section/Platoon Training - Dry/Digital Mode) Section/Platoon Training (Dry) - Track Mounted, M121 Reference

Task Title

Page Number

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Prepare for Combat Conduct Tactical Road March (Mounted) Prepare for a Chemical Attack Conduct Troop Leading Procedures Conduct Passive Air Defense Measures Employ Protective Obstacles Perform Resupply Operations Maintain Operations Security Conduct a Rehearsal Conduct Risk Management Report Tactical Information Reconnoiter a Firing Position Operate a Fire Direction Center Process Call for Fire Fire Hipshoot (Adjust) Occupy a Firing Position Fire Adjust Fire (Mark Center of Sector – MCS) Register and Adjust a Parallel Sheaf Fire Adjust Fire (Grid/Shift/Polar/Quick Fire) Fire for Effect Fire Immediate Suppression / Smoke Fire Priority Target Fire Time on Target Fire Quick Smoke Fire Simultaneous Missions Defend Against a Ground Attack Fire Hipshoot (Immediate Suppression/Smoke) Perform Direct Lay Carrier Mounted Treat and Evacuate Casualties Handle Enemy Prisoners of War Process Captured Documents and Equipment Displace by Echelon Perform Direct Alignment Carrier Mounted Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Adjust Final Protective Fire Fire Final Protective Fire React to a Chemical Attack Fire Illumination Fire Coordinated Illumination

5-190 5-37 5-140 5-18 5-132 5-124 5-160 5-136 5-171 5-179 5-12 5-8 5-187 5-197 5-87 5-54 5-94 5-121 5-94 5-100 5-105 5-109 5-118 5-112 5-115 5-46 3-41 3-42 5-168 5-157 5-166 5-51 3-30 5-175 5-80 5-85 5-147 5-102 5-97

Note. MT 10 is mandatory for task force mortar platoons and optional for cavalry squadron mortar sections.

H-20

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

120-mm Mortar Gunnery

Table H-16. Mortar Table 11 section/platoon qualification - dry/digital mode Mortar Table 11 (Section/Platoon Qualification - Dry/Digital Mode) Section/Platoon Qualification (Dry) - Track Mounted, M121 Reference

Task Title

Page Number

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Prepare for Combat Conduct Tactical Road March (Mounted) Prepare for a Chemical Attack Conduct Troop Leading Procedures Conduct Passive Air Defense Measures Employ Protective Obstacles Perform Resupply Operations Maintain Operations Security Conduct a Rehearsal Conduct Risk Management Report Tactical Information Reconnoiter a Firing Position Operate a Fire Direction Center Process Call for Fire Fire Hipshoot (Adjust) Occupy a Firing Position Fire Adjust Fire (Mark Center of Sector – MCS) Register and Adjust a Parallel Sheaf Fire Adjust Fire (Grid/Shift/Polar/Quick Fire) Fire for Effect Fire Immediate Suppression/Smoke Fire Priority Target Fire Time on Target Fire Quick Smoke Fire Simultaneous Missions Defend Against a Ground Attack Fire Hipshoot (Immediate Suppression/Smoke) Perform Direct Lay Carrier Mounted Treat and Evacuate Casualties Handle Enemy Prisoners of War Process Captured Documents and Equipment Displace by Echelon Perform Direct Alignment Carrier Mounted Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Adjust Final Protective Fire Fire Final Protective Fire React to a Chemical Attack Fire Illumination Fire Coordinated Illumination

5-190 5-37 5-140 5-182 5-132 5-124 5-160 5-136 5-171 5-179 5-12 5-8 5-187 5-197 5-87 5-54 5-94 5-121 5-94 5-100 5-105 5-109 5-118 5-112 5-115 5-46 3-41 3-42 5-168 5-157 5-166 5-51 3-30 5-175 5-80 5-85 5-147 5-102 5-97

Note. MT 11 is mandatory for both the task force mortar platoons and cavalry squadron mortar sections prior to the any EXEVAL LFX.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

H-21

Appendix H

Table H-17. Mortar Table 12 section/platoon qualification - EXEVAL/LFX/digital mode Mortar Table 12 (Section/Platoon Qualification - EXEVAL/LFX/Digital Mode) Section/Platoon Qualification (EXEVAL/LFX) - Track Mounted, M121 Reference

Task Title

Page Number

STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Prepare for Combat Conduct Tactical Road March (Mounted) Prepare for a Chemical Attack Conduct Troop Leading Procedures Conduct Passive Air Defense Measures Employ Protective Obstacles Perform Resupply Operations Maintain Operations Security Conduct a Rehearsal Conduct Risk Management Report Tactical Information Reconnoiter a Firing Position Operate a Fire Direction Center Process Call for Fire Fire Hipshoot (Adjust) Occupy a Firing Position Fire Adjust Fire (Mark Center of Sector – MCS) Register and Adjust a Parallel Sheaf Fire Adjust Fire (Grid/Shift/Polar/Quick Fire) Fire for Effect Fire Immediate Suppression/Smoke Fire Priority Target Fire Time on Target Fire Quick Smoke Fire Simultaneous Missions Defend Against a Ground Attack Fire Hipshoot (Immediate Suppression/Smoke) Perform Direct Lay Carrier Mounted Treat and Evacuate Casualties Handle Enemy Prisoners of War Process Captured Documents and Equipment Displace by Echelon Perform Direct Alignment Carrier Mounted Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Adjust Final Protective Fire Fire Final Protective Fire React to a Chemical Attack Fire Illumination Fire Coordinated Illumination

5-190 5-37 5-140 5-182 5-132 5-124 5-160 5-137 5-171 5-179 5-12 5-8 5-187 5-197 5-87 5-54 5-94 5-121 5-94 5-100 5-105 5-109 5-118 5-112 5-115 5-46 3-41 3-42 5-168 5-157 5-166 5-51 3-30 5-175 5-80 5-85 5-147 5-102 5-97

Note. MT 12 is the culminating event for both the task force mortar platoons and cavalry squadron mortar sections for use in deployability certification rating.

H-22

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Glossary SECTION I – ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS AA

assembly area

AAC

armament accuracy checks

AAR

after action review

ABC

air battle captain

ABFIST AC

Advanced Bradley Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer active component

ACA

airspace coordination area

ACR

Armored Cavalry Regiment

ACU

Army combat uniform

AD ADA admin AFATDS AFI

air defense air defense artillery administrative Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System Air Force Instruction

AFIST

Abrams Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer

AGES

Air-to-Ground Engagement System

AGTS

Advanced Gunnery Training Systems

AHA

ammuntion holding area

AIM

Abrams integrated management

AIN

ammunition information notices

aka

also known as

AKO AL ALC AMSAA ANCD AP APC

Army Knowledge Online Alabama Administrative/Logistics Center Army Materiel Systems Analysis Activity automated network control device antipersonnel; armor piercing Armored Personnel Carrier

APDS-T

armor-piercing discarding sabot with tracer

APFSDS

armor-piercing, fin-stabilized, discarding sabot

APFSDS-T API API-T APOBS AP-SS

3 September 2009

armor-piercing, fin-stabilized, discarding sabot with tracer armor-piercing incendiary armor-piercing incendiary-tracer Antipersonnel Obstacle Breaching System armor-piercing-single shot

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

Glossary-1

Glossary

ARNG ARS ARTEP

Armored Reconnaissance Squadron Army Training and Evaluation Program

ASP

ammunition supply point

ASV

Armored Security Vehicle

ATGM ATIA

antitank guided missile Army Training Information Architecture

ATO

air tasking order

ATT

aided target tracker

ATTK SEL ATWESS

attack select antitank weapon effect signature simulation

aux

auxiliary

A/V

audiovisual

AVCATT AZ BATS

aviation combined arms tactical trainer azimuth Bradley Advanced Training System

BB

bunker buster

BC

Bradley commander

BCPS

Bradley Crew Proficiency Course

BCT

brigade combat team

BCU

battery coolant unit

BDA

battle damage assessment

BDAR bde BELRF BFIST

battle damage assessment and repair brigade Bradley eyesafe laser range finder Bradley Fire Support Team

BFT

blue force tracker

BFV

Bradley Fighting Vehicle

BGST

Bradley Gunnery Skills Test

B/H

black/hot

BII

basic issue items

BIT

built-in test

BMO bn BOT BPI BRMS BRT BS BSB

Glossary-2

Army National Guard

battalion maintenance officer battalion burst on target bolt position indicator Battlefield Reference Marking System brightness boresight brigade support battalion

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Glossary

BSS BT

ballistic solution software Bradley tables

BTA

boresight telescope assembly

btry

battery

C2 CAB C-AGTS cal CALFEX can CAS CASEVAC

command and control Combined Arms Battalion Computerized Advanced Gunnery Training System caliber Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise canister close air support casualty evacuation

CATS

Combined Arms Training Strategies

CATT

Combined Arms Tactical Trainer

CAUGEX cav CBRN CCF CCHA

combined arms urban gunnery exercise cavalry chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear computer correction factors commander’s control handle assembly

CCP

computer control panel

CCS

critical crew skills

CCTT CCTT-RVS CDF CE

Close-Combat Tactical Trainer Close-Combat Tactical Trainer Reconfigurable Vehicle Simulator close defensive fires chemical energy

CEU

computer electronics units

CFF

call for fire

CFL

coordinated fire line

CFFT

Call for Fire Trainer

CFV CG

Cavalry Fighting Vehicle Commanding General

CGE

command guidance electronics

CGF

computer generated forces

CHS

commander’s handstation

CID

combat identification

CIP

combat identification panels

CITV

commander’s independent thermal viewer

CIV

commander’s independent viewer

CLU

command launch unit

CMETL

3 September 2009

core mission-essential task list

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

Glossary-3

Glossary

COA COFT

conduct-of-fire trainers

COLT

combat observation and lasing team

Comm

commercial

COMSEC con CONUS

communications security control Continental United States

COP

common operational picture

co tm

company team

COTS

commercial off-the-shelf

CPC

crew proficiency course

CPP

convoy protection platforms

CPX

command post exercise

CROWS CSCP

Commanders Remotely Operated Weapon System commander’s sight control panel

CSE

commander’s sight extension

CST

crew-station trailer

CT1

combat table 1

CT

combat table

CTC

combat training center

CTD

commander’s tactical display

CTT

common task test

CVC

combat vehicle crewman

CVS

Combat Vehicle System

CWS

commander’s weapon station

D3A

decide, detect, deliver, and assess

DA

Department of the Army

DAHA

dual axis head assembly

DCGE

digital command guidance electronics

DCIMS

Dismounted Combat Identification Marking System

DCM

digital control monitor

DCS

digital compass system

DCT

digital control transformer

DECU

digital electronics control unit

desig

designate

DEU

digital electronics unit

DIDEA dly

Glossary-4

course of action

detect, identify, decide, engage, and assess delay

DMETL

directed mission-essential task list

DMPRC

digital multipurpose range complex

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Glossary

DODAC

Department of Defense Ammunition Code

DODIC

Department of Defense Identification Code

DPICM

dual purpose improved conventional munitions

DS DSN DTDCD-E

direct support Defense Switched Network Directorate of Training, Doctrine, Combat Development and Experimentation

DTG

date, time, group

DTV

day television

DU

depleted uranium

DVE

driver’s vision enhancement

DVO

direct-view optics

dvr

driver

EA

engagement area

EBFV

Engineer Bradley Fighting Vehicle

ED

embedded diagnostics

EFC

equivalent full charge

EFP

explosively formed penetrators

EFST EL ELF ELRF

essential fire support task elevation eyesafe laser filter eyesafe laser range finder

EOD

explosive ordnance disposal

EPD

environmental parameter data

EPLRS

Enhanced Position Location Reporting System

EPW

enemy prisoner of war

EQT

engineer qualification tables

ERA

explosive reactive armor

EST

engagement skills trainer

FA FAC

field artillery forward air controller

FARP

forward arming and refueling point

FART

fuselage armament, rotors, and tails

FATS

Field Artillery Training System

FBCB2 FCEU

Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below fire control electronics unit

FCS

fire control system

FCX

fire coordination exercise

FDC

fire direction center

FEA

fuze escapement assembly

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

Glossary-5

Glossary

FEP FFCS

fuel-function crew station

FFE

fire for effect

FFI

full frontal impact

FH/M FIST FIST-V FLIR FM FMC FO FOSD

frequency hopping/master fire support team Fire Support Team-Vehicle forward looking, infrared field manual fully mission capable forward observer fire-over, shoot-down

FOV

field of view

FPF

final protective fires

FPL

final protective line

FPW

firing port weapon

FRAGO

fragmentary orders

FRPR FSC

full range practice round federal supply code

FSCL

fire support coordination line

FSCM

fire support coordination measures

FSCOORD FSO FT FTX GA GAS GCDP

fire support coordinator fire support officer firing table field training exercise Georgia gunner’s auxiliary sight gunner’s computer display panel

GEU

guidance electronics unit

GHS

gunner’s handstation

GLOS

gunner’s line of sight

GMC

grenade machine gun

gnr

gunner

GPCH

gunner’s power control handles

GPM

ground precautionary messages

GPS GPSE

Global Positioning System; gunner’s primary sight GPS extension

grd

grenade

GS

general support

GSCP

Glossary-6

firepower enhancement program

Gunner’s Sight Control Panel

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Glossary

GSR

ground surveillance radar

GST

gunnery skills test

GT GTLF G/VLLD

gunnery table gate to live fire ground/vehicular laser locator designator

HA

heavy armor

HB

heavy barrel

HBCT

Heavy Brigade Combat Team

HCPC

HMMWV crew proficiency course

HE HEAT HEAT-MP-T HEAT-T HEAT-TP-T HEDP HEI HEI-T HEMTT HE-OR-T hi HMMWV

high explosive high-explosive antitank; HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer high-explosive, antitank-multipurpose-tracer high-explosive, antitank-tracer high-explosive, antitank-target practice-tracer high-explosive dual-purpose high-explosive incendiary high-explosive incendiary with tracer heavy expanded mobility tactical truck high-explosive obstacle reducing with tracer high High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle

HOB

height of burst

HPT

high-priority target

HPTL

high-payoff target list

HQ

headquarters

HT

HMMWV tables

HTPS HTU HVCC hz

hull-turret position sensor handheld terminal unit high velocity canister cartridge hertz

IAW

in accordance with

IBAS

Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem

IC3 ICWS ID

integrated communications, command, and control improved commander’s weapon station identification

IED

improvised explosive devices

IFV

Infantry Fighting Vehicle

IL illum

3 September 2009

Illinois illumination

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

Glossary-7

Glossary

IMP init INU

initialize inertial navigation unit

I/O

instructor/operator

IOS

instructor/operator station

IR

infrared

IS

instructor station

ISU

Integrated Sight Unit

IUH

instructor utilization handbook

JAAT

Joint Air Attack Team

JCIMS

Joint Coalition Identification Marking System

JMEM

Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual

JTAC

Joint Tactical Air Controller

KE

kinetic energy

kph

kilometers per hour

KSI

kill status indicator

KY

Kentucky

LAN

local area network

LAW

light anti-tank weapons

LBL

laser borelight

LBS

laser boresight

LC

line of contact

LCU

line control unit

LD

line of departure

ldr

leader

LED LFAST LFX LI LIN

light emitting diode live-fire accurate screening test live-fire exercise light armor line item number

LMTS

Laser Marksmanship Training System

LMTV

Light Medium Tactical Vehicle

ln

line

lo

low

LOS LRAS3

Glossary-8

impact

line of sight Long-Range Advanced Scout Surveillance System

LRF

laser range finder

LTA

launch tube assembly

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Glossary

LTI LTID LZ MAGTS mal MAM MANPADS MAPEX MAX ORD

lower tactical internet laser target interface device landing zone Mobile Advanced Gunnery Training System malfunction maintenance advisory messages Man-Portable Air Defense System map exercise maximum ordinate

MBA

main battle area

MBD

muzzle boresight device

MC-AGTS MCOFT

Mobile Configuration of Computerized Training System mobile conduct-of-fire trainer

MCS

missile control subsystem

MDL

mission data loader

MEDEVAC

medical evacuation

MEL

maximum engagement line

MEP

mission equipment package

MER

maximum effective range

METL

mission-essential task list

METT-TC MGO

mission, enemy, terrain (weather), troops and support available, time available, civil considerations machine gun optics

MGRS

Military Grid Reference System

MGSS

Main Gun Simulator System

MICLIC MILES mm MOPMS MOPP MOS MP MPAT

mine-clearing line charges Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System millimeters Modular Pack Mine System mission-oriented protective posture military occupational specialty military police multipurpose antitank

mph

miles per hour

mps

meters per second

MPI

mean (average) point of impact

MPL

minimum proficiency levels

MPRC

multipurpose range complex

MRAP

mine resistant ambush protected

MRS

3 September 2009

muzzle reference system

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

Glossary-9

Glossary

m/s MSR MT MTO MTOE

meters per second missile simulation round mortar table message to observer modified table or organization and equipment

MTV

medium tactical vehicle

NAR

notification ammunition reclassification

NATO NCO NCOIC NCS NFOV NG

North Atlantic Treaty Organization noncommissioned officer noncommissioned officer in charge net control station narrow field of view National Guard

NGF

naval gunfire

NIIN

national item identification number

NJ NOHD

New Jersey nominal ocular hazard distance

NSB

near-surface burst

NSN

national stock number

NTC

National Training Center

NVG

night-vision goggles

NVS

night-vision sight

O/C

observer/controller

ODS

Operation Desert Storm

ODS-E OE OIC

Operation Desert Storm-Engineer operational environment officer in charge

OPCON

operational control

OPFOR

opposing forces

OPLAN

operational plan

OPORD

operations order

OPTEMPO

operating tempo

OR ORSA OT OVD PAAR PC

Glossary-10

obstacle reducing Operations Research Analyst observer-target over ride platoon after-action review personnel carrier

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Glossary

PCC PCI PCPC PD PDF PEWS PGS PH PIBD

precombat checks precombat inspections Preliminary Crew Proficiency Course point detonating primary direction of fire platoon early warning system Precision Gunnery System probability of hit point initiating, base detonating

PJS

pulse jet-air system

PK

probability of kill

PL

phase line

PLGR plrt PMCS PMI PN POL POSNAV PRX PZ QDR RAGTS RATELO RBD RC RC-MAT RDL REDCON RF

precision lightweight GPS receiver polarity preventive maintenance checks and services preliminary marksman instruction part number petroleum, oils, and lubricants position navigation proximity Pickup zone quality deficiency report Relocatable Advanced Gunnery Training System radio-telephone operator remote biocular display reserve component radio-controlled miniature aerial targets Reimer Digital Library readiness condition radio frequency

RFA

restrictive fire area

RFL

restrictive fire line

RH&TNB ROC-V

revised hull and turret network boxes recognition of combat vehicles

ROE

rules of engagement

RPG

rocket-propelled grenade

RPO

radiation protection officer

RSO

range safety officer

RTO

radio/telephone operator

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

Glossary-11

Glossary

S-1

adjutant

S-2

intelligence officer

S-3

operations and training officer

S-4

supply officer

SA

situational awareness

SAF SAW SCATMINE

semi-automated forces squad automatic weapon scatterable mine

SCB

system control box

SCF

sight correction factor

SCLU SDZ sec SEP SF shtr SIMNET

simulated command launch unit surface danger zone section system enhancement package standard form shutter Simulations Network

SIMNET-T

Simulations Network-Trainer

SINCGARS

Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System

SIO SITREP SLAP SLAP-T

situation report saboted light armor penetrator saboted light armor penetrator with tracer

SLD

squad leader’s display

SME

subject matter expert

smk SMTC SOP SOUM SPOTREP

smoke Soldier’s Manual of Common Tasks standing operating procedures safety-of-use messages spot report

SQ

super quick

sqd

squad

SR

simulated round

SRTA

short-range training ammunition

SS

student station; single shot

ST

special text

STANAG STLS STP STRAC

Glossary-12

senior/instructor operator

standardized agreement Stinger Training Launch/Simulator Soldier Training Publication Standards and Training Commission

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Glossary

STX SU SUBDES TACNAV

situational training exercise situational understanding subdesignations tactical navigation system

TACOM

Tank-Automotive Command

TACSOP

tactical standing operating procedures

TADSS TAMIS-R TAS TASC

training aids, devices, simulations, and simulators Total Ammunition Management System-Redesigned target acquisition system Training Activity Support Center

TB

technical bulletin

TC

tank commander; training circular

TCGST TCP TCPC

tank crew gunnery skills test traffic control point tank crew proficiency course

TDA

table of distribution and allowance

TDIP

training device interface panel

TDS

turret drive system

T&E

traverse and elevation

T&EO

training and evaluation outlines

TEWT

tactical exercise without troops

TFT tgt TGT THPD TI TIGER

tabletop full-fidelity trainer target tabletop gunnery trainer Turret Hull Power Distribution (M1A2) technical inspection total integrated engine revitalization

TIP

tank/infantry phone, thermal identification panel

TIS

Thermal Imaging System

TM

technical manual

TMPU TNT

turret mission processor unit trinitrotoluene

TO&E

tables, organization, and equipment

TOE

table of organization and equipment

ToT

time on target

TOT

tracer-on-target

TOW TOW BB TP TPCSDS-T

3 September 2009

tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire-guided TOW bunker buster target practice target practice cone stabilized discarding sabot-tracer

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

Glossary-13

Glossary

TPDS-T

target practice discarding sabot with tracer

TPMP-T

target practice multipurpose-tracer

TP-T TRADOC trk TRP TSFO TSV TT

target practice with tracer United States Army Training and Doctrine Command track target reference point target set forward observer thru-sight video tank tables

TTP

tactics, techniques, and procedures

TTT

time to target

TUSK UAAPU UAS

Tank Urban Survivability Kit under-armor auxiliary power unit Unmanned Aircraft System

UCOFT

Unit Conduct of Fire Trainer

UGS

Unattended Ground Sensors

UK ULT

United Kingdom universal laser transmitter

UN

United Nations

US

United States

USAF USAIC USAR USR UTCP UXO VA VBIED VC VCCT

United States Air Force United States Army Infantry Center United States Army Reserve unit status report upgraded tank commander’s panel unexploded ordnances vertical angle vehicle born improved explosive device vehicle commander Virtual Combat Convoy Trainer

VCCT-L

Virtual Combat Convoy Trainer (Lockheed)

VCCT-R

Virtual Combat Convoy Trainer (Raydon)

VCE VCEEP VCOT VDC VIP VISMODS

Glossary-14

vehicle crew evaluator Vehicle Crew Evaluator Exportable Package Virtual Convoy Operations Trainer volts direct current very important person visual modification sets

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Glossary

VMS VT

vehicle motion sensor variable time

WCB

weapons control box

WCS

weapon control status

WFOV W/H WHAT WP WRP XO

3 September 2009

wide field of view white/hot wheels, hull, armament, track white phosphorous weapon reference point executive officer

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

Glossary-15

This page intentionally left blank.

References SOURCES USED These are the sources quoted or paraphrased in this publication.

AIR FORCE PUBLICATIONS

AFI 13-212, Range Planning and Operations, 16 November 2007. ARMY PUBLICATIONS

AR 75-1, Malfunctions Involving Ammunition and Explosives, 4 Novembe 2008. AR 350-1, Army Training and Leader Development, 3 August 2007. AR 385-63, Range Safety, 19 May 2003. AR 746-2, Combat Vehicle Marking System, 1 August 1993. ARTEP 6-115-MTP, Mission Training Plan for the Field Artillery Cannon Battalion Command and Staff Section, Headquarters and Headquarters Battery, and Service Battery, 1 April 2000. DA Pamphlet 350-38, Standards in Training Commission, 13 May 2009. DA Pamphlet 385-40, Army Accident Investigation and Reporting, 6 March 2009. DA Pamphlet 385-63, Range Safety, 4 August 2009. DA Pamphlet 385-64, Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards, 15 December 1999. FM 3-09.8, Field Artillery Gunnery, 31 August 2006. FM 3-09.32, Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Joint Application of Firepower, 20 December 2007. FM 3-21.71, Mechanized Infantry Platoon and Squad (Bradley), 20 August 2002. FM 3-22.9, Rifle Marksmanship M16-/M4-Series Weapons, 12 August 2008. FM 3-22.27, MK19, 40-mm Grenade Machine Gun, MOD 3, 28 November 2003. FM 3-22.31, 40-mm Grenade Launcher, M203, 13 February 2003. FM 3-22.34, TOW Weapon System, 28 November 2003. FM 3-22.37, Javelin–Close Combat Missile System, Medium, 20 March 2008. FM 3-22.65, Browning Machine Gun Caliber .50 HB, M2, 3 March 2005. FM 3-22.68, Crew-Served Weapons, 21 July 2006. FM 3-22.90, Mortars, 7 December 2007. FM 3-22.91, Mortar Fire Direction Center Procedures, 17 July 2008. FM 3-23.25, Shoulder-Launched Munitions, 31 January 2006. FM 3-23.30, Grenades and Pyrotechnics Signals, 7 June 2005. FM 3-23.35, Combat Training with Pistols, M9 and M11, 25 June 2003. FM 3-90.1, Tank and Mechanized Infantry Company Team, 9 December 2002. FM 4-30.13, Ammunition Handbook: Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Munitions Handlers 1 March 2001. FM 6-20, Fire Support in the Airland Battle, 17 May 1988. FM 6-30, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Observed Fire, 16 July 1991. FM 7-0, Training for Full Spectrum Operations, 12 December 2008. FM 7-90, Tactical Employment of Mortars, 9 October 1992. ST 3-20.12-7, M1028 120-mm Canister Characteristics and Capabilities for the M1A1, M1A2, and M1A2 SEP Abrams Tanks, 23 March 2007. STP 7-11B1-SM-TG, Soldier’s Manual and Trainer’s Guide, MOS 11B, Infantry, Skill Level 1, 6 August 2004. STP 7-11C14-SM-TG, Soldier’s Manual and Trainer’s Guide MOS 11C, Indirect Fire Infantryman, Skill Levels 1/2/3/4, 6 August 2004. TB 9-1300-385, Munitions Restricted or Suspended, 31 July 2006.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

References-1

References

TB Med 524, Occupational and Environmental Health Control of Hazards to Health from Laser Radiation, 1 January 2006. TC 25-4-1, How to Plan, Prepare, and Conduct a Fire Coordination Exercise, 18 January 1984. TC 25-8, Training Ranges, 5 April 2004. TC 25-20, A Leader’s Guide to After Action Reviews, 30 September 1993. TC 90-1, Training for Urban Operations, 19 May 2008. TM 3-1040-268-20&P, Organizational Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Launcher, Grenade, Smoke: Screening, RP, M250 (NSN 1040-00-000-0138), 14 May 1982. TM 9-1000-202-14, Evaluation of Cannon Tubes, 1 February 1999. TM 9-1005-200-23&P/TM 08672A-23&P, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual (Including Depot Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Gun, Automatic: 25-mm, M242 W/Equipment (NSN 1005-01-086-1400) (EIC: 4TE) and Gun, Enhanced Automatic: 25-mm, M242 W/Equipment (NSN 1005-01-454-0396) (EIC: 4TE), 11 June 2001. TM 9-1005-201-10/TM 08671A-10/1A/TO 11W3-5-5-51, Operator’s Manual for Machine Gun, 5.56-mm, M249 W/Equip (NSN 1005-01-127-7510) (EIC: 4BG), 26 July 1991. TM 9-1005-213-10/TM 02498A-10/2/TO 11W2-6-3-161/SW361-AB-MMO-010, Operator’s Manual for Machine Guns, Caliber .50; M2 Heavy Barrel Flexible, W/E (NSN 1005-00-322-9715) (EIC: 4AG) M48 Turret Type (1005-00-957-3893) (EIC: 4BB) Soft Mount (1005-01-343-0747) (Navy) Fixed Right Hand Feed (1005-00-122-9339) (Navy) Fixed Type Left Hand Feed (1005-00-122-9368) (Navy), 1 June 2001. TM 9-1005-245-13&P/T.O. 11W2-8-1-322/TM 1005-13A&P/1, Operator’s, Unit, and Direct Support Maintenance Manual with Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL) for Machine Gun Mounts and Combinations for Tactical/Armored Vehicles M122 Machine Gun Tripod (NSN 1005-00-710-5599) (EIC: 4EF) M122A1 Machine Gun Mount (1005-00-433-1617) M192 Machine Gun Tripod (1005-01503-0141) M3 Machine Gun Tripod (1005-00-322-9716) (EIC: 4EA) M142 Machine Gun Mount (1005-00-854-4463) 6650, .50 Caliber, Machine Gun Mount (1005-00-704-6650) M197 Machine Gun Mount (1005-01-413-4098) MK64 Machine Gun Mount Mod 5 (1010-01-180-9319); Mod 9 (1010-01412-3159) MK93 Mod 0 Machine Gun Mount (USMC only) (1005-01-383-2949) MK93 Mod 1 Machine Gun Mount (1005-01-383-2757) MK93 Mod 2 Machine Gun Mount (1005-01-502-7547), 17 April 2005. TM 9-1005-309-10, Operator’s Manual for Submachine Gun, 5.56-mm: Port Firing, M231 (NSN 1005-01081-4582) (EIC: 4BE), 5 August 1997. TM 9-1005-313-10 (M240 series)/T.O. 11W2-6-5-1/TM 08670A/09712A-10/1B/SW360-AH-OPI-010, Operator's Manual for Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240 (NSN 1005-01-025-8095); M240B (1005-01412-3129); M240C (1005-01-085-4758); M240D (1005-01-418-6995); M240E1 (1005-01-252-4288); M240G (1005-01-359-2714); M240H (1005-01-518-2410) M240N (1005-01-493-1666), 15 November 2002. TM 9-1010-221-10/TO 11W3-9-4-1/TM 07700B-10/SW370-AE-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual Grenade Launcher, 40mm: M203, (1010-00-179-6447) Grenade Launcher, 40mm: M203A1 (1010-01-4349028); Headquarters, Department of the Army, Air Force, Marine Corps, and Navy, 1 August 2001. TM 9-1010-230-10/TM 08521A-10/1A/TO 11W2-5-16-1/SW 363-C3-MMM-010, Operator's Manual for Machine Gun, 40mm, MK19, Mod 3 (NSN 1010-01-126-9063) (EIC: 4AE), 30 May 2001. TM 9-1010-230-23&P/TO 11W2-5-16-2/TM 08521A/09761A-23&P/2A/SW363-C3-MMM-020, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual (Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Machine Gun, 40 mm, MK 19 MOD 3 (NSN 1010-01-126-9063) (EIC 4AE) and Machine Gun, MK 19, 40 mm, Upgunned Weapons Station (UPWS) (1010-01-362-6513), 30 November 2005. TM 9-1015-250-10, Operator’s Manual for Mortar, 120mm: Towed M120 (NSN 1015-01-226-1672) (EIC:4SL) and Mortar, 120mm: Carrier-Mounted M121 (1015-01-292-3801) (EIC:4SE), 19 August 1996. TM 9-1040-267-20&P, Organizational Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools Lis) for Launcher, Grenade, Smoke: Screening, RP, M243 (NSN 1040-01-059-0560), M257 (1040-01070-1213) AND M259 (1040-01-107-7501), 1 February 1984. TM 9-1220-248-10, Operator’s Manual for Mortar Fire Control System, M95 (NSN 1230-01-503-7784) (EIC: 3QT) (With Version 3 Software), 31 October 2005.

References-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

References

TM 9-1220-249-10, Operator’s Manual for Mortar Fire Control System, M96 (NSN 1230-01-503-7783) (EIC: 3QS) (With Version 3 Software), 31 October 2005. TM 9-1315-886-12/TO 11L2-4-10-2, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Launcher and Cartridge, 84 millimeter: M136 (AT4), 15 May 1990. TM 9-2350-252-10-2, Operator’s Manual for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2 (NSN 2350-01-048-5920) (EIC: APA) M2A1 (2350-01-179-1027) (EIC: ALE) and Fighting Vehicle, Cavalry M3 (2350-01-0492695) (EIC: APB) M3A1 (2350-01-179-1028) (EIC: ALF) Turret, 22 September 1986. TM 9-2350-264-10-1/TM 08953A-10/1-1, Operator’s Manual for Operator Controls, PMCS, and Operation Under Usual Conditions Volume 1 of 2 Tank, Combat, Full-Tracked: 120-mm Gun, M1A1(NSN 2350-01-087-1095) General Abrams, 5 March 2003. TM 9-2350-264-10-2/TM 08953A-10/1-2, Operator’s Manual for Operation Under Unusual Conditions, Emergency Procedures, Troubleshooting, and Maintenance Volume 2 of 2 Tank, Combat, FullTracked: 120-mm Gun, M1A1 (NSN 2350-01-087-1095), General Abrams, 5 March 2003. TM 9-2350-284-10-2, Operator’s Manual for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2A2 (NSN 2350-01-248-7619) (EIC ALG) and Fighting Vehicle, Cavalry M3A2 (2350-01-248-7620) (EIC ALH) Turret, 30 April 2001. TM 9-2350-284-20-2-1, Unit Maintenance for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2A2 (NSN 2350-01-248-7619) (EIC: ALG) Fighting Vehicle, Infantry, M2A2 Operation Desert Storm (2350-01-405-9886) (EIC: APE) Fighting Vehicle, M2A2 w/ODS for Engineers (2350-01-494-9960) Fighting Vehicle, Cavalry, M3A2 (2350-01-248-7620) (EIC: ALH) Fighting Vehicle, Cavalry, M3A2 Operation Desert Storm (2350-01-405-9887) (EIC: APF) Turret, 19 July 2002. TM 9-2350-294-10-1, Operator's Manual for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2A3 (NSN 2350-01- 436-0005) (EIC: APG) Fighting Vehicle, Calvary M3A3 (2350-01-436-0007) (EIC: APH) and Fighting Vehicle, M3A3 BFIST (2350-01-506-0132) Hull, 30 March 2007. TM 9-2350-294-10-2-1, Operator's Manual for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2A3 (NSN 2350-01-436-0005) (EIC: APG); Fighting Vehicle, Calvary M3A3 (2350-01-436-0007) (EIC: APH) and Fighting Vehicle, M3A3 BFIST (2350-01-506-0132) Turret, 15 September 2000. TM 9-2350-294-10-2-2, Operator's Manual for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2A3 (NSN 2350-01-436-0005) (EIC: APG) and Fighting Vehicle, Calvary M3A3 (2350-01-436-0007) (EIC: APH) and Fighting Vehicle, M3A3 BFIST (2350-01-506-0132) Turret, 15 September 2000. TM 9-2350-294-20-2-1, Unit Maintenance Manual for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2A3 (NSN 2350-01436-0005) (EIC APG) and Fighting Vehicle, Cavalry M3A3 (NSN 2350-01-436-0007) (EIC APH) and Fighting Vehicle, M3A3 BFIST (NSN 2350-01-506-0132) Turret, 15 September 2000. TM 9-2350-388-10-1, Operator's Manual for Tank, Combat, Full-Tracked: 120-MM GUN M1A2 System Enhancement Package (SEP) (NSN 2350-01-328-5964) (EIC: AAF) GeneraL Abrams Volume 1 of 3, 6 February 2009. TM 9-2350-388-10-2, Operator's Manual for Tank, Combat, Full-Tracked: 120-mm Gun, M1A2 System Enhancement Package (SEP) (NSN 2350-01-328-5964) (EIC: AAF) General Abrams Volume 2 of 3, 6 February 2009. JOINT PUBLICATIONS

JP 3-0, Joint Operations, 17 September 2006.

DOCUMENTS NEEDED These documents must be available to the intended users of this publication. DA Form 581, Request for Issue and Turn-In of Ammunition. DA Form 1594, Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officer’s Log. DA Form 2028, Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms. DA Form 2404, Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet. DA Form 2408-4, Weapon Record Data. DA Form 5988-E, Equipment Inspection Maintenance Worksheet (EGA). DA Form 7476-R, 10-Meter Boresight Offset Target. DA Form 7523-R, Boresight Telescope Accuracy Test.

3 September 2009

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

References-3

References

DA Form 7556-R, Discrete CCF Worksheet. DA Form 7558-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Individual Roll-Up. DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet. DA Form 7658-R, Gunnery Tables X, XI, XII Scoresheet (Platoon Qualification). DA Form 7659-R, Gunnery Tables VII, VIII, IX Scoresheet (Section Qualification). DA Form 7660-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Platoon Roll-Up. DA Form 7661-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Company Roll-Up. DA Form 7662-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Platoon Roll-Up. DA Form 7663-R, Crew Gunnery Roll-Up Sheet. DA Form 7664-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I – Crew Critical Skills Test Scoresheet. DA Form 7665-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Company Roll-Up. SF 368, Product Quality Deficiency Report.

References-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

3 September 2009

Index

A Abrams, preface, 1-2, 1-3, 1-5, 1-6, 1-7, 2-1, 2-2, 2-6, 2-7, 2-9, 3-4 through 3-6, 3-9, 3-12 through 3-15, 5-3, 5-11, 5-16, 6-14, 6-16, 7-l3, 7-5, 8-1 through 8-43, 11-2, 11-8 through 11-35, 12-2, 12-5 through 12-23, 13-4 through 13-6, 13-15, 13-27, 16-1, 16-4 through 16-6, 16-19, 16-31, 18-5 through 18-18, 19-2, A-1 through A-142, F-6 through F-12 ammunition stowage plan, A-133 through A-135 armament accuracy checks (AAC), A-1 through A-142 boresighting, A-1 through A-40 dead space, 5-4 error sources, A-114 fuel consumption, 1-7, 1-8 Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer (A-FIST), preface, 11-2, 11-21, 11-22, 11-28, 12-6 historical records, A-136 through 142 integrated management (AIM), 2-1, 2-2, 2-4, 2-9, live fire accuracy screening test, A-87 through A-102 live-fire preparation, A-1 through A-142 M1A1, 1-1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-4 through 2-9, 4-40, 4-42, 4-47, 4-49, 4-51, 7-6, 7-8, 8-13, 8-23, 8-29, 8-35, 8-40 through 8-43, 9-15, 11-13, 11-21, 11-22, 19-9, A-90 through A-121, F-6 through F-8 Mobile Conduct-of-Fire Trainer (MCOFT), 11-9 post-fire checks, A-112 pre-fire checklist, A-42, A-43 recoil system, 3-12

3 September 2009

specific range determination, A-119 through A-133 stadia reticle, 7-8 System Enhancement Package (SEP), 2-1, 2-5 through 2-9, 4-40, 4-42, 4-47, 4-49, 4-50, 5-3, 5-8, 7-5, 7-6, 7-8, 8-12, 8-23, 8-29, 8-32, 11-13, 11-21, A-23, A-30, A-37, A-40, A-41, A-43, A-63 through A-93, A-99 through A-123, F-6 through F-8 weapons system malfunctions, A-112 through A-114 zeroing tank-mounted machine guns, A-102 through A-119 active component, 12-2, 12-20 through 12-22 Advanced Bradley Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer (AB-FIST) (also see Bradley), preface Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS), H-8 Gunnery Training Systems (AGTS), preface, 11-20, 11-21, 12-6, 12-7, 12-23 after action reviews (AAR), 11-8, 11-14 through 11-34, 12-9 through 12-16, 13-1, 13-3, 13-22, 14-5, 14-13, 16-10, 17-4, 18-5, D-1, F-5 aided target tracker (ATT), 2-11 air air battle (ABC), 13-18 search techniques, 5-12 aircraft vehicle identification, 6-9 through 6-12 engine mounting, 6-10 fenestron tail rotor, 6-11 key identification features, 6-12 rear horizontal stabilizer wings, 6-12

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

rotary wing external sensors, 6-10 tail rotor, 6-11 airspace coordination area (ACA), 9-26 air tasking order (ATO), 9-22 ammo holding area (AHA), 12-23 ammunition, preface, 1-3, 2-1, 4-1, 4-22, 4-24, 4-29 through 4-58, 4-65, 4-66, 4-71, 4-97, 4-103, 11-17 caliber .50, 1-3, 1-6, 2-9, 2-18, 2-19, 4-1, 4-9, 4-11, 4-16 through 4-18, 4-100, 7-3, 8-5, 8-9, 8-10, 8-16, 8-32, 8-33, 8-40 through 8-43, 8-57, 11-2 through 11-35, 12-21, 13-27, 14-6, 16-3, 16-11, 17-12 through 17-20, 18-9 through 18-18, 19-4, 19-9, 19-10, A-18, A-36, H-15 5.56mm, 1-3, 3-1, 4-1, 4-10 through 4-13, 4-100, 7-3, 13-26, D-5 through D-7 7.62 mm, 1-3, 2-9, 2-13, 2-16, 3-4, 4-1, 4-10, 4-14, 4-15, 4-100, 7-3, 8-33, 8-40, 11-17, 11-18, 11-30, 11-31, 13-12, 13-26, 13-27, 16-19, 16-21, 16-23, 18-11 through 18-18, 19-4, 19-9 25mm, 1-3, 4-1, 4-19 through 4-31, 4-98, 4-100, 7-3, 7-4, 8-11, 11-3, 11-26, 13-26, 16-3, 16-8, 16-10, 16-15, 16-27 through 16-35, 18-5 through 18-18, 19-4, 19-9, 19-18, 19-19 types, M791, 4-19 through 4-23 M792, 4-19 through 4-28 M910, 4-19, 4-29, 4-30 M919, 4-19 through 4-23 40mm, 1-3, 4-1, 4-32 through 4-37, 4-100, 7-3, 11-31, 13-26, 16-3, 16-8, 16-10, 16-15, 16-27

Index-1

Index

through 16-35, 17-12 through 17-16, 17-18, 17-20, 18-9 through 18-18, D-3 through D-5 types, M385, 4-32 through 4-35 M430, 4-32 through 4-37 M918, 4-32 through 4-35 M1001, 4-32 through 4-37 MK281 MOD O, 4-32 through 4-37 120mm, 1-3, 1-7, 2-9, 4-1, 4-37 through 4-61, 4-98, 4-100, 7-3, 8-11, 8-40, 11-3, 13-26, 16-3, 16-8 through 16-35, 18-11 through 18-18, A-10, F-6 holding area (AHA), 4-36 information notices (AIN), 1-3 Javelin, 4-1, 4-92 through 4-97, 4-100, 8-11, 9-11, 12-20, 19-4, 19-18, 19-19, D-3 through D-20 M172, 11-30 M196, 3-1 M242, 25mm, 4-19 M256, 4-37, 4-45, 4-49, 4-51, 4-52, 4-54 MK19, 4-1, 4-32, 4-33, 4-37 120-mm mortar, 4-1, 4-57, 4-58, 4-62, 4-66, 4-100 HE M933, 4-57 through 4-61 HE M934, 4-57 through 4-61 illum M930, 4-57 through 4-60 illum M983, 4-58 through 4-61 markings, 4-3 practice M931, 4-57 through 4-61 smoke M929, 4-57 through 4-60 information notices (AIN), 4-102 smoke grenades, 4-69, 4-70 stowage plan, A-134, A-135 weapon, 7-3, 7-4 supply point (ASP), 4-31, 4-36, 4-53, 4-54, 4-97 TOW missiles,

Index-2

TOW 2A, 4-71 through 4-82 TOW 2B, 4-71 through 4-89 TOW BB, 4-73, 4-77, 4-89 through 4-92 120-mm (tank), M829A1, 4-39 through 4-44 M829A2, 4-39 through 4-44 M829A3, 4-38, 4-39, 4-41 through 4-43 M830, 4-38, 4-39, 4-44, 4-45, 4-50 M830A1, 4-38, 4-39, 4-45, 4-46, 4-51 M831A1, 4-39, 4-49 through 4-53 M865, 4-39, 4-49 through 4-53 M908-HE-OR-T, 4-38, 4-45, 4-46 M1002, 4-38, 4-39, 4-49, 4-51 M1028, 4-38 through 4-41, 4-46, 4-48, 4-53 TOW missiles, 4-78, 4-83 analog electronics unit (AEU), 4-75 AN/GVS-5, 7-5 AN/PAQ-4C, C-2, C-3, C-9 AN/PAS-13B, C-5, C-9, C-10 AN/PAS-13 (V) 2 MWTS, C-2, C-5 AN/PAS-13 (V) 3 HWTS, C-2, C-5 AN/PEQ-2A, C-2, C-10, C-20, C-21, C-23 AN/PSS-14, E-4 AN/PVS-4, C-2, C-4, C-9 AN/TV-5A, C-5, C-10 antipersonnel, 7-4, 7-6 obstacle breaching system (APOBS), E-10 through E-14 antitank guided missile (ATGM), 3-1, 3-4, 3-5, 4-10, 4-19, 4-23, 5-6, 5-7, 7-3, 8-33, 9-13, 13-18, F-1 weapon effect signature simulation (ATWESS), 18-9 AN/VVS-2, 2-7, 2-19 area of

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

interest, 13-19 operations, 13-19 armament accuracy checks (AAC), 8-26, 12-17, 16-12, A-1 through A-142 armor, 2-1, 2-2, 2-4, 2-7, 2-17 heavy, 2-1, 2-2 piercing (AP), 3-8, 4-3, 4-10, 4-11, 4-13, 8-3 through 8-6, 8-60, 10-3, 11-25, 18-8 through 18-18, B-1, B-37, B-43, B-51 through B-55, B-66, B-67 -piercing discarding sabot with tracer (APDS-T), 4-21, 4-22, 4-29, 7-5, 8-6, 13-13, B-63 -piercing, fin-stabilized, discarding sabot with tracer (APFSDS-T), 4-3, 4-10, 4-11, 4-17, 4-22, 4-23, 4-42, 4-43, 4-52, 8-6, A-116 -piercing incendiary (API), 4-11, 4-17, 7-4 piercing incendiarytracer (API-T), 8-40 piercing with tracer (AP-T), 4-13, 4-15 protection, 2-1 through 2-4, 2-10, 2-16 Armored Cavalry Regiment (ACR), preface, 1-1, 1-2 Security Vehicle (ASV), 1-6, 2-14, 2-15, 2-16, 8-32, 8-43, 8-62, 8-64, 16-1, 16-6, 16-7, 16-21, 16-23, 16-26, 18-8 through 18-16, G-1 through G-22 vehicles, 10-2 kill indicators, 10-2 kill standard, 10-2 Army combat uniform (ACU), F-8 Electronic Product Support (AEPS), A-136, A-137 Knowledge Online (AKO), 1-6, 4-102, E-10 Materiel Systems Analysis Activity (AMSAA), 11-33 National Guard of the United States (ARNGUS), preface, 2-1, 11-10

3 September 2009

Index

armored truck live-fire preparation, C-1 through C-32 LRAS3, C-28 through C-32 post fire checks, C-27, C-28 pre-fire checks, C-11 sight offset information, C-20 through C-27 weapon sights, C-1 through C-10 weapon system malfunctions, C-19, C-20 zeroing, C-11 through C-19 AT4, 7-3, 9-11, 9-13, 12-20 attack select (ATTK SEL), D-10 audio/visual (AV), 13-3 aviation Army, 13-18 Combined Arms Tactical Trainer (AVCATT), 11-15 azimuth (AZ), A-1 through A-94, B-15 through B-17, B-23 through B-30, B-37, B-39, B-41, B-51 through B-55 B backblast area danger zone, 4-92 ballistic firing tables, 13-12, 13-13 bandoleer, 4-11 basic machine gun, 1-6 basic skills trainer (BST), 4-92 D-9 battalion maintenance officer (BMO), 19-3 battle damage assessment (BDA), 16-10, 17-4, 18-7 focus, 12-2 roster changes, 12-20 battlecarry, 1-4, 8-2 through 8-8 battlefield, 1-1, 1-4, 2-1 through 2-14 Reference Marking System (BRMS), 6-17, 6-18 battery coolant unit (BCU), 4-92, 4-94, D-9, D-11 binoculars, 7-10, 7-16 black/hot (B/H), A-28

3 September 2009

blue force tracker (BFT), 2-4 BMP-2/3, 7-12, 7-13, 7-14, 7-17, 9-13, 18-12 through 18-18, A-126 through A-131, D-17 bolt position indicator (BPI), B-3, B-51, B-52 borelight, C-20 through C-24 boresighting, A-1 through A-42, A-102, A-103, A-115 through A-117, B-4 through C-18 through B-34, C-31 equipment testing procedures, B-5 through B-12 indications, B-5 preparation, B-4 day and night refraction, A-118 restricted areas, B-4 telescope assembly (BTA), B-7, B-8 visibility conditions, B-4 weapons checks with the close-in panel, B-34 through B-50 Bradley, preface, 1-2, 1-4, 1-5, 1-6, 1-7, 2-9 through 2- 14, 3-1, 3-5, 3-8, 3-9, 3-15, 3-16, 5-3, 5-5, 5-8, 5-11, 6-15, 7-5, 7-6, 7-9, 8-1 through 8-61, 9-9, 11-2, 11-9, 11-20, 11-25, 12-2 through 12-20, 13-4 through 13-6, 13-27, 16-4, 16-5, 16-21, 16-23, 18-5 through 18-18, 19-2, 19-3, 19-7, F-12, F-13 Advanced Bradley FullCrew Interactive Simulator Trainer (AB-FIST), preface, 11-2, 11-27, 11-28, 12-6, 12-14 Advanced Training System (BATS), 11-10, 11-27, 12-7, 12-14 boresighting, B-4 through B-50 Crew Proficiency Course (BCPC), 1-6 dead space, 5-5 dual-feed system, B-1 through B-4 Engineer Bradley Fighting Vehicle (EBFV), 18-6

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

eye safe range finder (BELRF), 7-5 Fighting Vehicle (BFV), preface, 1-2, 2-9, 2-10, 2-11, 2-12, 2-13, 2-14, 3-1, 3-5, 3-16, 5-8, 5-15, 7-1, 7-6 through 7-9, 8-1, 8-29, 9-10, 9-11, 9-14, 11-2, 11-14, 11-23, 11-26, 11-27, 11-28, 11-35, 12-4, 12-6, 12-7, 12-9, 12-22, 13-6, 18-6, 18-7, B-1, B-5, B-9, B-10, B-12, B-13, B-32, B-34, B-35, B-45, B-56, B-58, B-60, B-63 through B-66, D-1, D-14, D-17 through D-22, F-12, F-13 Fire Support Team (BFIST), 2-10, 2-14, 12-2, 12-14, 18-6, 18-8, 18-13, 18-18 Gunnery Skills Test (BGST), 1-5 Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS), 2-11, 3-17, 5-11, 5-15, 7-6, 8-13, 8-14, 8-23, 8-26, 8-30, 8-35, 8-41, 8-43, B-4, B-5, B-52 through B-54, B-64 through B-66 M2A2 Operation Desert Storm (ODS), 3-1, 3-16, 7-4, 8-35, 11-2, 11-10, 11-27, 11-28, 18-7, B-51 through B-54 M2A2/M2A3, 1-4, 2-9, 2-10, 2-13, 2-14, 3-1, 4-36, 5-3, 5-8, 5-11, 5-12, 5-15, 5-16, 7-4, 9-15, 11-26, 13-6, 19-3, 19-9 post-fire checks, B-58 pre-fire checks, B-50 through B-53 range determination, B-58 through B-67 stadia reticle, 7-7 TIP, 6-15 TOW limitations, B-68, B-69 weapons system malfunctions, B-56 through B-58 zeroing procedures, B-53 through B-56

Index-3

Index

BRDM, 7-13, 18-16 through 18-18, A-123, A-128 brigade support battalion (BSB), D-3 BRMS, 6-18 BTR-80, 18-16 through 18-18 built-in-test (BIT), 2-12, 3-9, 8-26, A-114, B-58 burst on target (BOT), 11-9, 11-22, 11-25, 12-21 C call for fire (CFF), 1-4, 9-19 for fire trainer (CFFT), 11-10, 11-11 CAM bracket, A-84 through A-87 casualty evacuation (CASEVAC), D-19 Cavalry Fighting Vehicle (CFV), 2-9 chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN), 2-2, 2-12, 2-19, 5-15, 12-2, 16-11, 16-34, 18-7, 19-3, 19-9, 19-16, 19-20, A-43, D-19 chemical energy (CE), 4-19, 4-20, 4-32, 4-37, 4-38, 4-40, 4-45, 4-56, 4-81, 4-82, 16-19 through 16-36, A-134 claymore mine, E-8 close air support (CAS), 13-18, 13-19 Combat Tactical Trainer (CCTT), 12-3, 12-7, 12-23, 17-8 Combat Tactical Trainer Reconfigurable Vehicle Simulator (CCTT-RVS), 11-2, 11-15, 11-31 defensive fires (CDF), 9-21 combat identification (CID), 1-1, 5-2 identification panels (CIP), 6-13, 6-14, D-14 observation and lasing team (COLT), 9-22 tables, VII, VIII, IX, X, XI, XII, 1-7 training, 1-1

Index-4

Training Center (NTC), 12-3 vehicle crewman (CVC), A-114, B-58, F-8 through F-12 Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise (CALFEX), 1-7, 2-1, 12-1, 12-8, 12-14, 13-20, 16-2, 17-2, 18-1, 19-1 through 19-24 Tactical Trainer (CATT), 11-2, 11-14, 11-15 Training Strategies (CATS), 12-6, 13-15, 18-1, 18-2, 19-2, 19-15, 19-18 Urban Gunnery Exercise (CAUGEX), 13-20 command and control, 2-4, 2-7, 2-11, 2-12 and control vehicle (C2V), 17-1, D-19 guidance electronics (CGE), 3-16 launch unit (CLU), D-9, D-10 commanders assessment, 12-3, 12-4 Control Handle Assembly (CCHA), 2-5, A-120 guidance, 12-16, 12-17 handstation (CHS), B-53, B-55 Independent Thermal Viewer (CITV), 2-5, 2-6, 5-3, 5-4, 5-8, 5-11, 5-16, 8-12, 8-13, 8-22, 8-29, 8-32, 8-42, 11-5, A-24 through A-43, A-115 through A-121 Independent Viewer (CIV), 2-11, 5-3, 5-4, 5-8, 5-11, 5-15, 5-16, 8-12, 8-13, 8-22, 8-29, 11-5, B-5, B-53, B-64 intent, 13-2 through 13-15 remotely operated weapon station (CROWS), 8-42 sight control panel (CSCP), B-53 sight extension (CSE), 5-15 tactical display (CTD), 2-12, 5-15, B-5, B-53, B-54, B-64 training, 12-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

training goals, 12-17 training plans, 12-18 training requirements, 12-18 weapon station (CWS), 5-8, 8-35, 8-40, 8-42, 16-15, 16-17, A-102 through A-126 Commanding General (CG), preface commercial, off-the-shelf (COTS), 1-5 common launch unit (CLU), 4-92 operational picture (COP), 9-3 task test (CTT), 11-3 communications security (COMSEC), 13-22 company team, 9-2 through 9-13, 13-16, 13-17, 13-20 computer control panel (CCP), 8-13, A-9 through A-21, A-48 through A-60, A-83, A-84, A-90 through A-109 correction factors (CCF), A-9, A-10, A-16, A-22 through A-29, A-52 through A-58, A-66, A-74, A-82, A-88 through A-100, A-115 electronics unit (CEU), A-9, A-10, A-48 through A-97 Generated Forces (CGF), 11-11, 11-15 Computerized Advanced Gunnery Training System (C-AGTS), 11-21, 12-6, 12-23 Conduct-of-Fire Trainers (COFT), preface, 11-2, 11-22, 11-28, 12-6, 12-14 convoy protection platforms (CPP), 17-1 coordinated fire line (CFL), 9-23 core mission-essential task list (CMETL), 17-3 countermobility, 13-18 course of action (COA), F-5 crawl, walk, run, 16-3 crew, critical skills test, 1-5, 1-6 evaluation, 1-6

3 September 2009

Index

Proficiency Course (CPC), 12-4, 12-7, 12-17, 16-1, 16-2, 17-2, 17-10 qualification, 1-6 -served weapons, 1-1, 1-3, 1-6, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 9-4, 9-5, 9-10, 9-11 Station Trailer (CST), 11-33 D DA Form 581, 11-18, 11-23, 11-30, 11-31 2028, preface 2404, A-44, A-47, A-58 through A-62, A-74 2408-4, 12-19, A-13, A-15, A-16, A-17, A-25 through A-28, A-136 through A-142 2408-4 (electronic), A-136 through A-142 3151-R, 4-8 5988E, A-44, A-47, A-58 through A-62, A-74 7523-R, B-14 7556-R, A-95, A-97 date, time, group (DTG), 9-28, 9-25 day night sight (DNS), D-4 decide, detect, deliver, and assets (D3A), 9-20, 9-22 decision-making procedures, 1-4 detect, identify, decide, engage, and assess (DIDEA), 1-1, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 5-1 through 5-15, 6-1 through 6-19, 8-40, 16-12 assess, 1-5, 10-1 through 10-6 engagement assessment, 10-2 engagement termination, 10-2 through 10-4 reports, 10-4, 10-5 decide, 1-4 deliberate range determination, 7-11 through 7-18 immediate range determination, 7-5 through 7-11

3 September 2009

target determination, 7-1 through 7-4 detect, 1-3, 5-1 through 5-18 crew search, 5-2 detect, 5-2 through 5-15 engagement process, 5-1 ground and air search tips, 5-15, 5-16, 5-17 search techniques, 5-9 through 5-14 sectors of responsibility, 5-3, 5-4 target detection, 5-5 through 5-7 target location, 5-7, 5-8 identify, 1-4, 6-1 through 6-19 classification, 6-1, 6-2 discrimination, 6-13 through 6-19 identification, 6-2 through 6-12 engage, 1-5, 9-1 through 9-30 company/platoon/section fire commands, 9-14 through 9-18 collective, 9-1 through 9-27 direct and indirect fires (crew), 8-1 through 8-82 direct fire planning and execution, 9-13 through 9-18 engagement techniques, 8-33 through 8-43 fire commands, 8-8 through 8-32 fire control measures, 9-3 through 9-14 fire planning, 9-19, 9-22 fire support planning for offensive operations, 9-20, 9-21 fire support planning for defensive operations, 9-21 through 9-26 indirect fire, 8-65 through 8-82 indirect fire planning and execution, 9-18 through 9-27 indirect fire team, 9-18, principles of fire control, 9-2, 9-3

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

sample fire commands, 8-43 through 8-64 section, platoon, and company fire control, 9-1 through 9-13 target attack, 9-26, 9-27 assess, 1-5, 10-1 through 10-6 engagement assessment, 10-2 engagement termination, 10-2 through 10-4 reports, 10-4, 10-5 Department of Defense Ammunition Code (DODAC), 4-2, 4-8, B-31, B-32 Identification Code (DODIC), 4-2, 4-6 through 4-21, 4-29, 4-32 through 4-37, 4-41, 4-49, 4-58, 4-77 through 4-91, D-5, D-7 Digital Command guidance electronics (DCGE), 3-16 Compass System (DCS), 2-10 control transformer (DCT), A-49 electronic control unit (DECU), 2-2, 2-3, 4-70, 4-75 multipurpose range complexes (DMPRC), 19-1, 19-10 directed mission-essential task list (DMETL), 17-3, 17-12, 17-14, 17-16, 17-18, 17-20 direct fire (also see fire) engagement process, 1-1 through 1-3 SOP, 9-15 direct-view optics (DVO), 2-11, B-54, B-55, B-64 discrimination definitions, 6-13 dismounted troops and antiarmor systems, kill indicators, 10-3 kill standard, 10-3 doctrine, preface driver’s vision enhancement (DVE), 2-4, 2-5, 2-7, 2-11, 5-15

Index-5

Index

dual axis head assembly (DAHA), A-30 dual-purpose improved conventional munition (DPICM), 8-68 E elevation (EL), A-13 through A-68, B-6 through B-56, C-12 through C-18 elevation uncouple (EL UNCPL), 8-29 embedded diagnostics (ED), 2-1 emergency directions, 13-26, 13-27 Master Gunner’s range box, 13-26 vehicle flags, 13-26 engagement, area (EA), 9-4, 9-7, 9-16, 9-23, D-16 Skills Trainer (EST), 11-2, 11-12, 11-13, 17-8 techniques, 1-4, 8-33 through 8-43 engineers, 1-1 Bradley Fighting Vehicle (EBFV), E-3 qualification tables (EQT), E-1 through E-15 squad, 1-7 Enhanced Position Location Reporting System (EPLRS), B-53 equipment, 13-23, 13-24 equivalent full charge (EFC), A-136 through A-142 essential fire support task (EFST), 9-22 explosive ordnance disposal (EOD), 13-17, B-69 explosively formed penetrators (EFP), 4-83 eyesafe laser filter (ELF), 13-24, 13-25 laser range finder (ELRF), 2-3, 8-3, 8-48, A-119, A-120, B-58, B-64 F federal supply classification code (FSC), 4-2, 4-6, 4-8

Index-6

field artillery (FA), 1-1, 2-14, 8-74, 9-19, 9-21, 9-26, 13-16, 13-17 Artillery Training System (FATS), 11-10 of view (FOV), 2-11, 5-6, 5-7, 5-12, 5-13, 7-6, A-120 tactical trainer (FFT), 4-93, D-10 training exercises (FTX), 12-3, H-7 final protective fires (FPF), 9-7, 9-20 through 9-25, H-9 through H-13 protective line (FPL), 9-7, 9-21, 9-25 fire, alternating, 9-12, 9-13 area, 9-12, 9-13 close defensive (CDF), 9-21 commands, 1-4, 5-1, 8-17 through 8-65, 9-15 alert, 8-8, 8-9 description, 8-11, 8-12 direction, 8-12 execution, 8-14 through 8-16 range or elevation, 8-13, 8-14 termination, 8-16 weapon ammunition, 8-10 control, 2-1 control measures, 4-47, 9-4, 9-8 Control System, A-21, A-22, A-30, A-42 through A-53, A-82 through A-115 coordination exercise (FCX), 13-20, 19-2, 19-13, 19-14 cross-fire command, 9-19 depth fire command, 9-20 destructive, 9-27 direct, 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 10-2, 10-3, 12-7, 12-8, 12-15, 13-16 direction center (FDC), 4-66, 8-65, 8-66, 8-67, 8-71, 8-72, 8-74, 8-77, 8-81, 8-82, 9-19, 9-26, 12-15, H-1 through H-22 final protective (FPF), 9-7, 9-20 through 9-25

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

final protective line (FPL), 9-7, 9-21, 9-25 for effect (FFE), 8-66, 8-68, 8-78, 8-81, 8-82 frontal fire command, 9-18 indirect, 1-1, 1-4, 1-5, 3-16, 9-20 through 9-30, 10-3, 10-4, 12-1, 12-2, 12-8, 12-15, 18-1 destruction, 10-4 neutralization, 10-4 suppression, 10-4 linear, 9-7 long-range, 9-21 mission example, 8-73, 8-74 neutralization, 9-27 observed, 9-13 planning, 9-21 patterns, 9-8, 9-9, D-16 point, 9-12, 9-13 reconnaissance, 9-13 reduced, 1-4 sequential, 9-13, 9-14 simultaneous, 9-12, 9-13 support, 1-1, 2-1, 9-20 through 9-26, 13-16 support coordination line (FSCL), 9-25, 9-26 support coordination measures (FSCM), 9-20, 9-22, 9-25, H-11 through H-13 support elements (FSE), 9-20 support officer (FSO), 2-14, 8-68, 10-2, 10-4, 13-16, 13-18, 14-1 support team (FIST), 2-14, 9-19, 9-25, 9-26, 12-14, 13-17, 17-3 Support Team-Vehicle (FIST-V), 2-14, 11-14 suppression, 9-27 time of suppression, 9-13, 9-14 firing port weapon (FPW), 3-1 table (FT), 4-51, 8-7, 11-28, 13-10, 13-12, 13-26 task, 18-2 Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2), 2-7, 2-11, 5-8, 6-17, 6-19, 7-4, 7-17, 10-5, 11-15, 13-3, 13-27, 13-28,

3 September 2009

Index

16-12, 18-7, A-114, A-132, B-53, B-58 Forward Air Controller (FAC), 13-18 Looking Infrared (FLIR), 2-4, 2-7, 2-11, 5-11, 6-16, 7-5, 11-3, A-123, B-52, B-54, B-64, C-5, C-28 through C-31 observer (FO), 8-40, 9-19, 9-22 fragmentary orders (FRAGO), 6-19, 13-15, 13-19, 19-2, 19-16, 19-17 fratricide, 1-4 frequency hopping/master (FH/M), 13-28 friend, foe, or noncombatant, 6-13 fuel consumption chart, 2-8 full-fidelity trainer (TFT), 11-2 full function crew station (FFCS), B-53 full range training round (FRTR), 4-57, 4-62 fully mission capable (FMC), 12-21 fuselage, armament, rotors, and tail (FART), 6-9 through 6-12 G GEN three Image Intensifying (GEN III I2), C-11 Global Positioning System (GPS), 2-7, 8-28, 8-41 grenade, launchers, 3-7, 3-14, 3-15, 4-71 (also see Armored Security Vehicle [ASV] and HMMWV) M250, 3-14, 3-15 MK19, 8-54, 17-10 machine gun (GMG), 4-32 smoke, 4-66 through 4-70 launchers, M250, 4-67 M257, 4-67 types, L8A1, 4-68, 4-69 L8A3, 4-68 through 4-70 M76, 4-69, 4-70 M82, 4-70 ground vehicle, armored reactive tiles, 6-8

3 September 2009

boat shaped hull, 6-4 bore evacuator, 6-5 box shaped hull, 6-5 fording kit, 6-8 gun mantle, 6-7 hydrojet, 6-6 key recognition features (enhanced), 6-9 precautionary messages (GPM), 4-102 supported, 6-4 unsupported, 6-3 trim vane, 6-5 ground/vehicular laser locator designator (G/VLLD), 8-82, 12-14 gunner’s auxiliary sight (GAS), 7-8, 7-10, 8-13, 8-27, 8-40, 8-41, 8-48, 8-52, 13-15, A-9, A-15 through A-53, A-115 through A-125 computer display panel (GCDP), 8-13, A-22, A-25, A-29, A-33, A-35, A-39, A-44, A-63 through A-111 handstation (GHS), B-52 through B-54 line of sight (GLOS), A-24 through A-29 power control handles (GPCH), A-11, A-16, A-25, A-44, A-47, A-50, A-53, A-60 through A-93, A-100, A-108 primary sight (GPS), 5-3, 5-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-17, 8-13, 8-14, 8-35, 8-51, 13-15, A-9, A-12 through A-132 sight control panel (GSCP), B-54, B-55 surveillance radar (GSR), 13-19 gunnery, collective, 1-2, 1-7, 12-1 through 12-23, 13-16, 17-19, 18-1 through 18-18 evaluation, 18-1 through 18-8 platoon, 18-13 through 18-18 section, 18-9 through 18-13 crew, 12-7, 12-8 crew practice crew (CPC), 16-14, 16-15

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

cross-training strategy, 12-9 digital, 16-10 exercises, 13-1 extended range machine gun, 17-15, 17-16 individual, 12-1 through 12-23 integrated training strategy, 12-9 through 12-16 mortar, 1-7 phase, 17-2 plans, 12-18 through 12-23 rifle squad (see rifle squad) scenarios, 16-10, 16-11 skills tests (GST), 1-2, 1-5, 11-3, 12-1, 12-3, 12-9, 12-16, 12-17 through 12-20, 13-21, 13-26, 14-1 through 14-9,16-2, 16-12, 17-3, 17-9, 17-13, 17-17 stabilized (also see platform), 16-1 through 16-38 tables (GT), preface, 1-1, 1-2, 1-5, 1-6, 11-3 through 11-36, 12-4, 12-8, 12-9, 12-17, 12-20, 12-23, 13-1, 13-28, 14-1 through 14-16, 16-1 through 16-38, 17-1 through 17-25, 18-1, 18-6, 18-7, 18-8, 19-9, 19-17, B-55 basic crew practice, 16-16, 17-17, 17-18 basic machine gun, 16-16 through 16-21, 17-13, 17-14 crew practice course, 16-14, 16-15 crew qualification course, 17-18 through 17-20 critical crew skills, 17-9 through 17-12 extended range machine gun, 17-15, 17-16 scoresheets, 18-3, 18-4 training, 1-1 through 1-6, 12-1 through 12-23 training program, 12-1 through 12-23 unstabilized (also see platform), 17-1 through 17-20 gun-target line, 13-12

Index-7

Index

H handheld terminal unit (HTU), 12-14 Havok, 7-13, A-128 hazard classification, 4-11, 4-21, 4-24, 4-29, 4-32, 4-41, 4-49, 4-58, 4-77, 4-98, 4-99 heavy weapon thermal sight (HWTS), C-5, C-8, C-10 Heavy expanded mobility tactical truck (HEMTT), 11-2, 11-15 height of burst (HOB), 8-77 high -explosive (HE), 3-8, 4-20, 4-57, 4-61, 4-94, 7-6, 7-7, 8-4, 8-5, 8-11, 8-48, 9-13, 9-26, 9-27, 10-3, 11-25, 18-8 through 18-18, 19-9, A-10, A-16 through A-20, A-23, A-29, A-38, A-52, A-55, A-59, A-60, A-82, A-83, A-88, A-91, A-93, A-96, A-115, A-122 through A-135, B-1, B-66, B-67, D-3 through D-9 -explosive antitank (HEAT), 4-44, 4-50, 4-52, 7-6, 8-4, 8-5, 8-11, 8-41, 8-48, 11-18, 11-19, A-10, A-17, A-20, A-23, A-29, A-38, A-59, A-60, A-82, A-88, A-91, A-96, A-122 through A-134, D-13, F-6, F-7 -explosive antitank multipurpose-tracer (HEAT-MP-T), 4-44, 4-51, 4-52, 8-7, 8-11 -explosive antitank-target practice-tracer (HEAT-TPT), 4-49, 19-9, A-10, A-23 antitank-tracer (HEAT-T), A-115 -explosive dual-purpose (HEDP), 4-32, 4-33, 4-98, 9-11, D-5 -explosive incendiary with tracer (HEI-T), 4-21 through 4-30, 7-6, 8-7, 9-14, B-66 -explosive obstacle reducing with tracer (HE-OR-T), 4-38, 4-53, 8-7, 8-11,

Index-8

A-10, A-20, A-23, A-38, A-134, A-135 -payoff target lists (HPTL), 9-22 -priority targets (HPT), 9-9, 9-22 High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV), preface, (see also ASV) 1-2, 1-7, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18, 3-3, 3-4, 3-6, 3-7, 3-15, 5-3, 5-12, 7-5, 8-1, 8-12, 8-19, 11-2, 11-3, 11-11, 11-15, 11-29, 11-31, 11-33, 11-35, 17-1, 17-3, 17-5, 18-7 through 18-16, C-18, C-20 armed, 2-16, 2-17 enhanced up-armored, 2-17, 2-18 M1025A2, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18 M1026A1, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18 M1114, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18 M1151, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18 up-armored, 2-17 high velocity canister cartridge (HVCC), 4-32, 16-7 Hind-D, A-128 through A-130 historical records, A-136 through A-142 hull-turret position sensor (HPTS), A-116 I illumination, 19-9 Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS), see Bradley commander’s weapon station (ICWS), 5-4 improvised conventional munitions (ICM), 8-68, 8-74 explosive devices (IED), 5-5, 8-10, E-4, E-8 through E-14 individual and crew live-fire prerequisite testing, 14-1 through 14-16 gunnery skills test (GST), 14-1 through 14-10 conduct of the GST, 14-5 evaluation procedures, 14-2, 14-3

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

planning considerations, 14-3 through 14-5 requirements, 14-1, 14-2 safety precautions, 14-2 test stations, 14-6 through 14-9 gunnery table I, crew critical skills test, 14-10 through 14-16 conduct of gunnery table I, 14-13 evaluations procedures, 14-10 through 14-12 requirements, 14-10 safety precautions, 14-10 test stations, 14-13 through 14-16 inbore device, preface, 11-19, 11-20, 12-8, 12-22, 13-3, 14-2, 18-10, 18-14 indirect fire (also see fire) inertial navigation unit (INU), 2-12 improvised explosive device (IED), 11-31 Infantry, preface, 1-1, 2-1 Fighting Vehicle (IFV), 2-9, 3-9 infrared (IR), 2-7, 4-78, 5-9, 6-19, 9-3 through 9-5, D-9 instructors /operators (IO), 12-7, 12-14, 12-18 /operators station (IOS), 11-22, 11-28, 11-33, 11-34, D-9 station (IS), 4-49 utilization handbook (IUH), 16-13 Integrated communications, command, and control (IC3), 2-7, 2-11, 2-12 Sight Unit (ISU), 2-10, 3-17, 5-15, 7-6 through 7-10, 8-13, 8-14, 8-41, B-4, B-34 through B-64 J Javelin, 4-1, 4-92 through 4-97, 4-100, 8-11, 9-11, 12-20, 19-4, 19-18, 19-19, D-3, D-9 through D-20 Joint

3 September 2009

Index

Air Attack Team (JAAT), 19-5 Combat Identification Marking Systems (JCIMS), 6-13 through 6-19 K kill indicators, 10-2, 10-3 standards, 10-2 kinetic energy (KE), 4-19, 4-20, 4-22, 4-37, 4-40, 4-53, 7-6, 9-3, 16-26 through 16-36, A-17, A-29, A-82, A-83, A-123 through A-135 L L8A1, 4-68, 4-69 L8A3, 4-68, 4-69 laser boresight, C-23 laser range finder (LRF), 1-4, 7-5 through 7-18, 8-3, 8-12, 8-27, 8-29, 8-31, 8-40, 8-41, 8-48, 8-82, 13-10, 16-1, A-11, A-28, A-50, A-63, A-118 through A-123, B-51, B-54, B-58, B-59 laser target interface device (LTID), 11-2, 11-7, 11-8, 11-20 launch tube assembly (LTA), 4-92 light anti-tank weapons (LWA), D-8 light-armor vehicles, 3-6 Light Medium Tactical Vehicle (LMTV), 1-6, 17-1, 17-5, 17-11 line of contact (LC), 9-20 departure (LD), 9-20, 13-12 sight (LOS), 3-16, 13-12, 17-5, B-5, B-53 live-fire accuracy screening test (LFAST), 1-2, 13-23, 13-27, 16-12, A-1, A-10, A-23, A-46, A-88 through A-101 exercise (LFX), 1-6, 1-7, 12-15, 12-20, 13-25, 14-1, 14-10, 19-1, 19-5, 19-6, 19-10, 19-12, H-11 through H-13 load, assemble, and packaging (LAP), 4-4

3 September 2009

local area network (LAN), 11-14 Long-Range Advanced Scout Surveillance System (LRAS3), 5-11, 5-12, 7-5, 7-6, C-1, C-28 through C-32 lot number 4-1, 4-2, 4-4, 4-10, 4-19, 4-38, 4-102, 4-103 lower tactical internet (LTI), 13-27 M M2 (.50 cal), 7-3, 8-11, 11-30, 14-7 through 14-9, H-1 through H-14 M2 HB, 4-1, 4-16, 8-35, 14-8, 14-9, 19-10, A-114, C-16, C-17, C-18, C-20, E-1 M4, 11-33, 12-16, D-2, D-3 M9, 12-16, 12-23 M12, C-2 M16, D-6 M16A2/M4, 19-10, D-2, D-3 D-20 M16A4, D-20 M18A1 claymore mine, E-8 M24D, 4-1 through 4-14 M26A1, 12-23, A-6 through A-18, A-87 M27A1, A-6 through A-22, A-36, A-65, A-87 M27A3, A-2, A-5 through A-26, A-36, A-37 M48, 14-7 through 14-9 M60, 19-10 M61, D-7 M62, D-7 M76, 4-69, 4-70 M80, D-7 M82, 4-70, D-7 M88A1 recovery vehicle, 3-7 M95, H-8 M96, H-8 M98A1, D-9, D-11 M113 family of vehicles, 3-7, 13-19 M121 120-mm mortar, 3-12, 3-13 M122A1, D-7 M136, D-8 M136 AT4, D-9 M142, E-8 M145 machine gun optic, C-2 through C-4

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

M150 grenade launcher (also see grenade launcher), 3-14, 3-15 M172, 11-19, 11-23, 11-30, 11-31, D-7 M199, D-3, D-7 M200, D-3, D-7 M203, 12-20, 19-10, D-3 through D-5 M203A1, D-3 M240 (7.62mm), 4-1, 4-14, 7-3, 8-11, 8-40, 8-41, 8-42, 14-6 through 14-9, A-103 through A-113, C-7 M240B, 12-20, 14-7 through 14-9, 19-10, C-9, C-11, C-13 through C-15, C-19, C-21, D-7, D-8, D-18, D-20, H-1 through H-22 M240C, 8-11, 14-7 through 14-9, B-5, B-57 M242 25mm, 4-19, 4-31, 11-3, 11-23, 14-6 through 14-11 M249 (5.56 mm), 4-1, 4-10 through 4-12, 4-33, 7-3, 8-11, 12-2,14-8, C-2, C-7 through C-13, C-19 through C-21, D-2 through D-20, H-1 through H-22 M250/M257 smoke grenades malfunction, 4-67, 4-68, A-114, B-57 M256 120-mm smoothbore cannon, 4-37, 4-45, 4-49, 4-51 through 4-54, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 11-3, 11-16 M256A1, 14-11, A-137 M257, 4-67 M303, H-12, H-14 M313, H-12, H-14 M385 target practice, 4-32 through 4-35 M430, 4-32, 4-33 M430A1, 4-32 through 4-37 M548, 4-33 M734, A-64, A-65 M745, A-65 M758, 4-24 through 4-28 M776, 4-62, 4-63 M791, 4-19, 4-29, 8-6 M792, 4-19, 4-24 through 4-28, 11-23 M792 HEI-T, 8-7 M793, 4-19, 4-29, 4-30, 11-23 M794, 11-23

Index-9

Index

M829A1, 4-39 through 4-42, 4-49, 8-6 M829A2 APFSDS-T, 4-39 through 4-44, 8-6, 11-17 M829A3, 4-38 through 4-42, 4-43, 8-6 M830 HEAT, 4-37, 11-17 M830 HEAT-MP-T, 4-41, 4-45, 8-7 M830A1 HEAT-MP-T, 4-41, 4-46, 8-7 M830A1 MPAT, 4-41, 4-45, 4-53, 11-17 M831A1, 4-50 M831A1-TPT, 4-49 M855, D-3, D-7 M856, D-7 M862, D-3 M865 APCSDS-T, 4-49, 11-17 M908, 4-45, 13-17 M908 HE-OR-T, 4-38, 4-41, 4-45, 8-7 M910, 4-19, 4-29, 4-30 M918 target practice, 4-32 through 4-35 M919, 4-19 M922, 4-32, 11-30 M922A1, 4-32, 11-30, 11-31 M929, 4-63, 4-64 M929 WP, 4-58, 4-59, 4-60 M930, 4-60 M931, 4-61 M931 FRTR, 4-58 M933, 4-57, 4-58 M933A1, 4-58 M934, 4-57, 4-58 M934A1 HE, 4-58 M934 HE, 4-58, 4-59 M935, 4-63, 4-64 M962, 11-19 M983, 4-60, 4-61 M983 illum, 4-58 M1001 HVCC, 4-32 through 4-34 M1002 TPMP-T, 4-49 M1028 canister, 4-41 through 4-49, 11-17 MK281 MODO target practice, 4-32, 4-36 machine gun, 25mm, 3-9, B-5 through B-56 5.56mm, D-5 7.62mm, 14-6, 18-6, B-5, B-6

Index-10

automatic, 3-1, 3-8 basic, 7-13, 7-14 characteristics, 3-3 caliber .50, 1-5, 1-6, 2-16, 2-18, 3-5, 3-6, 8-10, 11-33, 18-6, 18-7 through 18-16, A-102 through A-110, C-6 coaxial, 8-41, A-108 through A-113 grenade, C-10, C-18 grenade launcher, C-11 main gun, 8-1 M2 HB, 3-5, 3-6 through 3-11, 11-3, 11-16, 11-18, 11-29, 11-30, 19-10, A-113 M9, 12-16, 14-6 M16, 3-2, 12-16, 12-20 M203, 12-20 M231, 3-2 M240, 3-4, 3-5, 8-10, 8-11, 8-41, 8-42, 11-16, 11-18, 11-23, 11-25, 11-29, 11-31, 12-16, 12-20, A-113 M240B, 14-6, C-13 M240C, 8-11, B-57 M242 25-mm automatic gun, 3-8, 3-9, B-4 M249 squad automatic weapon (SAW), 3-2, 3-3, 8-10, 8-11, 12-16, 12-20, 19-10, C-9, C-12, C-13, C-21 M2131 5.56mm, 3-1 MK19 MOD3 40-mm (also see machine gun), 3-7, 3-8, 8-5, 8-10, 8-11, 8-39, 11-3, 11-29, 11-31, 12-16, 13-19, 14-6 through 14-9, 17-10, 18-6 through 18-16, 19-4, 19-10, 19-18, C-5, C-8 through C-11 sight offset data, C-25 through C-27 soft targets, 8-33 through 8-43 techniques, 8-41 main battle area (MBA), 9-22 maintenance advisory messages (MAM), 4-102 maneuver box on an offensive engagement, 13-7 through 13-9 manufacturer’s identification code (MIC), 4-4 maps/digital maps, 7-17, 7-18

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

mark center of sector (MCS), H-16 through H-22 marking system, 1-4, 6-13 through 6-19 Master Gunner, preface, 1-3, 1-5, 1-6, 4-2, 4-53, 4-97, 4-102, 11-20, 12-3, 12-9, 12-16 through 12-21, 13-2, 13-12 through 13-25, 16-2, 16-7, 16-11, 16-26, 16-29, 17-6, 18-5, 18-6, B-1, B-12, B-31, B-54 through B-56, C-12, C-19, C-20 maximum effective range (MER), 4-12, 4-14, 4-16 engagement line (MEL), 9-4, 9-7 ordinate (MAX ORD), 8-8 medical evacuation (MEDEVAC), 12-2, 13-21, 16-8, 16-12, 17-3, F-10, F-12 mean (average) point of impact (MPI), A-93 through A-97 mechanized infantry, 1-1 medium weapon thermal sight (MWTS), C-5 through C-7 message to observer (MTO), 8-67 meteorological (MET), H-11, H-13 Mi-24 Hind, 7-14, 7-15 Mi-24 Hind-D, 7-13, D-128 through D-130 Mi-28 Havok, 7-13 military occupational specialty (MOS), 14-1, 14-10 police (MP), 1-6, 2-15, 8-12, 17-1, 17-15 standard (MIL-STD), 4-2, 4-5, 4-8, 4-9 mine -clearing line charges (MICLIC), 13-17, E-8, E-13 through E-15 Resistant Ambush Protected (MRAP), 5-12, 16-7 minimum proficiency levels (MPL), 1-6, 16-4 through 16-38 17-3, 17-6, 18-2 missile control subsystem (MCS), 3-16

3 September 2009

Index

data loader (MDL), 13-27 Hellfire, 13-18 simulation round (MSR), 4-92, 4-93, 11-24, D-9, D-10 TOW characteristics, 4-77 missiles, 4-1, 4-71 through 4-97, 4-100 mission enemy, terrain and weather troops ad support available, time available, and civil considerations (METT-TC), 5-13, 6-16, 8-5, D-15, E-12, F-2, F-11 equipment package (MEP), 2-14 -essential task list (METL), 11-27, 12-3, 12-18, 12-20, 13-2, 13-15, 17-6, 18-5, 19-3, D-19, E-3, H-1, H-6 MK19, 1-3, 2-15, 2-16, 2-18, 3-7, 3-8, 4-1, 4-19 through 4-21, 4-31, 4-32, 4-37, 4-36, 4-98, 4-100, 7-3, 11-3, 11-29, 11-31, 12-16, 13-19, 17-10, 18-6 through 18-16, 19-4, 19-10, 19-18, C-5, C-8 through C-11 (also see machine gun) MK19 grenade machine gun, C-18, C-19 Mobile Advanced Gunnery Training System (MAGTS), 11-21 Conduct-of-Fire Trainer (MCOFT), 11-9 Configuration of Computerized Advanced Gunnery Training System (MC-AGTS), 11-21 mobility, 13-17 modified table of organization and equipment (MTOE), 12-2 work order (MWO), A-71 modular pack mine system (MOPMS), E-8 through E-15 month codes, 4-5 Mortar Fire Control System (MFCS), H-4 through H-22 mortars,

3 September 2009

M106A3 Self-Propelled 120-mm Carrier, 2-18, 2-19 M121 120-mm, 3-12, 3-13 tables (MT), H-1 through H-22 Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System (MILES), 11-2, 11-7 through 11-26, 12-7, 12-20, 12-21, 12-22, 13-3, 13-24, 17-11, 18-9 through 18-14, D-19 through D-21 multipurpose antitank (MPAT), 4-38, 4-45, 4-49, 4-53, 4-93, 6-13, 7-6, 8-5, 8-11, 8-23, 11-17, A-10, A-20, A-23, A-38, A-52, A-59, A-60, A-115, A-122 through A-135, F-6 muzzle boresight device (MBD), A-2 through A-88, A-115 boresight device collimination, A-5 through A-9 reference sensor (MRS), 3-11, 8-43, 11-22, 14-6 through 14-9, A-9, A-15 through A-21, A-28, A-29, A-38 through A-40, A-44, A-50, A-52, A-57 through A-92, A-99, A-115, A-116 N narrow field of view (NFOV), 7-5, 13-5, A-23, A-27, A-120, B-52, B-54, B-55, C-7, C-8, C-28 through C-30 national item identification number (NIIN), 4-6 stock number (NSN), 4-2, 4-6, 4-78, 4-79, 4-84, 4-98, 4-99, 4-102, 4-103 Training Center (NTC), 11-11, 19-2 naval gunfire (NGF), 8-72, 9-26 net control station (NCS), 13-27 night vision devices, 5-9, 6-19, D-2, D-14 goggles, 6-16 sights, C-2, D-9

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

nitrogen gas temperature, A-46, A-62 nominal ocular hazard distance (NOHD), 13-10 noncommissioned officer (NCO), 1-3 nongovernmental organizations (NGO), F-2 North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO), 1-3, 3-3, 3-9, 4-1, 4-3, 4-9, 4-12 through 4-16, 4-51, D-10 notification of ammunition reclassification (NAR), 4-102 O observer /controller (O/C), 19-11, 19-13, D-20, H-3 through H-8 -target (OT), 8-75 through 8-78 off-center vision method, 5-12 offensive engagement example, 13-7 through 13-9 officer in charge (OIC), 1-3 operating tempo (OPTEMPO), H-5, H-6 Operation Desert Storm (ODS), 2-9 through 2-14 Engineer (ODS-E), 2-9, 2-13 orders, 6-19, 12-22, 13-15, 13-23, 18-5 through 18-15, 19-3, 19-13 through 19-20 operational control (OPCON), 6-19 environment (OE), preface, 1-1, 5-2, 11-31, 13-6, 13-15, 13-23, 18-5 order (OPORD), 6-19, 12-22, 18-5, 18-9 through 18-15, 19-3, 19-13 through 19-17, 19-20, F-4 plan (OPLAN), F-2 opposing forces (OPFOR), 13-24 orientation, 1-5 P paratrooper, 8-39

Index-11

Index

personnel carrier (PC), 3-1, 5-1, 5-8, 5-17, 6-1, 8-11, 8-15, 9-10, 9-15, 17-1 petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL), 13-25, 19-3, A-18, A36 phase line (PL), 9-15, 9-21, 13-28 phoenix beacons, 6-16, 6-17 planning gunnery exercises, 13-1 platform characteristics, 1-3 stabilized (also see gunnery), 1-6, 18-1 through 18-38 unstabilized (also see gunnery), 1-6, 17-1 through 17-20 weapon systems, 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 3-1 platoon after-action review (PAAR), 11-21 point initiating base detonating (PIBD), 4-33 position navigation (POSNAV), 2-4, 2-7, 2-12, A-116 post-fire check, A-1, A-112, C-27, C-28, B-58 Precision Gunnery System (PGS), 11-2, 11-7 through 11-9, 11-20, 11-25, 11-26, 12-7, 12-20 through 12-22 lightweight GPS receiver (PLGR), 2-10, 7-17, A-132 precombat checks (PCC), F-2 inspections (PCI), F-2 pre-fire checks, 1-2, A-1, B-50 through B-53, C-11 Bradley’s A3 Commander’s Pre-Fire Checklist, B-53 Bradley A3 Gunner’s prefire checklist, B-52 Checklist for ODS and Below, B-51 Preliminary Crew Proficiency Course (PCPC), 1-5, 17-2 preliminary marksmanship instruction (PMI), 12-7, 12-23, H-5, H-7 preventative maintenance checks, and services

Index-12

(PMCS), 2-12, 12-15, 12-17, 16-12, 17-3, A-1, A-10, A-23, A-42, A-44, A-90 through A-92, B-50 through B-52, C-27, D-2, E-8 primary direction of fire (PDF), D-15 probability of hit (PH), 11-27 of kill (PK), 11-27 Pulse jet-air system (PJS), 2-4 Q quadrant, 9-4 through 9-8, 9-10, 9-12, 9-14, 9-15 friendly-based, 9-4 through 9-7 terrain-based, 9-5, 9-6 quality assurance specialist (QASAS), 4-31, 4-38, 4-53, 4-54, 4-97 deficiency report (QDR), B-31, B-32 R radio frequency (RF), 4-31, 4-53 radio/telephone operator, H-9 through H-22 range communications, 13-24 control, 13-22 determination, 7-5 equipment, 13-22, 13-23 operations, 1-5, 13-1 through 13-28 conducting range operations, 13-24 through 13-27 digital range set up, 13-27, 13-28 planning range operations, 13-1 through 13-24 overlay, 13-27 safety officer (RSO), 1-3, 12-7, 13-20 through 13-26, 17-13 through 17-19 spotting, 8-76 Reimer Digital Library (RDL), 14-1, 14-2, 14-10, E-10 readiness condition (REDCON), A-91 through A-93

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

Recognition of Combat Vehicles (ROC-V), 11-2 through 11-28, 16-12, 17-3 Relocatable Advanced Gunnery Training System (RAGTS), 11-21 reconnaissance, preface, 1-1, 2-1 refraction, day, A-118 night, A-118 remote binocular display (RBD), 2-11, B-53 reports battle damage assessment (BDA), 10-4 situation report (SITREP), 10-4, 13-15, F-4 spot report (SPOTREP), 10-5 reserve component (RC), 12-2, 12-17 through 12-22, 16-2, 17-3, 18-8 restrictive fire area (RFA), 9-26 line (RFL), 9-4, 9-7, 9-26 reticles, 8-49, 8-50, A-6 through A-127 revised hull and turret network boxes (RHNB&TNB), 2-2 rifle squad gunnery (also see gunnery) considerations, D-1 through D-13 control and distribution, D-13 through D-18 exercise development, D-19 through D-22 risk management, F-1 through F-5 assess hazard to determine risks, F-3 develop controls and make risk decisions, F-3, F-4 identify hazards, F-2, implement controls, F-4 supervise and evaluate, F-4, F-5 rocket-propelled grenade (RPG), 4-10, 5-7, 7-3, 8-33, 18-12 through 18-18 rules of engagement (ROE), 8-10, 9-3, 9-4, 9-10, D-14, F-2

3 September 2009

Index

S saboted light armor penetrator (SLAP), 4-11, 4-18 light armor penetrator-tracer (SLAP-T), 4-11, 4-18, 11-19, 18-15 safe separation distance (SED), 4-53 safety, 1-7 Abrams, F-6 through F-12 Bradley, F-12, F-13 assess hazard to determine risks, F-3 develop controls and make risk decisions, F-3, F-4 identify hazards, F-2 implement controls, F-4 implementation responsibilities, F-5 through F-13 -of-use messages (SOUM), 1-3, H-5 supervise and evaluate, F-4, F-5 -of-use messages (SOUM), 4-102 scaled ranges, 13-14, 13-15 scatterable mines (SCATMINE), 9-21, 9-22 scout, 1-5, 1-6 screening test, A-89 through A-101 search techniques, air search, 5-12, 5-13 detailed, 5-9, 5-11, 5-12 estimated of upper search limits, 5-14 ground, 5-9 ground and air search tips, 5-15 off-center vision method, 5-12 rapid, 5-9 sector divided, 5-16 overlapping, 5-15, 5-16 search techniques, 5-15 slow (50 meters), 5-10, 5-11 sector of fire, 9-4 sectors of responsibility, 5-3 through 5-5 semi-automated forces (SAF), 11-14

3 September 2009

senior instructor/operator (SIO), 12-18 sheaf, 8-68 through 8-71 converged, 8-69 open, 8-70 parallel, 8-71 special, 8-70 standard, 8-69 short-range training ammunition (SRTA), D-3 sight correction factor (SCF), A-19, A-20, A-38, A-115 offset, C-25 through C-28 simulated command launch unit (SCLU), 4-92 round (SR), 4-93, D-10 Simulation Network (SIMNET), 11-2, 11-14, 12-3, 12-23 simulations, preface Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS), B-53 situation report (SITREP), (see reports) situational awareness, 2-1, 2-4, 2-7, 2-9, 2-11, 2-12, 5-2, 5-12, 5-13, 6-2, 6-13, 6-17, 6-19, 7-2, 8-22, 9-1, 10-1, 12-2, 18-7, 19-16, D-14, F-1 training exercises (STX), 11-14, 12-4, 12-14, 12-15, 12-20, 12-21, D-21, H-1, H-6, H-7, H-19 understanding, 9-15 smoke grenades (see grenades) smoothbore cannon, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12 spot report (SPOTREP), see reports squad automatic weapon (SAW), 1-3, 9-11, C-9 through C-13, C-19, C-21, D-5 through D-7 leader’s display (SLD), 2-12, 5-12, 5-15, 7-4 stabilized platform gunnery, 16-1 through 16-38 crew gunnery, 16-16 through 16-25

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

example gunnery tale VI, 16-26 through 16-38 gunnery instruction and live-fire prerequisites, 16-11 through 16-15 requirements, 16-1 through 16-11 standard form 368, B-31 through B-34 Standardized Agreement (STANAG) 2316 and 2322, 1-3, 4-2, 4-3, 4-9 standing operating procedures (SOP), 4-56, 6-17, 8-17, 8-68, 9-5, 9-13, 9-14, 10-4, 13-3, 13-19, 13-20 through 13-26, 14-1, 14-12, 16-10, 17-6, D-4, D-15 through D-18, E-12, F-5, F-12, F-13 Stinger, 8-11 Stryker, 16-7 student station (SS), 4-92 surface danger zone (SDZ) diagrams, 4-9, 13-3, 13-10 through 13-18, 19-4 through 19-11 survivability, 13-18 sustainment training tables, 1-7 unit, 1-6, 1-7, 12-1, 12-8, 12-9, 12-16, 17-1, 17-3, 18-1 system control box (SCB), B-52 Enhancement Package (SEP), (see Abrams) T T-55, 6-9 T-72, 6-9, 7-13, 7-15, 7-16, 11-4, A-128 through A-130 T-80, 7-13, A-128 T-90, 7-13, 18-12 through 18-18, A-128 table of assessment, 18-2 distribution and allowances (TDA), 12-2 organization and equipment (TO&E), 4-94, 13-24, D-11 Tabletop Full-Fidelity Trainer (TFT), 11-28, 11-29

Index-13

Index

Gunnery Trainer (TGT), preface, 11-2 Tactical Navigation System (TACNAV), 2-10 tactical operation center (TOC), 19-10 through 19-13 standing operating procedures (TACSOP), 13-28 tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP), 1-1, 6-13, 9-4, 9-7 tank ammunition stowage plan, A-133 through A-135 commander (TC), A-36, A-87, A-88, A-116 through A-126, F-6 through F-11 crew gunnery skills tests (TCGST), 1-5 Crew Proficiency Course (TCPC), 1-6 Urban Survivability Kit (TUSK), 16-4, 16-10, 16-11, 16-37 target, 1-5 Acquisition System (TAS), 8-26, B-52 through B-56 array, 9-8, 9-9 close-range, 7-2 conditions, 7-11 detection, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7 detection challenges, 5-6, 5-7 frontal, 7-2 planned, 9-23 through 9-25 pointer/illuminator/aiming light (TPIAL), C-2 practice (TP), 4-9, 4-19, 4-29 through 4-38, 4-49, 4-51, 4-52, 4-61,17-14, 17-15 M385, 4-34, 4-35 M918, 4-35 MK281 MODO, 4-36 practice cone stabilized discarding sabot tracer (TPCSDS-T), 11-18, 19-9 practice discarding sabot with tracer (TPDS-T), 4-20, 4-29, 4-30, 19-9 practice multipurpose-tracer (TPMP-T), 4-49

Index-14

practice with tracer (TP-T), 4-29, 4-30 prioritization, 7-2 reference point (TRP), 5-8, 6-17, 7-17, 8-13, 9-4, 9-5, 9-14, 9-15, 9-24, 13-28 schedule, 9-20 set forward observer (TSFO), 11-10 signature, 5-5, 5-6 stationary, 7-2 thermal sights, 5-7 tasks, conditions, standards, 1-2 technical inspection, 12-23 manual (TM), 1-2 test, measurement, and diagnostics equipment (TMDE), A-44 testing, prerequisite, 1-5 thermal identification panel (TIP), 6-13 through 6-16 markings, 6-16 Phoenix beacons, 6-16, 6-17 Phoenix NSN listing, 6-17 Thermal Imaging System (TIS), 5-11, 6-14, 8-14, 8-27, 8-41, A-9 through A-18, A-22, A-27, A-28, A-36, A-48, A-63, A-123 Weapon Sight (TWS), C-5, C-6, C-21 threat levels, 7-2 targets, 1-1, 1-3, 1-4, Thru-Sight Video (TSV), 11-2, 11-8, 12-7 time on target (TOT), 8-72 to target (TTT), 8-72 Total Ammunition Management Information System-Redesigned (TAMIS-R), 12-23 tracer-on-target (TOT), 3-1, 4-14, 4-16, 4-19, 11-9, 11-25, 12-21 traffic control point (TCP), 16-4, 16-32, 16-38 training Activity Support Center (TASC), B-13

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

aids/devices/simulations and simulators (TADSS), 1-2, 11-1 through 11-36, H-2 and evaluation outlines (T&EO), 13-15, 18-2, 18-5, D-20 assessment, 12-1 through 12-4 commander’s guidance, 12-17, 12-18 devices 1-5, 11-1 through 11-36 Devices Interface Panel (TDIP), 11-26 gunnery, 12-18 though 12-20 long-range, 12-20 near-term, 12-22 plans, 12-18 through 12-23 short-range, 12-21 Support Center (TSC), 11-7, 11-18 strategy, 12-4 through 12-16 vehicle identification, 11-4 traverse and elevation (T&E), 8-4, 8-5, B-54, B-55, D-6 tube-launched, optically tracked, wire-guided missile (TOW), 3-16, 3-17, 4-71 through 4-97, 8-11, 8-30, 9-9, 9-11, 9-14, 10-3, 11-3, 11-5, 11-23 through 11-26, 12-5, 12-18, 14-11, 19-4, 19-9, 19-18, 19-22, A-96, B-1, B-34 through B-52, B-63 through B-69 characteristics, 4-77 missile types, TOW 2A, 4-71 through 4-82 TOW 2B, 4-71 through 4-89 TOW bunker buster (TOW BB) 4-77, 4-89 4-89 through 4-91 turret Drive System (TDS), 2-12 mission processor unit (TMPU), A-22, A-23, A-29, A-97 U

3 September 2009

Index

unarmored vehicles, 10-3 kill indicators, 10-3 kill standard, 10-3 Unattended Ground Sensors (UGS), 5-2 unexploded ordnances (UXO), 5-5 United States Air Force (USAF), 13-18 Army Infantry Center (USAIC), preface Army Reserve (USAR), preface Unmanned Aircraft Systems (UAS), 5-2, 13-19 United Nations (UN), 6-13 unstabilized platform gunnery, 17-1 through 17-20 basic crew practice, 17-17 crew gunnery, 17-13 through 17-18 crew qualification course, 17-18 through 17-25 gunnery training program, 17-2 upgraded tank commander’s panel (UTCP), 2-3 urban cluster, 13-6

V variable time (VT), 13-17 vehicle borne improvised explosive device (VBIED), 8-10

3 September 2009

cargo capacity, 4-101 commander (VC), 2-4, 2-5, 2-7, 3-17, 5-2 through 5-10, 5-15 through 5-17, 7-1, 7-4, 7-6, 7-10, 7-11, 7-17, 8-2, 8-3, 8-8 through 8-42, 10-1 through 10-5, 11-4 through 11-27, 12-5, 12-8, 12-9, 12-18, 13-4, 13-5, 13-26, 13-28, 14-13, 15-3, 15-6, 15-12 through 15-21, 16-1 through 16-38, 17-3 through 17-12, 18-6, A-5, E-1 Crew Evaluator Exportable Package (VCEEP), 1-6, 12-16 Crew Evaluators (VCE), 11-26, 12-18, 12-19, 13-22, 13-23, 13-26, 13-28, 16-10, 17-4, 18-5 motion sensor (VMS), 2-12 Virtual Combat Convoy Trainer (VCCT), 11-2, 11-28, 11-31, 12-7, 12-16 Convoy Operations Trainer (VCOT), 11-2, 11-34, 11-35 Lockheed, 11-31, 11-32 Raydon, 11-31 through 11-33 visual modification sets (VISMOD), 13-3, 13-24 Volcano, E-8, E-12 through E-15 volts direct current (VDC), B-1, B-2

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2

VS-17 panel, 6-18 W, X, Y warfighting skills, 12-2 weapon, control box (WCB), 8-29 control status (WCS), 1-5, 9-3, 9-4, 9-14, 9-15, D-14, D-15 optics and lasers, D-2 platform systems, 2-1 ready posture, 9-4 safety posture levels, 9-12 systems, 1-1, 2-1, A-1 systems malfunctions, C-19, C-20 wheels, hull, armament, truck (WHAT), 6-2 white/hot (W/H), A-28 white phosphorous (WP), 4-57, 4-66, 8-68, 9-26, 19-9 wide field view (WFOV), 5-4, 7-5, 13-6, B-52, C-7, C-8, C-28, C-29 WORM formula, A-131, A-132 Z zeroing, B-53 through B-58, C-11 through C-19 procedures for 25-mm, ODS and below, B-53 procedures for A3 only, B-54 procedures for coax, ODS, and below, B-54

Index-15

This page intentionally left blank.

FM 3-20.21 MCWP 3-12.2 3 September 2009

By order of the Secretary of the Army:

GEORGE W. CASEY, JR. General, United States Army Chief of Staff

Official:

JOYCE E. MORROW Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 0922504

By Direction of the Commandant of the Marine Corps:

GEORGE J. FLYNN Lieutenant General, U.S. Marine Corps Deputy Commandant Combat Development and Integration

DISTRIBUTION: Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number (IDN) 110469, requirements for FM 3-20.21.

PIN: 085783-000